GIFT OF 
 JANE Kc^ATHER 
 
» 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2007 with funding from 
 
 IVIicrosoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/beginnersgreekboOOfrisrich 
 
A MAP TO THE AI 
 
S15 OF XENOPHON. 
 
 38 
 
 +0 
 
 4-2 
 
 4.4 
 
 + 6 
 
 40 
 
 38 
 
 36 
 
 34 
 
 36 G/tEEN WICH. 3^ 
 
 4.0 
 
 + + 
 
THE 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 BY 
 
 IVORY FRANKLIN FRISBEE, Ph.D. 
 
 (Univeesity of the City of New York), 
 Principal of the Latin School, Bates College. 
 
 In all instruction, clearness, association, s if stem, 
 and method must rule. — Hebbakt. 
 
 EDW. E. BABB AND CO., 
 Boston, U. S. A. 
 
 1898. 
 
t'opynght, 1898, 
 By Ivory Franklin Frisbee. 
 
 All rights reserved. 
 
 7/3 
 
 John Wilson and Son, Cambridge, U.S.A. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE Beginner's Greek Book is an attempt to apply 
 the principles of pedagogy to the preparation for 
 reading Xenophon's Anabasis. It is complete in itself, 
 and is intended to furnish the first year's work. The book 
 is fully illustrated, printed in large type, and in every way 
 made legible and attractive. The leading principles of 
 the language, the inflectional forms, fundamental rules of 
 syntax, exercises and vocabularies, are given in a manner 
 at once clear and most convenient for the learner's use. 
 The full scientific treatment of these forms and rules, is 
 accompanied by brief critical observations especially suited 
 to the needs of the secondary pupil. Although by this 
 manner of treatment and style of typography, the number 
 of pages is necessarily increased, the pupil's facility in the 
 study of Greek, is thereby greatly augmented. 
 
 The subject matter of the book, taken mainly from the 
 first chapters of the Anabasis, contains only that which is 
 of prime importance in the subsequent acquisition of Greek. 
 While avoiding on the one hand, the meagreness of the 
 epitomes, and on the other, the unassimilated material of 
 many text books for the secondary school, its aim is com- 
 pleteness. It gives a full treatment of transliteration, a 
 brief scientific exposition of the fundamental uses of the 
 prepositions, a practical treatment of word formation, of 
 Grimm's Law, and of word grouping. While making 
 provision" in each lesson for constant reviews, it assures 
 
 3G0202 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 The future of the vowel, mute, and liquid verbs is intro- 
 duced in order as one schema. The first and second aorists 
 are given together, and the first and second perfects. The 
 inflection of etyu-fc has been placed with the -a) verbs, and the 
 regular -/z-t verbs have been brought forward and developed 
 with the subjunctive and optative moods. The verbs are 
 fully classified and repeatedly reviewed. 
 
 Special care has been directed toward the development 
 of the pupil's understanding together with his memory. 
 All of the material is presented according to its logical 
 sequence, and, by the critical observations, the pupil is 
 led to classify and assimilate it by its necessary relations. 
 Thus in all of his work, he is led to observe, to think, and 
 to form his own conclusions. Further, not only do the dif- 
 erent subjects follow a logical sequence, but each subject 
 is developed in the same manner. Accordingly many of 
 the leading principles of the language, as the euphony 
 of vowels and of consonants, and the syntactical rules, 
 have been reduced to their simplest analysis and expressed 
 in the most concise language consistent with clearness. 
 Attention is called to the natural treatment of the future and 
 aorist of liquid verbs, of the second aorists and perfects, 
 of the infinitive and participle, and how the exposition of 
 one subject by proper'review references, prepares the mind 
 of the student for the rapid assimilation of kindred matter, 
 as it is shown in the correlation of the pronominal forms 
 of the vowel declensions. 
 
 The teacher will be interested to note the simplified 
 treatment of the -jjll verbs and of the great terrors to the 
 average pupil, the subjunctive and optative moods, condi- 
 tional, final, and temporal clauses, and indirect discourse. 
 Not only are the hypothetical notions of the subjunctive 
 
PREFACE. ix 
 
 and optative deferred until the direct expressions of the 
 language have been mastered, but the simple uses of these 
 moods are made to prepare for the understanding of ithe 
 more complex, and these in turn, through the conditions 
 and other dependent clauses, are made a preparation for 
 the most complex, indirect discourse. 
 
 Again, as with the paradigms so with the principles of 
 syntax, only the best types have been selected. Whenever 
 they offer any difficulty, they have been presented in a series 
 of special examples. While they have been taken intact 
 from the Anabasis, they are expressed in familiar language 
 and should be thoroughly committed to memoiy. The 
 more obvious constructions have been presented with the 
 general exercises, and afford an additional incentive to 
 the scholar for careful and thorough study. 
 
 The exercises of the book, which have been selected 
 especially for their freshness and their ease in assimila- 
 tion, are taken, as a whole, intact from the Anabasis, and 
 are written therefore in the form that will commonly 
 appear in the pupil's later reading. While they include 
 regularly sentences for review, they are graded for both 
 oral and written work, and it is recommended that at the 
 beginning, at least, they be taken in this manner. The 
 English exercises have been subordinated to the Greek. 
 These consist, as a rule, of one half of the latter, and are 
 chiefly intended to apply the rules of construction. 
 
 As a supplement to these exercises, selections from the 
 Anabasis for sight reading and retroversion have been 
 introduced early, and continued at frequent intervals 
 throughout the book. Selections from other works and 
 authors have been excluded, since, through their rare words 
 and miscellaneous authorship, they too often distract the 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Grammatical Introduction ........ 1-7 
 
 I. The Alphabet 7-8 
 
 II. Syllables, Pronunciation 9 
 
 III. Quantity, Accent 9-10 
 
 IV. Person, Number, Gender, Case 11-12 
 
 V. The Article 12-14 
 
 VI. Present Indicative Active, Middle, and Passive 
 of Av© — Accent of Verbs — Syntax of Subject, 
 
 Verb, and Object 15-19 
 
 VII. Feminines op First Declension — Accent of Nouns 20-24 
 VIII. Masculines op First Declension — Syntax of the 
 
 Focative 24-28 
 
 IX. The Second Declension — Subject, Neuter Plural as 
 
 Subject — Indirect Object 28-32 
 
 X. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension — Position of 
 
 — Agreement of — Predicate Nouns 32-35 
 
 XI. Transliteration — Appositive — Accusative of Extent, 
 
 of Time or Space 36-39 
 
 XII. Essentials for Reading — Proclitics — Enclitics — 
 Dative of Possessor — Reading Lesson : The Pal- 
 aces of Cyrus ajid Artaxerxes 39-44 
 
 XIII. Imperfect of Xua* — A^igment — Present Infi?iitive 
 
 Active, Middle, and Passive — Uses not in Indirect 
 Discourse 44-49 
 
 XIV. Review: Alphabet — Accentuation — Substantives of 
 
 the Vowel Declension — Verbs — Syntax — Sight 
 
 Translations 49-53 
 
 XV. Fundamental Uses op Prepositions : Prepositions 
 with Oblique Cases — Dative, with Compound Words, 
 
 with Special Verbs 53-59 
 
 XVI. Contract Verbs — Contraction of Vowels — Dative 
 
 of Time 59-G3 
 
XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 XVII. Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the Vowel 
 Declension — Uses of avros — Dative with 
 
 Adjectives 64-68 
 
 XVIII. Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns — 
 
 Syntax of 68-72 
 
 XIX. Euphony of Consonants — Future and Aorist 
 
 Indic. and Infin., Active and Middle . 72-78 
 XX. Consonant Declension — Dative of Advantage . 79-83 
 XXI. Consonant Declension, Variations: Liquid 
 and Lingual Stems — Gender of Consonant 
 
 Stems — Dative of Union, etc 83-87 
 
 XXII. Participles, Present, Futur-e, Aorist, Active 
 AND Middle — Attributive and Circum- 
 stantial Participles ... ... 88-93 
 
 XXIII. Participles of Contract Verbs — Supplemen- 
 
 tary Participle 94-97 
 
 XXIV. Future and Aorist of Liquid Verbs, Active 
 
 AND Middle — Genitive of Agent — Cognate 
 
 Accusative 98-102 
 
 XXV. Adjectives of the Consonant Declension — 
 Two Accusatives with Verbs of Naming, Choos- 
 ing, etc., and of Asking, Demanding, etc . . 102-106 
 XXVI. Review : Prepositions — Contraction — Demon- 
 strative Pronouns — Future and Aorist Active 
 and Middle — Consonant Declension — Syntax 
 
 — Sight Translations 106-115 
 
 XXVII. Contract Nouns of the Third Declension — 
 
 Stems in t-, v-, atid ev Present Indicative 
 
 ofelfil 116-120 
 
 XXVIII. Adjective Stems in v of the Third Declension 
 
 — Irregular Adjectives — Imperfect ofcifii . 121-124 
 XXIX. Tenses Denoting Completed Action — Mute 
 
 Themes — Reduplication — Future of tlfii . 125-131 
 XXX. Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the Third 
 Declension — Stems in <r- — Accusative of 
 Specification — Dative of Pespect — Genitive 
 
 with words of Fullness 131-137 
 
 XXXI. Aorist and Future Passive Indicative, Infini- 
 tive, and Participle — Tense Systems — Prin- 
 cipal Parts of a Verb — Adverbial Accusative 137-] 42 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XV 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXV. 
 XXXVI. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 XL. 
 
 XLI. 
 
 XLII. 
 
 XLIII. 
 XLIV. 
 
 XLV. 
 XLVI. 
 
 Deponent Verbs — Irregular Nouns — Syn- 
 copated Nouns in ep 142-147 
 
 Attributive and Predicate Genitives. . . 147-150 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives — Irregular Ad- 
 jectives — Declension of TrXeiW — Geni- 
 tive of Comparison — Dative of Manner — 
 Reading Lesson : The Arrival of Cyrus's 
 Fleet •. • • • 151-157 
 
 Personal Pronouns — Genitive with Verbs 157-162 
 
 Reflexive, Reciprocal, and Possessive Pro- 
 nouns — Genitives of Source-, Separation^ and 
 Cause 162-166 
 
 The Imperative Active, Middle, and Pas- 
 sive — Negatives — Commands and Prohibi- 
 tions — Genitive of Price, Time — Genitive 
 with Adjectives 166-170 
 
 Imperative Active and Middle of Contract 
 Verbs — Story of the Anabasis — Reading 
 Lesson : Accession of Artaxerxes .... 170-174 
 
 The Interrogative tij, Indefinite tW and 
 
 ocrris — Assimilation of the Relative . . . 175-178 
 
 Numerals : Cardinals, Ordinals — Declension 
 of (Is, dvo, rpels, and Terrapes — Reading 
 Lesson : A Halt and Numbering at Celae- 
 nae 179-183 
 
 Review : Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the 
 Consonant Declension — Tenses of Completed 
 Action^ Passive Voice, etc. — Comparison of 
 Adjectives — Pronouns — Syntax — Sight 
 Translations 183-189 
 
 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs — 
 Syntax of Adverbs — Two Accusatives with 
 Verbs of Doing, etc 190-194 
 
 Formation of Words — Sight Translations . . 194-200 
 
 Denominative Verbs — Compound Yv ords -^ 
 
 Sight Translations 201-204 
 
 Grimm's Law — Word Grouping — R. dy — 
 
 Sight Translations 204-209 
 
 Present System of Verbs — Verbs op the 
 
 First Class ~\l. dpx- 209-213 
 
XVI 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 XL VII. 
 
 XLVIII. 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 L. 
 
 LI. 
 LIT. 
 
 LIII. 
 
 LIV. 
 LV. 
 
 LVI. 
 LVII. 
 
 IVIII. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Verbs of the Second Class — Second Aoeist 
 
 System 213-217 
 
 First and Second Perfect Systems — Attic 
 
 Reduplication, — R. /3oX- 217-221 
 
 Subjunctive and Optative Active of at Verbs 
 — Subjunctive of Exhortation, of Pro- 
 hibition, OF Deliberation — Optative of 
 Wishing — Potential Optative — femes of 
 the Subjunctive and Optative 221-227 
 
 Subjunctive and Optative of et/xi — Subjunc- 
 tive AND Optative, Middle and Passive 
 of a Verbs — Purpose Clauses — Object 
 Clause after Verbs of Fearing .... 228-234 
 
 Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute 
 Verbs — Object Clausks with oircor after 
 Verbs of Striving — Verbs of the Third 
 Class — R. ttlB- 235-238 
 
 Future and First Aorist Systems of Liquid 
 Verbs {continued) — Liquid Verbs of tfik 
 Fourth Class — Accusative after alaxvvofiai, 
 etc 238-241 
 
 Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs 
 (continued) — Mute Verbs of the Fourth 
 Class — Denominative Verbs of the Fourth 
 Class — Summary of Euphonic Changes of Con- 
 sonants before i — R. clk- 241-245 
 
 Regular Verbs in fu, -. icrTijfu — Group aWos . 246-251 
 
 Veubs of the Fifth Class — Perfect Middle 
 System of Vowel Verbs — R. «c- — Reading 
 Lesson : C^rus plans to become King . . . 252-257 
 
 Regular Verbs in fii -. didafii — R. bo Reading 
 
 Lesson : Siege of Miletus 257-262 
 
 Verbs of the Sixth Class — The First and 
 Second Aorist Passive Systems — € as Aug- 
 ment or Reduplication — e changed to a — R. 
 yvco- 262-268 
 
 Conditional Sentences : Simple Particular ; 
 Contrary to Fact ; Wishes Unattained — 
 
 R. KoK Reading Lesson : The Army of 
 
 Clearchus 268-273 
 
LIX. 
 
 LX. 
 
 LXI. 
 
 LXII. 
 
 LXIII. 
 
 LXIV. 
 
 LXV. 
 
 LXVI. 
 
 LXVII. 
 
 LXVIII. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Subjunctive and Optative or Contract Verbs 
 
 — General Conditions — Group dfw. . . 
 Future Conditions, More and Less Vivid — 
 
 E.. Kpa- 
 
 Verbs of the Eighth Class — Relative and 
 
 Temporal Clauses — R. fiuK Reading 
 
 Lesson : Forces of Aristippus 
 
 Irregular Verbs in fit : tlfil, (prif^i. — Substitu- 
 tions for Conditions — Relative Clauses 
 OF Purpose — Cause and Result — Indirect 
 Discourse — The Infinitive in Indirect Dis- 
 course — R. (pa Reading Lesson : Forces 
 
 assemble at Sardis 
 
 Regular Verbs in lu : rt^/Mt — Verbs of the 
 Seventh Class — R. TrXa — Reading Les- 
 son : Character and Number of the Greek Forces 
 
 Verbs in fu : deUiwfu, tlfii — Verbs of the Fifth 
 Class (continued) — Reading Lesson : Cyrus 
 begins his March inland 
 
 Review : Formation of Adverbs ; of Substantives ; 
 of Verbs — Grimm's Law — Subjunctive and 
 Optative — Conditional Sentences — Restdt 
 Clauses^ etc. — Verbs in fii — Infinitive in In- 
 direct Discourse, etc. — Sight Translations — 
 Reading Lesson : Review of the Greek 
 Forces 
 
 Perfect Middle System of Consonant Themes 
 {continued') — Periphrastic Forms — R. ap- 
 
 — Reading Lesson : The Payment of the 
 Troops 
 
 Irregular Verbs in fw : olba — Simple Senten- 
 ces IN Indirect Discourse after on and 
 Q)s — Indirect Questions — Constructions 
 WITH ^ftt, elirov AND \tyai — R. trrpa- — 
 Reading Lesson : Review of all the Troops . 
 
 Participles in Indirect Biscotjrse — Agreement 
 of Predicate Adjectives after Infinitives with 
 omitted Subjects — Verbal Adjectives — R. 
 
 n Reading Lesson : Mock Charge of the 
 
 Greeks 
 
 XV 11 
 
 PAOE. 
 
 273-277 
 
 277-282 
 
 282-290 
 
 291-299 
 
 299-303 
 
 304-308 
 
 308-318 
 
 318-322 
 
 323-329 
 
 330-337 
 
XVIU 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 LXIX. Indirect Quota—^n of Complex Sentences — 
 Ellipsis — Reading Lesson: The Passage of 
 
 the Mountains 338-343 
 
 LXX. Irregular Verbs in ftt : ij;/xt, y]\i.ai, KeT/xai — 
 Group 0tXos — Reading Lesson : The Meet- 
 ing of Cyrus and Syennesis 343-346 
 
 LXXL Review : Perfect Middle System of Consonant 
 Themes — Indirect Discourse {Summary) — 
 Ellipsis — Sight Translations — Reading Les- 
 sons : Speech of Clearchus ; Second Address 
 of Clearchus ; Clearchus refuses to Lead ; Con- 
 ference with Cyrus 347-361 
 
 LXXII. Review of the Anabasis 361-363 
 
 Appendix : Paradigms of Declensions and Conjugations 365-401 
 
 Abbreviations ~ 404 
 
 Greek-English Vocabulary 405-437 
 
 English-Greek Vocabulary 438-450 
 
 English Index 451-456 
 
 Greek Index . 457-460 
 
INTR0DUCf'6RY. 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 I. The Greek alphabet has twentj-four letters : — 
 
 Fonns. 
 Large. Small. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 Name 
 
 
 Latin. 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 a in father 
 
 "AXcfia 
 
 Alpha 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 
 P 
 
 b in bib 
 
 Bijra 
 
 Beta 
 
 b 
 
 r 
 
 7 
 
 gin go 
 
 Tdfxixa 
 
 Gamma 
 
 g 
 
 A 
 
 8 
 
 d in did 
 
 AeAra 
 
 Delta 
 
 d 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 e in prey ^ (short) 
 
 ''E ij/lkov 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 e 
 
 Z 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' z in adze 
 
 Zrjra 
 
 Zeta 
 
 z 
 
 H 
 
 n 
 
 e in prey (long) 
 
 'Hra 
 
 Eta 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 ee 
 
 th in thin 
 
 ®rJTa 
 
 Theta 
 
 th 
 
 I 
 
 !■ 
 
 i in machine 
 
 'Iwra 
 
 lota 
 
 i 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 k in book 
 
 KctTTTra 
 
 Kappa 
 
 c 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 1 in bell 
 
 AdfilSSa 
 
 Lambda 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 ti: 
 
 m in aim 
 
 Mv 
 
 Mil 
 
 m 
 
 N 
 
 lA 
 
 n in nun 
 
 NO 
 
 Nil 
 
 n 
 
 S ~ 
 
 1 
 
 X in box 
 
 al 
 
 Xi 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 6 in obey 
 
 *0 fUKpoV 
 
 Omicron 
 
 (u)6 
 
 n 
 
 TT 
 
 p in tip 
 
 nr 
 
 Pi 
 
 P- 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 r in ran 
 
 'FCy 
 
 Rho 
 
 r 
 
 2 
 
 0-s^ 
 
 s in so 
 
 2ty/Aa 
 
 Sigma 
 
 s 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 t in sit 
 
 Tav 
 
 Tail* 
 
 t 
 
 Y 
 
 V 
 
 French u or German ii ^ 
 
 'Y il/lXov 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 (")y 
 
 $ 
 
 </> 
 
 ph in Philip 
 
 ^: 
 
 Phi' 
 
 ph 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 German ch^ 
 
 x: 
 
 Chi 
 
 ch, kh 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ps in hops 
 
 *r 
 
 P^ 
 
 ps 
 
 o 
 
 (0 
 
 o in no 
 
 *0 fiiya 
 
 Omega 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 1 Begin the study with Lesson I., page 7. 
 
 2 Has the same sound as the long vowel, only shorter, — near the sound heard 
 ill m^f. 
 
 ^ Always s at the end of a word, elsewhere <r -. ao(p6s, wise. 
 
 * Rhymes with now. 
 
 J * Pronounce like eeyu. 
 
 • Pronounce like German ch in Buck, nearly like the Scotch ch in loch. 
 
 1 
 
2 TUiV BJIGIJ^NER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 II. Breathings. The letter h is wanting in the alpha- 
 bet, but its sound before an initial vowel or diphthong 
 is indicated by the rough breathing ( * ) ; its absence 
 by the smooth breathing (' ). Every vowel or diph- 
 thong at the beginning of a word must have one of 
 these breathings over such vowel or second vowel of 
 the diphthong. Thus, 6, the, is pronounced ' ho ' ; cac, 
 from^ ' ek ; ' ol/cog, house ^ ' oikos.' Initial p also has 
 the rough breathing : *Pd8to9, Bhodian. Double p is 
 often written pp, Eng. rrh : Hvppo^, Pgrrhus. 
 
 III. Vowels. Of the vowels, e and o are always short 
 in quantity; i) and w are always long ;^ a, l, and v are 
 short in some words and long in others. In the para- 
 digms and vocabularies of this book, a, l, and v, when 
 long, are marked d, i, and u, except in cases where the 
 quantity may be inferred from the accent. The short 
 vowels have the same quality of sound as the long, 
 but shortened or more nbmpt. Thus, a is pronounced 
 like first a in papa ; e like Erench e in real, near the 
 sound heard in met or get ; t like i in verity ; o like o 
 in ohey^ monastic. 
 
 Remark, a, e, 17, o, ce>, from' their open sounds in 
 pronunciatiQU, are called open vowels ; i and v, close 
 vowels, 
 
 IV. Diphthongs, The proper diphthongs, except m, 
 are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close 
 one, as at, av, ei, ev, ot, ov, r)v. The improper diph- 
 
 ^ I. e., they have more time given them in pronunciation than the short 
 vowels. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 3 
 
 thongs are formed by the union of a long vowel (a, rj, <y) 
 with I, and are written thus, a, rj, co. In these, the 
 iota is called iota subscript. With capitals it is written 
 on the line, as ^iltero, ^^toj he thought. 
 
 Remark. Observe that the improper diphthongs have 
 both the breathing and accent on the first vowel. 
 
 V. Fronunciation of Diphthongs. 
 
 1. ai like ai in^isle, av like ou in our^ 
 ct^ " ei '' hd^t, ev " eu '' feud, ^ 
 
 m OL " oi " oil, ov " ou " gouth, 
 
 W VI " ui " quit, rjv " d-oo rapidly pronounced. 
 
 : 2. The improper diphthongs, a, rj, co, are pronounced 
 
 like d, rjy o). 
 
 ^ PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 VT. The pronunciation of Greek is phonetic. Every 
 consonant is sounded. V is the only letter that has 
 more than one sound, w^hich before k, y, x? ^^ f equals 
 n in ink : ayyeko^ (ang-gelus), messenger. 
 
 VII. 1. Syllables, In Greek, as in Latin, every word 
 has as many syllables as it has separate vowels and 
 diphthongs. The last syllable is called the ultima, the 
 next to the last, the penult, the one before the penult, 
 the antepenult, 
 
 2. In dividing words into syllables, a single conso- 
 nant is joined with the following vowel : e-^w, have^ 
 Kco^fjLT], village, cTKrj-vy], tent. 
 
 ^ Many prefer to pronounce ft as ei in ei^hL 
 
4 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 3. Consonants between two vowels are joined witli 
 the following vowel when they can be pronounced at 
 the beginning of a word or syllable/ otherwise they are 
 divided : e-(T\ov, I had, /xa-/cpds, lon^, Ovij-cTKa}, diej 
 177-7709, Jiorse. 
 
 4. Compound words that retain their component 
 parts entire are divided into their component parts, other- 
 wise they may be divided as simple words : Trpocr-i-x'^ 
 (from 77^09 and ej^w), hold to, but ira-pe-Xavva) or 77ap- 
 eKavvo) (from irapd and ekavvay), ride past. 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 VIII. 1. Quantity? A syllable is long by nature if 
 it contains a diphthong or one of the long vowels -q or 
 0) : <\)aiv(t), shotu ; short if it contains one of the short 
 vowels € or o : aocjiof;, loise. 
 
 2. A syllable is long by position if its vowel is 
 followed by a double consonant or by two single conso- 
 nants except a mute and a liquid : ayyiWo), announce, 
 To^ov, botv. 
 
 Note. The double consonants are {, f, and \\}. ^^ 
 arises from a coalescence of S with cr; ^ is composed 
 of K and cr ; \\t,oi tt and o*. 
 
 ^ Such consonants can regularly be pronounced by one impulse of the 
 voice ; as spl in splendor. See the Lexicon. 
 
 2 Quantity in Greek, as in Latin, refers to tlie time given in pronun- 
 ciation. 
 
 * Some pronounce ^ as dz, heard in adze. 
 
ACCENT. 5 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 IX. 1. There are three characters used in Greek 
 to mark the accent. These are : the acute accent ('), 
 7rora/xo9, river ; the circumjlex accent (^), ra> noTafi^, to 
 ihe river ; \k\Q grave accent (^), tov Trorafiov, the river. 
 
 2. These accents are written over the vowel of the 
 accented syllable or second vowel of the diphthong, un- 
 less the second vowel is l subscript (IV.). If the vowel 
 has a breathing also, the acute and the grave follow it, 
 but the circumflex is placed above the breathing : croc^os, 
 wise ; dycj, lead ; ol, who ; (S, to whom. If the accented 
 vowel is a capital, the accent, as well as the breathing, 
 stands just before it : "^liero (IV.). 
 
 3. The acute can stand only on one of the last three 
 syllables of a word ; the circumflex only on one of the 
 last two ; and the grave only on the last. 
 
 a. A word having the acute on the ultima is called 
 oxytone : Trora/xds; on the ^Qim% par oxgtone : to^ov ; 
 on the antepenult, ^i^ op ar oxytone : ayyeXo?. 
 
 h. A word having the circumflex on the ultima is 
 called perispomenon : rlfirjf;, of honor; on the penult, 
 properispjomenon : hcopov, gift, oiko^, home, 
 
 c. A word having no accent on the ultima is called 
 barytone : ro^ov, ayyeXo<;, hoipov. 
 
 X. The antepenult can be accented only when the 
 last syllable is short : ayyeXo?. 
 
 XI. If the penult is accented, it takes the circum- 
 flex when it is long by nature and at the same time 
 the ultima is short by nature : hoipov. Otherwise, if 
 
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 accented, it takes the acute : Scopov^ to^ov, ltttto^, 
 
 €(T\OV. 
 
 Note. Final at and ot are regularly considered short 
 in determining the accent : /cw/xat, villages, dyyeXou, 
 messengers ; except in the optative, and in the adverb 
 oiKOL, at /lome, 
 
 XII. The circumflex can stand on the ultima only 
 when it is long by nature,^ but it does not necessarily 
 stand on such a syllable : Kcoficov, of villages ; rlyirj, 
 honor, tIjjltjs. 
 
 XIII. The place of the accent on many words must 
 be learned by observation. But in most words it 
 recedes as far as possible from the end (IX. 3 ; X.). 
 This is called recessive "accent. Thus, the accent on 
 ayyeX.09 is placed on the penult whenever by inflec- 
 tion the ultima becomes long : ayyekov ; but recedes 
 again when the ultima becomes short : dyyekop. Verbs 
 regularly take the recessive accent. 
 
 XIV. An oxytone regularly changes its acute to 
 the grave before other words in the same sentence in 
 close connection : ets rrfv ^oipav iXavpovcn (for et? Tijv 
 )(copav iXavpovcn). 
 
 Note. The acute is the regular accent. The cir- 
 cumflex and grave are modifications of this. The 
 grave indicates that the syllable upon which it is 
 placed is to be pronounced with a lighter stress. 
 
 ^ Observe that the circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by 
 uatare. 
 
THE ALPHABET. 
 
 XV. Punctuation. The comma ( , ) and period ( . ) 
 are like those in English. The colon ( • ), a point above 
 the hne, corresponds to the English colon and semi- 
 colon. The mark of interrogation ( ; ) is like the 
 
 English semicolon. 
 
 LESSON I.^ 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 I. Learn the alphabet and sound of the letters (L), 
 breathings (IL), classification of vowels and diph- 
 thongs (IIL Rem. ; IV. Rem. ; V. 1, 2). 
 
 Remark. Note the letters of the Greek alphabet 
 having forms like the corresponding English letters, 
 and then learn those differing from the English noting 
 the sound of each letter. Give the sound of each 
 letter and then the character representing it, and vice 
 versa, until the characters can be written instantly upon 
 hearing the different sounds. Observe that the Greek 
 name of each letter begins with the sound of that 
 letter. 
 
 2. EXERCISES. 
 
 L 1. What characters represent o,^ a, e in pre^, i? 
 2. Give both the long and the short sound of the 
 
 ^ The notation of sounds used in this book is as found in Webster's 
 Dictionary. 
 
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 vowels. 3. Give the letters representing b, g, th, ks, 
 ph, ps, r, etc. 4. Give the sound of a, /3, S, ^, k, \, 
 
 0, e, w, etc. 5. Give English words containing letters 
 representing the sound of ^, ^, xjf, (f), x^ 'n; /a, etc. 
 6. In the same way give English words representing 
 the sound of rj, e, co, o, l, v, ov, at, etc. 7. Give the 
 sounds of ov and av, of at and ei, of o) and o, etc. 
 
 II. 1. Pronounce by the phonic method rd : ^ t-o, 
 to; 6: h-o, 6 ; tov : T-o-v, rov. 2. Trfv^ rrj^, tojv, tw, 
 
 01, al, Toivy ralvy rot?, rot. 3: Tl-fJiT], 81-/07, vl-kt), ol- 
 KL-d, aKr)-jnj, rj-fie-pd, ^&>-pa. 4. ke-yco, kv-co, Trefi-TTcj, 
 ^a'(TL-Xev-(o, ^ai-v(ii, i-kav-vco, Tret-Oo). 5. ck, ef, eV, et?, 
 e/c^ Twz/ KO}-yLO)v^ iv^ rrj r)-ixi-pa, ai-re-w, 77/309, na-pd, 
 crvVy t6-^ov, (fyai'i^o), Ovrj-CTKO), itt^ttos, 7rd-X€-/xo9. 6. 6^ 
 d-ya-^ds. 7. ets^ 77)1/ -^ay-pdv e-kav-vov-ai. 8. Xi-ov-crt 
 tt)^' ye-(j>V'pav, 9. e/c rwi' Kco-ficov i-\av-peL. 10. 6 
 d-ya-^05 dv-0 p(x)r7ro<i iv rfi Kcxi-purj tjv. 
 
 ^ The student should aim to connect the Greek sounds with the letters 
 representing them. Tliese sounds should be held in the mind like the 
 quality of a note in music as a distinct object of thought. In beginning 
 to pronounce, give first the sound of each letter, then combine the sounds 
 as the pronunciation of the word, and vice versa. To vary the exercise, 
 let the teacher give either the sound of the letters or the letters, and the 
 pupil either the characters or pronunciation. The teacher also should 
 both give the reading of the sentences to the pupil, and require independ- 
 ent reading from him. 
 
 2 A few monosyllables attach themselves so closely to the following 
 word as not to have a separate accent, but are pronounced with the follow- 
 ing word. Pronounce €< tq>v as one word. These are called proclitics 
 (101). 
 
SYLLABLES. 9 
 
 LESSON 11. 
 SYLLABLES. PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Review Lesson I. Learn VL ; VIL, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 
 IX. 1, 2. 
 
 3. EXERCISES. 
 
 L I. Apply the principles of syllabication to the 
 words in Exercise IL of the preceding lesson. 
 
 n. 1. Divide into syllables and pronounce: ayyeXo?, 
 dyyeWo), eyyu9, rvyxdvo), dvayKT), TTora^dg. 2. dyco, 
 KeXevct), Xvo), SoKeco, Trefjunco, kafx^dvco, /txa^o/xat,, fjuevcj, 
 3. dvTjp, cs.v0p(o7ros, oTk:o9j /BacnXevs, S7JX09, rlfJicoT/, 
 <^tXo9, Q-ocfiOV, fjLaKpo^, (TTparia, x^P^i yecfyvpa, a/iafa, 
 dfid^T}^. 4. aevids, craTpdirr)^, 6 OTrXtrr;?, Trekrao'Tr}^, 
 6 o'TpaTicoT7)Sy i^-ekavpco, e/c-XeiTTw, Trpocr-ep^o/^atj Kara- 
 kaix^dvo). 5. els rrjv ^capav iXavpovcrt. 6. 8ta 
 ^pvyids i^-eXavi/co, 7. els ^ikidv ^(xipav ekavvovai, 
 8. evravda fxei/et Kvpos koI t) crrpaTid rjfjiepds eiKocri. 
 
 LESSON m. 
 
 QUANTITY. ACCENT. 
 
 Review Lessons L, IL Learn VIIL, 1, 2, n. ; IX. 
 I, 2, 3, a,d,c; X.; XL N. ; XIL ; XIIL ; XIV. N. ; 
 
 XV. 
 
10 . THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 4. EXERCISES.i 
 
 I. 1. Apply the rules of accentuation to the words 
 in Exercise IL, Lesson 11. , especially to proparoxy tones 
 and properispomenons. 2. In the same exercise^ note 
 the oxy tones, paroxy tones, and perispomenons. 
 
 II. 1. Upon what kind of syllables may the circum- 
 flex accent stand ? 2. Why can the acute stand on 
 the antepenult of dvOpcoire, iroXeixoL, Xverop, Xierai, 
 Xvofjuev ? 3. Why can not the circumflex stand on 
 the penult of olkm, dyco, dvdyKrj, KcofXT], itttto?, oirXovy 
 fi€cro<;, (f)6l3ov ? 4. Why can not the acute stand on 
 the antepenult of dvOpconov, dvOpcono), TroXejuiw, TroXe- 
 IJLOLVy 7To\€fjiov<s ? 5. Placc the accent on the penult or 
 antepenult of the following words as the last syllable 
 will permit, and pronounce : dvOpconov, dvOpoiiroiv, tto- 
 Xe/xou?, KLvSvvo^Sj 770X1x179, dypiOf;, ^ekricTTo^, KpaTtcTTOs, 
 Xvofiev, kvere, Xvovq-l, iXveTrjv, Xverat. XvovTai, ifxeve- 
 TTjv, Overov. 6. Place the proper accent on the penult 
 of the following words, and pronounce : Zlkj], X^P^^* 
 Xoyoi, hrfko^, B6)pov, Scopo), rofa, Kcofxai, Kojfjir)^;, tinroL, 
 Slojko), Xve, Xvet9, iOveTrjv, Xvaov. 
 
 ^ The pupil should be drilled until the letters at once suggest the 
 sounds, and the sight of tlie word the proper pronunciation, without any 
 substitution of Roman letters. Let the pupil also be constantly drilled in 
 writing Greek words from tlieir sound or pronunciation. In all of the 
 exercises of this book the blackboard should be constantly used. 
 
ACCIRENTS. 1 1 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 PERSON, NUMBER, G-ENDER, CASE. 
 
 5. In Greek, as in Latin, nouns, pronouns, adjectives, 
 and verbs are inflected. There are three declensions of 
 substantives and adjectives, corresponding in general to 
 the first three declensions in Latin, First, Second, and 
 Third, or respectively the A, O, and Consonant declen- 
 sions. The first two, as opposed to the third, are some- 
 times called the vowel declension. 
 
 6. There are three nu?nbers ; the singular, dual, and 
 plural. The singular denotes one object, the plural 
 more than one ; the dual refers definitely to two 
 objects. 
 
 7. There are \\\vqq genders : the masculine, the fem- 
 inine, and the neuter. The first two distinguish nouns, 
 as in English, according to their reference to sex. This 
 is called natural gender. But the Greek, like the Latin, 
 further distinguishes nouns by the so-called grammatical 
 gender. 
 
 a. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined partly by 
 their signification, but mostly by their endings. 
 
 h. The general rules for the grammatical gender of nouns, 
 independent of their endings, are the same as in Latin : (1) Most 
 names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine. (2) Most 
 names of countries, cities, islands, and trees are feminine. 
 (3) Gender determined by the endings of nouns — as, those end- 
 ing in a or ?; are feminine — will be given under the several 
 declensions. 
 
12 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 8. There are five cases : the nominative, genitive, 
 dative, accusative, and vocative. The Latin ablative is 
 supplied partly by the genitive, but mostly by the 
 dative ; otherwise the cases have the same meaning 
 as the corresponding cases in Latin : as, nom.-^ a king 
 (subject); gen. of a king ; dat. to ov for a king ; ace. 
 a king (object) ; voc. king ! 
 
 Note. All the cases except the nominative and 
 vocative are called oblique. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Review Lessons IIL, IV. Note especially IX. 3, 
 XIL 
 
 g. The Greek article 6, 17, to [to] generally corre- 
 sponds to the English definite article the. But it often 
 has the force of a possessive pronoun. It is declined in 
 three genders and numbers, and in all the cases but the 
 vocative. Its endings, united with the stem \to'\, are, 
 in the main, like the corresponding endings of the vowel 
 declension. 
 
 1 For abbreviations see page 404. 
 
THE ARTICLE. 13 
 
 \ 
 
 10. Paradigm. 
 
 Singulm'. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fein. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 o 17 TO TO} (raj TO) ot at ra 
 
 TOV'TTj^ TOV TOLP (tOLp) ToIp TCOP T(x)V TOiV 
 
 TCp Trj TO) TOLP (tOLv) TOLP Tol^; Tttt? TOt? 
 
 A. TOP TTji^ TO T(ii {to) T(i) T0-6<i Ta<i TCt 
 
 I Note. The pupil himself should make the observa- 
 tions before formulating them. 
 
 I a. Observe that 6, 77, ol, at are proclitics (101). 
 
 b. Observe that the gen. and dat. raasc. and neut. of all 
 I numbers are alike; that the nom. and ace. of the neuters are 
 
 alike, and their plural ends in a. 
 
 c. Observe that every dat. has an l, but in the singular it 
 t takes the form of t subscript. 
 
 I d. Observe that the gen. and dat. of all numbers are circum- 
 I flexed ; other accented forms follow the nom. neut. sing. 
 
 ' II. Decline 77 tI^ltj, the honor, with the same end- 
 ings and accents as those of the fern. art. ; y] Tifxt], ttjs 
 T'nirj<;^ of the honor, etc. 
 
 12. Decline 6 TT0TaiJL6<;, the river, in the oblique 
 cases with the same endings and accents as those of the 
 masc. art. ; 6 Trora/xd?, tov iroTayLOv, of the river, etc., 
 nom. plural, ot iroTafioi^ 
 
 13. 1. What accent do the gen. and dat. in all 
 
 ^, 
 
 ^ Ta>, Toiv may be used for all genders. 
 
 2 Vocatives are like uominatives, of. paradigm 41. 
 
 * Cf. paradigm 61. 
 
HWWiWIIMllillWliliWIIWliillli 
 
 14 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 numbers of oxytones and monosyllables of the vowel 
 declension take ? 
 
 2. What accent do all the other cases of these syl- 
 lables take? 
 
 3. Of what gender is rlfXTJ, Trora/xd^j ayyeXo?, dv- 
 OpoiTTo^, man ? 
 
 a. Observe that the article agrees with the noun that it 
 limits in gender, number, and case. 
 
 14. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ayye\o9, messenger, Kcofxr), village, o-Krjvij, tent. 
 Swpov, gift, oIkos, house. to^ov, bow, 
 
 LTTTTos, horse, TTOTafjio^, river, tI/xtJ, honor, 
 
 15. EXERCISES.i 
 
 I. 1. TLjlTJ, 7} TLfXl]^ TLfJirjf;, TLfJLTJv, (TKr)VT], 6 TTOTaflO^j 
 
 ttJ? TLjxrj<;, TTjv TLfiTJif (as object), ttj Tififj, rats rt/xat?, 
 ra>j/ TLfJiCJV, ra? TLfid^;. 2. rj crKiqvrj, ai (TKrjvaL, roiv 
 cTKrjvcoi^, rat? (TKrjvaL^;, tcj CTKrjva, tol cTKrjvd, toIv 
 
 (TKTjValv. 3. TOV Tr'OTCLjJiOV, TCOV TTOTafJLWV, T(0 TTOTa/Xft), 
 
 TOP TTOTafJLov, Tov<; TTOTa/xou?, 6 Xo)(dy6<;, the captain, 
 Tw Xo^ctyw, Tcov \o^ay(x)v, 4. at Acco/xat, ol lttttol, to 
 Scopov, TOV Scjpov, TOL Sojpa, 6 oIk'09, to to^ov, tcjv 
 
 K(OfX(OV. 
 
 IT. 1. Of the tent, for the tent, of the tents, of the 
 village, a village, villages. 2. Of the villages, of the 
 
 ^ Read or pronounce and translate into English. 
 
VERBS, INTRODUCTORY. 1 5 
 
 honors, of the gift, of the captain, for the captain. 
 3. The honors, of the honor, the messengers, for the 
 honors.^ 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, 
 AND PASSIVE OF Xvco, 
 
 Review IX, 3; X, XI, XIII, XIV; Lessons III, 
 IV, V. 
 
 1 6. The Greek verb has three voices, the active, 
 middle, and passive. 
 
 a. There are four moods : the indicative, suhjuiictive, opta- 
 tive, and imperative. To these are added, in the conjugation of 
 the verb, the infinitives and participles. 
 
 d. There are seven tenses : the present, imperfect, aorist, fu- 
 ;- ture, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect. 
 
 17. There are three persons, first, second, and 
 • third. 
 
 18. There are three numbers (6). 
 
 . ig. Verbs have recessive accent : that is, they accent 
 the antepenult if the last syllable is short, otherwise the 
 penult. 
 
 1 The average amount of work is given in the exercises of this book as 
 a guide to the pupil. The teacher should vary this, if need be, in his 
 instruction to the class. 
 
16 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 20. Present Indicative, 
 
 Active. ^> Middle. Passive. 
 
 S. 1. Xva>, I loose ^ Xvo-fiai XvofjiaL. 
 
 2. Xvet9i ^ou loose Xvet, Xvr) 
 
 3. Xif€L, he looses Xve-Tai The passive 
 
 ^ 1 / \ 7 z n ^^^^ ^^^^ same 
 
 D. 2. Xve-Tov, 1/ou [tivo) loose Xve-adov ^^^^ ^g |.|jg 
 
 3. Xve-Tovy they {two) loose Xve-aOov middle. 
 
 P. 1. Xvo'iieVy tve loose Xvo-fxeOa 
 
 2. Xve-Te, you loose Xve-crOe 
 
 3. Xvovcri, they loose Xvo-vr ai 
 
 21. Most Greek verbs are conjugated like Xvco, and 
 are called from their first form -w verbs. 
 
 22. Verb Theme. The theme of a verb is its funda- 
 mental part, the common base to which certain prefixes 
 and suffixes are added in its conjugation. The theme 
 of Xvoi is Xv' or Xv-, 
 
 23. Tense Ste7n. From the theme the different tense 
 stems by certain tense suffixes are formed. The final 
 vowel of these is either o or c, and is called the variable 
 (or thematic) vowel. Its sign is 7e-j as XvVe., the present 
 stem of Xv(xi. 
 
 24. Personal Endings. The different forms of the 
 verb are made by adding to the tense stems certain 
 endings. These in the finite moods denote the person ^ 
 and number, and are called Personal Endings. 
 
 25. Variable {or thematic) vowel. The variable 
 vowel is o before /x and v, and e elsewhere. 
 
 1 Eirst person is like first person plural Xvofieu. 
 
 2 Personal pronouns are not used except for emphasis. 
 
r. 
 
 VERBS, CONJUGATION. 1 7 
 
 26. In the present indicative active originally -o-jut, 
 -c-cri, and -e-Tu were respectively the endings of the 1st, 
 2d, and 3d person singular, and -o-vcri of the 3d plural. 
 In the former, -/xi was dropped and o changed to w ; 
 I in -crt and -rt passed over to the preceding vowel and 
 united with it "by contraction, and r was dropped. In 
 the latter, v in -vai before sigma was dropped and o 
 lengthened to ov (194, 4, end). 
 
 27. In the second person singular of the middle, cr 
 *T dropped after a variable vowel. Here -eat by a 
 rsgular rule of contraction becomes -et or -77. 
 
 Observe that the active and middle voices are distinguished 
 Dtily by different endings ; that in the dual and second person 
 .singularbf the middle -aO- occurs instead of -r- of the active. 
 
 ?S. The personal endings of the primary^ tenses in 
 thf indicative, active and middle, are as follows : 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 1. -, (-/xi)' -^ev 'fiai -fxeOa 
 
 2. -s, {-o'i) -TOP -T€ -crat -crOov -crOe 
 
 3. -, (-rt, -crt) -TOP -(TL, {-vctl) -rat -crOov -vTai 
 
 29. The present tense represents the action as taking 
 place at the present time. 
 
 a. Customary actions and general truths are also expressed 
 by the present. 
 
 30. The active voice represents the subject as acting : 
 XuG), J loose. 
 
 ^ Cf. primary tenses (110). 
 
18 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 31. The middle voice commonly represents the sub- 
 ject as acting upon itself or for itself : ^ Xuo/xat, / am 
 loosing myself, Tropevoixau, {iropevo), make go), I proceed, 
 fi-eraTre/xTTo/xat avrov, I send for him, {summon). 
 
 32. The passive voice represents the subject as acted 
 upon : XvofxaLy I am loosed. 
 
 33. Write the present indicative active and middle 
 of Xeyo), TTopevoj, Treida), TrefXTro), and ^ovXevo). 
 
 34. VOCABULARY.^ 
 
 Give the meaning of avOpoiiro^, -ov ; Scopov, to ; Xo- 
 ^ayo9, -ov ; TTora/xd?, -ov ; tZ/xt/, -779 ; (rKr)V7), -rj<; : 
 
 Kv/oos, -oVf Cyrus. Xeyco, -et?, say, speak. 
 
 fiovXevcoy -619, plan ; mid. Tre/ATro), -et?, send, 
 
 deliberate. 7r€L0(o, -el's, persuade ; mid, 
 
 iXavvcoy march [elastic^]. believe, obey. 
 
 Xv(o,-eLs, loose, destroy, break, iropevo), -ei9, make go ; mid . 
 
 puivo). -€Ls, remain. proceed [pore]. 
 
 35. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Xvei, Xverat, Xvovcn, XvovraL, Xverov^ XveaOov^ 
 Xvopev, XvopeOa, Xvei, Xvrj^ XveaOe. 2. pivei<;, pivere, 
 Xeyei, Xeyerat, Xiyovrai, jropevopai, Tropevovrai, Tropev- 
 erat. 3. to hcopov Tripirei. 4. ireiOo), TreiOeiy TreiOeT ai, 
 
 1 It may represent the action on something belonging to oneself: 
 Xvofiai, I ransom. 
 
 2 First learn the meaning of the words from their use in the sentences, 
 and then commit to memory. 
 
 • Borrowed from the Greek (501). 
 
SYNTAX OF VERB. 19 
 
 TreiOofieOay /BovXeveif;, ^ovXevecrOe, ^ovXevei. 5. Kvpo<; 
 iXavpeu. 6. 6 dvOpa)7ro<; ^ovXeveraL. 7. Kvpo<; rov 
 Xo^ayov TrefiTTeL. 8. ol Xo^ayol ttjp o-Krjvrjv Xvovcn 
 (destroy). 
 
 Examine the nominatives in 5, Q, 1 , 8^ and note their relation 
 to the verb. 
 
 RULE.^ 
 
 36. The subject. of the finite verb is in the nomina- 
 tive case. 
 
 Examine the verbs in b, 6, 7, 8, and note the relation of their 
 form to their subjects. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 37. A verb agrees in person and number with its 
 subject. 
 
 Examine the accusatives in 3, 7, 8, and note their relation to 
 the verbs upon which thej depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 38. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the 
 accusative. 
 
 39. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Of honor, for the honor, of the river, for the 
 river, the gift, the bow, of the tent, of the tents. 
 2. , Cyrus believes. 3. The man proceeds. 4. He is 
 marching, they are sending men. 5. Cyrus remains. 
 6. They two are remaining. 7. The captains delib- 
 erate. 
 
 * Give the corresponding English and Latin rules of syntax whenever 
 applicable. 
 
20 
 
 BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 FIRST, OR A DECLENSION. 
 
 Review IX., 3 ; X.,. XL, n. ; XIL, XIII. Lessons 
 IV., v., VI. 
 
 40. The Stem. The stem of a noun is its funda- 
 mental part, that part to which the case-endings-^ are 
 added in declension. It corresponds to the theme of 
 the verb (22). The stem of nouns of the first declen- 
 sion ends in d, which in feminine nouns remains long 
 or is changed to 7; or a. 
 
 41. Paradigms. 
 
 
 (TTpaTia 
 
 Xcopd 
 
 y€(j)vpa 
 
 
 army 
 
 land 
 Singular. 
 
 bridge 
 
 N.V. 
 
 (XT p ana 
 
 XOipd 
 
 ye(j)vpa 
 
 G. 
 
 crrparta? 
 
 X^pct? 
 
 ye(f)vpd<; 
 
 D. 
 
 (jTpaTia 
 
 Xf^pa 
 
 yej)vpa 
 
 A. 
 
 (TTpaTidv 
 
 X(^poiv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 yi^vpav 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 (TTparia 
 
 X(opd 
 
 y€(f)vpd 
 
 G.D. 
 
 CTTparialv 
 
 XfJ^pOLi'V 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ye(j)vpaiv 
 
 N.V. 
 
 (TTpariaL 
 
 '^ojpai 
 
 ye(f>vpaL 
 
 G. 
 
 CTTpaTlCOV 
 
 X^ip^v 
 
 y€(j)vp(t)v 
 
 D. 
 
 CTT/oartats 
 
 X(opaL<; 
 
 yei^vpaif; 
 
 A. 
 
 arpaTids 
 
 Xw/>d9 
 
 ye(j)vpd^ 
 
 ^ Certain letters, as in Latin, to express the relation of the word to other 
 words. 
 
FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 21 
 
 
 TlflTJ 
 
 
 dfjLa^a 
 
 
 honor 
 
 Singular. 
 
 wagon 
 
 N.V. 
 
 Tlixrj 
 
 
 dfxa^a 
 
 G. 
 
 riixrj^ 
 
 
 dixd^rjq 
 
 D. 
 
 Tlfiy 
 
 
 djid^rj 
 
 A. 
 
 rlyLrjv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 dfia^ap 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 TlfJid 
 
 
 dfjid^d 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TLflOLP 
 
 Plural. 
 
 dfxd^aiv 
 
 N.V. 
 
 Ti/xat 
 
 
 a/xafat 
 
 G. 
 
 TLfXCOP 
 
 
 dfjLa^wi/ 
 
 D. 
 
 TlfJLa2<; 
 
 
 a/Actfat? 
 
 A. 
 
 Tt/xag 
 
 
 djxd^d<^ 
 
 a. Observe^ that the case endings ^ unite with the final 
 vowel of the stem, forming one syllable. 
 
 d. Observe that the terminations of the dual and plural of 
 each noun are like the endings of the dual and plural of the 
 fem. article (10). 
 
 c. Observe that : 1 . In the singular a preceded by e, l, or /o, 
 is retained : %c^/3a, -a?, etc. 2. When the final vowel is pre- 
 ceded by 0-, TT^ W, or a double consonant (VIII. 2, n.), it is 
 changed to a in the nom., ace, and voc, and to r} in the gen. 
 and dat._, OdXarra, OaXdrTT}^. 3. After other letters the 
 final vowel is regularly changed to 7) throughout^ and is de- 
 clined like the fem. article (10, 11): crKr^vri^ KcofMr). 
 
 d. Observe that the nom. and voc. are alike in all numbers. 
 
 ^ These observations' must be actually made by the pupil (10. n.). 
 2 These will be noticed later (49). 
 
22 beginner's greek book. 
 
 42. Quantity of the Terminations. 
 
 a. Observe that a in the endings of the gen. sing., nom. 
 dual, and ace. plural is long. 
 
 h. Observe that : 1. In the singular a preceded by e, t, or /), 
 is long, except in nouns ending in pa preceded by a diphthong 
 or V : 7€</)i5/oa, irelpa (cf. p. 68^). 2. That the stem vowel a of 
 the ace. and voc. shig. agrees in quantity with the nom. : 76- 
 (l)Vpa, ye(l>vpav, djxa^av^ daXarrav. 
 
 43. Accent of Nouns. 
 
 1. The accent of the nom. sing, of most nouns must 
 be learned by observation. All the forms of a noun are 
 accented on the same syllable as the nom. sing., and 
 have the same kind of an accent as far as the general 
 rules of accent (X., XL, n., XIL, XIII.) will allow. 
 
 2. In the A Declension the last syllable of the gen. 
 plur. is always circumflexed : a/xafa, afjua^cov. ^ 
 
 3. The accent of the ultima is regularly retained, but 
 in the gen. and dat. of all numbers, a long ultima, if 
 accented, takes the circumflex (XIL, 13, 1): crrparta?, 
 TtjLt'^9, ti/xt}, Tt/xai?, rat?, (xt^v, fjnqvoiv, fjLrjvwp. 
 
 44. Decline rj crKiqvrj, rj Kcofir), rj ^v\aKrj^ rj Slktj. 
 
 45. Decline rj neupa, rj rjixepd^ rj Ovpd^ rj OdkaTTa, 
 a. Of what gender are nouns of the first declension ending 
 
 in a and rj ? 
 
 h. Account for the circumflex accent on the gen. and dat. 
 of all numbers of o, rtft^, (^vKaKr). 
 
 c. Give the quantity of the penult and ultima of the follo\ving 
 words : KM/iai., Kcofia^ BiKat^ dvpat, ye(f)vpa, rj/JLepav.) irelpav 
 
 (III.). 
 
 ^ This is only an apparent exception, since the stem vowel -a and the 
 gen. ending -av are contracted, so that d-av becomes av (153). 
 
FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 23 
 
 46. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Give the Greek words for honor, village, captain, tent, 
 believe, rivers proceed. 
 
 djjia^a, -179, wagon, yjjipa.^ -d?, land, country, 
 
 y€(j)vpa, -d?, bridge. ayadj], good, brave, fertile, 
 
 Slktj, -7] <;, justice [syi\-dic]. Kakij, beautiful. 
 
 Ovpd, -d?, door [door].^ ayco, lead, carry [axiom]. 
 
 OdXarra, -7)^, sea, ^X^' have. 
 
 rjfjiepd, -d?, day [eph-eme- et?, prep, with ace, to, into. 
 
 ral]. e/c,^ prep, with gen., from, 
 
 Treipa, -d?, trial, experience out of ; ef before vowels. 
 
 [em-piric, ex-perience] . eV, prep, with dat., in^ on, 
 
 (TTpaTid, -d9j army. during. 
 (t)v\aKy]y -779, garrison. 
 
 47. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Trjq TLfJLrj<;, Trj<; Slk7]<;, rfj neCpa, tcjv ireipcov, 
 TTjv ^(i)pav. 2. xd)pa dyaOrj? r) dyadrj ^oipa, rj KaXrf 
 Kcofjirj, X^P^ koXtj. 3. daXdrrrj^;, Tr^v ddXaTTai/, €19 ttjp 
 OdXarrav, e/c T179 OaXdrnqf;. 4. iK t(ov KcofjiCJv ikavvei. 
 5. et9 rv^v x<^P^^ Ikavvovcri. 6. \vovq-i rr/v yi^vpav. 
 7. iv rfj rffiepa Kvpo<; ekavvei. 8. Treipav e^€i9 t'^9 
 (TTpcLTid^. 9. eK Trj<; 6a\dTTrj<; iXavveu et9 rrjif ^w/oai^. 
 
 II.' 1. He sends a garrison. 2. He leads an army 
 into the villages. 3. They destroy the tents. 4. The 
 captain has justice. 5. On the day Cyrus sends the 
 army. 
 
 1 Cognate word (504). « See 101. 
 
 * Adjectives agree with their nouns as does the article (13, 3, a). 
 
24 
 
 BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK, 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 A DECLENSION. MASCULINES. 
 
 Review Lessons V., VIL, Note 40. 
 
 48. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 Sez^tds, 6 ^ 
 
 (TaTpd7Tr)<;, 6 
 
 oifKiTiq^y 
 
 Xenias 
 
 satrap 
 
 Singular. 
 
 hoplite 
 
 N. Sertds 
 
 crarp (1777^9 
 
 ottXiVt;? 
 
 G. BevLov 
 
 (Tarpdirov 
 
 ottXCtov 
 
 D. BevCa 
 
 (rarpoLTTin 
 
 oTrXiTrj 
 
 A. Bevidv 
 
 craTpd7T7]v 
 
 ottXlttjv 
 
 V. BevCd 
 
 craTpoLTrrj 
 
 Dual. 
 
 oTrXtrd 
 
 N. A. V. (815) 
 
 crarpaTrd 
 
 onXiTa 
 
 G. D. 
 
 crarpdiraiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 . oirXiTaiv 
 
 N. V. 
 
 craTpdiTai 
 
 OTrXcrat 
 
 G. 
 
 (Tar pair (ov 
 
 ottXltcop 
 
 D. 
 
 crarpdiTaLf; 
 
 OTrXtrat? 
 
 A. 
 
 craTpdird^ 
 
 OTrXtrd? * 
 
 49. Case endings of the A Declension united with 
 the final vowel of the stem, are as follows : 
 
 * The article prefixed or affixed to a substantive in the paradigms or 
 vocabularies indicates the gender: 6, masc, ^, fera., t6, neut. 
 
MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 25 
 
 Singular. ■'Dual. Plural. 
 
 Feminine. Masculine. Masc. & Fern. Masc. & Fern. 
 
 N. -a or -a -r) -a? -179 N. -ai 
 
 G. -as or -7)<; -7/9 -ov -ov N.A.V. -d G. -wz^ (-dcov) 
 
 D. -a or-]7 -]7 -a -77 G.D. -atz/ J), -at? 
 
 A. -di' or -ai' -rjv 'dv ~r)v A. -d? 
 
 V. -d or -d -t; -d ->; or -d V. -at 
 
 Observe that the mascu- 
 lines of the A Declension are 
 like the feminines except in 
 the following particulars : 
 
 1. Final d of the stem is 
 retained in the nom. after e, l 
 or /3, as in the feminines, but 
 otherwise it if* changed to rj. 
 
 2. They have the case 
 ending -9 in the nom. sing, 
 and -ov in the gen. sing.^ 
 
 3. Nouns in -T7/9 have vo- 
 cative in d : TroXtrd, oTrXtrd. 
 
 50. Decline 6 Mapav- 
 dg, 6 To^oTTjf;, 6 TreXra- 
 cttt;?, 6 <TTpaTLa)Tr)<;, 6 
 'Opovrds,^ 6 'ApTa^ep^r)<;, 
 
 51. Conjugate the pres. 
 ind. act. and mid. of 
 ayo), Xvct), e^w, Xajx^dpa). 
 
 No. 1. 'OTrXiVr;?. 
 
 ^ A few nouns, especially proper names, retain the Doric genitive a, 
 having a or ov in the gen. sing. ; in other respects they are like nouns 
 in -as. 
 
26 beginner's greek book. 
 
 52. vocabulary. 
 
 Give the Greek words for experience^ good, brave, 
 beautiful, in, into, from, plan, say^ send. 
 
 ' APpoK6iJLd<;, -a, Abrocomas. (TTpaTLc^r)*;, -ov, soldier, 
 
 * Kpra^ip^iqs, -ov, Artaxer- to^ov, to, bow, 
 
 xes. To^oTYjf;, -ov, bowman. 
 
 Mapo-vdq, -ov, MarsyaSy a (No. 3) 
 
 satyr. ySao-tXeuo), -€t9, be king, 
 
 Bellas, -ovj Xenias. Xafx^dvo), -€t9, receive, cap" 
 
 677X17179, -ov, a heavy-ar7ned ture [di-lemma]. 
 
 foot soldier^ hoplite. rjv, {he, she, it) teas, 3d 
 
 (No. 1) sing. impf. of dp.i, to 
 
 'OpovTa^, -a, -ov, Orontas. be, 
 
 7re\TaaT7]<;, -ov, [peltastj, '^aav, (they) were, 3d pi. 
 
 targeteer. (No. 2) impf. of et/it, to be. 
 
 7T€Xtt], -rj<;, small and light ivravOa, adv., there, there- 
 shield, target, upon, 
 
 o-aTpdirrj^, -ov [satrap], a co, interj. 0, with voc. usual- 
 
 Persian viceroy. ly best left untranslated. 
 
 Notice the common element of ireXTT) and TrekTao-rrj^, 
 (TTpoTid and (TTpaTLa)T7]<;, ro^ov and to^ott)^. 
 
 53. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. 6 irekTacrrrjf; TrekTrjv e)^et. 2 6 To^6Tr}<; ro ^ 
 To^ov €)(ei. 3. ivTavOa oirXiTri^^ tjv. 4. OTrXtrat iv 
 rai? Kcofiaif; rjcrav. 5. rjaav ev rfi aTparid roforat. 
 
 ^ Force of a possessive pronoun (9). 
 
MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 27 
 
 G. *Apra^€p^r)<; ^acrikevei, 7. aevLa<; dyet Toifs ottXC- 
 ras et9 ttjv )(copav. 8. w *0p6vTa, 
 rov<; (TTpaTioyra^ Xafx/Baveis ; XafM- 
 ^dv(j}. 9. iv TTj X^P^ Acw/xat Kakai 
 Tjcrav. 10. 6 7reXra(m79 /xeVet eV rrj 
 
 KCOfJirj. 11. €19 KCOfJLTJV TOV ^ A/BpOKOfia 
 
 iXavvei. 12. CTTparicoTaL, ra? TreXras 
 e;)(eT€ ; ra? TreXra? e^oixev. 13. 6 
 a-arpdirrj^ dyeu tovs ro^ora'^ Ik t(x)v 
 
 (TKriVO)V. No. 2. IIcXTao-Tiis. 
 
 54. 1. Explain the agreement of the article in these 
 sentences (13, 3, a), 
 
 2. Apply the rules for the case of the subject, object, 
 and agreement of the verb (36, 37, 38). 
 
 55. Arrangement of the principal parts of a sentence. 
 
 a. Observe that the subject regularly stands first in the sen- 
 tence, and the copula last (3, 4), and the object before the verb. 
 
 h. Observe that when this order is changed, it is for em- 
 phasis, or to express better the relation of the following ideas to 
 the preceding ^ (53, 5). A favorite position of the verb in 
 Greek is in the middle of the sentence (53, 1, 10, 13). 
 
 Examine the vocatives in 53, 8, 12. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 56. The name of the person or thing addressed is 
 put in the vocative with or without w. 
 
 1 Let the pupil always seek clearness. The Greek allows a greater 
 variety in the collocation of the parts of a sentence than tlie Latin, which the 
 pupil can best note in connected discourse (107). 
 
28 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 57- 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Orontas speaks. 
 
 No. 3. To$6t7}<s. 
 
 2. The satrap deliberates. 
 
 3. Xenias has hoplites. 
 
 4. There the army re- 
 mains. 5. The soldiers 
 destroy the wagons. 
 6. There was a beautiful 
 village. 7. [There] ^ were 
 brave soldiers in the army. 
 8. He marches from 
 the villages into the 
 country. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 SECOND, OR O DECLENSION. 
 
 Review Lessons IV. ; V. Note (9, 10 ; 13, 1, 2) ; VIL 
 Note (40, 43, 3) ; VIII. 
 
 58. The stem of the second declension ends in o, 
 corresponding to the second declension in Latin. Its 
 nom. sing. masc. ends in s and its neut. in v, and the 
 voc. masc. sing, ends in e. The nom., ace, and voc. of 
 the neut. follow the rule for the article (10, d). 
 
 59. Decline 6 -Trora/x-o?, 6 Xo^ctydg, 6 o-rpaTo^; with 
 the article (12), observing that the stem-vowel of the 
 
 1 Omit. There is no word in Greek for the expletive there. 
 
NOUNS OF SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 29 
 
 second declension is like that of the article (to) united 
 with the same case endings, except as indicated above 
 (58). 
 
 60. Decline to to^ov with the same endings as those 
 of the neuter article (10), except that the nora., ace, 
 and voc. sing, have case-ending -v (58). 
 
 61. 
 
 
 Paradigms.^ 
 
 
 
 
 olvo^, 6 
 
 dvOpCOTTOS, 6 
 
 6809, 7) 
 
 SoipOV, TO 
 
 
 wine 
 
 man 
 
 Singular. 
 
 road 
 
 sift 
 
 N. 
 
 oXvo<; 
 
 dv9pco7ros 
 
 6809 
 
 Scopov 
 
 G. 
 
 olvov 
 
 dvOpCOTTOV 
 
 oSov 
 
 Scopov 
 
 D. 
 
 OlV(x) 
 
 dvOpCOTTO) 
 
 « '> 
 
 00(p 
 
 Scopco 
 
 A. 
 
 olvov 
 
 dvdpcoTTOv 
 
 oBov 
 
 Sojpov 
 
 V. 
 
 ohe 
 
 dvOpoDire 
 
 Dual. 
 
 oSe 
 
 Bcopov 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 OLVO) 
 
 dvOpCOTTO) 
 
 68(0 
 
 Sa>p(o 
 
 G.D. 
 
 olvoiv 
 
 dvOpCOTTOLV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 68o2v 
 
 BcOpOLV 
 
 N.V. 
 
 olvOL 
 
 dvOpojTroL 
 
 680L 
 
 Scopa 
 
 G. 
 
 OLVCOV 
 
 dvOpCOTTCJV 
 
 oScjv 
 
 Batpcov 
 
 D. 
 
 OLVOL<; 
 
 dvOpamoL<; 
 
 68ot9 
 
 8ft>/30t9 
 
 A. 
 
 OLvov<; 
 
 dv9p(07rov<; 
 
 680V9 
 
 hwpa 
 
 a. Observe that nouns of the O Declension with the case- 
 ending -9 in the nom. sing, are masculine, rarely feminine. 
 
 h. Observe that all nouns of the Declension with the 
 case-ending -v in the nom. sing, are neuter. 
 
 ^ Let the pupil first decline these words as above, and then, if necessary, 
 correct them by the paradigms and commit to memory. 
 
30 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 (1) How do the gen. and dat. of masc. and neut. 
 nouns of all numbers compare ? 
 
 (2) How do the nom. and voc. of the masc. dual and 
 plur. compare ? 
 
 (3) Give the rule for the form of the nom., ace, and 
 voc. of the neut. sing, and plur. 
 
 (4) What quantity has a of the nom. plur. of the 
 neut. ? 
 
 62. Decline 6 TrdXe/xo?, 6 \6xo<;, 6 Kvpo<;, 6 crTparr)- 
 yds, TO ottXov, to TreSiop* 
 
 63. Conjugate the pres. ind. act. and mid. : Xvco, 
 (j)aLvo)y (\>4po}. 
 
 64. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Maporva<; Slktjj/ €)(eL, 2. 6 avOpcxiiro^ ev tco^ oIko) 
 rjv. 3. 'Ay8/)Ofcd/xa9, <3 Kvpe, iropeveTai ; 4. ^v rj 
 dSo9 (TTeviq. 5. tov oXvov ovk ^^op^ev. 6. ret rdfa iv 
 TTJ o-Kr]vrj ^v. 7. TOi oirka iirl dfia^cjv ayerai. 8. ol 
 (TTpaTLcoTai TOL^ oVXa (jyepovCL. 9. ol (TTpaTrjyol /cat 
 OL Xox^ayol rjcrav iTrl rat? Ovpais. 10. 6 dvOpa)TTO<; 
 Kvpcp Xeyei. 11. Kvpo<; toI<; o-TpaTLCOTaus tol Scopa 
 7re/x7rei. 12. koI 6^ Kvpo<; aTroTre/xTret tov<; Saapov<; 
 * ApTa^ep^rj. 13. (^yaivovTai koX lttttol /cat avOpcoiroi. 
 
 Examine 6, 7, and observe that the neuter plural subjects 
 have singular verbs. 
 
 ^ What force lias this article ? 
 
 2 The article is used with proper names in the sense of " well known " 
 or as "previously mentioned," "the said," etc. 
 
nouns of second declension. 31 
 
 Rule. 
 
 65. A neuter plural subject regularly takes a singu- 
 lar verb. 
 
 Examine the datives in 10, 11, 12, and observe that they 
 express the object (person or thing) indirectly affected by the 
 action of the verb. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 66. The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative. 
 
 Observe that the indirect or remote object regularly comes 
 before the verb and its object (11); but when the verb comes 
 in the middle of the sentence, it follows the verb, either before 
 or after its object (12; cf. 55, «, ¥). 
 
 67. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Boats were on the river. 2. The captain receives 
 a company. 3. The way was long and narrow. 4. The 
 general leads the army into the plain. 5. The hoplite 
 speaks to Cyrus. 6. Clearchus sends a messenger to 
 Cyrus. 7. The army appears in the plain. 
 
 68. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Sacr/xo9, 6, fax. olvo<;, 6, wine (Lat. vinum) 
 
 KXea/))(09, o, Clearchus, [wine]. 
 
 \6xo^, 6, company, ottXov, im/plement ; onXa, 
 
 Xo)(^ay6s, 6, captain [Xo- arms [pan-oply]. 
 
 X0<; + ayw], tteSlop, plain, 
 
 6So9, 17, loay^ road [ex- 77X0101^, boat, 
 
 odus, peri-od]. 
 
32 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 (TTparos^o^encairipedarm^i Kau, and (Lsit.et); kol . . . 
 
 force, army. Kau, both . . . and, 
 
 (TTpaT7)y6si 6, ^eneral[(TTpa- iiri, prep., w. gen . on, upon ; 
 
 709+ ayw; stratagem]. w. dat., on, by, at; w. 
 
 fta/cpd?, -a/ -6v, long. ace, upon, to, at 
 
 (TTevo^, -7], -6v, narrow. [epi-gram]. 
 
 dTTO-Tre/xTTCt), send off, back, ov, ovk, ov^, ^^6g. adv., 
 
 remit. not (Lat. non) ; ov be- 
 
 ^olvoiy show, mid. appear comes ovk before a 
 
 [phenomenon]. smooth vowel, ovx be- 
 
 <^€/>a>, bear, briny, carry (Lat. fore a rough. 
 fero) [bear]. 
 
 69. What words in the preceding vocabularies have 
 a common element with o-rparo^ and aTparrjyos? 
 What common element in Xd;j(os and Xoxayos ? 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 
 
 Review 9, 10, 13, 3, a; 4^1, a, b, c ; 43, 1, 2, 3; 
 Lesson IX.^ 
 
 70. The stem of these adjectives ends in o and a 
 (40, 58), like the nouns of the Second and First Declen- 
 sions, and are therefore declined with the same endings. 
 The masc. and neut. follow the O Declension, and the 
 
 ^ The feminine of the adjective follows tlie A declension. 
 2 The lesson of the precedin^^ day should always be reviewed, and the 
 preceding ones as often as possible. 
 
• ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION. 33 
 
 fern, the A. Long a in the feminine is retained after 
 e, I, or p ; otherwise it is changed to rj. Thus the nom. 
 sing, ends in 09, 17 or d, ov (Latin -us, -a, -myi) : S77X09, 
 SijXr), SrjXov ; d^LO^;, dfta, d^Lov. 
 
 71. Some adjectives in og, especially compounds, are 
 decHned with two sets of endings, having the masc. and 
 fem. alike : diropo^y -ov ; dfia^LTo^, -ov ; pdp^apo<;, -ov. 
 
 72. Adjectives follow the rule for the accent of nouns, 
 except in the nom. and gen. plur. of the vowel declen- 
 sion, the fem. follows the accent of the masc. : d^ioi, 
 a^-tat ; agucov, agtwf . 
 
 73. Hereafter the paradigms requiring special notice 
 only will be given in the lessons. All others may be 
 found iu the appendix. But the pupil whenever possi- 
 ble should first inflect the words as in 61, and then 
 compare his work with the paradigms. Decline : 1. Srj- 
 X09, hijXrjy SrjXov ; 2. d^LO^, d^id, d^LOv (817). 
 
 74. Decline: 1. <^i\o9, -rj, -ov; c^tXto?, -d, -ov ; 
 2. iiaKp6<^^ -dy.ov ', a/xa^irdg, -ov. 
 
 75. Decline : 6 dyaOo^ 677X17179 ; 17 /xa/cpa oSos ; to 
 Kokov Scopov, 
 
 76. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. rj Tip.7) dfta ecrrt. 2. iv rat? c^iXiat? ^oipai^ 
 elcrL 3. KXea/)^09 TrefJiTreu rov to^ottjv to2^ crTpaTicO' 
 rat?. 4. T0^6Ty]<? dyado^ iv ttj Tiixr} tj v. 5. 6 dyaOo^ 
 dvdpojTTo^; iv rw oikm icTTi. 6. 877X77 -qv r) Itti^ovXtj. 
 7. Tj irdpoSo^ Tjv 6S6^ ctjLtaf trd?. 8. €)(€i rj KiXtcrcra 
 rj ao(j)r) kol KaXr) ^uXafca?. 9. ol dyaOoi Kvpov </)iXo6 
 Tjcrav. 10. cTTpaTLcoTaL rjaav ol Kvpov (^iXot. 11. Ota 
 
31 THE IVEGINNEll's GREEK BOOK. . 
 
 <^tXta9 rrjs \(x)pa^ ayei 6 (rarpdTrrjf; tov<; crrpariwra?, 
 12. ol CTT/oartajrat ol cvv Kkedp^cp iv Seftct rjcrav. 
 
 POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 77. The attributive adjective qualities the noun di- 
 rectly without the intervention of a verb (2, 4, 5). 
 
 78. When a noun without the article is moditied by 
 an attributive adjective, the adjective regularly follows 
 the noun (4, 7). It is changed for emphasis. 
 
 79. When a noun with the article is modified by the 
 attributive adjective, the adjective always has an article 
 before it, and is said to be in the Attributive Position 
 (2.5,8). 
 
 a. Regularly the order is, as in English, article, adjective, 
 noun; but when the article with adjective follows the noun, the 
 noun may have another article before it : o ayaOb<; avOpcoTro^;, 
 dvdpoJTTO^ 6 ayaOoi^ 6 avOpcoiro^ 6 ayaOoi (8). 
 
 b. All attributive phrases regularly take the attributive po- 
 sition (10, 12). 
 
 80. The predicate adjective forms part of the pred- 
 icate, and is connected with its noun by a copula or an 
 equivalent verb (1, 0). 
 
 81. When a noun with the article is modified by a 
 predicate adjective, the adjective never has the article 
 before it, and is said to be in the Predicate Position, 
 that is, the adjective stands as it might with the copula 
 expressed or understood : 6 cti/^pcuTro? Q.y<iBQ<i (ecrrt) ; 
 aya^09 6 av9pco7ro<; (cWi) (1, 6, 11). 
 
ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION. 35 
 
 82. An adjective, as in English, generally with the 
 article, may be used as a noun (9). Any phrase with an 
 article may have the same force : ol avv KXedp^oi eV 
 Sefta yjaav (12). 
 
 83. Agreement of Adjectives. 
 
 An adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, 
 and case. The article, adjective pronouns, and partici- 
 ples conform to this rule. 
 
 84. Predicate Noun and Adjective. 
 
 With verbs signifying to be, to appear, to be named, 
 etc., a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same 
 case as the subject (1, 6, 9, 10). 
 
 85. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. The general leads the brave hoplites into a friendly 
 country. 2. He marches into a beautiful plain. 3. The 
 noble were the friends of Cyrus. 4. The Greek army 
 was on the right. 5. The men in the country were 
 friendly. 
 
 86. VOCABULARY. 
 
 eTTL-^ovkT], plot, design, af to?, -d, -ov, worthy, valaa- 
 
 KtXtcrcra, Cilician queen, hie, 
 
 oIfco9, 6, house, home [eco- Sefiog, -a, -6v<f right ; kv Se-. 
 
 iiomy]. fta, on the right, 
 
 7rdp-oSo<s, 7), way, passage, 8rjko<;, -rj, -op, clear, mani' 
 
 pass. /est, evident. 
 
 dya96<;,'rj,'6v, good, brave. 'EXX-y/i/t/co?, -rj, -op, Greek, 
 dfia^LTo^;, 'OP, passable for [Hellenic]. 
 
 wagons (dfia^a). Ka\6^, -t], -op, beautiful, noble 
 
86 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 ao(j)6<;, -7], -6v, wise [philo- etcri, {fhei/) are, 3d plur. 
 
 sophy], pres. of etjut. 
 
 <^iXio5, -a, -ovy friendly, es- Sta, prep., w. gen., through; 
 
 pecially of countries. w. ace, on account of 
 
 <^tXo9, -7), -ov, friendly ; o [dia-meter]. 
 
 </>tXo9, a friend [Phil-ip, (fvv^ prep. w. dat., with, in 
 
 philtre, philo-sophyj. company loith, by the aid 
 
 i(TTL, {lie, she, it) is, 3d sing. of [syn-opsis]. 
 
 pres. of et/xt, be. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 TRANSLITERATION. 
 
 Review L, IL, III., IV., V., VI., VIL, VIII. I, 2, n. ; 
 41, a,b,c', 48, 58, 61. 
 
 87. Greek proper names and Greek words are bor- 
 rowed or written in English with Latin letters expressed 
 in Latin form. They are then accented as in Latin, 
 according to the quantity of the penult, ^nd pronounced 
 with the English pronunciation : Kv/>09, Cyrus ; 'AySpo- 
 KOfid^, Abrocomas. 
 
 88. Examine the following : 
 
 1 . IleXrat, Feltae 
 
 2. 'Aptato9, Ariaeus 
 
 3. Adpeio?, Darius 
 
 4. BotcuTLo?, Boeotian ^ 
 
 5. SoXot, Soli 
 
 6. Taper OL, Tarsus 
 
 7. TXov<;, Glus 
 
 8. MtkrjTo^, Miletus 
 
 9. Svfji/3pLov, Thymbrium 
 
 10. %7rdpTrj, Sparta 
 
 1 1 . (jydXay^, phalanx 
 
 12. kvk\o<;, cycle' 
 
 ^ When the name has a well-known EngKsh form, tliis should be used. 
 Such only are regularly printed in full-faced type. 
 
TRANSLITERATION. 3? 
 
 a. Observe that in transliterating,^ the consonants and vowels 
 are regularly represented by the Latin letters as given in the 
 alphabet (I.) ; that the diphthongs are represented as follows : 
 
 1. ai by ae ; eu by ^ or ^; oi by oe ; ov by u. 
 
 2. c subscript is omitted in transliteration. 
 
 6. Observe that a, o, av, ev are regularly unchanged, but the 
 terminations of the nouns, ac, 09, ov, and ot, etc., are altered to 
 suit the Latin declensions : 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10. 
 
 1. 7 before 7, /c, ^, or f, becomes n (VL). 
 
 89. Write in Latin letters : 
 
 'Apraf 6)0^7)9, 'A;)(ato?5 Ev(j)pdTrj(;, 'icovia, ^l(TcroL, Ke- 
 XatvaC, KikiKLa, KXedpcop) ^Opovra^, Soc^atVero?, Xvpia, 
 3,€vo(j)a>Vy Tvpialov, ^OLvtKT], X€Lpicro(f)o<;, TavXlTT)^. 
 
 90. Write in Greek letters : Arabia, Babylon,^ Boe- 
 otia, Castolus,^ Colossae,^ Lydia, Marsyas, Proxenus, 
 Phrygia, Roina. 
 
 91. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Kai To2<; (TTpaTL(t)TaL<; cx^eCkerai fjucrOo^;. 2. ^o- 
 (j>aLV€To<; 6 ^rvfJL(j)d\Lo<; OTrXtra? e^et ^tXtou?. 3. /xe- 
 vovcFiv ^ iv ^6koi<^ /cat 'Icrcrois. 4. ef 'Et^eVou dyerai 
 Tov arpaTov. 5. ^coKpdTrjf; 6 'A^atog OTrXtra? e^et 
 7r€VTaKO(TLOv<; Koi ^tX.tov9. 6. ivrevOev e^ekavvei crraO- 
 jLtov9 Svo Trapa(rdyya<s Se/ca em tov "^dpov irorafjiov. 
 7. ivrevOev e^ekavvei crra9iJiov<; rrevre 7rapaadyya<; €lko- 
 (TLv^ €1<;'Ik6vlov. ivravOa fxeveuSvo rjfji€pa<;. 8. ivrev- 
 
 ^ Some prefer to transliterate proper names directly into English, and 
 accent and pronounce tliem as any other Greek words. 
 
 ^ Oxytone. 
 
 * V movable is added to words ending in at before a word beginning 
 with a vowel (100). 
 
38 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 6ev Kvpof; ttjv KiXLcrcrav et9 Tr)v KiXiKuav aTroTri^Tru, 
 9. ivTevOev i^ekavveu aTa0^ov<; Suo irapacrdyya^; 6/ctcj 
 els IleXra?. ivravOa fjuevei rifjuepas iTrrd. 
 
 Examine the relation of the first and second substantives in 
 2, 5, and observe that the second,, denoting the same person (or 
 thing) as the firsts is annexed to it to describe it. This is called 
 ajppositioiij and the words so annexed^ appositives. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 92. An appositive agrees in case with the substan- 
 tive which it qualifies. 
 
 a. Names of rivers and countries regularly have the attribu- 
 tive position : -6. 
 
 Examine o-raOfiov^ and 7rapao-dyya<i in 6, 7, and rj/jLepa^; in 
 7j 9, and observe their relation to the verb. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 93. The extent of time or space is expressed by the 
 accusative. 
 
 94. . EXERCISES. 
 
 1. The river appears impassable. 2. Clearchus was 
 a Lacedaemonian. 3. The allies were in Miletus. 
 4. Proxenus has five hundred hoplites. 5. And Cle- 
 archus the Lacedaemonian has come. 6. Thence he 
 marches two stages, five parasangs, into Thymbrium. 
 
 95. VOCABULARY. 
 
 *'E<^ecro9, rj, Ephesus} Aa/ceSat/xdi'to?, 6, Lacedae- 
 
 ^Ikovlov, Iconium. , monian, 
 
 ^ Proper names hereafter will be omitted from the special vocabularies. 
 
ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 
 
 39 
 
 fjLLaOo'^, 6, wages^pay. 
 TTapao-dyyrj^, -ov^parasang, 
 
 three and one third miles. 
 ITeXrai, -oiv^ Peltae. 
 crra^/xd?, 6, station, stage, 
 
 a days march. 
 Sru)Lt(/)aXto9, 6, Stymphalian. 
 (TvfjL-iJLaxos, 6, ally \_cnjp^ 
 
 + t^^xn]' 
 
 X(oKpdrr)<;y Socrates. 
 ^a/309, 6, JPsarus. 
 diropo^;, -ov, without means, 
 
 impassable [d + 7r6po<;, 
 
 means\ 
 SeKa, indecL, ten [decade]. 
 
 Svo, two, 
 
 eiKocTLy indecl., twenty. 
 
 iiTTd, indecl., seven [hepta- 
 gon]. 
 
 oKToj, indecl., eight [octa- 
 gon].^ 
 
 TrevTOL-KocnoLy -at, -a, five 
 hundred. 
 
 irivre, indecl., Jive [penta- 
 gon]. 
 
 ^tXtot, -ai, -a, one thousand. 
 
 i^-ekavvQ), march on. 
 
 rJKO), come, he or have come. 
 
 6(^etXa), owe ; pass. due. 
 
 ivTevOep, adv., thence. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 
 
 96. In reading rapidly any Greek author three 
 things are necessary, — a thorough knowledge of the 
 words, of the inflections, and of the syntax. 
 
 1. In acquiring the vocabularies, the allied words 
 should be grouped about the root or stem-word, (510, 
 f. f.) and the borrowed and corresponding Latin words 
 noted. Every word should be reviewed, either sepa- 
 rately or by its use in sentences, until the Greek word 
 instantly suggests its meaning, and its meaning the 
 word. 
 
 1 See 194, 4. 
 
40 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 2. The forms of the inflections should be classified 
 as much as possible, that the old may explain the new, 
 and the new review the old (9, 11, 12). 
 
 3. The rules of syntax should be thoroughly learned 
 as modes of thought, and the pupil should be able to 
 give the forms of construction, either from reading or 
 from the dictation of the teacher, as rapidly as he would 
 give those of his own language. 
 
 97. Rules for Heading. 
 
 1. Read the sentences aloud in the original. Strive 
 to recall the meaning of the w^ords, observing their 
 inflectional endings and grammatical relations. 
 
 2. Endeavor to classify new forms and words with 
 those already known, ascertaining their meaning either 
 by word analysis or from the context. 
 
 3. Repeat the process again and again, if need be, 
 before referring to the vocabularies. 
 
 4. Arrive at the thought in the order of the Greek 
 words, and translate according to the sense of the author 
 into idiomatic English. 
 
 5. Exercises in rapid oral and written translations 
 must be repeated until the pupil thoroughly grasps the 
 form of the Greek sentence, and at once comprehends 
 the thought. 
 
 98. 1. In translating English into Greek, seek first 
 the thought to be put into Greek. 
 
 2. Compose the entire thought or sentence aloud in 
 the form of a Greek model, and then commit to memory. 
 
 99. Elision. A final short vowel may be dropped 
 
ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 41 
 
 when the next word begins with a vowel. This is 
 called elision. An apostrophe ( ' ) marks the elision : 
 6 8' '^v for 6 Se '^v. . 
 
 a. Elision is most common in prepositions, conjunctions, ad- 
 verbs, pronouns, and other short common words. 
 
 b. Oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent 
 with the elided vowel ; other oxytone words throw it back on 
 the penult : eirr rjaav (eTrra). 
 
 100. V movable, v may be added to most words 
 ending in -crt (including -ft and -\\fi), to all verbs in the 
 third person singular in -e, and to ecrrt, when the next 
 word begins with a vowel. This is called v movable. 
 It may also be added at the end of a sentence : e. g. 
 ixivovaiv iv SoXots ; ctti rat? Ovpai^ fxevovcTLP, 
 
 loi. Proclitics, The proclitics are words of one 
 syllable that attach themselves so closely to the follow- 
 ing word as not to have a separate accent, and are 
 pronounced as if a part of the following word : 6, eV, 
 e/c, et9, et, w?, ov. 
 
 102. Enclitics, The enclitics are words of one or 
 more syllables, that attach themselves so closely to the 
 preceding word as to lose their own accent, and are pro- 
 nounced as a part of the preceding word : aya66<; ecrrt 
 (dya^d? — icTTi), 
 
 103. 1. The enclitic loses its accent, except a dis- 
 syllabic enclitic after a paroxytone : afta ecrrt. 
 
 2. A word before an enclitic always preserves its 
 own accent, and never changes an acute to the grave : 
 ayad6<; iaTL. 
 
42 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 3. If it is pro-paroxytone or -perispomenon, it adds 
 an acute to the ultima : dvOpcoiro^ icri ; hrj\6v e'crrt. 
 
 4. If proclitic, it takes an acute : ex /xou ; ovtb 
 (ov ~\- re). 
 
 104. Enclitics retain their accents : 
 
 1. Whenever special emphasis falls upon them : ov 
 
 / 1 
 crot. 
 
 2. When the preceding syllable is elided : /caXos 8' 
 eaTL ; ocjp ecrriv. 
 
 3. ecrrt has the recessive accent, ecrri, at the begin- 
 ning of a sentence, when it signifies existence or possi- 
 bility, and after certain words, as, ovk^ fxij, el, w?, /cat, 
 dXXa ; ^ ecrrt cro(f>os avO pcx)Tro<; ; ovk ecmv dvOpcjiro^. 
 
 105. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Kvpo<; e\ei <j)vXaKd<;. 2. Kvpco^ ecrrt (f)vXaK7]. 
 3. e^et KXeap^o? cTTparov. 4. '^v KXeap^w (TTpaTo^. 
 5. Kv/ao) paaikeia rjv. 6. 'ApLcrmnro^ Se 6 ©erraXo? 
 fei^o? ^i^ Kupw. 7. e^' fJiecro) tov irapaheiaov elal at 
 Tou TTOTajJiov TTTjyai. 8. ai 8e Trrj-yal at rou iroTap^ov 
 elcTLv iK TO)v ySao-tXetwj/.. 9. 'i^i/ Kvpw TrdXe/xog 7rpo9 
 {a(/ainst) ^KpTa^ip^rjv. 10. Treiderai re koX cruXXa/x,- 
 jBoiveL Kvpov. 11. ecTTt 8e /cat ^Apra^ep^ov ^acrtXeta 
 ez^ KeXati^at?. 12. ou /xeV etcrti' KXectp^w cru/^/xa^ot, 
 rail/ 8e irokefjiiaiv cru/x/xa^ot ctcrt fivpLOL. 
 
 Examine tlie datives in 2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and observe that 
 they are used with a copulative verb and denote the possessor.* 
 
 1 This will be explained later (392). 
 
 2 After these words ela-L retains its accent. 
 
 8 In the order of words, " To Cyrus is a garrison ; " iu English, 
 " Cyrus has a garrison." 
 
 ^ exa does not necessarily denote possession. 
 
essentials for reading. 43 
 
 Rule. 
 
 106. The dative with the verb to he (ei/^t, yiyvo\LCki) 
 and similar verbs may denote the possessor. 
 
 107. Translate at sight : 
 
 The Palaces of Cyrus and Artaxerxes. 
 
 'EpT€v9ev i^ekavvei 8ta ^pvyCci^ crraOixov irapa- 
 crdyya<; oktcj els KoXocrcrct?. 'E^raO^a /xeVei rjfjiepas 
 eTTToi' Kol 7JK€. M.iv(x}v 6 ©erraXo? oTrXtrag i^ojv {hav- 
 in(/) yikiovs kol TreXracrTa? TrevraKoaiov^^ *O\vv0iov<^. 
 ^EvTevdep i^ekavvei crraO^JLom Trivre Trapacrdyya'S et- 
 KOQ-L KOL TTcWe ct? KcXatj^ct?. 'EpTavda Kvpco ySacrt- 
 Xeta '^v KOL 7rapdSeLcro<;. Ata fieaov Se tov irapaheiaov 
 pel {Jloivs) 6 MauapS pos Trora/^o? * at Se 7rr)yai avTov 
 (it) elcTLv eK tcov f^acrikeicov ' pel Se kol Slol KeXati/oji/. 
 ^Ecrrt 8e kol 'Apra^ep^ov /BacriXeia ev KeXat^ai? eVl 
 rat9 TrrjyoLS tov Mapcrvov iroTafiov. 
 
 Note the position of rjKe, e^cDv, K.vpq), irapaheicrov^ irora- 
 fjLo^^ 'K7]^ai^ and compare with 55, ay h. See foot-note, p. 27. 
 
 108. Translate into Greek : 
 
 In Celaenae Cyrus had a palace and a park. Put 
 through the middle of the park flows the Maeander 
 river; and it flows also through Celaenae. And Arta- 
 xerxes also "had a palace in Celaenae. 
 
 log. VOCABULARY. 
 
 /SacrtXcto?, -o^', royal; pecros, -rj, -ov,. middle ; 
 
 ^aaiketovy to, or /8acri- pecrov, to, the middle 
 
 Xeta, Td, jjalace, [Meso-potamia]. 
 
44 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 fjLvpL0<;, -a, -OP, countless TroXejjLos, 6, tvar. 
 
 [myriad]. irokefjuos, -d, -ov, hostile 
 
 fjivpioL, -at, -a, ten thousand, [polemic]. 
 
 ^ivof;, b, guest-friend; guest, ol TTokefjuoL, the enemy, 
 TTapdSeLcro^, 6, park [par- cruX-Xa/xySai^o)/ seize, arrest 
 
 adise] . [syllable] . 
 
 inqyTj^-yj^;, fountain, source. 
 Se, post-posit, conj., but ; sometimes rendered and ; kol 
 
 . . . §€ or Se . . . Kai, and also ; /cat here has the 
 
 force of also, 
 Ijl4v, post-posit, adv., on the one hand, indeed, truly, hut ; 
 
 usually not translated; regularly with correlative 8e: 
 
 pkv . . . 8e, on the one hand . . . on the other, but 
 
 usually rendered only by emphasis. 
 re, post-posit, end. conj., and; Lat., -que; re . . . /cat 
 
 or re /cat, both . . . and. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 IMPERFECT OF Xvw. PRESENT INFINITIVE 
 ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Review Lesson VI. Note especially 19, 20, 22, 23, 
 25, 27, Obs.; 30, 31, 32. 
 
 no. In Greek, as in Latin, the tenses (1-6, b) are 
 divided into primary and secondary. The secondary 
 tenses refer to past time; all others are primary. 
 
 1 For (Tvv- (194, 4). 
 
IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 45 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 
 Infinitive, 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 eXvop 
 eXves 
 
 lXv6\ki]v 
 iXvov 
 
 iXvofirji' 
 
 Xv^iv 
 
 eXve 
 
 iXveTov^ 
 
 iXveT7]v 
 
 iXvofiev 
 
 iXiere 
 
 iXv€TO 
 
 iXvecrdov 
 eXviaOiqv 
 iXvojJLeda 
 iXtea-ee 
 
 The passive uses 
 the same form 
 as the middle. 
 
 Middle and 
 Passive. 
 
 XvecrOai 
 
 iXvop 
 
 iXvovTO 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D. 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 a. Observe that the secondary tenses have special personal 
 endings; that they use the same thematic vowel (25) as the 
 primary. 
 
 b. Observe that in the second person singular of the middle 
 a is dropped and oe contracted to ov (27). 
 
 112. Aagnient. In the secondary tenses of the in- 
 dicative the verb receives an augment (increase) as the 
 sign of past time. 
 
 113. The augment is of two forms: syllabic, which 
 prefixes € to verbs beginning with a consonant; tempo- 
 ral, which lengthens the initial short vowel of verbs 
 beginning with a vowel or diphthong. The initial 
 vowel is lengthened to the corresponding long vowel, 
 but a or a always becomes 17 : \u&), tXvov ; iOiXo), 
 TjOeXov ; ayo), rjyov ; alpeco, '^p€ov ; 'qKO), rJKov. 
 
 114. The imperfect is formed upon the present stem, 
 and tlie augment prefixed to this stem transfers the 
 
 ^ The dual forms may be omitted in all of the subsequent inflections. 
 
46 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 force of the" present to the past. Hence the imperfect 
 regularly expresses continued past time : eXvov, I was 
 loosing. It has also a derived meaning, like the present, 
 of attempted and customary action. 
 
 115. The ending of the present infinitive active is 
 '&;, contracted with the thematic vowel e to -eiv ; that 
 of the middle and passive is -cr^ai preceded by tlie 
 regular thematic vowel. 
 
 a. The four proper moods, in distinction from the infinitive, 
 are called ^^^7e moods. 
 
 116. Secondary endings of the Indicative, 
 
 Active. Middle, 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. -V or — -^xev -fxrjv -jxeOa 
 
 2. -s 'Tov -T€ -cro -(tOov 'CrOe 
 
 3. — -nqv -V or -aav ^ -to -ctOtjv -vto 
 
 117. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal 
 noun, and may take the article in all its cases. It may 
 at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or object 
 or adverbial modifiers. It is regularly translated by to 
 as in English, but it may frequently best be translated 
 by a verbal noun. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. XP^'^ IkavveiVy it is necessary to march, 
 
 2. TTopevea-Oai ovk rjv, it loas not possible to proceed, 
 
 3. KoX 6 (raTpdTT7]<; tov<; crrpartoira? ^vkdrTCiv K€r 
 Xevet, and the satrap commands the soldiers to guard, 
 
 ^ Endinf^ of the pluperfect and aorist passive ind. 
 
 2 What is the subject of x9'ni W > object of KeXevei, etc. ? See 10, n. 
 
IMPERFECT TENSE. 47 
 
 4. Kvpo<; ideXet ^aaikeveiVy Cyrus desires to he king. 
 
 5. (1) rjpx^To Xeyeuvj he began to speak. 
 
 (2) yjpx^ro tov Sia^aiveLv, he began the crossing, 
 
 6. LKavol rjcrav Trjv yecjyvpap ^vKoltt^iv, they ivere 
 able to guard the bridge. 
 
 7. Kupo? r^v dpx^iy a^iosy Cyrus was worthy to 
 reign. 
 
 8. ovx ^pct icTTl Xeyeip,^ it is not a time to speak. 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, 2, the infinitive is the subject. 
 
 h. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, (1), (2), the infinitives are the 
 objects of verbs expressing wish, command, ability, beginning, 
 etc.; that the subject of the infinitive is in the accusative; that 
 the subject is not expressed if it is the same as the subject or 
 object of the leading verb. 
 
 c. Observe that in 6, 7, 8, the infinitives depend upon adjec- 
 tives and substantives denoting ability, fitness, etc. 
 
 Rule. 
 Ii8. As subject nominative, the infinitive is used 
 chiefly with impersonal verbs like XP^? «^ ^^ necessary, 
 etc., or with eVrt. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 119. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with 
 verbs whose action implies another action as its object, 
 especially those expressing wish, command, beginning, 
 poiver, ability y fitness, etc. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 120. The infinitive may depend upon adjectives or 
 
 ^ Xey€ti> may be regarded also as subject. 
 
48 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 substantives similar in meaning to verbs which take an 
 object infinitive, especially those denoting ability, fitness^ 
 and willingness. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 121. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative. 
 'But the subject of the infinitive is regularly omitted if 
 it is the same as the subject or object {direct, indirect, 
 or genitive) of the leading verb. 
 
 122. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. iXavveiv ovk rjv. 2. ^p^ TTopevecrdai. 
 3. dvdyKr) earl XiyecrO ai, 4. rjOeke TreWeaO ai. 
 5. LKavoi rjcrav ra? yec^upa? StafiaiveLv. 6. ov)(^ ^pa 
 ecrrt iropevecrd ai. 7. al dfia^au i(f)€popTO Sia tcov 
 TToXefJiLCov. 8. KeXeveL tov<; aTpaTTjyov^ \4yeLv to2<; 
 (TTpaTLCoTaLS' 9. Trjv 'EWrjvLKrjv o-rparidv rjOpoit^ev. 
 10. ecTTiv dvdpcoTTO^ dyaOo^. 11. ovk ecttl Xveiv rrjv 
 yi^vpav. 12. ol ^dpfiapOL rd aKpa ec^vXarrov, 
 13. rd Orjpia Kvpos eOripevev dno lttttov. 14. inl rfj 
 Td(f)p(p OVK iKctikve ^ 'ApTa^ep^7]<; ttjv Kvpov orrpaTidv 
 
 XL 1. He began to cross. 2. It is possible to 
 guard the wagons. 3. It is necessary to destroy the 
 bridge. 4. The bowmen pursued the wild beasts. 
 5. He commanded Clearchus to come. 6. The generals 
 are worthy to rule. 7. They were leading the generals 
 into the tent. 8. You do not desire to obey. 9. The 
 hoplites were mustering in the plain of Castolus. 
 10. The satrap commanded the soldiers to guard their 
 tents. 
 
 ^ Attempted action. 
 
REVIEW. 
 
 49 
 
 123. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 aKpo^, -d, 'Ov, topmoBt ; tcl apyo), begin, command, rule 
 cLKpa, the heights [edge, [arch-angel, archi-tect]. 
 
 acme]. 
 
 avdyKT], -rj<;,/orce, necessity ; 
 oLvdyKT) icTTL, it is neces- 
 sary, one must. 
 
 ^dp/3apo<;, -ov, barbarian ; 
 
 Sia-^aLvo), cross; ace. 
 Slcoko), pursue. 
 iOeXco, desire, wish. 
 6r)peva)y hunt, chase, catch 
 {ffyjpd, a hunt)* 
 
 ^dp/3apo^, 6, a barbarian. Kekevco, command, bid, urge. 
 
 Oiqpiovy wild animal. 
 lKav6<;, -T], -OP, sufficient, 
 
 able. 
 Td^po<^, rj, ditch, trench. 
 <^pd, -d?, time, season^prop- 
 
 er time [hour]. 
 ddpoL^o), collect, assemble; 
 
 mid., muster. 
 
 kojXvco, hinder, oppose, pre- 
 vent. 
 
 (j)v\dTT(o, guard [phylac- 
 tery]. 
 
 XP"^-) iinpers., it is needful, 
 it is necessary. 
 
 diroy prep. w. gen., from, 
 away from [apo-logy]. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 Review each of the preceding lessons in order, with 
 Iheir vocabularies. 
 
 124. The Alphabet} 
 
 1. Give the long and short vowels. 
 
 2. Give the proper and improper diphthongs. 
 
 ^ The following questions are intended to aid the pupil to classify and 
 correlate the matter of the preceding lessons. 
 
 4 
 
50 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 3. Give the souikIs of the consonants. 
 
 4. Give the double consonants. 
 
 125. Syllabication and Accentuation. 
 
 1. How are simple and compound words divided 
 into syllables ? 
 
 2. When are syllables long by nature ? 
 
 3. Classify the syllables according to their accent. 
 
 4. Give the general rules for accent. 
 
 5. Give the rule for the accent of nouns. 
 
 6. Give the rule for the accent of oxytone words of 
 the vowel declensions. 
 
 126. I. Substantives of the Vowel Declensions. 
 
 1. Define natural and grammatical gender. 
 
 2. Of what genders are nouns of the first and second 
 declensions ? 
 
 3. Decline the article. Give its different uses. 
 
 4. Decline and divide into syllables : ^ (rKr)vT], ireipa, 
 ddkarra, TreXraaTTJ^;. 
 
 5. How do the feminine nouns of the first declension 
 compare with the feminine article ? 
 
 6. How do the masculines of the first declension 
 differ from the feminines ? 
 
 7. Decline ayyeXo?, crrpaTo^, ireBiov, lttttos, 
 
 8. How do the masculine and neuter forms of the 
 second declension compare with the corresponding forms 
 of the article. 
 
 9. What three cases are alike in the neuter ? 
 
 . 1 These words are given as examples ; others also should be added. 
 
REVIEW. 51 
 
 II. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 
 
 1. How do the adjectives of the vowel declension 
 compare with the nouns of the vowel declension ? 
 
 2. What peculiarity of accent in the feminine plural 
 of the adjectives in -os ? 
 
 3. Decline <^tXto9, UTevo'i, dnopof;, dKpo<;. 
 
 127. Transliteration. 
 
 1. In transliteration how are the consonants rep- 
 resented ? 
 
 2. Give the changes of the vowels and diphthongs. 
 
 128. Essentials for Translating, 
 
 1. What are the three requisites for rapid trans- 
 lation ? 
 
 2. How is the thought of an author best understood ? 
 
 3. Why does not the subject always come first and 
 the verb last ? 
 
 129. Verbs. 
 
 1. Define the theme and tense stem. 
 
 2. Give the rule for the thematic vowel, for the 
 accent of verbs. 
 
 3. Define primary and secondary tenses. 
 
 4. Define the active, middle, and passive voices. 
 
 5. Give the primary and secondary endings, active 
 and middle. 
 
 6. Conjugate fceXeuw in the present indicative active 
 and middle. 
 
 a. Explain the forms KeXevei and Kekevovat. 
 
 7. Conjugate Tropevoj and (fyaLPco in the imperfect 
 active and middle, and translate. 
 
52 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 a. How is the imperfect formed from the present stem ? 
 
 b. How do the middle forms differ from the active ? 
 
 130. Proclitics and Enclitics, 
 
 1. Name several proclitics and enclitics. 
 
 2. When is the accent of enclitics retained ? 
 
 3. When does eVri become ecm ? 
 
 4. When is -v movable attached to the end of a word ? 
 
 131. Syntax, 
 
 1. Give the rules for the case of the subject, object, 
 indirect object, and the agreement of the verb. 
 
 2. What are the positions of the direct and indirect 
 objects ? 
 
 3 Define the attributive and predicate positions. 
 
 4. Give the rule for the agreement of adjectives. 
 
 5. Distinguish between the appositive and predicate 
 nouns. Give examples in Greek and in English. 
 
 6. What verbs take the dative of possessor ? Give 
 an example in Greek. 
 
 7. Give the rule for the subject of the infinitive. 
 
 8. Give the uses of the infinitive in the preceding 
 lessons. 
 
 132. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Name from the preceding vocabularies words 
 allied to o-rpard?. 2. Give the English forms for : 
 Botwrta, 'Aptato?, Aapetog, ^E(^e<T09, Macr/cd«?, Hepcrrjs, 
 HvXat, SvpCa, ^aXay^, Tvpiaiov. 
 
 II. 1. KcoXveiy KcokveraL, i(j)vXaTTOv, i(f)v\dTTOVTO, 
 oip-^ei, apteral, r]p)(0Vy rjpxovTO. 2. ol XoxoLyoi iirL 
 rais 6vpaL<; p.ivovcnv, 3. ipTavOa /xeVet Kvpo<; /cai 
 
^ FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 53 
 
 r) crrpaTia rjfji€pa<; eiKocriv, 4. ol arpanqyol eXeyov 
 Tov \6yov 7019 crTpaTLcoTaL<;. 5. 6 aaTpd7rr]<^ eTrefXTre 
 Tov<; arpaTLCora^ Ik ttJs Kcofxtj^;. 6. tol Be oirXa tol tcov 
 ottXltiov yjyeTO eVi roii/ dpia^aiv, 7. ol ^dp^apoi dv- 
 OpcDTTOL iv Se^id Tjaav, 8. Tipo^evov 8e tov ^okxttiov 
 iKeXeve TropevecrOaL. 9. ovk '^v elaQdWeiv {invade) 
 els Tj)v KtXt/ctW, el (if) 6 aaTpdirrj^ iKcokvev, 10. 
 Upo^evo^; Se 6 Boiwrios ^eVo9 17^' Kupw. 11. evrevOev 
 e^eXavvei crraOfjiovs hvo irapacrdyyas irevreKaiheKa ets 
 'Icrcrou? ' evravOa e/xeve rjixepas irevTe, 
 
 III. 1. The satrap was deliberating. 2. The army 
 appears in the plain. 3. The generals were proceeding 
 through a friendly country. 4. He was leading his 
 army to the Euphrates river. 5. But Proxenus was a 
 guest friend of Cyrus. 6. The captains were remain- 
 ing at the doors. 7. Cyrus commanded the generals 
 to lead hoplites about ^ his tent. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Review 99^, 111, 112, 113. 
 
 133. A simple word is formed from a single stem : 
 o-TpaTo^; ; a compound word is formed by combining 
 two or more stems : crTpaTiqyos [crr/oaro? + ayw.] 
 
 134. Elision generally occurs in the formation of 
 compound wo.rds, but here without the apostrophe: 
 
 TTfpt 
 
 I with ace. 
 
54 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 TToip-ohos (for irapd + 6S05) ; oLTrdyo) [oltto + dyco), lead 
 hack, 
 
 135. The augment of a compound verb is prefixed 
 to the verb-theme after the preposition. Here the final 
 vowel of the preposition is elided before the augment ; 
 but irepi and irpo retain the final vowel ; irpo may be 
 contracted with the augment e to ov. Karifiaivov 
 i^Kar Or ^aiv (a), descend ; TrpovSeScoKecrav (7r/)o-8iSa)/xt), 
 f^ive over, 
 
 136. In composition, prepositions being regarded 
 as prefixes lose their accent, hence compounds are 
 generally accented like simple words ; but in compound 
 verbs the accent never goes farther back than the aug- 
 ment : dirr^yov (cxTrd + riyov). 
 
 127* Prepositions, according to their original use, 
 are adverbs of place ; they are prefixed to the different 
 cases to define more definitely the sense in which they 
 are used. 
 
 138. Fandamefital Uses of the Oblique Cases. 
 
 1. The genitive embraces both the use of the gen- 
 itive proper, — that to which anything belongs, — and 
 the ablative use, — that from which anything proceeds. 
 
 2. The dative embraces both the idea of the dative 
 proper, — that which is indirectly affected by the action 
 of the verb {^Q), — and the ablative use of location, 
 time, and instrument. 
 
 3. The accusative embraces the relations of motion 
 toward or extension over, and that of the object, — 
 that on which the action expressed by the verb is 
 exerted (38). 
 
k FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 55 
 
 139. Prepositions with Oblique Cases, 
 1. With the genitive the prepositions in general de- 
 ■ line its ablative use, from a place ; tov olkov, may mean 
 of, from, on, than, some of the house, but with Ik be- 
 fore it, Ik tov olkov must mean out of the house, 
 jk, 2. With the dative the prepositions denote certain 
 ablative uses, rest at, time, in company ivith : iv ry 
 aKr)vfj, in the tent ; avv rw d8eX</)w, ivith his brother, 
 
 3. With the accusative the prepositions denote its 
 generic use of motion toward, extension over : €19 ras 
 Kw/xa? ikavvei^ he marches into the villages. 
 140. Examine the following: — 
 
 1. aTTo T179 «-PX'^^ /3aLV€L, he goes from his province, 
 
 2. e/c Trj<; K(x)ixrj<^ iXavpei, he inarches out of the 
 village. 
 
 3. eV T77 cTKiQvrj fxeveiy he remains in his tent. 
 
 4. /caret TOV aKpov €Tp€)(ov, they loere running down 
 from the summit, 
 
 5. /cara tov \6^ov hpeyov^ they ivere running doion 
 the hill. 
 
 6. 6 ayyeXo? 7ra/>a Yjvpov '^k€1', the messenger came 
 from the presence of Cyrus. 
 
 7. 6 ayyeXo? TTapa Kvpco /xeVei, the messenger re* 
 mains in the presence of Cyrus, 
 
 8. 6 ayyeXo? Trapa Upo^evov rJK€v, the messenger 
 came to Proxerms. 
 
 9. r)<jav fcw/xat vrapa tov 'Ev(f)pdTr)v noTafJiov, there 
 were villages along the Euphrates river, 
 
 10. €(^' ^ LTTTTov SicoKovcTLv, they pursuc on horseback, 
 1 Por fVi. TT becomes (^ before a rough breathing (194, 1, d). 
 
56 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 11. ecTTL ySacrtXeta eV KeXaivals eVl rat? 7T'r]yal<; rov 
 iroTajxov, there is a palace in Celaenae at the sources of 
 the river, 
 
 12. iTTi Tov TTOTafjLov €^eXavv€L, hc marches forth to 
 the hanks of the river, 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, 2, 3^ the case takes a preposition 
 whose root meaning is kindred to its own ; et? cannot be used 
 with the gen., or kic with the ace. 
 
 h. Observe that KaTa^ down, 4, 5, is used with the gen. and 
 ace. Its meaning precludes its use with the dative. 
 
 c. Observe that irapd, beside, and eVt, ujoon, are used with 
 gen._, dat., and ace. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 141. Prepositions denoting motion from are used 
 only with the genitive ; in company with, rest at, only 
 with the dative ; motion to2vard,ou\y w'ith the accusative. 
 A preposition whose root idea does not contradict the 
 fundamental idea of any of the cases may be used with 
 any of them. 
 
 142. Metaphoric Use of Prepositions. 
 
 The prepositions have certain metaphoric or derived 
 meanings, as time, cause, means, etc., which can best 
 be learned from observation, but they all depend upon 
 the fundamental meaning of the prepositions. The 
 following derived meanings may be examined. 
 
 1. eVi, upon, hence also, in, at, in addition to, on ac- 
 count of 
 
 2. 7Tp6, before, hence also, in preference to, in be- 
 half of, 
 
 3. Stct, through, hence also, by means of by reason of 
 
FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 57 
 
 4. TTapd, besidey hence also, in comparison with, con- 
 trary to, beyond, alony, daring. 
 
 5. 77/309, in front of, hence also, by, at, to, off, in ad- 
 dition to, in consequence of with reference to, 
 
 143. Compound Verbs. 
 
 Prepositions ^ in composition with verbs are used to 
 define more definitely the action of the verb. Thus, 
 ^aivoi, I go, with ava {up) prefixed, means, / go up ; 
 with /caret, I go doion ; with cac, I go out ; with et?, / 
 go into, etc. 
 
 144. Sometimes the preposition retains its force in 
 defining the relation of the case to the verb, and is 
 followed by its own construction : oLTTocnrdo} tov Trora- 
 fjiov, I withdraw from the river. In this form the prepo- 
 sition, or one of similar meaning, may be repeated : 
 aTTOcTTraw aTTo tov iroTafjiov. In this way the relation 
 of the prepositions to their cases probably arose. 
 
 145. EXERCISES. 
 
 1 . vnep yap Trj<; K(ofji7]<; kocj^os rjv. 2. ol §€ crrpa- 
 TLcoTai Kvpo) eTTeWovTo. 3. /cat arparrjyoX iiricTTevov 
 Kvpcp. 4. ol crrpaTLcoTaL e^akeiraivov toZ^ crrpariqyol^. 
 5. 6 'Opoz^ra? eVe/SovXeve Kvpcx). 6. /cat eVt to oLKpov 
 dva^aivei Xetptcroc^o?. 7. 6 he KOpo? 'ApKrTLTnra) crvpr 
 fiovXeveTaL. 8. (rvfi^ovXevo) crw^eaOai KXeap^w. 9. 
 (TweTrefXTTe ttj KiXio-crr) tov^ cTTpaTLcoTa^;. 10. inefiTre 
 TOV ayyeXov napd tov<; crTpaTr)yov<;. 11. ifxevov iv 
 rat? /cw/xat? rat? virep tov ttcBlov, 12. ttjp Td(f>pov 
 
 ^ Originally written as sej)arate words. 
 
58 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 ovK iK(o\v€ Tov Kvpov (TTpaTov SLa/3aLPeLv. 13. Tov<; 
 
 Examine the datives in 2, 3, 4^ and observe that they are the 
 indirect objects (66) of intransitive verbs, which, in English, are 
 generally translated with a direct object. 
 
 146. Dative with Special Verbs} 
 
 The dative of indirect object is used with verbs sig- 
 nifying to benefit, please, serve, trust, obey, befit^ aid, 
 satisfy^ advise, ewhort, or their opposites ; and v^^ith 
 those denoting friendliness, hostility, envy, favor, anger, 
 threats, etc. ; also with those of yielding, belonging^ and 
 seeming. 
 
 Examine the datives in 5, 7, 8, 9, and observe that they 
 depend upon compound verbs. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 147. The dative is used with many verbs com- 
 pounded with eV, cvv, eVt; and some compounded 
 with TT/oog, rrapd, irepL, and vtto. 
 
 148. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. And Cyrus kept remitting the tributes to Arta- 
 xerxes. 2. The soldiers obeyed, for they trusted 
 Cyrus. 3. Clearchus is consulting with Cyrus. 4. He 
 advised Clearchus to lead. 5. The soldiers were angry 
 with Clearchus. 6. And he marches forth through 
 Lydia to the river Maeander. 7. He was plotting 
 against the army with Clearchus. 8. I advise the 
 hoplites to cross the river. 
 
 ^ Give corresponding rule in Latin, cf. p. 19^. 
 
CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 59 
 
 149. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 \6(f)o<;, 6, /lill, height, 
 ava-^aivo), go up, go inland. 
 i7rL-/3ovXevcoj to plan or plot 
 
 against, 
 7TL(rT€vco, trust, believe, dat. 
 crvfx-fiovXevcjy^ advise, plan 
 
 with ; mid. corifer with, 
 
 deliberate. 
 cru/x-Tre/iTTw/ send tvith, 
 (T(o[,a}, save, rescue; mid. 
 
 save one's ^^^[sozo-dont]. 
 XoXeiTaivo), be angry ; pass. 
 
 be offended, 
 Kara, prep. w. gen., ace, 
 down [cata-strophe]. 
 
 ixerd, prep. w. gen., with, in 
 company with; w. ace, 
 after, next, 
 
 irapd, prep.[^m<^^]w. gen., 
 from the side of, from; 
 w. dat., by the side of, at, 
 on, with; w. ace, to the 
 side of, to, contrary to, 
 along, [par-ody]. 
 
 virep, prep. w. gen., over, 
 above, in behalf of; w. 
 ace, over, beyond [hyper- 
 bole]. 
 
 yap, post-posit, conj., for. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN THE INDICATIVE 
 AND INFINITIVE. 
 
 Review 28, 110, 111, a,b', 112, 113, 114, 115, 116. 
 
 150. Contraction of Fowels, When an open vowel 
 is followed by a vowel or a diphthong in the same 
 word, the successive vowels are regularly contracted 
 into a single long vowel or diphthong : Tifxdcop, rificov; 
 fJLvdai, jxpal; TToke'L TrdXet. 
 
 ^ For a-vv; lO'i, 4>. 
 
60 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 151. Two Foivels. 
 
 1. An open and a close vowel form a diphthong 
 (IV.) : /SacrtXet, ySacrtXet, irokei, TrdXet, oto/xat, oto/xai. 
 
 2. Two vowels of a like sound unite to form the com- 
 mon long. But €€ gives ei, and 00 gives ov. Thus, 
 /xi^aa, fjiva ; 817X00;, St^Xw ; TTOLerjTov, iroirjTOv \ but, 
 ST^Xdo/xat, SrjXovfiai ; Troiierov, iroielTov. 
 
 3. An o sound (o or w) unites with a, e, or rj, to 
 form 0). But eo and oe give ov. Thus, Tlfidco, rl^oi ; 
 TTOteo), TTOtw ; ST^XoTyroz^, Sr]Xa>TOP ; but, Troieo/xe^', ttoi- 
 ovfxev ; jiLcrOoeTov, jjucOovtov. 
 
 4. When a or e (e or 7;) sounds come together, the 
 first in order prevails and gives d or 17. Thus, rl^deTov, 
 TLfxaTOv ; rlfJidrjTOVj TlfxaTov ; -^pvcrea, )(^pvcrrj \ yia, yrj- 
 
 152. Voivel and Biphtliong, 
 
 A simple vowel before a diphthong is generally 
 contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong, and 
 the second disappears, unless it can be retained as i 
 subscript, a, 17, <w. Thus, rtjuaet?, rtjita? ; rlfidovai, 
 rlfJicocTi ; Tlfjuar), rlfxa ; rlfxaoLfjiL, rljJicpfjLL ; TToiiovcrij 
 TTOLovcTL. But a simpIc vowel disappears by absorption 
 before a diphthong beginning with the 5<2^;^^ vowel,^ 
 and € is absorbed before oi : Troteet?, Trotel? ; St^Xooixti, 
 ST^XoGo't ; fjivdai, [jlvol ; i^dot, i^ot ; TToteoi/it; TTOLolfiL 
 (see further 165). 
 
 «. In the second person singular of the middle and passive 
 
 eai (for eaai) gives et, as well as the regular contract form in 7). 
 
 b. In verbs, oet and 077 give 01 : S?7\oet9, hrfkobi ; SrjXoTj, 
 
 ^ Often only an application of the former. 
 
CONTRACT VERBS. 61 
 
 SrjXol ; and the spurious diphthong ^ ei is contracted like simple 
 € : TlfJideiv^ TL/Jidv ; SrjXoetP, SrjXovv. 
 
 153. Accent of Contracted Syllables. 
 
 If either of the contracted syllables had an accent, 
 the contracted syllable is accented. If the contracted 
 syllable is penult or antepenult, the kind of accent is 
 determined by the general rules (X., XL, XII.). If 
 the contracted syllable is an ultima, it is circumflexed ; 
 but if the original word was oxytone, the acute is 
 retained. 
 
 154. Write the present and imperfect indicative, 
 and the present infinitive, active and middle, of the 
 following verbs in the uncontracted forms, and then 
 contract and accent ^ (843, 844, 845): 
 
 Present Active. Present Middle. 
 
 1. Ind., Sing, rl/xaw, rt/xw rl/xao/xat, rt/xoijLtat 
 
 rt/xaet9, ri/xa? TljJLoir}, rlfxa 
 K, r. X.^ /c. T. X. 
 
 Inf. rlfideLV;, rlfiav rl/xotecr^at, TlfiaaO ai 
 
 2. Ind., Sing. TroLeco, ttolw Troteo/xat, Troiov/xat 
 
 7roLe€L<;, Troieis ttoUtj, ttoltJ 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 Inf. TTOieeiv, TTOieiv TTOilecrOai, TroieZcrOai 
 
 3. Ind., Sing. St^Xow, St^Xw ST^Xdo/xat, h-qkov^ai 
 
 ■ 8T7Xo€t9, 817X019 817X017, 877X04 
 K, r. X. /c. T. X. 
 
 ^ Generally arising from contraction, Xveei', \vclv (115). 
 * See 73. ^ ««! to Xoittci. and the rest. 
 
62 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 155. 1- As in 154 inflect: fiodo), vlKaoi, doKeco, 
 fjLLcrdoa). 
 
 156. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. Give the uncontracted forms of the following 
 verbs, and the rules applicable to their contraction and 
 accentuation : 
 
 I. viKco, 6pa9, y8oa. 2. So/cetre, opajfjuev. 3. ivuKcoi^, 
 eKokovv, eKokeiTO, Ivlkcovto. 4. vLKare, So/cel, irifjia, 
 CTTOtet, SrjXol. 5. Tiyio>^aiy TTOLOVfJuai, Sr]\ovfJiai. 6. 
 TLfJiav, TTOieiv, Sr)Xovv, vlkolv, 7. TLfiacrOaL, SoKeiaOaL, 
 fjucrdovaOai, 
 
 II. Give the contracted forms for the following : 
 1. You are honoring. He is honoring. They are hon- 
 oring. 2. I was making. He was making. We 
 w^ere making. 3. We were showing. They were 
 showing. 4. He is conquering. They are shouting. 
 You are calling. 5. They desire to see. He desired 
 to see. 6. He honors the Persian. 7. The hoplites 
 conquer the barbarians. 
 
 157. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. ol (TTpaTLcoTai T(p K\edp)((o iireiOovTO. 2. ttj 
 voTTepaia^ Kvpo<; inopevero, 3. Kvpo<;ydpTovIlepa-r)v 
 Si evvoiav iTijLa. 4. 6 TTOTa/JLO'? Kakeirai Mapcrva^.'^ 
 5. ۤ17X01; Se TOP (j)6^ov Tjj TTpcoTrj. 6. TToKefxeiv 
 LKavol rjaav. 7. Kvpo? iTreiparo vlkolv. 8. iirei 8* 
 ehoKU Kvpcp 7Top€vecr9 ai, KXeapxov eKokei. 9. /cat 
 7019 orrpartwrats i^oa on ' ApTa^€p^r]<^ crvv arparia 
 TTopeverai. 10. evrevSev iTreipoivTO elcr/SoiXXeLv et?^ rrjv 
 KiXuKLav' rj Se ela^oXr] rjv 6869 afxa^LTo^ (rrevrj, 
 1 Sc. fniia. 2 See 84. « See 132, II, 9 ; 144. 
 
CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 63 
 
 Rule. 
 
 158. The dative vvitlioiit a preposition is used to de- 
 note the definite time when an action takes place. 
 
 159. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. For on the following day -he was making the 
 battle. 2. Bat Clearchus called Proxenus and deliber- 
 ated. 3. It seemed best to the generals to proceed 
 into the villages. 4. Cyrus conquers the barbarians 
 before Artaxerxes. 5. And he shouted to Clearclius to 
 lead his army against (upon) the enemy. 
 
 160. VOCABULARY. 
 
 el(T^o\ri,-ri^y entrance, pass, opdo), see, perceive [pan- 
 
 evvoia,^ -a?, fidelity, orama ]. 
 
 vcrepaio^, -a, -ov, following, Treipdco, try, test (Tretpa), 
 
 (l)6fio<;, 6, fear, dread [hy- [pirate] . 
 
 dro-phobia], iroiioi^do^maJce^effect [poet, 
 
 ^odoiy shouts cry out, poem], 
 
 St^Xow, make clear, show irokeixico.war.^nakeov carry 
 
 (81^X09). on loar (tt-oXc/xo?). Cf. 
 
 So/cea>, seem, seem best or 109. 
 
 yood, think [dogma^. Tlixdco, value, honor {rLfiT]). 
 
 eicr- /SdXXo), enter, invade; Trpo, prep., w. gen. only, /5^- 
 
 of rivers, empty, fore, in behalf of [pro- 
 
 Kokicx), call, summon [ec- phet]. 
 
 % clesiastic]. eVet, conj., when, since, 
 
 vlKda),conguer,surpass{pLKrj, on, conj., thaty because 
 
 victory), (Lat. quod). 
 
 ^ Observe that the final a is short. Abstracts in -eia and -ota, from 
 adjectives in -r^s and -00s, have final a short, cf. 42, b. 
 
64 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 auro9. — CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 
 OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 
 
 Review 9, 10, 41, 48, 58, 59, Gl, 83 ; Lesson XVI., 
 noting 150; 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 152; 153. 
 
 i6i. Decline the article 6 [to], 
 
 162. Decline avTos ^ [avro] , self, with the endings 
 of the article (9) : 
 
 avro9, avnj, avro, 
 avTovy avTTJs, avTov, 
 
 K, T. X. 
 
 163. Decline dX\o<;^ [aWo], other ^ another , with 
 the endings of the article (9) : 
 
 aXko<i, aWrj, aWo 
 K. T. X. 
 
 164. 1. auro?, not in attributive position, in all of 
 its cases may be an intensive adjective pronoun, himself, 
 herself itself. (Lat., ipse.) 
 
 2. In the attributive position it has the meaning the 
 same. (Lat., idem.) 
 
 8. In oblique cases standing alone it has the force of 
 a personal pronoun of the third person, him, her, it. 
 (Lat., is.) 
 
 165. In contracts of the first and second declensions 
 a short vowel before a or before a long vowel or diph- 
 
 1 See 820. 2 gee avT6s (820). 
 
■ CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 65 
 
 thong is absorbed, except in the singular of the first 
 declension, where ed is regularly contracted to rj, but 
 after a vowel or p to a. 
 
 166. The accent of the contracted forms of the first 
 and second declensions is regular, except the dual of the 
 second declension, which contracts eiw and oco into co. 
 
 167. Compounds in -oo<; retain the accent on the 
 same syllable as the uncontracted nom. sing. : evpoo^, 
 evvov^. 
 
 168. Contract adjectives in -eo^ circumflex the last 
 syllable in all forms, except the nom. dual of the second 
 declension, which is oxytone (166). 
 
 169. Crasis is the contraction of a vowel or diph- 
 thong at the end of a word with one at the beginning 
 of the following word. A coronis (') is placed over the 
 contracted syllable. The first of the two words is 
 generally an article or a relative (o or d), /cat or irpo : 
 01 dSe\(j)OL, dSe\(j)OL ; to avTo, ravTO ; 6 e/c, ovk ; kol 
 dyaOoL, KdyaOoi. 
 
 a. A final vowel of the diphthong of the first word is gener- 
 ally dropped before crasis takes place, and the final vowel and 
 diphthong of the article is absorbed before a. 
 
 h. The diphthong of Kai is absorbed before all vowels and 
 diphthongs except e and et. 
 
 c. The accent of the first word is lost, and that of the second 
 retained, but the rough breathing of the article or relative takes 
 the place of the coronis. 
 
 170. Write the uncontracted forms of the following 
 words, and then contract and accent (818). 
 
Q6 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 1. iJiva, mina yrj, earth i^oug, mind 
 fjLpdd, fxva yea, yrj 1^009, vovs 
 fjLvdds, /xj^as ye'aSj yrj<; voov, vov 
 
 K, T. X. K. T. X. in sing. k. t. X. 
 
 2. yjiV(Tov<;^ golden (819) 
 
 Xpvcr€o<;, ^pvaov^; ;j(pvcred, XP^^V XP^^^^^> XP^^^^^ 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 3. evj'ovs/ ^^^//-<^^<^05^^ [ei' + i^ou?] (819) 
 evvoo^, €vvov^ evvoovy evvovv 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X, 
 
 171. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. /cat crvveTToXifjieL Kvpco Trpo<; avTov. 2. Ilpdfei^o? 
 avTcp <^tXos ^i^. 8. auroJ ol koKol t€ fcaya^oi eui^ot 
 Tjcrav, 4. TavTOL So/cet roi? 
 arpaT-qyol'?, 5. ot ^dp^apoi 
 TTokifxioi Tol^ aXXot9 eiaiv. 
 6. KavTo^ KXeapx^s VPX^'^^ ^^^' 
 ^aiveiv. 7. ot OTrXtrat 77/36 avrov 
 'Apra^ep^ov rjcrav. 8. aurol 
 iireLpcovTO ctti to aKpov dvaj3aL- 
 veiv. 9. ei/ MtXifrw ra avra 
 No. i.SrpeTrroV ^ovXevovraL. ^10. €1x01.2 ro 8e 
 fxicrov ol dXXoi crTparriyoL 
 
 11. 'Aptato? TTpocreLX'^ toIs (TrpaTioyrai^ tov vovv. 
 
 12. Kvpos CTToXtop/cei MiXt^toz/ /cai /caret yi^i^ /cat /caret 
 ddXaTTav. 13. Kupos rw oirXiTr) iripLirei ixicrOov irevre 
 
 ^ Compounds of i/oCs do not contract the nom. and ace. plu. neu., as 
 fHvoa. 
 
 * Imperfect of cxw. Stem a-ex; fixov for ea-ex^v, etxov. 
 
CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 67 
 
 fjivas dpyvpiov. 14. at 8e twv Trokeyiioyv neXrai X^^" 
 /cat '^aap. 15. 6 Se Kvpos tco dpOpcjiro) Swpa Tre/XTret, 
 Ittttov ^ /cat (TTpeTTTOv ^pvaovv /cat xpeXua. 
 
 Examine the datives in 2, 3, 5, and observe that they depend 
 upon adjectives denoting friendliness, hostility, etc. 
 
 172. The dative is used with adjectives kindred in 
 meaning to verbs that take the dative (146). 
 
 a. This includes adjectives, adverbs, and some verbal sub- 
 stantives. 
 
 173. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. He called together the rest. 2. After him an- 
 other spoke. 3. Cyrus was friendly to him. 4. Oron- 
 tas was sending the same pay. 5. And 
 he himself desired to go upon the heights. 
 6. They conquered them both by land 
 and by sea. 7. The barbarian has a 
 ])lot in mind. 8. Cyrus sends the bow- 
 men pay, five talents of gold. 9. Cyrus 
 the brother of Artaxerxes sends the bowmen pay, five 
 minae of silver. 
 
 174. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dSeX<^09, 6, brother [Adel- avrd?, -r\^ -d, selfiJjdX. ipse) 
 
 phia, Adelphian]. [auto-graph, tauto-logy, 
 
 dXkoq, -f], -o, other, another; to aurd]. 
 
 ol dWoLy the rest, yrj, -rj^;, earth, land [Gre-orge, 
 
 dpyvpLov, silver, ge-ographyj. 
 
 1 See 92. 
 
68 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 evvov<;, -ovv, well disposed yjivcriovj a piece of gold ^ 
 ( eu + vovi), money, gold. 
 
 fivoLy -as, mAna, xpeXtov, bracelet (No. 5). 
 
 vov%, o, mind. TroXiopKeo), besiege. 
 
 crTpe7rT6<;,6,nec/clace(No.4<). 7rpocr-€)(^co^ to hold to, di- 
 
 rdXavTov, talent. reel, 
 
 yjxkKov'i^ -rj, -ovv, of bronze, crvy^-KaXect), call together, 
 
 bronze (^yakK^oi). o-v/x^-TToXe/xew, mahe war 
 
 ■)(pv(Tov<;, -rj, -ovv, of gold ^ together with, aid in war. 
 
 golden. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 THE DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Review 9, 10/41, 48, 59, 61, 83. 
 
 175. Decline ovto^ (6 + -VT09), this, with the end- 
 ings of the article (820) : 
 
 OVTOS aVTY] TOVTO 
 
 TOVTOV TaVTTj^, TOVTOV 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Observe that ovro^ takes ov in the penult wherever the last 
 syllable has an sound (151, 3) ; otherwise it takes av. 
 
 176. Decline oSe (6 + -Se), this., the following , as an 
 article, and then append the enclitic demonstrative suffix 
 -8e(820): 
 
 •s*^ </0 'Q> 
 
 ooe Tjoe Tooe 
 
 TovSe TTJaoe rovSe 
 
 K. T.X. 
 
 1 Por avp-, 194, 4. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 69 
 
 Observe that 6, being compounded with the enclitic -8e in oBe, 
 takes the accent in the nom. sing, and plur. (103, 4), and retains 
 its own throughout the other forms. 
 
 177. Decline e/cetj^o?, f/iat, with the endings of the 
 article (820): 
 
 iKelvo<^ eKeivT) iKelvo 
 
 eKeivov iKeLvr]<; eKeuvov 
 
 K. T. \. 
 
 178. Decline 09, who, which, with the endings of the 
 article, or like aurd? (820) : 
 
 ff V V 
 
 09 17 O 
 
 ^ <j> ^ 
 
 ov ri<; ov 
 
 K. T 
 
 .X. 
 
 Observe that 0? differs from the article in appending 9 to 
 form the nom. masc. sing., and in taking an accent in its masc. 
 and fem. nom. forms as a word standing alone ; that in other 
 forms the relative is made from the article by writing the rougli 
 breathing C) in place of the initial r. Hence, to inflect the 
 relative, write the article with the rough breathing in place of 1, 
 appending -9 to form the nom. sing, masc, and accent all its 
 forms. 
 
 179. When the demonstrative pronoun agrees with 
 a noun (83), it regularly takes the article and stands in 
 the predicate position (81) : ovro9 6 dj/dpcoiro^; ; ravTrj's 
 T179 TrapoSov. 
 
 180. 0VT09 and oSe, this, generally refer to Avhat is 
 near or present ; iKeLvo<;, that, to what is remote. 
 
 181. In referring to an object already mentioned, 
 ouro9 is used ; but in referring to what follows, o*8e. 
 
70 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 182. The article in certain expressions, and especially 
 before fxev and 8e, retains its demonstrative force : 6 fxep 
 ... 6 Se, t/iis . . . t/iai, the one . . . the other, he . . . the 
 rest, etc. 6 8e without preceding 6 /xeV frequently 
 means but he, and he ; in the nominative this always 
 introduces a new subject. 
 
 183. Examine the following : — 
 
 1. avjJLTrefjLTTeL avrfj tov<s arparioyra^ ov^ Mevcov €L)(e, 
 he sent loith her the soldiers which Menon had. 
 
 2. Xajji^dveL, ol elaiv aura), rov^ To^oTa^, he takes 
 the bowmen that he has. 
 
 3. €19 ra TrXota ifx^aiPOvcTL a Kvpo<; eTre/xTre, the^ 
 embark on the boats that Cyrus sent. 
 
 Observe that the relatives in 1, 2, 3, have the same number 
 and gender as their antecedents ; that in 1 and 3, ov^ and a are 
 respectively the objects of el^e and ireyimei, but in 2, oi is the 
 subject of daiv and takes the verb in the same person as its 
 antecedent. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 184. A relative agrees with its antecedent in num- 
 ber and gender and represents its person, but the case 
 of the relative depends upon the construction of the 
 clause in which it stands. 
 
 185. Examine the following : — 
 
 1. 817X01 OU9 Tt/xa, he shows lohom, he honors. 
 
 2. el)(€. ov<; e\eyov, he had ivhom I mentioned. 
 
 Observe that in 1, 2, the antecedents are omitted and the 
 relative 'clause becomes a substantive^ the object of the verb. 
 
demonstrative and relative pronouns. 71 
 
 Rule. 
 
 186. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted 
 when it is implied in the context or is indefinite. 
 
 187. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ovTOi iiToiovv ovT(o<;. 2. fcavro? eXeye raSe. 
 3. a \iyov(TLv eKeZvo^ ayyeWei. 4. ot yikv fjuevovcri, ol 
 Se TTopevovTai, 5. koX 6 fxep ravra Xeyet. 6. tov 
 avOpcjiTov e^et 09 iirefiovXeve ttj crrpaTia. 7. roJ av~ 
 OpcoTTO) TTLO-TevojjLev 6v Kupo? iirefnTe. 8. /cat /ceXeuei 
 avTovs Xeyeiv ravra rols crrparKxirai^. 9. ot arparioi- 
 rai OL re avrov iKeivov, koX ol aXXot rov TTorapuov Ste- 
 ^aivov. 10. ol 8e avrov re e^aXXov /cat ra v7rot;uyia 
 ra eKeivov. 11. pel he koX ovro<; Sta l^e\aiv<xiv, /cat 
 ifi/BdWeL els rov MatavSpov irorapLov, 12. ot S' 
 aXXot inel r^Kov, rovs Tapcrovs StapTra^ouort fcal ravra 
 ra /SacrtXeta. 13. ot jiev OTrXtrat aurov efjuevov, ol 
 Se Tofdrat, ot T^o-az^ avrS iv rrj err par La, rjXavvov iirl 
 rovs arparLcoras eKeivov. 
 
 II. 1. And he himself said these things. 2. After 
 these Proxenus speaks as follows. 3. We destroyed 
 the wagons which we had. 4. He seizes the boat of 
 that one. 5. But he commanded and the rest obeyed. 
 6. The generals report these things to Cyrus. 7. Cy- 
 rus desires to be king instead of that one. 8. Aris- 
 tippus sends back the soldiers whom he has. 9. But 
 on account of this the river is called Marsyas. 
 
72 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 188. VOCABULARY. 
 
 iKelvos, that (Lat., ille) ; ap7ra{a>, seize^ plunder 
 
 often best translated he, [harpy]. 
 
 she, it, as emphatic per- 8t-a/)7ra^aj, tear in pieces, 
 
 sonal pronoun. lay waste, plunder, rav- 
 
 oSc, this, the following, age (Lat., diripio), 
 
 OS, who, which, lohat (Lat., /BaXkco, throw, throw at, 
 
 qui). hit, hit with stones, 
 
 ovTos, this (Lat., hie) ; he, e/x-y8aXXw,^ throw in, injUct^ 
 
 she, it, as emphatic per- invade ; of rivers, empty. 
 
 sonal pronoun. ifi-fiaiva), go into, embark, 
 
 vT^oQuyiov, beast of bur- peco, flow [rheum], 
 
 den (vTro-l^ijyLov, under olvtl, prep. w. gen., instead 
 
 the yoke). of [anti-dote]. 
 
 dyyeXXo), announce, report avTov, adv., here, in this 
 
 (dyyeXo?). place (avrd?). 
 
 dir-ayyeWco, bring back ovTcoq, before a consonant 
 
 word, report. ovtco, adv., thus, so. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.^ 
 
 Review 16, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 
 110, 111, a, b; 112, 113, 114, 115, 116. 
 
 189. 1. The consonants are divided first according 
 to the organs of speech by which they are formed. 
 
 1 For eV (194, 4). 
 
 * If it should seem desirable to review here from Lesson. XV , review 
 questions may be found in Lesson XX VL, page 106. 
 
euphony of consonants. 73 
 
 Orders. 
 
 Smooth, Middle, Rough, 
 
 or Surd, or Souaut. or Aspirate. 
 
 c Labials, tt /3 <j> fi 
 
 Classes. < Liiigiials, r 8 d s, ^, v, p 
 
 i Palatals, f< y X 
 
 2. The consonants are divided farther according to 
 the greater or less influence of the organs in their for- 
 mation into : (a) Semi-vowels, X, /x, v, p, which are 
 called liquids, and cr, a sibilant ; /x, v, and y-nasal(VI.) 
 are called nasals ; (d) Mutes, the nine remaining conso- 
 nants as given above. 
 
 3. These nine mutes are divided, according to the 
 quality of voice in articulation, into smooth, middle, and 
 rough. Mutes of the same class are called cognate^ 
 since they are formed by the same organs, — lips, 
 tongue, or palate. Mutes of the same order are called 
 co-ordinate. 
 
 Observe that in the dingram the classes of mutes stand in 
 parallel lines, and those of the same order in the same column. 
 
 igo. The double consonants are formed by the 
 coalescence of the mutes with the sibilant cr ; i/; from 
 TTO", f from fccr, ^ from So- (VIII., 2, n.). 
 
 igi. A rough consonant is never doubled, but 7r<^, 
 K\^ T0, are always written instead. 
 
 ig2. The only consonants that can end a Greek 
 word are v, p, and q. The only exceptions are Ik and 
 ovK, or oux? which have other forms, ef and ov, — cf 
 
74 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 before vowels (46), ovk before smooth, and ovx before 
 rough vowels (68). 
 
 193. Initial p is regularly doubled when by inflec- 
 tion or composition a simple vowel is brought before it : 
 pel, eppei, Karappel, flowing down [catarrh]. 
 
 194. In the formation and inflection of words : ^ — 
 1. Before a lingual mute, r, 8, 0, a labial or palatal 
 
 mute becomes co-ordinate, and another lingual be- 
 comes cr : 
 
 ^T and <^T 
 
 become 777 
 
 
 yT and x^ become kt 
 
 ttS " <|)8 
 
 " ^8 
 
 
 kS '' x^ 
 
 " y8 
 
 77(9 " ^e 
 
 " <^(9 
 
 
 kO " yd 
 
 " X^ 
 
 
 yeypaTTTai 
 
 for 
 
 yeypa^-Tai 
 
 
 
 inefjLcjyOrjv 
 
 
 iireixTT-Orjp 
 
 
 
 riraKTai 
 
 
 T€T ay-rat 
 
 
 
 iXexOiqv 
 
 
 i\€y-0r)v 
 
 
 
 TreireLo-TaL 
 
 
 TreTreiB-rai 
 
 
 
 ineLadrjv 
 
 
 i7rei6-0r)v 
 
 
 a. A smooth mute tt, /c, t, brought before a rough breathing 
 either by elision or in forming a compound word becomes the 
 cognate rough : e^' Xirirov^ cK^apTrd^o) (Jnro + dpird^o)), 
 
 2. Before cr, labial and palatal mutes become smooth, 
 and 77cr is written \\t, and kct, ^. A lingual mute is 
 dropped : 
 
 ypdxjjo) for ypa(f)-aa) irepxpa) for TrepTr-crco 
 
 Xe^o) " Xey-cro) 77€tcra) "' 7rei0-aa) 
 
 ^ The followmg rules are given here partly for future reference. Note 
 m this lesson especially 2, 4. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 75 
 
 3. Before fi (labial) a labial becomes /x, a palatal, y, 
 and a lingual, o- : 
 
 yeypafijJiai for yeypa(^-/>tai 
 '^py-fjLaL " rip-^-fxaL 
 
 ireiTeLcrixaL " 7re7r€t^-/xat 
 
 4. V before a labial becomes /x ; before a palatal, y 
 (nasal) ; before a liquid it is changed to that liquid ; 
 before o- it is generally dropped and the preceding 
 vowel is lengthened, a to d, e to et, o to ov : 
 
 ifx/SoiXkco for ei^-^SaXXw 
 (TvyKokio) " crvvKoXeai 
 
 \vovcTi " \vov(Ti 
 
 195. Future and Aorist Indicative : 
 
 Future (826). Aorist (827). 
 
 Active. Middle. Active. Middle. 
 
 Sing. 1. Xvcroi XvcrofxaL iXvaa iXvaafjLrjv 
 
 2. Xvcret9 Xucret, 77 ikvaas eXvcrw (aero, ao) 
 
 3. K. T. X. K. T. X. eXucre ikvcraTO 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 Infin. \vcreiv XvcrecrOaL Xucrat \vaaa9aL 
 
 a. Observe that : 1 . The future differs from the present in 
 adding a to the theme. 2. The aorist differs from the imperfect 
 in adding cr to the theme and a instead of %. in all forms except 
 in the third person sing. ; that it omits v of the first person sing. 
 3. The aorist active inf. takes the ending -at, and accents the 
 penult. 
 
76 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 h. Observe that the future and the aorist both have cr, but 
 the aorist as a secondary tense has an augment in the indicative; 
 that the second person sing, middle of the future and aorist 
 drop a and contract (27 ; 151, 3 ; \h%, a). 
 
 ig6. The future stem is formed by annexing the 
 tense suffix -(7%. to the theme. The personal endings 
 are primary. 
 
 197. The first aorist stem is formed by appending 
 the tense suffix -era to the theme. In the first person 
 singular v is dropped, and in the third a is changed to e. 
 As a secondary tense the aorist has augment and sec- 
 ondary endings in the indicative. 
 
 198. Most verbs ending in a short vowel lengthen 
 this vowel before the tense suffix in all tenses except the 
 present and imperfect.^ a and e become 17, o becomes 
 ft), but a after e, t, or p becomes d : Trotew, TroLTJaco, 
 iTTOLiqaa ; PLKaco, PLKijaa) ; SrjXoo), hrjXcjaoi} ; ireipdu), 
 
 TTCtpaCTft). 
 
 199. A labial mute at the end of a theme unites 
 with (T of the tense-suffix of the future or first aorist 
 and forms t/;, a palatal with this a forms ^, a preceding 
 lingnal is dropped (194, 2). 
 
 200. The theme of some verbs with presents in {, 
 as dpTrd^co, (tcoIco, end in 8 : dpiraS-, o-ft)8-. In forming 
 the future and first aorist of these verbs 8 is dropped 
 before <t: dpTzdcro)^ eacoca, (194, 2). 
 
 201. The Future Indicative represents an action that 
 will take place at a future time : Xvcrco, I shall loose, or 
 / shall be loodn(], 
 
 1 Except second aorist system (203). 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 77 
 
 202. The Aorist Indicative represents the simple oc- 
 currence of an action in past time, corresponding to the 
 Historical Perfect in Latin : eXvcra, / loosed. 
 
 a. The aorist infinitive not in indirect discourse has the same 
 time as the present, but differs from it in denoting a single act. 
 
 203. Some verbs have a Second Aorist active and 
 middle formed from the theme of the verb with %. af- 
 fixed. These tenses in the indicative are inflected like 
 the imperfect (111): ex^? ^f^? second aorist active, 
 e(Txov, mid. icrxof^W^ ^ ^^^^ (531). It regularly has 
 the force of the first aorist (530). 
 
 204. Give the future and aorist ind. and inf. act. 
 and mid. of the following verbs : 
 
 1. KcoXvo), KeXevco, Tropevo), Troieoj, fiovXevcj. 
 
 2. TTefjLTTO), Keyco, 7T€lO(o, dpTTcii^a). 
 
 7re/xi//cu TrejjLxjjoiJLaL eTre/xi/ia iTrefixfjdfjLTjv 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. K, T. X. 
 
 205. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ol TreXracrral TreXra? ecrypv. 2. 6 Yiipcnq^ 
 
 (TTpeTTTOV XPV^O^^ ^"^X^* ^- ^ Kl}/0O9 TOV dS€X(j)01/ 
 
 opa. 4. KavTTj i^ihqcrev avTov. 5. avrr] avrov eireLcre. 
 
 6. Kvpo^ iff) dfjid^7]<; inopeveTO, 7. atpelrai^ ttoXc- 
 
 fjietv 77 po^ XlicrtSa?. 8. crrpaTidv crvveke^ev 0,770 tov- 
 
 TOV TOV xP^^'-o^- 9' o^ aXXoi dp^ovTO TTopevecOai, 
 
 10. ivTavOa Kvpo<; dpiOpLov tcov crTpaTLO)T(ov iTTOLTjcrev 
 
 iv Tw TTapaheiao). 11. ov Tr)v tcov ^ap^dpoiv ^Ckiav 
 
 alpTJcrofiaL. 12. irapd T7]v ye(^vpav tov noTafJLOv Trep,- 
 
 ^ Historical present. The present in narration is frequently used 
 vividlv for the aorist. 
 
78 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 i//at KeXevovcTL^ ^v\aKrjv. 13. /cat tovtov<; tov^ crrpa- 
 TtftJra? iKeXevcre avv avT(o arparevecrO ai. 14. koX tov^ 
 crvv K^vpco /Bap/Soipov^ iSioj^a cvv rotcrSe^ rot? orrpa- 
 TLCoTai*;. 15. ivrevOev i^ekavvei Sta tt^? Aufcdoi^ia? 
 araOyiovz irevTe Trapaadyyas TpiaKOVTa. ravTrjv Tif}v 
 ^(tipav ^iripTTacTev, 
 
 II. 1. The soldiers will lead this man to Clearchus. 
 2. He will send with her a guard. 3. Bat I will 
 come at once. 4. And Cyrus summoned him from his 
 province. 5. The barbarians upon the heights hin- 
 dered him. 6. He himself took part in an expedition 
 against these countries. 7. Thej will command the 
 Persians to destroy the bridge. 
 
 206. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dpiOpLO^;, o^numberwf/, enu' Hon, make 2var ; mid., 
 
 7neration [arithmetic J. take part in an expedition 
 
 oLpxV) -^s, rule, province. (arpaTos). 
 
 rpiaKovra, indecl., thirty. a-vk-kiyo), collect {Xeyco, 
 
 <f>L\[d, -d?, friends/lip, affec- gather\ 
 
 tion ((^tXto?), <^i\ea), (fyiXijcro), etc., love 
 
 alpect), alpyja-o), etc., take, ((^tXo?). 
 
 seize; mid. c/ioose [her- irpo^, prep. w. gen., in 
 
 esyj. front of, from ; w. dat., 
 
 /Ltera-Tre/ATro), send for or af- near, at; w. ace, towards, 
 
 ter ; mid. summon, to, against [pros-odyj. 
 
 (TTpaTeva), make an expedi- evOvs, adv., at once. 
 
 ^ Explain the use of this tense. 
 
 ^ Near at hand ; more emphatic than ovtos. 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 79 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 Review IX. 3, a.h.c, X. ; XL N. ; XIL ; XIIL ; 5 ; 
 
 6; 7, a, ^,(1), (2), (3); 8; 40; 43, 1, 2, 3; 192; 
 194, 2, 4. 
 
 207. The third declension includes all nouns whose 
 stem ends in a consonant or a close vowel (t or v), and 
 is called the consonant declension. The stem of the 
 nouns of this declension is regularly found by dropping 
 the case ending of the gen. sing., -09. 
 
 208. Stems JEndint/ in a Consonant. 
 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 6 ^vXa^ 
 
 6 0paf 
 
 6 ^vyd<; 
 
 
 (^cfivXoLK-) 
 
 (©paK-) 
 
 (<t>vya^) 
 
 
 watchman 
 
 Thracian 
 
 Singular. 
 
 fugitive 
 
 N. 
 
 (f>v\a^ 
 
 0paf 
 
 ^vydq 
 
 G. 
 
 <^i;Xa/co9 
 
 ©/DOL/cds 
 
 ^vydho^ 
 
 1>. 
 
 (f)vXaKL 
 
 ^paKi 
 
 (^uyctSt 
 
 A. 
 
 (f)v\aKa 
 
 %paKa 
 
 (^vyaSa 
 
 V. 
 
 <^vXaf 
 
 Dual. 
 
 (fyuyd<; 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 ^vXaKe 
 
 (dpaK€ 
 
 ^vydZe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 ^vkoLKOLV 
 
 SpaKoiv 
 
 (^vydhoiv 
 
80 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 N. 
 
 V. 
 
 (^Aafce? 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (jyvydSes 
 
 G. 
 
 (JivXaKcov 
 
 %paK(t)v 
 
 (j)vydSo}p 
 
 D. 
 
 (jyvXa^L ^ 
 
 @paji' 
 
 (j)vyd(Ti 
 
 A. 
 
 (f)vXaKa^ 
 
 ©yDOLAcas 
 
 <^vya8a9 
 
 r) (fidXay^ to ovofxa 
 
 (cfiaXayy) (ovo/xar-) 
 
 phalanx name 
 
 Sinp-ular. 
 
 (j)dXay^ 
 
 (fyaXayyo^; 
 
 (j)dXayyL 
 
 <f)dXayya 
 
 <f)dXay^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 <j)aXayye 
 (j)aXayyoLV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (^aXayyoiv 
 (j)dXay^L ^ 
 (f)aXayyas 
 
 ovojxa 
 
 OVO^JLaTO^ 
 OVOfiaTL 
 
 ovofia 
 ovofxa 
 
 ovofxare 
 ovofidroLi/ 
 
 ovofJuaTa 
 
 OVOfxdTCOV 
 
 ovofxa&L 
 ovofxaTa 
 
 a. Observe that the nom. sing, of masc. and fem. nouns is 
 formed by annexing -9 to the stem and making the necessary 
 euphonic changes (194, 2). 
 
 h. Observe that the nom. sing, of neuters is the same as the 
 stem with the necessary euphonic changes (192). 
 
 <?. Observe that the nom. and voc. of the masc. and fem. 
 nouns are alike, that the nom., ace, and voc. of the neuters are 
 alike, and the plurals end in a (61, h, (3)). 
 
 The ending in the dat. plur. is -o-t. 
 
. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 81 
 
 f 
 
 d. Observe that the rules for accenting nouns (43) regularly 
 
 apply to the nouns of this declension, except monosyllables of 
 the third declension, like @pa^, which accent the gen. and dat. 
 of all numbers on the ultima, -oiv and -cov having the circumflex 
 (43, 3). 
 
 e. Observe that the masc. and fem. nouns have the same 
 case endings ; that the gender of nouns of this declension must 
 be frequently learned by observation. 
 
 209. Monosyllables of the third declension accent 
 the genitive and dative of all numbers on the ultima, 
 -oiv and -oiv have here the circumflex. 
 
 210. Write a table of the endings of the consonant 
 declension, marking their quantity. 
 
 a. Decline as above : 6 Ocjpa^, -afco? ; to xPVt^^y 
 -aro? ; to crr/oarev/xa, -aro? ; to dpfia, -aro5. 
 
 211. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. TTpcJToi/ 7rpo9 Tov<; @pa/ca9 eTToXe/iT^cra. 2. to 
 ovofjia S' OLVTrj icTL KeXaij/at. 3. ol OTrXtrat d(opaKa<; 
 e)(ovaL. 4. ovtol els AvSidv avTco 
 
 -^KOV. 5. (J)6P0V TTOLOVaL T0t9 177" 
 
 77019. 6. K\eapxo<; Aafce8at/xo- 
 
 ^109 <j)iryd<; fjv. 7. rjye to 
 
 (TTpdTevfxa /caret fxeaov to tov 
 
 (jidkayyos- 8. kol tov<; (f)vydSa<; 
 
 eKeXevcre crvv avrw crrpareuecr^ai. 
 
 n v>. X CN> r ' , ^ V , No. 7. "Apua. 
 
 )). a Wo 0€ (TTpaTevyia avTco crvveKe- 
 
 y€To ev 'Keppov7)(r(p. 10. irapayyiWei tm ^ApLaTLmrq} 
 
 aTTOTre/xi/zat o et^e aTpdTevjJLa. 11. ivravOa 'Bepua t(o 
 
 ApKdSv o9 avTO) avveXeye tovto to aTpdTevfia tjkuv 
 
82 THE beginner's greek book, 
 
 TrapayyeWei. 12. 6 Se crrpdreviia crvveke^ev aTTO tov' 
 Tcov T(op ^pr)ixajT(j)v koX iTTokefiei toI<; Spa^u} 13. Kv- 
 /)os TrapTJXavpev icf) ^ dpjxarof; kol rj KtXtcrcra €<^' dp- 
 /xa/xa^T7S. 14. at Sucopvx^^ dno tov Tiypr^TOS irora- 
 jxov peovcri ' koL irXola Trkei ^ iv avrats • ela/SdWovcn 
 Se els TOV Eiv(l)pdTrjv. 
 
 Examine the datives in 4, 5, 9, 11 (avro)), and observe that 
 they denote the person or thing for whose advantage, benefit, 
 etc., or disadvantage, harm, etc., something is or is done ; that 
 they are not closely connected with the verb like the indirect 
 object (QQ), which must always be expressed or implied, but are 
 merely added to sentences which would be complete without 
 them. Observe that this dative is generally translated by for. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 212. The person or thing for whose advantage or 
 disadvantage anything is or is done is put in the 
 dative. 
 
 213. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. He was leading the army for him. 2. I will 
 do these things. 3. He was pursuing the phalanx. 
 .4. But they were wearing breastplates. 5. And he 
 collects both a barbarian and a Greek army. 6, But 
 he, himself, held the Thracians whom he had in his 
 army. 7. And he commanded the phalanx to proceed. 
 
 1 Depends upon eVoXcVet ; verbs of contending with, etc., take the 
 dative (225, a). 
 
 2 194, 1, a. 
 
 * Dissjllahic verbs in -e© contract only -ee and -cft. 
 
LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 83 
 
 214. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dpfxa, -aro?, to, chariot (j)vy(i<;, -aSo?, 6, fugitive, 
 
 (No. 7). exile. 
 
 dpixdfjia^a, rj, covered car- (f)v\a^, -a/co?, 6, a guard ; 
 
 riage (ap/Aa + d/xafa). pi., a bodyguard. 
 
 ^ap^apiK6^,-ri,'6v, foreign, ^/37j/xa, -aro?, to, a thing 
 
 barbarian ; to /3ap^ap- used; pi. goods, projjcrtg, 
 
 iKov (sc. dTpoLTevpLo), moncy. 
 
 the barbarian or Persian irap-ayyeWo), send ivord 
 
 army. along, send orders, order, 
 
 hi'wpv^, -v^os, 7}, ditch, irap-ekavvo), march or ride 
 
 canaL by. 
 
 Spa^, -/C09, 6, Thracian. TrXeo), sail [flow, fleet]. 
 
 dcopd^, -d/cog, 6, breastplate irpcoTov, adv., frst (adj., 
 
 (No. 6) [thorax]- TrpcoTO';, frst). 
 
 6po[xa,-aTo^,T6,naine [syn- , 
 
 -j aTpaTos, army encamped. 
 
 aT^'^l^f.a, -aTo,, t6, ar- ^^pdTevf^a, divisions of an 
 my, host (Lat., exercitus) ^^'^^^; ^^^^^^' ''^^^^• 
 
 (crrpard?). (TTpaTud, the effective force 
 
 ^d\cx.yt -yyos, y), a line of ^^ ^^^^ field or on the 
 battle [phalanx]. march. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS — VARIA- 
 TIONS IN THE SINGULAR. 
 
 Review preceding lesson ; 192; 194, 2, 4. 
 
 215. Euphony of Consonants, 
 
 vT, vh, v0 are dropped before -o" in inflections, and the 
 
84 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 preceding vowel lengthened, as in 194, 4 : dp^ovai 
 (dpxovT-ai), commander. 
 
 2i6. V alone is dropped before -cri of the dative 
 plural without lengthening the final vowel : rjyeixoo-L 
 (rjyefjLOV'crL). 
 
 217. 27ie Nominative, Stems in v^ p, cr, ovt, reject 
 a in the nominative and lengthen e to 77, and o to w. 
 Final r is dropped (192) : rjyefjbcov, -ovo';, dp^ojv, -ovto^ ; 
 Ttarrip^ Trarepo?, father. 
 
 218. The Accusative. Barytone^ stems in r, 8, 6, 
 after a close vowel (t, v) regularly drop the lingual and 
 annex v : ^dpiq., ^dpiv. 
 
 219. The Vocative. The vocative, which is regu- 
 larly like the nominative, is like the stem : {a) in bary- 
 tone stems ending in a liquid : yeirojv, yelrov ; ^ {h) in 
 stems ending in t8- and cr- : cXtti?, eXm (192). 
 
 220. Decline : 6 rjyefjicjv,'^ -ovo^ ; 6 fJiijv, fxiqvos ; o 
 SaifJLoyVf -ovo^ ; yj x^pts, -lto<; ; rj eXTTts, -1809 ; 6 dp-^cov, 
 -opTos (part, as subst. voc. dpxotn^) ; rj X^^P' X^^P^^-^ 
 
 Observe that some nouns from their signification may be 
 either masculine or feminine, or common geyuler ; that stems end- 
 ing in a labial or palatal mute are either masculine or feminine. 
 
 221. Gender of the Consonant Stems. 
 
 The gender of these nouns must be often learned by 
 
 ^ Special examples in p and cr will be noticed later. 
 2 See IX., 3, c. 
 
 ^ Barytone stems in -vt, except participles, have voc. like the stem, but 
 these are rare. 
 
 * No variations in the plural. See 821. 
 
 * X^p has x^potv in the gen. and dat. dual, and x^P^*' i^i the dat. plur., 
 m the form of the original stem (821). Most stems in p- are masculine. 
 
LIQUID AND LINaUAL STEMS. 
 
 85 
 
 observation, but the following general rules may be 
 given : 
 
 1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are either 
 masculine or feminine. 
 
 2. Masculine stems end in p, p, and pt. Exc. rj 
 Xeip. 
 
 3. Feminine stems end in 8, and feminines are most 
 nominatives in t?. 
 
 4. Neuter stems end in ar. 
 
 222. Give examples of nouns illustrating the above 
 rules for gender. 
 
 223. 77ie Case Endings of the Third Declension. 
 
 Masc. and F 
 
 EM. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 -5 or 
 
 ■ none 
 
 
 none 
 
 G. 
 
 -09 ( 
 
 -0)?) 
 
 
 -09 (-0)9) 
 
 D. 
 
 -t 
 
 
 
 -t 
 
 A. 
 
 -a(- 
 
 ^) 
 
 
 like nom. 
 
 V. 
 
 like 
 
 nom. 
 
 or like stem 
 
 Dual. 
 
 like nom. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 -€ 
 
 
 
 -e 
 
 G.D. 
 
 'OIV 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 -OLP 
 
 N. 
 
 -€5 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 G. 
 
 -OiV 
 
 
 
 -CJV 
 
 D. 
 
 -CTL 
 
 
 
 -o-i 
 
 A. 
 
 -a? 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 224. 
 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 
 1. ot y)y 
 
 'efiope 
 
 9 i(f)aLvovTO 7r\rj(TL0v. 
 
 2. €P fieP TTj 
 
 apLCTTepd X^^P'- '^^ To^ov €l;)^€. 3. 01 he ^l)(Ov i/zsA-ta 
 
86 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 TTcpt rat? ^epaiv. 4. 6rjpioi<; eTrXriciat^ov ol Ittttoi. 
 5. TO TTpayfJid ecTTL TrapairXijorLov iKeCvco. 6. tol oirXa 
 Toi<; arparucJTais inl dfjia^cjp TJyero, 7. a/ia ry 
 r)fji€pa TjKov dyyeXoL irapd tov (TTpanqyov. 8. 6 8e 
 iXnCSaf; /caXa? Xeyei. 9. yeiroiv oIkco rfj *EXXaSt. 
 
 10. 6 Kvpo? TTokepLTjcrei tco craTpaTrr) crifp rots (j)vydcn. 
 
 11. ot arpaTLCoTai tov /cara /xi^j/a jxiadov €(j)epov. 
 
 12. Ol (TTpaTLCOTaL Tol^ rjyefjLoai iOeXovcn TreideaSai, 
 
 13. e;)(€t 6 KXeapxo'S vnrjpeTaf;, ot avTco ovk tov pucrOov 
 eveKa p^ovov vTrrj peTijaopTau dXXd Koi^ tt}? \dpiTO<;, 
 
 Examine the datives in 4, b, 7, 9, 10 io-arpdirrj), and observe 
 that the words upon which thev depend signify approach, near- 
 ness, likeness, agreement, association, or their opposites, as 
 in 10. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 225. The dative is used with all words implying 
 nearness, likeness, association, or opposition, 
 
 a. This class includes verbs of following, discoursing with, 
 mixing, contending with, etc. 
 
 226. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. The army has fair hopes of safety. 2. On the 
 following day they proceeded with a guide. 3. He 
 was warring with the Persians. 4. But the soldiers 
 were angry with their leaders. 5. And Cyrus sum- 
 moned the generals of the Greeks. 6. Of the Greeks 
 there were ten thousand shield {used as a collective noun) 
 and twenty chariots. 
 
 ^ Kat not at the beginning of a sentence or clause, has force of also, 
 even, etc. See 109. 
 
LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 
 
 87 
 
 }v, left 
 
 •ov 
 
 €V 
 
 227. 
 
 dptaTepoSy 
 
 apicTTepa (sc. ■^(eipi), on 
 the left (Lat. sinister). 
 
 apyoi)v, -ovTo<;, 6, leader, 
 commande r, chief ; higher 
 title than crTpaTrjy6<;, 
 commander of a division 
 of an army (dp^o))* 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 No. 8. 'Aa-TLs. 
 
 dcnTL<;, -1S09, rj, a shield 
 
 (Nos. 1, 8). 
 yeiTciiVy 'Ovo<;, 6, neighbor. 
 haufKov, -ovo<;, 6, divinity, 
 
 spirit [demon]. 
 cXtti?, -t8o?5 17, hope. 
 y^yeixctiv, -ovo^;, 6, leader, > 
 
 guide, commander (ayoi). 
 \kriv, pjr]v6<^y 6, month [moon, 
 
 month]. 
 
 7rapa-iT\T]crL0<;, -a, -ov, near 
 by, similar, like{TT\.y)0'io<;). 
 
 7rXrjO'Lo<;, -d, -ov, near, neigh- 
 boring ; ttXtjo-lov, adv. 
 
 TTpdyixa, -aT09, to, deed, 
 act; '^\., affairs, trouble 
 {7rpdTTco,do) [pragmatic]. 
 
 (T0)T7)pia, -d?, safety, deliv- 
 erance (crw^w). 
 
 vTTTjpeTrjf;, -ov, servant, at- 
 tendant. 
 
 -ydpi^;, -LTo^, y], favor, grat- 
 itude, 
 
 yj^ip, x^ipo^, rj, hand, wrist 
 
 • [chiro-graphy]. 
 
 oLK€(o, dwell, live (oIko?). 
 
 7rXrjcnd(,o) (TrXrjcnaS-), ap- 
 proach (TT\y](TlO%). 
 
 v7rr]peT€(o, serve, supply 
 (vTrrjpeTrj^;). 
 
 dXXct, adversative conj., 
 stronger than 8e. 
 
 djjLa, adv., at the same time, 
 together with, dat. ; d^ia 
 T^ rjfjiepa, at daybreak 
 [same, some, hom-ily]. 
 
 jjLopov, adv., only, alone, 
 (/XW09, alone) [monk, 
 monad, mono-theism]. 
 
 a. Give the alhed words in tliis vocabularj. 
 
88 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES, 
 ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Review 23, 196, 197; 208, a, b -, 217, 219, a-, 
 223. 
 
 228. The Participle is a verbal adjective which has 
 certain tenses and governs the same case as the verb to 
 which it belongs. 
 
 229. Examine the following : 
 
 Participles. , 
 \vci)v (XvovT-), loosing (822). 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1. I^res, \vo)v, -ovcra, -ov \v6ijl€po<;, -rj, -ov 
 
 \vovTo<;, -ovo-r]<;, -ovro^ (pass, uses the same 
 K. r. X. form as the mid.) 
 
 2. Fat. Xvcrcov, -ovcra -ov Xvaofxevos, -r), -ov 
 
 XvcrovTO^;, -ovar]^, -ovto^ 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 3. Aor, Xv(Td<;, -adcra -crav Xvcrdfxevo<;, -7), -ov 
 
 XvaavTO^;, -adcrr)^;, -cravro^ 
 K.T. X. 
 
 a. Observe that the active participles form their stems by 
 annexing -vr to the tense stem of the verb (23) (perf. act. adds 
 -or) ; that the middle adds -/JLevo. 
 
 h. Observe that the participles in -09 belong to the vowel 
 declension^ and are declined like StJXo? (70;, 817); that the 
 
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 89 
 
 masc. and neut. active participles belong to the consonant declen- 
 sion, as apxcov, dpxovTO^ (220); and that the nom. sing, of the 
 latter is formed according to 208, b, and that of the former ac- 
 cording to 217; that the feminine with ending -aa^ is of the 
 first declension, and is inflected like afxa^a (41, c, 2). 
 
 230. The participles in their inflection are accented 
 with the regular accentuation of nouns. 
 
 231. Decline ap^oiv, (jyevyojv, (l)ep(ov. 
 
 232. Decline wv, being, like Xvo^v : oiv^ oScraj ov {o>v, 
 pres. part, of verb elfjuu, be), (823). 
 
 233. Decline XvojJievo^, \vcrdfjLevo<;, 8iwfa/x€^09. 
 
 234. Attributive Fartici;ple. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1 . 6 /Bao-iXevcov 'ApTa^€p^r)<;, the reigning ArtaxerxeSj 
 or Artaxerxes who is reigning. 
 
 2. a/x<^t ayopcLv irXijOovcrav, about the time of fall 
 market. 
 
 3. apxcov, a commander. 
 
 4. 6 dp-^oiv, the commander, 
 
 5. 6 (jiipcov Scopa, he tvho bears gifts. 
 
 6. ol he Sicj^avTe^ Ta^y inavovTOy those who loere 
 pursuing quicMy stopped. 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle is used like an adjec- 
 tive, and that it may be translated like a relative clause. 
 
 h. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, 6, the participle being used alone 
 or with the article, as an adjective in like situation, has the force 
 of a substantive, and is often best translated by he who or iho8e 
 who. 
 
 ^ -aa is for -la {-vT-ia, -paa), r passing into a before i, and v then was 
 dropped and the preceding vowel lengtliened (194, 4). 
 
90 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 235. The attributive participle may be used like an 
 adjective, both in qualifying a noun and as a substan- 
 tive. 
 
 236. Circumstantial Participle, 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. a, Tavra Xefa?, inopevero, having said these things 
 he adva7iced, or after he had said these things he advanced, 
 
 h. ravra Xeycov iiropeveTo, saying these things he 
 advanced. 
 
 c, iiropeveTo ravra Xefo/iei^og, he advanced about 
 to say these things, or to say these things, 
 
 2. ri^iov dSeX^09 o^v avTov, he asked because he was 
 his brother. 
 
 3. TO '^WrjvLKov T]0pOi^ev 0)9 fxaXiO'Ta iirLKpyTTTOfJie- 
 z^09, he tvas collecting his Greek force as secretly as 
 possible. 
 
 4. avTayopa^ovTes &Itov e(^a)v, they subsisted by pur- 
 chasing provisiojis in return. 
 
 5. riK^ (TTpaTevcroiJievo^, he came for the purpose oj 
 taking part in the expedition. 
 
 6. Tovf; opKov^ kv(ov, TTjv Slk7]v e)(€L, if hc broke his 
 oaths, he has his deserts. 
 
 7 . fxeaov TO eavTOv i\(ov, tov Kvpov evcovvfiov e^co 
 TjVy although he occupied the centre of his own forces, he 
 was outside of the left loing of Cyrus. 
 
 8. 17 /ce oTrXtra? h)(Oiv yih.iov%y he came with one thou- 
 sand hopjlites. 
 
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 91 
 
 9. crvXXefas arpauTevyua iiroXiopKei MiXrjTOT/, he col- 
 lected a7i army and laid siege to Miletus. 
 
 10. jxeTaTrejJLTroiJLevov avrov, ovk ideXo) ekdeiv^ ah 
 though he contirmes to send for me, I do not wish to go. 
 
 a. Observe that the tenses of the participle denote time pres- 
 ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal verb. 
 Thus, in 236, 1, «, he spoke before he advanced ; b, he ad- 
 vanced while speaking ; <?, he advanced before he spoke, or for 
 the purpose of speaking. 
 
 b. Observe that these participles add a circumstance con- 
 nected with the action of the leading verb : that they express 
 respectively time, cause, manner, means, purpose, condition 
 (translated by if), concession, and any attendant circumstance.^ 
 
 c. Observe that in 1, <?; 5, the future participle is regularly 
 used with verbs of motion, like the Latin supine in -um, to express 
 purpose. 
 
 • d. Observe that these participles are regularly translated by 
 a clause of time, cause, etc. ; that in 9, the participle is best 
 translated by a co-ordinate verb. 
 
 e. Observe that in 10, the participle agrees with a genitive 
 not connected with any word in the sentence, and forms a distinct 
 dependent clause with a change in the subject without introduc- 
 ing a finite verb and conjunction. This is called the genitive 
 absolute, corresponding to the ablative absolute in Latin. It 
 can denote any relations of the circumstantial participle, but it 
 may frequently be translated by a preposition and verbal noun. 
 
 Rule. 
 237. The tenses of the participle are regularly pres- 
 
 ^ These indicate only the most common relations of the circumstantial 
 participles. They are classified by the predominant element, and the same 
 participle may belong to more than one class, as time, cause, concession. 
 
92 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal 
 verb.^ 
 
 Rule. 
 
 238. The circumstantial participle may define the 
 circumstances of an action. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 239. The circumstantial participle and a noun not 
 the same as the subject or object of the main verb, may 
 be put in the genitive absolute. 
 
 240. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. €)((E.i ap^ovra 8e avra)v Heviav. 2. ol ap-^ov 
 res iirl rai? 6vpaL<; elcri. 3. Kupos \ap,^dvei rov<; 
 (j)evyovTa<;. 4. Tavra aKovcravTe<; ol arpanqyoi kol 
 Xo^ayot iiroLOvv ovtcj. 5. iiropevovro eV Sefta e)(0VTe<i \ 
 TOP 7]Xlov. 6. iTTOLTjcre Tavra, eKeupcov ovk im fia^rjv 
 ava^aivovTCtiv. 7. />tera Tavra yjSrj rjXcov Svvoptos 
 o-vyKakecra^ roug aTpaT7]yov(; /cat Xoxcuyov^; eXefe rctSe. 
 8. UapvcraTLS e^aiTiqcrap^evy) avTOV aTroTre/xTret irakiv 
 inl T7)v ap^Tjv. 9. M.ivcx)va 8e ovk H^yjTei Trap ' Apiaiou 
 o)v Tov M.ev(x)vo<; ^evov, 10. ol 8' aXXot cTrel rJKov, 
 Tov^ Tapcrovg hirfpTTaaav, 8ta tov okedpov tojv crrpari- 
 (OTwv opyi^ojJievoL. 11. Kal virep rrj^ 'EXXa8os SpaKa^ 
 eTifxcopoviJLrjv, Ik Trj<; XeppovTjaov avTov<; i^eXavvcov. 
 12. Kvpo<; 8' ovp dve/BaLve iirl rd aKpa aarpdirov 
 
 ^ The present and aorist sometimes have no distinction of time, tlie 
 former denoting continuance, the latter a single act. This more frequent Ij 
 occurs with the circumstantial participle. 
 
 ^ Translate mtk. 
 
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 93 
 
 ov K0}kvovTO<;. 13. TTapayyiWei rols ap-^ovcn eKoi' 
 aTOL<; kafJi^di/eLv tovs HeXoTropviqcriovf;, o)? iin^ovXev- 
 ovTO^ Tov craTpdirov rat? /cw/xats. 
 
 II. I. After they heard these things they crossed 
 the river. 2. But when they had made an assembly, 
 they announced these things. 3. And he orders Xenias 
 to come with his army. 4. For he who will lead (us) 
 has boats. 5. He goes up with three hundred hopHtes 
 of the Greeks. 6. Parysatis did not love the reigning 
 Artaxerxes. 7. He commanded Socrates, who was a 
 guest friend, to come as he intended to make war with 
 the satrap. 
 
 241. VOCABULARY, 
 
 e/cacrro?, -17, -oz/, eac/i of olkovco, hear [acoustic]. 
 
 more than two, every d^Locj, to demand ; ask as 
 
 one, Lat. qiiisgue ; plur. Jit, worthy [afto?]. 
 
 several, each, severally ; *8vw, enter ; of the ^u\\,set. 
 
 with a substantive us- i^-airio), demand, bey off 
 
 ually in the predicate [atreoi, ask~\. 
 
 position. tpqrio}, seek, ask for. 
 
 iKKkrj(TLd, -dsy assembly, opyiQ(s},to make angry, m\{\, 
 
 meetiny [/caXeoj]. to he enrayed. 
 
 17X109, sun [peri-helion, TljjLcjpeo), avenye, mid. take 
 
 helio-tropej. venyeance on [ti/xt;]. 
 
 6XeOpo<;, destruction. 17877, adv. already, now, 
 
 (j)evyo)p, 'OVTo^, 6, fuyitive, ovv, post-posit, inferential 
 
 ecvile [(j)€vya), flee'] . conj., therefore, then, 
 
 oiv, ovcra, ov, heiny, pres. irdXiv, adv. hack ayain 
 
 part. [€t/x,i]. [palin-drome] . 
 
94 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 <W9, conj. adv., as<) when; w? /xaXtcrra, as much as possible ; 
 with circumstantial participles to express the purpose 
 or pretext of the subject of the leading verb without 
 implying that it is also the opinion of the author, as 
 if, just as, on the ground that, ivith the intention 
 of, etc. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Review 150, 151, 2, 3, 4 ; 152, 153, 154. Note in 
 Lesson XXIL, 229, 3, ^, /5 ; 230. 
 
 242. Decline in the original form and then contract 
 
 (822): 
 
 1. 
 
 Tlfxacop 
 
 Tlfjidovcra 
 
 rlfiaop 
 
 
 rlfJicoi/ 
 
 TlfJicjcra 
 
 TlfXCOV 
 
 
 TlfJidoVTOS 
 
 r'niaovo-y)^ 
 
 TlfJLdoPTO<; 
 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 TliJi(0(rr)<; 
 K. T. X. 
 
 TlfJiCt)VTO<; 
 K. T. X. 
 
 2. 
 
 TTOli(t)V 
 
 TTOieovaa 
 
 TTOlioV 
 
 
 TTOLCOP 
 
 TTOiovcra 
 
 TTOLOVV 
 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 3. 
 
 hrjXocDT/ 
 Sy)\cop 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 SrjXovcra 
 K. T. X. 
 
 SrjXoov 
 
 S7)\oVP 
 
 K. r. X. 
 
 243. The supplementary participle completes the idea 
 expressed by the verb. It may agree either with the 
 subject or object. 
 
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 95 
 
 1. KXeapxo^s StareXetro Xeycoj/, Clear chus continued 
 to speak. 
 
 2. l-Trava-avTo irokeixovvre^, they ceased warring, 
 
 3. OiKoxxa avTov \iyovTo^^ I hear him speaking, 
 
 4. irvyxav^ \iyo)v, he happened to be saying. 
 
 5. rpecfiOfJievoT/ iXdvdavev to cTTpdrevfJia, the army 
 was secretly supported. 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle completes the idea ex- 
 pressed in the verb ; that in 3, the participle denotes the action 
 or state in which the object is perceived or heard. 
 
 h. Observe that in 4, 5, the participle contains the leading 
 idea and the verb may be translated as an adverb, or that the 
 participle may become the verb of the sentence and the verb 
 a participle expressing manner : \av6dvov iTp€(j)eTO to o-Tpd- 
 Tev/jia,^ the anny was secretly supported. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 244. The supplementary participle resembling the 
 object infinitive is used with verbs signifying to begin, 
 continue, end, hear, knoio,jind, see, represent, appear, and 
 with verbs of endurance and emotion. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 ■245. The supplementary participle with Tvyxdvco, 
 \avddv(x), ^ddvco, regularly contains the leading idea of 
 the expression, and is usually translated by a verb. 
 
 a. Here the present and aorist have no distinction of time. 
 
 246. Examine the following : 
 
 ^ TJiis arrangement would be expected in English. 
 
96 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 SrjXo^ Tjv dpLa)fjievo<;, he ivas evidently/ distressed, for 
 hrj\ov Tjv on 7)viaT0. 
 
 h. Observe that the participle is used with 87) Xo? et^t to 
 change the impersonal construction with hr\\6v eVrt to the 
 personal. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 247. The supplementary participle may be used per- 
 sonally with S'^Xo? et/xt, (j)ai'ep6s elfiL, (l)aLPOiJLaL, etc.^ 
 
 248. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Tjp^ero TToXejxeLi/. 2. 6 Se eXTTtSa? Xeycov Sua- 
 reXet. 3. opa avrov irapekavvovTa. 4. vlkcov ifvy- 
 ^avev. 5. iTLfJi7](re KXeap^ov (fyevyovTa. 6. Kpavyfj 
 TjXavvov iiTL rov9 7ToXepLiov<?. 1 . tovtco tco rpoirco iiro- 
 pevovTO. 8. 01 8e /cat rjiropovv rw Trpay/xart. 9. ra 
 aKpa ov (^OdvovcTLV 01 KtXtfce? KaraXa^ovTe^? 10. toI^ 
 dXXoi9 napTJyyeXXe OTrXu^eaOai Ocopa^L. 11. ovto) 8e 
 TO iv ©erraXta iXdvOavev avrco rpecfyofievov arpaTevpia. 
 12. ^OpovTa^ im/BovXevajv Kvpco (j)av€po^ '^v. 13. Ila- 
 pucrart? 817 VTrrjp^e rco Kvpco ^ (^tXovcra avrov. 14. /cat 
 iiroXepei e/c XeppopTJaov oppcopevos toIs O/oaft rot? 
 VTrep EXXy^cTTroj^TOj' ot/covcrt. 
 
 Examine the datives in 6, 7, 8, 10 (Odypa^u) and note the 
 relations they express. 
 
 249. The dative is used to denote manner, cause, 
 means, or instrument. 
 
 ^ This participle will be more fully classified later {717). 
 2 Sec \ati^dv(o. 3 See 146. 
 
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 
 
 97 
 
 250. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They were arming themselves with breastplates 
 
 2. It was evident that Menon desired to be honored 
 
 3. Cyrus happened to be present. 4. I hear him 
 shouting. 5. Clearchus ceased to war with the Thra 
 cians. 6. He happened to be a guest friend of his 
 7. This army was thus secretly supported for him. 
 
 251 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Kpavyij, -^9, s/ioiit, outcry J XavOdvo), escape the notice 
 clamor. of, lie hid [lethargy] . 
 
 7Tap-a>i>y -ovaa, -6v, he near, ottXi^o), arm^ equip \07r\ov\. 
 
 present ; part, of 7ra/>et/>ti. opfjida)^ hasten, start ; mid., 
 
 (j)avep6<;, -a, -6v, visible, man- set out, forth . 
 
 if est, evident [<^aivo)\. 
 
 Tp67ro<;, manner, charac- 
 ter [rpeiTOD ; tropic, tro- 
 phy]. 
 
 d-TTopeo), to be without re- 
 source, to he perplexed, 
 in douht [aTropo?] . 
 
 Travct), cause to stop, end, 
 stop; mid., cease, desist, 
 cease from [Lat pausa^ 
 pause]. 
 
 Tp€(f)a), nourish, support. 
 
 Tvjxdvo), hit, obtain, hap- 
 pen. 
 
 Sta-reXeiw, finish, complete (jyOdpco, he or come before. 
 
 the distance, continue. 
 
 iTTL-Ovfieo), set one's heart 
 upon^ desire eagerly, loish 
 [^i5/xo9, soul"]. 
 
 KaTa-Xafi^dvct), take, cap- 
 ture, seize, overtake, pre- 
 occupy [catalepsy] . 
 
 anticipate; w^thasuppl. 
 participle, before, sooner, 
 first. 
 St], post-posit, intensive par- 
 ticle, now, indeed, surely, 
 accordingly. 
 
9'8 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 Review 151, 2, 3, 4; 152, a-, 153, 154, 2; 196, 
 197. 
 
 252. Verbs are called vowel (pure), mute, or liquid, 
 according as their themes end in a vowel, mute, or 
 liquid. 
 
 253. New themes are often formed by adding e to 
 the verb root. From this new theme some verbs form 
 the present tense stem, and the other tenses (or part of 
 them) from the root: So/ceco [80/c-], Sdfw, eSofa, etc. 
 Other verbs form their present from the simple theme 
 or root, and the other tenses (or part of them) from the 
 longer theme in c, and lengthen e as in simple vowel 
 verbs (198): iOeXco, iOekTJcrcj (ideXe-), o^eiko), o^ei- 
 XtJo'ci) {6(j>eLke-). 
 
 254. Some verbs in -ecu drop cr in the future, and 
 contract : KaXeco, Ka\a> (/caXecro)) ; reXelw, finish, TeKcj 
 (Tekia-o)). This form of the future is called Attic. 
 
 a. Observe that these verbs retain the sliort final vowel, the 
 former retains it in the fut. and aor., the latter throughout the 
 tenses. 
 
 255. Liquid verbs form their future by annexing 
 -€%. to the theme. They are then contracted like iroiiw, 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 99 
 
 a. Here -e%- is for an original -eo-%. ; the a is dropped 
 between two vowels (329, Obs. 4). 
 
 256. Liquid verbs form their aorist by rejecting cr 
 in -era and lengthening the theme vowel in compensa- 
 tion : a to 7^ (after t, or /o to a), € to et, t to I, v to v. 
 Thus, /xeW, e/xeti/a, ; Kplvo) (Kptv-), eKplva, distinguish ; 
 dyyeXXo) (dyyeX-), rjyyuXa; Kreivoi [KTev), eKTeiva, 
 MR. 
 
 257. Paradigms (832, 833). 
 
 1. Future Indicative of dyyiXXo), dyyeXw. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Middle. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 . dyyeXco 
 
 2. dyyeXet^ 
 
 3. dyyeXei 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 dyyeXovfiai 
 dyyeXeu, -fj 
 dyyeXeiTat 
 
 D. 
 
 2. dyyeXelrov 
 
 3. dyyeXeuTov 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 dyyeXelcrOoi/ 
 dyyeXelaOov 
 
 P. 
 
 1 . dyyeXovfJiep 
 
 2. dyyeXelre 
 
 3. dyyeXoOcri 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 dyyeXovfieOa 
 
 dyyeXelaOe 
 
 dyyeXovvrai 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 dyyeXeti/ 
 
 
 dyyeXelcrOaL 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 dyyeXcov 
 
 
 dyyeXovfiepo^; 
 
 a. Apply the rules of contraction to these forms. 
 
100 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK, 
 
 2. Aorist Indicative. 
 
 S. 1. TjyyeiXa 
 
 2. TjyyeiXas 
 
 3. yjyyeiXe 
 
 D. 2. rjyyeikarov 
 
 3. rjyyeiKdTr)v 
 
 P. 1 . rjyyeiXafJiev 
 
 2. rjyyeikaTe 
 
 3. y^yyeikav 
 
 Infia. 
 
 ayyeikai 
 
 Part. 
 
 dyyeiXoLS, -dcra, -av 
 
 1. r^yyeikayjiriv 
 
 2. rjyyeiXoj 
 
 3. TjyyeikaTO 
 
 2. rjyyeiXacrdov 
 
 3. rjyyeiXdcrOrjv 
 
 1 . rQyyeiXdfxeOa 
 
 2. riyyeiXaade 
 
 3. TfyyetXavTO 
 
 Infin. 
 Part. 
 
 dyyeiXa/Aei^o? 
 
 «. Observe that the thematic vowel and endings are regular. 
 
 ^. Observe that the stems of the last three verbs in 256 are 
 \^/cpiv-'\, [a77eX-], [/crei^-]. These verbs form the present by 
 adding -t°/e- to the theme ; -X with t becomes -XX (596) ; with 
 themes in v- and p-, t unites with the theme vowel (597, 598). 
 
 258. Write in the active and middle the future and 
 aorist indicative, infinitive, and participle of /xeVw, 
 KTeivco, 
 
 259. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Sofere dyaOol elpai. 2. TrapTJyyeuXe tol<; dp- 
 ^ovcri eKdcTTOL^ Xafju/Bdveuv tov<; HeXoirovpTjcTLOv^. 
 3. evravOa efxeivev r}fx€pa<; eTrrd. 4. e/BaXXe aXXo^; Se 
 XlOo) /cat dXXo<; 5. Kvpo^ vtto '¥iXXijpcop kol ^ap^d- 
 
FUTURE AND AOiJJST OF LIQUID' VERBS. 101 
 
 pcop (^tXetrat. 6. 6/3a»crt avroi;<; rtjua)/xeii^ou9 vtto tojv 
 (TT parriy(x)v . 7. ov o'Tparr)y7](Ta) Tavriqv ttjp (TTparr)- 
 yiav, 8. aevLa<^ 6 Ap/ca? tol AvKaua eOvae, 9. iv 
 revOev Kvpo<; ttjv KiXtcrcraz/ et? ttjv KiXuKLav aTroTre/xTret 
 TT7^' jJiaKpap oSop. 10. rw ayeiv iOeXovri apyupiov 
 TeXovfJLep. 11. iOekrjcreL fxeveui' iv rat? /cw/xat?. 
 12. ivravOa ifieive Kvpo^ kch tj aTparia r^xipa^ eiKo- 
 aiv. 13. 6 Se TreiOeTai re kol avWayij^dveL Kvpov oS? 
 airoKTevcov. 14. ifxeipav 8e /cat ot napa ttjv dakaTTav 
 oLKovvTe<; iv S0X019 /cat eV Icrcroi?. 
 
 Examine the genitives in b, 6, and observe that with vtto the 
 genitive denotes the author or the person by vi'hom an act is done. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 260. The agent with passive verbs is expressed by 
 the genitive with vtto. 
 
 Examine the accusatives in 7, 8, and note their relation to 
 the verbs. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 261. Any verb whose meaning permits may take an 
 accusative of kindred signification. This accusative de- 
 fines more definitely the predication contained in the 
 verb, and may follow both transitive and intransitive 
 verbs. It is called the cognate (or kindred) accusative.^ 
 
 a. When a neuter adjective represents the cognate accusative, 
 its noun is implied in the verb (8). 
 
 h. With verbs of motion the cognate accusative expresses the 
 ground over which the motion passes (9, o^ov). 
 
 ^ This is an adverbial use of tlie accusative. 
 
102 tHE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 262. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They were throwing stones. 2. These things 
 seemed to be best. 3. He happened to be proceeding 
 upon a wagon. 4. It was evident that Cyrus was 
 advancing. 5. There he remained five days. 6. And 
 he will remain in the villages. 7. But Clearchus gave 
 orders to the soldiers to cease. 
 
 263. VOCABULARY. 
 
 \W Of;, stone [litho-graph]. Ovo},sacrifce,ci.gQX\.voQ^h, 
 
 AvKaLo<;, -a, -ov, Lycaean ; arpanqyico, beyejieral, com- 
 
 ra Av/cata, the Lycaea, mand [o-r/QarT^yd?] . 
 
 festival in honor of Tekico, reXco, ireXecra, etc., 
 
 Zeus. finish, fulfil an obligation, 
 
 arpaTiqyia, -a'^, generalship, pay. 
 
 command [strategy]. vno, prep., under ; w. gen., 
 
 airo-KTeiva), kill ojf, slay, from under ; of agency, 
 
 put to death. by ^ through ; w. dat., «;^- 
 
 elvai, to be, pres. inf. of der, at the foot of; w. 
 
 et/At. ace, under. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 Review 41, c, 2; 208, a, b, c, 215, 216, 217, 219, 
 a; 223, 229, 1, 3. 
 
 264. Adjectives of the consonant declension follow 
 in the masculine and neuter the third declension. The 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 103 
 
 feminine," when it differs from the masculine, follows the 
 a declension, having in the nominative singular a (229, 
 
 265. Stems in vr- are declined like the participles 
 (229, 1, 3). 
 
 Paradigms (824). 
 
 eKcjv {eKOPT'), willing. Tras {TTavr-\ all. 
 
 k-KOiv ^ €/covcra kKov Tra? ^ iracra irap 
 
 eK6vro<i iKovar]<; iKovro^; iravTos 7racrri<; iravTO^ 
 
 K. T. 
 
 X. K, T. X. 
 
 266. Most stems in v- have the masculine and fem- 
 inine alike, and are declined like 8aificov (220). The 
 accent is recessive (XIIL). 
 
 Paradigm (824). 
 
 evSaLixcov (evhaLfiov-), fortunate, 
 
 evSaifJioji' evSaufJiov 
 
 evSaufiovo^ evSaufJiOi/o^ 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 267. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. 7rdvT€<;^ ol Kokol TratSe? TraiSevovTaL, 2. top 
 TToraiiov KoKei Mapavav. 3. 6 TTorajito? /caXetrat 
 Mapcrva?. 4. ovg ol Supot 0€ov<; ivoynl^ov. 5. Kv/005 
 
 ^ cKtoi/ is declined with the same endings as \v(ov (229, 1). 
 
 2 lias is declined with the endings of Xvaas (229, 3). In irav^d. is long 
 by exception. The compounds regularly have it short, anav, (rvfnrav. The 
 gen. and dat. dual and plural violate 209, and accent the first syllable. 
 irav sometimes appears in the voc. sing. 
 
 * TTCLi regularly has the predicate position. 
 
104 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 ^'0/xt{€t, KaKov<; ^ l3ap/3dpov<; elvau. 6. hrj\o<; tjv Kvpos 
 (TTTevhoiv iraaav ttjv oSov.'^ 7. Iv ravTj] Se ttj X^P^ 
 rjv Tj yrj vreSioi' airav. 8. iropeveraL 6 Kvpo<; crvv Toi^ 
 nepl avTov ev8at/x,ocrt. 9. olkovtos ' Apra^ep^ov, avfji- 
 ^ovXevco (T (xil^ecr 9 ai. 10. ol Se rjpojTojp Kvpop tol Sd- 
 ^avTa rfi (Trparia, 11. /cat atrei avrov et?^ ^tXiou? 
 feVov9 fJLLadov. 12. oi 0/)afC€9 rjOeXov a^aipelaOai 
 Tov^ ivoLKovvras EkXr)va<; Trjv yrjv. 13. Tracra? ra? 
 TavTT)^ Trj<; ^j^wpag Kcofxa^ ZiapTrdcrai^ toI<^ ''KXXiqcnv 
 ineTpexIfe. 14. Trdpre^ ovtol ou9 opare /Bdp^apoL 
 TToXepLLOL Tol<; FiXXrjaiv elcnv. 15. ivrevOev e^eXavvei 
 Sta ^pvyLa<; crTa9fxov Trapacrdyya^ okto) et? /coj/xa? 
 €voaLfjLOva<?. 16. Kvpoi^ Se fxer air efXTTCT at diro ttJ^ 
 apx^S 179 avTov (TaTpaTTTjv iTToCrjcre.^ 
 
 Examine the pairs of accusatives in 2, 4, 16 (avrov o-arpd- 
 7r7]v) and the verbs upon which they depend, and note that one 
 accusative of each pair expresses predicate relations such as 
 would appear with elvai with the same verbs (5). Observe also 
 that the predicate accusative may be an adjective (5). 
 
 Rule. 
 268. Verbs of naming, choosing, making, appointing, 
 tJiinking, believing, or regay^ding^ may take a predicate 
 accusative in addition to the object accusative. 
 
 a. In the passive both accusatives appear in the nominative, 
 3 (84). 
 
 ^ Predicate adj. after ffvat agreeing with its subject ^ap^dpovs, infin- 
 itive subj. accusative indirect discourse as in Latin. 
 
 2 Ace. extent (93). ^ Prep., /or, governing ^evovs. 
 
 * The infinitive without an article may express a purpose. 
 
 * The Eng. would use plupf. 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 105 
 
 Examine the pairs of accusatives in 10, 11 (avrov . . . 
 fjLLo-dov), 12 J and note their relations to the verbs upon which 
 they depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 269. Verbs of asking, demanding, teaching^ remind- 
 ing, clothing, concealing, depriving, etc., may take two 
 object accusatives, one of the person and the other 
 of the thing. 
 
 a. With some of these verbs, the accusative of the thing is a 
 cognate accusative (261). 
 
 270. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They ask Cyrus for a guide. 2. They bade them 
 ask for boats. 3. He made these commanders. 
 4. They beheve him brave. 5. The good appear pros- 
 perous. 6. And all these hoplites withdrew. 7. All 
 the rest of the army crossed. 8. For he will not will- 
 ingly bid you^ report these things. 9. He has all who^ 
 muster in the plain of Castolus. 
 
 271. VOCABULARY. 
 
 K-Koiv^ -ovaa, -ov, unwilling prosperous, happy (eu + 
 
 (d + kKOiv). haLficov). See 227. 
 
 a-TTct?, -cto-a, -av, all togeth- 0e6<;, 6, rj, god, goddess 
 
 er, all (d + Trctg). [theist, theism]. 
 
 kKcliv, 'ovo-a, -6v, willing; KaKos, -t], 'ov, had, base, 
 
 in pred., ivillinghj. cowardly ; to KaKov, evil, 
 
 eu-Sat/xwi', -ov, fortunate, harm. 
 
 1 iiuSc. '^ As many as. 
 
106 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 ocro9, -7), -ov, rel. proii. of 
 quantity, as great as, as 
 77iany as, how much or 
 great; after Trag trans- 
 lated who, etc. 
 
 TTol^} TTaiSo?, 6, 7], child 
 [ped-agogue]. 
 
 Trag, Tracra, irav, all, the 
 whole, every ; generally 
 in pred. position [pan- 
 theon, pan-theism, pan- 
 orama] . 
 
 oLTect), ash: for, demand; 
 mid., entreat, beseech, 
 beg, 
 
 aiT€(o, ash:, demand. 
 a^Loo), ash as tvorthg, right. 
 ipcoToiaj, ash a question, in- 
 quire. 
 
 airo-cnrdo), -dcro), etc., draw 
 off, separate, withdraio. 
 
 d(j>-aLp€(o, take away; mid., 
 rob [aTTo + aipecuj. 
 
 iv-oLK€0), inhabit, live in. 
 
 iiTi-TpeTTQ), turn over to^ en- 
 trust., commit. 
 
 ipcjTaco, -Tjcro), etc., ask a 
 question, question. 
 
 vofxit^o) {vofJLiS-)j to hold as 
 a custom or usage, thinh, 
 consider, believe, etc. 
 
 TraiSevco, educate (ttols) 
 [en-cyclo-paedia] . 
 
 cTTreuSo), urge, hasten. 
 
 l^rjTeco, ash for tvhat one 
 needs. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 272. Review Lessons XV.-XXV. in order, with 
 their vocabularies. Group the related words in form 
 and meaning with the allied words of the previous 
 vocabularies. 
 
 ^ TTois violates (209) in gen. dual and plural Traidoiv, iraiboiv, and has 
 voc. in Trat as a stem in 18 (219, b). 
 
REVIEW. 107 
 
 273. Compounds. 
 
 1 . What is a compound word ? 
 
 2. How are compound verbs formed, accented, 
 augmented ? 
 
 3. What force had the prepositions originally? 
 
 4. Give special verbs that take the dative of indirect 
 object. 
 
 5. What compound verbs take the dative ? 
 
 274. Prepositions, 
 
 1. Give the generic uses of the oblique cases. 
 
 2. Give the rule for the use of the prepositions with 
 the different cases. 
 
 3. With what case are aTrd, ojvtI, Ik, and Trpd, used ? 
 
 4. Why cannot et? bS used with the genitive, or eV 
 with the accusative ? 
 
 5. Why is /cara not used with the dative? 
 
 6. Give the uses of eVt and Trapct with genitive, 
 dative, and accusative, and give examples in Greek. 
 
 7. Translate the following and distinguish the uses of 
 (Tvv and /Ltera : 1. iiroXefMei craTpaTrr) avv roL<; (f^vydo-t. 
 2. Kvpo<; fiera rcov dkXcov i^ekavvei. 
 
 8. Give some metaphoric uses of the prepositions. 
 
 9. Translate into Greek: 1. Out of the house. 
 2. Before the phalanx. 3. Instead of his brother. 
 4. Away from the army. 5. In the plain. 6. Down 
 from the hill. 
 
 10. Translate into English : 1. /Ltera ravra i^eKavvei. 
 2. iXavv€L iirl tov TTorrayLOV. 3. ifxevov eTTt rat? Ov' 
 pai<;. 4. TOP oLvOpoiTTov riyov irpo^ KXiap^ov. 5. aire* 
 (riraore oltto tov TroTafxov. 
 
108 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 275. Contraction. 
 
 1. When may vowels be contracted? 
 
 2. How are diphthongs formed ? 
 
 3. Give the rules of contraction for vowels of like 
 sound, of o sound. 
 
 4. When a and e come together what forms does the 
 contraction take ? 
 
 5. Give the rule for the contraction of a vowel be- 
 fore a diphthong ; give examples. 
 
 6. What special contractions have verbs? 
 
 7. What special contraction has the vowel declen- 
 sion ? What accent has the noni., ace, and voc. dual of 
 the o declension ? 
 
 8. Give the rule for the accent of contracted syllables. 
 
 9. How are compound adjectives in -009 accented ? 
 Adjectives in -eo? ? 
 
 10. Why are not other forms of rt/iao), Troiew, etc., 
 than the present and imperfect contracted ? 
 
 11. Conjugate in the present and imperfect, active 
 and middle indicative, in uncontracted and contracted 
 forms vLKoio), alreoiy and fjucrOoo). 
 
 12. Explain the contracted forms in the following : 
 
 TLjJLOLV, VLKOLP, So/C€t^, atT€tr, jJLLCrdoVV. 
 
 13. Decline in the uncontracted and contracted 
 forms fiva, vov^. 
 
 14. Define crasis, elision* 
 
 15. Give the rules for the accent of elided svllables 
 both in elision and crasis. 
 
 16. Perform crasis upon the following: zeal ayaOoi', 
 
REVIEW. 109 
 
 TO avTo ; TOL dya6d ; rd aWa ; kol aurd? ; to ovofxa ; 
 Tov avTov ; ov eveKa. 
 
 17. Perform elision upon the following : irapd aurw; 
 errTOL rjaav ; olvtI eKeivov ; iirl dvOpcono) ; Kara ou? ; 
 dvTl d)v ; diro lttttov ; rovro aXXo. 
 
 18. Form compounds of the following: irapd + 
 ekavvo) ; iiri + 6809 ; aTrd + atpeo) ; 0,770 + dyyeXXco ; 
 viro -\- dp^o) ; irapd + dyyekXco. 
 
 276. Pronouns, Demonstrative and Intensive. 
 
 1. What substantives are in the main declined with 
 the endings of the article? 
 
 2. Decline avrd? and give its uses. 
 
 3. How are aXXo?, e/ceti^o?, and dSe declined ? 
 
 4. Decline ovto%. What is the position of the 
 demonstrative ? 
 
 5. Give the uses of ovto<^, dSe, and Ik€ivo<^, and the 
 force of 6 yAv ... 6 Se. 
 
 6. Decline the article, and then change it to the 
 relative. 
 
 7. Give the rule for the agreement and construction 
 of the relative. 
 
 8. Write in Greek : 1. This man ; that man. 2. I 
 say these things. 3. He spoke as follows. 4. The 
 general himself led. 5. Cyrus loved him. 6. They 
 were doing the same things. 7. He showed whom he 
 honored. 8. He sent back the army which he had. 
 
 277. Euphony of Consonants, 
 
 1. Write the diagram of the classes and orders of 
 mutes. Define cognate and co-ordinate mutes. 
 
110 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 2. Define smooth and rough mutes. What are the 
 double consonants ? 
 
 3. What are the liquids ? When is y nasal ? 
 
 4. What consonants only can end words? Why are 
 c/c and ovk no exceptions ? 
 
 5. Give the rule for the euphonic changes of mutes 
 before the Unguals r, 8, d. 
 
 6. What form does ov take before a smooth vowel ? 
 Before a rough ? 
 
 7. What change occurs when a consonant either 
 by elision or in forming a compound word is brought 
 before a rough vowel ? 
 
 8. Give the rule for the changes of mutes before cr 
 and examples. 
 
 9. Give the rule for the changes of v preceding the 
 mutes and liquids. 
 
 278. Explain the euphonic changes in the following: 
 (Tvy-KaXeo), crvX-Xeyw, ifJi-/3aLV(o, avix-^ovXevco, cri;//,- 
 TToXefjueo), Xe^coy ike^a, Trefxipcoy apTrdcroj, ireiao), So^co, 
 KekevovcTi, T^yejudcrt, dp^ovau {dpxo[yT]crL), dpfxa 
 (dpfxar). 
 
 279. Future and Aorist Active and Middle of Verbs. 
 
 1. How is the future and aorist active and middle of 
 vowel, mute, and liquid verbs formed ? 
 
 2. Name two vowel verbs that form the future by 
 rejecting cr. 
 
 3. Explain the several changes in forming the future 
 of So/ceo), TTOteo), iOeXo). 
 
 4. Give the primary and secondary tense-endings. 
 
REVIEW. Ill 
 
 5. How does the middle differ in the main from the 
 active ? 
 
 6. How does the future differ in form from the 
 present? The aorist from the imperfect? 
 
 7. Distinguish between the uses of the aorist and 
 imperfect. What is the use of the augment ? 
 
 8. Write the future and aorist active and middle in- 
 dicative, infinitives, and participles of Kekevco, ttoUo), Bvcd, 
 
 9. Write the same forms as the preceding of Xeyw, 
 TrefXTTco, TreiOo), ayyeXXco, fievo), Kreivo), Kpivo). ' 
 
 280. Consonant Declension, 
 
 1. What substantives does the third declension in-" 
 elude ? 
 
 2. How is the stem of the consonant declension 
 found ? 
 
 3. How is the nominative singular of masculines and 
 feminines formed from the stem ? Of neuters ? 
 
 4. Explain the euphonic changes in forming the 
 nominative singular of the following : <^vXafco9, ^wpa- 
 /C09, Stcopf^o?* <^a\ayyo9, (jyvydSos, 'Ap/cctSo?, apfxaTO*;, 
 6v6jJLaTo<;. 
 
 5. Decline : <^vXa^, xPVH'^j 'A/o/cct?. 
 
 6. Decline and explain formation of nominative and 
 vocative singular of rjyefjLCJv, yeLTcov, 6 dp^cov, dcTTri?, 
 
 7. Give the rule for the accent of monosyllables of 
 the third declension in the genitive and dative, and note 
 exceptions in Trat? and Tra?. 
 
 8. Give the rules for forming the vocative of nouns 
 of the third declension. 
 
112 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 9. When does the accusative singular have v instead 
 of a? 
 
 10. Account for the euphonic changes in the dative 
 plural of yeuTCDv, ap^cov, c^uXaf, dcTTrt?. 
 
 11. Give the general rules for the gender of the 
 third declension. 
 
 12. Write the case endings of the third declension. 
 281. Participles and Adjectives. 
 
 1. What is a participle? Give the endings of the 
 stems of the active })articiples. 
 
 2. How are the active participles and adjectives of 
 consonant stems inflected ? What form has the vocative 
 of participles ? 
 
 3. Decline : \vo}v^ eKcov, ^p, Xucra?, Tra?, evSaCficov. 
 
 4. Decline in both uncontracted and contracted forms : 
 viK(xiv^ (j)i\(ov, Sr)Xct)v. 
 
 5. What are the three principal uses of the participle ? 
 How is it best translated when used with an article ? 
 
 6. What are the principal relations expressed by 
 the circumstantial participle ? 
 
 7. How may the participle be used with hrjXoq elfiL 
 and <j)av6p6<; elfXL ? 
 
 8. Translate and explain the syntax: 1. oldyaOoi; 
 6 ap^cjv; 6 d^cov dvOpcoiTo^ ^aiverai. 2. ravra aKOv- 
 (ravTe<; hi4^aivov. 3. rr^v dpxrjv hvyyajv^v e^wi^. 
 4. TO (TTpaTevfJLa Tp€(j)6fX€voi' i\dv9avev. 5. eKeivov 
 XeyovTO^, eTTopevovTO. 6. iiravovTo Xeyopre^;. 7. to 
 '^XXr)VLKov iK^Xevae '^kglp cos 7roXefji7J(ra)v ntcrioats. 
 
REVIEW. 113 
 
 282. Synopses of Verbs, 
 
 1. Give the synopses of the forms already given 
 of \\)oi^ KeXevco, ireido), 7re/x7r&), dyyekXco. 
 
 2. Give the forms of et/xi that have appeared in the 
 preceding lessons. 
 
 283. Syntax, 
 
 1. Give the rule for the agreement of words express- 
 ing adjective relations. 
 
 2. Distinguish between the dative of advantage, dis- 
 advantage, and indirect object. 
 
 3. Give the construction with words signifying near- 
 ness, likeness, association, and opposition. 
 
 4. How are cause, manner, and means expressed? 
 How agent? 
 
 5. Define the cognate accusative, and give an exam- 
 ple in Greek. 
 
 6. Name verbs taking object and predicate accusatives. 
 
 7. Name verbs taking two object accusatives, and 
 give examples in Greek and Latin. 
 
 284. EXERCISES. 
 
 Review 55, a, b; 97, 1, 2, 3, 4; 98, 1, 2; 107. 
 
 I. 1. Give from the preceding vocabularies words 
 allied in form to ayyeXo?, ap^w, ^dWco, 7rdXe/xo9, ireipa, 
 (J)l\o<;, crrpaTo^, <^uXaf. 2. Give the words allied in 
 meaning to ipcoToia). 
 
 II. 1. ret yap eVtrr^Seta ovk €(TTl e)(eiv. 2. Xiqoi 
 yap Kal ravTa i.^ oyv e^w eXTTiSa?. 3. ivTevOev ige- 
 Xaw€i hid tt}? 'ApayStct? Trapd rov ^v(f)paT'rjp irorap^ov. 
 
114 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 4. ravra ol crrpanqyol Kvpco amjyyeWov ' 6 8e crrpa- 
 TLcoTT) eKoiaTco e7r€/xi//€ irivre apyvpiov iMva<;. 5. e/caXecre 
 Se Kal Tov<s MiXrjTov irokiopKovvTa^;, Koi rov^ (j^vydhas 
 iKeXevcre crvv avTco o-rparevecrOaL, 6. eSofe ravra, koX 
 dp9 pcoTTOv^; irefjiTTovo'Lv ol ^pcoTcov Kvpov rd So^avTa 
 rfj (TrpaTia. 7. koX aTpariqyov he avTov iiroLiqcre 
 irdvTcov ocroL et? KacTTcoXov irehiov dOpoii^ovraL. 8. So- 
 ^aiverov 8e rov Srv/xc^aXtoj^ koI l^coKpdrrjv top ^A-^auov, 
 ^4vov<; 6vTa<; kol tovtov^, iKeXevcre rjKeiv^ w? TroXefiT]- 
 (T(x)v Tca craTpdrrrj. 9. /cat irpwrov fxev irpos tov<; 
 0pa/ca9 eTToXepnqcra, koI vTrep ttJ? 'EWctSog eripLoypov- 
 fJLTjv, CAC ttJ? Xeppoi'ijcrov avTov<; e^eXavvoiv ^ovXop.evov<^ 
 di^aipelcOai rov^ evoiKovvTa<i "EXXrjvas ttjp yrjv. 
 
 III. 1. They dwelt along the river. 2. Clearchus 
 is honored by Cyrus. 3. Issus is situated upon the 
 sea. 4. In Celaenae Cyrus remained thirty days. 
 
 5. But through the middle of Tarsus flows the river 
 Cydnus. 6. But Aristippus happened to be a guest 
 friend of his. 7. Thence he descended into a plain. 
 
 8. Ariaeus was giving his attention to the barbarians. 
 
 9. He made him satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia. 
 
 10. But he bade Cyrus continue to send ^ for him. 
 
 11. And he collects both his barbarian and Greek force 
 with the avowed purpose of making an expedition 
 against the Pisidians. 
 
 ' Use the present. 
 
READING LESSON. 115 
 
 285. Translate at sight : ^ 
 
 The March of Cyrus through Lycaonia and Cappadocia. 
 
 Mera ravra i^eXavveu (TTa6yL0V<^ rpel'^ Trapacrdyya^ 
 euKocnv et? ^Ikovlov rrjq ^pvyCas ttoXlv [cif^y ivravOa 
 ifieive rpw r)fx€pas. ivrevOev SieXavvei Sta AvKaovLa<; 
 (TTadfJLOV^ irivTe Trapacrctyya? TpLOLKOvra. TavTrjp ttjv 
 ■^copap iireTpexpe hiapTrdcai tol<; '^EWrjcnv cJ? iroXefJULav 
 ovaav, evTevdev Kvpo^ ttjv KiXicrcrap els rrjv KlXl- 
 Kiav diTOTTeixTreL t7)v ra^icrTiqv \j^mckest^ ohov • /cat 
 crvv€7refx\jjev avrrj crTpaTicoTas ovs Mei/cov el)(€ /cat 
 avTOP Mevojpa • Kvpo<; Se /xera tcov dWojv i^eXavvet 
 Sid KaTT7TaSoKLa<; o'Ta9fJiov<; rerrapa? \_/oiir'\ napacrdy- 
 ya<; eiKocri koI irivre 7rpo9 Adva, ttoXlv oiKovyievriv koX 
 evSaifJiova. ivTavOa ep^eivav rjixepa<; TpeL<; • ip w Kvpos 
 dTT€KT€iP€ HepcTrjv Meya^ipvqv. 
 
 Observe and explain the position of x^pav,^EXX'Y](Tiv, 
 bhov, ovs, avTov. [55, a, ^.]. 
 
 ^ In this selection and in the exercises of (II.) above, the pupil should 
 note the arrangement of the parts of a Greek sentence. And in the sub- 
 sequent selections of connected text be should also note particularly the 
 order of the Greek, and follow more closely this order in his own writing. 
 
116 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OF €t/x,t. — STEMS IN 
 h V, AND A DIPHTHONG, CONTRACT NOUNS 
 OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Review 28 (active endings), 102, 103, 1, 2, 3; 104, 
 1,2,3; 151,1,2; 194,4; 208,«, i5, c; 218, 219, «,^; 
 221, 3; 223. 
 
 286. Verbs like Xvo) are called verbs in cd (21). 
 Those retaining -fxt in the first person singular of the 
 present indicative active are called verbs in /xt. In 
 certain tenses the verbs in /xt add the endings directly 
 to the theme. 
 
 287. Present Indicative of the irregular verb et/xt, 
 to be. 
 
 Paradigm (859). 
 
 
 Sing, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1. 
 
 eLfXL 
 
 
 io-fiev 
 
 2. 
 
 el 
 
 io-Tov 
 
 ecrre 
 
 3. 
 
 icTTL 
 
 icTTOV 
 
 et(rt 
 
 288. The theme of ei/xt is eV- (Lat. es, esse). The 
 final consonant of the theme, cr, is dropped before the 
 endings^ -/xt and -cri, and the theme vowel is lengthened 
 in compensation : elfxC is for ecr-/xt ; el is for eVt, 
 
 * Verbs in -fii are older forms, and retain in the singular some of the 
 earlier endings. 
 
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 117 
 
 {i(T-cn) ; i(TTL retains the Doric ending -tl; elcri is for 
 
 e-v(Ti. 
 
 289. The present indicative of et/xi accents the ul- 
 tima, and all its forms except el are enclitics. For the 
 regular accent eari, see 104, 3. The present participle 
 ti)v retains its accent in composition : 7rap(x)v^ irapovcra, 
 
 290. Sterns in t-, u-, and ev- in some of their forms 
 suffer contraction. 
 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 6 Ix^i"^ 
 
 7} TToXt? 
 
 6 fiao-iXevs 
 
 
 (ixOv) 
 
 (ttoAi-) 
 
 (^(Sao-iXev-) 
 
 
 fish 
 
 city 
 
 Singular. 
 
 king 
 
 N. 
 
 l)(dv^ 
 
 TToXt? 
 
 ^acnXev^ 
 
 G. 
 
 i)(6yo^ 
 
 TToXeco? 
 
 ^acrtXew? 
 
 D. 
 
 1^0 vi 
 
 TToXeu (ttoXcl) 
 
 /3acrLX€L{ paciXc I ) 
 
 A. 
 
 l^Ovv 
 
 ttoXlp 
 
 ^acriXia 
 
 V. 
 
 ixOv 
 
 770 Xt 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ^aCTiXev 
 
 .A.V. 
 
 IxOv^ 
 
 TToXei (ir6X€€) 
 
 /Bao-iXee 
 
 G.D. 
 
 ixOvoLi> 
 
 TToXeOLP 
 
 ^acriXioiv 
 
 N.V. 
 
 lxOv€<; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 TToXet? (iroXccs) 
 
 /^ao-iXeis (pa<riX« 
 
 G. 
 
 ix^viov 
 
 TToXecuv 
 
 ^a(TiXi(x)v 
 
 D. 
 
 IxOvCTL 
 
 TToXeaL 
 
 ^ao-iXevcTL 
 
 A. 
 
 Ix^vs 
 
 TToXetg (iroXcas) ^acriXeas 
 
 a. Observe that the vowel stems have -v iu the accusative 
 sing., and the pure stem in the vocative sing. 
 
118 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 h. Observe that the final vowel of stems ending in a diphthong 
 {^aa-Ckev-) is dropped before a vowel of the ending, and is retained 
 elsewhere; that contraction occurs as in simple vowel stems, ex- 
 cept the ace. sing, and plur. have -d and -as ^ respectively. 
 
 2gi. Most stems ill v are regular like t;(^u5. t^^^^? 
 the accusative plural, is for ixOv-v<;? Oxjtorie steins in 
 V have long v in nom,, ace, and voc. sing. 
 
 292. Most stems in i- and a few in v-, as Trrjxv'^, 
 cubit, except in the nom., ace, and voc. sing., insert € 
 before the t or v, and the latter is dropped : iroXecos. 
 Contraction then occurs in the dat. sing., nom. and 
 voc. plur. The ace. plur. irregularly conforms to the 
 nom. plur. 
 
 293. After c the gen. sing, has -wg instead of -09. 
 The accent remains the same as with -09, and the gen. 
 plur. follows the accent of the gen. sing. 
 
 294. Neuter substantives in l and v have the stem in 
 the nom. sing. (208, d) : to eirixaph suavity ; to acrrv, 
 town. 
 
 295. Gender, 
 
 1. Stems ending in ev are masculine. 
 
 2. Stems ending in i with nominative in t? are fem- 
 inine ; stems ending in v, nominative in V9, are mostly 
 feminine. 
 
 3. Stems ending in t, v, with nominatives in i and 
 V, are neuter. 
 
 ^ e-coy, €-d, e-as arise by interchange of quantity from the original forms 
 Tjo^, -rja, -Tjas. Further explanation here is impracticable. See grammars. 
 ^ vs was the original ending of the accusative plural. 
 
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 119 
 
 296. EXERCISES. 
 
 I . ej^et TOiv iTnricov tol^lv. 2. avro? et/xi ov 1,7JT€l<;. 
 3. TTjT/ 8e '^XXr)VLKrjv SvvafiLV rjOpOii^ev oJSe. 4. e)(ei 
 Se SvvafXLP LTT7nK7)v rjv iravre^ 
 opcjfJiev. 5. afjia rrj rjfjiepa ol 
 rJK0VT€<; irapa ySacrtXelw? airrfy- 
 yeWov Kvpo) wepl rrj^ ^acri- 
 Xecos cTTpaTLOLS' 6. Tov Se 
 
 ^ap^apLKOV tTTTTCt? €19^ X^^^'" 
 
 0U9 '^cra^' ip Sefia. 7. iropev- 
 erai cu? /BacruXea iTTTrea? e^^o)^ 
 c«J9 TTevraKoaiov^. 8. ra Sa>pa 
 pofiL^eraL wapa ^acnXei ripua, 
 9. Tovrou? TOV9 Ix^^^ o^ 2v- 
 pot ^€0^9 ivopLLiC^ov. 10. ra 
 apfxara et9 Ta9 ra^eiq tq)v 
 ^^Wrjvotiv iXavvovacv. 1 1. /cat 
 
 ivravOa Kvpo<^ i^eracnv koX 
 
 5 /) \ '^ «T7\ \ / » / No. 9. 'Ithtcvs. 
 
 apLUfJLOP T(t)v tjAKrjvcov €770117- 
 
 crez/ €z/ TO) irapaheicro). 12. 6 S' '0/3dj^a9 vojxicra*; 
 
 eT0t/A0V9 etz^at aurw rou9 LTnrea^, ypd(j)eL iTTLcrToXrji/ 
 
 Trapa /BacriXea. 13. ecrrt 8e koL ^acrtXe<w9 ^aaiXeia 
 
 iv K€XaLvai<^ iirt tol^ TTrjyaL<; tov M.ap(Tvov irorafiov 
 
 VTTO rfj OLKpoTToXeL ' pel 8e kol ot»T09 Slol rrjs TToXeco^s 
 
 KOL iix^aXXeu et9 tov MaCapSpof. 
 
 II. 1. You are wise. 2. And the military forces 
 appeared. 3. Yovi have both the force and country 
 
 ^ (isj prep, govemiiig ;^tXioi;?. Cf. p. 104*. 
 
120 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 of Cyrus. 4. Cyrus sends the tribute to the king 
 from the cities. 5. And fish also were in this river. 
 
 6. And there were horsemen on the left of the enemy. 
 
 7. Xerxes made this palace and acropolis of Celaenae. 
 
 297. VOCABULARY. 
 
 d/CjOOTToXi?, -ew9, 17, acropO' tTTTrtfcd?, -77, -6v^ of ov for a 
 
 /2,5(aK:j0O9+7rdA.ig) [aero- horse Q\ cavalry {^nn:eo%). 
 
 polls]. tcr^v?, -vo?, 17, strength^ 
 
 /SacTtXeug, -e(W9, king; with- military force. 
 
 out the article, the king l^Oiq, -voq,6,fish [ichthyo- 
 
 of Persia ; irapa ^acru- graphy]. 
 
 Xet, at court [basil, basi- ttoXi?, -ecu?, r), city, state 
 
 lica, basilisk]. [police, metro-polis] . 
 
 SvvafiLf;, -ew?, tj, ability, rd^i^y -ecu?, 17, arrangement, 
 
 force, troops [dynamite]. discipline, rank, line of 
 
 i^eTaaL<s,-€o}s»rj, inspection, battle, array, ^ic, [syn- 
 
 review. tax]. 
 
 iTncTTokrj, -rj^, a letter tlijllo^, -a, -ov, valued, ho?i- 
 
 [epistle]. ored, in honor. 
 
 erot/A09, -7], -ov, or -09, -ov, ypd(^o}, to draw, write 
 
 ready, prepared (dat.). [graphic, grammar]. 
 
 ev(xivvixo<?,-ov, of good name w8e, adv. thus, so, as fol- 
 
 or omen, euphemistic for lows (o8e). 
 
 dpLO-Tepo^, left ; to evw- 0^9, adv., with numerals, 
 
 vvfjLov, the left wing (sc. about ; prep. w. ace, to, 
 
 K€pa<;, wing), only of persons. 
 iinrev^, -ea)9, horseman ; pi. 
 
 cavalry. No. 9. 
 
ADJECTIVE STEMS IN V OF THIRD DECLENSION. 121 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 IMPERFECT OF et/xt. 
 
 Review, 111, 112, 113, 116 (active 
 
 endings), 151, 
 
 1,2; 194,4; 290,291,292, 294. 
 
 
 298. 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 Taxvs (raxv-) (824) 
 swift. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ra-yy^ Tayeia 
 
 Taxv 
 
 G. 
 
 rax<Eoq rayeia^i 
 
 raxeo? 
 
 D. 
 
 raxel (xaxci) raxeua 
 
 raxet (Taxti) 
 
 A. 
 
 Taxyv Toxe^o-v 
 
 Taxv 
 
 V. 
 
 raxy ^ Tax^'icL 
 
 Dual. 
 
 raxv 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 rax^l (raxec) Ta;)(€ta 
 
 raxer (xaxcc) 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 raxeoti/ 
 
 N.V. 
 
 raxei? (xaxecs) raxetac 
 
 Tax^a 
 
 G. 
 
 Tax^cov raxeiwj/ 
 
 Tax^(^v 
 
 D. 
 
 rax^o-L raxetat? 
 
 Tax^o'L 
 
 A. 
 
 rax €19 raxeta? 
 
 Tax^cL 
 
 a. Observe that the stem of the masculine and neuter inserts 
 € as in 292; that the neuter nora. sing, is formed like the stem 
 (294); that the gen. sing, is in 09; that the nom., ace, voc. 
 neut. plur. remain uncontracted. 
 
122 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 b. Observe that the feminine is of the first declension, formed 
 from a stem in e (292), with the regular ending la (p. 89^). 
 
 299. Irregular Adje 
 
 dives. 
 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 /xeyas 
 
 {fieya-, fieyaXo-) 
 
 great. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 fjL€ya<; 
 
 fxeydXrj 
 
 ixiya 
 
 G. 
 
 fxeydXov 
 
 lJi€ydXr)<; 
 
 fjieydXov 
 
 D. 
 
 jxeydXco 
 
 (xeydXri 
 
 fjueyaXo) 
 
 A. 
 
 fxeyav 
 
 fieydXrjv 
 
 fjieya 
 
 V. 
 
 ^iyo} 
 
 fieydXr) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 fi^eya 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 IMeydXo) 
 
 fieydXd 
 
 fieydXo) 
 
 G.l). 
 
 fieyaXoLv 
 
 jjLeydXaiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fjieydXoLP 
 
 N.V. 
 
 jjueydXoL 
 
 fxeydXaL 
 
 fxeydXa 
 
 G. 
 
 fieyaXcop 
 
 fxeydXcov 
 
 fxeydXcjv 
 
 D. 
 
 fji€ydXoL<; 
 
 fjueydXai*; 
 
 fji€ydXoL<; 
 
 A. 
 
 fjL€ydXov<; 
 
 fxeydXd^ 
 
 fjueydXa 
 
 
 TToXv? 
 
 {ttoXv, ttoXXo-) 
 
 
 
 muck, many. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 TToXu? 
 
 TToXXlj 
 
 iroXv 
 
 G. 
 
 TToXXoi) 
 
 TroXXrjs 
 
 TToXXov 
 
 D. 
 
 TToXXw 
 
 TToXXfj 
 
 TTOXXS 
 
 A. 
 
 TToXvV 
 
 TToXXrjv 
 
 TToXv 
 
 V. 
 
 TToXv 
 
 TToXXrj 
 
 TToXv 
 
 
 ^ IxeydXe also appears. 
 
 
ADJECTIVE STEMS IN V OF THIRD DECLENSION. 123 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. V. 
 
 TToXXoi 
 
 iroXXaC 
 
 TToXXd 
 
 G. 
 
 TToXXoiP 
 
 TToXkcJP 
 
 TTOXXCOJ/ 
 
 D. 
 
 TToXXots 
 
 TToXXat? 
 
 TTOXXOL^ 
 
 A. 
 
 TTOWOVS 
 
 TToXXas 
 
 TToXXd 
 
 Observe that in both /^eya? and ttoXv?, the nom. ace. and voc. 
 masc. and neut. sing., are decUned like the vowel-stems of the 
 third declension; that elsewhere they are declined upon the 
 stems fieyaXo- and iroXXo- respectively, like drjXo^ (7^)' 
 
 300, Imperfect of elfxC, 
 
 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. . 
 
 1. 
 
 '^ or 771^ 
 
 
 rjiiev 
 
 2. 
 
 ^(T0a 
 
 ricTTOv or r\Tov 
 
 rjTe or ^crrc 
 
 3. 
 
 ^v 
 
 TjaTTjv or tJttjv 
 
 Tjcrav 
 
 Observe that the initial vowel receives the temporal augment, 
 and the final a of the theme is dropped regularly before a con- 
 sonant of the ending ; that -aOa in the second person singular is 
 for -9. 
 
 301 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. evTavOa tjv ttoXi? ip^fJ^'^ jieydXr), 2. 7r/)os 
 TO) TiypyjTL irorafico ttoXi? -^z/ oiKOVfievr), fxeydXyj Kai 
 evSaifxcov, 3. ej^et ra^v ittttov. 4. 6 oivo<i i^Sus 
 icTTLv. 5. Sta ra^io)v rov noXefjuov €7rotetro. 6. Tavra 
 dKov(ravT€<; ol ayyeXoi dmjXavvov, Kal rJKOv T(t)(y, 
 7. Kupo? yap enefjine ^iKovq rjSeos olj/ov. 8. T(op Se 
 TToXejjLLcov iTTTrets elcTLv iroXXoL /cat iroXXov ^ afiot. 9. to. 
 
 ^ Depends upon a^ioi. Cf. 424, 
 
124 
 
 THE BEGINNER. S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 8' iTTLTijSeLa €)(ei e/c T179 iv /xecro) -^copa^;, iroWrjf; kol 
 ayaSrjq oxxtt]^. 10. evrevOev e^eKavvei crra^/xoug 1^ 
 ct? KeXatj^a?, r^? ^pvyia^ ttoXlp olKoviJL€P'r)v, fieydXrjv 
 KOL evSaLfJioifa, 
 
 11. 1. The satrap has sweet wine. 2. And the 
 asses ran swiftly. 3. In that place was a large city. 
 4. We have many men and much property. 5. The 
 king with a large army is advancing. 6. But thence 
 he descended into a plain large and beautiful. 7. He 
 marches twenty parasangs into Tarsus, a large and 
 prosperous city of Cilicia. 
 
 302. 
 
 ^t/co?, jar, loine jar, 
 cf, six [hex-agon] . 
 iprjiJios, -7), 'OP, or -09, -ov, 
 ^deserted, desert, unin/iad- 
 
 ited, toithout, deprived of 
 
 [hermit]. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Xou afto9, worth much, 
 valaable, serviceable ; to 
 TTokv, the (greater part ; 
 TTokvy adv., much, greatly, 
 far [poly-syllable, poly- 
 gon, poly-theismj. 
 
 rySug, -eta, -v, siveet [Lat., ra^vg, -eta, u, quick, sicift, 
 
 Lat., celer ; 8ta rojyioiv, 
 with speed ; raxv, adv., 
 quickly, 
 
 diT-eXavvcoy drive off, march 
 aioay, yo aioay. 
 
 KaTa-paivo), yo down^ de- 
 scend. 
 
 T/ae^ft), run [troche, tro- 
 chee]. 
 
 suavis^ 
 ixeya^, fxeydXyj, fjL€ya,yreat, 
 
 larye [Lat., maynus ; 
 
 MUCH ; o-mega] . 
 oTj^o9, loine [Lat., vinum ; 
 
 wine]. 
 01^09, ass, 
 7roXv9, TToWrj, TToXu, much, 
 
 many, Lat., multus ; iro\- 
 
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 125 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 FUTURE OI €i/xt. — TENSES DENOTING COM- 
 PLETED ACTION. 
 
 Review 20, 27, 28, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 135, 
 191, 194, 1, 2, 3; 195, 197, 198, 229, a, L 
 
 303. Bedaplication, 
 
 The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect through 
 all their moods have reduplication as the sign of com- 
 pleted action. 
 
 304. Reduplication consists in the repetition of the 
 initial sound. Most verbs beginning with a consonant 
 (except p) repeat that consonant with e : Xvw, XekvKa, 
 XeXv/iat. This redupHcation appears in several Latin 
 verbs, as dedi from do, tetendi from tendo, A rough 
 initial nmte is changed to a smooth : Ovoi^ riOvKa. 
 
 305. In verbs beginning with two consonants (ex- 
 cept a mute followed by a liquid), a double consonant, 
 or />, the reduplication omits the consonant and consists 
 of e only : eVrpareu/Aat, i(,7]T7]Ka. 
 
 306. In verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong, 
 the reduplication takes the same form as the temporal 
 augment : 'qpcoTrjKa, yprjKa. 
 
 307. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a 
 consonant, the pluperfect as a secondary tense prefixes 
 the syllabic augment (113). Otherwise the pluperfect 
 retains the reduplication of the perfect unchanged : Xe- 
 XuKa, iKeXvKr] ; rjpcoTrJKrj ; iaTpdrevfJiai, iarpaTevfJirjv. 
 
126 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 308. Compoimd verbs take the augment and redupli- 
 cation after the prepositions (135) : Karakvoi, halt, Kara- 
 XeXvKa, I have halted ; dir-ecnTaKa, I have separated. 
 
 309. The steal of the first perfect is formed by affix- 
 ing the tense suffix -/ca to the redupUcated theme : XeXi>-j 
 XeXv/ca. 
 
 a. A Hiigual mute is dropped before k : ireiOco (ttlO-), ire 
 ireiKa ; apird^co (apira^-), ijpTra/ca. 
 
 310. Some verbs have a second perfect formed by- 
 affixing -a to the redupUcated theme : ypdcjxD, yiypa^a. 
 If the theme ends in a labial or palatal mute, this is 
 sometimes aspirated before -a (plup. -y) or -ei) : dyco, 
 rjxoL* It has the inflection of the first perfect system 
 (351,4; 530, 544). 
 
 311. The perfect indicative represents an action as 
 completed at the present time : keXvKa, I have loosed, 
 
 312. The perfect, as a primary tense, has the regular 
 primary endings (28). The thematic vowel -a is changed 
 to -€ in the third person singular. 
 
 313. Conjugate the first perfect active of Xucu, Xe- 
 XvK-a, / have loosed; 0vo), redvKa; iroUoi, TreTroirjKa 
 (828). 
 
 314. The pluperfect indicative represents the action 
 as already completed at a given past time ; iXeXvKr), 1 
 had loosed. 
 
 a. The pluperfect calls attention to the completion or the 
 effect of the act; unless the attention is specially directed to 
 ^his^ the aorist is regularly used, 
 
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 127 
 
 315. The pluperfect active changes the final -a of the 
 perfect stem to -e. In the singular -v is dropped and 
 -/ce appears as -kt), -ktj, -kel. In the third person plural 
 the ending -a-av is used instead of -v. 
 
 a. In all forms the thematic vowel -et may appear : -eiv^ -et?, 
 -et, etc. 
 
 316. Conjugate the first pluperfect active of Xvco, 
 iXeXvKrj, ikeXvK€Lv, I had loosed ; TroLeco, eTreiroLTJKr] ; 
 iparrdo), '^pojTrJKrj (828). 
 
 317. The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle 
 is formed by reduplicating the verb theme, to which the 
 endings are directly affixed (286) : XeXvfiau, iXeXvfjirjp. 
 
 a. These tenses have the -fiL inflection. 
 
 318. The endings -crai and -cro of the perfect and 
 pluperfect middle are retained (27 ; Illy a, b). 
 
 a. Remember primary tenses have primary endings, and sec- 
 ondary, secondary endings (28, 116). 
 
 319. 1. Conjugate the perfect middle indicative of 
 Xvo), XeXvfJiaL ; TTopeijo), /BaaiXevo) ; alpeco, rjprjfjLav 
 (829). 
 
 2. Conjugate the pluperfect indicative middle of Xvco, 
 iXeXvfjLTjv, I had ransomed ; ^acriXevo), alpeo), 
 
 320. The stem of the future perfect is formed by 
 affixing -cr7e. to the stem of the perfect middle : XeXv, 
 XeXvcrofjiaL. It has the inflection of the future middle 
 (195). But a short final vowel is always lengthened 
 before -cro/iac. 
 
128 • THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 a, A few verbs have a future perfect active formed from the 
 perfect stem : ia-Trj^co, I shall stand. 
 
 321. The future perfect indicative represents an ac- 
 tion that will be already finished at some future time : 
 XeXvcrofxai, I shall have ransomed. 
 
 322. Conjugate the future perfect indicative of Xu<y, 
 XeXvcro/xac ; TLfidco, 'ypd(l)a) (830). 
 
 a. The passive perfect, pluperfect,, and future perfect use the 
 same forms as the middle. 
 
 323. Learn the infinitives and participles of the per- 
 fect active and middle and of the future perfect middle 
 
 (828, 829, 830). 
 
 a. Observe that the perfect active infinitive takes the ending 
 'Vai, and changes a to e : XeXvKevai. 
 
 b. Observe that the other infinitives have the regular ending 
 -aOai affixed to the regular thematic vowel (115). 
 
 c. Observe that the perfect active participle ends in -tw? {-or), 
 (229, a ; 822), but the perfect middle and future perfect parti- 
 ciples have the regular ending -fievo affixed to the regular the- 
 matic vowel (229, a, h ; 817). 
 
 d. Observe that all infinitives in -ai and -vai and the perfect 
 infinitive and perfect participle middle and passive accent the 
 penult (195, <z, 3); that participles in -w?, Xe\v/c(o<;, are oxytone. 
 
 324. Future Indicative of elfxt (eV-), to he. 
 
 
 Paradigm (859). 
 
 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Plnr. 
 
 1. 
 
 eo-Q/xai 
 
 io-ofxeOa 
 
 2. 
 
 eb-et, ecTT/ ea-eaOov 
 
 icreade 
 
 3. 
 
 ecrrat ea-eaOop 
 
 id OPT at 
 
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 129 
 
 Observe that the future has the middle form (195) ; that in 
 ea-rai (for eaeraC) the thematic vowel is dropped. 
 
 Note, earac, like cov (289) keeps its accent in composition : 
 TrapearaL. 
 
 325. The endings -vrai and -vto can stand only after 
 vowel stems. The third person plural of the perfect 
 and pluperfect of themes ending in a mute are formed 
 by the perfect participle and etcrt and rjcrav respectively 
 (839) : apird^o) (apTraS-), o^pTracr/xeVoi etcrt, t/iei/ have 
 
 pillaged ; rjpTracrfjLevoL rjaav, they had pillaged. 8 of 
 tlie theme is dropped before cr ; elsewhere it is changed 
 to G-} The future perfect may be expressed in a similar 
 w^iy ; in the active it is regularly thus expressed : XeXu- 
 ^0)9 ecrofjiaL, I shall have loosed. The themes of some 
 verbs, as KeXevco, are enlarged by the addition of a in 
 the perfect middle and aorist passive, and are then in- 
 flected like themes in 8. The perfect and pluperfect 
 indicative active are sometimes formed with the perfect 
 participle and et/xt. The participle here seems to par- 
 take of the force of an adjective. Other mute verbs 
 drop (T between two consonants, and -crOov, -a-Orjv, -crde 
 become -0ov, -erjv, -Be (837, 838). 
 
 326. Perfect active 2^ci'^ticiple, 
 
 Paradigm (822). 
 
 \e\vK(x)<; {\e\vKOT-) 
 having loosed 
 S. N. V. XeXv/fo)? \e\vKvia \e\vK6<; 
 
 G. XeXu/coTO? Xe\vKVid<^ XeXv/coVo? 
 
 K. T. \. K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 ^ The conjugation of the perfect and pluperfect of other mute verbs will 
 
 he noiiced later (836, 837, etc.). 
 
 9 
 
130 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 «. Observe that the stem of the perfect participle ends in -or 
 (323, c), and that the a (309) of the perfect stem disappears 
 before -or. 
 
 h. Observe that the forms of the nominative singular \ekv- 
 Koy;, \e\vKVia, XeXu/co? are irregular. The masc. and neut. are 
 of the third declension, and the fem. of the first. 
 
 327. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. 6 Aapeiog i^e^acnXevKei. 2. at d/xafat rjp- 
 TTacr/ieVat rjaap. 3. ol cTTpaTLOJTaL 7r€7reta'/;teVot elcrCv. 
 
 4. TTjv iinaToXrjv yeypa^e. 5. ovirore en earai eVt^ 
 TW dSeX(^(y. 6. r^ 6ho<; earau irpo^ /^acrtXea fieyav 
 els ^a^v\(hva. 7. 01 he iroXefiLOL re ret? cnrovSas 
 Kal Tovs opKovs XeXvKacTLV. 8. iravra toIs (TTparr)- 
 yoi9^ 7re7TOL7)Tai, 9. eTeTifxrjTO yap vtto Kvpov Sl 
 evvoiav, 10. 6 p^ev roiavra pev TreiroiqKe^ ToiavTa 
 he Xeyei. 11. 'Op6pTa<; he Ilep<jr]<; TrpocrOev eire^e- 
 /SovXevKei Kvpco. 12. hajpTTacTTo vtto tov ^acriXiKov 
 (TTparevparo^i avra Ta ^acriXeia. 13. 6 he Aapelos 
 eTeTeXevTTjKeL Kal 6 (jarpaTriqs hia^dXXei tov Kvpov 
 irpos TOV dheX(j>6v. 6 he ireideTaL re koI crvXXap^dvei 
 Kvpov a)s OLTTOKTevajv. 
 
 II. 1. The soldiers will have honor. 2. We had 
 broken our oaths. 3. The letters he had written to 
 the king. 4. You will have been honored by Cyrus. 
 
 5. But we have pursued the enemy through the vil- 
 
 ^ 111 tlie power of. 
 
 2 The perfect and pluperfect passive may take the dative of agent; 
 tlie dative implies that the agent has an interest in the completion of the 
 action. 
 
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 131 
 
 lages. 6. The Cilician queen has persuaded the king. 
 7. Everything had been done by the satrap. 8. Orontas 
 has ended the war against Cyrus. 
 
 328. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^acrtXi^09, -TJ, -6v, royal eVt-opAceiw, swear falsely; 
 
 [basilica]. mid., perjure ones self 
 
 opKO'^, oath. [eVt + o/Ofcos]. 
 
 aiTov^T], -rjs, libation ; pi., reXevraw, e7id, finish ; intr. 
 
 truce [spondee]. end one's life, die \Ti\o^y 
 
 ToiovTO'^y -avTT], -ovTov, e7id~\. 
 
 dem. pro., such, such 'as ert, adv., yet, still ; with 
 
 precedes. iieg., no longer. 
 
 Sia-^dWcj, slander [dia- ov-nore, adv., never [ov + 
 
 bolical]. TTore] . 
 
 irpocr-dev, adv., before, for- 
 merly, sooner [tt/oo?] . 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF 
 THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 Review 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 217; 221, 1, 2, 3, 4; 223; 
 295, 1, 2, 3. 
 
 329. Stems in tr {^ct- and a<r-) of the Consonant 
 Declension, 
 
132 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 6 ^coKpaTT]^ {^(oKpaTea-) 
 Socrates 
 
 %(OKpdTOv<; (Soi/cpctre-o?) 
 
 %(OKpdT€L {ScoKpaTe-'i) 
 
 XcoKpciTr) {^(liKpdre-a) XcjKpdrrjv ^ 
 
 ^(OKpar€<; 
 
 TO evpos (evpea-) 
 breadth 
 
 evpo^ 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. evpov<; {evpe-o<;) 
 
 D. €vp€L {evpe-'i) 
 
 N. A. V. evp€L (evpe-e) 
 
 G. D. eupolv {evpi-oiv) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. evpT] (evpe-a) 
 
 G. evpojv (evpe-cov) 
 D. evpe-au 
 
 Plural. 
 
 TO Kpia^ {Kpeacr-) 
 meat 
 
 Kp€a<s 
 
 Kpea)<; (Acpea-09) 
 
 KpeaL {Kpea-'i) 
 
 Kped (Kpia-a) 
 KpeSv (Kped-cjv) 
 Kpea-ai 
 
 Observe that: 1. The masculine stems in a- lengthen the 
 final vowel like stems in v- and /o- (317). 2. The voc. has the 
 form of the stem and recessive accent. 3. The neut. has -09 
 for -€? in the nom., ace, voc. 4. The final a of the stem is 
 dropped before all case endings, and the vowels thus brought 
 together are contracted. 
 
 ^ Proper nouns in -rjs, gen., -eo?, have a form in -riv of the first 
 declension. Ti(raa<})epvr}s, -ovs has also its vocative Ttaaa^ipvri of this 
 declension. 
 
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 133 
 
 330. Some nouns in -aar have two stems, one in dr-, 
 gen. -aT09, and another in acr-, gen. a-os, contracted -ws, 
 declined like /cpea?. 
 
 331. Paradigm. 
 
 TO fcepa? {KepaT-, Kepaa-) 
 
 
 
 
 /wni 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 /cepag 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 KepoLTO^ (fcepao?) 
 
 K€pQ)<; 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 KepoLTL (/cepat) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Kepai 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Kepdre (/cepae) 
 
 K€pd 
 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 K€.paroiv {KepdoLv) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Kepcpv 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Kepdra (fcepaa) 
 
 K€pd 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 KepaTcov {Kepdcov) 
 
 Kepcoj/ 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 KepdcTL 
 
 
 332. Gender. 
 
 Neuters are stems ending in a?- and es-, with nomi- 
 natives in -09 (see also 221, 4). 
 
 a. Note that these rules apply to grammMical gender;* 
 names of males of this class are of course masculine. 
 
 333. Give a summary of rules for the gender of 
 substantives of the third declension. 
 
 334. Adjectives with stems in e?- are of two end- 
 ings. The masculine and feminine have the same form 
 in -7^9 and the neuter retains the stem in -e?. They 
 follow the same contraction as the nouns with stems 
 in €5-. 
 
134 THE beginner's greek book, 
 
 335- 
 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 
 
 TrXi^pijs (irXry/oecr-) 
 
 
 
 fall 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. & Fem. 
 
 Neuter 
 
 N. 
 
 TrXyjpr)^ 
 
 TrXrjpe^ 
 
 G. 
 
 irXijpovs {TrXtjpe-of;) 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Tr\rjp€i [irXripe-'i) 
 
 
 A. 
 
 TrXijpr) (TrXijpe-a) 
 
 7r\rjpe<i 
 
 V. 
 
 TrXrjpe^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N. A. V. 7T\rjpei {irXijpe'e) 
 
 G. D. irXrjpolv {irXripe-oiv) 
 Plural. 
 
 N. irKripei^ {ttXtj p€-e<;) TrXi/jpr) (TrXyjpe-a) 
 
 G. 7rXrjp(x)v {TrXrj p€-o)v) 
 
 D. TrXrjpecn 
 
 A. TrXijpeLS irXrjpy) (TrXtjpe-a) 
 
 Observe that the masc. and fem. ace. plur. conforms to the 
 nominative (292). 
 
 336. 1. Decline like 7rXrjpr)<;, KaTa(j)av7]<;, -e?, 
 acrOevijs, -eg. 2. Decline TLcrcra(f)epp7j<;, opos, pirjKo<;, 
 
 337. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Kol KXeapxov tol aXXa Kvpos iTLfXTjcre. 2. 6 
 ■^ctpo? TTorajLLO? 17 J' TO evpos TreVre irXeOpa. 3. Sia 
 fiicrov 8e pel tovtcov TTora/xos Kdpao^ ovofia. 4. t^ 
 
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 135 
 
 /SacrtXelw? ^PXV '^^V^^'' OLvOpcoircov Icr^poL yjv. 5. rot? 
 Se ixTjKeai roiv oScov dadeprjf; rjv. 6. ovk dvOpcoTTCJV 
 dnopcov ^ap^dpcov eljjLL. 7. Kal XcoKpaTrjv tov^ A-)(aiov, 
 ^evov oVra, iKeXevae 7]Keiv. 8. Kvpo<; 8' ovv dva^aivei 
 iirl rd oprj. 9. ra 8e Kpea tojp dypCcov ovcov rjv rjOea. 
 10. MeVo)!' 8e kol to arpdrevpia to evcovvfiov Kepas 
 ecr^e tov '^XKtjvlkov. 11. /cat TrdXt? avTodi coKelTO 
 fxeydXr] kol evhaup^cov SdxpaKO^ ovopoTi. 12. '^o'at' 8e 
 /cat aXXat Kcopat TrdXXat 7rXijpeL<; ttoXXcjv dyadwv iv 
 Tfi> irehico. 13. /xera raC^ra Kupo? i^eXavvei inl top 
 XdXov TTOTapov ovTCL TO €vpo<; Svo irXedpa, TrXrjpr) 8* 
 l^OvGiv p^eydXajv, ov<; ol Svpoi ^eoi)? ivopL^op. 
 
 Examine the accusatives in 1 (aXXa), 2 (evpof;), 3 (ovofia), 
 1 3 (eu/oo?), and note that they are used with verbs and predicate 
 substantives to define their meaning more fully or to indicate in 
 what respect it is taken. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 338. The accusative of specification ^ is joined with 
 verbs, adjectives, or substantives, to denote the parf, 
 character, or quality to which the expression refers. 
 
 Examine the datives in 4 (TrXrjdei), 5 (^iirjKecn') , 11 
 (ovojjLaTL), and note that they are used with nouns and ad- 
 jectives to denote in what particular point or respect their 
 signification is taken. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 339. The Dative of Respect, as a form of dative 
 of manner, is used with verbs, nouns, and adjectives 
 to denote in what particular point or respect tlieii 
 signification is true. 
 
 1 See p. 1011. 
 
136 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 4 (av6 pwiroiv) , 6 (avO ptoircDv) ^ 
 12 (a7a^wz^), and note tliat they depend upon words expressing 
 fuUness and want. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 340. Words oi fullness and want take the genitive. 
 Verbs signifying to Jill take also the accusative of the 
 thing filled. 
 
 341. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They were in plain sight. 2. The soldiers lived 
 by eating meat. 3. He carried on war with Tissapher- 
 nes. 4 In that place were many villages full of food 
 and wine. 5. The country of the king was strong in 
 extent of territory. 6. Thence he marches two stages, 
 ten parasangs to the river whose width was five plethra. 
 7. There Cyrus had a palace and a large park full of 
 wild animals which he hunted on horseback. 
 
 342. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aypLO^, -a, -o^, wild. /cpea?, -W9, to, flesh ; pi. 
 
 aaOevri^,-i<i,withoat sfren(/th, meat [creo-sote]. 
 
 iveak, fxecTTos, -t], -6v, fdU fM 
 
 eu/009, -ov?, TO, loidth. of, filled loith, 
 
 Icrxypos, -d, -6v, strong fJirJKOf;, -ou?, to, length. 
 
 \l(Tyy^\ ■ 6po<;, -ou9, to, mountain. 
 
 KOuTGr^avri^, -69, clearly rrkiOpov, plethron, 100 
 
 visible, in plain sight. Greek feet or 101 Eng- 
 
 /ce/oa?, K€pdTO<;, Kepo)<;, to, lish. 
 
 horn, wing of an army 7r\rj6o<;, -ov9, to [734j, 
 
 [horn, rhino-ceros]. fullness, multitude ; irXij- 
 
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 137 
 
 Oei, in number, extent icrOia), eat, live on [eat] . 
 
 [plethora]. ^aw, live. Has t) for d in 
 
 7T\ijp7j<;, -e^,/iill,^lled with, contracted forms [zoo- 
 
 abounding in, complete, logy], 
 
 o-rros, corn^ tvheat, food avroOi, adv., in the very 
 
 [para-site]. place, here, there [av- 
 
 r€t;)(og, -ou§, to, loall, for- t6^. 
 
 tress [dike]. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICA- 
 TIVE. 
 
 Review 28, 32, 116, 189, 1 ; 194, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 208, a ; 
 223, 229, 3, ^, 6; 260, 323, d. 
 
 343. The passive voice uses the same forms as the 
 middle (20, 111, 322, a) except in the aorist and future. 
 
 344. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed 
 by affixing -6e to the verb theme. In the indicative 
 and in other moods before a single consonant of the 
 ending -0e becomes -Or). As a secondary tense it 
 has an augment in the indicative. It uses the active^ 
 secondary endings (116) : iXvOrjv. 
 
 345. Some verbs form a second aorist with the 
 tense suffix -e instead of -Oe which becomes -tj when- 
 ever -Oe would become -Orj. i'ypd(f)rjv (652). It has 
 the same inflection as the first aorist. 
 
 346. The stem of the first future passive affixes -o-Ve- 
 
 * The tense is distinguished from the active by -^f,and not by endings 
 as in the middle. 
 
138 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 to the lengthened aorist stem in Or}-, and is inflected 
 like the future middle (195) : XvOrjo-oixai, 
 
 347. 1. Write the aorist passive ind. of Xvw, iXu- 
 Orjv^ {^^\); Ovcoy iTv07]v ;^ irotea} ; jBovXevco. 2. Write 
 the future passive of Xvco, XydijcrofxaL (831); Ovco, 
 TvOyjaofiai ; ^ rt/xaw. 
 
 348. Explain the euphonic changes in the forma- 
 tion of the aorist and future passive of apirdl^o} (apTraS-), 
 rjpirdadrjv ; 7re/x7rw, iTrejK^Orjv ; dyo), tjX^'^^' 
 
 349. Learn the aorist and future passive infinitives 
 and participles of Xuw (831). 
 
 a. Observe that the aorist passive infinitive has the ending of 
 the perfect active -vat, and accents the penult ; that the aorist 
 passive participle forms its stem like the active participles bj 
 affixing -vr to the tense stem, XvOek (XvOevT-^) : that parti- 
 ciples in -et? accent the last syllable (323^ d). 
 
 h. Observe that the future passive infinitive and participle 
 are formed bj annexing the regular middle endings -aQai and 
 -iievo (115, 229, a). 
 
 350. The aorist passive participle is inflected like 
 XuVds (229, 3). 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 Xv9eLs {XvOevT') 
 
 loosed 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Fem. Neut. 
 
 Xvdelcra XvOev 
 
 XvOeiaiq^ XvOevro^s 
 
 XvOeicTrj XvOevTL 
 
 XvOelcrap XvBkv 
 
 ^ Aorist passive lias no thematic vowel (317). 
 2 6v- becomes rv- b 'fore -Br^v, -dqs, etc. (304). 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 N. V. 
 
 Xv6ei<; 
 
 G. 
 
 XvOevTO<^ 
 
 D. 
 
 XvOevTi 
 
 A. 
 
 Xvdevra 
 
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 139 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 . A.V. 
 
 \v0€PT€ 
 
 \v6eL(Ta 
 
 \v6ivTe 
 
 G. D. 
 
 \vdevToiv 
 
 XvdeiaaLv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 \vdivTOiv 
 
 N. V. 
 
 \v0€VT€<; 
 
 XvOelcraL 
 
 \v6ivTa 
 
 G. 
 
 XvdevTcov 
 
 \v6ei(j(i)v 
 
 \v9evT0)v 
 
 D. 
 
 XvOelcTL 
 
 XvOeiaai^ 
 
 kvOeicTL 
 
 A. \vOivTa^ XvOeLcrds \vOkvTa 
 
 a. Explain the formation of the nominative masc, fern., 
 and neut. 
 
 b. Observe that all participles of the third declension ending 
 in 9, except the first aorist active, are oxytone. 
 
 351. The inflections of the different tense stems 
 (23, 195, h, fF.) are called tense systems. These are 
 divided as follows : 
 
 1. The present system, including the pres. and impf. 
 tenses in all the voices ; tense-stem XvVe.* 
 
 2. The future system, including the fut. act. and 
 mid. ; tense-stem Xva"/^.. 
 
 3. The first aorist system, including the first aorist 
 act. and mid. ; tense-stem Xvaa-. 
 
 4. The first perfect system, including the first perf. 
 and first plup. act. ; tense-stem XeXvKa- (first plup. 
 XeXvKT)- or XeXvKei-). 
 
 5. The perfect middle system, including the perf., 
 plup., and fut. perf. mid. and pass. ; tense-stem XeXv 
 (fut. perf. XeXvcrVe-)- 
 
 6. The first passive system, including the first aor. 
 and first fut. pass. ; tense-stem Xvde-, XvOrj- (first future 
 passive Xvdr^cry,.). 
 
140 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 352. Some verbs, as in Latin, are defective, lacking 
 some of the tense-sterns. Others have second forms 
 of the same tense, called a secondary tense system, 
 which snpply the place of the first parts or are used 
 together with them, but often with a different meaning. 
 These are the second aorist (203), second perfect (310), 
 and second passive (345). 
 
 353. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the 
 first person singular indicative of each of the tense 
 systems used in it. Thus, Xico, kvaco, eXvaa, XeXvKa, 
 XeXv/xai, iXvOrjv, 
 
 a. The second tenses may take the place of the corresponding 
 .first tenses. 
 
 354. Write the tense suffix for each of the tenses 
 of the different tense systems of Xvw, rt/Actw. 2. Write 
 the indicative, participles, and infinitives of the different 
 tense systems of Xvw, ^aaikevo), 7rote&>, apTrdt^o), 
 
 Ohserve that the suffixes and redupHcation form the tense 
 stems, and the augment and personal endings inflect them. 
 
 355- Grive the principal parts of 6vo), 7tol€co, TLfidco, 
 /BovXevcx), dprrdi^ojf KeXevo). 
 
 356. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. VTT avTOv rjhiKrjOr). 2. r] eTricrrokr) irapd ySacri- 
 Xea iypd(j>r). 3. Kvpo^ iTTOirjOrj (rTpaT7)yo<; Trdvrcov 
 ocroL et5 KacTTcjXov neSioi' dOpoit^ovrai. 4. ravra 
 iv T(p dWcp Xoyo) SeSiyXwrai. 5. dXXo Se o-rpdrevfia 
 avTo) crvveXeyero TovSe rov rpoirov. 6. to Se o-ufXTrav, 
 
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 141 
 
 Sr]Xo<; rjv Kvpo? cnrevhoiv Tracrav rrji/ oSov} 7. KXeap- 
 ^09 Kol avTco Kol To2<; aXXot? iSoKeu irponiJirjOrjvaL viro 
 'EXkrjvcov. 8. 6 S' dTLfiaaOelf; jSovXeverai ottoj? fiacn- 
 Xevaei avT eKeCvov. 9. to fiev ttoXv tov 'FiXXrjvLKov 
 ovTa}<; eTTeicrOr). 10. €7rt to evcopvfJLO) ro^evdrjvai ottXl- 
 TT}^ iXeyero. 11. KareTTeyi^Oy) vtto tov ^apeiov aarpd- 
 77179 AuSta? re koX ^pvyias T179 ixeydXr)^. 12. ol 
 TTatSe? eVl rat? fiacnXecjs Ovpai^ TraihevOrjcrovTai, 
 13. eVel 8e '^cra^' eVi rat? 6vpai<s rais TLcr(ra(j)€pvov<s, 
 ol fJL€v (TTpaTrjyol TrapeKXTJdrjaav elcro), ol Se Xo^^ayot 
 €771 rat9 Ovpau^ ifxevov. 
 
 Examine the accusatives in 5, 6 (a-v/jLTrav) and note that as 
 accusatives of specification thej express the particular way in 
 which the verbal notion operates. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 357. The accusative is used in certain expressions 
 with the force of an adverb. This is called the adverbial 
 accusative. 
 
 358. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. When they had heard, these things they were 
 persuaded. 2. Thenceforth he commanded, and the 
 others obeyed. 3. The Greek was shot with an arrow. 
 
 4. Miletus was besieged both by land and by sea. 
 
 5. But they were not hired for this.^ 6. We shall be 
 hired by Cyrus. 7. He was made satrap both of Lydia 
 and Cappadocia by the king. 
 
 1 Cf. 93. 
 
 * eVi with dative. 
 
142 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 359. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 \6yo<;y word, speech, dis- irapa-Kokio), -KaXco, -cKoi- 
 
 course [Xeyw]. 
 XoiTTos, -Tj, -6v, remaining ; 
 
 TO \oi7r6v^for the fttture, 
 
 henceforth, thenceforth 
 
 [XetTTO)] . 
 (rvfi-TTdS) -acra, -av, all to- 
 
 Xecra, -KeKhqKa, -KeKXrj- 
 /A at, -eKkrjOriv^ to call to 
 one's side, summon, urge 
 on. 
 wpo-TlfJido), honor adove, 
 before; esteem. 
 
 gether, entire, all ; to To^evco, shoot iDith arrows, 
 in shoot \t6^ov\, [in-toxi- 
 cate] • 
 euroi, adv., within, inside 
 
 of gen. 
 0770)9, adv., how, in what 
 wag ; conj., that, in order 
 that. 
 
 (TVjjiTrav, altogether, 
 
 general. 
 dBiK€(o, injure, wrong, 
 OLTifJidi^o) (artjLtaS-), OLTlfJid- 
 
 croj, etc., dishonor [ti/it^]. 
 fii(r66a), let; mid. hire; 
 
 pass., he hired [/Atcr^o?]. 
 /cara-Tre/ATTO), send down. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS.'— IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 Review 61, 209, 217, 219, a, b; 221, 2; 223, 290, 
 a, b ; 293. 
 
 360. Deponent Verbs. 
 
 Deponent verbs have in general the forms of the 
 
 ^ Theme KoKe- becomes kKc- by syncope. Syncope is the dropping of 
 a short vowel between two consonants, Tor the future, see 254. 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 143 
 
 middle with active signification: ixa^oiiai, Jic/ht ; /3ov- 
 Xo/xat, wis/i, 
 
 361. In most deponent verbs the principal parts are 
 the first person singular indicative of the tense systems 
 as they appear in the middle, — the present, future, 
 aorist, and perfect. A few deponent verbs have the 
 aorist passive instead of the aorist middle, and are 
 called passive deponents : i^yeojLiat, rjyTJcrofxai, rfyiqcrd^ 
 fji7]v, rjyrjfjLaL ; /8ouXo/iaL, /3ovkT](TojJiaLj fie^ovXrjixaL^ 
 i^ov\7]drjv. 
 
 362. Bpicopated stems in ep-. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 7raT7]p 
 
 V M^VP 
 
 avTjp 
 
 (Trarep-) 
 
 (/XTJTCp-) 
 
 (avip-) 
 
 father 
 
 mother 
 
 man 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. TTarijp f^V'^VP d^VP 
 
 G. TTarpo? (TTarepo?) iJir]Tp6<;(iJ-rjT€pos}dpSp6<; {dvepo^) 
 
 D. irarpi {Traripi) fjurjTpidxrjTepi) dvhpi [dvepi) 
 
 A. TTaripa 
 
 V. Trdrep 
 
 N.A.V. iraTepe • 
 G.D. TTarepoiv 
 
 N.V. TTarepe? 
 G. iraTipoiv 
 D. irarpdcn 
 A. TTarepaq 
 
 fjLiqTepa 
 
 . dvSpa (dvipa) 
 
 fx^rep 
 
 dvep 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 fJLr]T€p€ 
 
 dvSpe (dvepe) 
 
 fJi7)T€pOLV 
 
 di^hpolv [dvipoiv) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 fX7}T€p€<; 
 
 dvZpe<; (dvepe^) 
 
 fJLTJTepCJV 
 
 dv8pa)v (dvipoiv) 
 
 fJLr)Tpd(TL 
 
 dvhpdcTi 
 
 lJLrjT€pa^ 
 
 dvhpa^ (dvepas) 
 
144 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 a. Observe that iraTrjp and fJi'rjTijp drop e of the stem in 
 the gen. and dat. sing, and accent the ultima : that in the other 
 cases they retain e of the stem and accent it except in the voc. 
 sing., where they have recessive accent and take the form of the 
 stem ; that in the dat. plur. ep is changed to pa. 
 
 h. Observe that av7]p follows the analogy of iraTrjp, but syn- 
 copates e whenever a vowel follows ep and inserts h be ween v 
 and p. 
 
 c. Observe that in these cases the accent is placed upon the 
 penult, except in the gen. and dat. sing, and dual and gen. plural, 
 which are oxytone ; oiv and (ov are circumflex'ed. 
 
 EexViaek. In English d is frequently inserted after n-, as, 
 tender, Lat. tener ; gender, Lat. genus. 
 
 3^3- Irregular Nouns. 
 
 e 
 0^ 
 
 17 y8ou9 
 
 7} pads 
 
 6 TTOVS 
 
 rj yvvrj 
 
 6 Xaycos 
 
 
 {fiov) 
 
 (yav) 
 
 (ttoS-) 
 
 (yvvaCK-) 
 
 (Aayo)-) 
 
 ox, cow 
 
 s/iip 
 
 foot 
 
 woman 
 
 Ware 
 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 /3ov<s 
 
 vavs 
 
 TTOVS 
 
 yvvTJ 
 
 Xay&i? 
 
 G. 
 
 poo^ 
 
 vecos 
 
 770809 
 
 yvpaLKos 
 
 Xayw 
 
 D. 
 
 ^ot 
 
 vrjL 
 
 TToSt 
 
 yvvaiKi 
 
 Xayw 
 
 A. 
 
 ^ovv 
 
 vavv 
 
 TToSa 
 
 yvvaiKOL 
 
 Xojyoiv or -w 
 
 V. 
 
 /3oO 
 
 vav 
 
 ITOVS 
 Dual 
 
 yvvoLi 
 
 Xaywg 
 
 .A.V. 
 
 ^6e 
 
 vrje 
 
 TToSe 
 
 yvvcuKe 
 
 Xayw 
 
 G.D. 
 
 ^OOIV 
 
 veolv 
 
 TroSoti^ 
 
 Plural 
 
 yvvaiKolv 
 
 \ay(^v 
 
 N.V. 
 
 /30€9 
 
 vrjes 
 
 TToSeg 
 
 yvvaiKes 
 
 \ayco 
 
 G. 
 
 ^0(OV 
 
 veo)v 
 
 TTohoiV 
 
 yvvaiKcov 
 
 Xaycov 
 
 D. 
 
 ^OVCTL 
 
 vavat 
 
 TTOCTL 
 
 yvvai^i 
 
 Xaycps 
 
 A. 
 
 ^ovs 
 
 vavs 
 
 TToSas 
 
 yvpoLKas 
 
 Xayrju^ 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 145 
 
 a. Observe that in /Sou? and vav^ the final u ^ of the stem is 
 dropped before a vowel (£90, h) -, that they have v in the ace. 
 sing, and the simple stem in the voc. ; that in the ace. plur, 
 ySoO? and vav'i are for /Sov-v^, and vav-v^, v being dropped as 
 in t^^O? (291); that in vav^, va- becomes i^e- before a long 
 vowel and vr]- before a short vowel, and the gen. sing, may have 
 -ft)? instead of -09. 
 
 6. Observe that in ttou?, o of the stem is irregularly length- 
 ened in forming the nom. masc. sing. (ttoS-?), (194, 2). 
 
 c. Observe that yvvi] is of the first declension, but all other 
 forms come from a stem in yvvaiK- ; that the gens, and dats. 
 accent the ultima, and the voc. sing, takes the recessive accent. 
 
 364. Xaya)5 is of the Attic second declension, a form 
 of the second declension having stems in co instead of o. 
 This 0) appears throughout, but takes i subscript where 
 the regular endings have l. The genitive and dative 
 of this declension, when accented on the ultima, are by 
 exception oxytone. rj eo)?, daw??, has regularly ttjv ico. 
 
 365. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. TTOLvra afjevafiat. 2. kotttovctl tov^ ^ov<;. 3. Kal 
 Kvpco^ TTapTjcrav at Ik WeXoTTOvvrjcrov vrje^. 4. naprjp 
 8e Kal X€LpL(TO(f)o<; eVl tcjp vecop. 5. 6 8' dvrjp avTrj<; 
 Xayw? edrfpa. 6. €776187) 8' ecD? rjv^ Sie^aivov T7)v 
 yii^vpav. 7. ava^aivovai napa tov irarepa tov 
 Kvpov. 8. XafJi^dveL di'Spa<; cJs einfiovkevovTo^ Ttcr- 
 (Ta(j)epvov<; tols iroXecn. 9. ej(w avTcov Kal 7rat8a9 
 Kal yvpalKa^ iv XdpSecn. 10. toI<; fiev nocrl^ SpofMO) 
 
 ^ These stems were changed to ^oF, vaF (f digamma), before a vowel 
 and the F then went out of use. F is equivalent to v or w. 
 2 See 212. 
 
 * XpanfMai regularly takes the dat. of means or instrument (249). 
 
 10 
 
146 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 ^pSivrai. 11. i^ovXero rco rralSe diJi<j)OT€p(o iTapeivai. 
 12. ets Trjv €0) Tj^ei ^acnXevs crvv rco (rrpareu/iaTt 
 
 No. 10. Nttvs. 
 
 lxa)(oviJL€vo<;} 13. ivravOa 8e iiTopevOrjaav 8ta rij? 
 MT^Sta? araOfJiov^ If Trapaordyya^ TpiaKovra etg ra? 
 XlapvcraTiSos Kcofjia<; rrj^ Kvpov kol ^acrtXect)? fJLrjrpo^. 
 
 XL 1. But I see many cattle. 2. His wife per- 
 suaded him. 3. Cyrus sent for the ships. 4. Cyrus 
 fought with him.^ 5. He was sent down by his father 
 as satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia. 6. He will 
 employ those who are obedient. 7. But his mother 
 begs him off and sends him back again to his province. 
 
 366. 
 
 dix<f)6T€po<;, -a, -ov, 
 
 pred. position. 
 dvrjpy dvhpo^;, man 
 
 hand ; Lat. vir. 
 ^ov?, ^o6<i^ o, rj, ox, coio ; 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bothy yvvrj, yvvauKo^, woman,wife. 
 SpofjLOf;, running, flight; 
 Spofjio) Oelv, on the run, 
 double quick [drome- 
 dary] . 
 
 %U8' 
 
 pi. cattle [Lat. bos ; bu- ew?, ea>, 17, dawn [east] 
 colic]. Xayw?, -w, 6, hare. 
 
 ^ What does fxaxovixfpos express ? 
 
 2 See 225, a. 
 
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 
 
 147 
 
 fJt'TJTTjp, fjLTjTpos, mother : 
 [hat, mater ; mother] . 
 
 vojv^y v€(o<;, 77, s/i?^ [Lat. nd- 
 vis; nausea]. No. 10. 
 
 irarrip, irarpo^, father [Lat. 
 
 I pater; father]. 
 
 7rov9, 770809, 6, foot [Lat. 
 pes; FOOT, tri-pod]. 
 
 /BovXofiai, ^ovXyjaofjiaL, /8e- 
 ^ovXrjjjLaL, i^ovXijdrjPy 
 will, wish [Lat. volo ; 
 will] . 
 
 rjyeofxaiy T^yifo'o/x.at, rjyr]' 
 o-dfjirjVj rjyrjjjLaL, lead, 
 command,thi?ik,{/o before^ 
 guide^ w. dat. [ayw] . 
 
 drjpdco, hunt, chase, pursue 
 \Or\py idld beast^ . 
 
 KOTTTO), cut, jill^ slaughter 
 [chop ; comma]. 
 
 jxd^ojJLaL, fxa^ovfJiaL,^ e/ia- 
 ■^eadfjLTjv, pLepud^Tj pLai, 
 fght^give battle, w. dat. 
 
 irdp-eipi, be near, present, 
 arrive. 
 
 Xpdopai, x/>>?a-o/xat,^ ixpy)' 
 adprjv, KexpyjpcLL, use, 
 employ, w. dat. Has t] 
 for d in the contracted 
 forms ; cf. ^ctw (342). 
 
 i/;€u8a>, \j)€vcro), deceive, mid. 
 lie, cheat [pseud-onym]. 
 
 LESSON XXXIIL 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENI- 
 TIVES. 
 
 Review 77, 79, a, b; 80, 81. 
 
 367. A noun in the genitive may define or limit the 
 meaning of another substantive. This is called the 
 Attributive Genitive. 
 
 368. The relations of the attributive genitive are 
 not expressed by the genitive alone, but implied by the 
 
 1 See 253, 254, 520, «. 
 
 '^ a is leagtlieued to r) contrary to the rule (198). 
 
148 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 relations actually existing between the genitive and the 
 words upon which it depends. These are generally 
 translated by the possessive case in English, but may be 
 sometimes best translated by ofyfor.from^ etc. 
 
 369. The most important relations of the attributive 
 genitive are the following : 
 
 1. Possession, or other close relations, as power, 
 quality, characteristic, etc. : ra Kvpov ^acriXeLa, the 
 palace of Cyrus ; 6 ^acnXeoj^ d8eX<^09, t/ie brother of 
 the king : ra Kpea avTcov, their flesh ; y) 18107179 T7}<i 
 TjSovrjs, the peculia7'ity of its flavor. The Possessive 
 Genitive. 
 
 2. The subject of an action or feeling : 6 Kvpov 
 0-70X09, the preparation of Cyrus : t) €(j)oSo<; tov arpa- 
 7evjLta709, the approach of the army ; tov Oecov Tr6\ep.ov 
 <j)€vya)v, escaping the vengeance of the gods. The Sub- 
 jective Genitive. 
 
 3. The object of an action or feeling ; 8ta 701^ oXe- 
 6pov TO)v crvarpaTLCJTMv, on account of the destruc- 
 tion of their fellow soldiers {the enemy destroy their 
 
 felloio soldiers) ; Kt}/309 iieraaiv iroLeiTaL tcjv 'EWtJvmv, 
 Cyrus makes a review of the Greeks. The Objective 
 Genitive. 
 
 Observe that the word upon which the subjective or objective 
 genitive depends contains an idea of action or emotion^ that this 
 implied action or emotion may always be expressed in the form 
 of a verb with the subjective genitive as subject and the objective 
 as object : o 'Kvpov ot6\o^, Cyrus prepares or makes prepara* 
 tion; Kvpo<; e^eTaaiv iroielTai rcov ^l^Wrjvcov, Cyrus reviews 
 the Greeks. 
 
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 149 
 
 4. Material or Contents^ including the class, or that 
 of which anything consists : TreVre dpyvpCov puva^, Jive 
 minae of silver ; I32ko<; olvovy a jar of wine ; KlXlkojt/ 
 (j)vXaKTJ, a garrison of Cilicians ; (tIto^ jxeXui/r)';, panic 
 bread. The Genitive of Material. 
 
 5. Measure of space, time, or value : 7rora/x,o9 evpo<; 
 irXeOpov, a river of a plethron in width ; irivre rjixepcov 
 6So9, a journey of five days ; /xtcr^o? ef jjLrjvojv^ pay for 
 six months. The Genitive of Measure. 
 
 6. The whole after a word denoting a part, or the 
 relation of the whole to a part taken : Svo \6yoi tov 
 M.4.v(sivo^ aTparevfjiaTOf;, two companies of Menon's 
 army ; to ttoXv ^EXXrjviKov, the greater part of the 
 Greek force ; ol TrpcoTou twv TroXepLicov, the first of the 
 enemy. Partitive Genitive. 
 
 Observe that the attributive genitive has regularly the same 
 position as the attributive adjective (79) except partitives and 
 genitives of personal pronouns (1^ avTOiv), which have the predi- 
 cate position. The objective genitive also frequently has this 
 position. 
 
 370. Predicate Genitive. 
 
 With verbs signifying to be, beco^ne, and the like, the 
 attributive genitive (367) may stand in the predicate in 
 the relation of the predicate adjective or noun. The 
 most common forms of the predicate genitive are 
 possessive and partitive : 
 
 1. (Possessive.) at 8e fcw/xat HapvcrartSo? '^aav, 
 but the villages belonged to Farysatis. 
 
 2. (Partitive.) '^v 8e 6 %(0KpdTr}<; rcov d/a</>t MlXtitov 
 
150 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 (TTparevofievcov, hut Socrates was of those taking the field 
 about Miletus, 
 
 371. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. TjyeiTO^ rat 5 vavcri. 2. alrei Kvpov irepTe 
 fir)v(ov fjLLaOov. 3. to T€t;^09 ei)(e KikiKajv (j)v\aKTJ. 
 
 4. irvy^ave yap rctft? avrco kiroixivr) tcjp ottXitoji/. 
 
 5. Kal yap rjcrav at 7rdX€t9 TLcr(ra(j)€pvov<; to ap^aiov. 
 
 6. Tov 8e yiapcrvov to evpo^ Icttlv eiKocn Kal irivTe 
 7Toh(ov. 7. Tiov yap fJ^oixV ^^^(^^^^^ /^cit to ap^eiv 
 icTTL. 8. Kvpog yap eirepLire ^lkovs 17860? olvov, 
 9. /cat avTT] av dWr] Trpdc^acrt? '^v avTco tov aOpoi- 
 t,eiv^ aTpaTevfia. 10. ot Se Stwfai^re? tcop linTecov Ta^if 
 iiravovTOy iroXv yap r; aTpovOo^ {ostrich) airecnraTO 
 (fyevyovaa. 11. xptjfxaTa crvve^aWovTO avTco etg ttjv 
 Tpo(j)riv Tcov (TTpaTLCJTOJv at TToXet? e/coucrat.^ 12. e/ce- 
 Xevcrei/ avTov kaix^dveiv [xepo^ nap* iKacTTOv t(x)v 
 TfyefjiovcoT/. 
 
 II. 1. The captains of the Greeks remained at the 
 doors. 2. He received pay for six months. 3. But the 
 width of its (fern.) wall was twenty-five feet. 4. But the 
 fear of the barbarians was great. 5. But the villages 
 in which they encamped belonged to Pary satis. 6. But 
 Clearchus at that time made an assembly of the sol- 
 diers. 7. The CiHcian queen admired the order of 
 the army. 
 
 1 See 366. 
 
 ^ TOV dBpo'i^fiv gen. (117) depends upon Trpo^ao-iy; as a verbal noun 
 the infinitive may be used in any case. 
 
 * Voluntarily. The predicate adj. sometimes has the force of an adverb 
 (271). 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 151 
 
 372. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ap^aLO<;,'d,'Ov, old, ancient; Oavfjid^co [^av/ia8-], won- 
 To dpxouov, formerly der at, admire, 
 
 [archives, archaic]. (TKTjveco, to be in or occupy 
 
 lJiipo<^,-ov^,T6^ part, share. a tent, encamp, be en- 
 
 7r/3o-<^acrt9, -eo)?, 7), pretext camped [p-Kiqvr}'], 
 
 [prophecy] . crvfi-^oiXko), bring together, 
 
 (jToko^, preparation, expe- contribute [symbol] . 
 
 dition. ^evyo)yflee, 
 
 Tpo(f)T]y-'YJ<;^nourishment,sup- /cat yoip, and (this is or was 
 /^or^(r/3e<^aj)[a-trophy]. so) for, for indeed, for 
 
 eTrop.ai, follow, accompany, even; h^t. etenim, 
 w. dat. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Review 73, 194, 1 ; 266, 344. 
 
 373- Verbal adjectives are formed from the verb 
 theme, usually as it appears in the aorist passive, by 
 affixing 'Teo<5 and •■to<;. The former corresponds to the 
 Latin gerundive ; TroiT^reo? (faciendus), that must be 
 done : the latter has regularly the force of the perfect 
 passive participle, 770117709 (factus), 9nade ; /xeraTTC/xTrro? 
 {i7r€fji(j>0r)v, aor.), summoned. 
 
 374. There are three degrees of comparison of 
 adjectives in Greek, — the positive, comparative, and 
 superlative. 
 
152 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 375. Examine the following : — 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 1. TTLcrro?, faitlifid 7riaT6-Tepo<s Trtcrrd-raro? 
 (TTtcrro-) 
 
 2. d(T(j)a\.ij<;, safe acK^aXicr-repo^ dcr^aXecr-raro? 
 (aa-^akecr-) 
 
 3. TToXefXLoSy liostile TToXefjucjrrepo^ - TroXe/xtw-rarog 
 (TToXe/xto-) 
 
 4. ixaKp6<^, long jxaKpo-repos /xa/cpd-raro? 
 [jxaKpo-) 
 
 Observe that the comparative is formed by adding -repo? to 
 the masculine stem of the positive, and the superlative by adding 
 -raro^ : that stems in o, retain unchanged in comparison when 
 the penult is long (1), or followed by a mute and a liquid (4) ; 
 otherwise the stem vowel is changed to g) (3). 
 
 Rule. 
 
 376. Most adjectives are compared by adding to the 
 stem of the positive -T€po<; for the comparative, and 
 -raros for the superlative. 
 
 377. Some adjectives, chiefly those ending in -vq 
 and -/305, are compared by adding to the root of the word 
 -Icov for the comparative, and -lctto^; for the superlative. 
 
 378. Certain changes occur when i follows the final 
 consonant of the stem or root. 
 
 1. t after X forms with it XX, fiaXXov (for jxaX-lop), 
 fidXa, very, 
 
 2. t after k, y, ^ forms with them regularly tt\ with 
 y it sometimes forms ^ : OaTTCDp (rax'icjv), ra^v? ; 
 ix€^0)v (Ion.), (iJL€y-io)v) , fxiya<;. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 153 
 
 379. Examine the following : 
 
 1. 9781;? {v^')i rjhicov, T^Stcrro^. 
 
 2. Ta^v<; (ra^-), Oolttcov ^ (ra^-l(t)v), tol^'LO'toS' 
 
 3. atcr^/309 (atcr^-), alcr^-lcjv, atcr^-tcrro?. 
 
 4. ACttACO? (/CafC-), KaK-lCOV, KCLK-LCTTOS. 
 
 a. Some adjectives have both forms of comparison, kuko^ 
 has irregular forms, which will be noticed later. 
 
 380. Some common Forms of Irregular Adjectives, 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 1. dya^d? 
 
 2. /caXd?^ 
 
 3. ixiya^; 
 
 4. TToXu? 
 
 KpeUTTCOV 
 
 /caXXtoji/ 
 
 apto"T09 
 {oLpr-eTrj, fitness) 
 
 KpOLTlCTTOfS 
 
 {KpdT-o<;, strengtli) 
 koXXlctto^; 
 (/cctXXo?, beauty) 
 /leytcrro? 
 
 TrXetcrro? 
 
 {tto\^'^ ttXc-)^ (ttXcW) 
 
 Observe that the comparative and superlative regularly are 
 modified forms of -mv and -lctto^ ; that afieipcov is for a/nevLcov; 
 that t with 7 in fxey-tcov forms f (378, 2). 
 
 1 Originally the root is supposed to have been Bax-; by transfer of 
 aspiration the first aspirate reappears wlieuever the second is lost for any 
 cause, similar to the change in tcOvku (304). 
 
 ^ KoKXcoav is formed from the stem of KdWos, beautij, produced from an- 
 alogy to 378, 1. 
 
 2 Syncopated, p. 112^ 
 
154 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 381. The comparatives and superlatives in -09, are 
 declined like Srjkos (73). The comparatives in -lcov are 
 of the third declension and are declined like evSaLfxajv 
 (266) ; but shorter forms may occur in the accusative 
 sing. masc. and fem., and nom., ace, and voc. plural of 
 all genders. 
 
 382. Paradigm (824). 
 
 Singular. 
 
 TrXelov 
 TrXeiovos 
 TrXetovL 
 7r\eZov 
 
 Plural. 
 
 irXeiOpes TrXetous 
 TrXeiovcov 
 TrXetocrt 
 7rXeL0va<; ttXciov? 
 
 N, 
 
 N. irXeLcov 
 
 G. irXeLovo'S 
 
 D. irXeCovL 
 
 A. irXeCova irXeioy 
 
 V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. irXeiove 
 G. D. irX^Lovoiv 
 
 irXeiova TrXeico 
 TrXeLovcov 
 irXeiocTL 
 TrXeiova TrXeCcj 
 
 a. The shorter forms come from stems in -09 ; -co and -ov<; 
 are contracted from o-a and o-e?. The ace. plur. conforms to the 
 nominative, as -ea? becomes -et? in ttoXl^ (292). 
 
 383. Decline KaKLCJv, /BeXricoVy fiei^cop, fxaKpoTepo^, 
 
 384. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. ot 8e Tjcrav Kvpco TTicTTOTaroi. 2. toI<; /xet^ocrt 
 TToXe/xtoi? ixa)(ovvTaL. 3. ra Se Kpia avroiv T^Sicrra 
 rfv. 4. 6 ovv Trp€(T/3vTepo<; irapcov irvy^ave. 5. Xa/x- 
 ^dvovaiv avhpa<; otl^ TrXeLCTTov'^ koX /SeXricrrov?. 
 
 etc. 
 
 ^ The sup., as in Latin, is often best translated by very, exceedingly, 
 2 Strengthens the sup. as ws ; Lat. quam^ as possible. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 155 
 
 6. TrXetov? rj Stcr;^i\t06 icTTpaTOTreSevcravTO irapa KXe- 
 oipX^' ^' Kvpos yap cTre/iTre ^lkov^ olvov tjSlovos 
 TovTov. 8. 'A/BpoKOfJid^; §e varepiqa-e ri^? P'^XV^ VH^^' 
 paL<; irivre. 9. XP^^V ^^ 7roXXa> varepov at rd^ei'^ 
 (j)av€pal lyiyvovTO. 10. /cat rwt' iTnreojp ttoXXw dcrc^a- 
 XearepOL iap^ev. 11. iraprjv XeLpLcro(f)0<; iiri tojv 
 ve(i)v perdTrepTTTO^ vtto Kvpov. 12. (TvyfcaXei et? 
 7171^ aK7)pr)i' Uepaas tov^; dpicrrov^ roiv Trepl avrov 
 lirrd, 13. Aapeuco rjcrav Traiheq 8uo, TrpeafivTepo^s 
 pev *ApTa^ep^r)s, v€an'epo<; Se Kupo?. 14. TTpcoTOv pev 
 yap en Trats cot', ot* iiraihevero kclL <tvv tco dSeXc^oj 
 Kal (Tvv TOLs: dWoLS TTaLcrl, irdpTcov ^ irdvra KpdTLCTTO^s 
 ivopit^ero. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 7 (tovtov), 8 (/xa%T/9), 10, and 
 observe that they depend upon words denoting comparison. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 385. All words expressing or implying comparison^ 
 superiority, or inferiority are followed by the genitive 
 when r\, than, is omitted. 
 
 Examine the datives in 8, 9, 10, and observe that they are 
 connected with comparatives and denote the excess or degree by 
 which one thing differs from another. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 386. The dative of manner is used with comparatives 
 to denote the degree of difference. 
 
 ^ The partitive gen. may depend upon the sup. of an adjective (369, 6). 
 
156 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 387. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They ran faster^ than the horses. 2. He will use 
 the most faithful. 3. He sends her back by the quick- 
 est way. ^ 4. They will make the first clays' stages as 
 long as possible. 5. Most of the Greeks were thus per- 
 suaded. 6. Those are by far worse than these. 7. All 
 these whom you see are more hostile to the king than to 
 the Greeks. 
 
 388. VOCABULARY. 
 
 atcrxpo?? -a, -6v, shameful^ later, afterwards [out, 
 
 base. utter] . 
 
 do'(f)ak'ifj<;, -69, not to he y^povo*^, time, season, period 
 
 tripped up, safe, certain. [chronic]. 
 
 j/€09, -d, -ov, young [neo- o-Tparo-TreSevo), eyicamp, 
 
 logy]. usually mid. 
 
 trpid^v^, -ec(J9, 6, as adj. in vcrTepeo), he later, arrive 
 
 comp. and sup., wpecr^v- after, w. gen. [iWepo?]. 
 
 Tepo<;, 7rpe<Ty8uraT05, old, ore, conj., adv., w/ien, he- 
 reverend ; ol TrpecrySets, cause. 
 
 ambassadors [priest]. otl, conj., t/tat ; causal, he- 
 
 varepoq, -d, -ov, later, he- cause, since ; tostrength- 
 
 hind ; as adv., vaTepov, en a sup., asjjc 
 
 aiieivoiv, aptcrro?, refers more to excellence, 
 /SeXTiojv, ^eXTLCTTOf;, refers more to bravery, 
 KpeLTTajv, KpdTL(TTo<;, refers more to power, strenyth. 
 
 389. Translate at sight : — 
 
 1 BaTTov. 2 cf. 357. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 157 
 
 The Arrival of Cyrus's Fleet. 
 
 'EvrevOev i^eXavueu crTaOfjLOv<; Svo irapaadyya*; irev- 
 reKaiheKa et? 'Icrcrov? 7179 KtXtKtas uokiv^ iirl ry 
 OakoLTTrj olKoviJiev7]v, yieydkiqv koI evhai^LOva, 'Ei/- 
 ravda efjueupav r]fjLepa<; rpei^ ' kol Kvpco iraprjaav al 
 Ik llekoTTovvrjcrov vrjes, rpLaKovra Kai irevre, Kai in 
 avToi^ vavap-^o<s [admiral) UvOayopa^; AafceSat/xdt^to?. 
 'Hyetro S' avrals Ta/iw? Alyvinno^ ef 'Ecfyecrov, e^^cov 
 i^av? erepa? Kvpov irevre koI euKocnv ' ats iiroXiopKeL 
 MikrjTov, ore Tio-cra^ipvu (f)L\.r) rjv, /cat crvveTrok4p.eL 
 Kvpcp 77/309 avTov. Hapijv 8e fcat XeLpL(ro(j)o<; 6 Aa- 
 KeSaLfJL6vio<; iirl tcop vecov, /xeraTre/LtTrrog vtto Kvpov, 
 €7TTaKO(jLov<; (seven hundred) e)(0)v oTrXira^ oiv ^ iarpa- 
 TTJyet TTapa Kvpcp. Al Se vrjes ojpiMOvv {lay at ancJwr) 
 77 a pa Trjp Kvpov (TktjvtJt/, 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Review 9, 10, 24, 28, 70, 102, 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 
 1, 2; 116, 162, 164, 1, 2, 3; 369, 6, obs. 
 
 390. The personal pronouns are iyco (e/xe-), /, cru 
 (ere-), t/iou, and ov (e), gen. 0/ /dm, of her, of it, 
 
 * Gen. after verbs of commanding (399.) 
 
158 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 91. 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 <rp 
 
 — 
 
 G. 
 
 ijJLOV 
 
 flOV 
 
 crov 
 
 o5 
 
 D. 
 
 €fJiOL 
 
 fJLOL 
 
 croC 
 
 of 
 
 A. 
 
 if^i 
 
 lie 
 
 ad 
 
 Dual. 
 
 € 
 
 N. A. 
 
 VOi 
 
 
 ar(f)(0 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 v^v 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Vfiel^ 
 
 
 v/xet9 
 
 ar^el<; 
 
 G. 
 
 r)fJiO)T/ 
 
 
 VfJLOJV 
 
 a^Qiv 
 
 D. 
 
 rjfilv 
 
 
 VfJUV 
 
 cr(j)Lcn 
 
 A. 
 
 17/xas 
 
 
 v/xas 
 
 crc^as 
 
 Observe that iy(o is a distinct formation, that the other forms 
 of the sing, and dual are similar to those of the 0- declension 
 (61), but those of the plural are similar to third declension, 
 (223) ; that the stems of the plural are '^f-ie-, vfJLe-, a<j)e- and 
 that final € is contracted with tlie endings, except in a<f)i(n, 
 where e becomes I. 
 
 Examine the following : — 
 
 1 . Tavra SoKel fjuoL, this seems best to me, 
 
 2. KoX doi SrjXaxTO) rcLvra^ I will make known to you 
 these things. 
 
 3. '^oK^i KOLfjiol TavTa, this seems best to me also. 
 
 4. TTKTTa Xafji^dveL nap* ifxov, he takes pledges 
 from me. 
 
 392. The longer forms of the first person I^lov, i(xoL, 
 ifxe are more emphatic than the shorter ^ov, [jlol, fjue, and 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 159 
 
 are generally used after a preposition (4). The latter 
 forms, with the oblique cases in the singular of av and 
 ov, are enclitics except when they are emphatic (2). 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1 . o-vfjifiovXevoiJieOd croL, we ask your advice, 
 
 2. TrXota rjfxeLS ovk exojjuepy WE /mve not boats, 
 
 3. (TV re yap ''EWr^i' el koX rjfJLeL<;, for YOU are a 
 Greeks and so are we. 
 
 393. The nominatives of the personal pronouns are 
 generally used only for emphasis. In English the 
 emphasis would be expressed by a stress of voice 
 (2, 3). 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. Xeyerat 'AttoWcov vLKrjcraL Mapavav iptt^ovrd 
 ol, Apollo is said to have conquered Marsyas, who con- 
 tended loith him, 
 
 2. o Se 7r€L0€TaL, and he believes. 
 
 3. ovTo^ iiroXefjirjcrev ifjLOL, he made loar upon me, 
 
 4. dTreVe/xTre Tov<i Sacr/xoi;? avraJ, he was sending the 
 revenues to him, 
 
 5. auro? (TV XeyeLS raura, you yourself say this, 
 
 394. The forms ov, of, etc., of the pronoun of the 
 third person are in Attic ^ Greek usually indirect reflex- 
 ives^ used in a dependent clause to refer to the subject 
 of the leading verb (1). The nominative of this pronoun 
 is regularly supplied by the article or demonstrative 
 (2, 3) ; the oblique cases by avros (4). 
 
 * The standard dialect. 
 
160 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 395. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (TV 7re)LL7r€t9 TCOV OTtXlTCOp} 2. 6 TpQTTO<; TTpO^ 
 
 avOpo)TTO)v icrrl atcr^po?. 3. totjtcov Hei^ta? rjp^ev. 
 
 4. rj^iov dSeX<^6? oiv avrov TTepi(^Orjvai of ravTa ra Sojpa. 
 
 5. Kvpos rjpX'^ '^^^ \6yov wSe. 6. Trapa Kvpo) ol 
 ayaSoi dftwrejoa? nixrjq rvy^dvovcn. 7. to Se \017rov 
 rjfjielf; TreipacroixeOa ravTTj^ rrjq Td^eo)<s. 8. Huyprjf; 
 XajJi/SdveL Tov ^aj^apiKov arpaTov. 9. i-^ofjievoL Se 
 avTcov rjaav oirXlTai. 10. 7171' iin/BovXrjv ovk rjaOd- 
 veTo. 11. a€vo(f)cov v/xd? TrapaKaXelraL iirl rd KdXXi- 
 (TTa epya. 12. Kv/jo? 7'i79 fCjOav'yi79 d/couet. 13. tovtov 
 eKacTTO^; iinOvixei. 14. ou/c ohx^Xtjctovt ai rdv aTpaTLco- 
 Tcop. 15. u/Aets €/xot 0L» OeXeT€ ireideaOai. 16. 6 au- 
 T09 v/xii' cTToXo? eVrt /cat r)plv. 17. Acat eKcXeve 
 'KX4ap)(ov [lev tov Se^lov Kepco^; rfyeicrdaiy M.ivo}va Se 
 TOV SeTTaXov tov evcovvfjiov. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 1, 8, and note the signification of the 
 verbs upon which they depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 396. The genitive is used with verbs whose action 
 affects the object onl?/ in part. 
 
 a. The genitive with many of these verbs originally depended 
 upon yttepo? as a partitive genitive (371, 12). This principle 
 applies particularly to verbs of sharing or enjoying. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 5, 6, 7, 9 and note the signification 
 of the verbs upon which they depend. 
 
 ^ Some of, etc. 
 
personal pronouns. l61 
 
 Rule. 
 
 397. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to 
 touchy to take hold of, to begin, to make trial of, to aim at, 
 to reach, to attain, to hit, to miss. 
 
 a. These verbs affect the object only in part. 
 Examine the genitives in 12, 13, 14 and note the signification 
 of the verbs upon which they depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 398. The genitive is used with many verbs signifying 
 the action of the senses or of the mind ; as to hear, taste, 
 smell, remember, forget, care for, neglect., spare, wonder 
 at, desire. 
 
 a. The genitive with some of these verbs (397, 398) depends 
 upon the same principle as 396 ; with others it depends upon 
 the nominal idea of the verb instead of the verbal. When the 
 verbal idea prevails, or when they affect the object as a whole, 
 they take the accusative (10), (iirL^ovXt^v). 
 
 Examine the genitives in 3, 17, and note the signification of 
 the verbs upon which they depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 399. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule, 
 
 command, to lead as commander. 
 
 * 
 
 400. 1. The Greeks began the crossing. 2. He 
 will not neglect the Greeks. 3. He will take care of 
 the barbarians. 4. But when Cyrus called me I pro- 
 ceeded. 5. You do not desire to accompany me. 
 6. He commanded the peltasts. 7. And this one 
 missed him. 
 
 11 
 
162 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 401. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ipyop,wor^,deed[Ge-orQe]. d-/x€\ea>, de careless of, 
 al(TddvoiJiai,perceive,learn; neglect [/uteXct]. 
 
 w. gen., hear^ hear of eVt-/>L€Xeo/xat, care for, give 
 [aesthetics]. attention to [/x,e\€t]. 
 
 dixapToivco, miss, fail or err 
 in conduct, 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, AND POSSES- 
 SIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Review 10, 70, 162, 163, 164, 1. 
 
 402. The reflexive pronouns are ifiavrov, iiJLavTrj<;, 
 of myself ; ceavrov, (reavrrj^, of thgself ; iavrov, iavTrj(;, 
 iavTov, of himself of herself of itself 
 
 403- 
 
 
 Farad 
 
 ilGMS. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Masc 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 r^ » 
 
 ^ 
 
 > '^ 
 
 t <^ »'> e ^ s'^ 
 
 (jr. efiarrrov 
 
 €fjiavTr)<; 
 
 i)yiO)v avTOiv rjfKop avTcov 
 
 T\ ' 
 
 r\ 
 
 S >" 
 
 e« »" t'* s*^ 
 
 JJ. efjbavTO) 
 
 efjuavry 
 
 TjiXLV avToi9 77/xtz^ avrat? 
 
 A ' 
 
 / 
 
 » / 
 
 e<^ >/ e^ >.i 
 
 A. efjuavTOT/ 
 
 €fJbaVT7)T/ 
 
 ')7^a9 avrov? rjiJia<; avTa<; 
 
 
 
 Sin 
 
 &. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 G. 
 
 
 ^ « 
 
 « « 
 
 (TeavTOVy (TavTOv 
 
 (reavT7)<;, aavrrjf; 
 
 D. 
 
 (TeavTMy cravTco 
 
 (reavrfj, aavrrf 
 
 A. 
 
 (TeavTOVy cravTov 
 
 aeaxjTTJvy (ravnJT/ 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 G. 
 
 
 L ^ y ^ 
 
 « « > /^ 
 
 
 VJJLCiJV aVTCx)V 
 
 V/Aft)^' aVTdiV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 £ « , « 
 
 £ « , /^ 
 
 
 v^xiv avTOi^ 
 
 v/xtz^ avrai^ 
 
 A. 
 
 
 I '^ , / 
 
 1 '> > ^ 
 
 
 v/xa? aurou? 
 
 u/Lta? aura? 
 
REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 163 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mase. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut 
 
 ;, 
 
 G. 
 
 iaxjTov, 
 
 avTOv 
 
 kavrrj^;, 
 
 avT7]<? 
 
 iavTov, 
 
 avTov 
 
 D. 
 
 iavTM, 
 
 avT^ 
 
 iavTjj, 
 
 avrfj 
 
 iavTcp, 
 
 avTcp 
 
 A. 
 
 eavTov, 
 
 avTOv 
 
 Pluk. 
 
 avrrjv 
 
 iavTo, 
 
 e / 
 
 avTO 
 
 G. 
 
 iavTOiv, 
 
 avTCJv 
 
 kavTcov, 
 
 avTojp 
 
 eavT(x)Vi 
 
 avT(x)v 
 
 D. 
 
 iavTOL^, 
 
 avToh 
 
 iavTois, 
 
 avroLS 
 
 €aVT0t9j 
 
 avTol^ 
 
 A. 
 
 iavTOv^, 
 
 avTov^ 
 
 iavTois, 
 
 avrds 
 
 iavrd, 
 
 avrd 
 
 Observe that the reflexives are formed from the stems of the 
 personal pronouns (390) compounded with the intensive auro? ; 
 that in the plural the two pronouns are declined separately in 
 the first and second persons, and sometimes in the third. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. d(j)L'mr€veL inl ttjv iavrov aKrjvTJp, he rides back 
 to his 010)1 quarters, 
 
 2. ore 6/oai tt)^ creavrov dpyy]v crojlflvTCLy I see that 
 you retain your own province, 
 
 3. Trap ayye Wet Tw 'ApLaTLmra) d7ro7re/x,i//at TTpo<; iav- 
 rov ro arpdrevfjia, he orders Aristippus to send the army 
 to him. 
 
 404. The reflexive pronouns regularly refer to the 
 subject of the clause in which they stand. But in a 
 dependent clause (3) they sometimes refer to the sub- 
 ject of the leading verb, and are then called indirect 
 reflexives (394). 
 
 405. The reciprocal pronoun is dXXTjXcov, of one an- 
 other, formed from aXXo? (163) compounded with itself, 
 dXk-rjko- (for aXX-aXXo). 
 
164 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 406. 
 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 dWyjXoLV 
 
 dWyjXaiv 
 
 
 dWijXoLv 
 
 D. 
 
 dWijXoLv 
 
 dWrjXaiv 
 
 
 dWyjXoLv 
 
 A. 
 
 dWyjXoj 
 
 dWijkd 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 dXXTjXcj 
 
 G. 
 
 dWtjXcov 
 
 dWijXcDV 
 
 
 dWtjXojv 
 
 D. 
 
 dWijXoL^ 
 
 dWnjXaL^ 
 
 
 dXXyjXoL'; 
 
 A. 
 
 dWij\ov<; 
 
 dXXrjXd^ 
 
 
 dXXrjXa 
 
 Observe that aXkrjXoiv has the endings 
 
 5 of aXXo9; that iu the 
 
 accusative 
 
 plural neuter. 
 
 where the last i 
 
 sylh 
 
 ible is short, it has 
 
 the orifi^inal accent of dWo^. 
 
 
 
 407. The most common possessive pronouns are e/xd?, 
 7n?/, ao^, thy, rjixerepos, our, v/xerepo?, your. These 
 pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pro- 
 nouns. They are declined like adjectives in -09 (70). 
 They have nearly the same force as \k\^ possessive geni- 
 tive of the personal pronouns, but are more definite, 
 especially with the article. 
 
 408. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. TToXefjiLOi dXXijXoL<; rjcrav ufxerepOL (jTparioyTai. 
 
 2. e'jLto? 8e a8eX(^09 dKovei crov tolovtov; Xoyov;. 
 
 3. rJKOvcre Ti(T(Ta(j)€pvov<; top Kvpov cttoXov. 4. fcat 
 TOiv Trap iavT^ Se ^ap^dpojv eVe/xeXetro. 5. eSofe 
 TovTO) Tov 7rpo<; ifie TroXefxov iravcracrOai. 6. ivravOa 
 Si€)(ovaLV dXXijXojv fiacnXevf; re /cat ol EXXrjve'^ W9 
 TpiaKovra crraSta. 7. avveXe^e to avrov cTTparevixa 
 ;Ycopl9 TMv dXXojv. 8. Upo^evof; kol Mevcov elcriv 
 rjfxeTepob crTpaTiqyoi. 9. ecrri tco ijjico aSeXt^oi TToXi- 
 
reflexivj:, reciprocal, possessive pronouns. 165 
 
 fJLLO<;, ijxoi Se (f)L\os /cat Trtcrrd?. 10. rrj^ e\ev6epia<^ 
 vfjia<; iyo) evSaifJiOPi^a). 1] . o"e evhanxoviaa rrj^ aperrj^;. 
 12. e/AOt ovp SoKel ov)( (opa eXvai y]p2v dfjuekeiP rjiicop 
 avTOJv. 13. /cat avyKakel et? rrji' iavTov aKiqvrjv 
 Uepaas tov^ api(TTOv^ tojv irepi avrov eTrra. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 'Z, 3 (TLa(ja(f)epvov^)y and note the 
 signification of the verbs upon which they depend. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 409. Many verbs take a genitive of the source. 
 
 a. Verbs of hearing, learning, etc._, may take an accusative 
 of the thing heard and genitive of the person heard from. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 5, 6, and note that they express the 
 point of departure or the idea of separation. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 410. The genitive is used to denote that from which 
 anything is separated or distinguished. Thus it follows 
 verbs signifying to remove, to restraiii, to release, to 
 cease, to fail, to differ, to he apart, etc. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 10, 11, and note that they express 
 cause. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 411. The genitive is used with verbs of emotion to 
 express cause. 
 
 Examine the genitive in 7 {aXKfov)^ and note the word upon 
 which it depends. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 412. The genitive follows many adverbs of place and 
 time. 
 
166 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 413. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They encamped near one another. 2. I shall 
 deprive myself of hopes of safety. 3. He hindered 
 the army from crossing. 4. Clearclms heard from Cy- 
 rus of the multitude of the barbarians. 5. Orontas 
 ceased from war against Cyrus. 6. The two armies 
 were distant from one another twenty stadia. 7. He 
 summoned the captain to himself. 
 
 414. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aperrj, -17s, fitness, virtue, eu-Sat/xo^t^o) (evSat/xo^'tS-), 
 
 bravery, valor. count happy, conyrata- 
 
 ikevOepia, -dsy/reedom, lid- late [8at/xa>v] . 
 
 erty. aTepeco, deprive, rob. 
 
 ardhiov, stadium, 600 x^P''^? adv., apart, away 
 
 Greek ft., 5821 Eng. ft. fronu 
 Bl-€X(o, hold apart, be dis- 
 tant from. 
 
 LESSON xxxvn. 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Review 16, a, b -, 25, 202, «; 304, 343, 344, 351, 
 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 
 
 415. The tenses commonly used in the imperative 
 active are the present and aorist. The present denotes 
 an action as continued or repeated, the aorist denotes 
 
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 167 
 
 a simple occurrence of the action ; the time of both is 
 the same (202, a). 
 
 416. The tenses occurring in the middle and passive 
 are the present, aorist, and perfect. 
 
 417. The personal endings of the imperative are as 
 follows : 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Middle and 
 
 Passive. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 2. 
 
 -Bl 
 
 •TOP 
 
 -re 
 
 -(TO -crOov 
 
 -crOe 
 
 3. 
 
 -TO) 
 
 -TO)V 
 
 -vTcop or 
 -Tojcrav 
 
 -crdco -(t6o)v 
 
 -aOcDv or 
 -cr6a}(Tav 
 
 -61 is always dropped after a thematic vowel. 
 
 418. The imperative has the thematic vowel of the 
 corresponding tenses of the indicative, o before v, and e 
 elsewhere (25). In the aorist active and middle it is a. 
 But by exception the second person singular of the aor- 
 ist active ends in -01/,. and of the aorist middle in -at. 
 The middle endings, except the second person singular, 
 differ from the active in having -aS- for -r-. 
 
 419. 1. Write tlie present and aorist imperative act- 
 ive and middle of \vo) : 2. Xvc, 3. \v€T(o, k.t.X. ; 2. Xv- 
 (Tov, 3. Xvcrctrw, etc. (825, 827). 
 
 2. Write the present, aorist, and perfect imperative 
 middle and passive of Xvco (825, 829, 831): 
 
 Pres. Mid. & Pass. 
 
 AoR. Mid. 
 
 Perf. Mid. & Pass. 
 
 Aor. Pass. 
 
 2. Xvov 
 
 XvcraL 
 
 XeXvcro 
 
 Xvdr)TL 
 
 3. \vicr6o) 
 
 \vcrdada} 
 
 Xekvo'da) 
 
 \v6tJto) 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
168 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Observe that in the second person singular of the present cr is 
 dropped after a thematic vowel (27), and eo contracted to ov; 
 that in the aorist passive the active endings (344) are used ; 
 that -6l is changed to -tl to avoid the recurrence of a rough 
 mute at the beginning of successive syllables (304) ; and that 6r]- 
 stands before a single consonant^ otherwise Be- remains (344). 
 
 420. Write the indicative, imperative, participles, 
 and infinitives of Ovco^ fiovXevco, ^ao-iXevw, dpTrdt^o). 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. /X17 9aviJbd^€T€y do not he surprised. 
 
 2. \i^ov 8e KoX (TV, and do you also speak, 
 
 3. Xe^aTO) 6 arpaTLaiT7]<Sy let the soldier speak. 
 
 4. 7rp60v^xo<i (jyaivecrOa), let him appear zealous. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 421. The imperative is used to express commands, 
 exhortations, and entreaties. Its negative is /xt/. 
 
 422. Negatives, 
 
 ov is used in denying statements of fact, ixtj in other 
 cases ; ov is positive and definite, /xt; indefinite. 
 
 423. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. /at) Xeyere. 2. ov Xeyere. 3. at crTTOpSal fjuepop- 
 T(i)V. 4. ovTCt) TTjv yv(i)fjL7)v i^€T€. 5. av Xafji/Bave Tov 
 l3ap^apLK0v crrparov. 0. 6 r}fjL€repo<; (rrparriyo^ iroXi- 
 fxov TTavadcrdco. 7. riyiiqOivTOJV ol dyaOoi. 8. Ittttov 
 rjyopacre irivre fivcov dpyvpiov. 9. ecrecrOe dpSpe^; ol^lol 
 Trj<; iXev9€pLa<; rj<; vfxd^ iyo) evhaifiovit^o). 10. rd 8e 
 iiTLTyjSeLa TTapei)(ov ttoXXov dpyvpiov. 11. (XTrocrTracrai 
 
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 169 
 
 aTTO Tov TTOTafJiov TO Se^LOP /cepa9. 12. ^aackev^ ov 
 /xa^etraL 8e/ca rjfiepwv. 13. ov ttoWov ^povov tovtov 
 -qhiovi olvco iireTvyxave. 14. dkka, el /Bovkeu, /xeVe iirl 
 T(o crr/jarev/xart, eyw 8' iOekco Tvopevecr 6 ai. 
 
 Examine the genitives in 8 (fMvcov), 9 {eXevOeplas:), 10 (apyu- 
 pLov), and observe tliat thej denote price or the worth, value, as 
 Avorthy of, valued at, etc. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 424. The genitive is used to denote the price or 
 value of a thing (301, 8). 
 
 Examine the genitives in 12, 13 {xpovov), and note that they 
 denofe the time within which. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 425. The genitive is used to denote the ti7)ie within 
 which an action takes place. 
 
 426. The objective genitive follows many adjectives 
 which are kindred in meaning or derivation to verbs 
 taking the genitive : joiv el<; tov irokepov ipycop <^iXo- 
 pa0€(TTaTO^ rjv, he teas most eager to learn military 
 
 exercises. 
 
 a. The genitive follows adverbs derived from adjectives taking 
 the genitive : ol ifiTreipco'i avTov e^ovTe^, those who are ac' 
 quainted with him. 
 
 427. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. They advanced to the wall of Media. 2. The 
 man is a valuable^ friend. 3. They buy provisions 
 
 ^ worth much. 
 
170 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 at a great price.-^ 4. He bids you come during the 
 night. 5. Let the messenger of my brother be hon- 
 ored. 6. Procure yourselves provisions. 1 . It seems 
 best to me not ^ to fight within ten days. 8. Advance 
 to the mountain, but T wish to remain by the army. 
 
 428. VOCABULARY. 
 
 yvcofjLr), -179, opinion, plan, ira^iyoi, hold near, offer, 
 
 judgme7it [gnome] . furnish, make. 
 
 vv^,vvKT6^,j],ni(jht\^mwi\. el, eonj., if, 
 
 (j)L\oiJLa07]<;, '€<;, fond of fte^P^' adv., u^) to, until, 
 
 learning, eager to learn gen. ; conj., until, Lat. 
 
 [fiavOdvo)]. dum, donee, etc. 
 
 dyopdi,(o, [dyopaS-], dug, fjutj, adv., not, used with all 
 
 purchase [ayo/oa] . moods expressing depen- 
 
 iTTL-rvyxdvo), chance upon, dent or indefinite ideas. 
 
 meet with, find. 
 
 LESSON xxxvm. 
 
 IMPERATIVE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE OF 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 Review 150, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 152, 153, 154, 1, 2, 3 ; 
 
 242, 1, 2, 3. 
 
 429. Write the present imperative active and middle 
 ol Tijido), TTOieo), SrjXoo) (843, 844, 845): 
 
 1 Cf. 423, 10. 
 
 ^ (xfj ; the infinitive, bein^ indefinite, will take firj (422). 
 
IMPERATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 171 
 
 Active. 
 2. rifxae, Tifxa Trotee, iroCeL 8t]\o€, SrjXov 
 
 S. TlfJiaeTcoy Ti/xdro) Troteero), TroLetTco SrjXocro), SyjXovrcti 
 K. r. \. K. r. X. K. T. X. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 2. TlfJLoioV, TLfJiCO TTOlioVy TTOIOV StjXoOV, StjXoV 
 
 3. TljxaecrOco, TroieecrOo), STjkoecrda) 
 
 rl^acrOo) TTOLeicrOa} Sr)XoTj(rdct) 
 
 K.T.X. K.T.X, K.T.k, 
 
 430. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. rjyefjiova atret Kvpov. 2. (f)i\ofi.aO'r)<; rjv tcop 
 dfjb(f)l rd^eL^;. 3. rfj Kvpov <^tXta ^prjcrOe. 4. ra St- 
 rata Troteire. 5. /x'17 77/309 T0V9 ©poLAca? TToXe/xei. 6. TTa- 
 paKcvkeiTO) rov^ iavrov firj fid^ecrdaL. 7. Trotetro* 
 iKKkrjo-iav to>v avrov arpaTLayTcov. 8. /xi^ TTOtet ravra, 
 w KXecLp)(€. 9. pLi(jdov(T0o)v ol crrpartwrat vficov iirl 
 TovTcp. 10. ci'yAcaXet et? r'l^i' cravrou cTKiqvr^v Ylepcras 
 
 TOV<; dpia-TOV?. 11. STyXoU^'TOH^ OV9 TLfJiOXTL. 12. TTCt- 
 
 pdaOoiv elcr^dXXeiv 619 ri^z^ KiXt/ciai^. 13. ra a/cpa 
 p.rjT€ ^ Kvpo<; fjajre ol KlXlk€<; KaraXapi^avovTOiv. 
 14. KXeap^o^ p^v rov he^iov K€p(t)<; rjyeCcrda), Mevoiv 
 8e Tov evojvvpov. 
 
 II. 1. But choose commanders. 2. Try to conquer 
 the barbarians. 3. Lead the way^ to the provisions. 
 
 4. Fear to embark in the boats. 5. But shout to one 
 
 another not to run double quick. 6. Let him make an 
 assembly of the Greeks and barbarians in the plain. 
 7. Withdraw from the royal army a journey of five 
 days. 
 
 ^ fir}T€ . . . firjre, neither . . . nor. ^ Omit. 
 
172 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 431. The first three chapters of Xenophon's Anaba- 
 sis, divided into suitable portions, are introduced with 
 the following lessons. A few sentences, chiefly such as 
 contain matter irrelevant to the main narrative and rare 
 words, have been omitted. Sometimes a word or phrase 
 has been changed for a simpler form, but the text for 
 the most part has been retained intact. The meaning at 
 least has in no way been changed.* The selections are 
 introduced in the order of the narrative as the pupil 
 becomes prepared to understand their principal con- 
 structions. They may be omitted until the lessons have 
 been completed, and then taken with a review of the 
 lessons. But it is better that they be taken in order 
 with the lessons, and be read according to the directions 
 of 55, a, b ; 96, 1, 2, 3 ; 97, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 107, p. IIS^. 
 The pupil should endeavor to recognize sentences that 
 have occurred in the preceding selections, and to apply 
 the rules of syntax to the new ones. With this in view, 
 rules especially applicable to each selection are given at 
 the beginning as a review, and such foot-notes as the 
 pupil should need have been added to aid him in apply- 
 ing the principles of syntax. The more analytical study 
 should be deferred to later reading. The meanings of 
 new words are given in special vocabularies ; but they 
 should be further studied in connection with the gen- 
 eral vocabulary. 
 
 432. THE STORY OF THE ANABASIS. 
 
 In 407 B. c. Cyrus the Younger, the second son of 
 Darius Nothus, king of Persia, was appointed by his 
 
READING LESSON. 173 
 
 father satrap of Lydia, Pbrygia the Greater, and Cappa- 
 (locia. At this time he was only seventeen years of age, 
 but even then he aspired to the throne of his father, and 
 began to prepare, if need be, in the event of the accession 
 of his elder brother Artaxerxes to the throne, to wrest it 
 from him by force. When now, at the death of Darius 
 Artaxerxes became estabhshed in the kingdom, Cyrus 
 began to execute his plans; and accordingly in the spring 
 of 401 B. c. he set out from Sardis with a large army. 
 
 The first book of the Anabasis, the march upward, 
 tells the way in which Cyrus levied his Greek army of 
 over ten thousand, and the incidents of the journey 
 until they reached the plain of Cunaxa, about fifty miles 
 from Babylon, where the decisive battle took place. In 
 this battle the forces of Cyrus were victorious, but 
 Cyrus himself through his own rashness was slain, and 
 thus the purpose of the expedition was defeated. 
 
 The remaining books, which should be called the 
 " Catabasis," the march downward, gives an account of 
 the retreat of the ''Ten Thousand," among whom was 
 Xenophon, the historian of the enterprise, and of their 
 adventures until, in the spring of 399 b. c, in Asia 
 Minor they joined the army of Thibron. 
 
 ZJ.33. Accession of Artaxerxes. Imprisonment and Pardon of 
 
 Cyrus. 
 
 Review 92, 97, 1, 2, 3; 119, 121, 147, p. 11\ 236, 
 \,b,c', 237, 238, 245, «; 268. 
 
 1. Aapetou fcac napucrctrtSo? ytyi^oi^rat ^ TraiSe? Suo, 
 
174 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 eVet 8e -qaOdvei Aapeto? koX vTTCJTTTeve Trjv Tekevrrjv 
 Tov yStoVj ifiovXero roi iraihe afxcfyoTepcx) Trapclvai. 
 2. 6 fJb€P ovv TTpecr/BvTepos Trapwv irvy^ave ' Kvpov 8e 
 
 fJL€Ta7r€fJb7r€TaL OLTTO TTJS OLp^V^ V^ OVTOV (TaTpdTrrjv inoL- 
 
 iqcre? ava^aivei ovv 6 Kvpos ro)v '^Wtjvcov €\o)v 
 oirXiTas TpLaKocFLOv^, dp^opTa 8e avTcov UevCav Uap- 
 pdcriov. 
 
 3. 'E7r€t8i7 8e ireK^vrrfO'e'^ Aapelo<;, kol i^acriXev 
 crev^ *ApTa^€p^r]<;, Ticrcra(j>€pv7j<; Sia^dWeu tov Kvpov 
 7r/)09 TOV dSeX(j)ov co<; iTn/SovXeveL avTco. 6 8e ireideTai 
 re Kcd G-vWafx/3dv€L Kvpov cJ? aTroKTevcov'^ rj 8e fJ^yjTrjp 
 i^aLTr)aafJL€vr) ^ avTOv dTTOTrefJurei rrakiv iirl ttjv dp)(7]v. 
 
 yiyvoixaitbecome^kappenjde, TeXevTt] -rj<;, end, death. 
 
 accrue, he horn, [genesis]. [reXog] . 
 
 dadevio), he ill, sick. j3lo^, life., [quick ; bio- 
 viroTTTevQ), suspect, appre- graphy]. 
 
 /lend. 
 
 ^ Explain the tense, and note the recurrence of the same. 
 
 ^ The aorist in a subordinate clause, especially after temporal or rela- 
 tive words, as, eVet, ov, ore, etc., frequently has the force of the pluperfect 
 (314, a). Cf. Lat. historical perfect with postq?/am, etc. 
 
 ^ The aorist of verbs denoting a continued state generally expresses the 
 entrance into that state. This is called the mceptive aorist. 
 
 4 Cf. 236, obs. c. 
 
 s Made intercession for him, lit. having begged him off. 
 
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, 175 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Review 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 1, 2; 178, 184, 186, 
 223. 
 
 434. The interrogative pronoun rt?, tl, who, which, 
 what, takes the accent on the first syllable, and never 
 changes the acute to the grave (XIV.). The indefinite 
 ri9, Tt, some one, any one, a certain one, is distinguished 
 from the former by the accent, which it receives upon 
 the last syllable. This pronoun is enclitic (102). 
 
 435 
 
 . 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 Interrogalive. 
 Masc. & Fkm. Neut. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 Masc. & Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 Tt9 
 
 Singular. 
 TL 
 
 tU 
 
 \ 
 
 TL 
 
 G. 
 
 TIVO^^ TOV 
 
 TLVO<;, TOV 
 
 TLv6<;, TOV 
 
 TLv6<^, TOV 
 
 D. 
 
 TLVL, r<w 
 
 TLVL, TCp 
 
 TLVL, T(0 
 
 TLVL, T(p 
 
 A. 
 
 TLVa 
 
 TL 
 
 TLvd 
 
 \ 
 TL 
 
 N.A. 
 
 Tive 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TLve 
 
 TLVe 
 
 TLVe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TIVOLV 
 
 TIVOIV 
 
 TLVolv 
 
 TLVOLV 
 
 N. 
 
 TLveq 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Tiva 
 
 TLvi<; 
 
 TLvd 
 
 G. 
 
 TLPCOV 
 
 TlVdiV 
 
 TLVCOV 
 
 TLVCOV 
 
 D. 
 
 TL<TL 
 
 TLO-L 
 
 TLCTL 
 
 TLal 
 
 A. 
 
 TtVa9 
 
 Tiva 
 
 TLpd<; 
 
 TLvd 
 
176 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 a. The Ionic has gen. reo^ reO; Attic tov. 
 
 436. The indefinite relative pronoun oo-rt9, whoever, 
 whichever, tvhafever, is formed by uniting the relative 
 OS with the indefinite rU, Each is separately declined, 
 but the accent of the enclitic is dropped.-^ 
 
 437. 
 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 OCTTiq 
 
 T7Tt9 
 
 6tl' 
 
 G. 
 
 OVTiVOS, OTOV 
 
 rjo-TLPO^ 
 
 oinrLvo^;, otov 
 
 D. 
 
 ^TLVL, 6t(0 
 
 fJTLVL 
 
 MTLVi, 6t(o 
 
 A. 
 
 ovTiva 
 
 rjPTLva 
 
 Dual. 
 
 on 
 
 N. A. 
 
 d}TLVe 
 
 aTive 
 
 OiTiVt 
 
 G.D. 
 
 oXvTlVOLV 
 
 olvTivoiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 oivrivoiv 
 
 N. 
 
 omz^es 
 
 alTiv€<; 
 
 OLTlVa 
 
 G. 
 
 &VTlV(x)V, OTCOV 
 
 (LvTLVCJV 
 
 d)VTLV(DV. OT0)V 
 
 D. 
 
 oTcTTiO-L, 07019 
 
 alo-TLO-L 
 
 olcTTLO-L, OTOi^; 
 
 A. 
 
 OhCTTLVa^ 
 
 da-nva'S 
 
 ariva 
 
 438. Examine the following : 
 
 1. icrecrOe d^ioi rrj^ i\evdepia<^ r}<; [for i^v] K€KTr)- 
 o-0€, prove yourselves worthy of the freedom lohich yoii 
 possess, 
 
 2. crvv oT<^ [for crvv eKeivois oi5s] fidXiCTTa (jyiXeisy 
 with those you most love. 
 
 ' When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word, the com- 
 pound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word : wcr-re- 
 ^ on is thus written to distinguish it from art, conj. thaf, etc. 
 
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 177 
 
 3. ^ye oaov tjv avTco aTpdrevfia, he led whatever 
 army he had. 
 
 Observe that in 1, 7]v'\?> assimilated to the case of its antece- 
 dent; that in 2, this assimilation still takes place when the 
 antecedent is omitted ; that in 3, the antecedent, arpdrev/jia^ is 
 incorporated into the relative clause. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 439. The accusative of the relative as object of a 
 verb is generally assimilated to the case of its antece- 
 dent, if this is a genitive or dative. The antecedent is 
 often attracted into the relative clause and agrees with 
 the relative in case. 
 
 440. Examine the follow^ing : 
 
 1 . Tt? TrapayyeXKu ; who gives the order ? 
 
 2. TtVa yvcjfjLrjv e^^re ; ichat opinion do yon hold? 
 
 3. XeyovaC TLve<; raSe, so?ne speak as follows. 
 
 4. l^aiv^To dp9p(jj7r6<; rt?, a certain man appeared. 
 
 441. The interrogative rt? and indefinite rt? may be 
 either substantive or adjective. 
 
 442. Examine the following : . 
 
 1. Ti /SovXeaOe ; what do you wish ? 
 
 2. ipoiT(ti(Ti i.Keivov rC ^ovXerat, they ask him what 
 he wishes. 
 
 3. Xeye on ere -^81/07 era, tell what injury I have 
 
 done you. 
 
 12 
 
178 ' THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 443. The interrogative tls is used in both direct and 
 indirect questions. But in indirect questions the indef- 
 inite relatives are commonly used, 3. 
 
 444. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Ilepcra)^ Tive<; €(j>evyov. 2. kol a eXeyov 
 iKelvo^' oLTTyjyyeXXei'. 3. iirefjieXeiTo on iToirjcrei /3a- 
 (TtXev?. 4. TL^ ^ovXeraL r^ixiv xprjadai ; 5. ipcora 
 oTi TTOLure. 6. iSijXcocre tovto ot? eirparre"' Tjj vare- 
 paCa, 7. ocrri? Cv^^ eiriOvixei, Treipdcrdco vlkolv. 
 8. eXevOepiav alpov dv9' o)v €)(€l<;. 9. e/xot ovv So/cei 
 ovK dp^eXelv rifjucov avTcov, dXXd ^ovXevecrOai on ypr] 
 TTonelv Ik tovtcov. 10. OTTocras €l^€ c^uXa/ca?^ iv rai? 
 TToXecTLy TrapyjyyeiXe tol<; ^povpdp^oi<^ iKdaroi^; Xafx- 
 ^dveiv dvSpas IIeXo7rovv7)crLov<; on TrXeio'Tov^ kol fieX- 
 TKJTov^, 11. 6 Kupo9 dTreTTefiTTe tov<; yiyvop.4vov<^ 
 Sacr/Aov? ^acnXel e/c tcop iroXecov o)v^ Ticrcrac^epj/i^g 
 iTvy)(av€P e)(0)v. 
 
 II. 1, Speak whatever seems best to jou. 2. Xen- 
 ophon asks what announcement^ he is making. 3. Pro- 
 ceed with those you have. 4. What then do I bid you 
 to do ? 5. They trusted the guide whom the satrap 
 sent. 6. But if any one sees any other plan better than 
 this, let him speak. 7. He orders Aristippus to send 
 to him the army which he had. 
 
 a See the general vocabulary. 
 
 1 Cf. 26], a. 2 cf. 342. 
 
 ® For Ta>u (f)v\aKa)v depending on (f>povp:3pxois (439). 
 
 * Explain the case. ^ n : cf. I, 4. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 179 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 NUMERALS: CARDINAL, ORDINAL, AND 
 NUMERAL ADVERBS. 
 
 445. The most common forms of the cardinals, ordi- 
 nals, and numeral adverbs are the following : ^ 
 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 
 Adverb. 
 
 1 
 
 €19, fxCa, ev, one 
 
 7rp(OTo<;, first 
 
 
 ttTTaf, once 
 
 2 
 
 hvoy two 
 
 Sevrepos, second 
 
 St5, twice 
 
 3 
 
 rpel^, rpia 
 
 rpiTo^ 
 
 
 Tpl<S 
 
 4 
 
 rerrapes, rerrapa 
 
 Terapro^ 
 
 
 T€TpdKL<; 
 
 5 
 
 irivre 
 
 7r€fJLTTT0<S 
 
 
 TreVTClKLS 
 
 6 
 
 ef 
 
 eKTO<; 
 
 
 c^a/ct9 
 
 7 
 
 CTrra 
 
 ifiSofjio<; 
 
 
 eTTToiKLq 
 
 8 
 
 OKT(x) 
 
 oyhoos 
 
 
 OKTaKLS 
 
 9 
 
 evvia 
 
 ivaToq 
 
 
 ivaKL^ 
 
 10 
 
 SeKa 
 
 Se/caro? 
 
 
 SeKClKLS 
 
 11 
 
 epSeKa 
 
 €j^8e/caro9 
 
 
 ivSeKciKit; 
 
 12 
 
 ScjSeKa 
 
 SwSeAcaro? 
 
 
 ScoSeKOLKL^ 
 
 13 
 
 Tpel<; Kol 8e/ca 
 
 rpiTo^ KOL Se/caros 
 
 
 or TpeicTKaiheKa 
 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 T€TTape<; kol 8e/ca 
 
 Terapro^ kol 
 
 Se/caro? 
 
 or TeTTapecTKaideKa 
 
 1 For complete lists see the grammars. Note the forms in the list that 
 have already occurred in the Lessons. Commit to memory the first twenty 
 of the cardinals and the first five of the ordinals and adverbs. Give the 
 meaning of the remaining forms in the Hst from their composition. 
 
180 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 15 
 
 irevTeKaiSeKa 
 
 Tre/xTTTo? 
 
 K:at Se/caro? 
 
 16 
 
 eKKaCheKa 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 17 
 
 kiTTaKaiheKa 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 OKTcoKaiSeKa 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 ivveaKaiheKa 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 eLKOcn{v) 
 
 eiKOO-TO^ 
 
 
 21 
 
 eh Koi eLKocTL 
 
 TTpCOTOS /cat €tfC0(7r09 
 
 
 or et/cocrt eh 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 TpiaKovTa 
 
 T/)td/coc7Tds 
 
 40 
 
 TerrapoLKovTa 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 50 
 
 TTeVTTjKOVTa 
 
 500 
 
 TrevTOLKoa-LOL, -at, -a 
 
 60 
 
 e^yJKovTa 
 
 600 
 
 efd/cdcrtot, -at, -a 
 
 70 
 
 e/SSofJLiJKovTa 
 
 700 
 
 eTTTOLKocnoL, -at, -a 
 
 80 
 
 oySoTJKovra 
 
 800 
 
 o/crd/cdcrtot, -at, -a 
 
 90 
 
 iveviJKOvTa 
 
 900 
 
 ivaKocFLOL, -at, -a 
 
 100 
 
 eKarov 
 
 1000 
 
 )(tXtot, -at, -a 
 
 200 
 
 Std/cdcrtot, -at, -a 
 
 2000 
 
 8tcr;)(tXtot, -at, -a 
 
 300 
 
 TpioLKoaioi -at, -a 
 
 3000 
 
 Tpia-XiXiOL, -at, -a 
 
 400 
 
 TeTpoLKoaLOL, -at, - 
 
 a 10000 
 
 fxvpLOL, -at, -a 
 
 «. Observe that the numbers from Be/ca to eUoai are com- 
 pounds ; that in compound expressions like 21, 22, etc., the 
 numbers may be connected by KaC in either order; but if Kal 
 is omitted, the larger, as in English, precedes. 
 
 b. Observe that : 1. Above ei/cocn the tens end in -Kovra 
 (Lat. -ginta), the hundreds in -/coaiot (Lat. -centi), and the 
 thousands in -)(fXiOL. 2. rpidicovra and reTTapd/covra have 
 d and a respectively before -KOVTa, but the others have r] ; 
 BtaKocnot^ -ai, -a and rpidicoaioi^ -ai^ -a have d before -koctlol 
 and the others d. 3. The thousands to fjLvpioL are formed by 
 prefixing the numeral adverbs to -'xiXioL. 
 
 c. Observe that the ordinals with the exception of tt/jooto? 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 181 
 
 are derived from the cardinals ; that all except Seurepo?, €/3So- 
 /xo?, and 07S009 liave the suffix -to^; (Eng. -t/i), and those from 
 twenty upward all end in -0(tt6^ (Lat. -eswius). 
 
 d. Observe that the numeral adverbs, except the first three, 
 have the suffix -a/ct?, denoting how many times. 
 
 446. The cardinals from TreVre to eKarov are inde- 
 clinable. The higher cardinal numbers in -lol and all 
 ordinals are adjectives of three terminations of the vowel 
 declension (70). 
 
 447. The first four cardinals are thus declined : 
 
 
 Misc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc 
 
 Fem. & Neu 
 
 N. 
 
 efs 
 
 fjLLa 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 ^ta? 
 
 « r 
 
 €1^09 
 
 N.A. 
 
 Svo 
 
 D. 
 
 
 fiLa 
 
 e / 
 
 G.D. 
 
 SvOLV 
 
 A. 
 
 dvoL 
 
 fxCav 
 
 €V 
 
 
 
 Masc. & Tem. Neut. 
 
 
 Masc. & Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 rpeU 
 
 Tpia 
 
 
 Terrape? 
 
 T€Trapa 
 
 G. 
 
 TpiOiV 
 
 TpiO)V 
 
 
 Terrdpcov 
 
 TeTToipcop 
 
 D. 
 
 TpLCFL 
 
 Tpiai 
 
 
 reTTapai 
 
 T€TTap(TL 
 
 A. 
 
 rpeU 
 
 TpLa 
 
 
 T€TTapa<; 
 
 T€TTapa 
 
 a. Observe that eh has endings of the third and first declen- 
 sions, hvo of the second, and rpel^ and T€TTape<; of the third. 
 
 b. The compounds ovhek {ovhe and eh), /jirjSeL^ (/jirjBe and 
 ets), are declined like eh; as, ouSetV, ovBeuia^ ovhev; ovhevo^^ 
 ovBe/jicd<;., ouSez/09, etc. 
 
 448. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ovSeU ravTa eXeyev. 2. rrj SerpLTT} rJKe. 3. rov- 
 Tov TO evpo^ icTTiv Svo^ irXiOpoiv. 4. kol e^eXavvei 
 Ota TT]^ AuSta? crra^/xov? rpel? Trapacrdyyas eiKOCTL /cat 
 
 ^ dvo is often used with a plural noun. 
 
182 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Svo. 5. ivravO ifieLvav r}[JL€pa<; rpet? Kai ekafx^avov 
 €/c TTj^ ^(opa^ ra eVtTT^Seta. 6. r^Kev iirl to opos rrj 
 TerdpTrj rjfjiepa. 7. kol inl tov Bevrepov X6(f)ov ravTa 
 iyiyvero, 8. virdp^ei yap vvv rjplv ^ ovhkv rwv eVt- 
 T7]S€Lcov. 9. TTj S' ovv aTpaTid Tore eTrefjLxjje Kvpo<; 
 ixiadov Terrdpoiv firjvwv. 10. Kvpos 8* ovp dvafiaivei 
 iirl TOL oprj, ovS€PO<; KoikvovTo^. 
 
 II. I. There the army remained seven days. 2. He 
 asks him for two thousand mercenaries. 3. Socrates, 
 the Achaean, came with five hundred hoplites. 4. But 
 in the first day's journey the enemy did not appear. 
 
 5. But on the fourth day they descend into a plain. 
 
 6. But of the army of the king there were four com- 
 manders. 7. Thence he marches three stages twelve 
 parasangs. But in the third stage Cyrus holds a review 
 of the Greeks and barbarians. 
 
 449. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Seurepos, -a, -ov, second; Terra/De?, -a,/o^r [tetr-arch, 
 
 hevrepov or to hevTepov, tetra-gon], 
 
 as adv. or adv. ace, a T€TapT0<;, -rj, -ov^ fourth. 
 
 second time [deutero- rpet?, rpta, three [three, 
 
 nomy]. tri-pod]. 
 
 Stcr-^tXtot, -at, -a, two thou- TpiTo^, -77, -ov^ third, 
 
 sand. virdpyoi^ begin^ he undery 
 €L<;, fjiia, ev, one ; Ijat. un us. deonhandySu^port.w.dsit. 
 
 ovBeiSy -fjiia, -€P, no one, not iTpwTo^, -rj, -ov, first ; Trpw- 
 
 ang, none, nothing ; ovSevy tov or to 7rpa>Tov, as adv. 
 
 as adv. ace, ?iot at all. or adv. diQC., first, at first, 
 
 1 See 146. 
 
REVIEW. 183 
 
 450. Translate at sight : 
 
 A Halt and Numbering at Celaenae. 
 
 ^^vrevOev i^ekavvet crra^/xou? rpet? Trapacrdyya^ 
 eiKocriv €19 KeXatm?, ttJ? ^puyta? ttoXiv oiKovixivrfv, 
 jjLeydXrjv /cat evhat^ova. ivravOa ifxeive Kvpo^ rjfjLepa^ 
 TpiOLKOvra ' Kol '^K€ K\€ap)(0^ 6 AaKeSaifjiopLOS (j)vyd<^, 
 ^oiv OTrXtra? ^tXtov? /cac TreXracTTag ©pa/ca? 6/cra/co- 
 CTLOvs KOI T0^6ra<i KprJTa<; Stafcocrtous. a/xa 8e /cai 
 Swcrt? TTaprjv 6 Svpd/cocrto? e^wz^ OTrXtra? rpLaKoaCov^;, 
 KOI Soc^ati^ero? 6 'Ap/cas ej^wi^ OTrXtra? ^tXiou?. /cat 
 ivTavOa K.vpo<; i^eracnv /cat dpiOpLOv tcov 'FXXtjj/cop 
 iiroLrjcrev iv roJ TrapaSetcrw, /cat ^crav ol crv/xTrai^e? 
 [/>^^ ?^/^o/^ number] oTrXtrat /xei' fivpLOL /cat ^tXtot, ttcX- 
 raorat Se a/i,<^t roi)? Stcr^tXtov?. 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 Review Lessons XXVIL-XL. in order, with their 
 vocabularies, and note the allied words in the same. 
 
 451. €t/it, enclitics, contract nouns and adjectives of 
 the consonant declension. 
 
 L Conjugate etjott in the present and imperfect. 
 
 2. Li the inflection of these tenses, how do the verbs 
 in -\Li diff'er from verbs in -w? 
 
 3. What forms of the present of et/>tt are enclitics ? 
 
 4. What forms of the pronouns are enclitics ? 
 
184 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 5. What other enclitics have occurred in the preced' 
 ing lessons ? 
 
 6. Decline 8wa/xt9, raft?, Icrx^^, and iTTTreug. 
 
 7. What peculiarities of contraction of most stems 
 in t of the third declension ? 
 
 8. What peculiarity in the inflection of stems ending 
 in a diphthong of the third declension ? 
 
 9. Decline ^ovs and vav<;, and explain the form of 
 their accusative plural. 
 
 10. Decline r)Sv^, ra;^v9, fJieya^, and ttoXv?. 
 
 11. Explain the formation of the nominative masc. 
 and neut. sing, of stems in ecr-. 
 
 12. Give peculiarities of contraction of stems in eo- 
 and acr-. 
 
 13. Decline Kepa^, Kpea^, ^coKpdrrjf;, evpo^, 6po<;. 
 
 14. Decline TrXtjpr)^, KaTa(f)avT]<^, and compare their 
 inflection with stems of nouns in e?-. 
 
 15. Define syncopated nouns, and give their pecu- 
 liarities of accent. 
 
 16. Decline Traryjp, dvijp, yvvj], and Xayco^. 
 
 17. Give a summary of the rules for gender of nouns 
 of the third declension. 
 
 452. Tenses of Completed Action, the Passive Voice, 
 Imperative Mood, .etc. 
 
 1. Define reduplication, and give the different forms 
 that it can take. 
 
 2. How are the perfect active, perfect middle, and 
 future perfect tenses formed? What do these tenses 
 denote ? 
 
REVIEW. 185 
 
 3. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative 
 active and middle of fiovXevo), Ova), and ttol€(o. 
 
 4. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative 
 active and middle of apirdt^cti and KeXevco. 
 
 5. Decline XeXvKcos, and state how its stem differs 
 from the other active participles. 
 
 6. In what tenses does the passive differ from the 
 middle ? 
 
 7. How is the stem of the aorist passive formed ? 
 What personal endings docs the aorist passive use ? 
 What further peculiarities in its inflection ? 
 
 8. Conjugate the future perfect, future, and aorist 
 passive of Xucu, Travco, and KeXevcj. 
 
 9. Explain the consonantal changes of the themes in 
 irvOrjv, ridvKa, 'qpirdcrdrjp, rjX^W- 
 
 10. Give suQimary of rules for euphony of consonants. 
 
 11. Decline XvOei^, and give the rule for accenting 
 its nom. sing. masc. 
 
 12. Give the personal endings of the imperative 
 mood active and middle. 
 
 13. Conjugate the present and aorist imperative ac- 
 tive, middle, and passive of Xvco, ^ovXevo), Ovco, Trotew, 
 and Sr}X6(o. 
 
 14. What does the imperative mood express ? 
 
 15. Distinguish between the use of the present and 
 aorist in the imperative. 
 
 16. Disthiguish between the use of fjnj and ov. 
 
 17. Define a tense system, and give the tense suffix 
 of each of the first six tense systems. 
 
186 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 18. What are the principal parts of a Greek verb? 
 
 19. What are the principal parts of a deponent verb ? 
 
 20. Give the principal parts of ^ovXevco, Trotew, dp- 
 TTct^o), ayo), ap^cD, pLa^oyuai, ^ovXofxai, ^pdofxai. 
 
 21. How does the future tense system differ from 
 the present ? 
 
 22. How does the aorist tense system differ from the 
 future ? 
 
 453 • Compariso?i of Adjectives. 
 
 1. How are adjectives regularly compared? 
 
 2. What adjectives form their comparison with the 
 endings -twi' and -l(tto<; ? 
 
 3. Compare TroXe/xto?, ttictto?, t^Su?, fcafco?, fcaXo9, 
 dyaOo^, TToXv?. 
 
 4. Decline fxei^cov, rjSLOJV, d/jLeuvcop, KpeiTTOiv. 
 
 5. How are all adjectives in -09 regularly declined ? 
 454. PronounSy Personal, Reflexive, Interrogative, etc, 
 
 1. Decline eyw, (tv, o, 09, auro?. 
 
 2. When is the nominative of the personal pronouns 
 used? 
 
 3. What supplies the place of the pronoun of the 
 third person in the oblique cases ? What supplies its 
 place in the nominative case ? 
 
 4. Name the reflexive pronouns and explain their 
 composition. Decline ifiavrov and iavTov. 
 
 5. Distinguish between direct and indirect reflexives. 
 
 6. Give the most common possessive pronouns. 
 
 7. Decline rt?; ocrris and explain its accentuation. 
 
 8. How may the interrogative and indefinite pro- 
 nouns be used ? 
 
REVIEW. 187 
 
 455. Numerals, 
 
 1. Write the first ten cardinals, and the first five 
 ordinals. 
 
 2. How are the numbers from SeVa to et/cocrc formed? 
 How can 21, 22, etc., be written ? 
 
 3. Write the endings of the tens above et/cocrt, the 
 endings of the hmidreds and the thousands. 
 
 4. Decline et? and rpets. What other numbers are 
 declinable ? 
 
 456. Sijntax, 
 
 1. Distinguish between the use of the dative of re- 
 spect and accusative of specification. 
 
 2. Define the adverbial accusative. 
 
 3. Distinguish between the use of the attributive 
 genitive and the appositive. 
 
 4. Define the subjective and objective genitives, and 
 give examples of each in Greek. 
 
 5. Define the genitive of material, of measure, and 
 the partitive genitive, and give examples of each in 
 Greek. 
 
 6. How can the attributive genitives be translated ? 
 
 7. What position does the attributive genitive regu- 
 larly take ? Give exceptions to the general rule. 
 
 8. What verbs may take the predicate genitive ? What 
 are the most common forms of the predicate genitive ? 
 
 9. Give the construction with words implying 
 fullness, 
 
 10. Give the construction with words implying com* 
 parison, superiority, etc. 
 
 11. Define the dative of degree of difference. 
 
188 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 12. Give the construction with verbs affecting the 
 object only in part, 
 
 13. Give the rule for the construction with verbs sig- 
 nifying to touchy etc. 
 
 14. Give the rule for the construction with verbs of 
 sense perception y etc. 
 
 15. What construction do verbs of commanding i^i^^^'^ 
 
 16. Distinguish between the use of the genitive of 
 time and the dative of time. 
 
 17. Give a summary of the genitives that have ap- 
 peared in the preceding lessons. 
 
 18. Give the construction of the relative pronoun. 
 Give the rule for its assimilation ? 
 
 457. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. 1. ot "EXXt^i^c? cLKQvovdi ttj^ t(x)v f^ap^dpoiv Kpav- 
 y»j9. 2. (TV T€ yap EWr]v el /cat r)fji€L<; rocrourot 6vt€^ 
 ocrov? (TV opa^. 3. tcjp Se TroXefjiicjv tTTTrel? etcrt ol ttXci- 
 aroL Kfxi TrXeicrrov a^ioi. 4. Sta fxecrov 8e Trj<; TrdXew? 
 p€i TTorajLto? KvSvo^ opofjua, evpo^ Svo TrkeOpcjp. 5. iv- 
 revOev i^eXavvei araOfxov eva Trapacrdyya^ irivre iirl tol 
 Supta? Tei^y). 6. dva^aivei ovv 6 Kvpo<;, KokovPTO^ 
 Tov irarpo'^ avTov. 7. eSofe ravra kol dpSpa^ crvv 
 KXeap^ft) TrefXTTOvcn ot 'QpcoTCJv Kvpov rd So^avra rrj 
 (TTpaTua. 8. ot dewj/ rjfxds opKoi kojXvov(Tl TToXefiCov^ 
 elvai dXX7]XoL<;. 9. TTeipdcrovrai kol vfjuv /cat rjfiLP rd 
 ^iXri(TTa aviJL/3ovXev(TaL. 10. ot 8e '^EXXi7^'€9 aurot 
 icj) eavTOJP iiropevovTo T^ye/xdz^a? ej^o^re?. 11. dye, co 
 KXeap^e, to arpdrevfia Kara fxecrov to tojv TroXepiiOjp. 
 12. TjyefjLova aiTTJaovcn ol o^rpartwrat Kvpop ocrrt? 8ta 
 
"REVIEW. 189 
 
 (^tXia? TTJ^ ^(opas dnd^ei. 13. 'Aptato? Irvyyav^v tov 
 Ittttlkov dp^(x)v ' 0UT09 8e ecfyexryev e^oiv /cat to arpd- 
 Tevfia TTOLP ov TjyeLTo. 
 
 11. 1. But those of the horsemen who pursued 
 quickly stopped. 2. Cyrus had plotted against his 
 brother. 3. The war against Cyrus has been made 
 by Orontas. 4. He sent to the men thirty days' pay. 
 
 5. Say, therefore, to me what you have in mind. 
 
 6. There are many Persians better than this man. 
 
 7. And these wagons of flour and wine those^ with the 
 king at that time plundered. 
 
 458. Translate into Greek : ^ 
 
 Darius and Parysatis had two sons : the elder, Arta- 
 xerxes ; the younger, Cyrus. But when Darius was ill 
 and apprehended the termination of his life, he desired 
 that both of his sons should be present. Now Arta- 
 xerxes happened to be by him ; but he summoned Cyrus 
 from the province of which he had made him satrap. 
 Cyrus accordingly went up with three hundred hoplites 
 of the Greeks. But when Darius had died and Arta- 
 xerxes had become king, Tissaphernes falsely accused 
 Cyrus to his brother, charging that he was plotting 
 against him. And he was convinced, and had Cyrus 
 arrested ; but his mother interceded for him, and sent 
 him back again to his province. 
 
 1 See 79, a, h. 
 
 '^ The pupil should translate this selection from the dictation of the 
 teaclier, and then compare his own translation with the Greek of 43^3. In 
 like manner frequent recompositions of the Anabasis sliould be given. 
 
190 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.. 
 
 LESSON XLIL 
 
 FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Review 374, 375, 1, 2, 3, 4; 376, 377, 378, 1, 2 ; 
 379, 1, 2, 3, 4; 380, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 385, 445, d. 
 
 459. Adverbs, as in Latin, are frequently derived 
 from adjectives. Examine the following : 
 
 Adjectives. Stems. 
 
 1 . /caK09 /ca/co- 
 
 2. St/caios Si/cato- 
 
 3. fcaXd? KoXor 
 
 4. T^Su? TySv- 
 
 5. a(j^akr\<^ dcrcjyaXecr- 
 
 Observe that adverbs in the positive are formed from adjec- 
 tives by adding -cd? to the stem, which take the same form as 
 before -cov m the gen. plur. neut. ; that the adverb is contracted 
 when the adjective is contracted, 5, and has the accent of the 
 gen. plur.^ 
 
 460. Examine the following : 
 
 /xeya, fieyaka, ^reatfy* 
 
 TTpcoTov, first, 
 
 TTokv^ much^ far, a great way* 
 
 JEN. PlUU. 
 
 Adveubs. 
 
 KaKWP 
 
 KaK(o<s 
 
 SiKaicop 
 
 St/catws 
 
 KokcOV 
 
 KaXa><; 
 
 YjSecop 
 
 TjSea)^ 
 
 dcr<f)a\a)p 
 
 dcrc^aXw? 
 
 TaxVt quickly^ soo7i, 
 varepov, later, afterwards* 
 Bfsurcpovyfor the second time* 
 
 ^ Note that the form of the adverb, including Its accent, may be found 
 by changing the v of the gen, plur. to y. 
 
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 191 
 
 a. The neuter accusative of the adjective, both singular and 
 plural, ma^ be used as an adverb. 
 
 461. Examine the following : 
 
 avTov, here, there, gen. of avro?. 
 TrdvTrj, on all sides, dat. of Tra?. 
 T€ko<;, at last, ace, of reXo^;. 
 OLKOL,^ at home, loc. of ol/co?. 
 
 a. The oblique cases both of adjectives and nouns are used 
 as adverbs. 
 
 462. Allied to case endings are certain endings mark- 
 ing relations of place : -dev, whence ; -di, where ; and 
 -8c, whither. The endings -Oev and -0l are affixed to 
 the stem, but consonant stems assume an -o- ; the end- 
 ing -Se (enclitic) is affixed to the accusative : oiKo-Oev, 
 from one's home ; avro-di, in this or that place ; ot/ca-Se 
 (irreg.), homeward. 
 
 463. Other forms of adverbs are common, with va- 
 rious terminations denoting relations of place, time, or 
 manner: ai/w, up; iyyv^, near; /xctXa, very; hOa, 
 where, there ; eS, loelL 
 
 464. Examine the following : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative, 
 
 Adj. dcr(f)aXT]^ da'(j)aX€crT€po<; d(T(l)a\ia'TaTo^ 
 
 Adv. dcr<^aXa)9 d(T(^ake(Trepov dcrcfyaXecTTaTa 
 
 Adj. /caXd? KaWtcov AcaXXtcrro? 
 
 Adv. Kokcos KoXklov /caXXtcrra 
 
 ^ Final -01 in oIkoi is regarded long in determiuing the accent (XL, n.). 
 
192 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 a. Adverbs derived from adjectives use tlie neut. ace. sing, 
 of the adjective for the comparative, and neut. ace. plur. for the 
 superlative. 
 
 465. Examine the following : 
 
 1. 17 8e rvyy] icrrpaTijyyjcre KaWiov, hat fortune led 
 them more honorably. 
 
 2. riaav iroXif irpoOvfJiOTepoL, they were much more 
 zealous. 
 
 3. iTokv yap T(ov iinrcov irpe^ov BarTov^for they ran 
 much faster than the horses. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 466. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other 
 adverbs. 
 
 467. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Form adverbs in the positive degree from 
 fxeyas, /3ap/3apt/co9, 7rp66vfJL0<;, and ra^v?. 2. Compare 
 T^Selw?, ra^eoj?, ttoXv, KaKco^;, and Si/cato)?. 
 
 II. 1. avTov TL dyaSov iiroiei. 2. St/catw? Tavra 
 TTOtet. 3. TTopeucrd/xe^a oiKaSe. 4. kol ovtcj Sarrov 
 iravcrovrai. 5. KpaTLcrra ifJid^ovTo. 6. /caXw? €^€1} 
 7. TOL Trap' ifjLol^ alpov avrl tcov olkol. 8. TIp6^evo<; 
 'B€vo(j)a)VTa fxeTeiTeiJixfjaTO oiKoOev. 9. ov ^ov\6fxe6a 
 TTjv j8acriX€&J9 x^P^^ Aca/cws iroielv. 10. TavTrjs rrjq 
 
 1 €xa> with an adverb is equivalent to flvai with an adjective. 
 
 ^ In general, any qualifying word or phrase standing with the article 
 has the force of an attributive. Here a noun denoting men or things is 
 often omitted (79, a, b). 
 
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 193 
 
 rjixepa^ tovto to t€Xo<; rjv. 11. Kai iroki^ avToOi cpKeuTO 
 fjieydXr] kol evSaifxcoif @ai/ia/co? ovofjia. 12. a/couoi^re? 
 TTjv Kvpov dperrjv tJSlov kol TrpoOvixoTepov (TweiTopev- 
 ovTO. 13. dvhpe^ crrpariwrat, pur) Oavpidt^eTe ort 
 ^aXcTTW? <f)dpo} Tol^ irapovcTL Trpdypaaiv} 14. ov 
 KLvSvvevcravT€<; roiv dXXcov irXiov TLprjOijcreo-Oe crrpa- 
 TL(t)T(x)v VTTO Kvpov. 15. Tt ^ ovi', cXcyc 6 KujOO?, dSt- 
 KrjOel<; vrr ipov vvv to TpiTov eVt/^ovXevet? p^oi. 16. ez^ 
 Tw TTpocrOev ^p6v(o rjpd<; aurou? ei> CTToiet. 
 
 Examine tlie accusatives in 1, and note the signification of 
 the verb upon which they depend, and observe that one of the 
 accusatives denotes the person and the other the thing ; note 
 in 9 and 16 that KaKco^ and e^ take the place of the accusative 
 of the thing. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 468. Verbs signifying to do anytldng to, or say any- 
 thing of, a person or thing take two accusatives. 
 
 a. ev or KaXo)^, well, or Ka/c(Jt)<;, ill, frequently takes the 
 place of the accusative of the thing. 
 
 6. The accusative of the thing is of the nature of a cognate 
 accusative ("261). 
 
 469. 1. Let it he otherwise. 2. At last they all 
 also rode awav. 3. And it seemed best to make qnicklv 
 the treaty. 4. They were proceeding more safely. 
 5. He desires to do harm to the country, 6. And they 
 gladly obeyed, for they trusted him. 7. But a moun- 
 tain surrounds it [avro] on all sides from sea to sea. 
 
 ^ Explain the case. 
 ^ Cognate accusative (261, a). 
 13 
 
194 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 470. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aX.Xa>9, adv., otherwise, oiKoOev, ^^"^.^ from home, 
 
 a(j^oXoi%y?^di\\, firmly .safely , olkol, adv., at home, 
 avTov, adv., in the same iroivTrj, adv., i?i every ivay, 
 
 place, here, there. 
 8t/cata>9, ^diW., justly. 
 eS, adv., well, happily. 
 rjhecof;, adv., gladly. 
 KaKa><;, adv., ill, badly. 
 KaXcoSy adv., fairly, well, 
 KpaLTicTTay adv., in the best jj^aXeTrw?, adv., 2vith diffi- 
 
 manner, most bravely, culty, painfally, 
 
 vvv, adv., now [now] . KLvBvvevo), be in danger, in- 
 
 OLKaSey adv., to one's home, cur dariger. 
 
 homeward, avfi-TropevofiaL, accompany. 
 
 on all 
 
 Tayiio%, adv., Oolttov, rd- 
 Xt'OTTa, quickly, soon. 
 
 TeXo9, -0U9, TO, end ; adv. 
 ace, at last J finally [talis- 
 man]. 
 
 LESSON XLIII. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Review 10, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 40, 41, 48, 49, 
 58, 61, 73, 111, 116, 133, 143, 194, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 195, 
 208, 223, 229, a; 257, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 373, 
 375, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 379, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 380, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 402, 
 403, obs.; 417, 437 ; Lessons XL., XLII. 
 
 471. The Greek is developed from a small number 
 of primary elements. These, divested of everything 
 that is formative or accidental, are called roots. The 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 195 
 
 root is properly of one syllable, with a short vowel, and 
 expresses the general meaning of a word. This may be 
 modified in various ways, and from the same root several 
 different words may be formed. Thus, apx^' begin, 
 dpxy], rule, dpxo^, leader, are all from the root and also 
 theme (apx")* '^^^^ themes of verbs or stems of nouns 
 thus formed may in turn be modified : as dp^aio^, 
 ancient, from (apx^) ^^^ ^^^v^ of apxi- 
 
 472. Simple and Compound Words. 
 
 A word is either simple or compound. A simple word 
 is formed from a single stem (133) ; as dKpo-<;, Idghest, 
 7rdXt-9, city. A compound word is formed by combin- 
 ing two or more stems ; as a/cpd-TroXt?, citadeL 
 
 473. Primitives and Denominatives. 
 
 A word formed directly from a root or theme of a 
 verb is called a primitive ; as dpx^, beginning, (apx-)- 
 A word formed directly from a stem of a noun or ad- 
 jective is called denominative ; as dp)(cuo<;, of the begin- 
 ning, ancient^ from (dpya) stem of dpxV' 
 
 474. Prefaces and Suffixes, 
 
 The formative elements by which the root is qualified 
 and new words formed are called affixes. An affix 
 placed before the principal root is called a prefix ; 
 placed after a principal root, a suffix. 
 
 475. Only the most important suffixes are here given. 
 These should be thoroughly committed to memory, and 
 regularly applied in acquiring the meaning of words. 
 Special exercises will be given in the following lessons 
 for the formation and grouping of words. 
 
196 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Frhnitive Nouns, 
 
 476. Examine the following : 
 
 1 . (^vXarrw/ guard, [(^vXa/c-] ; (j)v\a^,^ a guard, 
 . 2. KrjpvTTOt), proclaim, [/cT^pv/c-] ; Krjpv^, a herald. 
 
 Observe that the noun stems in some words have no suffix ; 
 the root serves as the stem of the noun. 
 
 477. Examine the following : 
 
 1. ixau)(o ^xai, Jig ht, fia^', {jxa-^-d') fJioixV^ battle. 
 
 2. Tpiiro), turn, Tpeir-, {rpoTT-d-) TpoTTtj, turning, 
 
 8. " " (rpoTT-o-) TpoTTo^^ tum, manner. 
 
 4. (TTeWot), send, crreX-, (cttoX-o-) (tt6Xo<;, expedition. 
 
 Observe that the suffix annexed to the roots in 1,2 is length- 
 ened to 7] in the nom. sing. (40) ; that the suffix in 3, 4 is 0, 
 and 9 is added to form the nom. sing. (58) ; that when the suf- 
 fix is added in 3, 4, e of the root is changed to ; that the 
 suffixes -a and -0 regularly denote the ahstract idea of the 
 verb.^ 
 
 478. Examine the following : 
 
 1. TTOteiw, make, iroie-, {TTOirj-rd-) 77011777^9, maker, poet. 
 
 2. KeXevo), comjnand, KeXev-, (/ceXev-crrd-) KekevdTrj^, 
 
 commander. 
 
 3. croitfiy, (Tcoco, save, (roi-, {crco-Tr) p-) awTTJp, savior. 
 
 4. rjyeojjiaL, lead, rjye-, [rjye-fjLOP-) TiyefKov, guide, 
 
 a. Observe that sometimes when the ending is added, the final 
 vowel of the root is lengthened, 1, (198); that a consonant is some- 
 
 1 See 378, 2. " 2 gee 208, a. 
 
 ^ In general, the meanings of tlie suflSxes hold good ; but their distinc- 
 tion as forming primitives and denominatives is not always applicable, and 
 their meanings in the figurative use of words liave a wide range : as, ardXos 
 may mean what is sent on an expedition, army^ 7iavij, force, etc. 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 197 
 
 times added, as in forming the perfect middle and aorist passive, 
 2, (325). The consonants most commonly added are v, p, a. 
 b. Observe that the suffixes -ra^ -Tr)p, and -fiov denote the 
 
 479. Examine, the following : 
 
 1 . Kptvco, decide, Kpiv-, {Kpiv-ai-) ^ptcrt?, decision, trial. 
 
 2. Trpdrrwj do, it pay-, {Trpdy-on-) irpa^i^, undertaking, 
 
 3. 7r€L0co, persuade, ind', {ttlO-tl-) ttlo-ti^;, belief, faith, 
 
 4. 8ea>, bind, he-, (8e-o--/x,o-) Secr/Ao?, binding, band, 
 
 5. Tta>, honor, tl-, (rl-/xd-) rlfjiTJ, worth, honor. 
 
 Observe that the final consonant of the root is subject to the 
 regular euphonic changes before a consonant of the ending, 1, 2, 
 8; that the suffixes -crt, -tl, -fio, and -(id denote action; but 
 sometimes, as -^d, 5, thej may express the abstract idea of the 
 verb. 
 
 480. Examine the following : 
 
 1. -^pdofiaL, use, xP^'j ixPV'H'^'^') XPVP'^^ thing of use, 
 
 2. TTpaTTO), do, irpdy-, {iTpdy-fxaT-) Trpdyjia, deed. 
 
 Observe that the suffix -fjiar denotes the residt of an action. 
 
 Denominative Nouns. 
 
 481. Examine the following : 
 
 1. 1777709, horse, [77770-, (i7777-€v-) LTTTrev^;, horseman, 
 
 2. To^ov, bow, To^o-, {ro^o-rd-) To^6Trj<;, bowman, 
 
 3. (TTpaTid, army, crrparia-, {(TTpaTLcorrd-) arpaTLco- 
 
 T7]^, soldier. 
 
 ^ The pupil should explain the formation of the nom. sing, of each 
 noun in the lesson. 
 
198 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Observe that : 1. The final vowel of the stem is sometimes 
 dropped before a suffix beginning with a vowel, 1. 2. The final 
 vowel of the stem may be changed, usually o to €, and a to o or 
 CO, 3. 3. The suffixes -ev and -rd denote the person with refer- 
 ence to his/unction. 
 
 482. 'Examine the following : 
 
 1. crot^og, wise, ao(j)0-, {cro^o-id-) aocj^id, icisdom. 
 
 2. euj'ov?, loell disposed, evi/ov- (evvoo-), (evvo-id-) ev- 
 
 voia, good icill (p. 63^). 
 
 3. TTtcrro?, faitliful^ ttlctto-, {TTLO-To-rrjT-) 7ricrTorT79j 
 
 fidelity. 
 
 Observe that the suffixes -id and -Tr]T affixed to adjective 
 stems denote the abstract idea of the adjective or quality. 
 
 Primitive Adjectives, 
 
 483. Examine the following : 
 Roots. 
 
 1. aacj)', cro<j)' (cro<^-o- and -d-) (TO(l>6<;,'ij,'6v,wise. 
 
 2. KaK- (KaK-o- and -d-) KaKo?, -77, -6v, dad. 
 
 Observe that primitive adjectives, like nouns, are formed 
 from roots or themes by the suffixes -0 and -d. 
 
 484. Examine the following : 
 
 1. TySo/xai, be pleased, rjh- (rjS-v-), tjSvs, -eta, -v, stveet. 
 
 2. Tct;)^©?, swiftness, Ta^-{rax-v-)^ Ta)(y^, -eta, -v, swift. 
 
 3. {jjevSofiai, lie, \pevB- (xjjevS-ea-), xpevBij^, -€£, false. 
 
 a. Observe that adjectives of the first and third declensions 
 are formed from roots by the suffix -v, and those of the third 
 from roots or themes by the suffix -€?. 
 
 h. Observe that adjectives derived from verb roots or themes 
 express relations to the actions or states denoted by the verbs, 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 199 
 
 and those derived from roots common to nouns express relations 
 to the persons or things denoted by the nouns. 
 
 Denominative Adjectives, 
 
 485. Examine the following : 
 
 1. ^acriXeu?, king, ^aacXev- (^acrtXe-to-), ySacrtXetos, 
 
 kingly. 
 
 2. Pao-iXevq, king, ^acnXev- (ySacrtX-t/co-)/ ^acriXifcd?, 
 
 kingly. 
 
 3. TTokefJios, war, irokeixo- (ttoXc/a-io-), irokefiLo^, hos- 
 
 tile, 
 
 4. 7rdX€/i09, tvar, TroXejio- (TrpXe/A-t/co-), TroXefiLKOS, 
 
 warlike. 
 
 5. 0Lp)(7], rule, o,px^' (^PX"^'^^")' o-p^tfcds,^^ to rule. 
 
 Observe that the suffixes -lo and -iko express that which per- 
 tains or belongs to the noun, but -t/co sometimes denotes fitness 
 or ahility ; that adjectives in -t/co? are regularly oxytone. 
 
 486. Examine the following ; 
 
 1. yjivdo^, gold, yjpvdo- {xpv(T-€o-), XP^^^^^ iXP'^ 
 
 croG?), golden, 
 
 2. \l6o^, stone, KlOo- (Kido-Lvo-), XlOlpo^, made of stone. 
 
 Observe that the suffixes -eo and -ivo denote the material, 
 
 487. The suffix -evT- exi:ivesses fullness : 
 
 X^p^^i grace, X^P^~ {X'^P^'^^'^')y X^P^^^^? -eacra, -ev, 
 graceful ; ^apiez^ros, etc. 
 
 488. The suffix -repo' distinguishes one of two oh' 
 jects, and -raro- one oi several : 
 
 TTICTTO^? faithful, TTLCTTOTepOf;, TTLCTTOTaTO'? (376). 
 
 ^ A diphthong is often dropi)ed before a vowel in the ending. 
 2 Primitive ending (373). 
 
200 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 489. Decline : 1. (j)vka^, ap^oiv, apxV^ X6yo<;, rjye- 
 ficov, Trpaft?, Trpayfia, 770X17179, tTTTreu?. 2. (T0(j)6<;, 
 T^Sv?, xlfevSTJ<^, Xvcov, Xvcra?, Xvd/xei/09, rjSicov, ^pvcroG? ; 
 ^apUi^, ^apCeao-a,^ ^apUv, 
 
 490. EXERCISES. 
 
 Give the meaning of the following words at sigJd, 
 and show their formation : 1. rptro?, Seurepo?, Xoitto?, 
 irpcoTO^, 7jfxeTepo<;, vfx€Tepo<;. 2. dpxy], dpxalo^;, dpxL- 
 Ko?, dpxco, dpxiov, dpx6fJLevo<;. 3. (^uXarrw ((/)uXaAC-), 
 ^uXaf, (l)v\aKT]. 4. (tttopSt], Tipurj, H'dxr), t/)o</)77, Xo- 
 yos. 5. rd^L<;, otcoftg, 770X1x779, onXirrj^;, KO)fXTJTr]<^. 
 6. TO^evfxa, <^tXio9, ot^ta, rt/xto9, MiX77(rto9. 7. a/)- 
 yvpovs, LTTTTLKOS, vavTLKos, y8a/)ySa/)t/co9, Pap/3apiK(oq. 
 
 491. Translate the following «^ 6'2y//^, ascertaining the 
 meaning of the new words by their derivation : 
 
 1. ixjjevaOr) tovto, 2. 7ricrT€t9 Xafx^dvei. 3. e/x- 
 ^aivovcTi Ta;^eft)9 €t9 ttXolov. 4. rjKovae Ticra-a^epvov^ 
 Tov Kvpov <tt6\ov. 5. 971^ Icrxy^ avrwv eKarepcodev 
 [e/caTepo9, ^^/c^^ of two]. 6. et9 ^vyr^v erpexjje T0U9 
 €faActcr^tXiov9. 7. fcat T0t9 17777019 cLpiara e^yawj^ro. 
 
 8. -^z^ 8e ei' Tfo) Se^tft) to ^^WiqviKov TrekracrTiKov, 
 
 9. i^TJyyeuXe Toi<; (J)l\ol<5 ttjv KpLaiv rov OpovTa. 
 
 10. ixeil^cov 8e 17 7Tpd^L<; t'^9 irpocrdev (j^aCveraL. 
 
 11. iTerCfjLrjTO yap vno Kvpov Bl evvoidv re koI 
 TncTTOTrjTa. 12. 17 /3acrtXew9 «'/>X''7 t^^V^^^ /^^^ x^P^^ 
 Kal dv9p(jm(x)v icrxypd tjv, tols 8e fjaJKeau t(x)v ohwv /cat 
 rw 8i€or77ao-^at Ta9 hwdp^ei^ dcrOevTJs* 
 
 ^ -forcra is for -er-ta, a shorter stem giving -o-cr-; i after r and ^ some- 
 times forms (7o-(378. 2). The dat. plur. masc. and neut. is xaptfo-t- See 824. 
 
DENOMINATIVE VERBS. COMPOUND WORDS. 201 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 DENOMINATIVE VERBS.— COMPOUND 
 WORDS. 
 
 492. A verb whose theme is derived from the stem of 
 a noun or adjective is called a denominative. 
 
 493. Examine the following -. 
 
 1. Ti/AT^j TLfid-, Tljjida) honor. 
 
 2. oT/co?, oIko-, oIk€(o, dwell, 
 
 3. 877X05, §17X0-5 817X00), make clear, 
 
 4. ySacrtXev?, ^aaiXev-, ^acrikevo), be king. 
 
 5. ^ovkij, apian, ^ovkd-, /SovXevco, plan. 
 
 6. KivSvvo<;, klpSvpo- KLpSvvevo), run a risk. 
 
 a. Observe that the verbs are given as they appear in the 
 present indicative active ; that of the stem is sometimes changed 
 to e, 2, 
 
 b. Verbs in ev first arose from nouns in -ef?^ 4. Afterwards 
 by analogy others were formed, h, 6. 
 
 494. Compound Words. — First Part, 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. arpaTO'TreBov (crTparos, crrparo-, irihov, (/round), 
 
 camp ground. 
 
 2. KO)fjL-dp^y]^ (Kcofjir), Kcofjid-, ap-^co), village chief. 
 
 3. Xo^^-ctyd? (Xd;^^^? ^^X^"' compang, dyo^, leader 
 
 [ay&>]), captain. 
 
 4. o'K€vo-(j>6po^ ((TKevos [cT/cevc?] , baggage^ ^ipoi^ 
 
 carrg), baggage carrier. 
 
20.2 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Observe that when a noun or adjective stands as the first 
 part of a word only its stem is used ; that the stem vowel is 
 regularly dropped before a vowel ; that stems in <r- may be 
 changed to o- stems, 4. 
 
 495. An adverb may be the first part of a compound 
 word : ev-vov^, well disposed. 
 
 496. A preposition may be the first part of a com- 
 pound word: eTTi-^ov\ri^ plof. 
 
 497. Compound verbs are formed dii'ectly only by 
 prefixing a preposition to a verb : dva-fiaivo), I go up. 
 In other cases, compound verbs are denominatives formed 
 from compound nouns and adjectives : crTpaTTjyeco 
 {(TTpaTrjyo^;), he general, 
 
 498. Inseparable Particles as Prefixes. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. aStfco? {a-\hLK'Y)\, justice), unjust [a-theist]. 
 
 2. dTTopo<; (d- [770^09], tvag), impassable. 
 8. di^o8o9 (di/-[68o?], icay\ impassable. 
 
 4. Suo-TTo/oo? (8u?- [770/309], ^(my, ford), hard to' pass 
 
 [dys-pepsia]. 
 
 5. €v7ropo<5 (eu-TTopog), easy to pass [eu-pbony]. 
 
 6. rjfXL8eyj<; (T7/xt-[8ew], wanting), 2va?iting a half 
 
 [hemi-sphere]. 
 
 7. a-TTci?, all together. 
 
 Observe that: 1. The prefix av- {a- before a consonant), 
 called alpha privative, has a negative force, like Eng. un-, Lat. 
 in-. 2. The prefix hva- denotes ill, difficult, and is opposed 
 to the prefix ev-, well. 3. The prefix rjfjbi- denotes half, Eng. 
 hemi-. 4. a- (older form a-, akin to a/ia) in avra? is copula- 
 tive, denoting union. 
 
DENOMINATIVE VERBS. — COMPOUND WORDS. 203 
 
 499. Compound Words. — Last Fart, 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. (rTpaT7]y6<; {aTpaT6<;, (irparo-, ayoi)^ generaL 
 
 2. (fnXodrjpo^ ((^(,Xd-9, 67]pd),/ond 0/ t/ie chase. 
 
 Observe that the initial vowel of the last part of a com- 
 pound noun or adjective may be lengthened ; that when a noun 
 stands as the last part of a compound word its final syllable may 
 be changed, 2. 
 
 500. Compound adjectives in -179, -e? are very fre- 
 quent, and are regularly oxytone : y)pLi-heri<^, half fall ; 
 KaTa-(j)avT]S, in si(/ht ; a-<^avr)^, out of sight. 
 
 501. In meaning, compound nouns and adjectives 
 are of three classes : 
 
 1. Objective compounds, of which one part is a sub- 
 stantive and stands to the other part in some relation 
 expressed by an oblique case ; crTpaT-rjy6<s, leader of an 
 army ; K(oix-dp)(7]<s, the head of a village. 
 
 2. Determinative compounds, of which the first part, 
 in the sense of an adjective or adverb, qualifies the last 
 part : d/c/od-7roXt9 (a/cpa-7rdXt9, highest citg), citadel ; 
 ev'vov;, ivell disposed. 
 
 3. Possessive compounds are adjectives in which the 
 first part qualifies the second as in determinatives, and 
 the whole describes some person or thing : -yjpvdo- 
 yaXlvo% {yjpvao^. gold, ^aklvo^, bridle), with a gold- 
 mo anted bridle ; Icro-TrXevpos (tcro?, equal, TrXevpd, side), 
 equilateral. 
 
 502. Explain at sight the meaning of the following 
 words by their derivation : 
 
204 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 k6<;, Alyv7rTio<^. 4. crTpdrevfjia, to^ottj^, rdfeu/xa. 
 
 5. craTpaTTevco, To^evco, TTOpevoj, Trtcrrevo). 6. vlkolo), 
 fjLLcrOoo), d^LOO). 7. cJ)l\oklvSvi'o<;, vavap\o<;y (jypovpap- 
 ^os {(l)povp6<^, guardy garrison soldier), 8. rrpocj^vka^, 
 oTTLaOocj^vXa^ {oTnaOev, i?i the rear\ 7rp60vfjLos {Ovfji6<;, 
 heart, soul). 
 
 503. Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of 
 the new words by their derivation: 
 
 1. TO evpof; irXeOpalov tjv. 2. to evpo^ rjixLTrXeOpov 
 Tjv, 3. TTiorTevcroiJLev Kvpco. 4. Xvevvecn^ Ittttov XP'^ 
 cro^dXivov irefiTreL. 5. tovtcov ttoXXo, xpijfiaTa e)(pp^^v. 
 
 6. (TT paT7]yrj(Tei TavTrjp ttjv (TT paTiqyiav . 7. TroXe/xT^- 
 crei Ti(jaa(^)epvei avv toI^ ^vyacn twp MiXyjcrLajv. 
 8. iKeXevcre 8e kol tov<; MlXtjtov iroXiopKovvTa^ avv 
 avTO) CT paTevecrO ai, 9. Kv/009 ydp e7re/x7re ^lkov^ 
 oivov rjixiSeei^; TroXXctfct?. 10. d(f)L7T7TeveL iwl ttjv eavTov 
 (TKTjvrjv Sid Tov M.epa}vo<; (rr/aarev/iaro?. 11. ra OTrXa 
 /cat ra aKevo<j)6pa €)(0PTe<s icTTpaTOTrehevcrapTO irapd 
 YXedp^co. 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 GRIMM'S LAW.— WORD GROUPING-. 
 
 Review 87, 88, «, 1, ^ ; 189, 1, 2, 3, obs. ; 190; 
 Lessons XLIII. and XLIV. 
 
 504. The English language contains many words 
 (87), that have been directly borrowed or adapted from 
 
 1 -Lov, a diminutive ending, small, etc. 
 
GRIMM S LAW. 
 
 WORD GROUPING, 
 
 205 
 
 the Greek : ima-Tokri, epistle; (f)dkay^, phalanx, dpuO- 
 /X09, arithmetic. It contains also important words 
 which have not been borrowed, but which have been 
 handed down in both languages from the same original 
 source.^ These are called copiaie} In each language 
 they midergo certain changes of fortn, and sometimes of 
 meaning. There is generally a corresponding Latin 
 and German word : Trarrip, pater ^ vater, father; fJitJTTjp, 
 mater, mutter, mother. 
 
 505. The principle regulating the interchange of 
 mute consonants in these different divisions of the Indo- 
 European language is known as Grimm's ■ ' Law of 
 Pernmtation of Consonants." 
 
 506. Examine the following : 
 
 OriginAlL Sounds. 
 
 1. Rough or (^.^ 
 aspirate. j_ ^^^ 
 
 r 
 s 
 
 77 
 K 
 
 T 
 
 Greek. 
 drjp 
 
 Latin. English. 
 fero BEAR 
 {h)anser goose, gan- 
 fera deer [der 
 
 2. Middle or 
 
 smooth. 
 
 3. Smooth or 
 
 surd. 
 
 /SovXo^ai (/3oX-) volo will 
 
 hvo 
 
 genus kin 
 duo TWO 
 
 TTOV? (tTcS-) pes FOOT 
 
 Kokeo) calo HAUL 
 
 Tpdq tres three 
 
 Observe that : 1 . The tendency of consonantal change is from 
 rough to smooth, and from smooth to rough. 2. In Latin the 
 rough consonants are represented by the aspirates ^ and h^ some- 
 
 LidoEuropean Original Language.'* 
 
 2 cf. p. 231. 
 
206 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 times by v} 3. In other cases the mutes are generally the same 
 in Greek and Latin, but all of the mutes are changed to one 
 degree in English :^ tt, ^, <j), generally appear in English respect- 
 ively as/, JO, and d; K,y, %, as /i, k or c, and g -, t,8, 6, as th, t, 
 and d, 
 
 507. The vowels of the roots and stems also undergo 
 a phonetic change. This is termed Vowel Gradation. 
 The vowels arranged in the order of their strength, 
 beginning with the weakest, are i, v, e, o, a; in Latin, 
 i, u, e, 0, a. ^ change of any vowel into one farther 
 to the right or into a long vowel or diphthong is vowel 
 increase; a change to the left is vowel decrease (weak- 
 ening or loss). The general direction in the phonetic 
 change of vowels is toward the w^eaker ; and a change 
 from the weaker to the stronger vowels is generally for 
 a special purpose. But the principle that underlies 
 much of phonetic change is the tendency to ease of 
 utterance, and the particular form of a vow^el depends 
 greatly upon the influence of the adjacent consonants. 
 
 508. Give the Latin and English words cognate with 
 the following, and apply the principles of phonetic 
 change both to consonants and vowels : 1. ^4po). 2. Orfp. 
 3. yevo^. 4. 7rov<;, 5. rpet?. 6. fJLyJTrjp. 7. Trarijp. 
 8. 0vpa, DOOR. 9. jxTJv, mensis, moon, month. 10. ct/ct;- 
 VT] (cr/ca-), scena, scene, shade. 1L olvo<; {/tolvo^),^ 
 
 1 In the middle of a word the aspirates are frequently represented 
 by the smooth. Other exceptions to the law can best be learned by 
 observation. 
 
 2 They are changed to two degrees in German: Bvyarrjp, daughter, 
 tochfer. 
 
 ^ (F) obsolete van or digamma, equivalent to Latin v and English la 
 (p. I45I). 
 
GRIMM's law. WORD GROUPING. 207 
 
 vi7mm, WINE. 12. oT/co? (/rot/co?), vicics, village^ vicida, 
 villa, -WICK, -wicH, as in Berwick, Norwich. 13. acw/it; 
 (/ft-, resf), quies, dtvis, home, hive. 14. /3ou9, fio/r-), 
 dull, cow ; bos, bovis, cow. 
 
 509. Give the words ^ cognate with the following : 
 1. SeAca. 2. ef {(re^). 3. okto). 4. virep. 
 
 510. In acquiring a Greek vocabulary, associate with 
 the Greek words belonging in a group the related Latin 
 and English. If the student is acquainted with Ger- 
 man, he should associate also with these the German 
 words. 
 
 511. Groups of related words are given in the fol- 
 lowing lessons. The Greek groups contain in the main 
 only such words as have occurred in the preceding les- 
 sons, except a few needed to show the connection ; but 
 other related words should be added as they occur in 
 the subsequent lessons. Compound words and proper 
 names have generally been omitted. The Latin groups 
 contain only the most common w^ords ; but other Latin 
 words should be added by the teacher, if need be," to suit 
 the larger vocabulary of the pupils.^ 
 
 In the Greek groups, simple words that are generally 
 formed on a stem derived directly from a root or from 
 an ultimate theme are printed in black-faced letter. But 
 simple words, on the contrary, derived generally from 
 
 * Borrowed from the Latin. 
 
 2 See the general vocabulary for Latin and Englisli forms. 
 
 ^ For a fuller treatment of Latin words see Lewis's " Latin Dictionary 
 for Schools," or his " Elementary Latin Dictionary." For a fuller history 
 of the English words see Skeat's " Etymological Dictionary of the English 
 Lansruaue." 
 
208 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 a stem that appears in some preceding word, and com- 
 pounds, are printed in light-faced type. 
 
 In the EngHsh groups, the cognate words are in 
 light-faced capitals, and the borrowed words are in 
 black-faced letter. 
 
 512. In the following typical group, analyze the 
 Greek words according to the principles in Lessons 
 XLIII. and XLIV. Distinguish the case or personal 
 ending, suffix, stem, theme, or root, on which the word 
 is made, observing the changes of form. In denomi- 
 native verbs, point out the ending and preceding stem. 
 In compounds, give the parts that compose the word. 
 Note the related Latin and EngHsh words, and when- 
 ever practicable, apply Grimm's Law. 
 
 513. R. ay-y ^J/'> d^'^^^y lead, loeigh, consider. a-y-cD, 
 drive, lead, bring, carry ; d^-wv, -cjp-os, 6, a bringing to- 
 gether^ an assembly, a contest ; d-y-po-c, 6, field (a place 
 where herds are driven) ; ayp-to-?, -d, -ov, living in the 
 
 fields, ivild ; d^-d-s, 6, leader ; crrpar-T^yd-?, 6, general ; 
 (TTpaTTjye'O), be general; err parriy-La, -a<i, generalship ; 
 \ox-oiy6-<;, 6 (Xoxo'S, R. X^X'^ con)pany\ captain; y)yi- 
 o-/tat, j70 before^ lead, command, think ; rjye-ixMv, -6v-o<;, 6, 
 leader, guide ; a|-cov, -01^-09, 6 (dy + cr = df), axle ; 
 afjL-a^a, -179 (d/xa, adv., together)^ a wagon loith two con- 
 nected axles, four-ioheeled wagon ; d/>Laf-tT6-9, -ov, passa- 
 ble by wagon ; d|-io-s, -a, -ov, loeighing as much, worth ; 
 d^io-o), think iQorthy, demand. 
 
 ag-o, lead, drive; ag-men, -in-is, n., army, band; 
 ag-e-r, -gri, m., field ; axi-s, -is, m., axle. 
 
VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 209 
 
 Acre, acorn ; agony, ant-agonist, strat-agem, strat- 
 egy, etc. ; dem-agcgue, etc. ; axiom. 
 
 514. EXERCISES. 
 
 Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of the 
 new words by their derivation or by allied forms : 
 
 1. rauTa Se ra drjpCa ol iTTTret? iSiojKop. 2. iv Se 
 rat? oiKiai^ rjcrav ^rjve^. 3. rjcav Se /cat ^de? iv rat? 
 ot/ctat?. 4. rjfJLels epLKCJfJiev ^aaiXea iirl rat? OvpaLS 
 avTov. 5. KaraXajji^dveL TrdvTCL<^ evhov rovs /coi/xTfra? 
 Kal Tov Ko^xdp^Tjv /cat Ty]v Ovyaripa rov Kojfjidp-^ov. 
 6. irdvTe^ yap ol t(ov dpicFTOiv Hepawv TralSes em rat? 
 /3acn\eo)<; dvpai<; irai^evovTai. 7. /cat (f>iko6j)p6TaTO<; 
 Tjv /cat 77/009 ra Orjpia .fievTot c^tXo/ct^'Suj'dTaro?. 
 8. 'Opdi^ras 8e Tlepcrry? dvrjp, yivei re TrpoarJKcov jBa- 
 crtXet /cat ra TroXe/xta Xeyd/xe^'09 ez^ rots dpi(TTOi^ Hep- 
 ao)Vy eTTL^ovkevei Kvpco. 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 PRESENT SYSTEM OF VERBS.— VERBS OF 
 THE FIRST CLASS.i 
 
 Review 23, 198, 252, 253, 254, «; 255, 256, 325, 
 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; 352, 353. 
 
 515. Each tense system is formed by some modifica- 
 tion of the theme of the verb (23). The present system 
 
 ^ Heview questions upon the formation of words may be found in 
 Lesson LXV. (p. 308). 
 
 14 
 
210 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 of most of the verbs thus far presented is formed by 
 adding the suffix %. to the theme : Xvcj, Trotew, Xeyco, 
 ^evcj. Verbs that form their present stem in this man- 
 ner belong to the Variable Vowel or First Class. 
 
 516. In respect to the formation of the present stem 
 from the theme, verbs are divided into seven classes. 
 For convenience a few verbs forming their tense stems 
 from essentially different themes are put by themselves 
 as an eighth class. 
 
 517. The First Class is the most numerous of all the 
 classes. Most of the verbs of this class are regular, i. e. 
 they are formed according to the general rules for form- 
 ing the tense systems, but they may at the same time 
 be defective, or lack some of the principal parts (352, 
 353). 
 
 518. Conjugate the present system, in the forms thus 
 far presented, of Xvco, Xeyco, TToieco, TL[jLdo). Explain the 
 endings -&>, -et?, -et in the act. ind. sing. 
 
 519. Give the principal parts of the following verbs : 
 aireiw, alTrjcrcOy etc. ; St^Xow, St^Xwctw ; iroLecoj TroLrjaco ; 
 neipda), iravo), /8ov\eva>, Orjpevcoy TratSevw. 
 
 520. In some vowel verbs the final stem vowel is 
 variable in quantity, remaining short in some of the 
 forms, and lengthened in others.^ 
 
 1. 0v(o, sacrifice, Ovcrco^ eOvcra, reOvKa, reOvfiac, 
 
 irvOrjv, 
 
 2. Xvcoy loose, Xvcro), eXvcra, XeXvKa, XeXvfJbaiy eXvOrjv, 
 
 ^ Eor a more complete list of the verbs of the several classes see the 
 grammars. Only the most common appear in these lessons. 
 
VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 211 
 
 3. Kokeco, call, KaXw, eKokecra, Ke/cX-r^/ca, KeKXyjfjLaL, 
 iKXyjdrjp. 
 
 a. The future of KaXicn and fid'XpiJLaL is formed by dropping 
 a- and contracting (254). 
 
 b. The theme Koke- of KaXeco becomes nXe- by syncopation 
 (p. 142^), and appears as kXt]- in the last three principal parts. 
 
 521. Vowel verbs tbat retain the sbort vowel, and a 
 few others, add a to the theme in the perfect and 
 pluperfect middle and passive and in the first passive 
 system (325, 344). 
 
 1. cnrdo), draw, cnrdcra), ecnraaa, ecTTrafca, ecnracr ^xaij 
 iaTrdaOrjp. 
 
 2. TeXeajyJiniskf reXw, ireXecra, rereXe/ca, rere Xecr/xai, 
 iTeXeadrjv. 
 
 3. KeXevo), order, KeXevcro), efceXevcra, KeKeXevKa, Ke- 
 KeXeva fiai, eKeXevadrjp. 
 
 ' 4. TTaLO), strike, 7ratcra>, iiraLaa, TreVatfca, inaLaOrji^. 
 
 522. Sometimes the present is formed from a longer 
 theme in e and the rest of the tenses on a shorter theme 
 without €: So/ceo)^ {hoK€-, 253), 8dfw, etc. But gener- 
 ally the present is formed on the shorter theme, and the 
 other tenses or part of them, except the second tense 
 system (352), on a longer theme in e (198). 
 
 1. ^ovXojxaL, tvilly ^ovXijaofJiaL, ^e^ovXrjfjiaL, i^ov 
 XijOr)}/. 
 
 ^ Most verbs in -eo have regular stems in e as nou(o. 
 
212 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 2. Sect), need, Sct^ctw, iSerjcra, SeSeT^Aca, 8e8e)7/iat, 
 
 3. fievco, remain, e/xei^'a, fJiefjieprjKa. 
 
 4. iOeXo) or OeXcOy wish, idekyjaco, i^Oekiqcra, rjOeXrjKa. 
 
 5. [Layoiia^i, fight ^ fxa-^ovfiai, etc. 
 
 6. /xeXXo), intend, fxeWijaa), iixeWrja'a. 
 
 523. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. kjvyyave yap 6v6fxevos. 2. Ovofjuevo^ Xeyet 
 avTft) OTi /BacnXeij^ ov /xa^ecrat 8e/ca rjfxepcov. 3. 77X17- 
 crtoz^ '^i' 6 crra^/xo? a^^a e/xeXXe KaTaXveti^. 4. avrov 
 iraUi KoX TiTpcoaKei Sua tov 6a>paK0<;. 5. 8t€T€Xol;^' 
 -^patfjievoL Tol<^ TOiv TToXefjiLcov To^evfxacTL. 6. j^v^' 8€tTat 
 KvpQ? eTrecrOai Toi)^ ''EXXrjva^; ettI ^acnXea. 7. ot 8e 
 (TTpaTLwraL ol T€ at'Tov eKeivov fcat ot aXXot ravra d/cov- 
 cravT€<; iTrrjpecrav. 8. toj^ jLtez^ KaXa><; TTOiovvra iiraLvet, 
 TOV 8e d8tfCoi}^'Ta ouk iTraivei, 
 
 II. 1. No one fought with him. 2. He will not 
 fight within five days. 3. The army halted for provi- 
 sions. 4. And calling the generals he speaks as follows. 
 5. Clearchus did not desire to withdraw the right wing 
 from the river. 
 
 524. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Sect), need, want, crave ; mid.y Kara-Xvo), unloose,. ma/ee an 
 
 need, desire, ask, deg ; Sel, end^ halt. 
 
 inipers., it is necessary, fieXXco, intend, he about. 
 
 one ought. iraioi, strike, hit [ana-paest]. 
 
 iir-aiveo), -aivicro), -rjvecra, TiTpcocTKO), tvound. 
 
 praise, commend, applaud. 
 
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 213 
 
 525. The groups of related words that appear in this 
 lesson and the following should be analyzed according 
 to the directions given in 512. A faithful analysis of 
 these groups .will enable the pupil to classify the words 
 of the preceding vocabularies and greatly increase his 
 facility in ascertaining the meaning of new words. 
 
 526. R. a/>X"? ^^ fi^^^' clpX"^? ^^ fi^^^^ ^^^^y ^^^^ '* 
 Part, as subst., dpx-(ov, -ovt-os, 6, ruler, commander; 
 vTT'dpx'Cii, be under as a fomdation, support ; dpx-il? -^7^? 
 beginning, rule ; dpx^-lo-^, -d, -ov, from the beginning, 
 ancient; dpx-i'K6-<^, 'V^ -ov, fit for rule ; d/^x-O"?? o, leader ; 
 v7T-apxO'<;, o, under-ofjicer , lieutenant; dv-apxo-s, -op, 
 without leaders ; vav-apxo-'^j o {vav^), commander of a 
 \fleet, admiral ; (j)povp-apxo-^, o {(j)povp6<;, 6, garrison 
 \soldier\ commander of a garrison ; KcofjL-dpxr}-^, -ov 
 \{K(ofji-rj, village), village chief 
 
 j archi-, arche-, arch-, chief (jpre^x) ; arch-angel, arch- 
 bishop, arch-duke, etc., archon, archaic, archaeo-logy 
 \{\6yo<;), archives, archi-tect, an-archy, mon-archy, etc. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. — SECOND 
 AORIST SYSTEM. 
 
 Review p. 145^ 203, 290, d ; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; 
 352, 507. 
 
 527. Second Class. The theme vowel a, l, or v takes 
 the strong form 17, et, ev. The themes of this class end 
 in a mute or v : XetVoj (Xitt-); peo) (/>v-). 
 
214 THE beginner's greek book. . 
 
 528. The verbs with a weak stern in v originally had 
 the strong form in ev-, which appeared as ef- before a 
 vowel, and finally f was dropped : peo) {pv-j^peva-ojiaL, 
 
 529. Examine the following : 
 
 
 
 TUEME, 
 
 PiiES. Stem 
 
 Tut. Aor. 
 
 1. 
 
 XetTTO), leave 
 
 \iir- 
 
 XetTrVe- 
 
 Xet^jrco eXiTTOV 
 
 2. 
 
 TreLOco^ persuade ttlO- 
 
 Treiey,. 
 
 irelaw eiretaa 
 
 3. 
 
 <l>€vyco, flee 
 
 </)U7- 
 
 (t>evr/.- 
 
 (^ev^ofiai ^ or ecpvyov 
 
 4. 
 
 dew, run 
 
 ev- 
 
 ee^U. 
 
 Oevaofjiac 
 
 5. 
 
 peo), flow 
 
 pv- 
 
 M^- 
 
 pev(TO/xat 
 
 530. The second tenses (352) differ from the corre- 
 sponding first tenses in form, but regularly have like 
 meaning. When, however, both tenses appear in the 
 same verb, they often differ also in meaning ; but they 
 appear only in a few verbs. 
 
 531. The stem of the second aorist system is formed 
 by affixing the variable vowel %. to the theme. Its 
 tense sign is the short theme vowel : 
 
 Indicative. Imperative. 
 
 Act. Mid. Act, Mid. 
 
 eXt-TToi/ iXiTTOfJirji/ \ltt€ Xlttov 
 
 Infinitives. Participles. 
 
 Act. Mid. Act. Mid. 
 
 XiTreiv XiTreaOaL Xlttcov XiiToixevos 
 
 ^ Some verbs use the future middle form for the active. 
 
 ^ Some verbs, besides the regular future middle form -cro/Ltai, have one 
 in -aeofxm, contracted to a-ov^iai, formed with the sufiix (re%-. This form 
 of the future is called the Doric. 
 
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 
 
 215 
 
 Observe that : 1. The second aorist, like the other secondary 
 tenses^ has in the indicative the augment and secondary personal 
 endings. 2. It has the inflection of the present system, being 
 inflected in the indicative like the imperfect, and in the other 
 forms like the present. 3. XLirelv and Xiirov have the circum- 
 flex on the last syllable ; Xtirdtv is accented like \vdeC<i (350) ; 
 and XiireaOai is accented on the penult (195, a^-, 323, d ; 
 349, a), 
 
 a. Formulate a rule for the above exceptione to the recessive 
 accent. 
 
 532. Conjugate the second aorist system in the forms 
 above presented of XetVo) (834). 
 
 533. Examine the following common verbs of the 
 first class that form second aorists : 
 
 1. afyoD, lead a^- 
 
 2. fyi^vofiat^ become yev- 
 
 3. enroyLai^ follow a-eir- 
 
 4. e;^(», haiw ^^X' 
 
 5. irnTTO)^ fall ireT- 
 
 FuT. 2 AoR. Stem. 2 Aor. 
 
 a^(o ^Jf^y'^/e- ^yayov 
 
 ryevrjo-ofiai ve^^/e- iyevofirjv 
 ey^o^at <^7r°/e. €(T7r6fJL7jv 
 
 €^co or a')(r}a(o o-^%. €(T')(pv 
 TrecrovfJLaL Treo-^/j. eireaov 
 
 (for eirerov) 
 
 Observe that: 1. The theme is reduplicated in rjyayov 
 (ay-ay-) (545). 2. ycyvofjLaL and iriTTTco reduplicate the theme 
 by prefixing their initial consonants with c and dropping the 
 theme vowels. 3. In ey^rofiai the rough breathing takes the 
 place of a ; eaTrofjLrjv is for ia-eTro/jLrjv, the rough breathing 
 comes from the present. 4. In efo) the rough breathing takes 
 the place of a; in o-)(^aco the theme vowel undergoes meta- 
 thesis/ the theme aex becoming (rx^; ea^ov is for ea-e^ov, 
 5. nreaovfiat is for Trer-o-eofjiai. (p. 214^.) 
 
 ^ Metathesis is the transposition of letters in a word, generally a liquid 
 and a vowel. 
 
216 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 534. In giving the principal parts of verbs, the 
 second aorists are put in place of the first aorists, or are 
 given in addition if the first parts occur (353, a). 
 
 535. The lengthened forms of the theme of the second 
 class verbs are retained in all tenses except in the sec- 
 ond aorist and second passive systems, where they have 
 the short forms a, l, and v. 
 
 536. Conjugate the present system of XetVo) and 
 ireWcj} in all the forms that have been presented (pres., 
 impf., imv., inf., and part., act., mid., and pass.). 
 
 537. Conjugate the second aorist system active in 
 all the forms that have been presented of ayco, exo), 
 
 and TTLTTTO). 
 
 538. Conjugate the second aorist system middle in 
 all the forms that have been presented of dycjy yCypofjiaL, 
 and inofiaL, 
 
 539. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. inecrOe tco rjyovjjievcp. 2. 6 8e KXeap^o? ecr^e 
 TO Se^LOv. 3. et9 ra? Toi^eL^ eOeov. 4. to §e cTTpd- 
 Tevfxa 6 crtro? eTriXiirev} 5. tov^ OTrXtra? rjyayov irepl 
 TTfv aKTjvTJv, 6. dpiOfJio^ iyevETO tcov fxev '^XXtjvqjv 
 acTTTi? p^vpCa Kai TeTpaKocrCa. 7. ol ^dp^apoi ^o^ov 
 ifiTreaovTO^; ecj^vyop et? to (TTpaTOTreSov. 8. 8ta fiecrov 
 Se TTJ^ TToXeoj? pel Trora/io? KvSi/o? ovofia, evpo<; Svo 
 TT\idpo)v. 9. 'ApLOio^ 6 Kvpov -virapxp^ to evmvvyiov 
 /c£pa? ^cr^c Tov ^ap^apLKov. 10. dXX' eTrel v/x€ts 
 iixol ovK iOeXeTe TreiBecrOai ovhe eirecrOaij iya> crvv vfiiv 
 ejtOfiaL. 11. /cat Toifs tojv 'EXXtjvojv o-TpaTrjyovs e/ce 
 
 1 See 314, a. 
 
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 217 
 
 Xevcrep OTrXtra? dyayelp. ol 8e raura i7roLr)crav, aya- 
 y6vT€<; a>? rptcr^tXiov? OTrXtras. 
 
 II. 1. They fled from their tents. 2. They followed 
 the guide. 3. The king and the Greeks were distant 
 from one another twenty stadia. 4. After they heard 
 these things, they were persuaded. 5. It seemed best 
 to them to lead the hoplites. 6. The inhabitants left 
 their houses and fled to the mountains. 
 
 540. VOCABULARY. 
 
 TeTpa-KocTLOLy -at, -a, fof/r e/x-7ri7rrw, fall upon, occur 
 
 hundred [rerrape? + ^'^a- to. 
 
 t6v\. ' ovSe, neg. conj., dut not, 
 
 Tpio-'^ikioL^ -ai, -a, three and riot, nor yet, nor, \jdX, 
 
 thousand \Tp{i<i-\-^iKioi\. neque, nee ; adv., not 
 
 vTT-ap^os, under officer ^ lieu- eve7i, not at alU Lat. ne 
 
 tenant. ... quidem [ov + Se]. 
 
 iK-XeLTTco, i^eXiTTov, leave 
 out, leave, forsake^ aban- 
 don., fail [eclipse]. 
 
 541. Apply Grimm's law to the following: 
 
 XetVco linquo lend, loan ; ec-lipse. 
 
 Xvd} luo LOSE, LOOSE ; aua-lyze, ana-lysis 
 
 TTLTTTa) [Tier-] peto find. 
 
218 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS, 
 
 Review 189, 1, 2, 3; 190, 194, 1, 2, 3; 303, 304, 
 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, «; 310, 311, 312, 313, 351, 
 1, 2, 3, 4; 352, 507, 517. 
 
 542. Examine the following verbs, and note how they 
 differ in the perfect from XeXvKa : 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 ypa(j)co 
 
 XeLTTO) 
 
 ypa(f)- 
 Xltt- 
 
 iypaxjja 
 iXiirov 
 
 XeXoLTTa 
 
 3. 
 
 TreWd) 
 
 mO- 
 
 €7r€L(Ta 
 
 TTeireiKa or TreiroiOa 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 Tpecjico 
 ^evyo) 
 
 rpe^ 
 ^vy- 
 
 €Tpe\jja 
 €(j>vyov 
 
 T€TpO(j)a 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 ayo) 
 Slcjko) 
 
 dy- 
 Slcdk- 
 
 Tjyayov 
 
 
 8. 
 
 TrefjLTTO) 
 
 Tre/XTT- 
 
 eTrefxxjja 
 
 7re7ro/x0a 
 
 a. Observe that the perfects of these verbs are regularly 
 formed by adding the tense suffix -a directly to tiie theme ; 
 .that some verbs in forming the perfect, as djco and Slcoko), 
 aspirate their final mute. 
 
 b. Observe that the stem vowel e becomes o ; that verbs of 
 the second class have the strong form of theme vowel, but have 
 oL instead of et. 
 
 543. These are called second perfects (310), and they 
 have the same force as the first perfects with the tense 
 sign -fca. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS. 219 
 
 544. The stem of the second perfect system is formed 
 by affixing the tense suffix -a (phipf. --q or -eu) to the re- 
 duplicated theme. But some verbs aspirate a labial or 
 palatal mute at the end of the theme, changing tt, /8, to 
 <^, and fc, y, to ^. It has the inflection of the first per- 
 fect system (310). 
 
 545. Jtlic Reduplication. Some verbs beginning 
 with a, €, o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate 
 the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two 
 letters ; the second vowel of the resulting form is then 
 regularly lengthened as in the temporal augment : a/o^- 
 /coa \aKov(ii {oLKOf-, dKov-)~\. 
 
 546. Learn the principal parts of the following verbs, 
 and explain the formation of their perfects : 
 
 1. ayo), d^o), rjyayov, etc. 2. Slcokco, Slcj^co, etc. 
 3. ex^, i^(o or a^croi [crxe-], ^o-^ov^ Icr^KOi., «^XT 
 jitat, l(T\iQi)v. 4. Tpeirco, Tpexjjo), etc. 5. Troteiw, ttoi- 
 yjcrcj, etc. 6. ypd<f)a), ypdxjjoj, etc. 7. XeLirco, Xeu/fw, 
 ekiTToi/, etc. 8. TreCdo), Tretcrw, eTreicra, etc. 9. ireixTro), 
 TrefjLxIja), eirepu^a, TreVo/xc^a, TreTre/A/xai,^ iTrefji^drjv. 10. ttl- 
 TTTco [rrer-, tttc-, ttto-], irecrovfJLaL, eireaov, TTenTcoKa. 
 11. yuypofJiaL, yevrjO-oyLai, iyevofirjv, yeyova, yeye- 
 
 547. Conjugate, in the forms thus far given of the 
 first perfect, the second perfect system of \diTOi : 
 
 ^ When /i/A/x occurs, one /t is dropped. 
 
 2 lu the perfect the theme 7rcr-(7!Te-) becomes wro- 
 
220 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 2d Perf. 
 
 2d Pluperf. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 XekoLTra 
 
 iXeXoLTTT) 
 
 XeXoiirevai 
 
 XeXotTTw? 
 
 XekoLTTas 
 
 eXeX 01777^9 
 
 
 
 K. r. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 
 
 548. Conjugate the second perfect indicative of the 
 following verbs: ayw, Stw/cw, 7r€t(9w, Tre/xTTO), <^€vyo), 
 yCyvofxai, 
 
 549. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. OLKTJKOa TTjV K.VpOV OipeTljv. 2. T0U9 '^EXXt]- 
 
 va^ TJyaye et? tov<; fiap^dpov<;. 3. ^Opovra^ iyeypd- 
 <^€i iTrKTToXrjv irapd ^acriXea, 4i. to By) ttoXv tov 
 EXX7)VLKov ovtcjds TTeVet/ce. 5. €69 (j^vyrjv ireTpoifyeL rovs 
 €^aKi(T^iXiov<i. 6. ra? olKia^ i^eXeXoLTrecrav ol ivoi- 
 KovvTe<i. 7. iiroXiopKei MiXr^roj^ kol iTreiparo KaTayeiv 
 Tov<; €K7T€TTT0)Kora^. 8. iXiyovTO XeXonrivai tov Xocj^ov 
 OL tTTTTecs. 9. TavTTjv T7)v )((opav i7r€T€Tp6(j)eL SiapTToi- 
 aaL^ TOLS "EXXrjcFiv w? TroXefiCav ovaav. 10. ti'^ ovv 
 
 dSiKTjdels VTT ifXOV VVV TO TpiTOV iTTL^OvXevOJV jXOL (f>a- 
 
 vepos yeyovas; 11. 'Aptaio? Se ire^evym eV rw 
 (TTpaTOTTihco efxeve fieTOL twv dXXcov /BapjBdpcop. 
 
 II. 1. They have not escaped. 2. The satrap has 
 left the heights. 3. He has heard from Tissaphernes 
 of the equipment of Cyrus. 4. The horsemen had pur- 
 sued these wild animals. 5. He had sent with her the 
 
 soldiers of Menon. 
 
 1 Cf. 267, 13. 
 
 2 Cf. 467, 15. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF O) VERBS. 221 
 
 550. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (fyvyj], -r\<i, flight [c^euyoi]. he driven out, banished, 
 
 d7ro-(f)ev'ya)y flee hacky es- exiled, 
 
 cape. Kar-dyo)y lead down OY back^ 
 
 iK-TrlTTTO), fall out or down, restore, 
 
 551. R. )8oX-, vol; loill, choose, povX-o-|iai, idll, wish ; 
 Po\)X-ii, -']79, will, plan ; im-povXij, -7J9, planning against, 
 a plot ; o-v/x-y8ouX-o-9, 6, adviser ; ^ovkev-a), plan ; pcX- 
 T-ia)v, -ov, gen. -ov-os (stem ^ek-ro-, com p. of aya^ds), 
 better ; pcX-r-io-Tos, -17, -01/, superl., /5^5if. 
 
 vol-o, loilly wish ; vol-un-ta-s, -atis, f., will, choice; vol- 
 •untarius, willing, voluntary ; vel . . . vel, either . . , or ; 
 nolo, be unwilling ; malo, prefer. 
 
 Will, wild (self-willed), well, weal, wealth. 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF 
 ft) VERBS. 
 
 Review 20, 28, 110, 116, 202, a; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4; 
 415, 417, 418, 419,, 422, p. 170^ 531, obs. ; 544. 
 
 552. The /Subjunctive and Optative. 
 
 The subjunctive expresses contingency or the will of 
 the speaker. Its uses are generally those of the primary 
 tenses of the Latin subjunctive, but it has neither an 
 optative (expressing a wish) nor a potential force. The 
 
222 
 
 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 optative takes generally the place of the Latin subjiinc- 
 jtive after a secondary tense.-^ But it has its proper 
 optative force, and joined with the particle av it obtains 
 a potential force. 
 
 a. The indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative, as 
 opposed to the infinitive, are called finite moods. The subjunc- 
 tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, as opposed to the indic- 
 ative, are called dependent moods. The indicative expresses the 
 action as definite and decided in point of fact whether in a decla- 
 ration or a question. 
 
 553; 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 • Active. 
 
 
 
 Conju 
 
 igate the following (825, 827, 828, 
 
 834, 835) : 
 
 Pkes. 
 
 1st Aor.* 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 2d Perf. 
 
 \vo} 
 
 Xvao) 
 
 Xltto) 
 
 XeXvKco 
 
 XeXoLTTO) 
 
 \vr)^ 
 
 \v(Tr)<; 
 
 Vnrrjq 
 
 XeXvKTfs 
 
 XeXoLTTr)? 
 
 \irri 
 
 Xvarj 
 
 XiTTTJ 
 
 XeXvKTj 
 
 XeXoLTTJ) 
 
 Xv7]-T0V 
 
 \v(Tr)TOV 
 
 Xi7rr]T0v 
 
 XeXvKTJTOV 
 
 XeXoLirrjTov 
 
 Xvrj-Tov 
 
 Xvcr7]T0v 
 
 XlTTrjTOV 
 
 XeXvKy]Tov 
 
 XeXoiiTiqTOv 
 
 Xvco-fiev 
 
 kixTcofiev 
 
 XiTTcoixev 
 
 XeXvKoy^ev 
 
 XeXoLTTcoyiev 
 
 \vr)-Te 
 
 J^vcrrjTe 
 
 XiTrrjTe 
 
 XeXvKTjTe 
 
 XeXoLTrrjTe 
 
 \.v(jiicn 
 
 Xv(Ta)crL 
 
 Xl1T0)(TL 
 
 XeXvKQjcn 
 
 XeXoLTTcocrL 
 
 Observe that : 1. The subjunctive has no augment.^ 2. It 
 has the long thematic vowel instead of the final vowel (7^-, -a, -a) 
 of the tense suffix ; (o stands before /jl and v and r) elsewhere. 
 3. The subjunctive uses the endings of the primary tenses, but 
 with L of the original endings <tl and tl of the singular transferred 
 
 ^ These supplemental moods are sometimes called " The conjunctive 
 mood." 
 
 ^ Tlie force of the subjunctive precludes the use of the future. 
 
 ' The augment denoting definite past time can be used only with the 
 indicative. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF (o VERBS. 223 
 
 as in the present indicative, giving 779, y (26). 4. The long 
 thematic vowel "/t,. ^^^y be regarded as the mood sign of the 
 subjunctive, being used in each tense without variation. 
 
 554. Optative Active. 
 
 Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 828, 834, 
 
 835): 
 
 Prjes. Fut. 
 
 AOR. 
 
 2 AoR. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 2 Perf. 
 
 XvoL-fii XvaoifjLi 
 
 Xva-atfJLL 
 
 XlTTOlfJLt 
 
 XeXvKoifiL 
 
 XeXotTTOlfJLt 
 
 Xuot-9 \v(70L<; 
 
 XvaaL<i 
 
 XiTTOt^ 
 
 XeXvKOi^ 
 
 XeXotTTOt? 
 
 \vot Xvaot 
 
 XvaaL 
 
 XiTTOl 
 
 XeXu/coi 
 
 XeXoiTTOL 
 
 XVOL'TOV K,T.\, 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
 K.T,X. 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
 \V0L-T7}V 
 
 
 
 
 
 XvOt-fJL€V 
 
 
 
 
 
 XvoL-re 
 
 
 
 
 
 Xvoie-v 
 
 
 
 
 
 a. Observe that the optative has the thematic vowel o in all 
 tenses except the first aorist, where it has a ; that it adds the 
 mood suffix -i (in the third person plural -it] changed to -te before 
 v) to the tense stem, and uses the endings of the secondary 
 tenses, but has -yitt in the first person singular active. 
 
 h. The forms \ucreta-9, Xucrete, Xvaeia-v^ in the aorist are 
 Aeolic, but are more common than the regular forms Xucrat?, 
 Xvaai^ Xvcraiev. c. In determining the accent final ot and at 
 in the optative are regarded long. (XI. N.) 
 
 555. The subjunctive and optative are chiefly used 
 in subordinate or dependent clauses. But some of their 
 so-called independent uses will be first noted. 
 
 556. 27ie Subjunctive as Imperative of the First 
 Person {Exh ortaiion ) . 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
224 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 1. fXTj fxevoiiiev aX\ov<;, let us not to ait for others, 
 
 2. dXX' T^/xa? dp^cojjbev tov hia^aiveiVy but let us he- 
 gin the crossing. 
 
 Observe that : 1. Both of these sentences express exhortation. 
 2. The verbs are used in the first person plural and perform the 
 function of the first person of the imperative. 3. If the exhor- 
 tation is negative, [ir] is used as in the imperative and infinitive 
 (422). 
 
 Rule. 
 
 557- The first per807i of the subjunctive (generally 
 plural) is used to express exhortations. Its negative 
 is ^ri. 
 
 558. Subjunctive of Prohibition, 
 
 Examine the follovring : 
 
 1. firjKeTL fjue Kvpov vofxit^eTey think me no longer 
 
 2. \jJr) TTon]crr)<; tovto, do not do this (this particular 
 act). 
 
 Observe that in negative commands or prohibitions the pres- 
 ent imperative or aorist subjunctive may be used ; that the dis- 
 tinction between the present and aorist subjunctive is the same 
 as that between the present and aorist imperative (415). 
 
 Rule. 
 
 559. In prohibitions [jltj is used w^ith the present 
 imperative if continuance is thought of, otherwise with 
 the aorist subjunctive. 
 
 560. Subjunctive of Deliberation or Hesitation, 
 Examine the following : 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF ft> VERBS. 225 
 
 1, firj TTOLTjcrcD TovTo \ skall I not do this ? 
 
 2. ySouXet ovv TavTa oLTrayyeWcofjLev ; do you wiah 
 then that we should announce this ? 
 
 Observe that these questions do not ask for information, but 
 imply doubt and hesitation about the course to be pursued. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 561. The first person of the subjunctive may be 
 used in questions of appeal, expressing douht and hesi- 
 tation concerning the course to be pursued.^ 
 
 a. The question is sometimes introduced by l3ov\eL or ySov- 
 XeaOe. 
 
 b. The third person is sometimes found in these questions, 
 chiefly with rh. 
 
 c. Why does this subjunctive take ^it) ? (422). 
 
 562. Optative of Wishing^. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. Toiaura rov^ l^Bpov^ ot ^eol iroLTJcreLap, may the 
 gods injlict such things upon our enemies. 
 
 2. TovTov fjLrj evSaLfioj^LcraifiL, may I not count him 
 
 Rule. 
 
 563. The optative is used to express a wish referring 
 to the future. 
 
 a. Why does this optative take /i?; ? 
 
 564. Potential Optative, 
 
 1. ovS* avTov aTTOKTeivai av ideXoLfjievj nor would we 
 ivish to kill him. 
 
 ■ ^ Generally it expresses necessity of action in submission to some com- 
 mand or power. It is often called the interrogative subjunctive. 
 
 15 
 
226 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 2. o7ra>9 ri? av a7ro(f>evyoL ; kow could one make Ids 
 escape ? 
 
 Observe that the optative with av expresses willingness to 
 admit a consequence in view of some circumstances as in 1, if we 
 could, if we should have the power, etc. ; but too vague to be defi- 
 nitely expressed, and therefore this optative expresses future 
 action as possible or less j)ositively than the indicative. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 565. The optative with av expresses future action 
 as dependent upon circumstances or conditions, and is 
 translated with may, can, might, could, would, should, 
 etc. Its negative is ov. 
 
 a. Why does the potential optative take ov ? 
 
 566. av is a post-positive particle without any corre- 
 sponding word in English. Tt has a conditional force. 
 Plere it shows that the predicate Avith which it is placed 
 is conceived only under certain conditions expressed or 
 implied, av regularly stands after the verb, but it may 
 attach itself to any prominent or emphatic word relat- 
 ing to the contingency. 
 
 567. Tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative. 
 
 The subjunctive expressing contingency regularly re- 
 fers to the future. The optative also refers to the future, 
 but generally with reference to an historical tense.^ In 
 both subjunctive and optative the tenses chiefly used are 
 the present and aorist. The time of both is precisely 
 
 ^ The optative then will regularly denote more remoteness or less prob- 
 ability than the subjunctive. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF G) VERBS. 227 
 
 the same, but the present expresses the action as con- 
 tinued and the aorist as a simple occurrence. The 
 perfect subjunctive and optative are rarely used, and 
 express the action as simply completed. The subjunc- 
 tive has no future. The future optative is never used 
 except as the representative of the future indicative in 
 indirect discourse^ (768). 
 
 568. Give the difference in the use of the present 
 and aorist tenses of the dependent moods not in indirect 
 discourse. 
 
 569. 1. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and 
 perfect systems active of Kekevco, kcoXvco, Ovco, /BaaiXevco. 
 2. Conjugate the second aorist active and second per- 
 fect systems of XetVa), (f)evyo}, dyo). 
 
 570. 1. Change the subjunctives in 556, 558, 560, 
 to optatives of wishing. 2. Change the optatives in 
 562 to potential optatives, and the optatives in 564 to 
 optatives of wishing. 3. Give original examples of the 
 deliberative subjunctive. 
 
 571. 1. .Give the synopses in the active of KeXevo), 
 KcoXvco, 6vo). 2. Give the synopses of the second aorist 
 stem active of Xeiiro), (fyevyo), and ayo). 3. Give the 
 synopses of the second perfect stem of Trefjuro), ^evyco, 
 ypd(f)(o. 
 
 572. 
 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 
 
 
 I. 1. 
 
 fxrj 
 
 0aVfJLd^€T€. 
 
 2. f.^ 
 
 Oavjjbda-rjTe. 
 
 , 3. 
 
 
 fiGvofxep ; 
 
 4, 
 
 . fjbr) ravTa 
 
 TTOirjcro) 
 
 ; 5. Tov 
 
 TTOTafJiOP 
 
 1 Here the optative is less positive than the indicative, wliich is fre- 
 quently retained. 
 
228 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Sia^aLPiOfxev. 6. ^T/Sel? vfjLcov Xeyerco tovto nepl ifjuov, 
 
 7. Koi TO XOLTTOP 6 fieP oip^Ol, 8. TO XoLTTOV KXca/O" 
 
 ^09 av dp^oL. 9. ov St) ovSe^ tovt^ dv rt? Xefat. 
 
 10. Tj'^KTT av OLKovcr aipui Ta tojv dvOpcoTTcov ovofxaTa. 
 
 11. TOP yap deoiv irokepLOv ovk av ^evycov rt? d7rocl>vyoL. 
 
 12. TTapa TTjv ye(f)vpav TTefjixpcofjiev (jivXaKijv. 13. dno- 
 (nrdacoixev aTro tov TTora/xou to Se^Lov Kepas. 
 
 II. 1. Do not send the soldiers. 2. Let us destroy 
 the bridge. 3. What shall any one do ? 4. May the 
 soldiers not end the war. 5. The soldiers would trust 
 the guide. 6. May he not escape the vengeance of the 
 gods. 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF clfiC — 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE 
 AND PASSIVE OF w VERBS. — PRESENT 
 AND SECOND AORIST SYSTEMS. 
 
 Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 229, 1, a, d; 
 287, 300, 317, 320, 344, 346, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 
 531, obs. 
 
 573. F resent Subjunctive and Optative of elfxi (eo--) 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1. 
 
 ■T 
 
 
 -? 
 
 (0 
 
 
 (ofxev 
 
 2. 
 
 h 
 
 ^TOV 
 
 t' 
 
 3. 
 
 V 
 
 ^TOV 
 
 cJcrt 
 
 ^ Wlien a negative is followed by a compound negative in the same 
 clause, the negation is strengthened. Cf. p. 266^. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE. 229 
 
 Optative. 
 Sing. Dual. " Plur. 
 
 1. eirfv eLTjfjLev, etfxep 
 
 2. €1179 eLTjTov, elrov elrjTe, elre 
 
 3. elr] elrJT7)Vy €lt7]v eiiqa-av, elev 
 
 a. Observe that the subjunctive has the long thematic vowel 
 "/^. as in (o verbs. (553, obs. 2) ; that w is for eco from eV-oj ; a 
 is dropped as in 329, obs. 4, and the two remaining syllables are 
 contracted (151, 3 ; 288). 
 
 b. Observe that the optative has the mood suffix -ir} (554, 
 a) added to the theme, that €tr]V is for ia-irj-v; cr is dropped 
 (288). 
 
 574. The mood suffix -it; is used only before active 
 endings ; after -117 the first person singular is always -v. 
 The contracted forms of the dual and plural are more 
 common than the longer forms with -117. 
 
 Sudjunctive Middle and Passive. 
 
 575. Conjugate the following (825, 827, 829, 831, 
 834): 
 
 S. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 
 Pees. M. & P. 
 
 1st Aor. Mid. 
 
 2d Aor. Mid 
 
 1. 
 
 Xv(y-/iai 
 
 Xvcrw/iai 
 
 XlTTW/Xai 
 
 2. 
 
 Urj 
 
 XvCTTj 
 
 Xlttti 
 
 3. 
 
 \vrj-rai 
 
 Xicrrjrai 
 
 XtTrrjTaL 
 
 2. 
 
 XvTj'crOov 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 3. 
 
 Xv7)-(T0OV 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Xvcj-fxeOa 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Xvrj-aOe 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Xv(x}-vTai 
 
 
 
230 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 
 Perp. Mid. & Pass. 
 
 1st Aor. Pass. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 \e\vfJi.€vo<; [-7], -ov) 3 
 
 \v6(x) 
 
 2. 
 
 h 
 
 Xv9fj<s 
 
 3. 
 
 V 
 
 Xv9fj 
 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. \, 
 
 a. Observe that the long thematic vowel *^/^. of the active is 
 used in the middle and passive ; but in the aorist passive this is 
 added to the tense stem (344) ; that the forms \v66), etc., are 
 for XvOeco, etc., by contraction. 
 
 b. Observe that the primary endings of the middle are used, 
 but the primary endings of the active occur in the aorist passive 
 (344). 
 
 c. Observe that the form Xvy is for Xvrj-aat ; Xvaj} for 
 \v(T7j-aaL ; that a- is dropped aind the last two syllables are 
 contracted (27). 
 
 d. Observe that the present and aorist differ from the active 
 only in having the middle primary endings. 
 
 e. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of 
 the perfect middle and passive participle and the present sub- 
 junctive of el/jLi;^ that the participle is declined like adjectives 
 of the vowel declension (70). 
 
 Optative Middle and Passive. 
 
 576. Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 829, 
 830,831,834): 
 
 Pres. M. & P. Put. Mid 1st Aor. Mid. 
 
 S. 1. XvoL-fji7]v Xvcroi-^'iqv Xv(Tai-ixv,v 
 
 2. XvoL-o Xvcroi-o Xvcrai-o 
 
 3. XvOL-TO Xv(rOL-TO Xv(Tai-TO 
 K, T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 ^ Compare the perfect passive in Latin. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. 231 
 
 
 
 2d Aor. Mid. 
 
 Perp. Mid. & Pass. 
 
 s. 
 
 1. 
 
 XLTTOL-fir)!^ 
 
 XeXv/xeVo? (-17, -ov) el-qv 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Xlttol-o 
 
 eiTyg 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Xlttol-to 
 
 " elf] 
 
 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 
 
 Tut. Perf. M. & P. 
 
 1st Aor. Pass. 1st Put. Pass. 
 
 s. 
 
 . 1. 
 
 XeXvaoL-fjLrjv 
 
 XvOeiiq-v XvOrj(roL-fJir)v 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XeXicroL-o 
 
 Xv0€Lr)-q XvOrjcroi-o 
 
 
 3. 
 
 XeXvcroL-To 
 
 XvOeir) XvOrjCToi-TO 
 
 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 a. Observe that the same mood -suffix and thematic vowel 
 -ot {-ai in aor.) is used as in the active (554), except in the aorist 
 passive, which has -trj added to the stem (344) after the analogy 
 of verbs ir-jjh (286), but in the dual and plural, as in etrfv (573), 
 forms in -t frequently occur ; Xvdelrov for XvdeirjTOV^ etc. 
 
 d. Observe that the secondary endings of the middle are used, 
 but the secondary endings of the active occur in the aorist pas- 
 sive (344). 
 
 c. Observe that in the forms Xvol-o, etc., -a is dropped, and 
 the last two syllables are contracted (27). 
 
 d. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of 
 the perfect middle and passive participle and the present optative 
 
 of el/JLL. 
 
 577- Subjunctive and Optative in Clauses expressing 
 Purpose or Motive. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. (J)lXo)v Seirat oj? avvepyovs ^Jfj ^^ needs friends 
 that he may have co-workers, 
 
 2. (j)iXa)v iSeuTo w? avvepyovf; e^ot, he needed friends 
 that he might have co-ioorkers. 
 
232 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 3. Kvpo<; ra? pads jJLeTeTreixxjjaTO ottw? Toifq OTrXtras 
 dTro/3i/3d(T€L€v, Cyras sent for the ships, in order that he 
 might disembark the hoplites, 
 
 4. ra nXoia KareKavcrev Iva fjurj Kvpos hia^aivoi, he 
 burned the boats in order that Cyrus might not cross, 
 
 5. Kekevovcri ^vkaTTecrO ai fxr) vfxiv iTnOcjvraL ttJs 
 vvKTos ol /3dp/3apoL^ they advise you to be on your guard 
 that the barbarians may not attack you during the night. 
 
 a. Observe that purpose is expressed iu Greek as in Latin by 
 the subjunctive, but after a secondary tense of the principal verb 
 the optative is used as a secondary tense 2, 3, 4 (552). 
 
 h. Observe that a purpose clause is introduced by any of the 
 particles, ottci)?, cJ?, tm, ywr] ; that the negative is yu?; following 
 the particle, 4, but sometimes in a purpose clause iir\ alone is 
 used in the sense of that not, in order that not, 5. 
 
 578. The law of sequence of tenses in Latin — -pri- 
 mary tenses follow primary and secondary follow secon- 
 dary — becomes in Greek the law of sequence of moods : 
 the subjunctive follows primary tenses and the optative 
 secondary.^ 
 
 Rule. 
 
 579. Purpose or motive is expressed by ottw?, oj?, 
 XvcL^ that, in order that, fxrj, that not, in order that not, 
 with the subjunctive. But if the clause depends upon 
 a secondary tense, the optative may be used The neg- 
 ative is purf. 
 
 a. The subjunctive is frequently used after a secondnry tense 
 to retain the mood in which the thought originally occurred to 
 the mind. 
 
 * The optative is here regarded as a secondary tense (552). 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. 233 
 
 580. S/ibjunctive and Optative in Object Clauses after 
 Verbs of Fearing. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. oKvovcri fjLT) ol '^Ek\.7]V€<; ixeivoicri iv rfj X^P^f ^^^^V 
 fear lest the Greeks may remain in the country, 
 
 2. 0JKP7)aav fjirj ofEXXrjve^ [xeiveLav iv rrj X^P^* ^^^^ 
 feared lest the Greeks might remain in the- country. 
 
 3. SeSot/ca^ /xt) ovk ej^eu iK(kvov<^ (J)l\ov^, I fear lest 
 I may not have friends enouyh. 
 
 Observe that the clause expressing the thing feared is the ob- 
 ject of the leading verb, and is expressed bj /xt;, that, lest^ with 
 the subjunctive, but after secondary tenses of the leading verb 
 the optative is used, 2 (578) ; that the negative after /X77 is ov. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 581. After verbs of feaj^ing, caution, danger , the 
 object of the fear is expressed by />lt;, that or lest, or /x^ 
 ot>5 that not^ lest not, with the subjunctive. But after a 
 secondary tense the optative may be used (578). 
 
 582. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and perfect 
 systems middle and passive of /ceXevo), fcwXuo), Bvoi, 
 13 aaiXev CO. 
 
 583. Conjugate the present and second aorist sys- 
 tems of dyco, XetTTw, e)^&j. 
 
 584. Give the synopses of the first six tense systems 
 of \vo), KeXevcoy kcoXvcj, Ovco, ^aaikevo}. 
 
 585. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1, ot/caSe rpexpofJieOa rj incofxeOa Kvpco ; 2. Se- 
 Sot/ca^ fLTj 7) y€cj)vpa XeXv/xeVi] fj, 3. ^ovkevcofieda on 
 
 ^ Force of the present. 
 
234 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Xpr) TTOLelv iK tovtcov. 4. v/xa? dyeur LKavol eiiqixev dv. 
 5. okptJctovctl ol dyyekoi fxr) ov So^rj rjyuv Td<; cnrop^a^ 
 TTOirjO-ao-O ai. 6. wKvr)(Tav fxr) ol ^'EXXr^ve^; tol iiriTrj- 
 Seta iypiev Ik t7J<s iv /lecrw x^P^^- ^- '^ovto iiroLiqae 
 Iva TToXXa 7rpo(^aivoiTO toI^ "EXXyjau Seupa els ttjv 
 TTOpeiav, 8. dXXa ttoXXols 7Tpo(j)da'€LS Kvpo? evpidKev 
 Iva u/ictg dvdyoL. 
 
 II. 1. We would proceed homeward. 2. The 
 Greeks feared lest the king would advance against their 
 wing. 3. The king made this trench in order that the 
 way might be impassable. 4. The king is making 
 a trench in order that the way may be impassable. 
 5. Menon desired to rule that he might receive more. 
 
 586. 
 
 Seii/os, -7], -6v, fearful, ter- 
 rible ^ skilful ; TO Seivov, 
 danger, peril [SetSo)] . 
 
 TTopeidy -ds^ journey, anarch. 
 
 TTOTepos, -a, -ov, toJiich of 
 the two, whether ; irore- 
 pov . . » rj, whether . . ,or. 
 
 dv-dyoi, lead up, take up. 
 
 SetSo), BeiaofiaL, eSetcra, Se- 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SoLKa^fear, he fearful; of 
 reasonable fear. Perfect 
 has force of the present. 
 
 evpicTKO), find, devise, pro- 
 cure, et- and ei^ are of- 
 ten without augment. 
 
 y), conj., or ; T] , . .17, either 
 . . ,or ; with comp., than, 
 Lat. quam. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 235 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE 
 VERBS. — OBJECT CLAUSES WITH ottojs 
 AFTER. VERBS OF STRIVING-, ETC.— 
 VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS. 
 
 Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 199, 201, 202, a; 351, 
 
 2, 3. 
 
 Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs. 
 
 587. Some labial mute verbs (252) form the present 
 by adding rVe- to the theme. These verbs belong to 
 the third or Tau class. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 
 Theme. 
 
 Pres. Stem. 
 
 FCT. 
 
 1st Aor. 
 
 /COTTTGJ. cut 
 
 fCOTT- 
 
 KOTTT^I^, 
 
 KOXpO) 
 
 eKOxpa 
 
 KpvTTTO), hide 
 
 KpV^ 
 
 KpVTTTV,. 
 
 Kpvxfja) 
 
 eKpw\fa 
 
 ptTTTw, throio 
 
 pi^- 
 
 plTTTV,. 
 
 pixjjo) 
 
 epphpa 
 
 Observe that the, final labial of the theme becomes co-ordiiiat€ 
 (194, 1), /3 and cf) change to tt before t of the tense suffix t%-. 
 
 588. Object Clauses loith ottcjs after Verbs signifying 
 to strive for ^ to care for, to effect. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. TOVTOv eveKa cfyiXcov eSetro oj? crvvepyov^ €)(oi,for 
 the sake of this he needed friends that he might have cO' 
 loorkers. 
 
236 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 2. o-Konelv Bel otto)? tol iiTLTijBeLa e^ofxev, we must 
 consider how we shall have provisions, 
 
 3. i^ov\ev(Tev otto)^ fiyjirore ert ecrrat inL tco aoeX^w, 
 he planned that he mi(jht never a(jain he in the power of 
 his brother, 
 
 4. iirefjueXeLTo ws TToXefielv LKavol eirjaav, he tooh 
 care that they might be able to fight, 
 
 a. Observe that the purpose clause^ as in 1^ stands in appo- 
 sition to TOVTQV eveKa, 
 
 b. Observe that the clauses denoting the object aimed at, as 
 in 2 and 3, are the objects respectively of the leading verbs, and 
 may stand in apposition to an object accusative like tovto in 2 ; 
 we must consider this, Jioic we may have provisions. 
 
 c. Observe that these clauses are regularly expressed by ottg)? 
 with the future indicative aftei' both primary and secondary 
 tenses ; that the negative is fjirj, 
 
 d. Observe that these clauses implying the end of the action 
 of the leading verb are closely allied to the purpose clause, and 
 that when the object of forethought is present as in 4, these 
 clauses may be expressed as final clauses with oJ? instead of 
 
 OTTO)?. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 589. After verbs signifying to strive for, to care for, 
 to effect, the object of the endeavor is expressed by the 
 future indicative with ottw? or ottw? ixtj after both 
 primary and secondary tenses. 
 
 But the subjunctive and optative of the present or 
 aorist may be used instead of the future indicative, as 
 in final clauses (579). 
 
 590. Conjugate the present system of ayw, Trefiwo), 
 Olcoko), TreCSct), Ovco, ySacrtXcvw. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 237 
 
 591. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of ayw, 
 TTefXTTO), Blcoko), TreCOo), kotttco, and KpvTrrco. 
 
 592. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. KOTTTOvai Tov^ y8ov9 KoX ovovs. 2. Tov<; Se Kal 
 i^eKoxjjav. 3. /cat tol KTrjixard rts ov Kvpov^ €Kpv^ 
 TTTev, 4. TOL 8e aXXa els top Trorafiov eppiTrrov, 
 5. dXV iireLpOLTO ^prfcrO ai toI<; tcov aTTOKpvTTTopiivcxiv 
 -^pyjfxacTL. 6. Kv/309 eSetcre /xt) ^acnXevs KaraKoxprj to 
 'FiXXrjvLKov. 7. /3ov\ev€Tai ottws ^acrikeucrei avT 
 iKeivov, 8. Twi^ Tra/a' eavrw Se ^ap^dpojv iirefxekeLTO 
 cJ? TToXefxeLV re t/caz^ol eliqaav /cat evvoiKcos €\oi€v ^ avro). 
 9. Tou? (TTpaTLcoTa^; KaTaKoxjjaL ap irepi 7ravT0<; ttolt)- 
 craiTO Iva /cat rot? aXXot? ''EXXT^crt ip6^o<; y eVt ySacrtXea 
 [xeyav CTTpaTeveLv. 
 
 II. 1. They cast aside their arms. 2. The Greeks 
 cut down the barbarians. 3. He feared lest the bridge 
 might have been broken down. 4. I will take care 
 that you also will praise me. 5. We must consider 
 how we may remain most safely. 
 
 593. VOCABULARY. 
 
 €vvoLKa)Si adv., wit/i (jood diro-KpvTrTa), hide from, 
 will, friendly ; evvoiKO)<; conceal [apocrypha]. 
 
 ex^ivj be well disposed, eK-KonTo), cut off ; of trees, 
 friendly, etc., cat down. 
 
 KTTJfia, -aro?, to, possession, /cara-zcoTrrw, cut down, slay, 
 
 pi., property [/crao/xat]. kotttco [/cott-], Koxpo), e/coi/io, 
 
 1 See 269. 2 gee 579, a. » See p. ]92\ 
 
238 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Ke/co(^a, KeKOjJbfxaif Iko- yoiTrrw, [pt<^-] /ol^w, epplxjja, 
 
 irrjv, cut, hewy slauglder ; eppi^a, ep/Di/x/xat, ippi- 
 
 of trees, fell [chop, syn- cjydrjVy throw, hurl, hurl 
 
 copate, comma]. down^ cast aside. 
 
 KpvTTTco, [/cy3V(/)-], KpvxjjQj, (TKOTrio)^ onlj presciit and 
 
 €Kpv^a,K€KpvfjLfJiai,iKpv- impf., sp^ out, watch, 
 
 ^di)v^ hide, conceal consider, observe. (See 
 
 [crypt, grotto]. the general vocabulary). 
 
 594. R. TTiO-, fid-, bind. ircCG-co [theme ttiO-], ' bind to 
 one's self,' win over, persuade, mid., be icon over, obey, 
 trust ; verbal, ireLO-'Teo-v, one must obey ; iricr-Tos, -rj, -6v, 
 to be trusted, trusty, faithful ; iricrTO-Tiq-^, -177-09, 7), 
 faithfulness, fidelity ; ttCo-ti-s, -e-o)?, 17, trust, faith ; 
 in(TTev-o), put faith in, trust. 
 
 fid-e-s, f., trust, faith ; fid-u-s, adj., trusty ; fid-o, 
 trust ; foed-u-s, -er-is, 11., leayue, treaty. 
 
 Bind, band, bond, bundle, body. 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF 
 LIQUID VERBS. — LIQUID VERBS OF THE 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Reviewl51, 1, 2, 3, 4; 152; 153,154,2; 252,255, 
 256, 257,1, 2,a,b', 378, 1. 
 
 595. Fourth Class (Iota Class). In this class the 
 present stem is formed by adding 1%- to the theme. 
 
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 239 
 
 596. Many liquid verbs belong to the fourth class. 
 X of the thenrie, uniting with t of the tense-suffix tVeo 
 forms with it XX (378, 1). 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. Put. Aor. 
 
 aryryeXA,©, announce a^^ik- ayyeW^/^. ayyeXcj rjyyeiXa 
 ffdXKoi), throw /3aX- fia\\°/^. ffaXo) efiaXov 
 
 597. When the theme ends in v or p, i of the present 
 tense suffix (,%- is transferred and unites with the theme 
 vowel to form a diphthong. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. 
 
 Pres. Stem. 
 
 FOT. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 fCTeivco^ hill KTev- 
 
 /CTetv°/e. 
 
 /crevco 
 
 cKTetva 
 
 arjjJLaLva), arjfjLav- 
 
 arjiiaiv'^l,. 
 
 aTjfiavo) 
 
 ia-ijfirjva 
 
 ^atvco, show ^av- (f)aiv°l^. <l>ava) etprjva 
 
 XaXeTraivco, ')(^aXeTrav- x^Xeiraiv" j ^. x^Xeiravca ixaXeTrrjva 
 he angry. 
 
 598. But when the theme vowel is t or v, it becomes 
 long when i of the present tense suffix 1%. is transferred, 
 and the added t disappears. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 
 Theme. Pres. Theme. Tut. Aor. 
 
 ai(7')(yv- aiGyyv"!^. al<T)(vv(o jfo-;j/wa 
 fcpcv- Kplv°/e. KpLvco eKplva 
 
 599. Conjugate the present system of ayyiWco^ 
 ^aivoiy and pt^evco. 
 
 600. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of 
 
240 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 dyyeXXw, ayyeko), ayyekoiyn ^ or -ovy)v, etc. ; rjyy€.i\a, 
 dyyeuXcoy ayyeiKaiyn, etc. ; (fyauvo), Kplvoi, fievco, and 
 alcr^voi (832, 833). 
 
 6oi. Conjugate the second aorist system of ^aXKo), 
 i/BaXov, etc. 
 
 602. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. at aTTOvSal fievovTcov. 2. airovSa^ 17 iroXeixov 
 dirayyeXo) ; 3. ^ovXeraC tl TrapayyeiXat. 4. 01 Se 
 crrpaTiwTaL tol^; (JTparrjyol^ i)(aX4Traivov. 5. to pueyi- 
 aTov ala)(ypofjLaL on eipevcrfiaL avrov. 6. ovroi (Twe- 
 KoiXecrav tovs crrpaT'iqyov^ kol Xo^ayous, ti/a dirayyeL- 
 Xo)cn rd irapd ^acrtXew?. 7. ot ayyeXot coKvrjcrav fxr) 
 ov ol "EXXT^i^eg diroKpivaivro fiaauXel. 8. ala^vopieOai 
 Koi Oeov^ KoX dvdpcjTTovs Tavra iroieiv. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 603. Many verbs governing the accusative in Greek 
 are translated into English with a preposition. Thus, 
 alcr^vvoixai^ be ashamed of or before ; (fyevyco, fee from ; 
 iTTLopKeo), swear falsely by ; pLepco, await for ; Xavd.dvo), 
 escape the notice of, etc. 
 
 604. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. We will truly announce these things. 2. There- 
 upon the horses appeared. 3. Let us announce these 
 things. 4. What shall I announce ? 5. I would 
 announce these things. 6. We were ashamed both 
 before gods and men to deceive him. 
 
 . ^ Coutracted form ; explain the contraction in the subjunctive and 
 optative. 
 
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 241 
 
 605. VOCABULARY. 
 
 alcrx^vcoy alcr^vvo)^ ^cr^^vra, iK-^dX\(o, throw out, banish, 
 yaxv^^V^y .9/^^^?^^ ; mid. ea^pel, 
 
 as pass, dep., de or feel Kpivo), Kpivco, eKplva, k€- 
 ashamed. KpiKa^ KeKpupLai, iKpi- 
 
 oLTro-KpipojxcLL, malcs answer, 07] v, distingwish, judge, 
 
 answer. estimate [critic]. 
 
 pdWcoy ySaXo), e^akov, /3e- Kjeivoi, KTevco, eKTeiva, 2d 
 ^XrjKa,^ fiefiXrjfjiaL, i^Xij- pert'., diriKTova, MIL (See 
 
 ^171^, throw y cast, the general vocabulary.) 
 
 606. Translate into Greek :^ 
 
 Thence Cyrus marches a three days' journey, twenty 
 parasangs, to Celaenae, a populous city of Phrygia, 
 large and prosperous. Here Cyrus had a palace and a 
 large park full of wild animals. Through the middle of 
 the park flows the Maeander river, and its sources rise 
 under the palace ; it flows also through the city Celae- 
 nae. The great king also has a palace in Celaenae near 
 the sources of the river. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF 
 MUTE VERBS (co^^mi^ed). — MUTE VERBS OF 
 THE FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 
 a ; 204, 309, a ; 351, 2, 3 ; 378, 1, 2 ; 471, 472, 473, 
 474, 492, 493. 
 
 ^ The stem suffers metathesis (/3aX-, ^Xa-) (p. 215 ^). 
 
 '^ A few verbs in vco drop v in the perfect and first passive systems. 
 
 8 Cf. 107, 458. - 
 
 16 
 
242 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 607. Many palatal mute verbs belong to the fourth 
 class, forming the present by adding 17^. to the theme. 
 K or X unites with the l of this present tense suffix, 
 forming with it tt, y unites with the t, forming gener- 
 ally TT, sometimes ^ (378, 2). 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. Piies. Stem. Eut. Aor. 
 
 1. rdrTco, arrange ra'y- TaTT°/e. rafft) era^a 
 
 2. TT/aaTTOJ, do Trpay- Trparr^/e. irpd^o) eirpa^a 
 8. ^uXarro), guard (j^vXaK- (j)v\aTT°/e. (f)v\d^a) icfivXa^a 
 
 Observe that in the future and aorist k and 7 with a of the 
 tense suffix 0-%- or aa- form f (194, 2). 
 
 608. Many lingual mutes with themes ending in 8 
 form the present stem by adding the tense suffix tVe.. 
 8 unites with this l forming { (200). These verbs be- 
 long to the fourth class. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem, Put. Aor. 
 
 1. aOpoi^oa^GoUect aOpoiZ- aOpoC^^I^. aOpoura) fjOpoiaa 
 
 2. dpird^oo^ seize dpirah- dpTra^^/^. dpTrdcrco rfpiraaa 
 
 3. davpid^co^ Oavpuah- OavpLa^^/^. Oavp^daopai idavpuaaa 
 
 admire 
 
 4. vopi^co, iJiinh vopiZ- vopil^^l^. vopLtca evopiaa 
 
 5. (Tco^co, save acoS- <jo)f%, o-oxrco ecroyaa 
 
 a. Verbs in -l^co of more than two syllables, with themes in 
 tS- regularly drop -a of the future and insert e, then teco and 
 teopLai are contracted to lS) and tovp^ai. This is called the Attic 
 Future (254). 
 
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 243 
 
 6og. Two vowel verbs belong to the Fourth class, — 
 Kaio), bur 71^ and /cXaiw, weep, KaCo) is thus formed : 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. Put. Aor. 
 
 Kaua^ hum Kav- KaC"!^. (for Kav-C^j^^) Kavaca eKavaa 
 
 a. V is dropped between two vowels (290, b ; 363, a ; 528). 
 Attic prose uses kuq} instead of Kaico ; c is dropped between 
 two vowels and a lengthened. 
 
 610. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of 
 dyco, ap^(t)t Tre/xTTW, rarrw, (^vXoltto), pofXi^o), crco^^co, 
 
 KpVTTTQ), and pLTTTCO. 
 
 611. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of \vo), 
 KOiXvco, TTOpevco, Trotco), (f>aLvoj, KTeivo), (TrjfiaLPCo, 
 
 6i2. Denominative verbs of the Fourth Class : 
 
 1. ipi^o), strive (for ipiS-Loj), from epis [eptS-], strife, 
 
 2. aOpoL^o), collect (for dOpoL^-ico), from d9p6o-^ 
 \_d0pO'O-'], in a bodfj. 
 
 3. dvayKal^co, comjjel (for dpayKaS-Lco), from dvdyKrj 
 [dvayK-d'~\ , necessity. 
 
 4. ala)(vva)y shame (for aicr)(yv-L(t}), from ala^vy] 
 [atcr^ui^-d-] , shame, 
 
 5. (77) [xaivcoy signify (for crr^/xai^-to)), from arjjxa [o'rj- 
 /xar-], sign. 
 
 G. yaXeiraivo), be angry (for yoX^TTCkv-ioi)^ from yaXe- 
 7r6<s [xaXcTT-o-], angry. 
 
 7. dyyeWco, announce (for dyyeX-icu), from ayyeXo? 
 [ayyeX-o-], messenger, 
 
 a. Observe that e/ot'^o) is formed by affixing the present tense 
 suffix tVc- to the stem of the noun. 
 
244 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 h. Observe that, by analogy, many denominative verbs in 
 -tjcw and -afo) are formed, 2, 3. 
 
 c. Observe that in like manner themes in -av and -vv of verbs 
 in -aiva) and -vvo) come from stems without v, 6, 6. 
 
 d. Observe that the final vowel of the stem is often omitted 
 when the suffix 1°/^. is added, 4, 7. 
 
 613. SamMary of the Euphonic Changes of Consonants 
 before t. 
 
 1. X with I forms W. 
 
 2. After V and p, i j)asses over to the preceding vowel 
 and unites with it by contraction. But if the preceding 
 vowel is I or v, it becomes long when i is transposed (598). 
 
 3. AC, y, X' ^^id sometimes r and 6, with i become tt, 
 
 a. VT with this t becomes va- in the feminine of participles and 
 adjectives (p. 89^), in which v is regularly dropped and the 
 preceding vowel is lengthened ; r with i sometimes becomes -crc7- 
 (p. 200^), %a)0tet9, j^apieaaa, 'x^apUv, 
 
 4. 8 (sometimes y or yy) with t forms ^. 
 
 614. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. TovTo Trpd^co. 2. TTOLvra ecrcacrav. 3. cKaov 
 ra TrXota. 4. ttjv yecfivpav i(j)vXd^apTo. 5. t^ Se 
 KtXtcrcra ttjv tol^iv tov crrpareu/xaro? iOavfxacre. 
 G. o-rjfxavel on XPV '^oielv. 7. ivLKrjO'e Mapavdi^ 
 ipL^opTa ol Trepl cro(j6ta9. 8. ixeit^oiv rj irpd^LS rrjs 
 TTpoaOev (fyaLveraL. 9. kol ^acrtXeu? Srj, inel rjKovcre 
 TLO-(ra(j)epvovs top Kvpov arokov, dvTLTTapecTKevd^eTO. 
 10. ra To^evfjiara r^vdyKal^ov ol "EWrjve'; eK/SdWetv 
 Tovs fiap/3dpov<;. 11. ravra? rets ct/xafa? fJL€ard<; 
 aXevpcop Kal olvov TrapecrKevdcraTo. 
 
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 245 
 
 II. 1. They saved their property. 2. The Cilicians 
 guarded the tents. 3. They admired the army. 4. But 
 he will signify what he will do. 5. He conquers those 
 who have been drawn up before the king. 
 
 615. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dXevpa, -a)v, t a, flour. 7rapa-(TKevd(^a) [-cr/ceva8-], 
 
 dvayKoi^a), dvayKacrcoy etc., -daw, etc., ^et ready, 
 
 force, compel. prepare ; mid., provide 
 
 dvTL'TTapacTKevd^oiJiaL, pre- [crKevy], equipmenf.~\ 
 
 pare one's self in tarn. arjfjLaLPO), (T7)fxav(t>, etc., 
 
 ipL^o), rjpLaa, strive, con- show hy sign, give signal, 
 
 tend, w. dat. signify. 
 
 Kaco, Kavcrco, eKavcra, k€- TdrTO), rd^o), etc., arraiige, 
 
 KavKa, KeKavpuai, eKav- order, draw up ; mid. 
 
 Orjv, hum [caustic]. and pass., he stationed 
 
 [tactics] . 
 
 616. R. d/c-, ac-, pointed^ sharp, swift. cLk-cov, -ovt- 
 09, 6, javelin ; dKovTiQcn, hurl the javelin ; d/c-po-s, -a, 
 'ov, at the point or end., highest ; aKpo-v, to, height, dKpo- 
 7roXt-9, -€-0)9, rj (770X19, city), upper city, citadel, wk-v-s, 
 -eta, 'Vy sioift. . iiriro-s, 6, 17 (for t/c-/ro-9)j horse ('the swift 
 one') ; LTT7r-apxo'<;, 6 (R. dpx; 526), cavalry commander; 
 (^1X1-77770-9, -ov {^iko%, fond\ fond of horses ; hnr-iKo-^, 
 -6v, of a horse or of cavalry ; t7777-eu-9, -e-0J9, o, horseman ; 
 LTTTrev-o), ride ; d(j)i7nrev'0}, ride hack. 
 
 ac-ie-s, -ei, f., sharp edge, line of hattle ; ac-er, adj., 
 sharp, pungent. eq.u-u-s, -1, m., horse ; equ-es, -it-is, m., 
 a horseman ; equ-ester, -tris, -tre, adj., equestrian. 
 
 Edge, egg (' Q^g on,' goad) ; acme, acro-bat, acro- 
 polis, etc. ; ox-ide, oxy-gen, oxy-tone, etc. 
 
246 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 REG-ULAR VERBS IN /xt. 
 
 tCTTT^jLtt. 
 
 Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 153, 154, 2; 
 229, 3, a ; 286, 287, 288, 300, 309, 315, 323, a, h, c, d; 
 344, 350, a, b; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 417, 530, 531, 
 obs.; 544, 553,obs.; 554, «, i5,c; 573, «,^; 574,575, 
 a, b, c, d; 576, a, b, c ; 578. 
 
 617. Verbs in /xt form their present and second 
 aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second perfect, 
 by adding the personal endings directly to the theme, 
 omitting the variable vowel except in the subjunctive. 
 Tenses thus inflected are called /xi forms. In other 
 tenses verbs in /xt are inflected like verbs in w. 
 
 618. Monosyllabic themes are often reduplicated : 
 yiyvofxaL (533, 2), StSw/it [So"]j ^^id tlOtjixl [^e-]. 
 10-717 jutt has reduplication : t for cri, o-L-o-TrjjjiL, theme 
 crra-(533, obs.*). 
 
 619. T/te Active of to-TTj/xt [crra-], place, set (847, 
 851). 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Sdbj. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 t(TT7)fJLl 
 
 ICTTO) 
 
 IcTTairjv 
 
 
 lo-rdvai 
 
 2. 
 
 ICTTiq^ 
 
 IcTTfj^ 
 
 l(TTaLrj<; 
 
 lo-TT) 
 
 
 3. 
 
 LOTrja-L 
 
 la-TTJ 
 
 IcTTaLy] 
 
 IcTOLTCti 
 
 
 D. 3. 
 
 la-Tarov 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X, 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Part. 
 
 3. 
 
 IcTTaTOV 
 K. T. X. 
 
 
 
 
 Icrrds 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN )Ltt. 
 
 Imjpf. S. 1. l(TT7]p, 2. Icrry]^, 3. lo-rr). 
 
 247 
 
 D. 
 
 2. ia-Tarov, 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 3. la-TaTT] 
 
 V, /c.r.X. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SuBJ. Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 S. 1. eCTTTJV 
 
 (TTO} cTTaCrjv 
 
 
 arrival 
 
 2. €aT7)<; 
 
 (TTYJ^ (TTair]^ 
 
 CTTTJUL 
 
 
 3. eCTTT] 
 
 (TTTJ CTTairj 
 
 aTTJTO) 
 
 Part. 
 
 /c. r. X. 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. 
 
 K. r. X. 
 
 ora?. 
 
 «. The dual and plural of the present and second aorist 
 optative of the regular [jll forms may be contracted : laralrov, 
 etc. (573). 
 
 b. Observe that : 1. The final vowel of the theme is lengthened 
 in the singular of the present and imperfect indicative active, 
 and in all forms of the second aorist before a single consonant, 
 or wherever the ending is lacking. 2. In the present singular 
 indicative the endings -fit, and -<7t are retained, and the third 
 person plural ends in -den contracted to da-t} 3. The third 
 person plural of the secondary tenses has -aav (116, 300, 573). 
 
 c. Observe that : 1. The subjunctive has the long variable 
 vowel "/^. as in the verbs in a) (553, obs.*), but contracted 
 with the theme. 2. The contracted forms arise as if from a 
 theme in e {lare-^ are- which appear in Ionic), (151, 2, 3). 
 
 d. Observe that : 1. The mood suffix of the optative is -irj 
 before the active endings (elsewhere -t) (574). 2. The second 
 aorist system differs from the present mainly in rejecting the 
 reduplication 2 (531). 
 
 e. Observe that the present imperative Xarrj omits -Oi and 
 lengthens the stem vowel; that 6l is retained in the second 
 aorist. 
 
 ^ -aai is not contracted with other vowels of the theme. 
 2 Let the pupil form the second aorist from the present system by re- 
 jecting the reduplication, etc. 
 
248 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 f. Observe that the infinitive has -vai. 
 
 g. Observe that the participles have the same stem ending as 
 the verbs in w {vr), terras (for laravr^^ ; that they have the same 
 accent as participles in cu9 (350^ ^). 
 
 620. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of laTrifjiL {stetu 
 ecrra- for o-ecrra-). 
 
 Ind. 
 S. 1. (eaTrjKa) 
 stand. 
 
 Second Perfect (855). 
 Sub J. Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 2. (ecTTTyfca?) icTTrj^ ecrraiT7S iaraOi 
 
 3. (eaTTjKe) ^ctttj iarair) kcTrdroi 
 
 2. eararov k.t.X. k.t.X. k.t.X. 
 
 3. ecrraTov 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Second Pluperfect. 
 
 S. 1. {i(TT7]Kri or elaTTJKr)), stood. 
 
 2. (karrjKiqf;) D. 2 
 
 3. {iaTTJKei) 3 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ecrravai 
 
 Part. 
 
 ecTTaTov 
 
 Observe that the singular of the perfect and pluperfect is sup- 
 plied by the first forms ; that the perfect has the force of the 
 present, and the pluperfect of the imperfect. 
 
 621. The second aorist of lo-rTy/xt, both perfects and 
 pluperfects active, and the middle except the first aorist, 
 
 * Contracted from iaraas -. 
 
 eoTtoy iaraxra iaros, or earas 
 
 i(rTS)Tos iaraarjs ecrrairos 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
RP^GULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 249 
 
 are intransitive. This distinction applies to their nu- 
 merous compounds. 
 
 622. Fassive and Middle of larywLi^ (847, 851). 
 
 Present. 
 Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. 
 
 S. 1. tcrra/xat tcrrw/iat l(TTa,i\Jjr]v LCTTaaOai 
 
 2. tcrracrat IcrTrj tcrrato Lcrracro 
 
 3. IcrraTaL larrJTaL tcrratro IcTTOLijOo} Part. 
 
 K. T. \. K. T. X. /C. T. X. K. T. X. l(TTdfJLeV0^ 
 
 Impf- S. ]. la'Td[xr]i', 2. IcrTacro, 3. Icrraro, /c. r. X. 
 
 Observe that : 1. In the middle the final vowel of the theme 
 is not lengthened. 2. The mood suffix of the optative is -t- 
 (619, d), contracted with the theme vowel, and hence the con- 
 tracted form takes the accent. 3. In other respects the middle 
 differs from the active in having the middle endings ; cr in the 
 endings -crat and -ao is retained in the indicative and imperative 
 (27, 318), but dropped in the subjunctive and optative. 
 
 623. Decline (like XuVa?, 229, 3, a) (823) : 
 
 e ji 
 
 LcrTa<; 
 
 IcTTacra 
 
 lo-Tav 
 
 to-raz/ro? 
 
 IcTTaar]^ 
 
 laToipTO^ 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K, T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this ? 
 
 6. Monosyllabic participles are accented in the genitive and 
 dative on the penult, and do not conform to the rule for mono- 
 syllables (209). 
 
 ^ loTj^fiL has no second aorist middle, firpidfxrjv, I bought [Trpta-], is 
 added (846). 
 
250 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 624. Conjugate the present system of TTi^irXiqyLi'^ 
 [7rX.a-] . 
 
 625. Conjugate the present system of 8uj/a/xai^ 
 [Svj^a-], be able, eVto-Ta/iat ^ [eTTtcrra-], understayid. 
 
 626. Write the synopsis in the present and second 
 aorist systems of icrrTy/xt. 
 
 627. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. laTCJfxeOa. 2. ol Be ^dp^apoi ovk icrTrjcrav. 
 3. ol 8e TToXeixLOL OVK av IcrraivTO. 4. Karicrrrj et9 
 T7)v ^aaiKeiav 'Aprafep^T/?. 5. ecrrrjo-e to dpfia irpo 
 Trjs (j)dXayyo<; fiecrrjs. 6. 6 8e €/x7rt/i7rXa9 dirdpTCJP Trjv 
 yvcofjLTjv aTreirefjiTTev. 7. irapd KXiap^ov 8e iTvyyave 
 k(TTr\K(ji%, 8. Tore 8* d<f>€LO'TiJKeaap tt/oo? Kvpop irdcrai 
 TrXrjj/ MlXtJtov. 9. /cat 'aevCa, 09 avro) TrpoeicrTrjKeL 
 Tov iv TOLS TToXeau ^evLKOv, '^Keuv irapayyeXXei. 10. ol 
 8e KoX earacrav diropovvre^ rw rrpdypiaTi. 11. e)^€t 8e 
 8vvap.LP /cat lirmKrjv /cat vavTLKrjv rjv 7rdvTe<; opcofjuev re 
 /cat iina-rdfjieOa. 12. aXX' eS ye fxevroL imo-TdcrOoia'av 
 OTL ov d7ro7re(f)€vya(TLv. 
 
 II. 1. Let the soldiers stand. 2. I know how to 
 be ruled. 3. He will be able to stand. 4. There- 
 upon the barbarians took their places on the left. 
 5. Cyrus halted with the noblest and most prosperous 
 about him. 6. But the horsemen of the barbarian 
 army to the number of a thousand stood on the right 
 near Clearchus. 
 
 1 The reduplication is strengthened by the nasal fi. 
 
 2 Accent the subjunctive and optative as if there were no contraction, 
 bvvcofiaij dvvaiTo, etc. See eVpiti/xrji/ (851). 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 
 
 251 
 
 628. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^aaiXeid, -a9, kingdom^ roy- Ka6-LaT7jfJiLj set doimi, ap- 
 
 alfy [^acriXev?]. jjoM ; iutrans., take one s 
 
 d(l)-LcrT7jfjLLy remove, make re- place, he established, 
 
 volt ; intrans., revolt. 7TLfJiTr\r)ixi,7r\T]cro},^ II [till, 
 
 hvpafJLaL, Swrjcrofiai, SeSu- FULL, plethora]. 
 
 vr)iJLaL, iSvv7]9rjv, he ahle, 7rpo-L(TT7jfXL, put at the head 
 
 he capable [dynamic]. of ; intrans., he at the 
 
 iyi-TTiixTrhqixi^Jlll up, satisfy. head of command, w. gen . 
 
 eV-Tvyx^^^? c//«72C^ upon, 
 
 meet, 
 eTTtcrra/xat, e7ncrT>^cro/iat, 
 
 '^'7TL(TT7]6r)v, understand, 
 
 know, know hotv. 
 LCTTiqfJiL, arrjao), €(rTr)cra, 
 
 icTTrjv, ecTTrfKa, ecrra/xat, 
 
 i(TT(i6'r)v,set, make stand; 
 
 intrans., stand, halt. 
 
 ye, enclitic and postposit. 
 intens. particle, even, at 
 least, indeed ; emphasizes 
 the preceding word, etc. ; 
 often to be indicated in 
 Eng. only by emphasis. 
 
 ir\rjv, conj., except, except 
 that; improper prep., 
 except. 
 
 629. aXXo9, other. aXXos, -17, -ov, another, other; 
 dXXa, conj. (neut. plur. with changed accent, in ariother 
 way), but ; aXXo)?, adv., in another way or manner, other- 
 wise. SXkO'Oev, adv., from another place ; aXXtiX-cov, 
 reduplicated stem dXX-T^Xo- (405), of one another. dX- 
 Xdrro) (dXXay-), make over, change, exchange. 
 
 aliu-s, adj., another, other; ali-quis, pron. indef., 
 some one ; ali-enu-s, adj., of another, strange, foreign, 
 hostile ; al-ter, adj., the other (of two) ; alter-nus, adj., 
 one after the other, alternate. 
 
 ELSE ; all-egory, allo-pathy, par-allel. 
 
:252 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS. — PERFECT 
 MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 
 
 Review 198, 245, 252, 314, a; 317, 318, 319, 1, 2, 
 320, 321, 322, a-, 325, 351, 5; 553, 554, 573, 575, 
 576. 
 
 630. Pifth Class (Nasal Class). Verbs of the Fifth 
 Class form their present by adding a suffix containing 
 V to the theme. 
 
 631. Some verbs add the suffix 1/%. to the theme. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme, Pres. Stem. Fut. Aob, 
 
 1. refivco, cut reft- T6fjLv°/^. re^Si erefjLov 
 
 era/JLOv 
 
 2. ^6 dvco, anticipate (f)da- (j)dav°/e. ^Orjo-oixai €(f)6aaa 
 
 3. fiaivco, {/o ^a-^ ^av- ^aiv" I ^. ^rja-ofjiaL efi-qv'^ 
 
 (for jSav-L''/,.) 
 
 4. iXavi^co, march iXa- iXavv^/^. iXco rjXaaa 
 
 (for i\a-vv°/^,) (for iXdaco) 
 
 a. Observe that ^aivco belongs both to the fourth and fifth 
 classes, but the liquid form of the stem is found only in the 
 present system. 
 
 b. Observe that iXavvo) is for eXa-vv-co ; that v and v are trans- 
 posed ; and that its future is formed hke that of KaXeco (254). 
 
 ^ ^aivo) has second aorist e^rjv of the -/ni form (619, b), e^r^v, ^S), ^airju, 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 
 
 253 
 
 632. Some consonant themes add the suffix aj/Ve-* 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aor. 
 
 alaOdvofjiai^ alad- alaOav^j^. aladrjao/JLat^ rjcrOofjLrjV 
 
 perceive 
 
 d/JLaprdvo)^ miss dfJuapT- djiaprav^ I ^. dfiapT'qo-o/jiat^ rjfjLapTov 
 
 633. If the last vowel of the theme of verbs taking 
 the present tense suffix ai^°/,. is short and followed by a 
 single consonant, another nasal is inserted after this 
 vowel ; fM^ is inserted before a labial, y before a palatal, 
 and t* before a lingual. 
 
 Examine the following : * 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 2d Aor. 
 eXaffov 
 eXaOov 
 
 1. Xafiffdvco, take Xa^- Xa/JLffav°/^. Xrjy^ofJLai^ 
 
 2. Xavddvco, escape XaO- XavOav^/^. Xrjaco^ 
 
 the notice of 
 
 3. pLavBdv(o^ learn /JLa6- fMavOav°/e. fJLa67]ao/jLai^ efiadov 
 
 4. TTwddvofJiaL, TTvO- 7rvv6av°/e. irevao^ai^ eTTvOofjLrjv 
 
 learn hy inquiry. 
 
 5. TV'y')(^av(o^ 
 
 TV^' Tvy'x^ai/'/e. Tev^ofjbai €tv)(^ov 
 
 634. A few themes add P€°/^., 
 Examine the following : 
 
 ^ The theme assumes e, as in some verbs of the first class (522), in all 
 the systems that occur except the present and second aorist. 
 
 2 The nasal is in fact p changed to /x before labials and y before palatals 
 (194, 4). 
 
 ^ Some themes of verbs of this class are lengthened as in verbs of 
 class 11 (527), in other systems than the present and second aorist. 
 
 * See 522. 
 
254 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aon. 
 
 1. LKveo/JLaL^ come U- Uve''/^. L^ofiat l/cofxrjv 
 
 2. v7r-i(TXveo^ai^ o-e%- -to-;^i^e**/e. -ax^ofMat -eaxofJ^r/V 
 
 promise 
 
 a. -icrx' of the present stem is from tcr^o), for cnax-, lo'X' 
 (533, obs.^), the reduplicated theme of e%a>, at-aex-- 
 
 635. Conjugate the perfect middle system of \vo), 
 KeXevd), kcdXvci), Ovcoy TLfidco, TTOiid), Sr]\6a) (829, 830, 
 836). 
 
 636. Conjugate the second aorist system of aiaOdvo- 
 (jiai, Xayi^dvo}^ \av6dvo)^ rvyxdvo), LKpeo/JiaL. 
 
 637. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. /cat XafiopTe^;^ rd oirXa iraprjaav ets 2a/o8ei9. 
 2. erv^e ra^^t? avTco eTTOfxevrj t(x)v ottXltcjp. 3. ivravOa 
 hri Kvpov aTTOTefiveraL r) X^V V Sefia. 4. rjcrOero otl 
 TO Mevojpof; arpdrevfia TJSr) ev KtXt/cta rjv eicro) tcov 
 6p4ot)v. 5. TovTov Sta^a? i^eXavveu hid Opvyia? 
 crra6p})v iva 7rapaadyya<; okto) et? KoXocrcra?. 6. iv 
 Tavda d(j)LKeTO tj ^vevvecno^ yvvrj tov KlXlkcov ^acn- 
 Xelw? Trapd Kvpov. 7. ttjv 8e 'FiWrjPLKTjv BvvafJiLP yjdpOL- 
 l^ev ojg /xctXtcrra i7nKpv7TT6fJLepo<;, ottoj? on aTrapaaKevo- 
 rarov \d/3oL ^acnXea. 8. dva^aivei ovv 6 Kvpo^ Xa^cov 
 TL(T(Ta(j)epvrjv w? (fyCXov, kol tcov 'EXXt^z^wj^ Se e^wi^ ottXl- 
 ra? dvi^y] rpiaKocriov^. 9. TTefjLxjjcjfjiev 8e /cat npoKaTa- 
 Xrjxjjofievov^ ^ ra aKpa, oiroyq puy) (j)9dcra)crL pLrjre Kv/)OS 
 jLLT^Ve 01 KtXt/c€? /caraXaySoVre?.* 
 
 ^ XaiM^vto has second aorist imv. Xa/Sc. 
 
 2 Often rendered «?«V^, like excoj/. 
 
 8 Sc. ai/Spar. 4 cf. 248, 9. 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 255 
 
 II. 1. These arrived in Sardis for him. 2. But 
 Cyrus accordingly went upon the mountains. 3. And 
 he promised gold to them. 4. And he took the money 
 and collected an army by this means.^ 5. And Cyrus 
 learned of the difficulty by inquiry. 6. But he de- 
 scended through this plain and inarched four stages, 
 twenty-five parasangs, into Tarsus. 
 
 638. VOCABULARY. 
 a-irapd'CTKevo^, -ov, unpre- /Sa/iat, i^dOrjv, come, go 
 
 pared [o-k€u>;, equip- [venio, comE; basis]. 
 
 ment\. iTn-KpvTTTO), conceal, hide. 
 
 dTTO-rejLirft), -Tejicoy cut off, 7r/>o-/caTa-Xa/xy8aj^a>, preoc- 
 
 intercept. cupy. 
 
 d(j)'LKP€OfJLaL {iKveofjLai, 1^0- TTvvOdvoyiai, TrevaofxaL, inv- 
 
 fiat, iKOfJLTjj/, Lyixai), ar- Oofirjv, Trenvo-fJiaL, learn 
 
 rive, return. hy inquiry, inquire, ask, 
 
 ^aiv(x} {/3a-, ^av-), ^rjcro- vir-icrxveoyiaL, -crxV^^ofjiaL, 
 
 fJLai, e^iqv, fie^rjKa, ^4- -€(Txofir)v, -ecrxniJ^OLL, 
 
 2)7^07nise. 
 
 639. R. pLK, IK, vie, arrive, dwell. d<t)-iK-V€-o-fjiat, 
 come to, arrive ; lK-av6-s, "rj, -ov, coming up to the needs 
 or demands, sufficient, able, oik-o-s, 6 (/rocfco?), a dwell- 
 ing-place, house, home ; oiK-Cd, -a?, house, dwelling ; olko-l, 
 at home ; olko:0€t/, away from home ; ot/c-a-Se, home- 
 ward ; oIko-v6\lo-^, 6 (t'OjLio?, la?o), one who controls a 
 household, steward ; olKe-rr)-';, -ov, member of ones house- 
 hold, servant ; oIk4-co, dwell, have a home. 
 
256 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 vicu-s, -i, in., ahode, village ; vic-inn-s, adj., of the vil- 
 lage, near, neighboring ; vil-la, ae, f., country-seat. 
 
 -WICK, -wich(508, 12), di-ocese, eco-nomy, ecumen- 
 ical, par-ochial. 
 
 640. Cyrus plans to become King, and secretly raises a Greek 
 Army. 
 
 Review 146, 237, 238, 239, cJ? (241), 380, 1, 4 ; 381, 
 382, on (388), 398, 433, 437, 464, a-, 466. 
 
 4. *0 8' (wg OLTTTJXde KLpSvvevcra<5 kol dTLiJiaa6el<;, ^ov- 
 Xeverau ottw? fjurjirore ert ecrrai eVt ro) dSeXc^w, dXX', rjv 
 hvv7]Tai^ /Sacnkevaei avT eKeCvov. IlapucraTt? jxev Stj 
 rj jJLiJTrjp vTrTjp^e tco Kvpco, c^tXovcra avTOv p^aXkov 7) top 
 jBaa-iXevovTa 'ApTa^ep^rjp. 
 
 5. ''Ocm9 S' a(j)LKveLTO tcov irapa pacn\€(o<; 7rpo9 
 avTov, 7rdvTa<; ovtco Start^et? d7r€7re/x7rero wcr^' avTco 
 fjbdWov <^iXov9 eivau ^ rj ^acriXei. kol tcov Trap* iavrco 
 8e ^ap^dpoiv ^ eireixekeiro, cu9 iroXepieiv re iKavol elrjaav 
 Kai €vvo'lk(o<; e^oiev avrco. 
 
 6. Trjv 8e ^EWrjPLKrjv SvvafJLLV rfOpoit^ev w? /xdXtcrra 
 iovvaTO^ iTTLKpvTTTOfJievof;, oVw? otl dirapacKevoTaTov 
 Xa^oL ^aaikia. wSe ovv iiroieiTO rrjv crvXkoyTjv.^ 
 OTTOcra? et;^€ (ftvXaKa^ ^ eV rat? TroXecrt, irapriyyeiKe ro2<; 
 (f>povpap-^oL<; e/cctcrrot? Xafji/Bapetv dvhpa^ liekorrovvT)- 
 (TLOv<; on Tr\ei(TTOv^ koX ^SeXricrrov?, w? iin^ovkeuovTO^^ 
 
 ^ ^1/ dvvrjrai, if he should be able, if possible (687). 
 
 ^ Governed by wore, denoting the result which the action of the leading 
 
 verb tends to produce. 
 
 ^ Explain the construction. 
 
 * ois ebvvaro, etc., as most he was able. 
 
 ^ Give the derivation. 
 
 « Cf. 444, 10. 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL, 
 
 257 
 
 TLcr(Ta(j)€pvov<; rat? TroXecTL, /cat yap rjcrav ^ at 'Iw^t/cat 
 TToXets TLO'cra(f)epvov<; to ap^aiov Ik /SacrtXeo)? 8e8o- 
 fievai' Tore 8e d<^€tcrT7^/cecra^' tt/dos Kupoit' Tracrat ttXt)!' 
 MtXT^Vou. 
 
 oLTrTJkOe, 2 aor. of arr-ip^oyuai, go away^ back, 
 
 ovTO) 8taTt^et9, <^o disposing, pres. part, of hiariOiqpii, 
 
 arrange, dispose. 
 
 hehojxivai, having been given, perf. part. mid. or pass. 
 
 of StSw/xt, yiy^. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS IN /xt. — StSw/ii. 
 
 Review Lesson LIV., 151, 1, 2, 3; 152, 153, 
 154, 3. 
 
 641. Active o/SiScofiL [So'lgive (848, 852). 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 IMV. 
 
 Tnf. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 StSwjitt 
 
 8t8ft) 
 
 SlSoL7]P ^ 
 
 
 hihovai 
 
 2. 
 
 8t8a)9 • 
 
 8t8&>? 
 
 81801179 
 
 8t8ov 
 
 
 3. 
 
 8t8&>(7t 
 
 8t8(w 
 
 St8ot77 
 
 8t8dTa) 
 
 Part. 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 hiSoTOV 
 
 /C. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 8t8oi;9 
 
 3. 
 
 SiSoroT/ 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 The impf. ri(rav is used with to apxaiov of a time prior to the main 
 action, as plupf., but to denote a continued act, — had originally belonged., 
 used to belong. The imperfect in this sense is usually preceded bj o5, 
 ore, etc. (314, a ; 433, N. 2). 
 
 2 See 619, a. 
 
 17 
 
258 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Impf, S. 1. eStSow, 2. I'^l^ov'i, 3. eStSov^ 
 D. 2. eStSoTo^', 3. €8180x171/, 
 
 k:. t. X. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 1. (e8ft>/ca) 
 
 Soi 
 
 80117 J' 
 
 
 Souj/at 
 
 2. (ISw/ca?) 
 
 8&J9 
 
 806179 
 
 809 
 
 
 3. (eSwfce) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 80177 
 
 8oT&> 
 
 Part. 
 
 2. €80x01^ 
 
 K. r. X. 
 
 fC.T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 80US 
 
 3. cSoTT^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 /C. T. X. 
 
 
 
 
 
 a. Observe that in tlie imperfect indicative active iSiSovv, etc. 
 (instead of cBlBcov, etc.), are formed as if from a contract verb in 
 00) (SlBoco for SiScofjii). 
 
 h. Observe that oo), 077?, 077 in the subj. of verbs in -ft)/w, are 
 contracted to w, (»?, « (151, 3). 
 
 c. Observe that in the present imperative active hihov (instead 
 of hihoBi) is formed as from a contract verb in 0© (154, 3). 
 
 d. Observe that the part. SlSov^ is for 8tSovT<? (^^^) ff )• 
 
 e. Observe that : 1. The singular of the second aorist is lack- 
 ing, and it is supplied by the first aonst eSco/ca, etc., formed by 
 the tense suffix -/ca for -era (197). 2. The second aorist by 
 exception does not lengthen its final theme vowel. 
 
 f. Observe that in the second aorist imperative 80? is irregular 
 for Sodt. 
 
 g. Observe that the second aorist infinitive Sovvat (for 3o- 
 €vai) is formed with the ending -evai. • 
 
 k. Observe that the second aorist system difi'ers in the main 
 from the present in rejecting the reduplication (619, dj 2). 
 
 642. Middle and passive of SiScofjn (848, 852). 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN fit. 259 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. 
 
 S. 1. StSo/xat StSw/xat hihoifxrjv SiSoadai 
 
 2. SiSocrai StSoi St8oto StSocro 
 
 3. StSorat StSoirat StSotro StSdcr^w Part. 
 
 /c. r. X. /c. r. X. k. r. X. /c. r. X. hiSofxevos 
 
 Imj)/, S. 1. iSiSoixrjv, 2. eStSocro, 3. eSiSoro, fc.r. X. 
 
 
 SECONiD AORIST.l 
 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SuBJ. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 S. 1. ihofirjp 
 
 8a)/xat 
 
 hoifJLTjV 
 
 
 Sdo-^at 
 
 2. ehov 
 
 Sw 
 
 Solo 
 
 Sov 
 
 
 3. eSoro 
 
 Swrat 
 
 Sotro 
 
 Sdcr^oj 
 
 Part. 
 
 /C. T. X. 
 
 fC. T. X. 
 
 fc. r. X. 
 
 K.T. X. 
 
 Sofxej/of; 
 
 a. Observe that tlie mood suffixes and formation of the middle 
 are the same as in Larrj/JLL (622, obs. 1, 2, 3). 
 
 b. Observe that a of the ending -cro of the second aorist 
 middle is irregularly dropped^ and that then the two last vowels 
 are contracted. 
 
 643. Decline (like Xvcov, 229, 1; 823): 
 
 StSou? 
 
 SiSovcra 
 
 StSoV 
 
 StSdl^TO? 
 
 StSoUCTT^? 
 
 StSd^TO? 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this.' 
 
 644. Conjugate the tense systems of SiSw^t having 
 -0) forms. 
 
 1 See p. 2472. 
 
260 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 645. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. 6 Se Kvpos hiScoaiP avrw els reTpaKicr^ikiovs 
 KoX e^ firfvcov fiicrdov. 2. Vficov 8e twv ^EkXijvcov olkl- 
 
 vaKiqv e/cacrro) ^pvaovv 
 haxrcx). 3. TavTa Se tol 
 Bcjpa TrdvTcov^ Sr) /xaXicr^a 
 Tols (j)i\oLS SuehiSov. 4. ov- 
 TOi Xiyovai on /BaatXevs 
 KeXeveu tovs 'EXX7yj/as 7ra- 
 paSovvai TOL onXa. 5. Trj 
 8' oui/ ar par la Tore airi- 
 Sa)K€ Kvpos fJLLcrdov reTToi- 
 
 p(OV fJLTjVCJV. 6. ivMiXlJTCO 
 
 Se TOL avTOL TavTa ^ovXevov- 
 raij OLTTOcrTrjv ai^ irpos Kv- 
 pov. 7. TTpos 8e ^acnXea 
 
 No. 11. "AkIvolkt)?. 
 
 TrefjLTTOJv Tj^LOv SoOrjvaL ol^ TavTas tols iroXeus (jlolXXov rj 
 TLa'cra(j)€pvr)i' ap^eiv avT(x)v. 8. tol irXoia KaTetcavaev, 
 Iva jJLr) Kvpos BiajSr). 9. ra? ctjuafa? fxecTTOLS aXevpcjv 
 irapeaKevdcraTo K.vpos Iva StaSotTy rot? '^^XXr^criv. 
 II. 1. He gave to each man five minae of silver. 
 
 2. He will be able to pay as much as he promises. 
 
 3. He commanded the Greeks to surrender their arms. 
 
 4. Tissaphernes and the brother of the king's wife gave 
 to the generals of the Greeks their right hands. 5. The 
 Ionian cities formerly had belonged to Tissaphernes, 
 having been given to him by [e/c] the king, but at that 
 time they all had revolted to Cyrus except Miletus. 
 
 ^ Apposition to to. avrd. 
 
 ^ Depends upon fiaXto-ra. 
 
 * Indirect reflexive. Explain the accent. 
 
READING LESSON. 261 
 
 646. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aKlvdKTj^^j -ovj short sword, pve, allow , offer [Lat. 
 
 dagger. do; dose, anti-dote]. 
 
 a7ro-8i8aj/i6, give hack, re- KaTa-KoLo), burn down, burn 
 
 store^pay ; mid., sell. up. 
 
 Sta-StSoj/xt, distribute. Tra/oa-SiSw/it, give up, de- 
 
 StSw/xt, Swcroj, eSw/ca, 8e- liver over, surrender, 
 
 Sw/ca, SeSo/xat, ihodr^v^ 
 
 647. R. 80-, da-, do. hi'hfu-^i, give ; Trapa-ht-Sco-fiL, 
 
 give up, surrender ; 7rpo-hi-^o}-ixi,give over, betrag, desert; 
 7rpo-S6-Tr}-<;, -ov, betrayer^ traitor ; ixLcr0oS6-T7]-<;, -ov, 
 one who pays wages^ paymaster [fito-^os]; 8(o-po-v, to, gift^ 
 present. 
 
 do (da-re), give ; pro-do, give forth ; tra-do, surren- 
 der ; pro-di-tor, -oris, m.,a traitor ; do-nu-m, -i, n., gift ; 
 d5-no, present, donate. 
 
 dose, anti-dote, anec-dote. 
 
 648. Siege of Miletus. 
 
 Review 121, 147, 182, 235, 236, 2; 244, 245, 261, 
 369, 3, 6 ; 394, 399, 640. 
 
 7. 'Ez/ MiXt^tw 8e TLcrcra(l>€pvrj<; 7rpoaL(T66jJL€vo<; ra 
 avTOL ravra ^ov\€vop,4vov<^^ airocrTrjvai 7rpo<s Kvpoi^^ 
 TOv<; fxev avrwv aTre/cretz^e, rov^ 8' i^e/Sakev, 6 8e Kv- 
 po9, vTToka^oiv Tov<; <^€uyoi/ra9, crvWe^a^ crTpdTevp.a 
 inoXiopKeL MiX-qrov koL Kara yrjv KoX Kara OdXaTrav, 
 
 ^ ^ov\evofi€vovs, agrees with nvas understood, indirect discourse aftei 
 Trpoato-Boixevos (776) ; in Latin the infinitive would be used. 
 
262 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 KOL iireLpoLTO KardyeLV Toi)^ iKireTTTcoKOTa^. Koi avTiq ^ 
 av dXXrj TTp6^a(TL<; rjv avTco rov dSpoit^eiv ^ (TrpaTevfjia. 
 8. Upos 8e )8acrtXea TrejjiTrcov r^^iovy dSeXt^o? oiv 
 avTOV, SodrjvaL oV raura? rds TrdXei? jxdWov 17 Ticrcra- 
 <l>ipv'r]v dp^eLv avrojv, /cat 7) P'TJrrjp avveTrpaTTev avr^ 
 Tavra' cuo-re /SacrtXevs ttjv jxev irpos iavTOP iTrifiovXrjv 
 ovK TjcrOdvero, Ttcrcrac^epi/ei 8e ivofju^e irokep^ovvTa 
 avTOv dfjL(j)l TO. crrpaTevfJiaTa SaTrai^az^ * * wcrre ovSei/ 
 Tf^Oero avTcov TroXefiovvTcov.^ /cat yap 6 Kvpos diri- 
 TrefXTre tov<s yuyvop^evovf; Sacr/xov? /SacrtXet e/c roil' 
 TrdXcfui^ wv ^ lidcra^ipvovs "* hvyyojv^v V)(0}v. 
 
 Trpo-aLa-OdvofjiaL, observe a-vprTrparTO), do (tl) with, 
 beforehand. co-operate with, aid, 
 
 vTro-Xap^dvco, take under Sairavdo), spend, expend, 
 one's care, receive, d^Oop^ai^ be troubled, angry 
 
 at [awe, ugly], 
 
 ^ avTH] instead of rovro, agreeing with the predicate noun. 
 2 See 117 ; 371, 9. 3 See 645, 7. 
 
 * hairavav with avrov as subject depends upon evofii^e, indirect discourse 
 as in Latin (267, 5 ; 723). 
 
 5 See 239 ; 236, 2. ^ gee 439. 
 
 ' Depends upon S)v (369, 1) ; regularly it would limit rav nokeav. 
 
 LESSON LVIT. 
 
 VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. — FIRST AND 
 SECOND AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEMS. 
 
 Review 344, 345, 346, 349, a,b; 350, 351, 6; 352, 
 353, 417, 418, 419, 2; 557, 575, 576, 579. 
 
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 263 
 
 649. € as Augment or Reduplication before a Voicel. 
 A few verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic 
 
 augment. These verbs have also e for the reduplica- 
 tion, and this with initial €- is contracted to et: e;^w, 
 have, el)(ov (from i-e^ov)} 
 
 a. opdca, see, generally takes the temporal augment after e : 
 ifopcov^ eaypuKa^ ewpajiai, 
 
 650. € changed to a. In liquid themes of one sylla- 
 ble, € is generally changed to a in the first perfect, per- 
 fect middle, and second passive tense systems : crreXXw 
 (crreX-), send, ecrraX/ca, ea-rakjxai, iaTokiqv, crTaXyjao- 
 
 a. The same change of e to a occurs in a few other verbs, 
 usually after p\ rpeTrco, rerpafji/jLai, irpdTrrjv; rpecfxo, rerpafi- 
 fiat^ etc. 
 
 b. It occurs further in the second aorist system of T/aeTro), 
 erpairov ; /cretW, etcravov ; refjLVco^ era/Jiov, 
 
 651. Six't/i Class, Verbs of the Sixth Class form 
 their present stem by adding* -cr/cVe- or -l(tk°I^. to the 
 theme. The final vowel in the theme before -cr/cw is 
 generally lengthened. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aor. 
 
 1. ryLfyvo)(TK(o^ know yvo- >yLyv(ocrK° / e. yvQXTOfjLat eyvcov 
 
 2. evpi(TK(t), find evp- evptaK^/^. evpijaco r^vpov 
 
 or evpov ^ 
 
 ^ This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs originally 
 began with a consonant, for a- (533, obs*). 
 ^ fvpiV/co) has second aorist imv. evpe. 
 
264 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 3. Qv7)GK(d^ die 6av-, Ova ^ Ovr^aK^/^. OavovfiaL eOavov 
 
 4. 'ird(T')(a)^ suffer TraO-^irevO-^ 7racr^°/e- TreLo-ofiat eiraOov 
 
 (for 7ra6-(TK(o) 
 
 5. hihdaKO)^ teach ScSax- St8aafc°/^. SiSd^co iBtSa^a 
 
 a. Observe that ytyvSaKco is reduplicated '^ (533, obs.^) ; 
 that the final vowel of the theme is lengthened, and that the 
 second aorist is of the -/jli form of inflection (286, 619, d, I, 
 2,3).^ 
 
 6. Observe that in evpia/cco the theme assumes e as in several 
 verbs of the first class (522) in all the systems except the pres- 
 ent and second aorist. 
 
 c. Observe that: 1. 7rda')(a) is iov waO-aica)^ 6 is dropped 
 before cric (for k becoming %, see p. 153^). 2. Treiao/jiai is 
 for irevOaofMaL. 
 
 d. Observe that BtSd-a/cco is for Bi8a)(;-afcco ; ^ is dropped 
 before aK. 
 
 652. Second Aorist Passive St/stem (842). 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. 
 
 S. 1. i(f)dvr)v i^avct) . <^aveir)v ^avrjvai 
 
 2. i(f)dvr)<s ^avrj<? (^aveirjq (^dvr]Oi 
 
 3. i(f)dvr) (l>^T^V 4'aveiy) (^avrJTO) Part. 
 
 K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. (j)aV€LS 
 
 Observe that the second aorist passive has the same inflection 
 as the first aorist, and differs from the latter in form by rejecting 
 
 1 See p. 2151. 
 
 2 The theme assumes tlie form Trei/^ (for navB) ; v is inserted, as in the 
 fifth class (630). 
 
 « This form occurs most frequently in the sixth class. 
 * €yv0Vy iyvccs, etc., with long vowel throughout (856). 
 
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 
 
 265 
 
 the -0 in the tense sign, and by retaining -6 in the imperative 
 ending -61,. 
 
 653. Second Future Passive {'^4iT). 
 Examine the following : 
 
 Ind. 
 S. 1. (j)avT]crofjLai 
 
 2. (ftavijaeL 
 
 3. (fyavrjaeTaL 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Opt. 
 cl)avr)aoiix'rjv 
 
 (])aVlj(TOLO 
 
 (jyavija-OLTO 
 
 K. T. X. 
 
 Inf. 
 (jyavijaecrOaL 
 
 Part. 
 (f)aprja'6ix€vo<; 
 
 Observe that the second future passive has the same inflection 
 as the first future, and differs from the latter in form bj rejecting 
 -6 from the tense sign. 
 
 654. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed 
 by adding -e to the theme. This suffix, as with the first 
 aorist, is lengthened to -rj in the indicative, and in other 
 moods before a single consonant of the endings. 
 
 a. An e in the theme regularly becomes a. 
 
 655. The stem of the second future passive is formed 
 by adding 0-%- to the lengthened stem in -17 of the 
 second aorist passive. 
 
 656. 1. Conjugate the first aorist passive system of 
 Xvco, TTefXTTO), <^aiv(i). 2. Conjugate the second aorist 
 passive system of (jyaipco, i(j)dv7jp, etc. ; crrpec^w, icTTpd- 
 (f)r]v ; Tp€<j)(o, iTpd(^y)v} 
 
 ^ In the sense of the middle. Let the pupil write the first passiv-e and 
 then reject the -6 in the tense suffix for the second passive. 
 
266 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 657. Give synopsis in the second passive system of 
 ypa<^a>; piTrTO), ippL(j)7]v; ttXtJtto) [TrXrjy-'], iirXijyTjv, 
 in compounds -eTrXdyrjVy i^eirXdy-qv ; kotttw, iKowrjv. 
 
 658. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. viLOL^ 8t8afft). 2. KoX €v9v<; eyvdicrav 7rdvT€<; 
 OTL iyyv<; iaTpaTOTreSevero ^acrikeu^. 3. ouS' aXXo? 
 Se T(i)v 'FikXijvajv iv ravTTj rrj fJioi^rj enaOev ovSels^ ov- 
 hiv. 4. /cat 01 '^EXXi^j/e? crrpac^eVre? irapecrKevdl^ovTO. 
 
 5. ov TToXXco vcrrepov ol Xo^ayot KareKOTrrjcrav. 
 
 6. virep yap ttJ^ Kcofxrj^ \6(f)0S rjv, e(^' ov dvecrf pd^iq- 
 aav ol dficjiL ^aauXea. 7. ovre yap virotpjyiov It 
 ovhkv i(j)dv7] ovre arparoTrehov. 8. eTrei iinopKojp re 
 i(f>dvr) Kal rag o-7T0vhd<; Xvcov, e^^i ttjp SiKrjv kol 
 T€0V7)K€. 9. diToOvria'KOVTO^ yap Kvpov Trdvre^ ol irap 
 avTov (^tXot diriOavov fJia)(6fX€voL virep avrov TrXrjv 
 ^Apiaiov. 10. TTopevcofxeda ra^elw?, Iva aTrocnraaOcoii^v 
 Tov ^acTiXiKov (TTpaTevfjiaros. 
 
 II. 1. On the third day the enemy appeared. 2. One 
 hundred hopUtes were cut down by the Cilicians. 
 3. Many of those about the king were killed. 4. And 
 this one suffered no harm. 5. But what I wrote, that 
 the king was terrified at the approach of the army, was 
 evident from the following.^ 
 
 ^ When a negative is followed by a compound negative or by several 
 compound negatives in the same clause, the negative is strengthened. All 
 but the first negative must be rendered in English by an aflBrmative. It is 
 equivalent to the English phrase, noi at all, etc. 
 
 * Dative. 
 
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 
 
 267 
 
 659. 
 
 e<^-oSo9, 17, way to, approach, 
 
 avoj-(TTpi^(xi, turn hack, face 
 about; pass., he turned 
 hack, rally, 
 
 diro-OvrjcrKO), die, be killed ; 
 often as pass, to airo- 
 KTeCvo), 
 
 BiSdcTKco, StSct^oj, etc., 
 teac/i, show [Lat. doceo ; 
 TEACH, didactic]. 
 
 iK-irkirJTTcoy strike out of 
 ones senses, alarm, ter- 
 rify [77X177x0), strike^ 
 
 6vtJ(TK(o, OavovfxaLy cOavov, 
 ri6v7)Ka, die, Pf. has the 
 force of the present, am 
 dead, be slain. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 TTctc^ct), TreLCTOfiaiy eiradov^ 
 ireTTovda, suffer, experi- 
 ence, feel ; ev 7racr;(a>, 
 pass, of eS TToielv [Lat. 
 patior. pathos, patho- 
 
 arpecjxjj, cTTpe^o), e(TTp&\faj 
 €crr/3a)LtjLcai, icrrpif^O'iqv, 
 i(TTpd<^7)v, turn, twist; 
 intr. and in pass., turn, 
 face about [strophe, apo- 
 strophe, cata-strophe]. 
 
 ovre, and not, Lat. neque ; 
 ovT€ . . . ovT€, neither . . . 
 nor. 
 
 660. R. yi/o-, yvoi-, gna-, (jno-^ perceive, know. 71- 
 7Vio-crK-o), perceive, know, think ; -yvw-iiti, -17?, means of 
 knowing, mind, thought, opinion ; o-vo-fia, -ar-o?, to (for 
 o-yvo-\Lo), name ; €v-(ovvjjlo-<;, -o-v, of good name or oynen; 
 vd-o-s, contr. voOs, 6 (for yi/o-/ro-9), mind; voi-o), observe, 
 think out ; KaTorvoe-o), mark well, observe ; ev-voo-^, -oo-v, 
 well disposed; evvoia, -as, good ivill ; eiri'o-'LK6-<;, -77, -6-p^ 
 kindly disposed ; ev-i^oi/ca)?, adv., ivith good will ; /ca/co- 
 1^00-9, -oov [KaKo^, bad), ill disposed, hostile, 
 
 gna-ru-s (na-rn-s), adj., knowing, skilful ; i-gna-ni-s 
 (in + gnarus), ignorant ; i-gno-ro, not know, be ignorant 
 
268 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 of ; nar-r-6, make known, tell; na-vu-s (gna-vu-s), adj., 
 diligent, active ; i-gna-vu-s, inactive, slothful; no-sc-o, 
 know; no-bili-s, adj., well known, famous ; no-men, -inis, 
 n., name. 
 
 Can, know, keen, cunning, name, gnome, gnostic, 
 a-gnostic, dia-gnosis, an-onymous, met-onymy, patr- 
 onymic, syn-onym. 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Review 236, 6 ; 422, 563, 565, 566. 
 
 661. Conditional sentences consist of two parts : the 
 one, introduced by et, if, states the case or condition ; 
 the other states what follows under a certain condition. 
 The former, which usually precedes, is a dependent 
 clause, and is called the protasis ; ^ the latter is the main 
 clause, and is called the apodosis? 
 
 662. Present and Past Suppositions implying NotJiing 
 as to the Fulfilment of Condition. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. '€t vfjiei^; iOeXere i^opfxav, eTrecrOaiyiJUv ySovXo/xat, 
 ifgou wish to set out, I am ready to follow you. 
 
 2. €t 8e jLtTyrt? /SeXrtoz^ opa, X€ipLO'0(j)os rjyoLTO, hut 
 if any one does not see a better plan, let Chirisophus lead. 
 
 ^ wpoTaa-is (nporeivco), a pitting before, a proposal. 
 ^ aTrddoais (aTroSiSco/ii), a giving in return. 
 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 269 
 
 3. ei T15 eKCxikvev, ovk rjv elcrekOeiv, if there was any 
 hindrance J it was not possible to enter, 
 
 a. Observe that in all of these conditions the protasis is intro- 
 duced by et, if J and takes the indicative ; that it states a particu- 
 lar supposed case in the present or past simply as a fact without 
 implying any judgment as to its fulfilment ; and that the apod- 
 osis takes any form of the verb to express what may follow if 
 the fact be granted. 
 
 . b. Observe that the negative of the assumed case is fir}^ and 
 that the negative of the apodosis, when it asserts a consequence 
 of the admitted reality of the protasis,, is ov (422). 
 
 Present and Past Suppositions with Nothing implied, 
 — Simple Particular Supjpositions, 
 
 Rule. 
 
 663. When the protasis simply states a present or 
 past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the 
 fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with ct. 
 The apodosis may take any form of verb, but generally 
 the indicative. 
 
 664. The negative of the protasis is regularly jutif, 
 that of the apodosis is ov. 
 
 665. Potential Indicative. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. iiroLiqa-e raGra, he did this. 
 
 2. €770 LT] ere av raura, he would have done this. 
 
 Observe that : 1. In 1, the indicative asserts the action. 2. In 
 2, the past indicative with av (566) states the action as depen- 
 dent upon some unfulfilled past circumstances or conditions, i. e. 
 what would have happened if the conditions had been fulfilled. 
 
270 THE beoinnee's greek book. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 666. The past tenses of the indicative with av ex- 
 press a past action as dependent on past circumstances 
 or conditions. The negative is ov. 
 
 667. Present and Past Conditions with Suppositions 
 contrary to Fact. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. iiroLyjcre av ravra, el avTov cfceXevcra, he would 
 have done this, if I had commanded him. 
 
 2. el yLT) vjJLei^; rfkOere, eiropevofieda av tt/do? ^acnXea^ 
 if you had not come, we would be marching against the 
 king. 
 
 3. iiroLei av Tavra, el avrov iKeXevov, he loould he 
 doing this, if I were commanding him. 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, the unfulfilled condition is expressed as 
 part of the sentence dependent upon iiroirja-e av as the apodosis 
 which still expresses, like the potential indicative, what would 
 have happened if the unreal condition had been fulfilled, i. e. the 
 action did not happen because the condition was not fulfilled. 
 
 b. Observe that when the protasis having the past tenses of 
 the indicative is intended to imply non-fulfilment of condition, 
 the adverb av is added to the past tenses of the indicative in the 
 apodosis. 
 
 c. Observe that since the condition is contrary to fact, or 
 implies that the protasis is not or was not fulfilled, past tenses of 
 the indicative must be used in both protasis and apodosis ; that 
 the imperfect refers to the present as in 2, 3, the aorist to a sim- 
 ple occurrence in past time, and the pluperfect (rare) to an act 
 completed in the past or present. 
 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 271 
 
 Present and Fast Conditions with Suppositions con- 
 trary to Fact, 
 
 Rule. 
 
 668. When the protasis states a present or past sup- 
 position implying that the condition is not or loas not 
 
 fulfilled, it has the past tenses of the indicative with et, 
 and the apodosis the past tenses of the indicative 
 with av. 
 
 The imperfect here refers to the present time, or to 
 an act as going on or repeated in past time, and the 
 aorist to an act as simply occurring in past time. 
 
 Wishes contrary to Fact. 
 
 669. When a wish refers to the present or past, im- 
 plying that its object is not or was not attainedy it is 
 expressed by the secondary tenses of the indicative with 
 eWe or el yap : ct^e rovro fxr) eTronycra, that I had 
 not done this. 
 
 670. In wishes unattained the tenses and moods are 
 distinguished as in conditions contrary to fact. 
 
 671. The negative in all wishes is ^iri (422). 
 
 672. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. eWe Kvpo<^ itj]. 2. Kkeap^o*; iXavvot, 3. KXe- 
 ap^o? T^Seiw? av ekavvoi. 4. ovhev av KaKov eirparrev. 
 5. ovhev av KaKov eirpa^ev. 6. 'Opoi/ra? iin^ovXeveL 
 K-upoj, Kal TTpocrOev irokep/irjcraf; /caraXXayel? 8e. 7. el 
 KXeavctip eOeXei riyelaOai, eireaOai avrco /Bovkofjiai. 
 8. ovK av eiroLiqae raura, €t /X17 avrov eKeXevcra. 9. el 
 e/xo9 dSeX(f)6<; ecrrt, ov Tavr eyoi XijipofjiaL. 1*0. ravTa 
 enpa^e Oolttov tj rt? av ^ero. 11. el he tl^ aWo opa 
 
272 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 ^4\tiov, aXXa)9 exero). 12. ot 8e "EXXt^z^c?, et rt? /cat 
 dOvfxorepog tjv irpo^ Trjv dvd/Sacnv, aKovopres ttjp Kvpov 
 dpeTrjv '^Slov kol irpoOvfjuoTepou avveTTopevovTO. 
 
 II. 1. He would have been on bis guard. 2. If any 
 one sees any better plan than this, let him speak. 
 
 3. And he would be doing this, if he were seeing you. 
 
 4. If Abrocoinas had opposed, Cyrus would have sent 
 after the ships. 5. It was not possible to capture the 
 asses, unless the horsemen hunted. 6. If Clearchus 
 does not wish to lead us back, let the captains lead. 
 
 673. VOCABULARY. 
 
 rom 
 
 d-6i}fio<s, -ov, without heart, fcar-aXXarro), change fi 
 dispirited [6vp.6^, soul, hostile to friendly terms, re- 
 hear f], eoncile [aXXctrrw, change 
 
 dvd-/3aa-LS, -ew9, rj, ascent, (aXXo?)]. 
 
 march inland [anaba- oloiLai,think,helieve,\hdX.^ 
 
 iisj. 02hnor'\ . 
 
 SIS 
 
 674. R. fcaX-, col-, da-, call. KaX-€-(o, call ; kXti-cti-s, 
 -6-0)9, y], a calling; iK-KXyj-a-id, -d?, summoned assembly ; 
 KTipu-|, -vAc-09, 6 (formed on the stem Krjp-vK-), herald ; 
 KiqpvTTO), be a herald, proclaim; Kpd^o) (formed on the 
 stem Kpa-y-), cry out, call; Kpavy-yj, -rj^, outcry, shout. 
 
 calo-, call together ; kale-ndae, -arum, f., the day of 
 proclamation. Calends; con-cil-m-m, -i, n., assembly, 
 council ; cla-mo, cry out; cla-mo-r, -6r-is, m., shout, cry ; 
 cla-ru-s, adj., clear, famous ; clas-si-s, -is, f., class, fleet. 
 
 Hale (i.e. dray), HAL-yard, haul, ec-clesiastic 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 273 
 675' -^^ Army is collected by Clearchus in the Chersonesus. 
 
 Review 66. 146, 212, 357, 648. 
 
 9. ^AXXo Se arpaTevfJia avTco crvvekiyeTO iv Xeppo- 
 vrjaco Tovhe rov rpoirov} KXeayo^o? Aa/ceSai/xdi'tos 
 (f)vya<; rjv ' tovtco avyyevopievo^; 6 Kvpos ^ydcrOr] re 
 avTov KoX hihoiCTLv avrco pLvpiov^ BapeuKovs. 
 6 8e Xa/Bo)!^^ TO xpvcTioi/ o-r/oarev/xa crvve- 
 Xe^ev OLTTO TovTOiv TO)v ^prjjjLaTcov /cat 
 iTToXefxei e/c Xeppovrjcrov o^/xw/xei'o? rot? 
 Spa^l^ TOLS vnep 'FtXXTjcnrovTov * oIkovctl No. 12. Adpct- 
 KOL aKJyeXei rov<; "EXXT^z/a? ' wcrre /cat XPV' '^^^' 
 
 fiara avve^aXXovTO avrco €ts tt^v Tpo(j)rjv tcop arpaTio)' 
 T(x)v at 'EXXi^o'Tro^'Tt a/cat TroXets e/covcrat.^ tovto S' aS 
 ovTOj Tp€(j)6ix€vov IXdvdavev avTco to aTpaTevfia, 
 
 (Tvy-yiyvo p^ai, meet, become acquainted with, 
 dyafiai, iQyao-dfjirjp, 'qydcrOrjv, admire (433, N. 3). 
 Sdpet/cd?, daric. cJc^eXelw, aid^ assist, 
 
 ^ Which of tlie above rules applies to rponov ? 
 
 2 What force has Xa/Sii/ ? * Cf. 79, a, b. 
 
 » What does Qpa^i depend upon ? ^ Cf. p. 1508; 371^ ]i. 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CON- 
 TRACT VERBS. — GENERAL CONDITIONS. 
 
 Review 28, 114, 115, 116, 150-154, 228, 229, a,b', 
 230, 242, 417, 418, 552, 553, obs. ; 554, «, <5; 567, 
 568, 578, 579, 
 
 18 
 
274 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 676. Learn the subjunctive and optative active and 
 middle of Tt/x,aa>, Troiew, and Br]\6o) (843, 844, 845). 
 
 a. Observe that o-ei and 0-77 contract to ot (152, d). 
 h. Observe that in the active these verbs generally have -it] 
 (574) as mood sign of the optative. 
 
 677. The adverb av is regularly joined to et in the 
 protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive ; d with av 
 forms eaj/, 171/, or oju (692). 
 
 678. In animated language the aorist is used in the 
 sense of the present. This is called the gnomic aorist^ 
 and is naturally translated by the English present. 
 
 679. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used 
 with the adverb av to denote a customary action (680). 
 
 680. Particular and General Conditio7is. 
 Conditional sentences are either jj articular or general. 
 
 In a particular supposition (663), the protasis refers to 
 a definite act or acts occurring at a defi7iite time. 
 
 In a general supposition, the protasis refers indefi- 
 nitely to any one of a given series of acts occurring 
 at any time, and the apodosis expresses an habitual or 
 repeated action or a general truth. 
 
 a. This distinction of suppositions as particular and general 
 may be seen in all classes of conditional sentences, but it is only 
 in the first class (662) that the distinction is represented by the 
 form of the sentence. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. ka,v TO) VTr6(T\7)Tai tl, ovitotc xjjevSeraty if (ever) he 
 makes a promise to any one, he never breaks his word. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 275 
 
 2. el rep VTTocrxoLTo tl, ovirore ixjievSerOy if [eve?') lie 
 made a promise to any one, he never broke his word. 
 
 P a. Observe that : 1. The protasis implies the occasional or 
 repeated fulfilment of the condition, and the apodosis states what 
 happens if the supposition ever is fulfilled. 2. The protasis 
 takes the subjunctive with idvj and the apodosis has the present 
 indicative. 
 
 b. Observe that when the apodosis as in 2, denotes a con- 
 tinued or repeated act in the past, the protasis following the 
 sequence of moods (578), has the optative with et, and the 
 apodosis states then what did happen if ever the supposition was 
 fulfilled. 
 
 Present and Past General Suppositions. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 681. When a protasis states a present or past suppo- 
 sition implying the occasional or repeated fiilfilinent of 
 the condition, it has the subjunctive with idv after the 
 present indicative in the apodosis, and the optative with 
 €t after the imperfect indicative in the apodosis. 
 
 a. In the apodoses of general conditions, any form denoting 
 present or past repetition may be used. Thus, for the present 
 the gnomic aorist may be used ; for the imperfect, the imperfect 
 and aorist with dv (679) frequently occur, and sometimes the 
 simple aorist with ^ often,"* ^ never/ etc. 
 
 682. The subjunctive in general conditions never 
 refers distinctly to the future, but expressing indefinite 
 frequency, assumes the fulfilment of the condition at any 
 time. 
 
276 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 683. Give the synopses of the present system of Tt/xaa>, 
 l3od(x), opdco, TTOLeo), (^t-Xea>, Sofcew, ixicrSooi, STyXdw. 
 
 684. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. KpaTLCTTa ap fjia^oiixeda. 2. KXeap^o? €(^v- 
 XdrreTO fxrj Sokoltj ^evyeiv. 3. ILvpov alrcofjiev nXola, 
 ojg oLTTOTrXeajfJiev} 4. iap ol dp^ovre^ fiecrop €)((oaL to 
 avTOiVy iv dacftaXea-TdTcp elcrL 5. iSeXofJiev w? rd^icTTCL 
 TTopeveaOaL et? ttjp *EXXa8a, ei /BovXeraL KXea/j^o? 
 drrdyeLv. 6. el KXedpcop rjdeXe y^yeicrO ai, erreaOai 
 avTco i^oTjXeTO. 7. el rt? avTco ^avepo^ yiyvoiTo heivo^ 
 (x)v dp^cov, del irXeLO) TrpoaeSuSov. 8. eTreiSr) Se Kvpo<; 
 e/cctXet, XajSwi' v/xa? eiropevoyiiqv^ Iva mc^eXoiriv avrov. 
 9. fcat €t Tt? aurw Sokolt] tcov irpo^ tovto ^ rerayixepcov 
 
 KaKo<; elpaiy avrov eiraKTev av. 
 
 II. 1. Let us try to conquer. 2. We will be on 
 our guard lest we seem to flee. 3. If (ever) any one 
 does me a favor or an injury, I try to sm-pass^ him. 
 4. If (ever) any one sent gifts to him, he distributed 
 them to his friends. 5. If Cyrus wishes to be a friend 
 to any one, he is most able to benefit him. 6. If (ever) 
 there was a force on both sides of them, they were iu 
 the safest place. 
 
 685. clfia, together^ like [a- for era- (498, obs. 4*), a/x- 
 for craju,-], sem-^ sim-. d'9p6'0-<; {Opoo^, noise), in a 
 noisy crowd, in a body ; dOpoit,o)» collect, assemble; d-i^ras, 
 all together ; dfia, adv., at the same time, together ; 
 dfi-a^a, -179 (cf. R. dy-, 513), wagon icith two connected 
 
 1 Cf. p. 823. 2 Yqx this purpose. » i/t/cao). 
 
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 277 
 
 • 
 
 i axles ^ four-icheeled loagon ; a/xaft-To-§, -o-j/, jy<255(3;^/^ by 
 
 wagons; ctp/x-a/xafa, -179 (of. R. ap',Jlt, 764), covered 
 ' carriage ; ofids, -r\, -6v^ one and the same ; ofiov, adv., 
 
 together^ at once ; 6fJLco<s, coiij., all the same, nevertheless ; 
 
 ojJLo-Xoyo-Si 'O-v {\iy(x) [^ey-], sag), agreeing ; ojjLo-Xoye-co, 
 
 agree, confess ; ofjio-Lo-^, -d, -ov, like; ojlloiw?, adv., in 
 like manner^ alike ; ofia-Xo-';, -t], -o-v^ even, level ; ofia- 
 
 Xftis, adv., evenlg. 
 
 sem-per, adv., always ; simili-s, adj., like, resembling ; 
 
 sin-guli, adj., one to each, single ; seuie-l, adv,, once ; 
 
 simu-l, adv., at the same time. 
 
 Same, some; hom-ilj, homo-geneous, homo-bgoTis, 
 
 homoeo-pathy, hom-oiiym, hom-onymous, etc. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 FUTURE CONDITIONS. 
 
 Review Lessons XLIX. and L., noting 552, 557, 559, 
 563, 565, 566, 567, 579, 581, 589. 
 
 686. Future Conditions. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. lav fJLOL TreLO-OrJTe, TLfirjOtjaeo-Oe vtto Kvpov, if you 
 obey me, you toill be honored by Cyrus, 
 
 2. lav 8e [Lr\ -qKcofxep, ravTa Trotet, but if we shall not 
 come, do these things. 
 
 a. Observe that: 1. The apodosis in 1 takes the future in- 
 dicative whose action depends upon the accomplishment of some 
 future event; the protasis has the subjunctive with av to express 
 
278 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 this future supposition^ vividly or with expectation of fulfilment. 
 2. The apodosis in 2 takes the imperative for the regular 
 future. 
 
 h. Observe that the adverb av, although modifying the verb, 
 attaches itself to the conditional particle as in general conditions 
 (677). 
 
 c. Observe that the protasis is translated in English by the 
 present or by shall or will, 
 
 Rule. 
 
 687. When a supposed future case is stated vividly, 
 imiAy'mg pro5adility of the fulfilment of the condition, 
 the protasis has the subjunctive with dv, and the apod- 
 osis has the future indicative or some other form ex- 
 pressing future time. 
 
 The protasis is translated by the present indicative or 
 by s/tall or will. 
 
 688. In the apodoses of future conditions, the im- 
 perative, infinitive, hortatory, and prohibitive subjunctive 
 may be used as equivalent expressions for the future 
 indicative. In fact, any clause or phrase that expresses 
 future time may be so used. 
 
 689. Examine the following : 
 
 1. Kvpo<; e^ovKevero 7r(o<; av Tr)v jjid^rjv ttololto, 
 Cyrus was planning how he should make the battle. 
 
 2. el ifJiOL 801179 LTTTria^ ^ikiov^, rov^ rcov iroXefXLcov 
 LTTTreas KaTaKavoLfjn dv, if you should give me a thousand 
 horsemen, I would cut down the horsemen of the enemy. 
 
 ^ The future conditions are ideal conditions as the present and past are 
 fixod 
 
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 279 
 
 3. €1 PLK^fiePy ovSepa av KaTaKavoi^evy if we were to 
 conquer, toe should kill no one. 
 
 a. Observe that the apodoses of these conditions- have the 
 same form as has the potential optative in 1^ and like it_, express 
 possibility ; that the protasis has the optative with el to express 
 the supposed case less vividly than the subjunctive (567) or as 
 possible. 
 
 b. Observe that these conditions are translated by should^ 
 would, were to, etc. 
 
 Conditions possible} Jpodosis iii the optative with av. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 690. When a supposed future case is stated less viv- 
 idly, without implying expectation of its fulfilment, the 
 protasis has the optative with d, and the apodosis has 
 the optative with av. 
 
 The condition is translated by should, would, were to, etc. 
 
 691. It is the mood, not the tense as in Latin, that 
 determines the condition. The subjunctive regularly 
 follows primary tenses in the principal clause, and the 
 optative follows secondary (578) and the optative mood. 
 
 692. av is used with the 'subjunctive to represent 
 the condition as dependent upon circumstances or as 
 assumed. Hence it is also used to express indefinite 
 frequency {if ever, as often as). Whenever av is used 
 in a dependent clause it is always closely attached to 
 the particle or relative, with which it is often united, as 
 in iav, orav, eTreihav (677). 
 
 ^ The future conditions may be also distinguished respectively as more 
 aiid less vivid, or less remote and more remote. 
 
280 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 693. QUESTIONS. 
 
 1. What does the optative standing alone in a sen- 
 tence express? What would it express with ei? with 
 dv? 
 
 2. What does the first person of the subjunctive 
 standing alone in a sentence express ? What would it 
 express with idj/? with Iva, ottcus, etc. 
 
 3. How does the present general condition differ in 
 form from the future probable ? 
 
 4. How does the past general condition differ in 
 form from the future possible ? 
 
 5. Which is the principal clause of a conditional 
 sentence ? 
 
 694. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. yapiv aoL dp ^xoiyiev SiKaicos- 2. idv 8e firf 
 8t8w ravra, rjyefJLOva alrijaofjiev Kvpov. 3. idv /caXws 
 KaTairpd^o) i(j> d crrparevoiJLaL, vfxds Kard^co ot/caSe. 
 4. el irapd tov<; opKov^ iXve ra? airovSd^, Trjv Blktjp 
 €)(€i, 5. el aXXT^Xot? fxa'^elaOe,^ ev TrjSe rjfjiepa Kara- 
 KOTTTjO'eade. 6. /cat rjplv y dv ravT iiroCeL, el ecopa^ 
 r)fjid<^ fxeveiv 7rapaaKeva^ofjLevov<;. 7. el Stcr^iXtou? 
 ^evovi Xd^OLy TTepiyevoiTO dv tcov dvriO'Tao'KDTiov.^ 
 
 8. et Tt9 ye tl avrco /caXw? vrnqpeTTjO-eiev, del eTrrjvei. 
 
 9. ov8' el <^iXo9 Kol TTicrro^ crot yevoLjjirjv, d> Kvpe, aoi 
 
 ^ The future is sometimes used for the subjunctive in a protasis as a 
 still more vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feelings, and 
 in threats and warnings. 
 
 3 Cf. 649, a. 8 Cf. 385. 
 
 * ovS' limits do^aifiif why ? 
 
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 281 
 
 y dv ,7roTe in Sdfat/xt. 10. /cat iav rj Trpaft? fj irapa- 
 7rXr)aLa olairep ^ kol irpoadev i^prJTo roi? ^€pol<s, liroi- 
 jxeOa Koi i^/xei?. 
 
 11. 1. They will not proceed, unless some one shall 
 give them money. 2. But if he shall not even give a 
 guide, let us fall into battle line as soon as possible. 
 3. But if he shall flee, we will deliberate there about 
 these things. 4. If we should follow, we would follow 
 zealous and friendly to him. 5. But we would proceed 
 homeward, if no one should hinder us. 6. But he plans 
 that he may be king instead of his brother, if he shall 
 be able. 
 
 695. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dvTL-(TTacn(oTrjs, -ov, one of a battle line, fall into hat- 
 
 the opposite party, oppo- tie line [syntax] . 
 
 nen t [crracrt?, faction~\ . iKel, adv., t/iere, i?i that place. 
 
 OLO(T-Trep,-d7r€p,-ov7rep,jiist fxrj-Bi, adv. and conj., but 
 
 as, such as, etc. not, and not, nor, Lat. 
 
 Kara-TTpaTTO), accomplish. neque, nee ; ne . . . qui- 
 
 Trepi-yiyvo piai, be superior, dem, not even. 
 
 conquer. irore, indef. end. adv., at 
 
 crvv-TaTTO), draw up in ar- some or any time, once^ 
 
 ray, marshal ; jmd.form ever. See (xTJiTOTe. 
 
 696. R. Kpa-, ere- cer-, do, make. avTO-Kpa-rcop, 
 -op-o^, 6, rj (cf. avT09, self), ones own master; Kpdr-os, 
 -€-09, TO (fcpa + T-), stre7igth, might ; Kpare-co, be strong^ 
 
 1 oiaTTfp for oiawfp (438, 2 ; 439 ; 261). 
 
282 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 conquer ; Kpetrrcov, -ov (for Kper-lcov), comp., stronger, 
 mi(/htier, better ; /c/jar-icrro-?, -77, -ov^ sup., strongest^ 
 mightiest, best ; ey-KpaTrf^, -e?, in the power of, in pos- 
 session of, 
 
 Cer-es, -er-is, f., Ceres (' goddess of creation '), goddess 
 of agriculture ; cre-6, create ; cre-sc-o, come into being, 
 increase; in-cre-mentTi-m, 11., growth; cre-ber, adj. 
 (made to increase), /r<?^^^^;^^, numerous ; cor-p-u-s, -or-is, 
 n., body. 
 
 Hard ; auto-crat, aristo-crat, aristo-cracy, demo- 
 crat, demo-cracy, pluto-crat, pluto-cracy, etc. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS. — RELATIVE 
 AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Review 178, 184, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 515, 516, 
 517, 530, 544, 545, 649, 654, 655, 663, 664, 668, 681, 
 687, 690, 692. 
 
 697. A few verbs have et- in the perfect instead of 
 the reduplication (304) : 
 
 1. XafJL^dvo) (ka/S), take, elkyjcjia, ethqixyiai. 
 
 2. \ey(x), collect (in composition), -eiko^a, '-eiXeyfiaL 
 or -XeXeyfjiai. 
 
 3. [pe-, 698, 2], etprjKa, have said, etprjixai. 
 
 698. Mghth Class {Mixed Class), Verbs of this 
 class form their different tense systems from essentially 
 different themes. 
 
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 283 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. alpeo) (alpe-y eX-), take, 
 
 alprjcrcO) elXov^ {i\(o, etc.), rjprjKa, rjpiqfjiai, ypedrjv.^ 
 
 2. elnov^ {in- eln-, ip- yoe-), said. 
 
 ipw, ehrov (eiiro), etc., irnv. elne), eiprjKa, eLprjixai, 
 ippyjdrjv^ 
 
 3. ipxofJ^au^ {^PX'-) ^^^^-') ^^^')y ^0, come, 
 ^XBov (irnv. e'X^e),' iXyjXvOa,' 
 
 4. opdo) {opa-, IS-, OTT-), see. Itnpf. icopcov.^ 
 oifjofjiaL, el8ov^ [t8-, f tS-, ifiSov] (iSw, etc., imv. t8e), 
 
 iopoLKa and icopaKay icopafjLai and cofifxaL, oj<l)d7]T/, 
 
 5. Tpe^oi {rpe-^-, Spa/x-), run, 
 
 Spa/xov/iat, eSpafJLOVy-SeSpdfjLTjKa,^ SeSpdfjirjfJLai, 
 0. (^e/3w {(f>€p-, ol-, iv€K-, iveyK-^^), hear, 
 oiaot), yjveyKa^^ and TJveyKov, ivrjvo^a^'^ ivTJveyjxai, 
 rjvexOrjv, ^ 
 
 6gg. Relative and Temporal Clauses. 
 
 Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pro- 
 nouns or by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner. 
 They include in their construction temporal clauses. 
 
 1 Cf. 649. 2 cf. 520. 
 
 ^ Cf. 530. The present and imperfect are supplied in Attic by Xcy®, 
 (/)j;/ii, etc. The theme of H-nov was originally FtTr, contracted from i-cenov 
 (for i-Fe-Fenov, reduplicated, 533, obs.^). • * See 193. 
 
 ^ Future in Attic supplied by 6?/ii (739, b). 
 
 ^ Compounds of oxytone imperatives are regular ; as oTreX^e. 
 
 ' See 545. 
 
 ^ Cf. 649, a. The syllabic augment takes the rough breathing from th« 
 theme. 9 Cf. 522. 
 
 ^^ A nasal is inserted as in verbs of the fifth class (633). 
 
 ^^ Aorist irregularly formed without a. ^^ Cf. 545. 
 
284 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 700. A relative clause with a definite antecedent 
 takes the indicative or any other construction that could 
 occur in a simple sentence. Its negative is ov (183, 1, 
 2, 8; 184). 
 
 701. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent 
 (general or not yet determined) has the force of a prota- 
 sis of a conditional sentence, and is called a conditional 
 relative clause. Its negative therefore is ixrj. 
 
 702. Examine the following : 
 
 1. oTco SoKel TavTa, Xefarw, to whomsoever these things 
 seein best, let him speak (= d tivk Sofcet ravra, Xe^aTO), 
 663). 
 
 2. ovs icopa idiXovra^; Kivivveveiv, tovtov<; dp-vov- 
 Ta<s i7T0L€L, he made those v)hom he saw loilling to incur 
 da7iger commanders (= el TLva<; icopa, etc., 663). 
 
 3. 6 8' dvTjp TToWov d^LOS <f)iXo<;, co^ dv (J>l\o<; tj^ the 
 man is a valuable frie^nd to whomsoever he is a friend 
 (= idv TO) <^i\o^ fj, etc., 681). 
 
 4. e7re/x7re ydp /Slkov^ olvov, biroTe irdw rjSvv Xd^oL, 
 for he was accustomed to send jars of wine whenever he 
 
 received any very sioeet (= el irore, etc., if ever, 681). 
 
 5. OTL firj i^ovXero Sovvac, ovk dv viricr^eTOy^ he 
 iDould not have promised what he did not wish to give 
 (= et Tt pri i^ovXero, etc., 668). 
 
 6. Tw r^yejxovL Tno-Te-ucrofiev ov dv Kvpo<; Sw, we will 
 trust the guide (any guide) tvhom Cyrus will give (687). 
 
 7. eTretSa^ SuaTrpd^cofjiaL d Seo/xat, yj^o), when I shall 
 have accom])lished what I wish, I will return (687). 
 
 ^ The definite relative for the indefinite. 2 This form is rare. 
 
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 285 
 
 8. (l)O^OLiJirjv 8' av tco y^yeixovi & Boltj eirecrOaL, I 
 shoaldfear to folio to the ^ aide whom he would ^ive (690). 
 
 a. Observe that a conditional relative clause is introduced by 
 a relative or relative adverb instead of the particle el, if; that in 
 other respects they are like the ordinary conditions, the antecedent 
 clause forming the apodosis. 
 
 b. Observe that dv is attached to the relative word (692); 
 that these clauses can usually be changed to the ordinary condi- 
 tions by resolving the relative word or the same with dv, into the 
 conjunction el or idp with rt?, l,2i,S, 4, etc. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 703. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent 
 has a conditional force, and may take the form of any 
 of the ordinary conditions (661 fF.), of which the antece- 
 dent clause is the apodosis. 
 
 704. Temporal clauses with ew?, ecrre, fJi€xph ^XP'" 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. €cyg fxevofjiev avrov crKoiTeiv Sel ottcos ao'</)a\eo'rara 
 fxepcojjiev, as long as we remaiti here^ we must consider 
 how we shall remain most safelj/. 
 
 2. iirokifxei to2<; Spa^l ^J^^XP^ Ku/oo? iherjOy) tov 
 o-jparev^aTo^y he continued to make war upon the Thra- 
 cians until Cyrus needed the army, 
 
 3. €ws av TTaprj rt?, xP^P'^h ^-^ ^ony as any one is 
 with me, I make use of his services. 
 
 4. p^^XP^ ^' ^^ ^y^ 7]K0), at (TTrovhai pevovTOiv, until 
 I shall have returned, let the treaty remain. 
 
 5. irepipevoiev av oi^pi dc^t/cotro KXeap^os, the 
 would wait until Clcarchus should arrive. 
 
286 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 a. Observe that av is attached to the particle as in 692. 
 
 b. Observe that when €(o^, eVre, fie'^^^pi, etc.^ as long as^ 
 while, or until, \, 2, refer to a definite time- present or past, tliey 
 take the indicative -, that when they refer to an indefinite time, 
 they take the construction of conditional relatives in general con- 
 ditions, conditions contrary to fact (rare), and future conditions, 
 3, 4, 5. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 705. When €0)9, ecrre, ^^XP^-^ ^XPh ^^ ^ong as, until, 
 refer to a definite time, they take the indicative ; other- 
 wise they follow the constructions of conditional relatives 
 (703), in general conditions, conditions contrary to fact, 
 and future conditions. 
 
 706. Temporal clauses tvith irpCv, before, until. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. hie^iqcrav npiv rov^ ak\ov<; aTTOKpivacrO ai, they 
 crossed before the others replied. 
 
 2. ovre ravra iTToiovv irpiv Kkiap^o^ '^k€, nor did 
 they do these things until Clear chus. came. 
 
 3. ov KaTa\v(T€L 77/30 9 Tov<; dvTLCTTaa'icoTa^ irpXv 
 av Kvpo) crvfji^ov\ev(Tr]TaL, he will not make peace 
 with his opponents until he shall have consulted with 
 Cyrus. 
 
 4. ov TTpoaOev TTavaerai^ Trplv ap avTov<; Karaydyxj 
 otfcaSe, he will not cease before he shall have restored 
 them to their homes. 
 
 5. ovK av TTporepov opixyjcaivro, nplv ra iavTcov 
 wapa(TK€vd(raivTOf they would not set out before their 
 own affairs were all ready. 
 
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 287 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, Trpiv, before, deijending upon an aflir- 
 rnative sentence expresses a simple temporal relation^ and takes 
 the infinitive. 
 
 b. Observe that in %, 3, 4, 5, irpiv, until, before, depending 
 upon a negative sentence, expresses a limit of time like eo)?, and 
 takes the same constructions (705). 
 
 c. Observe that hi 4., b, irporepov and irpoadev precede irpCv 
 in the leading clause, but are superfluous in English. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 707. irpiv regularly takes the infinitive when the 
 leading verb is affirmative ; and the constructions of ew? 
 when the leading verb is negative or implies a negative. 
 
 a. TTpLv or TTplv Yj is often preceded by irporepov or irpoadev 
 in the leading clause. 
 
 708. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. olh^ i.7Tei avTov<; Trpdthoiev^ hilar avro, 2. Trte- 
 ^Ofiepof; VTTO royv olkol ^ avricrracrioiToyv ep^erat Trpos 
 rov Kvpop. 3. alpTJcroixai vfjias /cat crvv vpZv otl^ av 
 Sej) TTeLcrofiaL. 4. rj Se KiXtcrcra ISovaa ttjp tol^lv 
 Tov crrpareu/xaro? iOavfiacre. 5. rr^v IkevOepiav ekoi- 
 p/r]v av avu (av e^w iravroiv. o. Kvpos oe e^o)v ov5 
 eLpy)Ka wpfiaro oltto %dpSecov. 7. ^0(j>aLveTOv, ^evov 
 ovTa Koi TovTov, eKeXevae dvBpa<; Xa/Bovra ekOelv on 
 TrXeicTTOv^. 8. heir ai avrov * fxr) irpodOev KaraXvcrai 
 Trpos Tovs dvTL(TTa<JLOirra<; Trplv av avT(a crvpL^ovKevcnqT ai, 
 
 ^ Force of an attributive, 79, h. 
 
 2 So. iTcKTXfLv. 8 See 438, 2 ; 439. 
 
 * Cf. 340. Wlien heoiiai means reqttest, it may take gen. of the person 
 and ace. of the tiling, or the infinitive. 
 
288 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 9. 6 8' dvTjp ^ ^aXe7ra>TaT09 e^^po? w ctz^ TToXe/ito? ^. 
 
 10. v/ia? ;)(/)7) Sia/SrjvaL top Ev(j)pdT7jv TTOTayiov irplv 
 ^rj\ov eI^'al o rt ot aXXoi ''¥XKy)ve^ diroKpivovvT at Kvpco. 
 
 11. 6 8' di'Spl eKOLdTco Bcocrei irivTe dpyvpiov fJLvds 
 iiT7]v €19 Bal3vkcova rjKcoaL, Kal rov fXLcrdov ivrekrj jxixP^ 
 av Karao-Ttjcrr) tov^ "EWrjvaf; et? 'Icovidv irdkuv, 
 
 12. iyo) yap OKvouqv fiev av et? rd TrXola iiJLl3aLV€Lv 
 a Ty/xci^ ooLTj, fjLTj rjfjia^ Tai9 vavcri eAry. lo. ov 7r/>o- 
 repov 7rpo9 ')7/xa9 iiroXefiiQcrav irplv KaXco^ rd kavrcov 
 TrapecTKevdcravTO. 
 
 II. 1. He said these things. 2. He would run for 
 victory. 3. All the cities chose Cyrus instead of Tissa- 
 phernes. 4. You will take provisions whenever we do 
 not furnish a market. 5. I will obey the man whom 
 you shall choose. 6. But Menon, before it was evi- 
 dent what the rest of the soldiers would do, spoke as 
 follows. 
 
 709. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ivTekrj^, -69, at the end, Trpo-opdo), see in fro7it, 
 
 complete^ full [76X09]. before. 
 
 ^i'i(TTr]ixi,set apart; to stand iireihiv [eVet877 + dv\ 
 
 apart, open the ranks. temp. conj. w. subj., 
 
 TTte^ft) [7rt€8-], TTLecrco, eVt- as soon as, whenever, 
 
 ecra, iTnea-Orjp, to press, after. 
 
 crowd; pass., to he hard iirav or cVt^V [eVet + a^], 
 
 pressed, oppressed. temp. conj. w. subjunc- 
 
 ^ What verb must be understood ? 
 2 Cf. 249. 8 Cf. 579, a. 
 
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 289 
 
 tive, tchenever, lohen, as irpCp, temp, conj., before, 
 
 soon as. until; YjoX,., priusc[iiam , 
 
 oTTOTe, conj., adv., w/ien, Trporepo?, -a, -ov, former, 
 
 whenever^ since, because ; previous, sooner ; neut. 
 
 Lat., cum, quando. as ^^'^., previously, 
 
 ixOpo';, 'd,-6v, hostile, unfriendly ; 6 h^dpo^^ foe, private 
 
 enemy ; Lat., hostis, inimcus. 
 6 7roXefiLo<;, public enemy, enemy in war ; often TroXe/iioi, 
 
 the enemy. Lat. hostes, 
 SetSft), to fear, deliberate and reasonable fear. 
 </)o/3eo/xai, to fear, instanstaneous and inconsiderate 
 
 fear. 
 oKvecoj to fear, dread, hesitate, shrink from, in a moral 
 
 sense. 
 
 710. /uiaAc-, mac-, mag-, have power, be great. jjiaK-pd-s, 
 -a, 'ov, long ; jidK-ap, -a/o-09, 6, 17, poioerful, wealthy, 
 happy, blessed; fiaKapi^o), esteem happy ; /Aa/capto-ro-?, 
 ->7, -6v, be deemed happy, enviable; liTJK-os, -€-09, to., 
 length ; fi-qx-ain^, --^9, means, device, machine ; d-jjajx' 
 avo-^, 'OP, without means, impracticable, impossible ; iic-y- 
 a-St fJieyd-Xyj, fjueya, great, poioerful ; fjLeydk(o<;, greatly ; 
 jiCL^cov, -OP (for iJL€y-l(t)v), comp., greater ; jj.€Y-i<rTo-s, -17, 
 'ov, sup., greatest. 
 
 mag-nu-s, adj., great ; maior (for mag-ior), adj., 
 greater ; maximu-s (for mag-simu-s), adj., greatest ; 
 mag-is, adv. (for mag-ius), more ; mag-is-ter, -tri, m., 
 master. 
 
 May, MAKE, MIGHT, MUCH, MORE, MOST, MANY, MAIN ; 
 
 .macro-cosm, machine, mechanic, o-mega. 
 
 19 
 
290 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 711, Additional Forces are collected by Aristippus 
 and Others. 
 
 Review 238, cJ? (241), 245, 269, 369, 5 ; 385, 675. 
 
 10. 'AptcrrtTTTros 8e 6 ©erraXo? ^evos ct)v irvyx^^^^ 
 
 aVTCp, KOL 7rL€^6fJL€VO<;^ VTTO T(i)V OLKOL OLVTLCTTacrLOJTOJT/ 
 
 ip^eraL 7rpo<; top Kvpov /cat alrel avTov et? ^ 8tcr^tXtoi>9 
 ^epovs^ Koi rpLOJP jjnqpcop^ fiLcrOop, coq ovtco Trepiyepo- 
 fxepo^^ ap T(op dpTiCTTaaLcoTcop, 6 Se Kvpo<; ^lSojctlp 
 avTcp €19 TerpaKKT^ikLOv^; koX If ix7)pcop jjllo-Oop, kol 
 Seirat avTov fjirj irpoadep KaraKvaai irpos tov<s apTiara- 
 (nctyra<s irplp ap avT(p crvix^ov\evar)Tai. ovtco 8e av to 
 ip SeTTokCa iXdpOapep avTco Tpe(j>6iJLepop'^ cTTpaTevixa. 
 
 11. Upo^epop 8e TOP Bolcotlop, ^epop opTa avTco, eKe- 
 Xevae Xa^opTa dpSpas otl 7r\eLcrTov<; irapayepeadau,^ 
 cJ? €19 ritcrt8a9 l3ov\6fJLepos (TTpaTeveadaL. ^o(f)aLpeTOP 
 Se TOP ^Tvix^aXiop koi %0)KpdTr]p top ^A-)(ai6p, ^epovs 
 opTa^ KOL TovTOv<;, iKeXevcrep dpSpa^ Xa^6pTa<; iXdeip 
 OTL 7r\eicrToi>95 W9 TToXefXTjaajp ^ TuacracfyeppeL crvp toI<; 
 ^vydcTL Tcop M.LXr)crLO)P. Kat iiroCovp ovtco^ ovtol. 
 
 * What does m^C'^ficvos express ? 
 
 2 els wlieri used with numerals is a preposition (p. 119^). 
 
 * For ^evovs koi fiicrOov cf. 267, 11- 
 
 * Syntax? 
 
 ^ TTfpiyevofxevos av, participle in the so-called indirect discourse (776) : 
 saying that thus he could overcome, etc. In the dii'ect form, Trfpiyfvolfirjv 
 av, etc. ; cf. 694, 6 ; 648, n. 1 ; ovtcd implies the protasis. 
 
 * TrapayeveaBai is compounded of what ? 
 ' Force of TroXfixrjacov ? Use of as ? 
 
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 291 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN /xt. — SUBSTITUTIONS 
 FOR CONDITIONS. — RELATIVE CLAUSES 
 OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, AND RESULT. 
 
 Review 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 1, 2; 117, 118, 119, 
 120, 121, 236, 2, 5, 6; 287, 289, 300, 324, 573, 579. 
 617, 619, 661. 
 
 712. Irregular verbs in fxi follow the analogy of the 
 regular verbs in fjui in the present and second aorist 
 systems (617), but are more or less irregular in forma- 
 tion. Most of them, however, lack the second aorist 
 system entirely. 
 
 713. Conjugate elfXL (859). 
 
 a. elvac is for ia-vac ; wz/ for iaoav, 
 
 714. Conjugate <^i7/xt [(^a-], sai/ (858). • 
 
 a. Note that it is inflected in the main like LaTrjfjLi (619). 
 d. All the forms of the present indicative are enclitic, except 
 
 715. Substitution for Conditions, 
 
 The place of a protasis may be supplied by a partici- 
 ple (236, 6), by a preposition and its case, or implied 
 in an adverb or some other form of expression (711, n. 5, 
 end). When a participle takes the place of the protasis, 
 its tense is always the same as that which the verb itself 
 
292 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 would have had in the indicative, subjunctive, or opta- 
 tive. The present includes the imperfect. E. g. 
 
 Kol avv vfxiv fxev av elrjv TLfJLLO<;, vfjLcov 8e eprnxo^ ojv 
 ovK av iKavos eL7]v av (J)l\ov (ocjyeXyjcraL, and with yon (if 
 I should remain with you) / should be honored, hut being 
 separated from you (et . . . euriv, if I should be^ etc.) / 
 should not be able to assist a friend. 
 
 716. Belative clauses expressing Purpose, 
 
 The relative with the future indicative may express a 
 purpose. Its negative is /xiy. E. g. 
 
 riyefiova alrel Kvpov octti^ Sta <^tXta5 TTJq -^copa<; 
 aTrd^eiy he asks Cyrus for a guide who will lead them 
 back (to lead back) through a friendly country, 
 
 a. After verbs of motion purpose is regularly expressed bj 
 the future participle (236^ 5). 
 
 717. Causal Clauses. 
 
 Clauses denoting cause or reason are regularly ex- 
 pressed by the conjunctions with the indicative after 
 both primary and secondary tenses. The most common 
 causal conjunctions are on, cu?, because ; iirei, eVetSif, 
 &r€, oTTOTe, since. The negative is ov. E. g. 
 
 firj OavjxdleTe otl ^aXcTrwg (fyepco toI<; irapovci Trpdy 
 fxa(TLv, do not wonder because I am greatly distressed on 
 account of the present affairs. 
 
 a. For causes expressing another's reason, see (788). 
 
 h. Cause is frequently expressed by the participle (236, 2). 
 
 718. Clauses of Result with cjcrre. 
 Examine the following : 
 
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUS*E; ETC. 293 
 
 1. e)^cu yap Tpn]pei<^ cjcrTe iXeuv to eKeivcov irXoiov^for 
 1 have triremes, (so as to take) so that lean take their boat. 
 
 2. Kol T) fJLTJTTjp (JweTrpaTTev avTco Tavra, wcrre )8a- 
 crtXev? TTjv iiev Trpos iavTov iTn^ovXrjp ovk rjcrOdveTO, 
 and his mother ivas co-operating with him in this, so that 
 the king did not become aware of the plot against himself. 
 
 Observe that: 1. The infinitive is used with wcrre to express 
 the result as one which the action of the leading verb tends to 
 produce ; that (ocrTe here is regularly translated so as. 2. The 
 indicative is used with ware to express the result as one that the 
 action of the leading verb does really produce or states it as a 
 fact, and hence its negative is ov. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 719. wcrre, so that, so as, with the infinitive ex- 
 presses the result as one which the action of the leading 
 verb tends to produce, with the indicative as one which 
 that action really does produce. 
 
 a. In Greek the result clause never has the subjunctive. 
 
 720. Indirect Discourse. 
 
 A direct quotation gives the exact words of the origi- 
 nal speaker or writer; as, The king will come at dawn. 
 In an indirect quotation or question, the original words 
 conform to* the construction of the sentence in which 
 they are quoted ; as, He said that the king would come 
 at dawn (cf. 267, 5). 
 
 721. As a verbal neuter noun, the infinitive may be 
 the subject or object of a verb ; it is qualified by 
 adverbs, and not by adjectives. 
 
294 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 1. As subject, the infinitive is used chiefly with im- 
 personal verbs ; as XPV> ^^h ^^ ^^ necessary, or with iarl 
 (117, 1; 118). 
 
 2. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with verbs 
 whose action implies another action as its object (119). 
 
 3. With the article the infinitive becomes more dis- 
 tinctly a noun, and it may be used in either of the above 
 relations, or may depend upon a preposition, or stand 
 in most constructions belonging to nouns : i. e. r^p^av 
 Tov Sia^aLpeup (648, N. 2). 
 
 722. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used as 
 the object of verbs of saying or thinkiny^ or equivalent 
 expressions, and represents an indicative or optative of 
 the direct discourse. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. ol crrpartwrai KareKOTrrjcrav viro tcov KlXlkcov, the 
 soldiers ivere cut doivn by the Cilicians. 
 
 2. i(f)a(Tav Tov<; aTpariajTa^ KaraKOTrrjvaL viro tojv 
 KlXlkcdv, they said that the soldiers had been cut down by 
 the Cilieians, 
 
 3. 7r/D09 TovTov /3ovkoiJLaL ekOelv^ I desire to go to 
 this one. 
 
 4. 7r/3o? TovTov €(1)7] ^ovkeadaL iXOelp, he said that he 
 desired to go to this one. 
 
 5. VTT^ ifjLov TjjhiKiqTai, he has been wronged by me. 
 
 6. pofjiii^ovcn avTov vir* ifjLov rjSiKrjcrOaL, they believe 
 that he has been wronged by me. 
 
 7. (jvv vfiLv OLP €Lr)p Tipiios, wUh you I should be in 
 honor. 
 
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 295 
 
 8. crifv vfjLLV av olfxai elvai TLfJuos, with you I think I 
 should he in honor. 
 
 9. lav Kak(o<; Trpd^o), ov irpoaOev TravcrofxaL irpiv qlv 
 v/xa9 Karaydyo) ot/caSe, if I shall be successful^ I tvill not 
 cease before I shall have restored you to your homes, 
 
 10. vTricT^eTo avroi?, ei Kakax; irpd^eLev, ov npocrdei/ 
 TravcreaOai irplv avTov<; KaraydyoL OLKaSe, he promised 
 them that if he should he successful, he would not cease 
 before he should have restored them to their homes. 
 
 11. TovTO TO Tei^o<; /BacnXeo)^ iXeyero (^vkaK-qv (f)v~ 
 XdrreLv, it ivas said that a garrison of the Jdng was guard- 
 ing this wall. 
 
 12. TOVTO TO T€L^o<; ^acTtXeoi? iXeyeTO (f>vXaKrj (f)v- 
 XdTT€Lv, this wall a garrison of the king was said to be 
 guarding. 
 
 a. Observe that in 1, 3, 5, 7, the words of the original 
 speaker are given ; that in 2. 4^ 6, 8, the sentences represent 
 the words of the original speaker changed to conform to the con- 
 struction of the verb upon which they depend (720). 
 
 b. Observe that in 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, tlie infinitives depending 
 upon a verb of saying^ thinking , etc., represent the verbs of the 
 direct discourse, and their tenses the corresponding tenses of the 
 finite moods, the present including the imperfect, and the perfect 
 the pluperfect. 
 
 c. Observe that the leading verb of tlie complex sentence in 
 9, is changed to the same tense of the infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course ; that after a secondary tense the verbs of the subordinate 
 clauses are changed to the optative (578). 
 
 d. Observe that civ qualifying the main verb of the direct is 
 retained in the indirect 7, 8, but av attached to the particle is 
 
296 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the optative in the 
 indirect 9, 10. 
 
 e. Observe that indirect discourse frequently involves a 
 change of person, chiefly of the first and second to the third, 
 3, 4/ 9, 10. 
 
 y*. Observe that in 12, Xeyerat may take the personal con- 
 struction for the impersonal (246, 247). 
 
 Rule. 
 723. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used 
 as the object of verbs of sayincj or ihinMng, or equiv- 
 alent expressions.^ Here each tense of the infinitive 
 represents the tense of the leading verb which would be 
 used in the direct form, the present and perfect includ- 
 ing the imperfect and pluperfect. If the original had 
 avy the infinitive retains it. 
 
 2. The negative ov of the finite verb is regularly 
 retained in the indirect, but it is sometimes changed to 
 \Lri, the regular negative of the infinitive. 
 
 3. After primary tenses, dependent verbs in indirect 
 discourse retain the same mood and tense; after sec- 
 ondary tenses, they may be either changed to the same 
 tense of the optative or retained in the original mood and 
 tense (579, a)\ but dependent secondary tenses^ of the 
 indicative remain unchanged.- 
 
 ^ In indirect discourse the subject of the sentence (6) seems to be put 
 in the accusative as the grammatical object of the reporting verb, while the 
 verb of the predicate is changed to the corresponding tense of the infinitive 
 as a verbal noun, and the construction assumes the form of two accusatives 
 after the same verb (268). 
 
 2 Nouns denoting hope^ thought, e^notion, combinations of words ex- 
 pressing thought, etc. 
 
 ^ If these were changed they might be caefounded with the subjunctive. 
 
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 297 
 a. When a subjunctive becomes optative av is dropped. 
 
 724. Verbs of hoping, expecting , promiHing , etc., allow 
 either the object infinitive or the infinitive in indirect 
 discourse. Bat in the latter construction the future 
 infinitive is more common. 
 
 725. Xeyw, especially in the passive ; So/ceiw, seems ; 
 and a few^ others, while allowing either the personal or 
 impersonal construction, are regularly used personally. 
 
 726. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ovTOi yap Kol kiroyLevoi av (J^lXol avrco Kal 
 TTpoOvfJLOL eTTOi/xe^a. 2. ov yap rjfjieLS^ iKeivov en 
 (TTpaTLcoTai, CTret ye ov avveTTopieOa avTco. 3. irepovs 
 rjyeixopa^ eTrefjixpev ot avTov<;, iav cnrovhaX yivcovrai, 
 a^ovaiv ivOev i^ovcn tol eViTT^Seta. 4. dSt/cetcr^at 
 pofJLii^eL vcf) rjixcov ' cocTTe Kal /xeraTre/xTTOjiLeVov avTOv ovk 
 iOeXo) ekOeiv, 5. aoi SoKovp^ep Imrecop ttXtJOov? oltto- 
 pelv rj ottXltcjv ; 6." tovto (^€to Troirjcreiv 6 Kvpo^; 
 Tov ^A^poKOfjiap. 7. 6 S' ovT€ TTporepov ov^evi^ KpecT- 
 Tovi iavTov €t? x^^P^^ iXdelv €(j)r}. 8. evopnt^e yap 
 6cra>^ OaTTOV iXOoL, Toaovrco aTrapacrevoTepcp /3acrtXet 
 lia^eiaOai, 9. ol Se <f>aaLP ovS\ el ^ovXolo, Svpacrdai 
 CLP OLTToSovpaL ocTa viricr^pei. 
 
 II. 1. Cyrus so treated^ the satraps that they were 
 more friendly to him than to the king. 2.^ For he 
 thought that on this day the king would not fight. 
 
 ^ What verb must be understood ? 
 
 2 Let the pupil give tlie direct form of tlie following sentences. 
 8 With ets x"pas f^^"" (225). * See 386. ^ diaTierjfii. 
 
 * Let tlie pupil first give the direct form of the following sentences, and 
 then change them to indirect, 723, 1, 2, 3, etc. 
 
298 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 3. And he said that Abrocomas, an enemy, was at the 
 Euphrates river. 4. For I think you are both my 
 friends and alhes. 5. He said that he should fear to 
 follow the guide whom Cyrus would give, 
 
 727.- R. <^a-, fa-, shoiD, shine. ^y\-\Liy declare, say ; 
 <|)d-o-K-(o, say^ allege; <|)d-(rL-s, -e-w?, 17, saying; irpo- 
 (fiaai-s, -e-cos, r), pretence, pretext; <|)(o-VTJ, -7J9, sound, 
 voice, language ; <t)aiv(o [<^a + v\, hrincj to light, show, 
 cause to shine ; <j)av-€p6-s, -a, -6-v^ open to sight, visible ; 
 ^avepm, adv., evidently ; d-cf^av-TJ^;, -e?, out of sight, 
 invisible, ; KaTa-cfiav-yjs, -€s, in plain sight. 
 
 for, say ; fa-ma, -ae, f., report; fa-s, n., divine right. 
 Ban, banns, pro-phet, pro-phesy, phase, em-phasis, 
 phenomenon, phantasm. 
 
 728. Cyrus assembles his Forces at Sardis. 
 
 Review 106, 146, 212, 399, 648, 675, 711. 
 
 1 . 'EttcI S' iSoKei auTO) '^817 iropevecrO ai avco, ttjv fjicv ^ 
 7rp6(f)aaLv iiroieiTO ws^ HicriSa? ^ovkofxevof; eK^akeiv 
 e/c Tyj<; ^wpa? ' kclI d9poit,ei oj?^ cttI tovtov^ to re /8ap- 
 fiapiKov KoX TO 'EX\r)VLKOv crTpaTevfJia. ivTavOa^ kol 
 TrapayyeWei tS t€ KXeap^oj \a^6vTL rjKeLv ocrov rfv 
 avTco (TTpoLTevpLa^ KOL tS 'AptcrTiTTTTw (TvvaWayevTL 
 7rpo5 Tov<; OLKOL ^ aTTOTrefjLxjjai vrpos kavTov 6 ei^e aTpa- 
 TevfJba * Kal 'aepua rw 'ApKaSu, 09 avTco TTpoeKTTrjKei 
 Tov ev rat? TrdXecrt ^eviKov,^ rjKeiv irapayyiWei \a- 
 ^ovTa^ T0U9 az/Spa? ttXtjv ottoctoi^ iKavol rjcrav ra? 
 OLKpoTToXei^ (^yvkoLTTeiv. 2. eKokeae §e koX tov^ Mikr}- 
 TOV Tro\iopKovvTa<;, koI tov<; (j)vydSa^ eKeXevcre aw 
 avT^ aTpaTeveadai, viroaxoP'^^oq avTol^, d /caXws 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN /X,6. 299 
 
 KaTairpa^eiei/ e<p a ecTTpareveTo, fxr) wpoatfei/ nav- 
 aacrdat TrpXv avTov<; Karaydyoi oi/caSe. ol Se T^Sew? 
 iTreiOopTo ' inLCTTevov yap avTco ' kol Xa^ovre^s tol onXa 
 naprjaap et? SdpSeis. 
 
 ^ fx€u is used alone for emphasis ; it implies a clause with Se, but in 
 truth, etc. 
 
 2 Explain the use of o)s. 
 
 * las eVi rouTouff, fi^i- ?/'or avotcedly against these. 
 
 * ivravOa, there, i. e. at Sardis, the capital of Cyrus's province. 
 
 ® See o-ui/aXXarro), ^ »i(afy?:^ terms with ; cf. KaraXva-ai, 711, § 10. 
 « Cf. p. 1922. 
 
 ' roil ^cviKov, sc. crrpaTevfxaTos, the viercenary force. 
 8 Xa/3oWa agrees with the unexpressed subject of jj'ffti' instead of with 
 Sei'ta, since the latter is so far removed in position (780, 2). 
 ^ Sc. TotrovTO)!/ as tlie antecedent of b-noaoi. 
 ^° Changed as in Eiighsh, instead of the optative (723, 3 ; 770). 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS IN /xi ; ti^t^/ai. —VERBS OF 
 THE SEVENTH CLASS. 
 
 Review Lessons LIV., LVL 
 
 729. Write the present and second aorist systems of 
 Tiey]p.i^ [ee-\ place (849, 853). 
 
 a. In the imperfect active singular, iTid€i<;, irlOet., are formed 
 as if from a verb in e(o (154, 2). See 641, a. 
 
 b. For the second aorist system, see 641, h. 
 
 1 Let the pupil inflect this verb entire before referring to the paradigms. 
 
300 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 c. The imperative active, rWei, (for TiOedi) is formed as if 
 from a contract verb in eo), cf. iroieco (429). 
 
 d. The active participles ri^e/? {nOevT^) and ^et? (for Oevrs) 
 are declined like Xf^et? (350). Tor their formation, see 619, ^; 
 641, d. 
 
 e. The singular of the second aorist indicative active, as in 
 BiScofit, is lacking, and it is supplied by the first aorist : edrj/ca, 
 etc. (641, e). 
 
 f. The second aorist imperative active is Qh (for Q^dC), 
 
 (641,/). 
 
 g. The second aorist infinitive active is Sdvai (for Oe-evai), 
 (641,^). 
 
 730. Verds of the 'Theme or Seoenf/i Class. 
 
 Verbs of this class form the present bv adding the 
 personal endings directly to the theme, which is often 
 reduplicated with t. This class includes all verbs in 
 /it except those in vv^xi (736). The tense stems of 
 these verbs, excepting the present and second aorist, 
 are formed like verbs in w (617). 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. laTrjfjLL [crra-], sei (621), (rTTJcra), ecrrrycra, i(TT7]v, 
 icrrrjKa, ecrra/xat,, io-rdOiqv. 
 
 2. hvvaixai \hvvci-], be able, hvvrjcro^JLai, SeSvprjfjiaL, 
 
 3. iirio-T ayiai [eTrtfrra-], lender standi eTTiorrrjcroiiai, 
 
 4. 8t8w/xt [80-], //ive, 8(o(T0)y iScoKa, SeSw/ca, 8eSo/xat, 
 iSoOrjv. 
 
 5. TiOrjiJLL^ l^9e-~\, put, place, Oyjcrco, eSrjKa, riOeiKa^ 
 TeOeufJiaL, Iridiqv. 
 
 ^ The theme vowel is lengthened to ci instead of ?; iii the first perfect 
 and perfect middle systems. 
 2 See 304.. 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 301 
 
 731. Some common -w verbs that have second aorist 
 of the -fXL form : 
 
 1. /8atVw [/8a-], (631, 3), ^0, e^r]v,^ ^co, ^aiiqv, ^rjOi, 
 
 2. yiyvaycKO) \_yvcH\ (651, a), eyvcov, yvco^ yvoirjv, 
 ypwOi, yvcovai, yvov<;» 
 
 '3. ^ddvoi [^^a-] (631, 2), anticipate, i<^d7]Vy^ <^dcoy 
 (fydairjp, (j>6rjvai, ^da<;. 
 
 732. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Kol aycova eOrjKe. 2. ecrre rcov \o^ayo)v 
 apicrroi, 3. ol dyyeXoL top Tiaaa^ipvov^; dSe\(j)ov 
 eyvcjcrav. 4. ovhev yap Trj<; oSov eVtcrra/xe^a. 
 
 5. Sefta? iSocrav ol rrj^ ySacrtXeo)? yvvaiKo^ dSeX(f)OL. 
 
 6. TTjv y€(f)vpav \v(T€i TLO'(ra(f)€pv7]s Trj<; vvkto<;^ idv 
 SvprjTaL, w? fXTj Sta^^re. 7. ri TTOirjcavTe'^ (^6 da ai 
 /BovXojJLevoL TTplv TTaOeiv, iiroiiqcrav /ca/ca rov<; ov /xeX- 
 XovTas roiOVTOv ovhiv^ 8. SeSot/ca /li']^ \a^(i)v fie 81- 
 /CTyi^ iiTiOfj 0)1/ ^ vop.it^ei VTT^ ifiov rjSLKTJcrOai. 9. T179 
 fJid^7j<; TTavcrdfievoL dfiffyoTepoL Kara ^(i)pav^ eOevro rd 
 OTrXa. 10. Tov^ OTrXtra? iKeXeve diaOai rd oirXa nepl 
 TTjv avTov aKiqvriv, 11. koI KeXevovcri (jyvXdrTeaOaL 
 fir) vfXLP iiridcovTai rrj^ vvKro<; ol ^dp^apoi. 
 
 II. 1. They stood under arms in line of battle. 
 2. They will attack us daring the night. 3. He said 
 that he would come with as many horsemen as possible. 
 4. But there the Greeks halted and rested, grounding 
 
 1 Like ^(TTr^v (619, b^). « See 438, 439. 
 
 2 Sc TTotcii/. • ^ In their proper place. 
 
302 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 their arms. 5. Leading his line of battle into the 
 space between-^ both of them, he halted under arms. 
 6. If he is there, I desire to inflict punishment upon him. 
 
 733. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ay(xiv, -wvo^, 6, assembly, TiOrjfiLy put, place ; rWefxai 
 
 contest, games [agony]. ra onXa, gi^ound arms, 
 
 eiri-rWiqyui, put upon, inflict ; stand under arm^ [do, 
 
 mid., attack [epithet] . doom, theme, thesis]. 
 
 734. R. TrXa-, ttXc-, iple-,filL 'iri-iJL-TrXTi-fjLi,^^// (red n pli- 
 cation strengthened by the nasal fx) ; ir\r\-p-7\^, -e<;, fidl ; 
 irXTJ-G-a), be full ; ttXtjOo^, -e-og, to, throng, midtitude ; 
 ir\€-6po-v, t6^ measure of extent, plethron ; 7r\e9pL-alo-<;, 
 -d, 'ov, of a plethron ; avfi-7rX€cor<;, -o)v,full ; irXeicov, -ov, 
 comp., more, greater ; irXriv, prep, and adv., except [more 
 than) ; ttXcio-tos, -17, -ov (for TrXe-icrro-?), sup., 7nost ; 
 irdX-i-s, -€-w9, 77, city (^ mass,' 'crowd ') ; 770X1-717-9, -ov, cit- 
 izen ; TroXt-opKe-cu (etpyaj, hem in), besiege; a/cpd-TroXt-?, 
 -6-609, rj (cf. R. dfc-, 616), upper city, citadel ; iroX-v-s, 
 ttoX-Xt], ttoX-v, much, many; TroXXa-zct?, adv., many times, 
 often. 
 
 im-ple-6, fill up ; ple-nu-s, adj., fidl; plu-s, adj., 
 more ; ple-b-s, -is, f., the common people ; po-pulu-s, -i, 
 m., people, nation; pu-bli-cn-s, adj., of the people ; am- 
 plu-s, adj., of large extent. 
 
 Fill, eull ; plethora, pleonasm, acro-polis, metro- 
 polis, cosmo-polite, poly-gon, poly-nomial, etc., di- 
 ploma. 
 
 ^ ets TO fjL€(rov. ' 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 303 
 
 735* "^^^ Character and Number of the Forces assembled at 
 Sardis. Tissaphemes warns the King. 
 
 Review 236, 8; 238, 370, },2; 723, 1; 728. 
 
 3. SevCa^ fJL€p 817 Tov<; e/c rcop rrokeajv Xaj^cov irape- 
 yevero ct? SctpSet? OTrXtra? els rer paKicr^ikLovs^ Tipo- 
 ^evos 8e Traprji/ i^cop OTrXiras p^ev ecs TrevraKoaiovs /cat 
 ^tXtov9, yvpvrjTas Se TrevraKocriovSy ^o^aiveros 8e 6 
 Srv/xc^aXto? OTrXtra? ej^wi^ ^ikiovSy XcoKpaTrj^ 8e 6 
 'A;)(ato? OTrXira? e)(a)j/ cu? ^ TrevTaKoaiovs, Hdaicov 8e 
 6 Meyapev? et? iiTTaKocrLovs e)((j}v dvhpas Trapeyevero ' 
 rjv 8e /cat ovtx>9 /cat 6 ^cjKpdrrjs tcop dp,(j)l MlXyjtov 
 (TTparevopevcjp.^ 
 
 4. OvTot /x<ej/ et? Sap8et9 auTw ^ d(f)iKovTO. Ttcrcra- 
 ^ipvTjS 86, KaTavoTjcras ravra, /cat peu^ova^ 'qyyjo'dpevos 
 etvai^ rj (os cttI ntcrt8a9 tt^i^ TrapacTKevrjv,^ Tropeverai 
 <y?^ ^acrtXea ^* e8u^aT0 rd^KXTa Imreas i^ojv cos 
 irevraKoaiovS' 
 
 yvpvrjs, 'TjTos, a light-armed foot soldier. 
 KaTa-poect), observe, consider (cf. R. yi/&>-, 660). 
 TTapacTKevT], -rjs, preparation (cf. 638). 
 
 1 Cf. 297. 
 
 2 Syntax? 
 
 ^ Subject of eivat. 
 
 * 5; ihvvaro rdxta-Ta (sc oSm, 249), in whatever way Tie could most quickly^ 
 as rapidly as possible. 
 
304 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 REGULAR VERB Set/ci^v/xi. — IRREG-ULAR 
 VERB eTfjLL. 
 
 Review 531, obs.; 619, a, d; 630,631,632,633,712. 
 
 736. Some verbs of the Pifth or Nasal Class form 
 the present stem by adding to the theme -w, or after a 
 vowel -ppv. Most of these verbs end in ^t.' 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1 . heiKvvixi [8et/c-] , point out, shoio, SeC^o), iSet^a. 
 
 2. t^evyvvyii [t,yy-~\? join^ yoke, Ij^v^co^ e^evfa. 
 
 3. 6\kvfjLL^ L^^"]? destroy, loose, 6\o), cXXecra,* cJXd/xryi'. 
 
 737. Conjugate ^eiKvv^i in the present system (850). 
 
 Observe that in the present system of verbs in vvjjh, the end- 
 ings are added to the present stem, and not to the theme as in 
 617, 619 ; BeL/cvvfjLL, 8e/7CW9, etc. 
 
 b. Observe that the subjnnctive and optative are formed as in 
 -ft) verbs (553, 554) ; heiKvixo^ SeiKvvotfjLL^ etc. 
 
 c. Observe that the present imperative rejects -0i and length- 
 ens the final vowel of the theme, heUvv, etc. 
 
 738. SeLKvufjiL has no second aorists. iSvy, the sec- 
 ond aorist of Svco, enter, is here presented for inflection 
 (854): 
 
 1 These are sometimes called the second class of -\ii verbs. 
 
 2 The theme is lengthened as in the second class (527, 535). 
 ^ For oK-w-\ii, 
 
 * Tlie theme assumes e as in some verbs of the first class (522). 
 
REGULAR VERB SeUvVfJiL. 
 
 305 
 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 s. 
 
 1. 
 
 iSvv 
 
 Svo) 
 
 Lacking. 
 
 
 Svj/at 
 
 
 2. 
 
 eSvs 
 
 Svrjs 
 
 
 Sv9l 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 eSv 
 
 Bvrj 
 
 
 SvTO) 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 
 K,T.X. 
 
 K.T.X, 
 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
 Sis, hvcra, Bvi^ 
 
 a. The active participles heiKVv^^ SeiKvvcra^ SeiKvvv^ gen. 
 BeiKvvvTo<;, k. t. X. and 8u9, hvaa^ Sw, gen. hvvTO^^ k. t. X., are 
 inflected like tVra? (823). 
 
 739. el/xt [t-, Lat. i-re\, go^ has only the present 
 system (860). 
 
 Conjugate the following : 
 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 s. 
 
 1. 
 
 elfJLL 
 
 LO) 
 
 loi/xt or loiriv 
 
 LevaL 
 
 
 9 
 
 el 
 
 T 
 
 LOLS 
 
 Wl 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 elcTL 
 
 h 
 
 LOL 
 
 LTQ) 
 
 Part. 
 
 D. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Itov 
 
 ITOV 
 K.T.X. 
 
 K.T.X. 
 
 s. 
 
 K.T,X, 
 
 Impf. 
 
 1. ya or 
 
 2. rJ€L<; or 
 
 3. fj€L or 
 
 K.T.X, 
 
 K,T.X. 
 y€LV 
 
 TjeicrOa 
 yeuv 
 
 tc6j/, lovcra, lov 
 
 a. Observe that the subjunctive and optative are inflected as 
 in Set/cvu/jiL or Xvco ; that the imperative retains -6l ; that the 
 infinitive has thematic vowel e, and the participle thematic vowel 
 0, as in mv ('^32). 
 
 d. The present el/JLL has a future force, s//all go^ and regularly 
 takes the place of the future of ep^ofiai (698, 3). 
 
 20 
 
306 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 740. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. aXXa l6vT(jt)v. 2. ol (TTparioyrai ovk et^a- 
 crav^ livai. 3. /cat aTTiovre^, acrc^aXoi? av aTTioifxev, 
 4. TovTO T(d ipyco eTreheiKvvTo, 5. oTe Tavra rjv /cat 
 T^Xto? ihvero. 6. yecjyvpa 8e €77171^ H^evyfievr] TrXotot? 
 iirrd. 7. €/c Se tovtov Oolttop TTporjecrav avv Kpavyrj. 
 
 8. ot 8e avicrravrai iTTiSeiKvvpTe^ ota ecrrt^' 77 aTTopia. 
 
 9. ectz/ Tft> (Tvvd(i)piai, ovSev i//6v8o/>tat. 10. hid^aivov 
 Trjp y4(l>vpav it.evyiiiviqv vrXotot? TpiaKovTa koI kiTTa, 
 11. /cat aTpaTTjyov Se avrov dneSeL^e irdvTcop octol et? 
 KacrrwXoi} TreSiov dOpoit^ovrai. 12. eV Se r^ VTrep- 
 pokrj T(x)v 6pi(x)v Toiv et? to TreStoi/ Svo Xd^ot rou 
 MeV(uz/o9 (TTparev/xaro? aTTwXot'To. 13. 6 S' oure tt/oo- 
 Tepov ovhevl'^ Kpeirrovi iavTOv ets ^eipa^ iXOeiv ecfyrj, 
 ovre t6t€ Kupw ^ tej^at rjOeXe, Trplp rj yvvrj avrov eTreicre 
 Koi iTiarei^ eXa/Se. 
 
 II. 1. They advanced with a great shout. 2. Let 
 us show our good will. 3. They would go to their 
 tents. 4. In these marches many of the beasts of bur- 
 den perished. 5. Cyrus desired to show his army to 
 the Cilician queen. 
 
 741. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aTTopid, -d?, difficulty, dv-LaTrjfxi, make stand up, 
 
 vTrep'/SoXij, -rj^, crossing, rouse ; mid., stand np, 
 mountain pass [/SaXXw]. rise. 
 
 ^ OX) is frequently used with <^r)iii in the sense of den^i where we would 
 expect yLT] with the infinitive, as in English, / do not think, etc. 
 2 Follows eis x^'^'P^^ «^^f^'' (726, 7 ; 225). 
 ^ Sc. els xfi^pflf- See preceding note (2). 
 
REGULAR VERB heiKVV^l, 307 
 
 ttTT-etjULt, go away or back, eTn-heiKvvyn, point out, make 
 depart, clear; rnid., sho2u for 
 
 diTo-SeLKi/vfjLiy pomt out, ap» one's self, show, 
 
 point; mid., declare. t^evyvv^ii^t^ev^o), yoke, join; 
 
 aTT-oXXvfiL, -oXo), -coXeaa, of bridges, made of 
 '(oXofiTji^y -oXcoXeKa, -oXco- [yoke] . 
 
 Xa, destroy; mid. w. 2 pf. 7r/)o-€t/xt, go forward, ad- 
 and plpf. Sict., perish, die, vance. 
 
 eTfjLL, go, come, proceed, (tvv-tl07jijll, put together, 
 
 en-eiiJiL, be on or upon, be make an agreement, corir 
 over [et/xt]. tract, 
 
 err-et/xt, go or come on, ad- 
 vance, attack [el/xt], 
 
 ^aivo), go, walk. ep^ofxai, go, come. 
 
 iXavvo), march, make an cT/xt, go, in the wide sense. 
 expedition. 
 
 742. Counter Preparations of the King. Cyrus begins his March 
 through Xiydia and Fhrygia, and arrives at Celaenae. 
 
 Review 92, a-, 93; 107, 186, 249, 340, 369, 1, 2; 
 409, 677, 703, 735. 
 
 5. Kal l3a(TLXev^ fiev Br) eVet -qKovae Tia-aa^ipvov^ 
 Tov Kvpov^ (TToXov, avrnrapccTKevdiC^eTo, 
 
 Ku/oo? 8e €^(jiiv 0V9 ^ etprjKa ^ (opjiaTo diro SdpBecov * 
 Kal i^eXavvei 8ta ttj^; AvStas ora^/xov? rpeZ^ rrapacrdy 
 ya<; eiKocn Kal 8vo eVt tov MaiavSpov TTorapiOP, Tov- 
 TOV TO eS/)05 hvo nXeOpa* yecjivpa Se inyjp i^evyfieprj 
 TrXotots^ eTTTct. 
 
 6. TovTop Sta^a?* i^eXavvei Sta ^pvyLa<; dTadyiOV 
 
308 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 eva TTapacrd'yya<; oktco et? KoXocrcraSj ttoXiv OLKOvfJbevrjv. 
 evSaifJiOpa koL fjbeydXrjv. evravda efxeivev rjixipa^ eiTTOL * 
 KoX yJK€ M.ivo)v 6 ©erraXog OTrXiras ex^iv ^(tXtoi;? koL 
 TTekraard^ TrepTaKoauovs, AoXonas kol AlpiavaSf /cat 
 
 7. ^YAVTeuOev i^eXavvei crra^/iou? rpeig Trapacrayya? 
 eLKoaiv ets KeXati^ag, r^J? ^pvyuas irokiv oiKoviLivqv, 
 IxeyaXrjv kol ivSaifJLOPa. evravOa Kvpoi^ ySacriXeta 
 rjv KoX TTapdheiao^ fxeya^ dypLcov diqpicov^ 7r\T]p7)<;^ d 
 eKeivo^ idijpevev dno lttttov, oirore yvpLvdaai ^ovXolto^ 
 eavTOV T€ KoX Tov<; iTTTrou?. Sid /xecrou 8e tov rrapa- 
 Setcrou pel 6 MaLavSpo<; 7roTafx6<;' at ^e 7T7]yai avrov 
 eiaiv eK roiv jBacrikeioiv ' pel 8e /cat 8ta tt]<s KeXaLvwp 
 
 TToXectj?. 
 
 * Syntax. 
 
 2 Account for the omission of the antecedent. 
 8 Give the principal parts (098, 2 ; 708, 6). 
 
 * Explain the formation (731, 1). 
 
 * Explain the mood. 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 Review Lessons XLIL-LXIV. in order, with their 
 vocabularies, and note the allied words. 
 
 743. Formation of Adverbs. 
 
 1 . How are adverbs regularly formed from adjectives ? 
 
 2. Give the forms of adjectives and nouns that may 
 be used as adverbs. 
 
REVIEW. 309 
 
 3. Give the meanings of the endings -Oevy-Oi, and -Se. 
 
 4. How are adverbs compared ? What may adverbs 
 quahfy ? What force has e^oi with an adverb? 
 
 5. State the force of a qualifying word or phrase 
 with the article, and give examples. 
 
 6. Give the construction with verbs of doing any- 
 thing to, or of saying anything of a person or thing. 
 Give the force of ev, Kokm, etc., with these verbs. 
 
 7. Name other verbs that take a similar construction. 
 Name corresponding constructions in Latin and English. 
 
 744. Formation of Words. — Substantives. 
 
 1. Define a root. Define simple and compound 
 words. Define primitive and denominative words. 
 
 2. What are prefixes and suffixes ? Give the most 
 common suflSxes denoting the abstract idea of verbs. 
 Give the suffixes denoting agent, and examples. Give 
 the suffixes denoting quality, and examples. 
 
 3. What consonants may be added to the stems m 
 the formation of words ? What changes occur in the 
 final consonants of the theme or stem before consonant 
 endings ? 
 
 4. Give the force of the denominative endings -crt, 
 -ri, -/xo, -/xa ; -/xar ; -€t, -ret, and give examples of each. 
 
 5. What endings have adjectives in their formation 
 common with nouns ? 
 
 6. What do the endings -to and -lko denote? -eo 
 and 'ivo ? -Tepo and -raro ? Give examples of each 
 of these endings. 
 
310 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 745. Formation of Verbs. — Compounds, 
 
 1. Give several examples of denominative verbs. Ex- 
 plain the formation of those in evco, i^w, and vvo}.. 
 
 2. Give the meaning of the inseparable particles. 
 
 3. State the common ways of forming compound 
 words, and give examples. What change may the initial 
 vowel of the last part of a compound word undergo ? 
 
 4. Define objective and determinative compounds, 
 and give examples. 
 
 746. Giirmris Law. 
 
 1. Define cognate and borrowed words. 
 
 2. Give Grimm's Law of permutation of consonants. 
 
 3. In the middle of a word how are the rough mutes 
 frequently represented ? 
 
 4. What is the general direction in the phonetic 
 change of vowels ? In transliteration how are the 
 vowels changed ? 
 
 5. Give the Latin and English words cognate with 
 (j)€p(o, TTOv^, ixrjrrjp, olvo<;, Se/ca, ef, iiiji^. 
 
 6. Give the most common Greek words formed from 
 the roots : ay-, dp^-, ySoX-, Ik-, yvco-, and irXa-. 
 
 747. Classes of Ve?'hs. 
 
 1. In respect to the theme ending of verbs, into what 
 classes are verbs divided ? 
 
 2. In respect to the formation of the present stem from 
 the theme, into what classes are verbs divided ? 
 
 3. What verbs are included in the fourth class ? 
 
REVIEW. 311 
 
 What in the fifth class ? Define briefly the remaining 
 classes. 
 
 4. Explain the classification of rarrw, dyyeXXw, 
 <j)aLva), (TrjjJiaLvcOy voyLit^o), alcr^vvcx). 
 
 5. Explain the classification of Xay^^dvo), cjiOdvo), 
 iXavvo), alcrOdvoyiai, VTricr^vioyLaiy SeiKz^u/xi, oXkvjJLL. 
 
 748. Subjunctive and Optative. 
 
 1. What does the indicative express? The sub- 
 junctive ? 
 
 2. What relation does the optative bear to the sub- 
 junctive ? 
 
 3. What is the mood sign of the subjunctive ? Of 
 the optative ? What endings does each of these moods 
 take ? 
 
 4. How does the aorist subjunctive diff^er from the 
 present in form ? In meaning ? 
 
 5. Give the synopses of the present system of Xvo), 
 fceXevw, XetTTO), Troiea), 817X00). 
 
 6. Conjugate the present and aorist systems of Xvcw, 
 KeXevcjy TLfido), SoKeco. 
 
 7. Conjugate the future system of <j)aipo), fievo), 
 dyyekXo), 
 
 8. Conjugate the aorist system of c^atVoj, /xeVcw, 
 dyyeWco, KeXevcoj Tre/XTTO), kottto}, tclttw. 
 
 749. Second Tense St/stems, 
 
 1. Give the formation of the first tense systems of 
 verbs. 
 
 2. How does the second aorist system compare with 
 the present in inflection ? 
 
312 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 3. What is the tense sign of the second aorist ? 
 What exceptions in accent has it ? Conjugate the 
 second aorist system of Xcittw. 
 
 4. Give the synopses of the second aorist system 
 active of ayw, Trctcr^w, opdo), ep^ofiai, (jyevyco ; the sec- 
 ond aorist system of Xafji/Bdvco, alpeco, yiyvoyiai, 
 
 5. How is the second perfect formed ? How does 
 the second perfect system compare with the first in in- 
 flection ? Conjugate the second perfect system of 
 XetTT&j. 
 
 6. Give synopses of the second perfect system of 
 aya>, Tre/xTTw, ireiOcDy (j)€vyct). 
 
 7. Give the synopses of the perfect middle system 
 of Xvo), dvo), KeXevcoy TrejuTro), TreiOo), dyo). 
 
 8. How does the second passive system compare 
 with the first in inflection ? 
 
 9. Conjugate the first and second aorist passive 
 systems of <^atVft> and arpet^co. 
 
 10. Give the synopses of the second aorist passive 
 system of ypa^a>, rpe^w, kottto) and KarakdrTco, 
 
 11. Decline \vdeU, crrpac^et?, and eKirXayeU. 
 
 750. Si/ntax of the Subjunctive and Optative — Con- 
 ditional Sentences, Result Clauses, etc. 
 
 1. What does the subjunctive mood express? 
 
 2. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in 
 independent clauses. Distinguish in the use of the 
 tenses of the dependent moods not in indirect discourse. 
 
 3. What principle governs the use of ov and ixTf ? 
 
 4. Why has the subjunctive no future ? What use 
 has the future optative ? 
 
REVIEW. 313 
 
 5. State how purpose, and object clauses after verbs 
 of fearing are expressed, and give examples in Greek. 
 Give other ways of expressing purpose. 
 
 6. Give the law for the sequence of moods, and give 
 its corresponding law in Latin. 
 
 7. Give the two general uses of av. When is av 
 retained in indirect discourse ? 
 
 8. How does the potential optative differ in mean- 
 ing from the potential indicative ? 
 
 9. What special use has av with the imperfect and 
 aorist indicative ? 
 
 10. Why do the simple particular conditions take 
 the indicative ? 
 
 11. How are conditions contrary to fact expressed? 
 
 12. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in 
 conditional sentences. 
 
 13. Define a general condition. How does the pres- 
 ent general condition differ in form from the past 
 general ? 
 
 14. How does the less vivid condition compare in 
 meaning with the more vivid ? 
 
 15. What may take the place of a protasis of a con- 
 dition ? Give examples in Greek. 
 
 16. Give examples in Greek of the six ordinary con- 
 ditions, and translate into English. Into what classes 
 can they be placed ? 
 
 17. How are relative clauses with indefinite antece- 
 dent classified ? What takes the place of the particle 
 €t in a relative conditional sentence ? 
 
314 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 18. Write a summary classification of both ordinary 
 conditional and conditional relative sentences : simple 
 particular, general, etc. 
 
 19. How are clauses with ew?, ecrre, etc., classified? 
 Give the constructions with irpiv. 
 
 20. Distinguish between the use of the infinitive and 
 indicative with wcrre. 
 
 21. How are causal clauses with eVet, oTe^ etc., ex- 
 pressed ? What other common expressions of cause ? 
 
 751. Inflection of the '^JLL Verb. 
 
 1. Explain the -{xl inflection of verbs ? What forms 
 of the -fiL verbs have this inflection ? What peculiari- 
 ties in endings has the inflection of the -jjll verbs ? 
 What modifications of the theme vowel? 
 
 2. Decline terras, StSovs, and 6ek, and give their 
 formation and accentuation. 
 
 3. What tenses of -o) verbs take the -fii inflection ? 
 
 4. Give the synopses of the present and second 
 aorist systems of lariq^i and StSw/xi, and explain how 
 the two systems differ in form. 
 
 5. How are the subjunctive and optative of -/it verbs 
 regularly formed ? 
 
 6. How does the mood sign of the optative active of 
 -/xt verbs differ from that of the middle ? 
 
 7. What two -fxi verbs have subjunctive and optative 
 like -ft) verbs ? 
 
 8. Conjugate the present and second aorist systems 
 
 of TiOrjfJiL. 
 
 9. Conjugate the present systems of heUvvyn and 
 et/x,t. 
 
REVIEW. 315 
 
 10. Give the synopses of the second aorist system 
 active of ^aivo), yLyvcoa-KO), and conjugate the indi- 
 cative. 
 
 11. Give the synopses of the present system of ct/xt 
 and (l)7]fii. 
 
 12. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within 
 this review. 
 
 752. Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. — Subordinate 
 Clauses, 
 
 1. Give the two uses of the object infinitive, and 
 distinguish between the use of the tenses in each. 
 
 2. What verbs regularly take the infinitive in indirect 
 discourse ? What construction may verbs of hoping, 
 etc., take ? Explain the personal construction. 
 
 3. Explain the use of the negative in indirect dis- 
 course ; of av. 
 
 4. What form do subordinate clauses in indirect dis- 
 course take ? 
 
 5. Translate the following, and explain the use of 
 the infinitive and optative : (1) €(^17 d Ta> awOolro, ov- 
 Sep xjfevSecrO at. (2) vmcr^veLTO Se avrw, ei eXdoL, (fyikov 
 avTov Kvpo) TroLrjoreLP, 
 
 753. Formation of Words {continued). 
 
 Give the formation and meanings of the following : 
 1. TpOTTO^;, crrdXo?, r)y€iJL(op, Tipaft?, TUfJirj, crTpaTLcoTr)<;, 
 xjjevSyjf;, TToXe/ito?, )(^pvcr€o<^. 2. St^Xow, /BacnXevco, 
 dgioaj, l3ov\eva)y KivSvvevco, dSt/cew, c^tXeo), fXLcrOoco, 
 TToXe/Aeft), 7T€Lpd(o, oIk4m. 3. aTTopo^y avra?, aSiACOs. 
 
316 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 4. ay(x)v, dypuos, (^povpap^o^i, /cwju.ap^i^?, vTTap^o<;, 
 eTTi^ovXrj. 5. )(aXe7r(o^, ouKodev, OLKaSe, StKa/ws, ttoXv, 
 Taxvy TravTYj, jJiaXXov, KdWicrra, KpaTidTa. 6. ySeX- 
 TidTO^, KTTJfxa, -^pyjixa, TnaTOTiq^^ rd^i^^ (j)vka^, 
 TTicTTi^, 7. dvayKal^o), ^oKeTraivo}, dyyiWo), KrjpvTTco, 
 8. ^acrtXtAcdg, </)az/€pd?, KaTa(f>av7]S, evvovs, evvoLa, 
 dfJLa^a, dixa^iTo^, ovojxa. 9. KpeiTTcov, iKKXrjcTLay 
 fieyas, TrXijprj^y TrXrjdoSy TrXetcrros, TTokiriq^i virep^oXij. 
 
 754. Grimm s Law (continued). 
 
 Give the Latin and English words cognate with the 
 following : 1. XeLTrct), ttlttto), (f)€p(o, fiovXoiJLaL, Tret^w, 
 yiyvcocTKa), 77X77/0179, KoXeo), Xvo). 2. O^jp, Tpelsj TTaTTJp, 
 Ovpay oIpos, ef, P'ljpy ttov?. 
 
 755. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. rjv Se (f>evyyy i^/xetg eKel 77/509 ravra /BovXevaofxeda, 
 
 2. €19 TOVTOv Se TOP araOfjiov Tto"0"a(^ep^'')79 ineifxivr). 
 
 3. XeyeTO) tl ecrrat tol<; crTpaTLcarai^, idv avrw ravra ^ 
 "^apLcrcopT ai. 4. ^ovXoip.rjv 8' az^ olkovto^^ ^ olttlcjv ^ 
 Kvpov XaOelv avrov oLTreXOcjv} 5. iXeyero Se /cat Sv- 
 evvecTLS eivai iiri tcop aKpcov (ftvXdrTcop rrjv ela^oXi/jj/. 
 6. Xa^(x)v vfjid^ i7Top€v6fJir)Vy Iva ei n Seotro ^ ax^eXoLTjp 
 avTov avtf o)v ev eiratfop vir eKeivov, /. /cat Ki;/)09 
 
 1 See 338. 
 
 ^ uKovTos Kvpov, sc. oj/Tos (239), exprcsscs manner, against Cyruses will 
 (236, 3). 
 
 8 Equivalent to a oTrtotui (236, 6 ; 715). 
 
 * See 245, to get off without his knowledge. 
 
 ^ Might have been the subjunctive, changed according to 579, <? ; 787, 
 2; 788. 
 
 ® di^^* Z>v = avTL €K€Lva>v a (438, 2 ; 439), yb/* Me benefits 1 have received 
 from him, ev iTdaxo>, pass, force (659). 
 
REVIEW. 317 
 
 cISe ra? o'Kr}va<; ov ol KtXtAce? i^vXarrov} 8. /cat ovk 
 icfyacrav levai, iav [jlt] rt9 avroi? ^prjixara StSw. 9. /cat 
 rairra iiroiiqcre ovk inl fJioixV^ lovTCxyv^ aXka koKovvto^ 
 rov TTaTpos Kvpov. 10. /cat Kpavyr^v TToWrjv iiroiovv 
 Kakovvres dkXijXovs, wcrre /cat rovs TToXe/xtov? d/coiJetj/ * 
 cocrre ot /xei' iyyurara tcov iroi^efjiCcop /cat i(l)vyov e/c roij/ 
 aKTjvwv. 11. (j)0^0ifji7)T/ 8' ai^ Tw r)yefx6vL co Solt) ine- 
 aOai, fXT) r)fJia<; dydyrj 69ev ov^ olov re^ icrrai i^eXOeiv, 
 12. et ^ovkecrOe ciTrteVat, rjKeiv yjSr) /ceXevet ttJs J^f/cros' 
 €t Se /xt), avTos a/xa r?J 7)p.4pa aTTteVat (j)r)crLv, 
 
 756. The Palace of the King. Cyrus holds a Review of his 
 Troops. 
 
 Review 84, 92, a; 104, 3 ; 107, 394, 450, 725, 742. 
 
 8. ^Ecrrt 8e /cat fxeydXov ySacrtXeiw? ySacrtXeta ei^ Ke- 
 Xat^at? €7rt rat? Trr)yaL<; rov Mapcrvov Trora/xov utto t^ 
 d/cpoTToXet * yo€t 8e /cat ovto<; Std t"^? TrdXewg /cat e//,- 
 /BdWeu €t9 Toi^ Matai'Spo^' ' rou 8e Mapcrvov ro evpos 
 icTTLv €tfco(rt /cat irevre ttoScov. ivravOa Xeyerat 'AttoX- 
 Xo)!'^ €/c8€tpat Ma/ocruai'j vLKrjaa^;^ ipu^ovrd ol irepl 
 cro(j>La<s, /cat to Sepfia Kpejxdaai iv rw avrpco oOev at 
 TTiqyai ' ^ 8td 8e roGro 6 Trora/xo? Xeyerat Ma/9orua9. 
 9. 'E^'rav^a Bep^rj^;, ore eK ttjs *EXXd8o? rjTT-rjOel*; 
 TTj fJi'd^rj aTre^wpet, Xeyerat oiKoSofXTJcraL raurd re ret 
 /Sao'tXeta /cat r^^i^ KeXati^wi^ dKpoirokiv. ivravOa ifieive 
 Kvpo<s rjfjL€pa<; rpidKovra ' /cat 77/ce KXeap^o^ 6 Aa/ce- 
 8atjLtd^'to9 (j>vyd<;y e^ojv oTrXtra? ^tXtou? /cat TreXracrrds 
 0/3a/ca9 OKTaKocriovf; ./cat To^oTa^ Kp'^rag 8ta/coo-tov9. 
 d/xa 8e /cat Xwcrt? iraprjv 6 ^Sv/oa/cdcrto? ej^cwi' oTrXtras 
 
 ^ See p. 257^. ^ Sc. outwi/, gen. abs. ^ otoy Tf, «5/^, jiossible. 
 
318 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK. 
 
 TpLaKocrLOV<;, kol ^o^aCveros 6 'Aya/ca? e^^wz^ OTrXtra? 
 Xi^iovs. Koi ivravOa Kvpo<; l^iracnv koI apudfjiop^ 
 T(x)v 'FXXyjvcop iiroLTjo'ev iv rw TTapaSeucra)^ kol iyevovTO 
 01 (Tvp.TravTe^^ OTrXirat^ p^ev pvpioi koX ^tXtot, TreXra- 
 crraX ^ Se a/>t<^t ^ rov^ hicr\ikiov<^, 
 
 iK-^ipo), Jla^ [tear]. • pass, of viKao), be con- 
 
 Seppa, -arog, to, hide (epi- quered. 
 
 dermis). avTpov, cave. Lat. an- 
 
 Kpepdvvvpi, hang up^ sus- truin. 
 
 pend. oLKoSopeo), build [Se/xcj, 
 
 T^rrcto/xat, rjTTija'opaL, tjt- build\ Lat. aedijicb. 
 
 Tiqpai, rjTTTJOrjv, used as 
 
 a. Give examples of the review syntax. 
 ^ Supply tiie object of viK^tras. 
 2 Supply the predicate of Trrjyai. 
 ^ Eng. derivative ? 
 
 * oi (TVfiTravTes, subject, the whole body. 
 ^ Pred. nom. with iyevero. 
 
 * d/x0i with a numeral is a preposition like us (711, N. 2). The total 
 is Ijere given in round numbers. 
 
 LESSON LXVL 
 
 PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT 
 THEMES. — PERIPHRASTIC FORMS. 
 
 Review 189, 1, 2, 3, obs. ; 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 
 1, 2, 3, 4; Lesson XXIX., noting 325; 521, 545, 574, 
 650, 697. 
 
 757. Conjugate the perfect middle system of the 
 following (836, 837, 838, 839, 840, 841): kcXcvo), 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 319 
 
 KeKekeva-jxaL ; XeiVw, XekeififiaL ; TaTTco, TerayfJiaL ; 
 TTeWo}, TreVetcr/xat ; dyyeXko), ^yyeX/xai ; (j)aLvojy ttc- 
 (JyacrfxaL ; Kpivo), KeKpifiai, KeKpuaai, etc. 
 
 Observe that : 1. The rules for euphony of consonants (194, 
 etc.) apply to the concurrence of the consonants of the stem and 
 endings; cr is dropped between two consonants (325, end). 
 2. The third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect indica- 
 tive are formed respectively by the perfect participle and elac 
 and '^(rav ^ (325). 3. When a liquid verb drops v iu its per- 
 fect middle system, it is inflected like a vowel verb ; but when 
 V of the stem is not dropped it becomes cr before /jl, and is 
 retained before all other endings, wecfyao-fiai, etc. 
 
 758. The perfect subjunctive and optative active are 
 more frequently formed by the perfect active participle 
 with CO and etrjp than by the forms in co and ot/xt of 
 the paradigms (553, 554); as, XeXvAcwg c3, XeXvKcos 
 
 a. In a similar way the perfect and pluperfect indicative 
 active are sometimes expressed by tlie perfect active participle 
 and eliil; as, eKireinaiKOTe^; rjcrav (325, end). The future per- 
 fect active of most verbs is expressed by the perfect participle 
 and eao/jLai. 
 
 759. Periphrastic Fniiire. 
 
 A periphrastic future is formed by the verb fieWco, 
 intend, he on the point of, and the present or future (or, 
 rarely, the aorist) infinitive to express the future act as 
 immediately intended or expected: fieWoj rjKeiv, I in' 
 tend to coine. 
 
 1 The third plural is sometimes found in -arat and -aro. 
 
320 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 760. The agent with the perfect and pluperfect passive 
 is sometimes expressed by the dative : ttolvS' rjfuv irape- 
 (TKevao-raL, all things have been prepared hy us (p. ISO^). 
 
 761. Conjugate 1. The first perfect system of \toi, 
 KeXevojy dyyeXXco; Kpivoi, KeKpuKa; fidWco, ^e/SXv/Ka. 
 2. The second perfect system of irefiTro), XeiiTcx), dyo), 
 Tpenco, arpi^o}. 3. The perfect middle system of Xto), 
 dpTTat^oi, rpiira), rp^co, dOpoi^co^ Trefiiro), TreVe/x/xat ^ 
 (7re7r€/x/x-/;tat) ; irpdrTQ), dyo). 
 
 762. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. fxeXXovcTL TovTo TToidv. 2. ^ Kpioio^ d^eaTTJ- 
 fet. 3. ol crTparr)yol crvveiXiq^xixevoL rjcrcLv. 4. <^iXo9 
 'r)ixiv ouSet? XeXeixjjeTaL. 5. dyopdv ovSeU en Trape^eiv ^ 
 €fxeXXep. 6. ol Se irpos tovto Kvpcp TerayfiivoL elaiv, 
 7. ore S' efo) rov heivov yivoivTo, ttoXXoI avTov dne- 
 XeiTTOv. 8. ol arparicoTai Tavra rjyyiXKaai irpos 
 Kvpov. 9. ipcDTa el tJSt] dTroKeKpivrai ol "EXXrjve<s. 
 10. Tcov dXXcov ■)(^p'r)ixdTO)v rd irXelcrTa hi-qpTrao-pLeva 
 rjcrav. 11. ol he Trec^acr/xeVoi elcrXv tojv Xo)(^ay(t)v Kal 
 rcov (TTpaTy)ya)v dpicTToi. 12. tojv ottXcdv toU crrpa- 
 Ti(DTai<; TToXXd ein dfia^cov tjkto kol vnolvyicov, 
 13. iveTvy)(avov Td(j)poL<; vSaro? irXripea-iv oJ?^ pLT) 
 SvvaaOaL StaySaiVetz/ dvev yecfyvpcjp ' dXX' eiToiovvTO Ik 
 T(x)v SevSpcov d Tfcrav iKTreirTajKora. 
 
 ^ When fifi or yy would be brought before fi, the first consonant is 
 dropped (p. 219i). 
 
 ^ With this exception the future infinitive is regularly used only in in- 
 direct discourse to represent the future indicative (723). 
 
 ^ a)s is sometimes used for wore to express result, rarely purpose. 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 321 
 
 II. 1. Very many were likely ^ to see him. 2. The 
 liorsemeii had been drawn up on the right. 3. He 
 marches on with all of his army drawn up in battle 
 array. 4. The soldiers have been drawn up by my 
 brother. 5. The messengers have been sent back and 
 Chirisophus with them. 6. The station was near 
 where they intended to halt. 
 
 763. VOCABULARY. 
 
 vScjp, -aT09, TO, icater [Lat. e^^w, adv., outside ; w. gen., 
 
 unda^ hydr-ant, hydro- ivifJio?.tt, heyond [exotic, 
 
 gen, WATER, wet]. * exoteric]. 
 
 avevy prep., without, w. gen. 
 
 764. R. dp-, ar-, fit^ join. dp-€-<rK-<o, fit^ suit ^please ; 
 ap-i-o-Tos, -07, -ov^ ^\\\x, fittest, best ; dpO-jid-s, 6 {dp + ^)? 
 bond, friendship ; dpi6-[x6-s {dp -{- l+ 0), series, number, 
 numbering ; dp-|JLa, -ar-os, to, chariot, team ; dp^-d/iafa, 
 -779 (cf. d/xa and R. dy- [513]), covered carriage ; dp-c-ii], 
 -179, fitness, goodness, valor. 
 
 ar-s, ar-ti-s, f., skill, art; in-er-s, adj. (ars), itnskil- 
 fid, inactive ; ar-tu-s, adj., close, naiTOiv ; ar-ma, -orum, 
 n., armor, arms ; ar-mo, to arm. 
 
 Arm, RIME (rhyme) ; arithmetic, harmony, aristo- 
 cracy, log-arithm. 
 
 765* Cyrus continues his March to Ca3rster Plain. There Epyaxa, 
 the Cihcian Queen, supplies him with the Money required 
 for the Payment of his Troops. 
 
 Review 244, 246, 247, 201, 369, 5; 756. 
 10. 'Ez/T€i}^€j' i^eXavveu crTaOfJiov<; Svo irapacrdyya^ 
 8e/ca €is IJeXra?, iroKiv olKovfieprjj/, ipTavd* ifxeipep 
 
 21 
 
322 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 7}fX€pa<; rpei? • eV at? BevCas 6 'Apfca? tol Avfcaia^ eOvae 
 /cat aywva iOrjKe'^ iOecopet Se top dyatva kol Kvpo<;. 
 ivT€v9ev e^ekavvei cTTadfxov^ Bvo Trapacrdyya^; SoiSe/ca 
 et9 KepafJL(op dyopdv, irokiv olKovfjievrjv, ia)(dT7)v irpos 
 Tjj MvcrCa X^P^' 
 
 1 1 . 'lEivrevdev e^ekavvei crraOfJiOv^ rpeL<; Trapacrdyyas 
 rpidKovra ets Kavarpov TreBiov, irokiv oLKovfievrjp, 
 ivTavO' efjueupev rjixepas irivTe * koX toI<; crrpartwrai? 
 (o(f>eL\eTO fJLLaOo^ irkeov^ rj Tpicov p.7)v(x)v^^ koI ttoX- 
 Xct/cts toWe? cttI ra? dvpas dTrrJTOvv. 6 Se eXTrtSa? 
 Xeycov ^ Surjye koI 8^Xo§ '^p dvLMfxevos ' ov yap rjv irpo^ 
 Tov Kvpov TpOTTOv e^ovTa ^ fJLT) dTToSiSovai. 
 
 12. 'Ej/rau^a d(j)LKP€lTaL 'ETTuafa rj Svevpecnos yvvrj 
 TOV KlXlkojv /SacriXeiw? napd Kvpov ' kol ekiyero Kvpco 
 Sovvai ^/37;/xara TroXXa. rfj 8' ovp^ crrpaTia Tore 
 dirihoiKe Kvpo? fJucrOov rerTdpcov ixtjvgjp^ el^e Se rf 
 KiXccrcra /cat (l>v\aKr)P irepl avTr)p KtXt/ca? /cat 
 'AcTTrej/Stov?. 
 
 Oecopeo), View, witness. dirairia}, ask frorri^ demand, 
 
 ea-xaro^,, -t), -op, farthest ; Stayo), iead on, continue, 
 
 i(TxdTr)p Trpd?, the last dpldco, grieve, trouble, 
 
 on the road to. 
 
 ^ Syntax of ra AvKaia ? 
 
 2 Prin. parts ? 
 
 ' TrXeov, indeclinable adj. == TrXeSvav. 
 
 * Syntax? 
 
 ^ See 244, continued to express hopes (of paying tliem). 
 
 * exom-a, agrees with omitted subject of d7ro8i86vai (728, N. 8 ; 780, 2), 
 token he had money. 
 
 "^ ovVf however that might bsi at any rate, etc. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL AND O)?. 323 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 IRREG-ULAR VERB olSa. — SIMPLE SEN- 
 TENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER 
 OTL AND w9. 
 
 Eeview 436, 437, 438, 1, 2, 3; 439, 443, 561, 565, 
 620, 6Q6, 668, 721, 1, 2, 3 ; 723, 1, 2, 3. 
 
 766. olSa [18-, elS-, cf. elSov (698, 4)], hiow, an ir- 
 regular verb in fjn, is a second perfect formed without 
 reduplication, with present meaning ; the pluperfect has 
 the force of the imperfect. Learn the inflection of olSa 
 (857). Observe that olSa has mainly the -/xt inflection, 
 and that the subjunctive and optative are formed upon 
 the stem elhe- ; that in the forms beginning with 18-, S 
 of the theme becomes <t. 
 
 767. Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse after otl 
 and &)?. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. Trepi (nrov8o)v rJKOfjiep, ive have come concerning a 
 treat?/. 
 
 2. [o) 01 Se \iyov(TL on Trepi (TttovScov rJKOvaLv, thci/ 
 say that they have come concerning a treaty. 
 
 (J)) 01 S' eXeyov on Trepl (movScDv '^Kouev, they 
 said that they had come concerning a treaty. 
 
 3. y] 6809 eb-rai Trpog ^acrikia fxeyav, the expedition 
 ivill be against the greai Jdng. 
 
324 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 4. Kvpo^ ekeyev on 7) 6809 €(Tolto 7rpo<; ^aonXea 
 fieyav, Cyrus said that the expedition would he against 
 the great king (567, end). 
 
 5. eTTopevofjieOa av iirl /Baa-uXea, we would be advan- 
 cing against the king, 
 
 6. etTrej^ ort iiropevovTo av eTri fiacnXea, he said that 
 they would he advancing against the king. 
 
 7. ov TovT av Tt? Trpd^eue, no one could do this. 
 
 8. €LTrev wg ou tovt av rts TTpd^eie, he said that no 
 one could do this. 
 
 9. TL ^ovXeaOe ; what do you want? 
 
 10. {a) KXeapxo^; epoira rt (or on) fiovXecrOe, Ok- 
 archies asks what you want. 
 
 {!)) KXeap-^os rjpayTiqcre tl (or on) f^ovXoivTOy 
 Clearchus asked what they ivanted. 
 
 11. TL TToiTjcro) ; ivhat shall I do ? 
 
 12. rjiropei tl TroLirjcreLe, he ivas at a loss tvhat to do, 
 
 a. Observe that 1, 3, 5, etc., give simple sentences in- the 
 form of statements ; that 2, 4, 6, etc., givp these sentences with 
 OTL and 0)9 quoted indirectly. 
 
 b. Observe that after primary tenses the leading verb retains 
 its own mood and tense, 2 {a) ; that after secondary tenses it is 
 regularly changed to the same tense of the optative (578); that 
 it may be retained in the original mood and tense for emphasis 
 (579, a). 
 
 c. Observe that the change of the person is the same as in 
 722, obs. e. 
 
 d. Observe that if the optative refers to the future, it is 
 translated by woidd, etc., otherwise by the past tense of the 
 indicative. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL AND CO?. 325 
 
 e. Observe that the, secondary tenses of the indicative with av^ 
 5, 6, and all optatives, 1 , 8, are kept unchanged in mood ; and 
 that if the original had av it is retained. 
 
 f. Observe that the principles of changing simple sentences 
 apply to questions and to the interrogative subjunctive, 10, ^ ; 
 12 ; that the interrogative pronoun may be changed in indirect 
 questions to the general relative ^ (443). 
 
 768. Indi7'ect Quotations after on and w?. Indirect 
 Questions. Interrogative Subjunctive. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 1. After primary tenses, each verb of the simple sen- 
 tence retains both the mood and the tense of the direct 
 discourse. After secondary tenses, each indicative or 
 subjunctive of the direct may be either changed to the 
 same tenses of the optative, or be retained in the origi- 
 nal mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the 
 indicative in unreal conditions (668) and all optatives 
 remain unchanged. 
 
 2. Indirect questions and interrogative subjunctives 
 quoted indirectly, follow the rule for simple sentences. 
 
 3. The negative of the direct discourse is regularly 
 retained in the indirect form, but indirect questions in- 
 troduced by el, trhether, may take yLrf. 
 
 a. After a past tense the idea of the dependent verb is made 
 more remote, and the optative is used to represent this remoteness 
 and greater uncertainty. The optative also disclaims the respon- 
 sibility of the truth of the statement, thought, or feeling of some 
 other person presented (567). 
 
 ^ This applies to all relative words and interrogative adverbs. 
 
326 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 h. The imperfect and pluperfect generally remain unchanged, 
 but sometimes they become tlie present and perfect optative. 
 
 c. on emphasizes the assertion rather than tlie fact. 
 
 d. If the original had av, it is retained. 
 
 769. Of the three common verbs of saying, — 
 
 a. (fyrjixL regularly takes the infinitive. 
 
 b. eliTop takes otl or wg with the indicative 01 
 optative. 
 
 c. Xeyo) allows either construction, but in the active 
 it regularly takes on or cog. 
 
 d. Both €17701^ and Xeyco in the sense of command, 
 propose, etc., take the object infinitive like Kekevo). 
 
 770. Sometimes the Greek, like the English, changes 
 the tense instead of the mood, as the present indicative 
 to the imperfect, and the perfect to the pluperfect: 
 TjcrOeTO oTi TO (TTpdrevfJLa iv KtXt/cta yv (for ecrri or eurj, 
 728, N. 10). 
 
 771. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. OVK oTSa 0770)9 Tt9 OLP oLTTo^evyoi. 2. TjpcoTTjae 
 ei^ TL irapayyiWoi. 3. /cat iXeyeTO S€7)d7]vaL^ rj 
 KiXicraa Kvpov eViSeifai to crTpaTevfJia avTrj. 4. ovk 
 ideXco i\0eiv SeStw?^ fxr) XajScop fJie Slktjv eTnOrj. 
 6. a^LovcTLV elSepai tl (Tt^iciv Icrrat, iav KpaTTJacocnv. 
 6. TrJ 8' vaTepaia rJKev ayyeXo? Xeycov oti XeXoiirco'; 
 €L7] %vevv6cn<; tol aKpa. 7. ovrot iXeyov otl Kvpos 
 fxev TeOv7)K€v,^ ^ApLOLOS 8e 7re(j>evya)<; elrj. 8. iXeye otl 
 
 1 61, whether. 2 708, n. 4. » See S^i'So. 
 
 * Force of the present. Why retained in the indicative ? One mood 
 may be changed while another remains unchanged. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTt AND W?. 8.27 
 
 ravTTjv TTjv Tjixepav TTepiybeiveiev av avrov^, el fieWouep 
 rJK€LP. 9. oTTw? 8e KOL elBrjre et? olov ep^eaOe dywi/a, 
 VjLLct? etS(U9 ScSafw. 10. ^QpamqcTe Kvpop tl^ /BovXowo 
 Tjfuv ^prjorO at. 11. €z^ tovtoj ^ KXe'ap^o? rJKe, kol rfpco- 
 T'Y]aev el yjSrj dnoKeKpifjievoL elev, 12. rw dpSpl ov av 
 eXrjcrOe ireicrofjiaL, Iva elSrJTe otl kol dp^eaSaL ev ctti- 
 crra/xai.^ 13. et? 8e St^ eiTre,* €i /at) SlSoly) ravrat i^ye- 
 jLtdt'a airerz^ Kvpov octtls 8ta c^tXtas ttJ? ^((upas dird^eL.^ 
 
 XL 1. He asked what the watchword was. 2. You 
 did not know what jou were doing. 3. But he did 
 not make known what he would do. 4. He knew that 
 he had the middle of the Persian army. 5. Silanus 
 said to Cyrus that the king would not fight within ten 
 days. 6. Some reported that they intended to attack 
 them. 
 
 772. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (Tvv'OrjfjLa, -aro?, to, tuatch- strong, rule over, conquer 
 
 imrd [rt^T^fLt] . (696) .[^^emo-crat] . 
 
 epofxai, Attic only in fut. olSa, 2 pf. with pres. force, 
 
 ipTJa-ofiai, and 2 aor. knotv, understand. 
 
 iQpofjLYjv, ask, inquire (cf. TrepL-fievco, wait atvund, re* 
 
 epcDrdo)).^ main, wait for (603). 
 
 Kpareo), KpaTTJacoy etc., be 
 
 Xeyo), 1. to say, in a wide sense, Lat. died. 2. to speak, 
 in general. 3. to speak with art, as the orator. 
 
 1 Cog. ace. (261, a ; p. 1458). 4 gee 769, d. 
 
 2 Sc. xp6v<o ; cf. €v als (765, § 10). » Explain the mood. 
 * Know AoWf etc. 
 
328 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 ^rifjLt, used in conversation and replies, said /, said he, 
 
 etc. It has besides the notion of affirmation, to assert, 
 
 affirm, 
 eiTTop, used with Xeyw and (prjixC to complete them. But 
 
 it frequently retains its own meaning, advise, command, 
 
 propose (769, d). 
 
 773. R. (TTpa-, ster-, stra-, stla-, strew, spread, o-xpa- 
 Tos, o? (in encamped army, host; aTparo-TTeho-v, to 
 [irihov, ground), camping ground^ camp ; crTpaT07re-Sev-co, 
 encamp ; o-r/)aT-7;yd-?, 6 (cf. R. ay (513)), leader of an 
 armg, general; arpaT-rjyea), lead, command, he general ; 
 CTpanqyia, -d?, office of general, generalship ; o-rpar-ia, 
 -a?, armg ; aTpaTioi-T7}<;, -ov, soldier ; o-rpaTev-co, serve 
 in the army, make an expedition; crTpaTev-fjia, -ar-09, 
 TO, an armament, army. 
 
 ster-n-6, spread oid ; stra-tn-s, adj., stretched out; 
 stel-la, -ae, f., star; la-tu-s, (stla-tus), adj., hi^oad, 
 wide; lo-c-u-s, -i, ra. (stlo-cus), place; stru-d, place to- 
 gether, arrange, build ; in-stru-mentu-m, an implement, 
 instrument. 
 
 Star, straw, strew ; strat-agem, strat-egic, strat- 
 egist, strat-egy. 
 
 774* Continuing his March Cyrus arrives at Tyriaeum, where, 
 at the Eequest of Epyaxa, he holds a Review of his 
 Troops. 
 
 Review Q^, 106, Lesson XV., 235, 249, 369, 3 ; 765. 
 
 13. ^^vT€vOev S' i^eXavvei crra^/xov? Suo Trapacrdyya^ 
 Se/ca et?'* Svfji^pLov, ttoXlp olKovfieviqv. ivravOa tjv 
 irapa^ rrjv 68ov Kpijvr) rj MiSov KaXovfiepr)^ tov ^pv 
 
READING LESSON. 329 
 
 y(t)v fiacn\eoi<;^ e(\> fj Xeyerat MtSas tov Xdrvpov 
 OrjpevcraL olvo) Kepdaa^^ avnji/. 
 
 . 14. 'FiVrevOev i^eXavveu aTa9fjLOV<; Svo Trapacrdyyas 
 SeKa et? Tvptaiov, tt6\iv oLKovfjievyjv. ivTavOa ifieLvev 
 rjfJLepa^ rpei?. kol Xeyerau heiqSrjvai r) KtXtcrcra Kv- 
 pov^ CTrtSetfai to (rrpaTevfJia avrrj. fioyXofxevo^; ovv 
 iinSeL^aL i^iracriv TTotetrai iv tco TreSico twp 'EWijvcop 
 KOL T(x)v fiapfidpoiv. 15. iKeXevcre Se tov<; "EXXryj^a?, 
 w? p6fjio<; ^ avTOL<; ei? p^d^-qv^ ovto) Ta)(6rjvai koL cTTrjvai, 
 avvrd^ai^ Se eKaarov tovs iavrov. ird^Orjcrav ovv 
 iirl rerrdpcov ' ^ el^e 8e to pev Se^Lov Mevcov kol ol 
 (Tvv avTcp. TO 8e evoivvpov KXe'ap^o? koI ol eKeivoVy 
 TO Se pecrov ol aXXoi crTpaTrjyoL. 
 
 16. ^^Oecopeu ovv 6 Kvpo? rrpcoTov pep tovs jBap^d- 
 pov<; ' ol Se TTaprjXavvov TeTaypevoi KaT tXas kol fcara 
 Td^€LS' etra 8e TOv<;''EX\.7)vas, irapeXavvoiv e<^' dppaTo^ 
 Koi 7) KiXLoro-a i(f> appapd^rj^;. 
 
 ^dTvpo<;, the well known lXr],-r}<;,iroop, hand ; KaT 
 
 satyr, Sileniis, iXa? kol /caret rd^ei^, hij 
 
 KepdvvvpL, mix. troops and hj companies. 
 
 v6po<;, custom, usage. elra, then, thereupon. 
 
 a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this Lesson (141, 142). 
 
 ^ Tvapa rrjv ohov.floicing along the road side. 
 
 2 Eorce of this participle ? ^ Syntax ? 
 
 * See 708, n. 4. ^ Explain the use of the mood. 
 
 * eTTi Teirdpcop {avbpcou), on] jjbu?' deep. 
 
330 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 LESSON LXVIIT. 
 
 PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.^ 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Review 82, 83, 119, 235, 237, 238, 239, 244, 245, 
 247, 373, 648, §7; 711, n. 5, 759. 
 
 775. Participles in Indirect Discourse, 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. Kvpo? eV KikiKia rjv, Cyrus was in Cilicia. 
 
 2. rjKovcre Kvpoi^ iv KiXiKua ovra, he heard that 
 Cyrus ivas in Cilicia. 
 
 3. Ku/309 redprjKevy Cy^nis is dead. 
 
 4. ovK -^Seaav Kvpov TeOvrjKora, they did not know 
 that Cyrus tvas dead. 
 
 5. 0opv/3ov TJKovcre Sua tcov rd^ecov lovto^, he heard 
 a noise going through the i^anks. 
 
 6. avTco Kvpov arparevovTa irpwTO^ TJyyeiXa, I first 
 announced to him that Cyrus tvas maldng an expedilion. 
 
 7. laOi ay ado f; <^v, know that you are h?^ave. 
 
 8. (njvoiSa ifxavTM ixfjevcrpLevo^; (or i^evcrfjievco) avrov, 
 I am conscious of having deceived him. 
 
 9. (j)avepos S' '^v Tretpcofjievof; -^prjadat toI*; ^pT^/xao't 
 (for TreipcjfjiaL ^prj(TOai)y hid it was obvious that he sti^ove 
 to bring into use their wealth. 
 
 a. Observe that in 2, 4, Q, 7, etc., the verbs take the parti- 
 ciple in indirect discourse. 
 
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 331 
 
 h. Observe that the participle in indirect discourse represents 
 the corresponding tense of the direct ; that it is put in the accu- 
 sative agreeing with the object of a verb (sometimes called the 
 subject of the participle) to express a fact. 
 
 G. Observe that this participle must be distinguished from the 
 participle after verbs of perceiving, finding, etc. (244)^ as in 5, 
 which represents the actual perception of the action by the 
 senses ; that here verbs of- hearing take the participle in the 
 genitive. 
 
 d. Observe that when the object of the verb is the same as 
 the subject, the participle is attracted to the case of the sub- 
 ject, 7. 
 
 e. Observe that in 8, with avvoiha and the dative of the re- 
 flexive pronoun, the participle may be either in the nominative 
 or dative. 
 
 f. Observe that in 9, with 897X09 diii^ <l>av€p6<; elfjLi, the 
 participle is used personally (247) in indirect discourse, similar 
 to the personal construction with Xeyerat (725). 
 
 Rule. 
 
 776. With many verbs of perceiving, hearing, Jcnow- 
 ing, and ayyiWo), announce, the participle stands in 
 indirect discourse, and conforms to the rules of the in- 
 finitive (723, 1, 2) in regard to the tenses, the uses of av, 
 and the negatives. 
 
 777. With verbs and phrases of appearing and show- 
 ing, such as (j)aLV(o, c^atVo/xat, 817X09 elfxi, and ^avep6<; 
 elfjii, etc., the participle may be used personally in indi- 
 rect discourse. 
 
 778. Most of these verbs may also take a clause with 
 oTt or COS in indirect discourse, or the infinitive ; but 
 
332 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 with the latter there is usually a distinction of meaning : 
 the participle regularly denotes a fact (775, b). 
 
 a. ol8a and eiriara^aL with the participle mean know that, 
 with the infinitive, hiow how ; as, dpxeo-Oac eTrCaTafiai, I know 
 how to be ruled (771, 12). 
 
 779 . Predicate referring to the omitted Subject of an 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. Set v/xa? elt'ai aya^ov?, 7/oii must be brave, 
 
 2. irreOvfieL yeveadai avrjp, he desired to become a 
 man. 
 
 3. irapayyeWei rco KXedp^oy Xa^ovn yJKeuv oaov rjv 
 avT^ (TTpdTeviia, he ordered Clear chus to come uith ivhat- 
 ever army he had. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 780. 1. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted 
 because it is the same as the subject of the leading verb 
 (121), predicate nouns and adjectives are assimilated to 
 the preceding nominative. 
 
 2. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted be- 
 cause it is the same as the object of the leading verb, 
 predicate nouns and adjectives are generally assimilated 
 to the case of this object (121), but sometimes stand in 
 the accusative agreeing with the omitted subject (728, 
 § 1, N. 8; 765, N. 6). 
 
 * 
 a. These principles apply also to a predicate with wv, or with 
 a participle of a copulative verb (775, 7, 8). 
 
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 333 
 
 781. The personal and impersonal Construction of 
 Verbals in t€o<;. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 1. TTora/xo? 8' aXXo9 rjfXLv iaTL Sia^areo?? hit some 
 other river must be crossed {is to be c?'ossed) by us. 
 
 2. r^ikiv §€ Trdvra TrotT^rea, but everything must be done 
 by us. 
 
 3. avrot? ireiaTeov iaTL tco KXeap^w, they must obey 
 Clearchus (equivalent to avTovs Set ireideaOaL tco KXe- 
 oipxcp). Cf. eis parendum est Clearcho. 
 
 a. Observe that : 1. The verbal adjective in reo^, \, 2^ is 
 used personally in agreement with the subject of the sentence, 
 like any predicate adjective. 2. The copula elfjii is often omitted 
 as in 2. 3. This verbal has the force of the Latin participle in 
 das, and takes the agent in the dative. 
 
 b. Observe that : 1. The verbal in 3, is used impersonally, 
 being in the neuter nominative singular (sometimes plural), with 
 ecrri' expressed or understood. 2. xllthough still passive, as is 
 the Lat. -dum est, it is practically active in sense and governs the 
 same case as the verb in the active or middle would take. 3. The 
 expression is equivalent to hel, one must, with the infinitive, and 
 takes the agent in the dative (sometimes in the accusative). 
 
 c. Observe that the subject of the personal construction be- 
 comes the object of the impersonal, hence the latter emphasizes the 
 action rather than the person or thing ; that verbals of transitive 
 verbs admit either construction, but those of intransitive verbs 
 the impersonal construction only.^ 
 
 Rule. 
 782. 1 . The verbal in Tio<i in the personal construc- 
 tion is passive in sense, and expresses necessity, like the 
 
 ^ In Latin this is confined to intransitive verbs. 
 
334 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Latin participle in dus. The agent is expressed by the 
 dative. 
 
 2. The verbal in the impersonal construction is in 
 the neuter of the nominative singular, with eVrt ex- 
 pressed or understood. The expression is equivalent to 
 Set with the infinitive. 
 
 It is active in sense, and takes the same case as the 
 verb would take. 
 
 The agent is regularly expressed by the dative. 
 
 a. The negative of the verbal adjective in both personal and 
 impersonal construction is ov. 
 
 783. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ravra ifiol ov TTOirjriov icTiv. 2. /^eXXet 
 <j)v\aKa<; (j)v\d^€LV. 3. oprj vfiiv opare ovra Tropevrea, 
 4. TovTo S' iiroUi iK tov ^(aXeTros el^at. 5. u/ict? 
 ho^ere ayaOoi elvai ap^avre^ tov Sia/SaiveLv. 0. 8rj- 
 Xos yv oioixevof; ravTrj rfj rjfjiepa ixa^eicrdai ySacrtXeia. 
 7. Koi iTTefjLxjje riva ipovvra on crvyyevicrdaL avrco 
 XPTlt^^- ^- '^^^ avTol i^ovkevovTO el tol crK€vo<l>6pa 
 ivTavOa ayoivro rj aiTioiev iirl to (TTpaTOTreSov. 9. TpL- 
 7]peL<; ^ rjKOve TreptTrXeovo'a? an 'Iwi^ia? et? KiXiKuav. 
 10. 6 8' OLTreKpivaTo otl olkovol ^A/SpoKOfiav i^Opov 
 dvSpa inl Tw EiV(j)poiTrj Troraji^ etpau, 11. /cat icos 
 fjxvofxev avTov cTKeTTTeov iaTU otto)? dcrc^aXeo-rara fxivci}- 
 fxev. 12. TTopevTeov'^ 8' rnuv tov<; irpayrovs crTaOfJLOv<;^ 
 
 ^ Inflected like TrXrjprjs (335), but has recessive accent in the gen. of the 
 dual and plural (821). 
 
 2 Sc. eVr/. 
 
 3 Cog. ace. (261). 
 
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 335 
 
 CU5 av SwatfieOa ^aKpoTOLTovf; ^ Iva w? TrXelcrrov ^ airo- 
 a'JTacrdcjjjLev tov /BaatXiKov (Trparevjaaro?. 
 
 II. 1. We must consider how we shall have provi- 
 sions. 2. I know that right hands have been given by 
 us. 3. Clearchus formerly was manifestly plotting 
 against us. 4. Eor I am conscious to myself of having 
 deceived him in all things. 5. But when Ariaeus per- 
 ceived that Cyrus had fallen, he fled with all the army 
 which he commanded. 
 
 784. VOCABULARY. 
 
 TpLT]pr]<;,Sid'y, Jitied ; rj rpt- ovv-oiSay share in knowl- 
 yjprjs {vav<;), trireme, edge, he conscious. 
 tvar vessel (821). xRV^^* (XPV^')^ tvant, de- 
 
 irepi-7T\io), sail around. sire, need. 
 
 hel, it is a duty, it is necessary. Sei regularly takes the 
 infinitive subject accusative to exipress.duty, oMi^ation. 
 With the dative instead of the accusative it more fre- 
 quently has the notion of need, Lat. debeo, ^prj has 
 more reference to tise, utility ; it is useful., it is of 
 advantage, Lat. oportet 
 
 785. R. TL', pay. tC-ci), pay honor, value ; ti-jjlii, -%, 
 honor, worth, value; d-Tlfjio-<;, -o-v, tvithout honor, dis- 
 honored; drtjLtct^w, dishonor; ^i\6-Tlixo-^,-o-v{ci. <^i\of;, 
 797), loving honor, ambitious ; Ti/x-to-9, -a, -o-v, vahed, 
 honored ; Tlfid-cj, value, honor ; rlpL-oipo-^, -o-v (fopo-q,^ 
 
 ^ a)s . . . fiaKpordrovs, as long as possible. 
 
 ^ m TvkeioTov^ as far as possible ; cf. 384, n. 2 ; 640, 4. Here there is 
 an ellipsis of some form of hvvayiai. Cf. as in the preceding n. (1). 
 ^ Cf. npa.(0. 
 
336 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 watche?'), upholding honor, avenging ; rifiajp-Cd, -a?, help, 
 vengeance ; TlfjLcjpe-o), succor, avenge. 
 timo-cracy, timo-cratic, Timo-thy. 
 
 786. Mock Charge of the Greeks. Cyrus sends the Queen home 
 escorted by Menon, and continues his March to Dana. 
 
 Review 141, 142, 239, 261, &; 285, 357, 621, 721, 
 2; 723,1; 774- 
 
 17. 'E7r€t8i7 8e Traz/ra? TrapyjXacrey crrT^cra? ro dpfia 
 irpo " TTJ^ (jxiXayyo^, 7re/xi//a9 liiyprjra rov ipfirjvea irapa 
 Tovs (TT paT7]yov<; tcov 'J^XXijvojv iKeXevae Trpo^aXeaOaL 
 ra orrXa /cat iiTi'^ojprjo'ai oXy)v ttjv i^dXayya. ol Se 
 ravra TTpoelTrov toI<^ crrpaTtwrat? ' koI iirel io-aXTTiy^e, 
 irpo^aXXoiievoi rd oirXa iirrjecyav. cac Se tovtov Oolttov 
 TTpdiovTOiv ^ avv Kpavyfj dno rov avrofxaTov Spofxos 
 iyivero Tol<i aTparicoTais^ cttI ra? (rKr)vd<;, 
 
 18. Twv he ^apfidpcDv^ (fio^o^^ ttoXv?, koL tj t€ 
 KiXio-cra ec^vyez/ iirl Trj<s dpfxafjid^r]^ koL ol e/c rrj^ 
 dyopd<;^ KaTaXnrovTe^; rd oivia e^vyov' ol Se "EXXrjves 
 (Tvv yiXoiri evri ras CKrjvds rjXOov. r) Se KiA.tcro'a 
 iSovcra rr)v Xaixnporrjra kol ry]v rd^iv rov (rrparevfxa- 
 T09 ^ iOavfiaae. Kvpo<; Se rjcrOrj rov Ik r(x)v ^^XXtjvmv ^ 
 ct5 rov? l3apfidpov<; (j>6/3ov IScov. 
 
 1 9. 'Eprev9ev i^eXavveu crra^/xov? r/oet? Trapaadyya^s 
 eiKOcnv et9 'Ikovlov t"^? ^pvyia<; ttoXlv icr^dr-qv. eV- 
 ravda efxeive rpeZ^ T^/xepa?. evrevOev i^eXavveu Sta ttJ? 
 AvKaovLa<? crraOfJLOVs irivre 7rapaa'dyya<; rpidKovra. 
 ravTTjv rrjv ^dipav eTrerpexpe hiapTrdcrai '^ rots '^EXXtjo'lv 
 0)5 TToXefjLLav ovcrav.^ 
 
 20. ^Evrevdev Kvpos rrjv KiXicra'av et? rrjp ILiXiKiav 
 dTTOTTefXTTeL rrjv rax^crrrjv oBov ' ^ koI avpeirefixjjep avrrj 
 
READING LESSON. 337 
 
 arpaTLcora^ ov<s MeVwi^ el;)(e koI avrov Mepcova' Kupo? 
 8e fxeTOL TO)v dkXojv i^ekavvei Sia KaTTTraSo/cta? araO- 
 /A0U9 Terrapas Trapao-dyyas ei/cocri kol irivre irpos 
 Adva, ttoXlv OLKovpLevriVy fji€yd\.r)v kol evSaufJiova. 
 ivravda ifieij/ap rjixepas rpels ' ii^ d)^ Kvpos aTreKTeivev 
 dpSpa Uepcrrjp M.eya^epv7}v , (jyoLPiKicrTrjp ^aaiXeiov, 
 /cat erepov riva twp virdp^ajv, aLTLaaafxepos eTTi^ov- 
 Xeveup avTco. 
 
 ipjjirjpevs, -eo)^, 6, interpre- TnyKT7]<;) sounded the 
 
 ter (hermeneut). charge. 
 
 IT po'l^dWo), throw foi'ivard ; avro/xaro?, -17, -01^ (avrd?), 
 
 7rpo/3a\€a6aL rd oVXa, self-prompted; aTro tov 
 
 advance their arms for an avrofjidrov, vohmtarilf/. 
 
 attack (Eng., charge bay- /cara-XetTro), leave behind y 
 
 onets). abandon. 
 
 i7TL-)(a)peo), advance. ajpto^;, -d, -op, for sale ; rd 
 
 o\o9, -17, -OP, whole, entire ; ^pta, ivares. 
 
 6Xr)p rrjp (j)dXayya, the yeXw?, '(aTo<^, 6, laughter. 
 
 phalanx in a body [cath- XafjiTrpoTrjs, -r)To^, rj, bril- 
 
 olic]. liancj/, splendor. 
 
 (TaXTrit,(x), sound the trwnpet; (J)olpIkl(ttij<;, -ovy wearer of 
 
 impers., eVet icrdXTny^e, the purple. 
 
 when the trumpeter {aaX- atrtao/xat, charge, accuse. 
 
 a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this lesson. 
 
 ^ So. avTMv, gen. absol. 
 
 ^ Syntax ? TAe soldiers broke info a run ttpon the camp, but below iiri 
 ras (TKTjvas rjXdov, dispersed to their own tents. 
 
 8 Syntax? ^ gc. ^i/. 
 
 ^ ot cK r^y dyopas i(^vyov ; = oi iv rrj ayn^a efpvyov €K tjJs dynpas. 
 
 ^ Cf. 79. /j ; TOV . . . (\i6^ov, the terror with which the Greeks inspired 
 the barbarians. 
 
 7 See 267, 13. » Sc. xpoi/o) : cf. p. 327^. 
 
 22 
 
338 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX 
 SENTENCES. — ELLIPSIS, ETC. 
 
 Review 720, 721, 1, 2, 3; 722, 723, 1, 2, 3 ; 724, 
 725, 752, 5, (1), (2); 755, 5, 8, 12; 768, 1, 2, 3, a, h, 
 c,d; 769, a, h, c, d-, 11^, 776, 777, 778, 780, 1, 2, a. 
 
 787. Indirect Quotation of Complex Sentences. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 1. When a complex sentence is quoted indirectly, 
 the leading verb foUovi^s the rules for simple sentences 
 (723, 1 ;• 768, 1 ; and 776). 
 
 2. After primary tenses, dependent verbs retain the 
 same mood and tense ; after secondary tenses, they may 
 be either changed to the same tense of the optative or re- 
 tained in their original mood and tense ; but dependent 
 secondary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged 
 (723, 3 ; 768, 2, 3, a). 
 
 a. "When a suhjunctive becomes optative, civ is dropped 
 (723, 3, a). 
 
 h. One verb may be changed to the optative^ while another 
 remains unchanged (771, 7). 
 
 788. Implied Indirect Discourse, 
 
 The rule for the change to the optative (787, 2) 
 applies also to all dependent clauses which express 
 
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 339 
 
 indirectly the thoughts of another person. This con- 
 struction apphes especially to causal clauses expressing 
 another's reason (717, a), clauses depending upon final 
 clauses (755, 6, n. 5), upon the infinitive with verbs of 
 commanding, wishing, etc. (771, 13), or upon verbs of 
 emotion, tvonder, etc. : ol 8' ^Kreipov, et akoicroivTOy they 
 'pitied them if they were to he captured. 
 
 a. Upon this principle depends the use of the optative in 
 final clauses (579^ a), or after eoi? or irpiv, expressing past in- 
 tention, or expectation (708^ 8). 
 
 789. Ellipsis. 
 
 1. The subject is generally omitted when it is a pro- 
 noun of the first or second person, unless emphatic 
 (393). 
 
 2. The nominative of the third person is omitted 
 when it is implied in the context, and without emphasis : 
 LKavoiTaTo^ i(TTL €v TToielv, ov av ^ovXrjraL, he is most 
 able to heneftt ivhomcver he pleases. 
 
 3. When it is a general idea of persons : Xeyovcn, 
 they say. 
 
 4. When it is indefinite, or when the verb implies its 
 own subject. The verb is then said to be impersonal : 
 H'^XV^ Set, there is need of a battle ; fcaXw? e)^ei, it is 
 well; icrakiny^e, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet 
 (786, vocab.). 
 
 5. Verbs are called impersonal also that have an in- 
 finitive or clause as subject : Set, XP'^^ ^^ ^^ necessary, one 
 ought ; 8ok€l, it seems best, good, etc. (721, 1). 
 
 790. 1. The copulative verb is frequently omitted. 
 
340 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 especially in the forms eVrt and eto-t, and with such 
 words as BrjXo^, eroijxo^, Svi^ard?, wpa, dvdyKT), etc. : 
 (opa \iyeiv, it is time to speak (p. 288^; 786, N. 4). 
 2. Any verb may be omitted where it is i*eadily under- 
 stood from the context, especially the common verbs of 
 heing^ doing, saying : av re yap ''EWrjv el, kol rjixel^; (sc. 
 iajjih "EXXrjve^;), for you are a Greek ^ and so are ive 
 (892, 3; p. 287^ p. 30P). 
 
 791. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. 817X09 yap on rjjjilp eTTidrjcrei. 2. eSo/cet ovtm 
 rjSr) TTopevecrdaL. 3. rjSet Trepiyevofievo^ dv ^ tcjv 
 
 dvTKTTaCTlOiTO^Vy €t TOVTO yivOlTO. 4. dvdyKTJ St] fXOL 
 
 Ty Kvpov ^ikla ^prjcrOai. 5. OKTTe copa Xeyeiv on rt,? 
 yiypcocTKeL dpicTTOv elvai. 6. ef? 8e St^ elire, idv fiiq^e 
 TjyepLova 8t8a>, ctvvt drrecr 6 ai ^ rr}v ra^icrrrjv.^ 7. iOav- 
 p^at^ov on ovSapov Kvpo? (f)aLvoiTo ovh' aXXo? an avTov 
 ou8et9 7rap€L7). 8. rw KXedp^o) i/36a ayeiv to arpd- 
 revpa Kara piaov to tcov rro\epio)v^ otl eKel ^acrtXevs 
 evT). y. Kai rjpLV y av olo otl TavT eiroLei, et ecopa 
 r)pd<; peveiv TTapa(TKevat,opivov<;. 10. <^avepo<^ 8* tjv 
 KoXy €t T19 Ti dyaOov rj KaKov iroirjaeiev avTov, viKav 
 Treip(i)pevo<;. 11. iTriSeL^ev avTov otl irepl TrXeLO'TOv 
 ttoloIto, €l t(o (TTTeLaaLTO Kal €L Tco vTToa^oLTo TL^ pTjSep 
 xjjevSeaOaL. 1 2. ovS' ipel ovSels ws iyo) €a>9 pev dp Traprj 
 TL<; -^pcopaL, ineLSdv 8e diTLevaL ^ovXrjTaL, avXXa^cJV Kal 
 avTov<; KaK6)<; ttolo). 13. Kal ovk icfiacrav levaL, idv prj 
 rt9 avTov? ^pTjpaTa 8i8wj wcnrep^ rots TrpoTepoLS p€Td 
 
 1 Cf. 711, N. 5. '^ Sc, airou'?. 3 Syntax ? 
 
 * See 717, 788. « Sc. edwKe, as he had given it (790, 2). 
 
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 341 
 
 Kvpov apafiacTL irapa top narepa rov Kvpov, kol ravra ^ 
 ovK iirl fjid^Tjp loPTOiP? 
 
 II. 1. He desired to live so long a time, until he 
 should surpass ^ his enemies. 2. He replied to Cyrus 
 that he would care that it would be well. 3. He said 
 that if they should obey him, they would be honored 
 more than the rest of the soldiers by Cyrus. 4. He 
 said that if he should be there, he desired to inflict pun- 
 ishment upon him. 5. He announced that if we had 
 not come, they should be marching against the king. 
 6. I said to him that he should justly gratify me, be- 
 cause I first announced that Cyrus was making an 
 expedition against him. 
 
 792. VOCABULARY. 
 
 fiekei, be a ca?'e to ; ifiol ^ovkofxac (^ovXtJ), to wish, 
 
 fieXeu, it is a care to me, be willing, of choice and 
 
 / take care, see to it. preference after delib- 
 
 cnripho),.(nrei(TO), ecTreicra, eration. 
 
 offer a libation; mid., iOeXo), to wish, with more 
 
 make a treaty. reference to natural in- 
 
 ov^ap^ov, adv., nowhere. stinct ; may be used of 
 
 ojcr-Trep, conj., adv, like as, man, irrational animals, 
 
 fust as, as it were. etc. 
 
 Xprj^o), desire, long for. 
 
 793 • Cyrus enters Cilicia through the Mountain Pass, and arrives 
 at Tarsus. 
 
 Review 158, 212, 239, 314, a; 369, 5; 663, 758, 
 768, 1 ; 770, 776, 786. 
 
 ^ And that too, sc. eiroirjaf. ^ Sc. avTwv. ^ Cf. 10, above. 
 
342 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 21. 'EvTev6ev ineLpcopTo elaj^dWeiv et?" tt^v KtXt- 
 Kiav' 7} Se elafioXr) tjv 6S65 a/iaftro9 opOia la^^vpcof; 
 /cat dfjLT])(avo<; elcrekOeiv crrparev/Aart/ el tl<; eKocikvev? 
 iXeyero Se Kal ^vivvecn^ eivai evrt tcov aKpwv (fyvkdr- 
 Tcop TTjv ela^okrjv ' St' o ifietvev rjjjbepav iv rco TreStw. 
 TTj S' vcTTepaia rJKev dyye\o<; Xeycov otl XeXotTTw? eir) ^ 
 %v4vve(TL<^ rd aKpa, CTret rjcrSero on to re MeVwi^o? 
 crrpaTevfJia yjSr] ev KtXt/cta -^^^^ etcrw rwi' opecov, /cat ort 
 TpLy]peL<; rJKOve TrepnrXeovaa^^ oltt' *I(ovia<s ets KtXt/ctai^ 
 ras AaKeSaifxovLCJv /cat auroi) Kupou. 
 
 22. Kvpo? S' ovp dve^T) inl tol opr) ovSevos kcoXvov- 
 T09^ /cat €tSe rag aKrjvd^ ov 01 KtXt/ce? iipvXaTTov,^ 
 ivrevOev Se Kare^aivev et? irehiov jxeya /cat Kokovy 
 SevSpcov^ (TVfJLTrXeayv /cat d/xTreXwi^. opo9 S' avTO^ 
 Trepte^et o^vpov /cat vxltrjXov Trdvrrj e/c dakdrrr]^ els 
 OdXarrav. 
 
 23. KarajSas Se Sta tovtov tov TreStov T^Xacre crraO- 
 lxov<; rerrapa?, Trapacrdyya^; irevTe /cat eiKocriVj et? 
 Tapcroifs, Trjs KtXt/cta? ttoXlv p.eyd\rjv /cat evSaifiova. 
 evTavOa rjcrav rd 'Zvevveo'LO^; jSacrtXeta rou KtXt/c<yf 
 jSacrtXeoj?* Sta fjiear)s Se T179 TrdXeco? /5et Trora/xo? 
 KvSi/o9 ovofxa,^ evpos Suo rrXeOpajv. 
 
 24. TavTT]!' TT^z^ TToXti' e^iXiTTov ol evoiKovvTe<; fxerd 
 ^vevvecno<^ ets ^(opiov o^vpov iin rd oprj TrXrjv ol rd 
 KaTTrjXela ej^oz^re? * efxeuvap Se /cat ot Trapa tt7^' ddXar- 
 rav OLKovvTes ev SdXot? /cat eV 'Icrcrotg. 
 
 opOioq, -d, -o^', <s/^^jt?. elcr-ep)(0fiaL, go or co??2^ /w, 
 
 dixyj^oLvo^;, -ov, iinpi^actica- enter, 
 
 ble, impossible (710). hevhpov, tree. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS irjIXLy TjjXaL, K€LfXaL. 343 
 
 o-u/x-TrXewg, -cov, full, filled injjr)\6<?, -t], -op, high, lofty, 
 
 tvith (734). Ka7n)\eiov, to, stall, shop, 
 
 aft7reXo9, 17, vine, grape- inn [Lat. caupo, huck- 
 vine. ster, whence cheap^. 
 
 oxvpo';, -a, -6v, tenable, for- 
 tified hy nature. 
 
 a. Note the uses of prepositions of tliis lesson. 
 
 1 Syntax? 
 
 ^ €K(a\vevy attempted action, trying to oppose (114, end). 
 
 ^ Wliy the optative ? 
 
 * What mood would be expected here ? 
 
 6 Syntax? (783, 9). 
 
 <» See 755, 7. The imperfect, €(f)vXaTTov, expresses continued action 
 prior to that of the main verb, hence with pluperfect force, had been guard- 
 ing (cf. p. 257^)- Note that tlie English and Greek pluperfects are not 
 equivalent terms (314, ci). The English pluperfect expresses mere priority 
 of time ; the Greek denotes an action continuing in its effect up to the time 
 of the main verb ; the aorist, on the other hand, denotes momentary or 
 transient acts (cf. 802, 12). 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 IRREG-ULAR VERBS ly\[Li, rjfiaL, Keiyuai, 
 
 Review 617, 619, a-g ; 712, 729, a-g ; 739, a. 
 
 794. Conjugate It^/xi [e-], send; KdOrjixai^ [/caret + 
 17/Aat, r)(T-~\, sit down ; and Kelfiai [/cec-, k€-~\, lie. (861, 
 862, 863). 
 
 a. Observe that ltjjjll is inflected like Ttdrj/jLLj except in the 
 third person plaral which has Idcn^ and in the second person 
 singular of the second aorist middle which has ela-o. 
 
 ^ Kd3r]uai is commonly used in Attic for ijfiai, sit. 
 
344 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 b. Observe that KaQrjixai has only the present system ; and 
 that 0- of the theme is regularly dropped before the endings ; the 
 optative is the same as in oj verbs. 
 
 c. Observe that icel^iai has subjunctive and optative as in o) 
 verbs. 
 
 795. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. I^VTO wcTTrep av SpdfjiOL ns Trepl vLKrj<;. 2. w? 
 etSe Tw aTparrjyov SteXawo^ra, ltjctl XWco, 3. §77X0? 
 Tjfxlv av Tavra ttolcjv, €i ifiepofiev. 4. iypaxjje eTncTTO- 
 \r)v Trapa /BacnXea otl tj^ol e)(^cov tTTTrea? cu? ap SvprjTaL 
 7rXetc7T0U5. 5. rrj 8e TpLrr) cttI tov apfxaros KaOifj- 
 fxevo^ TYjv TTopeiav iTTOielTO. 6. Kvpo? 8e avrd? re 
 aTridave koX oktcj ol apiaroi twv Trepl avrov eKeivTo in* 
 avTa>. 7. ovTo<s Kvpw elTrev, el avrco Solt) l7nrea<s X''^^' 
 OV9, on ^a)PTa<; ttoXXov? avrcop ap ekot. 8. tovtov 
 epeKo^ ^aaikea VTrcoTrrevep eirl to neSuop to vScjp 
 a^teiKepai, 9. Sofcet 8e fxoi a^iovp rj TreCa-apTa'^ r}fJia<; 
 ayeiv rj TreicrOepTa irpo^ ^ikiap a^iipai. 10. ovtol 
 8e OTL ovK yjOeXe Tovq (j>evyopTa<; TTpoeaOai i(j)ofiovPTo 
 avTOP, 
 
 II. 1. But another and another threw stones at him. 
 2. But there was a hill above them upon which the 
 guards were encamping. 3. For now these good things 
 lie in our midst. 4. But saying, " I see the man," he 
 rushed upon him and wounded him through his breast- 
 plate. 5. Very many desired to entrust to him both 
 their property and cities. 
 
 ^ ei/e/ca follows its case. 
 
 2 Agrees with the subject of ay^iv understood. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS IriflL, fjfxai, /CCl/xat. 345 
 
 796. VOCABULARY. 
 
 a<^-t77/xi, send awaf/, let go, Kelfxai, KeCaofiat, lie, lie 
 
 let flow, dead; used as the pas- 
 
 8i-e\ai>rcy, ride or drive sive of TtOrjfjLL, he placed, 
 
 through, he laid, he situated [ceme- 
 
 iT^jLtL [e], TjCTO), rJKa,^ el/ca/ tery]. 
 
 ef/xai, elOrjv, send, throw; 7rpo-L7)fjii, send forth; mid., 
 
 mid., send or th?^ow one's commit, entrust, siuren- 
 
 self, rush, charge. der, 
 
 KaO-rj yiai, sit down, he 
 seated, he encamped, 
 
 797. (^tXo9, one s oivn, dear. <t)C\o-s, -17? -ov, dear, 
 heloved ; 6 (^tXo-9, a friend ; <^tX-Lo-9, -a, -o-v, friendlg ; 
 ^lX-lol, -a?, aj^ection, friendship ; c^cXe-cu, love; <^tX-t7r7ro-9, 
 -o-v (iiriTOs, horse), fond of horses ; (j)LX6-0r}po-<;, -o-v (OTJpd, 
 a hunt), fond of hunting ; ^iko-Kivhvvo<;, -o-v (kCvSvvos), 
 
 fond of danger, adventurous ; (j)Lko-ixa07]<;, -e? {fiavOdvaj), 
 fond of learning ; <^tXo-7rdXe/x,o-9, -o-v {iroke^xo-^), fond of 
 war; ^Lk6a-o(^o-<^, 6 {cro(^6-<^), lover of wisdom, a philoso- 
 pher. 
 
 Philip, philtre, sophist, phil-anthropy, phil-ippic, 
 philo-logy, philo-sopliy. 
 
 79o» Menon loses two Companies in the Passage of the Moun- 
 tains. Cyrus and Syennesis meet. Exchange of Gifts. 
 
 Review QQ, 141, 142, 182, 225, 369, 3; 385, 386, 
 705, 707, 723, 1 ; 793. 
 
 25. 'Evruafa 8e rf Sv€vvecno<; yvvrj irporepa Kvpov^ 
 
 1 See 730, 4, 5. 2 See 649. 
 
346 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 irivre rjixepaL<; ^ et9 Tapcrov? a^iKero ' ev 8e ttj vnep^oXy 
 
 TCOV OpCOV ^ TTj els TO TTehlOV SuO \6^0L TOV Mci^wi^o? 
 
 (TTpaTevfiaTos olttcoXovto ' ^ ol fxev ec^acrai' apirdl^ov- 
 Tois TL KaraKOTrrjvai viro tcov KtXt/coj^', ol Se viroku- 
 (j)0€VTas^ Kol ov hwafxivovs evpeiv to aWo crrparev/xa 
 ovhe ras 68ov9 OLTToXicrOai ' rjo-av 8* ovv ovtol eKaTov 
 oTrXirai. 
 
 26. Ot 8' aWoi eVet rJKov^ ttjv t€ irokiv SiijpTracrav, 
 Stct TOV okeOpov T(Dv avaTpaTLCoTcov opyL^^ofxepoL, kol tol 
 ^acriXeia tol iv avTrj. Kvpo<; 8e eVet elcrijXaaej^ €ts 
 Trjv iroXiPy fjLeT€TT€iJL7r€T0 TOV 'Zvivvecriv irpos eavTov 6 
 8' ovTe irpoTepov ovhevi^ ttcd KpeiTTOvi^ iavTov^ el<; ^et- 
 pas iXdelv^ ecfyrj ovTe TOTe Kvpco^ Ikvai rjdeXe, irplv r) 
 yvvT) avTov eweLcre kol TricrTeiq eXa/Se. 
 
 27. Mera 8e ravra CTrel crvz^eye^oi^ro aXXT^Xot?/ 
 Svej/z^ecrt? /xez^ iScoKe Kvpcp ■^pTJjjiaTa ttoXXo, et? t7)i^ 
 (TTpaTLav, Kvpos 8' eKeLvcp^ Scopa d vopiit^eTai irapd 
 ^acnXei rt/xta, ittttoi^ ^ ^pvao^dXivov koI cTTpeTTTOv 
 Xpvo'ovv Kai {peXia kol aKLvdKTjv ^pvaovv koX cttO' 
 Xrjv UepG-LKTJv' KOL TTJV x^P^^ p.r)KeTL d(\>ap7rdt,e(T6cLL^ 
 
 cttoXt], -7^5, robe. 
 
 IX7)k4ti, not again (as at Tarsus). 
 
 d(j>'ap7rdi^(o, plunder^ pillage. 
 
 1 Syntax ? 4 Agreement and force ? 
 
 2 Give the prin. parts. 5 cf. 740, 13, n. 2, 3. 
 
 8 What force ? See ol 5e, below. ^ Compare and decline. 
 
 '' At the Izing's court. 
 
 8 One of the objects of eSw/ce ; see 790, 2. 
 
REVIEW. 347 
 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 Review 723, 1, 2, 3, a; 724, 725, Lessons LXVL- 
 LXX. 
 
 7gg. Perfect Middle System of Consonant Themes, — 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 L How is the third person plural of the perfect and 
 pluperfect middle of consonant themes formed ? 
 
 2. Explain the formation of the periphrastic future. 
 
 3. Write the perfect and pluperfect indicative middle 
 of /ceXeuw, dpirdt^coy it4^itto), dyo), (^atVw, and explain the 
 euphonic changes of the concurrent consonants. 
 
 4. Conjugate the perfect middle system of XeCiro), 
 TOLTTO), and TreCdco. 
 
 5. Give the inflection of olSa. 
 
 6. Conjugate the -present and second aorist systems 
 
 of LTJfJiL, 
 
 8oo. Summary of Constructions in Indirect Discourse^ 
 etc. 
 
 1. Give rule for the use of the infinitive in indirect 
 discourse. 
 
 2. What verbs take the object infinitive ? 
 
 3. Distinguish between the use of the tenses of the 
 object infinitive and those of the infinitive in indirect 
 discourse. 
 
348 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 4. Give the rule for changing simple sentences into 
 indirect discourse after otl and w?. 
 
 5. Give the forms of indirect discourse that follow 
 the three common verbs of saving. 
 
 6. What verbs take the participle in indirect dis- 
 course ? 
 
 7. What constructions follow SrjXos elfjn, etc.? 
 
 8. Explain the uses of the tenses of the participle in 
 indirect discourse. 
 
 9. Distinguish between the participle in indirect 
 discourse and the participle after verbs of perceiving, 
 finding^ etc. 
 
 10. Give the principles governing the use of a.v in 
 subordinate and principal clauses in indirect discourse. 
 
 11. What is the principle governing the negatives in 
 indirect discourse? 
 
 12. In how many ways are simple sentences indirectly 
 quoted ? 
 
 13. How are all subordinate clauses indirectly 
 quoted ? 
 
 14. Give the rule for changing complex sentences to 
 indirect discourse. 
 
 15. Distinguish between expressed and implied indi- 
 rect discourse. 
 
 16. Give the formation of the verbal adjectives. Give 
 the construction of the verbal adjectives in reo^, and 
 examples in Greek. 
 
 8oi. Ellipsis, etc. 
 
 1. When can the subject of an infinitive be omitted P 
 
REVIEW. 349 
 
 When the subject of an infinitive is omitted, with what 
 do the predicate nouns and adjectives agree ? 
 
 2. When can the subject of a finite verb be omitted? 
 When can the verb be omitted ? Give examples of the 
 ellipses of the latter. 
 
 3. Distinguish between the use of XPV ^"^ ^^^ > ^^ 
 fiovkofxaL and iOeXcj. 
 
 4. Give words allied to crTpaT6<; and <^tXo9. 
 
 5. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within 
 this review. 
 
 802. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. KaKOL ov jxi Woven Troielv. 2. ovtoi npo avTov 
 ^acrtXeaj? rerayyiivoi rjdav. 3. avOpayiro^ tls rjpcoTrjcre 
 Tov<; (j>vXaKa<; ttov av t8ot Upo^epov. 4. rfpcoTTjcrev el 
 ol arpaTLCoT ai TreireLCfjievoL enqcrav, 5. fieXXeu rr^v yi- 
 (^vpav \.v(Tai Ti(T(Ta(^ipvr]<^ Trj<^ vvkto<;, iap SvvrjTat. 
 6. dWov^ ovTLVOS^ OLP herjcrOe olSa otl cJ? cfyuXov^ 
 Tev^ecrOe Kvpov.^ 7. avicrTavTo ol 8e koX vn i-Keivov 
 iyKeXevcTTOL iiriheiKvvvTef; ola elrj rj airopia avev T175 
 Kvpov yv(ofJi7)<; kol yiiveiv koL airiivai, 8. cJ? p^ev 
 OTpaTrjyrjo'ovTa'^ ifxe ravT-qv Trjv orTpaT7)yiav^ p7)Sel<; 
 vjjLCJP Xeyero)' ttoWol yap ivopco Si' a e/xoi tovto ov 
 TTOirjTeov. 9. y^pXv 8e ye, oT/xat, TTavra iroi-qTea w? 
 p.t]TTOT €771 To2<; ^ap^dpoi^; y€V(op.€6a, 10. Tavrrj^; 
 ovv ei^eKa ttJ? irapoSov Kupo? tols vav<; /LtereTre/xi/zaro, 
 oTTft)? PiacrdfjLevoL tov<; 7roXefjLLOv<; irapiXOoiev, el (jyvXar- 
 
 ^ aXXov for aXXo, obj. of rev^cadf (439), whatever else you need. 
 2 Syntax ? ^ gee 409. 
 
 ^ a)s (TTparrjyrja-ovTa, acc. after XeyeTco. The part, with wr approaches 
 indirect discourse (776). 
 
350 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 roiep eVt rat? Svptai? 7rv\ai<; ' 11. kol ev9v<; iracriv 
 of? ivervy^avev i^oa kol ^ap^apLKco<; /cat €K\r)VLKco<;, 
 OTL /SacrtXeus crifv cTTpaTevfjuaTt ttoWS wpocrep^eTaL ws 
 €l<; fjbd^Tjv 7rapeo'K€vaaiJL€vo<;. 12. eVet 8e 6 Mt^ptSarT^g 
 
 KaT€Lk7](j)€L aVTOV^ Kol tJSt) TO^eVfJiaTa i^LKVOVVTO^ 
 
 i(T7] fJLTjve^ TOL^ "^EXXt^cti ttj crakiTiyyi, koI evOv^ e0eov 
 Spofjicp ol OTrXiTai kol ol iTTTrec? yjkavvov ' 13. rrpov- 
 heSdjKecrav 8e avrov<; /cat ol avv Kvpo) ava^dvTef; fidp- 
 ^apoLf fjLovoL 8e /caraXeXet/xjiteVot "^aav ovSe linrea 
 ovhiva aviMfxa)(^op €)(ovt€s, wore StJXoi/ -^^ ort i/t/cwi/- 
 7€9 ovhiva av KaraKavoiev, 14. etTrdt'TOS^ Se rou 
 'Opovra OTL ovhev ^ dSiKrjOels iirL^ovXevajv avrco (f)avepo<; 
 yeyove. rjpa>Tr)(rev 6* Kvpo^ avTov, *0/xoXoyet5 ovv 
 irepX ifie aSt/co?* yeyevrjcrO ai ; *H ^ yap dvdyKrj, e(f)r] 6 
 ^Opovra^, e/c tovtov irdXiv rjpcoTrjaev 6 Kvpo<;, ^Ert ovv 
 av yevoLO^ tco ifico dSeXc^w TroXe/xtog? e/xot Se (^tXo? /cat 
 TTto'To? ; 6 Se direKpivaTO on ov8' ' et yevoCfJirjVy co Kvpe, 
 croi y dv irore ert ho^aipn. 
 
 803. VOCABULARY. 
 
 iyK€XevcrTo<;,^ -ov, bidden, ^idJ^ofxaL [)8ta8-], ^idcrO' 
 
 incited, urged on [/ce- />tat, Qic, force one's loay, 
 
 Xevw]. /orc^ or compel. 
 
 (TctXTTtyf , -tyyo9, 17, trumpet, iv-opdco, see in, see, observe. 
 
 1 Cf. 793, N. 6. 8 Syntax? 
 
 2 Force of the tense ? * Why not ace. ? 
 
 ^ ^ yap, etc., sc. iariv ofioXoyelv (790, 1, 2), (j/es), for, indeed, it is 
 necessary, etc. 
 
 ^ Explain the mood. 
 
 •^ What does o^-Se limit? (694, 9). « Cf. 373, 521. 
 
READING LESSON. 351 
 
 i^-LKpeofxai, reach, reach Trpo-hiho)iLL,(/ive up,surren- 
 
 the mark, hit, der, abandon. See 647. 
 
 ojjio-Xoyeo), agree, confess, Trpoo'-ep^o/xat, come or go 
 acknowledge . See 685. to or towards^ approach^ 
 
 irap-epxofiaL, pass by or advance. 
 
 along. rj, adv., indeed, really, truly, 
 
 certainly. 
 
 SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS. 
 804. The Troops refuse to advance. Speech of Clearchus. 
 
 Review 120, 202, 249, 269, 432, 439, 579, 581, 681, 
 687, 690, 715, 721, 1, 2, 3; 723, 1, 2. 3; 780, 2; 
 790,1,2; 798. 
 
 1. 'Ej/rav^a ifjieuve Kvpo<; kol t) crrparia rjiiepa^ et/co- 
 (TLV' ol yap (Trparioyrai ovk icfyaaap livai rov irpoao) ' ^ 
 vTTCJTTTevov yap rjSr) iirl^ /BaaiXea livai ' fiLcrOooOrj' 
 ^ai 8e OVK inl tovtco ic^acrav. irpcoTO^ ^ 8e KXeap^o^ 
 TOV<; avTov aTpaTLatra^ i^idt^eTo ^ I4vai ' ol 8e avrov 
 re e/BaXXov Kal to. vTTo^vy la ra iKeivov, eTrel ap^aivTo * 
 TTpoiiv ai. 
 
 2. YLXiap^o'i Se rore ixev fXLKpov i^€(j>vy€ fjirj Kara- 
 TTcrpoiOrjvai.^ vcrrepov 8', inel eyvo) on ov SvpyjaeraL^ 
 ^idcraaOai, (Tvvijyayev iKKXyjcrCai/ tcov avrov (TTparioy 
 Twv ' Kal TrpcJTOP ix€v iSaKpve ttoXvp "^povop i(XTco<;, ol 
 8e 6paJVT€^ iOavp^al^op Kal i(n(OTro)v * elra eXef € roidSe ' 
 
 3. '^AvSpes (XTpaTLcoTaL, firj 6avyidt,ere, otl ^aXeTToi? 
 ^epco To2<; TrapovcTL TrpdyfiacnvJ ifjiol yap Kvpo<; ^4vo<; 
 iyivero Kai /x€ ^evyovra iK T179 TrarpiSos rd re aXXa 
 
352 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 iTLfXTjo'e KOI jXvpLOV^; eSw/ce SapeiKov<; ' ov9 iyo) \a/3cjp 
 ovK el<s TO lSlov KareOifxiqv ifiol,' dX\' €is u/xa? iSaird- 
 vcov. 
 
 4. Kat npcoTOv fxev iiri roi)^ Opa/ca? CTToXe/xT/cra kol 
 vnep rrjq *EXXa8os iTLfjLMpovfjLrjv jxeO^ vfjicov, i.K Trj<; 
 Heppovijaov avrov? e^eXavvcov ^oyXofxevovf; d(j)aLpel- 
 aOai Tov^ ivoLKOvPTa^; "Fi\\r)va^ ttjv yrjv. iTreiSrj Se 
 Kvpo^ iKoiXei, Xa/3(x)v v/xa9 iTropevofJirjv, Iva, el tl 8e- 
 OLTO, o)(pekourjv avrov avu a)p ev eirauop vir eKeivov. 
 
 5. 'Ettci 8e v/xcl? ou ^ovXecrOe crvixTTopevecrOai, 
 dvdyKTj^ hrj yioi rj vfjbd^ irpo^opTa^^ Tjj Kvpov (j^tXia^ 
 ^prjdOai rj irpo^ i.Kelvov xjfevcrdixepop ^^ /xe^' vficop livai. 
 el jxev St) SiKaua iroiyjaa) ovk olSa, alpyjcrofjiaL 8' ovv 
 
 U/Xa?, KOL (TVV VpZv OTL^^ OLV 8el7* TTetVo/Xai. kol OVTTOTe 
 
 epel ouSet? co? eyw, '^EXXr/i^a? dyayciiv el<; tov<; ^ap^d- 
 pov9, 7rpo8ov9 ^^ Toi'9 "EXXT^i^a? ttjp tcov fiap^dpojp 
 (fnXuav elX6iJir)v. 
 
 0. *AXX' irrel v/xetg ifJLol ' ov deXere ireWecrO ai ovSe 
 eirecrBaL, iycj crvv vplv opofjuai Kal on av Sey 7retc70/xat. 
 vofxCi^ct) yap v/xct? ifiol elvau kol TraTpuSa kol (J)lXov^ kol 
 crvfJLfjid^ovs, Kal crvv vfjilv ^^ fjuev av oT/xat elvai ^* ri/xto? 
 OTTOV aj' 0), vfJLcov oe ep7][xo<; (ov ovk av iKavo<; eti^at 
 ovT av <^iXov (o^eXrjcrai ovr av^^ e^Opov dXe^acrS at. 
 
 «j^'?>/ 17'!' "^ ^''^IS'" ^ 
 
 CO? e/xov ovv lovTos otty) av /cat v/xec9; ovrcj ttjv 
 yv(i)ixrjv ex^Te. 
 
 TTpoaco, Sidv., forward. crvv-dycj, bring together , 
 KaTa-ireTpocOy 'eTreTpdtdrjv, call, 
 
 stone to death [7rer/oo9, haKpvoi^ weep [tear]. 
 
 stone ; petrel] . cncoTrdajy he silent. 
 
RETROVERSION. 353 
 
 lSlos, -a, 'Ov, personal, to my own personal use 
 
 private ; to lSlop, ones [idiom]. 
 
 own property, benefit; KaTa-TidrjiJiLj place away^ 
 
 ct? TO ^lov . . . e/xot, hoard, 
 
 a. Note the use of the pgposiui-'ins of this lesson. 
 
 ^ Tov 7rp6(ra>j prose use 6t the gen, of place, as the adverbs in -ou, — 
 rrov, avTov, etc. 
 
 2 irpmTos, he was -the first to undertake it ; Trparop would mean that he 
 did this before something else. 
 
 8 Give force of the imperfect. » Cf. 791, 4. 
 
 * Explain the mood. lo What case would be expected ? 
 
 s See 119. 11 See 708, 3. 
 
 ^ What mood might have been used ? i^ What force ? 
 
 ' Syntax ? i8 What force ? (716, end.) 
 
 8 See 755, 6. " Explain the mood (722, 7, 8). 
 
 1^ oTTov av Si, whenever I may be, represents the supposed future case 
 more vividly than the more regular ottou ciiyi/ (686, «). This condition, hav- 
 ing protasis and apodosis of different forms, is called a mixed condition. 
 
 1® av belongs to uvai, repeated for emphasis. 
 
 i"* (Uff efiovodu lopTos, gen. absol. with a>s (802, 8), ejxe U'vai, might have 
 been used. 
 
 1* What verb is understood with vfxcis ? 
 
 805. Translate:^ 
 
 1. The soldiers refuse to go against the king. 2. For 
 they said that they had not been hired for this. 3. Cle- 
 archus was the first to begin to advance. 4. The sol- 
 diers wondered that Clearchus was distressed at the 
 state of affairs. 5. Clearchus did not lay up the darics 
 for his own use, but expended them upon his soldiers. 
 6. I will join ^ Cyrus, that, if he has any need of me, 
 I may aid him in return for the benefits I have received 
 
 1 Most of the words in these exercises appear in the Greek narrative. 
 ^ rropevofiu. 
 
 23 
 
354 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
 
 from him. 7. Clearchus said that he would choose his 
 own soldiers instead of Cyrus, and in their company 
 would suffer whatever might be necessary. 
 
 80 5. The Soldiers approve, riaeailjiip sends a secret Message 
 to Cyrus, and makes a Second Address. 
 
 Review 369, 3 ; 370, 1, 2; 398, 581, 589, 681, 705, 
 717, 725,739,5; 790, 1, 2; 804. 
 
 7. Tavra elirev ' ol 8e (rrpartwrat, 01 re avTov iKeCvov 
 KOL ol dWoi, TavTa oLKovcravTe^; iirriveo-av ' napa 8e 
 Beviov Ko^l Ila(Ti(ovo<; TrXetov? ^ rj SiO'x^^f'OL Xa^opre^ 
 TOL oTrka /cat ra aKevocfyopa io-rparoTrSevaavro irapa 
 KXedp^co. 
 
 8. Ki}po9 8e To-uToi^'^ diTopoiv^ re koI XvTrovjJievo^ 
 /xereTre/xTrero tov KXeap^ov ' 6 8e teVat fxev ovk rjdeke^ 
 \d0pa 8e T(t)v <JTpario)TO)v^ irefjiTrcov avrw dyyeXov eXr.ye 
 Oappeiv oj? Karacrriqo'op.evaiv ^ tovtcov et? to heov * I 
 fxeTaTrep^TrecrOai 8' iKeXevev avrov ' avro? 8' ovk €(1)7) 
 ievai, 
 
 9. Mera 8e raOra (Tvvayaywv tov<; fxeO^ iavrov crrpa- 
 TiftJra? KOL Tov<; TTpocreXOovra^ avru'^ kol tcop dXXcov 
 TOV /BovXofJievop eXe^e TOidSe ' 
 
 "AvSpe^; (TTpaTLCJTai, tol p.ev Stj Kvpov 8rjXov^ on 
 
 OVTO)^ €X€L^ 7rpO<? T^jLtOL? MO'TTep TOL r)fJL€T€pa 77/909 eKelvOV ' 
 
 ovT€ yap r)iJLeL<; iKecvov^ €Tl crrpartwrat, eVet ye ov 
 (Twerroyieda avT^^ ovTe eKeivo^ ert r^fxlv^ fjnarOoSoTr)^. 
 
 10. ''On fJuevTOL dSLKeicrOai vopLit^ei v(j>^ rjfJLcov olSa' 
 wore KOL iieTaTrepLTrop^ivov^ avTov ovk iOeXco iXdelv, to 
 fX€v fieyLCTOv^ al(j^v6p.evo<; otl (TVPOuSa i/xavTM irdvTa 
 
READING LESSON. 
 
 355 
 
 ixjjevcrixevo^ avrov, eTretra /cat SeStw? /X17 Xa^cov^ /x€ 
 Slktjp iTTiOfj ^ £v^ vofiii^eL VTT ifjLOV rjSiKrjcrOaL. 
 
 11. 'E/xot ovp So/c€t ou^ w/aa el^at ^*^ tj/jllj/ KaOevSetv^^ 
 ovS' dfieXelp rjjJLwv avroiv^ aXka /BovXeveadaL on '^prj 
 TTOieiv e/c TovTOivy^ kol eo)? ye fjiepofxev avTov, (TKeirTeov 
 jjLOL SoK€L elvai ^^ OTTOJ? w? dcr<^aXeo"Tara fievajfievy^ et 
 T€ T^Sr^ 8oAC€i amivai^^ 07ra)<; ojs dacfjaXeo'TaTa dirLfJiev,^ 
 Kal OTTcos TOL eTTtTT^Seta e^ofiev ' avev yap tovtojv ovre 
 (TTpariqyov ovre aTpanoyrov 6(j>eXo<; ovSeV. 
 
 12. *0 8' dvTJp^ TTOXXOV^ fJL€V d^LOS (/)lXo9 m'^ dv 
 
 <^t\o9 y,^ xaXeTTcoTaTo<; S' i^Opcx; S dp TroXefXLOS y- 
 eyei 8e SvvafJiLP kol Trelirjv koI pavTLKrjv kol LTnnKrjv, 
 rjv 7rdvT€<; ojutotw? opcojxep re kol eTTi(Trdp.e6a ' koI yap 
 ovSe iroppot) hoKovfiep ^^ jxol avrov ^^ KaOrjcrd ai. (Sare 
 oipa'^ Xeyeiv on n<; yuyvatcrKeL dpiarov elvaL. Tavra 
 
 eiTTOiv eTTavaaro. 
 
 Xvireo), pain, grieve. 
 XdBpay adv., without the 
 
 knoicledge of (Xavdavo)). 
 Oappeo), he of good courage. 
 et9 TO Seov {Seco), in the 
 
 right wag, satisfactorilg . 
 fjLLo-Oo-SoTTjf;, 'Ov,pag?naster 
 
 [647]. 
 e7r-eLra,adv., then, moreover. 
 Ka6-ev8(o, sleep, lie idle. 
 
 6(f)eXo<;^ TO, advantage, use. 
 
 776^09, -T), -6v, on foot ; 6 
 7r€^o9, foot-soldier ; ol 
 iret^oi, or 7re^i7 hvvapn^j 
 infayitrg, 
 
 ojLtotcej?, adv., in like man- 
 ner, alike [685]. 
 
 TToppo), adv., forwards, far 
 froyn. 
 
 ^ Compare and explain the form. 
 
 2 Syntax ? * Depends upon XdSpa. 
 
 • Force ? ^ Syntax and force ? 
 
 « Cf. 1921. 
 ' Cf. 172, a. 
 
356 THE BEGINNER S GREEIv BOOK. 
 
 8 Chiefiy, adv. ace. What is its correlative ? 
 ^ Explain the mood. 
 
 1° SoKeo), to seem, takes the infinitive in indirect discourse; hoKioi^ U 
 seem good or best, does not take the infinitive in indirect discourse ; but in 
 either case the infinitive is the subject except when So/ce'co, seems^ has a per- 
 sonal subject (725). For a-KeTrreov . . .. flmi, below, see 783, 12. 
 1^ Depends upon apa. Give the rule. 
 ^2 eK TovT<ov, in these circumstances. 
 ^^ avTov depends upon noppa. Give the rule. 
 
 807. Translate : 
 
 1. Both the soldiers of that one himself and the 
 others, praised these things. 2. Since Cyrus was 
 troubled about these affairs, he kept sending for Cle- 
 archus. 3. But secretly sending a messenger to him, 
 Clearchus bade him to be of good courage, since these 
 matters would be settled satisfactorily. 4. Although 
 he keeps sending for me, I do not wish to go ; for I 
 fear lest he may seize me and inflict punishment upon 
 me for the wrongs he has suffered from me. 5. It is 
 not a time for us to lie idle, but to consider what it is 
 necessary to do in these circumstances. 6. Clearchus 
 said that Cyrus was a valuable friend to whomsoever he 
 was a friend, and a most bitter enemy to w^horasoever he 
 was an enemy. 
 
 808. Plans proposed by the Soldiers. Clearchus refuses to lead. 
 
 Review 236, 5 ; 238, o5g (241), 245, 579, 581, 663, 
 687, 703, 716, 768, 1, 2; 769, d; 778, a; 782, 1, 2; 
 788, 8o6. 
 
 13. *Eac Se TovTov avLO'TavTO ol fxev i.K rov avTO/JuaTOVy 
 Xefoz^re?^ a iyiyvoxiKOv^ ol 8e /cat vtt iKeCvov iyKe- 
 
READING LESSON. 357 
 
 XevcTTOL, i7nS€LKvvvT€<; ^ Ota €117 ^ Tj OLTTOp ia avev ttJs 
 Kvpov yv 0)^.7]^ KaX jxeveLV kol ainivaL. 
 
 14. Ef?* Se 817 etTre,^ irpoo-TTOLovfjievos cnrevBetv &j5 
 rd^LCTTa TTopevecrOaL ^ et? Ti7t' 'EXXaSa, arpaTrjyovs fiei/ 
 iXecrOai^ dXXovs ojg Ta-^icrra, el fxr) ySovXerat^ KXeap- 
 )(o<; dirdyeiv ' tol 8' imTijheLa dyopd^^ecrOau^ — 77 8' dyopd 
 Tjv iv T(p pap^apiKCD crrpareu/xari — kol avcTKevdt^eo'OaC^ 
 iXOovTa^ ^ 8e Kvpoi^ alrelv 7rXo2a, (o<; dnoTrXeoLev ' ^ idv 
 Se fjirj 8t8(w ^ ravra, rjyefJLOva aiTelv ^ Kvpov ocrrc? 8t(x 
 <^tXta9^ T-i^S xcopa^ aTrd^ei'^ idv 8e /xT78e rjyejjiopa 
 SlSco, crvvrdTTecrd ai^ Tr)v raxicrT-qv,^ Tre/xi/zat^ 8e Acal 
 TTpoKaTaXy]\\fopLevov^ ^ tol aKpa, ottco^ jxt) (jiOdcrcocn ^ fJi^jre 
 KOpo? [jL7]Te ol KlXlk€<; KaraXa^ovre^} ovto<; fiev 817 
 TOLavTa etire' [xerd 8e tovtov KXeap^o? eiTre^ rocrovro^'* 
 
 io. Us ix€v <TrpaTy]yr](TovTa e/x€ Tavrrjv ttjv arpa- 
 T'qytav fxrjBelf; vfxcjv Xeyerco ' iroXXd yap ii/opco St a 
 ifjLol TovTo ov 7roLr)T€ov • cjs ^^ 8e Tw dvSpl ov dv iXr)- 
 cde Treio'o/xat^ y SvvaTov^ fidXicrra, Iva elhrjre^ on 
 KoX ap^ecrdau eViVrajLiai ^^ w? ns zeal aXXos- 
 
 TTpocr-TTOLeofxaL, profess, pretend. 
 Sui/aros, -77, -OP, able, possible {hyvayLai), 
 
 ^ Force ? 2 Principal parts ? 
 
 * Explain the mood. 
 
 * eh 8e dr), etc., one in particular^ etc. 
 
 s Cf. 771, 13. 8 Of. 791, 6. 
 
 « Syntax? (7G9, ^.) « So. ^i^Spas (637, 9). 
 
 7 Explain position ? 10 Cf. 802, 8. 
 
 ^^ Sc. exaaros XfyeVo). 
 
 ^2 Sc. eWi ; cf. 735, N. 4, to the best of my ability. 
 ^^ Cf. 778, a. I know how also to be governed, Kai is emphatic here as it 
 is before aXKos, — cos tls koX ciXXhs (as well as^ any other man. 
 
358 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 809. Translate : 
 
 1. He showed that it was not possible to go back 
 without the knowledge of Cyrus. 2. One pretended to 
 be eager with all possible speed to proceed to Greece. 
 3. Let us choose other commanders, if Clearchus does 
 not desire to lead us back. 4. A certain one urges 
 them to go to Cjrus and ask him for boats, that they 
 may sail away. 5. Clearchus said that he w^ould 
 obey the man whom they might choose. 6. He pro- 
 posed that they should send men to preoccupy the' 
 heights, in order that Cyrus might not get possession 
 before them. 
 
 810. A Plan to treat with Cyrus is proposed. It is accepted, 
 
 • and the Greeks agree to go on. 
 
 Review 172, 182, 225, 239, 249, 385, 581, 687, 690, 
 715, 723, 1, 2, 3; 724, 768, 1, 2, «; 778, 787, 1, 2; 
 808. 
 
 16. Mera tovtov aX\o9 avecTTT), imSeLKvyf; fjuev Tr)V 
 evTjOeiav rov tol TrXota alreiv /ceXevo^'TO?/ axnrep TTokiv 
 TOV (TTokoV KvpOV TTOLOVfiePOV,^ eTTtSct/fW? 8e W9 €V7)0e<; 
 eur)^ rjyefjiova alT€iv^ irapa tovtov^ w^ Xv/xatz^o/xe^a Trjv 
 TTpa^Lv. el 8e kol tw rjyepiopL^ TTLCTTevcrofjiev^ ov av 
 Kv/)09 8w,^ Tt KOiKvei /cat ra aKpa rjfuv ^ KeXeveiv Kvpov 
 TTpoKaTakafJi^dveLV ; 1 7. eyw jxep yap oKvoiiqv av €19 
 ra irXoia ifx/SaCveiv a rjfjbip Solt),^ fxrj r)fjia<; rat? Tpnj' 
 pecTL^ KaTaSvar) ' ^ (l)o/3oiiJir)v 8' av tm rjyejjLovL^ w" 80117 ^ 
 iirecrO ai, firj 7jfjia<; ayayrf' oOev ovk ecrrat i^eXOeiv' 
 ^ovkoip/iqv 8' av, aKOVTo<;^ d7na)v^^ Kvpov, XaOelv avTOV 
 direXOcov ' ^^ o ov hvvarov icTiv. 
 
READING LESSON. 359 
 
 1 8. *AXX' eyw (f>7]iJii ravTa fiev (j)kvapia<; etvai ' SoKei 
 8e fJiOL dvSpas ^ iX$6vTa<; ^^ Trpo? Kvpov, olTLPe<; ^^ iin' 
 TyjSeiOL, (Tvv KXedp^o) ipcordv eKeivov ri^^ ^ovXerai 
 rjixlv -^pyjaOai ' kol idv pikv rj Trpd^is rj ^ TTapaTrXrjcrLa 
 oiairep ^* koX irpocrOev expyjro toI's ^€vol<;, eireaOai /cat 
 rjfxdf;, KOL fxrj KaKiov^ elpat tcov npoadev tovto)^ 
 crvvava^dvToyv'^ 19. edv Se pieit^cov rj 7rpd^L<; Trj<; 
 TTpocrOev^^ (f>aivr)Tai^ /cat iirLirovcoTepa /cat eiriKiv- 
 vvoTepa, agcovv rj TreiaavTa 7)ixa<; ayeiv rj Treio-uevra 
 7rpo<; (fjikiav ac^teVat * ^ ovrco yap /cat eTrofiepoL ^' av 
 ^ikoi avTa> ^ Kcd TrpoOvjjLOi eTroLfxeOa /cat aTTtorre? ^^ 
 acrc^aXw? ap dTTioLjiev ' on h^ av tt/oo? raura Xeyry,^ 
 aiTayyeikai oevpo r}fJia<; o aKov(ravTa<; 7rpo<; ravra 
 jSovXeveaOaL. 
 
 20. ^ESofe raOra, /cat a^'8/)a9 eXojjievoi crvv KXedp)(^(p 
 TTefiTrovcTLv 6l '^pcoTcov Kvpov ra ho^avTa^ rrj cTTpaTia} 
 6 8^ direKpivaro^ on d/couot^ 'A^poKOfiav, l^Opov^ 
 di/8pa, CTTt T(p ^v^pdrrj ^ TTorajJi^ elvai,^ aTri^ovTo. 
 S(jtj8e/ca (TTaOfiovf; ^ ' Trpo? tovtov ovv e^r) ^ov\e- 
 o-Qai iXOelv ' ^ kolv fjbkv y^ e/cet, rrjp Slktjp i(f)r] ^prji[<eiv 
 eTTiOeivai^ avrco,^ rjp 8e (f)€vyrj,^ lyjLtet? e/cet 7r/)09 raura 
 ^ovXevaofieOa}^ 
 
 21. 'A/covcra^re? 8e ravra ol alpeTol dpayyeXXovcn 
 rot? (TTpaTKiyr ai^ ' ^ toI<; 8e viroijjLa jxep rjp on dyei ^ 
 TTpo<; ^acrtXea, ojLtw? 8e e8o/cet eirecrOai. TrpocraiTova-i 
 8e fJLLadop ' 6 8e Kvpo? vTrKT^peLTai rjfjLtoXiop Trdcrt 
 Swcreti^ ^ o5 ^^ TTporepop €(j)€pop,^ dprl Sa/oet/cou r/)ia 
 rjixiOapeiKa tov [xrjpo^ t<o CTTpancoTr) on oe eiri 
 /SacrtXea ayot^ ouSe evravOa '^Kovcrep ovSet? €P ye Tq 
 <j>apep<o. 
 
360 
 
 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK, 
 
 einjOeia, -ds, /^%, swipli- 
 city. 
 
 ev7J07}^y -69, stupid J foolish. 
 
 Xi//xatVo/xat, ruin, frustrate. 
 
 Kara-Bvoty sink, 
 
 iiri-TTovoSy 'OVy toilsome, la- 
 borious [ttovo^;, toif\. 
 
 iTTL-KUfSvvo^, -ovy dangcr- 
 ous. 
 
 ^Xvdpid, -ds, nonsense, hosh . 
 
 Sevpo, adv., here. 
 
 aTT-ej^w, he away from, dis- 
 tant. 
 
 alperosy -yj, -6v, chosen ; ot 
 
 alpeTOL, the deputies 
 
 \_alpe(o] . 
 vTT-oxpLd, -d?, suspicion 
 
 [opdcj]. 
 ofjicosy adv., nevertheless 
 
 [685]. 
 Trpocr-aiTeo), ask for more. 
 i^/i,i-dXto§, -d, -ov, half as 
 
 much again (^oko%, 498, 
 
 obs.^). 
 r^pji-SdpeiKov, halfdaric 
 
 (498, obs.3) 
 
 ^ Syntax? 
 
 ^ Construction ? Just as if Cyrus were marching home again, i. e. to 
 renounce the expedition, and would not longer need his boats as tenders 
 to his army. ^ Explain the mood. 
 
 * What construction might have been used ? 
 5 What dative ? 
 
 * Principal parts ? ' Explain the case. 
 
 * What other mood might have been used ? 
 9 Cf. 755, 4. 
 
 ^<* What does this participle express ? (755, 4.) 
 " Force ? is cf. 771, 10. 
 
 12 What verb must be supplied ? " Cf. 694, 10. 
 
 1^ Sc. irpd^eoas. Syntax ? 
 1^ I. e. by holding out higher pay ; cf. 795, 9. 
 " Force? Cf. 726, 1. 
 
 1* What is the subject ? What other infinitives have the same subject ? 
 What other infinitives have the same dependence ? 
 1® Could the infinitive have been used ? 
 ^^ What other mood might have been used ? 
 
 21 The gen. depends upon rjfiidkiou, implying comparison, for tovtov 
 (/iia^oC) ov. 
 
 22 T<B, each, the article here has the distributive force ? 
 
REVIEW. 361 
 
 8il. Translate : 
 
 1. Cyrus himself will need his boats. 2. Cyrus 
 will not give us. a guide, for in going back ^ we will 
 ruin his expedition. 3. If we should embark in the 
 boats that Cyrus might give, he would sink us with his 
 triremes. 4. And if we should follow the guide that 
 he might give, he would lead us to a place from which 
 it would not be possible to escape. 5. And I say it is 
 not possible to get off without the knowledge of Cyrus. 
 6. But it seems best to me that we should go and ask 
 Cyrus what use he intends to make of us. 7. If the 
 undertaking appears greater than the former one, let us 
 demand additional pay. 8. This seemed best, and the 
 deputies asked Cyrus the things which were agreed 
 upon by the army. 
 
 LESSON LXXII. 
 
 REVIEW OF THE ANABASIS, I. I. II. III. 
 
 8x2. I. Review the Anabasis I., 1, 1-6; 432, 433, 
 458, 640. 
 
 II. Translate: I., 1, 1-6. 
 
 1. Aa/oetov kol Ilapvo'aTiSo? yiyvovrai TraiSe? hvo, 
 7r/>€cr^uT€/)09 ixev ^ ApTa^€p^r)<;, vecorepos Se Kvpo<;. 
 'Ettci 8e r^crOevei Aapeio? koX VTramTeve Tekevrrjv rov 
 ^Lov, i/BovXero t<u TratSe dfjL(j)OT€pa) irapeivai. 
 
 2. 'O ixkv ovv 7rpecr^vT€po<; irapcov ervy^ai^e * YJupov 
 
362 THE beginner's greek book. 
 
 Se fieTaTrefjiTreTai diro ttJs oipxvs ^79 avTov oraTpciTTrjv 
 i7T0L'r)cre, kol crrpaTrjyoi/ 8e avrov oLTreSei^e TrdvTcxiv 
 ocroL €19 KaaTcoXov Trehiop dO poit^ovr ai. dva^aivei 
 ovv 6 Kv/309, Xa^wz/ TL(ra'a(f)epv7)v oj? (fyCXov, kol twv 
 'EWijvcov 8e ixoiT^ OTrXtra? dve^rj TpLaKoaLOvs, dp^ovTa 
 Se avTwv 'B^viav Jlappdaiov. 
 
 3. 'EttciSt) hk ireXevTiqae Aapeios kol KaTiarr) et? 
 TTjv ^aaikeiav ^ApTa^ep^r)^, Ti(T(Ta(^ipvr)^ hia^dWei 
 Tov Kvpov 7rpo9 Tov dSeX(f)ov, oj9 iTn/^ovXevoi avTco. 6 
 8e TreiOerai re Kai (TvXXapu^avei Kvpov a)<; diroKrevcop ' 
 7) Se p^yjTTjp i^aLTTjcraiJievrj avTov aTroTre/xTret rrdXiv iirl 
 T7)V dpxv^' 
 
 4. 'O 8' o59 dnrjXde KLvSvvevcra<; kol drt/xacr^€t9, ^ov- 
 Xeverat 07ra)9 fiyjirore €tl ecrrai inl tco aSeXc^w, dW, tJi/ 
 SvvrjTai, /BacnXevaei dvT eKeivov. na/3i;(Tart9 /xet* 817 17 
 p^rjTiqp vTrrjp-^e rw Kupo), <j>iXov(Ta avrov fxdXXov rj tov 
 fiaa-iXevovra 'Apra^ep^iqv. 
 
 5. '^Oo'TL<; 8' di^iKvelro twv irapd fiaauXeco^; 7rpo<; 
 avTov, TrdvTas ovtcj 8taTt^et9 dTreTrefJUTrero, (^are avrco 
 fxdXXov (f)LXov<; etvai 17 ^acnXel. kol tcov Trap' eavrut 
 8e fiap^dpcov iirep^eXelTO, oj? TroXefielv re LKavol elrjaav^ 
 Kai evvoLKCJf; ^^oiev avT(o. 
 
 6. T'Y)v 8e 'EXXi^z^tfci^^' SvvafjLLv yjOpou^ev (os fidXicTTa 
 iBvvaTO iTTLKpvTTTOfJLevo^;, o7r(W9 OTL dirapacTKevoTaTov 
 Xd/BoL ^acTiXea. coSe ovv iiroieLTO ttjv (rvXXoyrjv. 
 oTTocra^ cT)(€ (j)vXaKd<; iv tol^ TroXecrt, irapriyyeiXe rolq 
 (j)povpdp-)(^OL<? eKdcTOL^ Xafi/SdveLv dvSpa<; UeXoirov- 
 V7)(TL0V<5 OTL 7rXeL(rT0v^ KOL PeXTL(TT0v<;, 0)9 iTTi/SovXevov 
 ro9 Tio-cra(f>€pvov<; Tat9 TroXecri. kol yap rjcrav at 
 
 loiViKoX 7rdX€t9 TLa(Ta(f)€pvov<i to dp^alov, eV ^aatXecjs 
 
REVIEW. 363 
 
 SeSo/xeVai • rore 8' d(l>eL(TTy]Kecrap 77/309 Kvpov iracrcLL 
 TrXrjp MlXtJtov. 
 
 III. 1. The mother of Cyrus sent him back to his 
 province, because she loved him better than the ruling 
 Artaxerxes. 2. But when he had gone back, after he 
 had been in danger, he planned that he might be king 
 in place of his brother. 3. He was said so to dispose 
 of both the barbarians and the Greeks that they were 
 more friendly to him than to the king. 4. And he also 
 cared for the barbarians about himself that they might 
 be able to fight. 5. He collected his Grecian force 
 secretly that he might take the king unprepared. 6. He, 
 therefore, kept finding many pretexts for collecting his 
 army. 7. He ordered the commanders of the garrisons 
 which he had in the cities to enlist the best men pos- 
 sible, on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting 
 against the cities. 
 
 813. Review the different selections of the Anabasis, 
 and apply the principles of syntax given both by Greek 
 and Enghsh translations. For the selections see the 
 English index. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF THE SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 814. A Declension. — Feminmes. 
 
 i\ o-Tpa,Tia T| x^pcL 1^ 'Y€<|)\)pa 
 
 i\ TliiTJ i\ dp.a|a 
 
 
 arm;^ land bridge 
 
 honor 
 
 wagon 
 
 8, N.V. 
 
 (TTpaTLd X^P^ y€(f>vpa 
 
 rlfxrj 
 
 afxa^a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 cnpaTios x^P^^ y€cf>vpds 
 
 Tlflij? 
 
 dp,a^7ys 
 
 Dat. 
 
 (TTpaTia X^^P^ yecjivpa 
 
 'rlf^V 
 
 dp,diy 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (TTpaTidu ^(opdv yecfivpav 
 
 TLfJLrjV 
 
 afia^av 
 
 D. N.A.V. 
 
 , arrparLa X^P^ y€cf>vpd 
 
 rlfxa 
 
 dfidid 
 
 G.D. 
 
 OTpariaiv ;;(djpati/ yecftvpauv 
 
 TLfXaLV 
 
 dfid^aLV 
 
 P. N.V. 
 
 o-T/oartat ;(wpat yecfivpat 
 
 Tl/xat 
 
 a/xa^at 
 
 Gen. 
 
 (TTpaTLiiiv x^pwv y€<pvpii)v 
 
 ripLQiV 
 
 dfJia^oiv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 (TTpaTLaiq ^wpats y€<j>vpaLq 
 
 Tt/xats 
 
 dfxd^aL% 
 
 Ace. 
 
 o-rpaTtds x^P^^ y€<f>vpd^ 
 
 yi Declension. — Masculines. 
 
 Tl/Ltds 
 
 dfidi^ds 
 
 815. 
 
 
 
 
 6 v€dvCds 6 caTpdinis 
 
 6 O-TpaXKOTTlS 
 
 
 yoMwy man satrap 
 
 soldier 
 
 
 S. N. 
 
 vcdvtds (TaTpaTTrj^ 
 
 (TTpaTLtiiTrjg 
 
 G. 
 
 vedviov o-arpaTTov 
 
 (TTpaTLWTOV 
 
 D. 
 
 vedvta o-arpaTn; 
 
 (TTpaTLWTr^ 
 
 f 
 
 A. 
 
 vedvtav craTpaTnqv 
 
 (TTpaTLorr-qv 
 
 Y. 
 
 vedi/td crarpaTny 
 
 (TTpaTLwra 
 
 
 7). N.A.V. veavLd orarpaTrd 
 
 (TTpaTLiJiTd 
 
 
 G.D. vedviaLv aarpaTraiv 
 
 <TTpaTL(jnaiv 
 
 P, N.V. vedvLat o-arpaTrat 
 
 CTTpartcuTat 
 
 G. 
 
 vedi/tojv o-arpaTTwv 
 
 O-TpaTtWTOiV 
 
 D. 
 
 vcavtats (rarpaTrais 
 
 o-Tpartwrats 
 
 A. 
 
 vcdvtds (TaTpaird<i 
 
 (rTpaTL(i)Td<: 
 
366 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 8 1 6. Declension. 
 
 
 
 6 oTvos 
 
 6 dvepwTTOS 
 
 n686s 
 
 TO 8(DpOV 
 
 
 
 wine 
 
 man 
 
 way 
 
 9>St 
 
 s. 
 
 N. 
 
 oXvos 
 
 avOpum-o^ 
 
 68os 
 
 Swpov 
 
 
 G. 
 
 olvov 
 
 avOptxyirov 
 
 6801! 
 
 Biopov 
 
 
 D. 
 
 olvta 
 
 avOpomio 
 
 68a; 
 
 Swpio 
 
 
 A. 
 
 oXvov 
 
 avOpiHTTOV 
 
 6801/ 
 
 Swpov 
 
 
 V. 
 
 oXv€ 
 
 dvOpuiTre 
 
 68e 
 
 Bwpov 
 
 D. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 OLVtl) 
 
 dvOpwTTio 
 
 68w 
 
 Hwpo) 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 olvOLV 
 
 dvOpttiTTOLV 
 
 68oti/ 
 
 S(i)potv 
 
 P. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 oXvOL 
 
 dvOpCOTTOL 
 
 68ot 
 
 Swpa 
 
 
 G. 
 
 olviiiV 
 
 dvupMTroiV 
 
 68(01/ 
 
 8(x)p(i)V 
 
 
 D. 
 
 olvoi'i 
 
 dvOp<jiiroL<i 
 
 68019 
 
 Swpots 
 
 
 A. 
 
 olvovs 
 
 dvOp(j)7rov<s 
 
 680VS 
 
 8ojpa 
 
 817. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 
 
 
 
 SiiXos 
 
 
 
 a|ios 
 
 
 
 
 
 clea?' 
 
 
 
 worthy 
 
 
 s. 
 
 N. 
 
 brjkos 
 
 SrjXrj 
 
 SrjXov 
 
 dito. 
 
 dtia 
 
 d^LOV 
 
 
 G. 
 
 hiqXov 
 
 hrjXrjs 
 
 817X01; 
 
 diiov 
 
 dlc'ds 
 
 d$LOV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 hrjXta 
 
 SrjXy 
 
 OrjXu) 
 
 d^io) 
 
 ^ik 
 
 diiio 
 
 
 A. 
 
 hrjXov ' 
 
 Si^Xrjv 
 
 BrjXov 
 
 diiov 
 
 diidv 
 
 d^LOV 
 
 
 V. 
 
 ^Xf. 
 
 S^Xr) 
 
 ^TJXov 
 
 diic 
 
 d^ia. 
 
 diiov 
 
 D. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 hrjXw 
 
 ^rjXa 
 
 B-qXu) 
 
 d^io) 
 
 diid 
 
 d$L(a 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 hrjXow 
 
 Si^XaLV 
 
 St^Xolv 
 
 d^iOLV 
 
 d^taw 
 
 d^LOL] 
 
 P. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 hrjXoi 
 
 SyjXai 
 
 S^Xa 
 
 diioi 
 
 diiai 
 
 dita 
 
 
 G. 
 
 8ryAa)V 
 
 BrjXwv 
 
 SyjXwv 
 
 d^iuiv 
 
 d^ioiv 
 
 d^twv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 8>yAois 
 
 8ryA.ats 
 
 SyXoL^ 
 
 d$Loi<s 
 
 d^iaiq 
 
 d$tOL<i 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ^r}Xov<: 
 
 SryAd? 
 
 SrjXa 
 
 d$tov<s 
 
 d^id<i 
 
 diia 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 367 
 
 8l8. Contract Nouns of the Vowel Declension, 
 
 
 
 11 |JLVd. 
 
 r\yi\(yed) 
 
 6 voiis 
 
 
 
 mina 
 
 earth 
 
 mind 
 
 s. 
 
 N. 
 
 fjivdd 
 
 fJLva 
 
 -fy 
 
 v6o% 
 
 vovs 
 
 
 G. 
 
 fjLvaas 
 
 /xvas 
 
 y^s 
 
 vdov 
 
 VQV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 [jivda 
 
 ixva 
 
 y» 
 
 vdi^ 
 
 vo) 
 
 
 A. 
 
 fivaav 
 
 fjivav 
 
 y^v 
 
 voov 
 
 voxv 
 
 
 Y. 
 
 fJLvdai 
 
 fxva 
 
 VI 
 
 voe 
 
 vov 
 
 B. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 fivaa 
 
 ixva 
 
 
 vow 
 
 Via 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 fjLvdaiv 
 
 jxvaLV 
 
 
 vooiv 
 
 VOLV 
 
 P. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 fJLvdai 
 
 /XVOL 
 
 
 vdoi 
 
 VOL 
 
 
 G. 
 
 fxvaoiv 
 
 jlVUiV 
 
 
 VOfsiV 
 
 vwv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 fjLvdaL<s 
 
 fivai'; 
 
 
 voots 
 
 VOtS 
 
 
 A. 
 
 fjivdas 
 
 /xi/as 
 
 
 voovs 
 
 VOVS 
 
 819. Contract Adjectives of the Vowel Declension, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 
 
 XpvcroOs 
 
 
 
 
 
 golden 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 ;(|0U(r€O5 
 
 ^va-oxk 
 
 yjiVdka. 
 
 XpV(T7} 
 
 Xpv(T€ov ;)^v(rovv 
 
 •)(OV(T€OV 
 
 -^vcrov 
 
 Xfjv(T€a<s 
 
 XPvo-r}'^ 
 
 Xpvcreov ;(pi}o-ov 
 
 XpV(T€<a 
 
 ;^i}o-(3 
 
 Xpva-ia 
 
 Xpva-fi 
 
 Xpva-ew XP^^^ 
 
 Xpvcreov 
 
 )(pV(TOVV 
 
 )(pv<redv 
 Dual. 
 
 Xpva-^v 
 
 XpyfTiov ^(/avo-ovv 
 
 )(^pV(T€OJ 
 
 Xpvcru) 
 
 Xpvcrid 
 
 Xpva-d 
 
 Xpvcreo) XP^^^ 
 
 ypva-iotv 
 
 )(pV(TOLV 
 
 Xpva-iaLV 
 Plural. 
 
 Xpvoratv 
 
 Xpvcr^OLV XP^<^OLV 
 
 )(fJV(T€OL 
 
 Xpva-OL 
 
 Xpva-eai 
 
 Xpva-at 
 
 Xpv(T€a XP^^^ 
 
 -^pvcriijiv 
 
 Xpva-Siv 
 
 ypvcrioiv 
 
 Xpvorwv 
 
 Xpvaritxiv p^pt'o-wi/ 
 
 Xpva-ioLS 
 
 Xpva-oi^ 
 
 Xpvo-€aL<; 
 
 XpvaaL<; 
 
 Xp^<j(.oi<; XP^^OLS 
 
 )(pv(xiov<s )(pv(rov<s 
 
 Xpvdid^ 
 
 XpvcoiS 
 
 Xpvo-ea p(/)€-o-a 
 
368 APPENDIX. 
 
 €iivo\)S 
 
 
 
 welld 
 
 isposed 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 evvovs evvovv 
 
 
 evvw 
 
 cvi/oi evvoa 
 
 G. 
 
 €VVOV 
 
 
 evvoLV 
 
 evviov 
 
 D. 
 
 €VV(0 
 
 
 evvoiv 
 
 evvoi<s 
 
 A. 
 
 evvovv evvovv 
 
 
 cww 
 
 evvovi evvoa 
 
 820. The Article, Adjective, demonstrative, and 'Rel- 
 ative Pronouns, 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 6 
 
 V 
 
 TO 
 
 aVT09 
 
 avrrj 
 
 avTo 
 
 G. 
 
 TOV 
 
 T^S 
 
 TOV 
 
 avTov 
 
 avTrj^ 
 
 avTOV 
 
 D. 
 
 TW 
 
 -^v 
 
 T(3 
 
 avTM 
 
 avTfi 
 
 avTio 
 
 A. 
 
 rov 
 
 TYIV 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TO 
 
 avTov 
 
 avrrjv 
 Dual. 
 
 avTO 
 
 N.A. 
 
 Toi 
 
 TW 
 
 TW 
 
 avTw 
 
 avra 
 
 avTO) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Tolv 
 
 Tolv 
 
 TOtI/ 
 
 avTolv 
 
 aVTOLV 
 
 avTolv 
 
 Pi URAL. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 oi 
 
 a^ 
 
 TCt 
 
 aVTOL 
 
 avTai 
 
 avrd 
 
 G. 
 
 TWV 
 
 TWV 
 
 TWV 
 
 avToiV 
 
 avTu)v 
 
 avrCov 
 
 D. 
 
 TOtS 
 
 Tats 
 
 TOtS 
 
 avTot? 
 
 auTOt? 
 
 avTOts 
 
 A. 
 
 TOVS 
 
 TOS 
 
 rd 
 
 avTOvs 
 
 avras 
 
 airra 
 

 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 0VT09 
 
 avrrj 
 
 toi5to 
 
 G. 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 ravrrjs 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 D. 
 
 TOVTOJ 
 
 TaVTTf 
 
 TOVTCU 
 
 A. 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 ravTTjv 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 369 
 
 N.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TOVTft) TOVTW TOVTO) 
 
 TOVTOLV TOVTOIV TOVTOLV 
 
 Plueal. 
 
 OVTOt aVTttt TaVTtt 
 
 TOVTWV TOVTCOV TOVTOiV 
 
 Tovrous TavTttts totJtois 
 
 TOVTOVS TttVTds TttVTa 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 oSc 
 
 ^Sc 
 
 ToSc 
 
 TOvSe 
 
 T^O-Sc 
 
 TOvSc 
 
 TwSc 
 
 ryhe 
 
 TwSc 
 
 TOvSc 
 
 TT^i/Se 
 Dual, 
 
 ToSc 
 
 TciSc 
 
 T(o8e 
 
 TwSc 
 
 TOiySc 
 
 TotvSc 
 
 ToZvhz 
 
 Plural. 
 
 atSc TttSc 
 
 TwvSe TwvSc 
 
 oiSc 
 
 TtOl/Sc 
 
 Toio^Sc Tttto-Se Toto-Sc 
 Tovo-Sc TttCrSc TttSc 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 eKctvo? 
 
 eKCLvrj 
 
 iK€LVO 
 
 €K€tVoV 
 
 iK€lV7J9 
 
 CKCtVoV 
 
 €K€tVa) 
 
 iK€ivri 
 
 €K€LVW 
 
 cKCtvqv 
 
 iK€LV7]V 
 
 €K€tVO 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 . 
 
 59 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 o{; 
 
 ^ 
 
 oO 
 
 
 9 
 
 V 
 
 » 
 
 <? 
 
 
 riv 
 
 o 
 
 CKCtVO) 
 
 Dual. 
 kKUvta 
 
 Plural. 
 
 €K€tV<l) 
 €K€lVoiV 
 
 otv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 «f 
 
 to 
 oXv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 CKClVOt 
 
 CK€tvat 
 
 cKctva 
 
 Ol 
 
 at 
 
 a 
 
 iKCLVOiV 
 
 €K€tVwV 
 
 cKeiVojv 
 
 u>v 
 
 S>v 
 
 ^1/ 
 
 €K€tV0l9 
 
 €K€lVat9 
 
 €K€tVotS 
 
 oh 
 
 ah 
 
 ots 
 
 €K€tV0V9 
 
 €K€tVds 
 
 €/C€tva 
 
 24 
 
 . o^s 
 
 as 
 
 or 
 
 a 
 
370 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 821. Consonant Declension. — Variations in the Sin- 
 
 pilar. 
 
 
 6 T]'Y€|i(aV 
 
 6 \Lr\v 6 8aCp>v 
 
 ilXapis 
 
 r\ cXttCs 
 
 
 (lyye^ov-) 
 
 (fJi'rjv-) (Saifxov-) 
 
 (xaptT-) 
 
 (cAttiS-) 
 
 
 guide 
 
 month divinity 
 
 grace 
 
 hope 
 
 8, N. 
 
 riy€jjLU)v 
 
 ^yv haipniiv 
 
 Xdpts 
 
 IXttls 
 
 G. 
 
 rjycfjiovog 
 
 fJLTJVOS SaLfXOVOS 
 
 Xa/otTOS 
 
 eA^riSos 
 
 P. 
 
 riycfiovL 
 
 fl7]vl SaiJXOVL 
 
 XaptTi 
 
 ^AmSt 
 
 A. 
 
 rjye/MOva 
 
 firjva Bcufxova 
 
 Xaptv 
 
 cATTtSa 
 
 V. 
 
 rjyefxwv 
 
 ixiqv BoLfxov 
 
 X'^P'^ 
 
 IXttl 
 
 D. N.A.V. 
 
 rjycfiove 
 
 fxrjve Saifiove 
 
 XapLT€ 
 
 iXTTiSe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 rjyefjiovoLV 
 
 fji-qvoLv SatfiovoLV ;(apiToti/ 
 
 cAmSoti/ 
 
 P. N.V. 
 
 ■^y€ix6v€<; 
 
 fl7Jv€<S BaLfXOVi^ 
 
 Xaptrcs 
 
 cATTtSes 
 
 G. 
 
 . T^yc/xovwv 
 
 fX7)vC)V SaLflOVOiV 
 
 ' x^P"'^"' 
 
 cAttiSwv 
 
 D. 
 
 rjyeiioa-i 
 
 fvqa-i haifxocri 
 
 Xopto-t 
 
 iXTTLO-L 
 
 A. 
 
 Yjyeixovas 
 
 lirjva? 8at/xovas 
 
 Xa.pi'Tas 
 
 iXmBa<s 
 
 
 6 apxcov 
 
 r\x^^9 1] TpiTipiis ^ (sc. vavs) 
 
 
 (apxov-) 
 
 (x«p-) ( 
 
 [rpirjpes-) 
 
 
 
 commander 
 
 hand 
 
 trireme 
 
 
 S. N. 
 
 apxoiv 
 
 X^'P 
 
 rptrjp-q^ 
 
 
 G. 
 
 OLfiXOVTOq 
 
 X«/)os 
 
 Tpirjpov^ (rpujpco?) 
 
 I>. 
 
 apxpvTi 
 
 X€ipL 
 
 Tpi>7P« (^pt>ip") 
 
 A. 
 
 apXOVTU 
 
 Xclpa 
 
 Tpt>^p77 (rpn/jpea) 
 
 V. 
 
 apxoiv 
 
 X«P 
 
 TpLtjpiS 
 
 
 D. N.A. 
 
 apxovT€ 
 
 Xelpe 
 
 rptripet (rptijpcc) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 apXOVTOLV ^(6^011/ 
 
 rpL-qpoiv (rpirjpioiv) 
 
 P. N.V. 
 
 apxovTcq 
 
 XeTpc? 
 
 Tpiiqpu^ (Tpirip€€^ 
 
 G. 
 
 apxovTdiv 
 
 X€ipC>v 
 
 TpLTjpoiv (rptrypcwv) 
 
 P. 
 
 . apxov(TL 
 
 Xepcrt 
 
 Tptrjpeo-t 
 
 
 A. 
 
 apxovra? 
 
 X^rpas 
 
 TpLT^peL? (rpLT^peas) 
 
 ' Has recessive accent in the genitive dual and plural. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 371 
 
 822. Participles, — (o Verbs, 
 
 XVWV (\V0VT-) 
 
 loosing 
 Singular. 
 N.V. Xvbiv Xvov(Ta Xvov 
 G. AvovTos \vov<Trj<i Xvovro^ 
 
 D. XvovTL Xvovcrri Xvovri 
 
 A. Xvovra Xvovdav Xvov 
 
 Dual. 
 N.A.V. Xvovr€ Xvovcra Xvovre. 
 G.D. XvovTOLV Xvov(raiv Xvovtolv 
 
 Plural. 
 N.V. A.voi^€s Xi;ovo"at Xvovra 
 G. XvovTdiV ^vova-ixiv Avoi/twv 
 
 D. XvovcTi Xvovtrats 'Xvovcri 
 
 A. Arovras Xvovtrds Avovra 
 
 Xvo-as (Xvo-aia-) 
 
 having loosed 
 Singular. 
 
 AvcravTOS Avo-aoTys Xvctovto^s 
 
 XvcravTL Xvaao-y Xva-avri 
 
 Xvcravra Xvcaxrav Xvaav 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Xv(TavT€ Xv(ra(rd Xva-avre 
 
 XvadvTOiv Xvaaa-aiv Xv(rdvTOii 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Xv(ravT€<s Xvcrdo-aL Avcrai/ra 
 
 XvcrdvTOiv Xvadcrwv Xv(rdvT(ar 
 
 XvadcTL XvaaaraLs Xvadcri 
 
 XvaavTas Xvadads XvcravTa 
 
 
 XcXvKcas (AcAvKOT-) 
 
 
 
 having loosed 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N.V. 
 
 AeAuKws 
 
 XcXvKvta 
 
 XeXvKoq 
 
 G. 
 
 AcAvKOTOS 
 
 XcXvKVLd<s 
 
 AcAvKOTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 XeXvKOTL 
 
 XeXvKVLa 
 
 XeXvKOTt. 
 
 A. 
 
 XeXvKOTa 
 
 XcXvKvtav 
 Dual. 
 
 XeXvKOi 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 XeXvKore 
 
 XcXvKvid 
 
 XeXvKore 
 
 G.D. 
 
 XeXvKOTOLV 
 
 XeXvKviaiv 
 
 XeXvKOTOlV 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N.V. 
 
 AcAvKores 
 
 XcXvKv7aL 
 
 XeXvKora 
 
 G. 
 
 XeXvKOTKOV 
 
 XeXvKvuiiV 
 
 XfXvKOTfOV 
 
 D. 
 
 XeXvKoa-L 
 
 XeXvKVLais 
 
 XeXvKoa-L 
 
 A. 
 
 At-AvKoras 
 
 AcAv/cvtas 
 
 AcAvKora 
 
372 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 Tljliov (rifia-ovT-) 
 
 
 honoring 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 tI/awv Tt/two-a Tl/XWl/ 
 
 G. 
 
 TLflWVTOS TlfJLOJ(rr}S rlflWVTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 TLfXWVTL Tl/JiMa-r) TtjMO)VTL 
 
 A. 
 
 rlfiwvTa rlfJiwaav rl/xiov 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 TijotwvTe rlix(ji<Td TifxCyvTe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TlfxwvTOLV TLixwaraiv rlfX(i)VTOLV 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 TlfiwvTeq Tt/i-wo-at rifxC)VTa 
 
 G. 
 
 TlfJLWVTOiV TlfX0i(TCOV Tl/XtOVTWV 
 
 D. 
 
 rlixoio-L TLfKoa-aiq Tlfiwa-L 
 
 A. 
 
 TL/JLUtVTaS TLflWad? TlfJiWVTa 
 
 TTOIWV (ttoic-ovt-) 
 
 Singular. 
 
 TTOIWV TTOLOVCra TTOLOVV 
 
 TTOIOWTOS TrOLOVCYjS TTOtOWTOS 
 
 TTOLOVVTL TTOlOVCTrj TTOlOVVTi 
 
 TTOLOVVTa TTOLOXXraV TTOLOVV 
 
 Dual. 
 TTOLOvvre Trotovcrd Trotowre 
 
 TTOLOVVTOLV TTOtOVCTatV TTOtOWTOtiJ 
 
 Plural. 
 TToiovvres Trotovo-at Trotowra 
 
 TTOtOWTWV TTOtOVCrtOV TTOtOWTWl/ 
 
 7roioT)a"t TTotovo-ai? Trotovcrt 
 
 TTOtOWTttS TTOlOVO-ds TTOtOVJ'Ta 
 
 823. Fartici;ples. — [ll Verbs, 
 
 
 
 OSV (oi/T 
 
 -) 
 
 SlSoiJS (8t8ovT 
 
 -) 
 
 
 
 being 
 
 
 
 giving 
 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N.V. 
 
 wv 
 
 ovo-a 
 
 5v 
 
 hihov^ 
 
 SiSovcra 
 
 8t8ov 
 
 G. 
 
 OI/TOS 
 
 ovot;? 
 
 ovTog 
 
 StSwTOS 
 
 ^lhoV(T7}S 
 
 8t8oi/Tos 
 
 D. 
 
 OVTl 
 
 ovo-t; 
 
 OVTl 
 
 8l8oi/Tt 
 
 8t8ovo-T7 
 
 8t8oi'Tt 
 
 A. 
 
 ovTa 
 
 ovcrav 
 Dual. 
 
 6v 
 
 8t8oVTtt 
 
 8i8oi)o-av 
 Dual. 
 
 8i8dv 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 6vT€ 
 
 ova-d 
 
 6vT€ 
 
 8t8dj'T€ 
 
 8t8oro-d 
 
 hl^6vT€ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 OVTOIV 
 
 ova-aLv 
 Plural. 
 
 OVTOIV 
 
 8t8wTOtV 
 
 8t8oucraiv 
 Plural. 
 
 ^ihoVTOlV 
 
 N.V. 
 
 vvres 
 
 ova-ai 
 
 ovra 
 
 8t8oVT€S 
 
 8t8ovo-at 
 
 St8di/Ta 
 
 G. 
 
 6vro>v 
 
 ovtrwv 
 
 OVTOiV 
 
 81801'Ttov 
 
 8t8oi;o-t(jv 
 
 8i8d^'Ta)i' 
 
 D. 
 
 overt 
 
 ovcrats 
 
 oval 
 
 8i8ovcrt 
 
 8t8ovo"ai9 
 
 8t8o{)<Tt 
 
 A. 
 
 ovTa<; 
 
 ovcrds 
 
 ovTa 
 
 8iSoi/Tas 
 
 St8oi;o-ds 
 
 8t8di'Ta 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 37a 
 
 l<rras (to-ravT-) 
 erecting 
 Singular. 
 N.V. ttrra? icTTao'a torav 
 G. to-ravTOs lo-rdo-rys tcTTai^ros 
 
 D. {(TTavTL icTTdcry Icttolvtl • 
 
 A. ia-TOLVTa la-Taa-av Icttolv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. tOTCtVTC i(TTd(Td l(TTOLVT€ 
 
 G.D. tcrravTOtv lo-racrati/ la-TavTOLv 
 
 SciKVVS (8€tKia;i/T-) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 tcrraKTCs LaraaraL urravra 
 l(ndvT(jiv LcrraxTOiV icrravrtiiv 
 l(TTdcn to-Tdcrai9 IcrTdcn 
 tcrravTas tcrracrd? IcrroLVTa 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 h€LKVV<S 
 
 SeLKvva-a BetKvvv 
 
 SeiKVVVTOS 
 
 BeLKvvar]^ BecKvvvTos 
 
 SUKVVVTL 
 
 BeLKvvcn} BeiKvvvTL 
 
 BcLKVVVTa 
 
 B€LKVV(raV bcLKVVV 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 SeLKvvvre 
 
 ScLKvva-d SeLKvvvTe 
 
 BaKvvvTOLv SeiKvvaaiv BeLKVvvTotv 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 BcLKVVVTe^ 
 
 SiiKvvaaL BeiKvvvra 
 
 S€LKVVVT<J)V 
 
 SeiKVVaiOV BcLKVVVTiOV 
 
 B€LKVV(TL 
 
 BeiKvvcraLS BetKvva-L 
 
 SetKvwras 
 
 SctKvvcrds BcLKvvvTa 
 
 824. Adjectives of the Consonant or Consonant and 
 A Declensions. 
 
 €K<OV {kKOvr-) 
 
 XapiClS (xaptcvT-) 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N.V. 
 
 CKWV 
 
 €Kova-a 
 
 CKOV 
 
 XO-pLCL^ ^apUcTO-a 
 
 XapUv 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 CKQVTO? 
 €/COVTt 
 
 cKOvcrr) 
 
 CKOVTOS 
 
 Ikovtl 
 
 XapUvTOS X'^pl€(T(Ty]^ 
 
 yapUvTL )(apLi(T(Trj 
 
 XapUvTog 
 XapicvTL 
 
 A. 
 
 CKOVTtt 
 
 iKOva-av 
 Dual. 
 
 eKov 
 
 ■)(apUvTa \apUcrcTav 
 Dual. 
 
 Xapcev 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 CKOJ/T6 
 
 cKovcrd 
 
 C/COVT€ 
 
 Xaptevre ^apLea-o-d 
 
 XapL€VT€ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Ikovtoiv 
 
 €Kov(raLV 
 Plural. 
 
 ' €k6vT01V 
 
 XO-pt^.vroLV xs^pif-cra-aLV 
 Plural. 
 
 X(ipL€vroiv 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D 
 A. 
 
 l/COVTCS 
 
 Ikovctl 
 c/covra? 
 
 €KOVO-at 
 
 cKovcrCiv 
 iKova-ats 
 €Kovads 
 
 CKovra 
 
 CKOVTtOV 
 
 iKOVCTL 
 
 CKOVTtt 
 
 XOipL€VT€<s )(apU(rcraL xP^pCevra 
 XapiivTWv xapL€a-CTOiV x'^pLivTtav 
 XpipUcTL ;(a/3tccro-ats xapU(TL 
 XCipL€vra<; ;j(apteo-o-ds ;(aptci/Ta 
 
374 
 
 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 
 
 iraS (jravT 
 
 -) 
 
 
 €ll6ai|JLa)V {ivBaLfMOv-) 
 
 
 
 all 
 
 
 
 fortunate 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 
 
 Tra? 
 
 irdora 
 
 Trdv 
 
 
 ivBaifiwv e^Sat/xov 
 
 G. 
 
 TravTO^ 
 
 TrdcTT^S 
 
 Traj/Tos 
 
 
 €v8aLfXOVO<i 
 
 D. 
 
 TVaVTl 
 
 Traarj 
 
 TravTC 
 
 
 ^vSaLfXOVL 
 
 A. 
 
 Trdvra 
 
 Traxrav 
 
 Trdv 
 
 
 evSaifxova evSaifxov 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 evBaijxov 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 €v8aLfXOl^€ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 evvaiixovoLV 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 TTCtVTCS 
 
 Trda-at 
 
 TTOLVTa 
 
 
 ev8aLfxov€<s ivhaifxova 
 
 G. 
 
 TravTiov 
 
 Trdcrwv 
 
 TrdvTtnv 
 
 
 evSaL/xovwv 
 
 D. 
 
 iraa-L 
 
 TTacrats 
 
 Trdori 
 
 
 €vBaifJioai 
 
 A. 
 
 TrdvTa<s 
 
 Trao-d? 
 
 Trai/ra 
 
 
 ivSaLfMovas €vSaifiova 
 
 
 
 •iiSiis (-nBv. 
 
 ■) 
 
 
 fJL€C1^(0V (fJL€L^OV-) 
 
 
 
 sweet 
 
 
 
 greater 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 
 
 ^8i5s 
 
 TjSeia 
 
 ■Y)^V 
 
 /ACi^cov jxei^ov 
 
 G. 
 
 ^Seos 
 
 ^8€tas 
 
 ^Uos 
 
 
 /Aet^ovos 
 
 D. 
 
 ^Sei (^Set) "^Scia 
 
 yfUi(yjUi) 
 
 
 fiction 
 
 A. 
 
 'fjSvv 
 
 T^Seiav 
 
 y)^v 
 
 fiei^ova, fxei^ui fxct^ov 
 
 V. 
 
 ^8v' 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ■Y}hv 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V, 
 
 . rj8€i(rjM€) rjScLd 
 
 rjSel (i^Sec) 
 
 
 jxcL^ove 
 
 G.D. 
 
 rj8eoLV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 r)SeoLv 
 
 
 IXuCflVOLV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 rjhcts {rjB 
 
 €cs) rjBcLai 
 
 rjoia 
 
 /X€L^OV€S, fX€L^OV<i /JLCL^OVa, fXU^Oi 
 
 G. 
 
 rjSiuyv 
 
 TjScLWV 
 
 r]S€(DV 
 
 
 lXCit,6vOiV 
 
 B. 
 
 TjSeaL 
 
 rjSeiais 
 
 rjSia-L 
 
 
 /JLiL^Oa-L 
 
 A. 
 
 ^Scts 
 
 rjSeid^ 
 
 rjBia 
 
 fiei^ovas, fiii^ovs fiu^ova, fiei^u) 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 375 
 
 PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS. 
 825. Present System o/Xvo), loose. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 
 r S. 1 
 
 XvOtf 
 
 eXvov 
 
 Xvofiai 
 
 iXvOflTJV 
 
 2 
 
 Xuets 
 
 eXves 
 
 Xiei 
 
 ^X^ov 
 
 6 3 
 
 Xdet 
 
 eXve 
 
 Xverai 
 
 4Xv€TO 
 
 '^ D- 2 
 
 Xveroi 
 
 > eXverov 
 
 XvcaBov ^XvfaSov 
 
 •^ 3 
 
 Xvcro* 
 
 ' iXveTTjv 
 
 XveaBov <Xvi(r6r]v 
 
 ^ P. 1 
 
 \vOIX€U €\vOfl€V 
 
 Xv6fi€6 
 
 a fXvofieBa 
 
 2 
 ^ . 3 
 
 Xuere 
 
 iXvere 
 
 Xveadt 
 
 dXvfade 
 
 Xvouo-t eXiJoi/ 
 
 "KvOVTOl ^XVOVTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 f S. 1 
 2 
 
 
 Xvw 
 
 
 IXvafiai 
 
 
 Xvr]S 
 
 
 ^VT] 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 
 Xtri 
 
 
 }\.VT]T(n 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 Xvt]TOV 
 
 
 ^vri^Oov 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 XvTJTOV 
 
 ' 
 
 >.vr}(r6op 
 
 -^ P. 1 
 
 T 2 
 
 
 Xva)H€P 
 
 
 ^vonfieda 
 
 
 Xvrjre 
 
 
 T^vrja-de 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 Xvaxrt 
 
 
 Tivannm 
 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 
 Xvocfii 
 
 
 XvoiixTjv 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 Xvois 
 
 
 'Xvoto 
 
 03 3 
 
 
 Xioi 
 
 
 7<VOLTO 
 
 •^ D. 2 
 
 
 XVOITOP 
 
 
 \6oicr6o9 
 
 t 3 
 
 
 XvOtTIJV 
 
 
 T^voicrOrjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 
 Xvoifiev 
 
 
 XvoifieOa 
 
 2 
 
 
 XvOlT€ 
 
 
 XvoKxde 
 
 3 
 
 
 Xvoiev 
 
 
 ^VOIVTO 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 
 XOf 
 
 
 Xi5w 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 
 \V€T(0 
 
 
 Xvea-Bu 
 
 ■^ D. 2 
 
 
 Xverov 
 
 
 T^vetrdov 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 XveTcov 
 
 
 "XveaBcow 
 
 S P. 2 
 
 
 X^ere 
 
 
 -XieaBe 
 
 T 3 
 
 
 Xvovrav 
 
 
 "kveaBav 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 \i)€CU 
 
 
 XveaBai 
 
 1 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Xvo)!', -ouo-a, -ov 
 
 Xvofi^vos, -7, -ov 
 
376 
 
 APPEI^DIX. 
 
 826. Future System 
 
 of \vtA. 
 
 827. First Aorist System 
 of Avw. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 
 ¥uture. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 r 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Xi(Ta> 
 
 Xixrofiat 
 
 tXitra 
 
 f\v(rdfiT)v 
 
 2 
 
 Xwrf49 
 
 Ua€L 
 
 eXvaas 
 
 iXvcra 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 Xvcret 
 
 Xvaerat 
 
 eXvo-f 
 
 eXvaaro 
 
 *"E 
 
 D. a 
 
 XvO-fTOI* 
 
 \v<t€(tBov 
 
 fXiaarov 
 
 iXvaraadov 
 
 .2 
 
 rc3 
 
 3 
 
 Xvaerov 
 
 XvaeaOov 
 
 (XvaaTriv 
 
 iXvadadrjv 
 
 
 p. 1 
 
 \v(TOllfU 
 
 XvaofifBa 
 
 eXTuaafieu 
 
 fXvadfieda 
 
 . 
 
 s 
 
 XvafTC 
 
 Xuo-eo-^6 
 
 eXvcrare 
 
 fXvaao-de 
 
 3 
 
 Xvaovai 
 
 Xvaovrai 
 
 eXiicrav 
 
 tXvaavTo 
 
 r 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 Xiaco 
 
 Xvaoifun 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 Xva-rjs 
 
 Xvaj) 
 
 a3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Xvarj 
 
 'hvarjTat 
 
 "1 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 
 XvarjTOV 
 
 Xwrrja-Oop 
 
 S 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 XvajjTov 
 
 Xva-rja-dov 
 
 c^ 
 
 P. 1 
 
 
 
 Xvaafxev 
 
 Xvadiixeda 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 XvaijTf 
 
 Xvarjade 
 
 l 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 XvamtTi 
 
 Xvo-atmat 
 
 ■ 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Xvaotfxt 
 
 Xva-otftrjv 
 
 Xv(ratfit 
 
 Xva-aifxrjv 
 
 
 2 
 
 XvaoLs 
 
 Xvaoio 
 
 Xv(T(tas,Xv(raii 
 
 Xv(rato 
 
 2^ 
 
 3 
 
 XvtTOI. 
 
 XvaoiTo 
 
 Xv(rft€, Xwrai 
 
 XvcraiTO 
 
 __> 
 
 D. 2 
 
 XtaaiTov 
 
 \vaoia6ov 
 
 XwratTOV 
 
 XvaataBov 
 
 'B* 
 
 3 
 
 XvaoiTrjv 
 
 \vaoL(Tdr]v 
 
 XviTairrfV 
 
 Xvaaiadrjv 
 
 
 i 
 
 F. 1 
 
 Xuaot/Mfi* 
 
 XvaoifxeBa 
 
 Xvaaifiev 
 
 XvcratfieBa 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xuaoire 
 
 Xvaoiade 
 
 Xv(raiT€ 
 
 XvaaKrBe 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 Xiaoiev 
 
 XvaoiVTQ 
 
 Xvactav,Xvaat€v 
 
 Xva-aivTO 
 
 r 
 
 S. 2 
 
 
 
 Xva-ov 
 
 Xvarai 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Xva-arco 
 
 XvadtrOto 
 
 '■^ 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 
 XwraTov 
 
 XvcracrOov 
 
 ft 
 
 a. 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Xv(T&ra>v 
 
 XxxrdaBwv 
 
 1 
 
 P. 2 
 
 
 
 XvaoTf 
 
 XvaaaOe 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 XvadvTOiv 
 
 Xvo'da-dcDV 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Xva-eip 
 
 XvaeaOat 
 
 Xva-at 
 
 XvaaaOai 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Xvcrcoj*, -ovcaj 
 
 Xvaofjifvos, -rj, 
 
 Xvaas, -traaa, 
 
 Xvo-a/ifws, -ly, 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 377 
 
 
 
 828. 
 
 First Perfect System 
 of Xuw. 
 
 Active. 
 
 829. Perfect Middle Si/s- 
 tem of Xvta. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 First Perf. Pirst Plupf. 
 
 Perfect. Pluperfect. 
 
 • 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XeXv/ca 
 
 iXiXvKT), -(IP 
 
 XiXvfiai iXeXvfirjp 
 
 2 
 
 TieXvKos eXeXvKTjs, -fis 
 
 XcXvaai iXeXvao • 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 XeXuKe 
 
 eXeXvKd 
 
 XeXvTui iXeXvTO 
 
 '"i 
 
 D. 2 
 
 XeXuKaroi/ eXeXufceiroj/ 
 
 XeXvadov iXeXvaOov 
 
 r3 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvAcaroi/ eXeXvKeirrjv 
 
 XeXvadop fXfXvaBrjp 
 
 1 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XeXvKafiev eXeXvKci^fv 
 
 XeXvfieOa eXfXvfifOa 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXvKQTc iXfXvKeiTe 
 
 XeXvade eXeXvarde 
 
 3 
 
 \e\vKaai iXeXvKcaau 
 
 XeXvprai iXeXvirro 
 
 
 
 
 First Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 r 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 XeXvKCi} 
 
 XeXvfiiPos (-T), -op) S> 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 XeXvKjjs 
 
 h 
 
 •ri 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKTj 
 
 s 
 
 •^ 
 
 a 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 XeXvKIJTOV 
 
 XeXv/ieVo) (-a, -(o) rJTov 
 
 113 
 
 3 
 
 
 XfXvKTfTOV 
 
 ^TOP 
 
 :3 
 
 C/3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 
 XeXvKconfV 
 
 XfXvfiepoL (j-ai, -a) 2>fi€P 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 XeXvKTjTe 
 
 ^re 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKOiai 
 
 2>(ri 
 
 - 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 XcXvKOlfJLt 
 
 XfXvfiepos {-r), ■ op) etrjp 
 
 2 
 
 
 XeXvKois 
 
 firjs 
 
 (U 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKoi 
 
 /^rj 
 
 •I 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 XeXvKOtrov 
 
 XfXv/MeVo) (-a, -a?) elrop or (Itjtop 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKOlTTJP 
 
 " flTTjP flrjTTJP 
 
 O 
 
 P. 1 
 
 
 XeXvKoifjiev 
 
 XcXv/ievot (-at, -a) elfx^p f'lrjfifp 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 XeXvKoire 
 
 " cIt€ flrire 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKoiep 
 
 " fhp fXrjaap 
 
 r 
 
 S. 2 
 
 
 XiXvKe 
 
 XfXvao 
 
 ai 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 
 XcXvKerm 
 
 XeXvaOo) 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 XfXvKerop 
 
 XeXvadop 
 
 P. 
 
 3 
 
 
 XeXvKercop 
 
 XeXvadojp 
 
 s 
 
 P. 2 
 
 
 XcXvKfTf 
 
 XeXvcrBe 
 
 t 
 
 3 
 
 \eXvK 
 
 fTioaav or XeXvKovrtop 
 
 XeXvaOdP 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 XeXvK€Pai 
 
 XiXvaOai 
 
 Participle. 
 
 XeXvKas, -Kvla, -kqs 
 
 XfXv^epos, -T}, -OP 
 
378 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 830. 
 
 Ferf. Mid. Sifstem 
 
 831. First Passive System 
 
 
 
 ofXtxo (Fut Perf.). 
 
 ofkim. 
 
 
 
 
 Middle aud Passive. Passive. 
 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 
 ' S. 1 
 
 \e\vaoyMi, 
 
 iXv6r)V 
 
 XvOfja-ofiai 
 
 
 • 2 
 
 \(\v(rei 
 
 iXvdrjs 
 
 XvOrj(T€l 
 
 < 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvcrerai 
 
 iXvOr) 
 
 Xvdrj(TeTai 
 
 '■+■ 
 a 
 
 I D. 2 
 
 \e\vaea6ov 
 
 iXvOrjTOV 
 
 Xv6rjcr€(r6op 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 XeXvaea-dov 
 
 tXvdrjTTjV 
 
 XpOrjo-eaSop 
 
 1 
 
 3 P. 1 
 
 XeXva-oneda 
 
 eXvdrjuep 
 
 XvBrjaofieda 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXvaeaOe 
 
 iXvOrjTe 
 
 Xvffrjo-ea-Oe 
 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvo-oPTM 
 
 iXvBrjdav 
 
 XvOtjaovTcu 
 
 
 r s. 1 
 2 
 
 
 XvdSi 
 
 
 
 
 Xvdfjs 
 
 
 
 ? 3 
 
 
 Xvdfj 
 
 
 t 
 
 I D. 2 
 
 
 XvO^TOP 
 
 
 • 1- 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 XvdfJTOP 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I P. 1 
 
 
 Xv6a)fxep 
 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 Xvdrjre 
 
 
 
 
 XvdaxTi 
 
 
 
 ' S. 1 
 
 XeXvaoiixrjv 
 
 Xvdeirjp 
 
 Xv9r]aoifiT]p 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXvaoio 
 
 XvOeiTji 
 
 Xvdrjaoio 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvaoiTo 
 
 XvOetr) 
 
 Xv6r](TOLTO 
 
 (3 
 
 i D. 2 
 
 XeXvaoia-dov 
 
 Xvdelrov or Xv6eifjTop 
 
 Xv6j)(JOi(TdoP 
 
 + 
 
 I 3 
 
 XeXvaoiaOrju 
 
 XvdeiTTJP XvdfirjTTJP 
 
 XvdrjcroiaBrjp 
 
 C 
 
 > P. 1 
 
 XeXvaoi^eda 
 
 Xvddfiep XvOeirjixep 
 
 Xvdria-oifieBa 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXva-oiaOe 
 
 XvOelre XvOeLrjTe 
 
 XvOrja-oiaOe 
 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvaoivTo 
 
 XvOeiep Xv6drj(Tap 
 
 XvOrjaoiPTo 
 
 .( 
 
 ' S. 2 
 
 
 XverjTi 
 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 
 
 XvOfiToa 
 
 
 1 
 
 D. 2 
 
 
 XvdrjTOP 
 
 
 a 
 
 . 3 
 
 
 XvdfjTap 
 
 
 1— 
 
 P. 2 
 
 
 Xv6r)T€ 
 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 XvOeuTcop 
 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 \€Xv(T€(r6ai 
 
 Xvdiivai 
 
 XvOfja-ecrOai 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 XeXva-ofxcpoi, -77, 
 -ov 
 
 Xvdeii, -€io-a, eV 
 
 XvOrja-ofxepos, -fjt 
 
 -OP 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 379 
 
 832. Future System of Liquid 
 Verbs : dyye'AAoj (ay- 
 ycA-), announce. 
 
 S. 
 
 S. 
 
 ■^ D. 
 
 S. 
 
 Active. 
 
 dy-yeXco 
 
 dyyeXeiff 
 
 dyyeXei 
 
 dyyeXeiroi' 
 
 3 dyyeX 61701/ 
 
 1 dyyeXoO/Lifi' 
 
 2 dyyeXfire 
 
 3 dyyeXovcrt 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 dyyeXoi/it, 
 
 dyyeXoiJji' 
 
 2 dyyeXotS", 
 
 ayyiKolr]^ 
 
 3 dyyeXoi, 
 
 dyyeXoi'/; 
 
 2 dyyfXoIroi' 
 
 3 dyycXoiTT/y 
 
 1 dyyeXoT/x€i/ 
 
 2 dyyfXoire 
 
 3 dyyeXoTfi' 
 
 f S. 2 
 ^ 3 
 
 -§ D. 2 
 
 I P. 2 
 I 3 
 
 Infill. dyyeXfti/ 
 
 Partic. dyyfXo)!/, 
 
 -o{)(ra, -ovv 
 
 Middle. 
 dyyeXov/xat 
 ayyikel, ayyikrj 
 dyyeXeirat 
 dyyeXfiCT^of 
 dyyfXelo-^oi/ 
 ayyiKovfjLe6a 
 ayyikclcrde 
 ayyekovvTM 
 
 dyyiKoiiirjv 
 
 dyyeXoIo 
 
 dyyeXoTro 
 
 dyyeKoladou 
 
 dyyeXoiadrjv 
 
 dyyeXoifieda 
 
 dyyeXolaSc 
 
 dyyckdivTO 
 
 dyyiKflcrBai 
 dyyikovjxivoSf 
 
 833. First 
 Liquid 
 (dyycX- 
 
 Active. 
 ^yyetXa 
 fjyycCKas 
 rfyyeiXe 
 TjyyfiXarov 
 TjyyeiKaTTju 
 riyyeiXafxev 
 rjyydXaTi 
 rjyycCKav 
 
 dyyftXo) 
 
 dyyetXi/ff 
 
 dyyf/Xj; 
 
 dyy^ikqTOV 
 
 dyyeiXrjTov 
 
 dyyeiXcofxeu 
 
 dyyeiXj/re 
 
 dyyeiXcofft 
 
 Jorist System of 
 Verbs : dyyeXAw 
 ■), announce. 
 
 Middle. 
 ^yyetXa/Ajyv 
 r/yy€iXa> 
 ^yyetXaro 
 rj-yyeiXaa-Oov 
 TjyyeiXdadrjp 
 TjyyeiXdixeda 
 rjyyciXacrOe 
 TjyyeiXapTO 
 
 dyyeiXco^ai 
 
 dyyfiXiy 
 
 dyyfiXijTai 
 
 dyyfiXrjarOov 
 
 dyyfiX-qcrQov 
 
 dyyciXoiyifOa 
 
 dyyelXrja-Oe 
 
 dyyfiXavrai 
 
 dyyeiXaifii dyyeiXaifirfV 
 
 -ri, -ov 
 
 dyyeiXais, 
 
 dyyciXeias 
 dyyeiXai, 
 
 dyyeiXeie 
 dyyeiXaiTov 
 dyyeiXaiTrju 
 dyyeiXaifiev 
 dyyeiXuLTe 
 dyyfiXaiev, 
 dyyfiXetcw 
 
 &yy€i\ov 
 
 dyyeiXdra 
 
 dyyeiXaTov 
 
 dyyeiXdrayv 
 
 dyyeiXare 
 
 dyyfiXdvTav 
 
 dyyeiXat 
 
 dyyeiXoff, 
 -da-a, -av 
 
 dyyeiXaio 
 
 dyyeiXaiTO 
 
 dyy^CXaiaOov 
 
 dyy(iXaL(r0r)V 
 
 dyyeiXaifieBa 
 
 dyyeiXaiade 
 
 dyyeiXaivTO 
 
 ayyeiXai 
 
 dyyeiXdaBo) 
 
 dyyiiXaaOov 
 
 dyyeiXdcrBoiv 
 
 dyy€iXa(rde 
 
 dyyeiXdcrBav 
 
 dyyeiXacrdai 
 
 dyy€iXdfJLevo5t 
 -r), -ov 
 
380 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 83 4 . Seco nd Aorist System 
 of \€LTro) (AtTT-), leave. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 835. Second Perfect Si/stem 
 ofXuTTdi (AtTT-), leave. 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Second Perf. Second Plup. 
 
 f"; 
 
 eXmov 
 
 eXiTTOfJii^u 
 
 XeXoiTra iXfXoiTrrj, -eiv 
 
 TKnres 
 
 eXiTTov 
 
 XiXomag iXfXoiTrqs, -ets 
 
 i 3 
 
 eXiTTf 
 
 eXlneTo 
 
 XeXoiTTf eXfXoiTrei 
 
 •| D. 2 
 
 iXiTreTov 
 
 eXineaBov 
 
 XeXoinarov iXfXoineTov 
 
 ;§ 3 
 
 i\m€Tr]v 
 
 iXnreadrjv 
 
 XeXcLrraTov eXeXonrfTrjv 
 
 ^ P. 1 
 
 iXiTrofJLfv 
 
 iXtTTOficda 
 
 XeXoliraixeu iXtXoiTreiJLfv 
 
 I I 
 
 eXiTrere 
 
 iXineo-Oe 
 
 XeXolnare eXeXolnere 
 
 eXiTTOv 
 
 iXlTTOVTO 
 
 XeXoiTrdai iXeXoineaap 
 
 
 
 
 Second Perfect. 
 
 ['■I 
 
 XlTTO) 
 
 Xinayfiai 
 
 XeXoiVo) 
 
 "kiTTIJS 
 
 Xiirrj 
 
 XeXoiTTrjs 
 
 > 3 
 
 \i7rr} 
 
 XiinjTai 
 
 XeXoiTTTj 
 
 1 D. 2 
 
 \l7rr]Tov 
 
 XiTTr^aOov 
 
 XeXoinrjTov 
 
 1 P-1 
 
 Viivr^TOv 
 
 XiTTTja-Bov 
 
 XeXoinrjrov 
 
 Xiiroifxcv 
 
 XiTTOifxeda 
 
 XeXoiTrafjLfv 
 
 '^ 3 
 
 \inr]Te 
 
 Xinija-de 
 
 XeXoiTTrjTe 
 
 XlTTOXTl 
 
 \ina)VTai 
 
 XeXoiTrtofTi 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 XlTTOlfll 
 
 Xiiroifirjv 
 
 XeXoiTrot/it 
 
 2 
 
 XlTTOlP 
 
 Xiiroio 
 
 XeXotTTois 
 
 « 3 
 
 X ITTOL 
 
 XlTTOlTO 
 
 XeXoiTTOl 
 
 •5 D. 2 
 
 \liroiTOV 
 
 XlTTOlO-BoV 
 
 XeXoinoiTOP 
 
 4 3 
 
 Xnrolnju 
 
 Xittoio-Btjv 
 
 XeXoLTTOlTTjV 
 
 p. 1 
 
 XlTTOllXfV 
 
 XtTTOLfxeBa 
 
 XeXotTToi/ifi/ 
 
 2 
 
 XtVotTf 
 
 XiTTOiaOe 
 
 XeXoiVoiTf 
 
 I 3 
 
 Xinoiep 
 
 XinoivTo 
 
 XfXoinoicv 
 
 r s. 2 
 
 XtTTf 
 
 XlTTOV 
 
 [Xe'XotTre 
 
 gi 3 
 
 XtTTfTO) 
 
 XiTTfo-day 
 
 XeXoineTca 
 
 *^ D. 2 
 
 XlTTfTOI/ 
 
 XineaBov 
 
 XeXoiTTCTOV 
 
 1. 3 
 
 XiTrero)!/ 
 
 XiTTicrBaiV 
 
 XeXoinerau 
 
 S P. 2 
 
 XtTTfTf 
 
 XiTreaBe 
 
 XeXoiTrere 
 
 L 3 
 
 Xtn'OKTO)!/ 
 
 Xinea-Bmu 
 
 XeXotnoirroiv] 
 
 Infin. 
 
 XtTreii* 
 
 Xmea-Bai 
 
 XeXoiTTevai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 XiTToyv, ovaa, 
 
 XlTTOfxeVOS, 
 
 XeXonras, -via, 
 
 
 •6v 
 
 -T], -ov 
 
 -6s 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 381 
 
 
 836. Perf. Mid. Sys. of Pure 
 Verbs with added a-: kcAcvcd 
 
 837. Perf. Mid. Sys, of 
 Labial Mute Verbs : 
 
 
 
 (kcAcv), command. 
 
 XctVo) (AtTT-), leave. 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 , 2 
 3 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 KCKiXfvaixai 
 
 KCKeXevaat 
 
 KeKfXevcTTai 
 
 KeKcXevadov 
 
 KfKeXevaBov 
 
 KfKeXfvaneBa 
 
 KeiceXevo-de 
 
 K€KeXev(rfi€Voi 
 
 fKeKeXeva-firjv 
 
 fKeKeXevao 
 
 eKCKeXeva-TO 
 
 eKeneXcvcrdop 
 
 eKeKfXevaOrjv 
 
 €K€K€XeV<TfXf6a 
 
 €K€K€X€V(t6€ 
 
 K€KfXfV(TfXeVOl 
 
 XeXeifxiMat 
 
 XeXeiyjrai 
 
 XeXenrrai 
 
 X€X€icf)Bov 
 
 XeXci(p6ov 
 
 XeXeifififBa 
 
 XeXeicpBe 
 
 XeXeififisvoi 
 
 eXfXeififirjv 
 iXeXeiyIro 
 
 iXfXcilTTO 
 iX€X(l(l>0OV 
 
 eXeXfiipetjv 
 eXcXeififxeda 
 iXeXeKpOe 
 XeXeififxhoi 
 
 
 
 €l(ri 
 
 ^(Tau 
 
 uai 
 
 rja-av 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 K€KfXevcrfi€voi 2i, etc. 
 KeKeXevafxevo) rJTov, etc. 
 KCKeXeva-fievoi S)fX€V, etc 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 XeXeifXfieuos &, etc 
 XfXdfifiepco rjTOV, etc. 
 XeXet/ix/iei'ot Ziyifv, etc. 
 
 K^KeXcvayxvos f'lTjv, etc. 
 
 K€KeX€V(rfi,€VCt} €LTOV, CtC. 
 
 KfKeXeva-fxevoi eififp, etc. 
 
 XeXei^jxeuos eirjv, etc 
 XeXeififxevo) eirou, etc 
 XeXeiufxevoi €i/X6i/, etc. 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 K€KiXev(ro 
 
 XeXfi-v/ro 
 
 t 3 
 
 KeKeXevado) 
 
 XeXeiijidco 
 
 i D. 2 
 
 KeKeXevaBov 
 
 XeXci(f)dop 
 
 I 3 
 
 KeKeXevaOcdv 
 
 XeXeicfydtap 
 
 s P. 2 
 
 KfKeXevcrOe 
 
 XeXei0^6 
 
 I 3 
 
 KeKcXevaBoiv 
 
 X(X€l(f)da)P 
 
 Infin. 
 
 KfKeXevadai 
 
 XeXc^Bai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 KeKeXevcfievos, -t], -ov 
 
 XcXet/i/ifi/oy, -1], -ov 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 ndicative. 
 
 KCKiXfiKrofiai, etc 
 
 XeXeiyj/ofiai, etc 
 
 >ptative. 
 
 KfKiXcvaoifirjv, etc 
 
 . .XeXfiylroifiijp, etc 
 
 nfinitive. 
 
 KfKiXev(T€(T6ai 
 
 XeXelyj/caBaL 
 
 *articiple. 
 
 KeKfXevaofifvos, -rj, -op 
 
 XeX€i\l/6fi€Pos, -Tj, -o¥ 
 
382 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 838. Perfect Middle System 
 of Palatal Mute Verbs : 
 TdtTTO) (ray-), arrange. 
 
 839. Perfect Middle System 
 of Lingual Mute Verbs: 
 irudta (ttlO-), persuade. 
 
 O 
 I 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 
 rerayfiai 
 rera^ai 
 
 eTerdynrjit 
 
 CTCTa^O 
 
 TreneLO-ixai 
 ir€ireL(raL 
 
 €7r€7rei(Tiir]v 
 
 €7r€7T€l<TO 
 
 3 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 
 TeraKTai 
 
 reraxdou 
 
 TiTuxOov 
 
 Terdyixeda 
 
 TCTaxBe 
 
 eTeraKTO 
 
 ereraxdov 
 
 eT€TdxOr]v 
 
 ererdyufBa 
 
 ereraxOe 
 
 TreTTftcrrai 
 
 ireTreiadov 
 
 TreiTfLaOov 
 
 TTeireia^eda 
 
 neneiade 
 
 enenfiaro 
 eTTeneia-dou 
 fTrenfiaOrju 
 encTreiofifda 
 
 3 
 
 T€Tayfxevoi eicri 
 or TerdxaTai 
 
 rerayixevoi rjcrav 
 or irtTdxcLTo 
 
 TTeTTfLO-fieVOl 
 
 elai 
 
 Trenetafievoi 
 ■qaav 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 T€Tayn€vos &, etc. 
 TSTayfievco rjTOV, etc. 
 TCTayfievoi Sifiev, etc. 
 
 n(7rei(TH€vos 
 TreTreicr/MeVcD 
 
 TTfnCKTfJLeVOl 
 
 a, etc. 
 rJTOV, etc. 
 afxcp, etc. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 r s. 2 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 I 3 
 
 B P. 2 
 
 L 3 
 
 lufin. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 TfTayfxevos ftrjv, etc 
 T€Tayfxev(o cltov, etc. 
 rerayfievoi elfiev, etc. 
 
 Tera^o 
 
 T€Tdx0<o 
 
 T€TaxBov 
 
 Terdx^ciiV 
 
 Terax&c 
 
 TCTdxOav 
 
 rcTaxOai 
 
 TeTayfievos, -tj, -ov 
 
 TTfTTdO-fXiVOS ftr]P, etc. 
 
 Trene Lo-fievo) etroi/, etc. 
 TreTreio-fievoi eifiev, etc 
 
 TreTTft (TO 
 
 ireTreiaOco 
 
 iriircKTBov 
 
 TTfTreicrdayv 
 
 TieTreicrde 
 
 TTfTTUaBai 
 TreTTfia-ixevos, -rj, -ov 
 
 Indicative. 
 Optative. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 reTo^ofiai 
 
 rera^oifiijv 
 
 reTa^eaOai 
 
 T€Ta^6fX€U0S, -T], -OV 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 No Future Perfect. 
 
APPENDIX. 383 
 
 840. Perfect Middle System 841 . Perfect Middle System 
 
 of TAquid Verbs : of Liquid Verbs : 
 
 dyyeXXo) (dyycX-), announce, ^atVw (<^aj/-), show. 
 
 Middle and Passive. Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 
 Perfect. Pluperfect. 
 
 Perfect. Pluperfect. 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 ^yyeX/iat f}yyeXfxr]V 
 rjyyeXa-ai ^yyeXao 
 rjyyiXraL ffyyeXro 
 rjyycXBov rjyyiXBov 
 rjyyeXBov rjyyeXBrjv 
 TjyyeXfifBa rjyyiX^eBa 
 rjyyikBe yyyeXBe 
 fjyyfXfievoi rjyyeXfjevoi 
 
 rrecfyaafjiat. enetpdafJLrjp 
 
 7r€<f>aPTai iir€(f)dpTo 
 7recf)apBop fjreipdvBop 
 7re<f)apBop (nf(pdvBr)P 
 iT€cf)d(rn€Ba en€(j)d(TH(Ba 
 necfiapBe errecjiavBe 
 Trecfiaafifpoi irecfiao-fievoi 
 
 
 
 €io-( ^aap 
 
 fiai ^crap 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 r 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 ^yycX^epos a, etc. 
 rjyyeXfiepo) tjtop, etc. 
 rjyyeXfi^poi afiep, etc 
 
 7r€(})a(TficP05 S), etc. 
 7r€(f)a<Tixepa) ^top, etc 
 7r€cl)a(rixipoi &fi€Uf etc. 
 
 r 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 ^yyeX/xevo? f tTyi/, etc. 
 rjyycXfxePco €itop, etc 
 fyyyeXfxePoi fifxtp, etc 
 
 7re</)ao-fiei/op firjv, etc 
 Trapaa-fiepoi citop, etc 
 nfCJyaafiepoi tlfievy etc 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 ^yyfXo-o 
 
 ^yyeX^oj 
 
 ^yyfX^oi' 
 
 ^yyfX^Q)!/ 
 
 rlyy€\B€ 
 
 r]yyeXB(op 
 
 Lacking. 
 ire(f)dpB(o 
 7re(f)apBop 
 Tr€(f)dpBa)V 
 7re(f)apB€ 
 7re(f)dvB(ov 
 
 Infin. 
 
 rjyyeXBai 
 
 TTfcfiduBai 
 
 Partic 
 
 ffyyeXfUPos, -?;, ov 
 
 ire(f)aa-iJL€POS, -7, -ov 
 
 
 
 
 No Future Perfect. 
 
 No Future Perfect. 
 
384 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 842. Second Passive System of ^aiVw (^av-), show. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 r s. 1 
 2 
 
 €(f)dvtjv 
 
 (f)avfj(rofiai 
 
 i<pdvrjs 
 
 (f)avr]aeL 
 
 6 3 
 
 €(f)dvr} 
 
 cf)apr]<TeTai 
 
 ■^ I>-2 
 
 e(l)dvr]Tov 
 
 (f)avria€a6op 
 
 1 3 
 
 €(f)aVTJTT]V 
 
 (f)avr)(T€(r6op 
 
 A T.1 
 
 €(f>dvr]fi€U 
 
 <}>avT)a6fie6a 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 ecf)dvr}r€ 
 
 <f)avrjUfad€ 
 
 €(f)din}(rav 
 
 <j)apT]a-oPTai 
 
 f S. 1 
 2 
 
 (f)av(o 
 
 
 <f>avfjs 
 
 .■■ 
 
 t 3 
 
 ipavsi 
 
 
 "1 I>-2 
 
 (fiavrJTOP , 
 
 
 .1 3 
 
 (jiav^Tov 
 
 
 1 ^-1 
 
 <f)avS}fi€v 
 
 
 "^ 2 
 3 
 
 ^avrJTe 
 
 
 (^avSxTL 
 
 
 r ^- ^ 
 2 
 
 <f)aVHT)V 
 
 <f>aprj(roifj.r)P 
 
 <pav€ii]s 
 
 (papf](roto 
 
 (paveiT) 
 
 <f)aP1](TOlTO 
 
 .§.D. 2 
 
 (jiavelrov or <l)av€iT}TOP 
 
 <Pavr]crota6op 
 
 % ^ 
 
 tpaueiTrjv (f)avei^Tqv 
 
 <j)apr](roi(r$r}P 
 
 9 P. 1 
 
 <j)av€7fiev (j)av€ir}ix€P 
 
 <f)avr}(TOLix€0a 
 
 2 
 
 (jjavclre (pavfLrjre 
 
 (pavrjaoia-de 
 
 L 3 
 
 (^ave^ev (jiaveirjaap 
 
 (jyaprja-otPTO 
 
 r s. 2 
 ^ 3 
 
 cjidvrjdi 
 
 
 <f)apr}T(o 
 
 
 2 D. 2 
 
 (j)dvr]TOP 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 <pavr)T(OP 
 
 
 ^ p. 2 
 
 ({)dv7)Te 
 
 
 I 3 
 
 (jiaP€VTa>p 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 * (fiaPYJpai 
 
 (ftap^a-eaBai 
 
 Pariic. 
 
 <f)ap€is, -ei(ra, -tp 
 
 (f)airr)(T6fjLfpos, -rj, -oP 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 385 
 
 843. Present System o/Tlfidio, honor. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 r s. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 (rTfidoi) 
 
 (rlixdeis) 
 
 (rTfidei) 
 
 Tl/XO) 
 
 rlfxa 
 
 (TijUaojLiai) 
 " (rifxdei, Tifidjj) 
 (rifideTai) 
 
 TlfiaTai 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (zLiideTOp) 
 (rlfideTOv) 
 
 Tlfxarov 
 
 TLjJ.dTOV 
 
 (Tlfid€ar9ov) 
 {Tifidca-dov) 
 
 rliddadov 
 rlfidaOov 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (rTlidofxev) 
 
 (rlfjidere^ 
 
 (rlfidova-L) 
 
 rlixay/jLep 
 Ti^dre 
 
 (rTixaojjLeOa) 
 
 (Tiixdea-de) 
 
 (rifidovTai) 
 
 TLfiayfjLfda 
 Tifxccvrai 
 
 -3 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (fTifiaov) 
 (irtfiafs) 
 (cTt/x.af) 
 
 erifids 
 eTifxa. 
 
 (^eTifidov) 
 (eVr/iaero) 
 
 €TllJ.O}fiT]V 
 fTlfJLO) 
 
 erifMaTo 
 
 D 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (cTifideTov) 
 (Jrlyiairr^v) 
 
 CTLfJidTOV 
 
 eTLfidTrfv 
 
 (eTLfidfadou) 
 (irlfJiaeaBrju) 
 
 €Ttnd.(r6ou 
 iTLfiaaOrjv 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (^eTifidoixev 
 (eVt/xdere) 
 (eVt/xaof) 
 
 €TlfxS)fl€V 
 
 erTixdre 
 
 (JrlixaoiJLfda) 
 
 (^Tlixdeade) 
 
 (jTljxdovTo) 
 
 €TiiJid(Tde 
 
 €Ttfia)VTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 - S. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (rTfidoi) 
 (TTfidrjs) 
 (Tl^idrj) 
 
 rTfxag 
 rTixa 
 
 (ri/iacD/iat) 
 
 (jTudrj) 
 
 (jlyidrjTai) 
 
 TlfiafJUll 
 
 rljjiaTai 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 IS* 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (rTnarjTov) 
 {rtfidrjTOv) 
 
 TL^drov 
 
 (TLfxdrja-dov) 
 (TlfxdT)<T6ov) 
 
 rX^daBov 
 rl^dcrBov 
 
 ^ p 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (TlfldiOflfv) 
 
 (TlixdrjTe) 
 (rindaxTi} 
 
 TLfl&IJLeV 
 
 rlixdre 
 
 25 
 
 {TLfiad)ixfda) 
 
 (rTfjidrja-Be) 
 
 {rlfidcovTai) 
 
 TinoDfxeOa 
 TTfxdcrOe 
 
 TljJlCOVTai 
 
386 
 
 APPENDIX, 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 
 -4-3 
 
 a, 
 
 o s. 1 
 
 2 
 
 D. 2 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Present Sydetn of rlfxam). — continued. 
 Active. 
 
 Present. 
 (r'yidoijxC) 
 
 (Ti/iaot) 
 
 {rifxdoiTov) 
 (rifiaoLTrjv) 
 
 (rTfjtdoiixeu) 
 
 (ri/idoiTe) 
 
 {Tifxdotev) 
 
 or 
 
 (jlyLaoLTjv) 
 {TifiaoiTjiy 
 (rlfiaoiT}) 
 
 {TtfUtOlTfTOu) 
 
 (rTfxaoirjTrju) 
 
 (rifiaoirjfifv) 
 
 (rTfiaoirfTe) 
 
 {rlixaoirja-av 
 
 TtfAWS 
 
 TtfiaTOV 
 TlfKpTTJV 
 
 TtfimfJiev 
 
 TlflCOTJU 
 TtlXtpTJS 
 
 [rlfiarfTou 
 TifimrjTTjv] 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 (rtfxaoinTjv) 
 
 (TLfxdoio) 
 
 (jLiidoiTo) 
 
 (jTudoKTBov) 
 (jl^ao'i(r6r)v) 
 
 (TTfxaoiixfBa) 
 
 (jlfxdotcrBi) 
 
 (jifxdoivTo) 
 
 Tifxafxrjv 
 
 r s. 2 
 k ^ 
 
 I D. 2 
 
 ^ p. 
 
 (jtfJiafTco^ 
 
 (TLfJideTOu) 
 
 (rlfiasTcou) 
 
 (r'udfTe) 
 (rlfjiaovTcov) 
 
 Tifia 
 rlfiaTM 
 
 rTfioTov 
 Tifxarav 
 
 rlixare 
 
 rTjXOiVTOiV 
 
 (r'udov) 
 (rtixaeo-Boi) 
 
 (rtjudfo-^ov) 
 {TLfxafO-Owv) 
 
 (rtixdeo-Be) 
 (jlfxaiaBuiv) 
 
 Tifxa} 
 TifidaBbJ 
 
 TifiaaBnu 
 Tiix&aBoou 
 
 Infin. 
 
 (rCfideip) 
 
 Tifxav 
 
 (rtfjidecrBai) TifiaaBai 
 
 Partic. ] F. 
 (N. 
 
 (tipimv) 
 
 tifiSiv 
 
 (rTfia&fx&tos^) 
 
 TipLCdHtVQf 
 
 (tifMdovffa) 
 
 Tificiaa 
 
 (TlfiOOfl&^tf) 
 
 Tl,fi.(Ofl€Vr) 
 
 (rindov) 
 
 Tlflibv 
 
 (rTfino^fuov) 
 
 TIfJidiflfVOV 
 
APPENMX. 
 
 as? 
 
 844. Present System ofirouia, do^ make. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 'S. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (jrouai) 
 
 (TTOtcVts) 
 
 (TTOieet) 
 
 TTOlS) 
 
 TTOlds 
 
 TTOtel 
 
 (nouec, TTOierj) 
 (rroUeTai) 
 
 til 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (TTOi/eroi') 
 (Troteeroi/) 
 
 Troielrov 
 TTOielrov 
 
 (noueadov) 
 (jrouiaOov) 
 
 noi€i(r6ov 
 
 TTOLflaOoV 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 [noiioiievy 
 
 TTOtetre 
 
 (TToifOfieOa) 
 
 TroLOVjjicOa 
 iroielaOe 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 (noieova-i) 
 
 TTOtOVO-t 
 
 (iroUoPTai) 
 
 noiovuTai 
 
 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 H 
 
 's. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (eTToUov) 
 (eVoiees) 
 (fVoi'ee) 
 
 €irOLOVU 
 
 enoieis 
 eiroiei 
 
 (fnouofiriv) 
 (enoifov) 
 
 eiroiovfirjv 
 erroiov 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (cVoteerov) 
 
 iiroifiTov 
 cTTOLeirrjv 
 
 (JnoueaOov) 
 QfToifeadrjv) 
 
 inoulaOov 
 enouiaOrju 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 
 inoiovfieu 
 
 (eVotfo/Lie^a) 
 (eVoteeo-^e) 
 
 €7roiovfie6a 
 
 
 , 
 
 3 
 
 (iiro'ieov) 
 
 inoiovv 
 
 (eVoteoKTo) 
 
 iiroiovvTO 
 
 Present 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 ' s. 
 
 1 
 
 (rroifo}) 
 
 TTOIO) 
 
 (noUoifiat) 
 
 TTOtW/iat 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 (7rOL€T)s) 
 
 iroifis 
 
 {noieij 
 
 TTOirj 
 
 
 3 
 
 (noier]) 
 
 TTOLTJ 
 
 (iroierjTai) 
 
 TioirJTai 
 
 1 ^' 
 
 2 
 
 (noLcrjTOv) 
 
 noirjTov 
 
 (jTour}(T6ov) 
 
 TToi^a-dov 
 
 
 3 
 
 (noi€T}TOv) 
 
 TTOlfjTOV 
 
 (noUrjadou) 
 
 TToirja-Bop 
 
 f P.. 
 
 1 
 
 (TrfttLcfitv) 
 
 voiafxev 
 
 - X^oitafif^a) 
 
 iroiui^LeBa 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 (noitriTf) 
 
 TTOl^Tt 
 
 (TTOitrjaOe) 
 
 TrmrftrBe 
 
 
 , 
 
 3 
 
 (noucoai) 
 
 TTOiaXTl 
 
 (TTOieoJi/rat) 
 
 noiwvrai 
 
388 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Present Sptem of-n-oiiw. 
 Active. 
 
 — continued. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pre> 
 
 sent. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 (TTOlioifll) 
 
 \jTOLo2fll 
 
 (TToieoiiJLrjv) 
 
 iroi.oiiJ.rjv 
 
 
 2 
 
 (TTOieois) 
 
 iroiols 
 
 {noLeoio) 
 
 noLoio 
 
 
 3 
 
 (nuieoi) 
 
 noLol] 
 
 (noUoiTo) 
 
 ttoioIto 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 (Troi.eoi.Tov) 
 
 ttoioItov 
 
 (ttoUoktOov) 
 
 7roioicr6ov 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (TTOieoiTrjv) 
 
 TTOioirrjv 
 
 (7rouoi(T$i]v) 
 
 noioiadrjv 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 (nOt€OlfJi€v) 
 
 (ttoicouc) 
 
 TTOlolflCV 
 
 TTOLolre 
 
 (nouoifxeda) 
 (TTOieoiade) 
 
 TroioifieSa 
 TTOLolade 
 
 
 3 
 
 (nuieoiev) iroioUv 
 
 (noieoivTo) 
 
 TTOlolvTO 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (TTOieoirjv) 
 (TToieoirjs) 
 (TToieoir)) 
 
 TToioirju 
 TTOioirjS 
 noioiT) 
 
 
 • 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (noicoiijTov) [TroioiTjTov 
 
 (irOlCOirjTTjv) TTOlOirjTTJu] 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 iirouo'ir^ficv) \_7roLoir)^€v 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 (noieoirjTe) 
 
 noioir]T€ 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 {TTOUoir](Tav) 
 
 TToioirjaav^ 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 (iroUe) 
 
 noUi 
 
 (TToteov) 
 
 ITOIOV 
 
 
 3 
 
 (jroi€eT(o) 
 
 TTOieiTO) 
 
 (noieeo-Oai) 
 
 Troieiada) 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 (noiefTov) 
 
 tvouItov 
 
 (noieeaOov) 
 
 noLela-dov 
 
 
 3 
 
 (iroiefTtov) 
 
 TTOKITCOV 
 
 (n0l€€(T6(0v) 
 
 noLeiadcov 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 
 (TTOieere) 
 
 TTOlUTe 
 
 (noueo-dc) 
 
 TToiflaBe 
 
 
 3 
 
 (jroicovTav) 
 
 TTOlOVPTOiP 
 
 (TTOiecadcov) 
 
 TTOiciadcov 
 
 (iToieetv) noielp 
 
 iroikecrOai 
 
 7TOi€ia6ai 
 
 r M. (jrroieav) Trotmv 
 Partic. < F. (Troieovcra) Troiovcra 
 
 V N. (TTOteOJ/) TTOIOVU 
 
 (iroieofifvos) TTOiovfievos 
 (TTOieofxevT}) TroiovfxevTi 
 
 (TTOlfOfXeuOv) TTOlOVfieVOU 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 389 
 
 845. Present System ofSrjXou), make clear. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (8i]X6a>) 8riXa> 
 (5?;Xdeiy) 8qXols 
 (S^Xdtt) brjXol 
 
 (8r]X6oixaL) 
 (fij^Xdei, 8r]X6r]) 
 (8riX6€Tai) 
 
 8rjXoviJiai 
 
 8r)Xoi 
 
 8rjXovTai 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 (drjXoeTOv) drjXovTov 
 (8r]X6€TOu) driXovTov 
 
 (8TjX6ea6ov) 
 (ST/Xdecr^oi/) 
 
 8r)Xov(r0ov 
 8rjXovo-6ov 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (^8r)X6ofi€v) 8T]XoVfl€V 
 (SfjXdfre) 8r)XovT€ 
 (PrjXoovai) 8T)Xovai 
 
 (8riXo6fX€ea) 
 
 (SjyXdeo-^e) 
 
 (^8rjX6ovTai^ 
 
 8r)XoviJ.(6a 
 
 8T]Xova-6€ 
 
 8r)XovvTai 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (f8f]Xoov) 
 
 (e8T]Xo€s) 
 (ea^^Xof) 
 
 €8f]X0VP 
 
 e8r)Xovs 
 e'SjjXov 
 
 D 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 (eSi/Xderoi/) 
 (€8i]XoeTTjv) 
 
 €8l]XoVTOP 
 
 eSrjXovTTjp 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 (efij^Xdo/iei/ 
 (efi/^Xdere) 
 (e8rjXoop) 
 
 e8rjXovn€P 
 
 €8r)X0VT€ 
 
 €8rjXovP 
 
 (eSrjXoofirjp) 
 
 (eSj;Xdov) 
 
 (eSj^Xdero) 
 
 (eSj/Xoftr^oc) 
 (^e8r]Xo€(xdr]py 
 
 (eSjyXod/xe^a) 
 
 (e8r]X6ea6e} 
 
 (eSi/Xdoi/ro) 
 
 €8rjXoviJ.r)p 
 
 f8T}Xov 
 
 e8TjXovTo 
 
 €8r]XovaBop 
 €8t}Xov(t6t)p 
 
 €8T]Xovix(da 
 
 e8r)Xova6€ 
 
 €8tjXovpto 
 
 r ^-^ 
 
 I 2 
 
 > 
 
 I D.2 
 
 -% 3 
 
 Present. 
 
 (S»;Xda)) 8TJXa 
 
 {8r}X6T)s) 8t]Xois 
 (8tjX6t]^ 8t]Xoi 
 
 (8r]X6r]TOp) 8rjXci)T0v 
 (8T]X6rjTOp) 8i]Xc!)TOP 
 
 (^8r}X6a)iJL€u) 8rjXa)fi€P 
 {8r]X6r}Te) 8T}Xa)T€ 
 (^8rjX6a>(Ti) 8r]Xco(Ti 
 
 Present. 
 
 (S7;Xd(»jLiai) 
 
 (8T]X6rj) 
 
 (^8T]X6r]Tai) 
 
 {8r)X6rjcr0op} 
 (^8T]X6r)(T6ov^ 
 
 (^8T]XoQ)ixe3a) 
 
 (8r]X6r](re€) 
 
 (8r)X6a>vTai) 
 
 ST^X&j/iat 
 
 8TJ\oi 
 
 8r]Xa)Tai 
 
 8rjXa>crdop 
 8r)X(i)(r6op 
 
 8T)Xa)fxeda 
 
 8r]Xa)<r6€ 
 
 8r]X(Ji)PTai 
 
390 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Present System ofBr)X6(jD — continued. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 
 I 
 O 
 
 S. 1 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Present. 
 
 (8r]\6oifu) [drjXoiiii 
 (dijXoois) dq'Kois 
 (SiyXoot) 8i;XoTj 
 
 {8t)\6oitov) br)\oiTov 
 
 {8T]\00lTr)v) drjXoLTTjV 
 
 (8i]\6oiiJi€v) dq\olfi€P 
 (drjXooiTe) drjXoire 
 (^dqXooiev) Sj^Xotfi/ 
 
 Present. 
 
 (8q\ooir)v) 
 (8r)\ooLrj5) 
 (S/^Xooij^) 
 
 (8r]\oo[r]Tov) 
 (drjXooifjrrjv) 
 
 (dr}\ooLr)fX€v) 
 
 (8rj\ooLr)Te) 
 
 (^dqXooiTjcrav) 
 
 drjXoirjp 
 drjXoirjs 
 drjXoirj 
 
 [^br)Xoir)TOU 
 drfKoiTjTTju^ 
 
 [8r)Xoir)nep 
 
 8r]Xoi1]T€ 
 
 drjXoLTjaavj^ 
 
 (BrjXooifirjp) 
 
 (^brfKooio) 
 
 (^brjXootTo) 
 
 {drjXooicrdov^ 
 (^rjXooia-drjp) 
 
 {drjXoo'ifxeda) 
 
 (^^rjXooiaSe) 
 
 (Pr)X6oiPTo} 
 
 8i]XoLfir)v 
 drjXolo 
 
 dljXolTO 
 
 drjXoiadop 
 SrjXolo'Brjv 
 
 drjXoifJifda 
 dr]XolpTO 
 
 S. 2 
 
 ^ P. 2 
 
 (Si^Xoc) 8rjXov 
 
 (Si^Xoerco) 8t]Xovt(0 
 
 (SiyXoeroi') drfXovTOP 
 {br]Xo€Ta>p) drjXovTcop 
 
 (SjyXdere) drjXoiiTe 
 {8rjXo6pTa>p) brjXovPToup 
 
 {hrjXoov) 
 {brjXoiaQui 
 
 (8r)X6((rdov) 
 (^drjXoea-dcap) 
 
 {drjXoea-de) 
 (^brjXoe aBcdp) 
 
 BrfKov 
 drjXovcrda) 
 
 drfXovadop 
 drjXovadojp 
 
 drjXovade 
 drjXovcrBmp 
 
 Infill. 
 
 r M. 
 
 Partic. 5 F. 
 C N. 
 
 {BrjXodp) drjXovp 
 
 (8r]X6(op) 8r)Xa>p 
 (8r)X6nv(Ta) dr)Xov(ra 
 (817X001/) 8t]Xovp 
 
 (drjXoeaOai) 8rjXov(T6ai 
 
 (8r)Xo6fj.evos) brjXovixfPOS 
 
 (^drjXoonevr)) drjXovfxevrj 
 
 (^BrjXodfjLCPOP^ brjXovfiCPOV 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 391 
 
 846. The Regular -/xt VerU. 
 
 SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Since the second aorist middle of la-njiii is lacking, irrpidfirjVf I bought, 
 is added. Since the second aorist active of deiKvvfu is lacking, edvv, 1 
 entered, is added. 
 
 Pres. - 
 
 Impf. 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 
 
 Active, 
 
 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Subj, 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infitt. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 liTTrffU 
 
 lata 
 
 laTalrjV 
 
 iO-T7 
 
 iaravai 
 
 i(TTas 
 
 didcofii 
 
 di8i> 
 
 dl8oiT}U 
 
 dl8ov 
 
 8i86vai 
 
 didovs 
 
 Tidrjui 
 
 TlOSi 
 
 Tideirjv 
 
 TlSfl 
 
 TLSevai 
 
 Ttdeis 
 
 deiKVVfxi 
 
 dtiKVvai 
 
 BeiicvvoifLi 
 
 d£iKl>V 
 
 deiKVvvai 
 
 beiKvvs 
 
 iaTT]V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 edidovv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eTiOrjv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 edciKVvv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'eanjv 
 
 <rT(a 
 
 <TTalr]p 
 
 <rTT]6i 
 
 KTTrjvai 
 
 <TT&S 
 
 {edoTOp) 
 
 fi« 
 
 hoirfp 
 
 dSs 
 
 SoVPM 
 
 hovs 
 
 (edfTOv) 
 
 es. 
 
 Seiijp 
 
 <9ej 
 
 Sflvai 
 
 e,k 
 
 J8vp 
 
 dva 
 
 ._ . 
 
 Bv0i 
 
 hvvm 
 
 d^ 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Middle and Passive- 
 
 7arap,at Icrrafiai laraiixrjv icrraiTo 7(Tra(T^at IcrTdfifPos 
 
 di8ofjLai 8i8«ojtAat SiSolijrjp Si8o&o 8i8o(rBai 8i86nevoi 
 
 TiOfpLai TiOwfxai Tidfifirjv ridecro TiOfadai TiBi^ifPOi 
 
 bfiKWfxai 8€iKvva>}iai. BeiKPvoiiJ.t]P deUvvtro btiKwaOai deiKVv/ievos 
 
 Impf. - 
 
 iaTafxrjp 
 €di8()fir)P 
 fTidefxriP 
 JdfiKVvfirjp 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 €7rpidiJit}y irploifxai 
 
 Trptaifirjp 
 
 irpiat 
 
 nplaaBat 
 
 7rpiap€Pos 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 edofXTjp dwfxat 
 
 8oipr]P 
 
 80V 
 
 doaSai 
 
 86p€POi 
 
 Mid. 
 
 (BefiTjp BcofJLUi 
 
 Biip,r]P 
 
 6qv 
 
 Seadat 
 
 6(fl€P0S 
 
392 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Verbs in /it. 
 
 847. Present System oftarrrjfxi (a-ra-), place, set. 
 
 ACTITE. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 r 8. 1 
 
 urrriiit 
 
 ICTTrjV 
 
 2 
 
 loTTJS 
 
 iarrjs 
 
 i s 
 
 iarrjac 
 
 ioTT} 
 
 -^ 1>. 2 
 
 "laraTov 
 
 icrraTov 
 
 ;§ 3 
 
 la-Taroy 
 
 ta-Tdrrji^ 
 
 .5 P. 1 
 
 la-rafxev 
 
 iarafxeu 
 
 2 
 
 1(TTaT€ 
 
 foTare 
 
 I a 
 
 iardai 
 
 iaraa-av 
 
 Present. 
 
 r SI 
 I 2 
 
 
 lorrei 
 
 
 iar^s 
 
 ^ S 
 
 
 laTTJ 
 
 1 I>*^ 
 
 
 ia-TrJTOU 
 
 -1 ' ^ 
 
 
 ia-TrJTOv 
 
 1 ^-^ 
 I 3 
 
 
 iaTa)iJL€v 
 
 
 IcTTcoaL 
 
 r S. 1 
 
 
 iarairjv 
 
 2 
 
 
 laTairjs 
 
 P ^ 
 
 
 icTTalr} 
 
 -5 D. ^ 
 
 laTOLTov or laTairjTov 
 
 ■1 ^ 
 
 i(rTaiTr)v ia-TatrjTrjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 ia-ToifJkeu icTTalrj^ev 
 
 2 
 
 loraire icrTcu.rfT€ 
 
 I $ 
 
 laralev icrTairjcrccv 
 
 f S. ^ 
 
 
 laTT} 
 
 ^^ 3 
 
 
 torraTto 
 
 1 D. 2: 
 
 
 icrraTov 
 
 1, 3; 
 
 
 'uTTaTODV 
 
 ^ P. ^ 
 
 
 tcrrarf 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 iaravrtav 
 
 lufin. 
 
 
 icTTavai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 iffTdy, -acra, -dv 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 tora/iai 
 
 laraaai 
 
 taTarai 
 
 IcTTacrdov 
 
 laraaOov 
 
 larafx^Ba 
 
 laTavrai 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fcTTdfiTjU 
 i(TTa(TO 
 
 icrraTo 
 
 IcrracrOov 
 
 ia-TdaBrjv 
 
 iardfieda 
 
 iaraaOe 
 
 icTTavTO 
 
 Present. 
 
 ia-Tji 
 IcTTrJTai 
 larrjadov 
 i(TT^(r0ou 
 
 larrjaOe 
 la-TaPTtxi 
 
 laraifiTjv 
 
 IcrToio 
 
 laralTo 
 
 laToia-Bov 
 
 IcrraiadTjp 
 
 laTaifieda 
 
 laraiade 
 
 lo-raivTO 
 
 taraao 
 
 iardcrday 
 
 IcrTaadov 
 
 [(TTdcrBoiv 
 
 Icrraade 
 
 ia-rdcrOav 
 
 XcrraaBai 
 
 tardfifuos, -t}, 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 393 
 
 848. Present System o/BlBwixl (So-), (/ive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 6tSa)/it eBidovv 
 
 8i8oixai €8i86fiT)v 
 
 
 2 
 
 dld(i)s edidovs 
 
 8i8o(TaL €8i8oao 
 
 
 3 
 
 di8a>(n edldov 
 
 8i8oTai (8i8oTO 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 St(^oroj/ edidoTou 
 
 8i8uo6ov e8l8oaBov 
 
 
 3 
 
 8180TOV (dldoTTJU 
 
 8l8o(t6ov €8i86(Tdr]v 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 8i8oiJ.€V ebidonev 
 
 fitSo/xe^a e8L86fX€da 
 
 
 2 
 
 8180T€ f8l8oT€ 
 
 8i8oae€ e8i8o(Te€ 
 
 
 3 
 
 di86d(ri edidoaav 
 
 8180VTO €8i8oVTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 S: 
 
 1 
 
 8i8S> 
 
 8i8Sifiai 
 
 
 2 
 
 diSoisr 
 
 818^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 8t8a 
 
 8i8coTai 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 8i8a}TOv 
 
 8i8a}a6ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 Sidayrov 
 
 8i86i)adov 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 8i8a)ii€u 
 
 818(1) fx( 6a 
 
 
 2 
 
 diSare 
 
 8i86^ade 
 
 
 3 
 
 Stfiebcrt 
 
 8i8a)VTai 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 didoiijv 
 
 8i8oifiijv 
 
 
 2 
 
 8i8oir)s 
 
 8t8oio 
 
 
 3 
 
 8i8oirf 
 
 StSoIro 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 81801TOV or 8i8oir]Tov 
 
 8i8o:(tBov 
 
 
 3 
 
 8i8otTr]v 8i8otrjTr)v 
 
 8i8oi(r6rjv 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 8l8o1n€U 8l8oiTJfi€U 
 
 8i8oifi(da 
 
 
 2 
 
 8l8o'iT€ 8l8oirjT€ 
 
 8L8ol(re€ 
 
 
 3 
 
 8i8aUv 8i8oLrja-av 
 
 8i86lvTo 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 8l8ov 
 
 8l8o(to 
 
 
 3 
 
 8186x0) 
 
 di86(r0co 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 8180TOU 
 
 8i8oa6ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 8i86ra)V 
 
 8i86cTBa>v 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 
 8I80TC 
 
 8i8oae€ 
 
 
 3 
 
 8i86vTaiP 
 
 8i86a6cov 
 
 lufin 
 
 I. 
 
 8i86uai 
 
 8i8oa6ai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 8180VS, -oCcra, -ov 
 
 8i86ix€vos, -1], -OP 
 
394 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 849. Present System ofriOrjixi {6€-),put, place. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 {'■ 
 
 1 
 
 TiOrjfit erldrjv 
 
 TldefXai €Tl6€fiT)V 
 
 2 
 
 ridrjs erideis 
 
 TideaaL irideao 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 Tidrjcri eriOei 
 
 rideTat iriBero 
 
 •| D. 
 
 2 
 
 TiOeTov iriOeTov 
 
 ridearQov iridcaOov 
 
 .^ 
 
 3 
 
 TlBeTOV eTldcTTjV 
 
 riOeaBov eriBeaBrju 
 
 I P- 
 
 1 
 
 rldefiev eTtSefiev 
 
 TiBefifOa CTiBefjieBa 
 
 . 
 
 2 
 
 TiOere erideTe 
 
 TiBcaBe €TiB€(tB€ 
 
 3 
 
 Tidedai irldecrav 
 
 TiBcPTcu iriQevTo 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ■ s. 
 
 1 
 
 ri65) 
 
 TiBa}fxai 
 
 2 
 
 Tl6fjS 
 
 TlOff 
 
 ai 
 
 3 
 
 TlOfl 
 
 TiB^rai 
 
 1 ^- 
 
 2 
 
 TLdrjTOV 
 
 TiBrj<rBov 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 TldrJTOU 
 
 riOrjoBop 
 
 ¥ P. 
 
 1 
 
 Tl6a)fJi€U 
 
 riBafifOa 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Tl6r}T€ 
 
 TiOfjcrdf 
 
 3 
 
 tlOoxti 
 
 TLOatvTat 
 
 ■ S. 
 
 1 
 
 TlB(iT]U 
 
 riBfifxijv 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 TideiTjs 
 
 TiBelo 
 
 S' 
 
 3 
 
 Tideir) 
 
 TtBeiTO 
 
 •^ D. 
 
 2 
 
 Ttdeirop or TiOelrjTOv 
 
 riBfiaBov 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 TiBeiTTju TideirjTTju 
 
 TiBeiaBijv 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 Tide^fiev Ti6fir)fi€v 
 
 TiBeiixcBa 
 
 
 2 
 
 TI$(7t€ Tl6(ir)T€ 
 
 TiBetaBe 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 tideUv TiOeirja-av 
 
 riBflvTo 
 
 r s. 
 
 2 
 
 TlBfl 
 
 TiBeco 
 
 «5 
 
 3 
 
 TiOero) 
 
 riBidBoi 
 
 1 !>• 
 
 2 
 
 TiOerov 
 
 TiBeaBov 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 TldcTCOP 
 
 TiBeaBoiV 
 
 & ^^ 
 
 2 
 
 ri6(Tf 
 
 TiBfirBf 
 
 L 
 
 3 
 
 TlOePTCOV 
 
 TiBeffBoiV 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Ti6epai 
 
 TiBca-Bai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Ti6eis, ettra, -ev 
 
 TiBtfievos, -rj, -01 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 395 
 
 850. Present System of SetKvv/xi, show. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 ^ S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 deiKvvfii edeiKUVv 
 
 beiKvvfiai, eSfiKVVfxrjv 
 
 deiKvvs edeiKvvs 
 
 deLKwaai edeUvvao 
 
 i 3 
 
 deiKvvai eddKVv 
 
 deiKvvTai edeiKVxrro 
 
 ■% D.2 
 
 deiKvvTov ibelKvvTov 
 
 deiKvvadov ebe'iKvvcrOov 
 
 1 3 
 
 deiKvvTov ideiKvvTTjv 
 
 biLKvvaOov edeiKuvaOrjv 
 
 1 P. 1 
 
 deiKvvfxev ibe'iKvvfxiv 
 
 deiKvvjJieda edeiKvvfxeda 
 
 OS to 
 
 beiKVVTi ihc'iKvvre 
 
 deUwade edfUvvaOe 
 
 deiKvvdai ibciKwaav 
 
 deiKvvvTCU ibfiKwino 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 r S. 1 
 2 
 
 bflKlfVOi 
 
 hfiKvvaifxai, 
 
 dflKVVrji 
 
 deiKvtiTj 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 bdKVvrj 
 
 bcLKvvrjrai 
 
 1 D.2 
 
 1 3 
 
 beiKvvrjTov 
 
 deiKvvrja-dov 
 
 BeiKVVTjTOU 
 
 deiKvvijadov 
 
 -^ P. 1 
 
 dflKVllQilJieP 
 
 beiKwa^eOa 
 
 I 3 
 
 bftKVVr)T€ 
 
 dfiKVvrja-de 
 
 8eiKUl)(0(Tl 
 
 beiKvvcovrai 
 
 r S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 03 3 
 
 dflKVVOlUt 
 
 beiKuvoifirjv 
 
 BflKVVOlS 
 
 deiKuvoio 
 
 dflKVVOt 
 
 deiKVVOlTO 
 
 •5 D.2 
 
 beiKVVOLTOV 
 
 beiKvvoKrBov 
 
 t 3 
 
 deiKtWOlTTJV 
 
 beiKwoiaOrjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 ddKVVOlflCV 
 
 beLKVvoififOa 
 
 2 
 
 I 3 
 
 BciKVVOlIf 
 
 beiKPifOia-dc 
 
 bfiKvvoiev 
 
 beiKVVOLVTO 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 bflKVV 
 
 buKVV(TO 
 
 g 3 
 
 deCKVVTQ} 
 
 bcLKvva-Boi 
 
 ■^ D. 2 
 
 p. ' 3 
 
 be'lKVVTOV 
 
 beiKwadou 
 
 deiKVVTCOU 
 
 beiKVvardcop 
 
 S P. 2 
 
 SflKVVTf 
 
 beiKWcrOe 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 bflKVVVTfOV 
 
 beiKvva-Bcav 
 
 Infin. 
 
 deiKvvvai 
 
 beiKwa-Bai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 bfiKVvs, 'vaa, -vv 
 
 b€iKvvfX€vos, -rj, -ov 
 
396 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 851. Second Aorist System 852. 
 of LCTTTjfXL (crra-), set. 
 
 Second Aorist Si/stem 
 o/StSw/xt (80-), ffive. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 I D 2 
 
 .2 3 
 
 ^ p 1 
 
 \ I 
 
 S. 1 
 
 ^ D. 2 
 
 I ^ 
 
 -§ P. 1 
 
 02 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 earrju 
 
 earrjs 
 
 ea-TT] 
 
 earrjTOu 
 
 i(TTr)Tqv 
 
 ((TTTJfXfP 
 €(rTT}T€ 
 
 earrjcrau 
 
 aTT]S 
 arfi 
 crrriTOV 
 a-TrJTOV 
 
 CTTrJTe 
 (ttSxti 
 
 eirpiafirjv 
 
 inploi 
 
 iirpiaTo 
 
 enplaadov 
 
 eTrpidadrjv 
 
 iTTpidpcOa 
 
 enpiaa-de 
 
 inpiavTO 
 
 7rpL(oiiai 
 
 TTplT] 
 
 npiijTai 
 
 TrpiTjaSop 
 
 TTpirjcrdov 
 
 npidyp-eOa 
 
 npirjorOe 
 
 TTpicovrai 
 
 arairjv Trpiaifiijv 
 
 aralrfs irpiaio 
 
 (TTairi rrpiaiTo 
 
 a-TOLTOv or arTairjTov irpiaiadov 
 
 araiTrjv araifjTrjv TrpiaiaBijv 
 
 (TToipev (TTaLr)p,€v TTptaipcda 
 
 oratre a-Tairjre TrpiaicrBe 
 
 (rraUv. arairjaav npimvTO 
 
 (edcoKa) 
 
 €86pr}v 
 
 (edaxas) 
 
 edov 
 
 (edcoKe) 
 
 (doTO 
 
 edoTOV 
 
 ZboaQov 
 
 edoTTjv 
 
 ibocrQ-qv 
 
 edofiev 
 
 edopeda 
 
 edore 
 
 edoa-de 
 
 e8o(Tau 
 
 eSoi/ro 
 
 ss> 
 
 8a>pai 
 
 s^ 
 
 da 
 
 if 
 
 8a>Tai 
 
 hCnTOV 
 
 daiaBov 
 
 8S>TOV 
 
 baxrQov 
 
 batp^v 
 
 boipcQa 
 
 dS>Te 
 
 baxrOc 
 
 bSxrt 
 
 boavrai 
 
 doirjp 
 
 boiprju 
 
 boirjs boio 
 
 boil] boiTo 
 
 boiTov or boirjTov boladov 
 
 boiTTjv botr)Tr)P boicrdrfP 
 
 boipep boir)p€V bolpfda 
 
 boire boirjTc boio-Of 
 
 boUp boirj(rav botpro 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 t 3 
 
 '^ D. 2 
 
 I 3 
 
 .2 P. 2 
 
 Infin. 
 
 (TTrjTa) 
 
 O-TrjTOP 
 (TTT^TCOP 
 
 CTTrJTe 
 
 tTTOVTUiP 
 
 CTTrjvai 
 
 TTplOi 
 
 TrpidaOco 
 
 TTpiaaBop 
 
 •n-pida-Boap 
 
 npiaade 
 
 TrpLda-Boup 
 
 irpi 
 
 aaBai 
 
 Partic. aras, OTTda-a, (ttop npidpepos, 
 
 -T], -OP 
 
 bds 
 
 bov 
 
 boTto 
 
 boaBo) 
 
 boTOP 
 
 boadop 
 
 borap 
 
 boa-dcop 
 
 bdre 
 
 boa-Be 
 
 bovToap 
 
 boaBap 
 
 be 
 
 boaBc 
 
 bovs, bovcra, bop bopepos, 
 
 -7], -OP 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 397 
 
 853. Second Aorist Sys 
 
 ■ 854. -i 
 
 Second Aor. 
 
 855. Second Ferf. Sys- 
 
 ttm 
 
 o/Tt'V^ (^0 
 
 
 Si/ste?n of 
 
 tem of iCTTrjIXL (o-Ttt-), 
 
 place f put. 
 
 
 Svo), enter. 
 
 set. See 620. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. Active. 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 2dPerf. 2dPlup. 
 
 
 [ S. 1 
 
 {tOriKa) 
 
 eBefxrjv 
 
 edvp 
 
 {eaTrjKo) (icrTqKrf) 
 
 
 2 
 
 (edrjKas) 
 
 iOov 
 
 edvs 
 
 (eo-TT/Kas) (eaTrjKijs) 
 
 6 3 
 
 {eOnKe) 
 
 €6(TO 
 
 edv 
 
 {eO-TTjKe) {idTTJKd) 
 
 1 1^-2 
 
 Werov 
 
 fdeadov 
 
 edvTOP 
 
 eararop eararop 
 
 1 3 
 
 idiTTjV 
 
 edea-drjv 
 
 idvTTjP 
 
 eararop iaTanjv 
 
 1 P. 1 
 
 idefiev 
 
 idefieBa 
 
 edvfiep 
 
 earafxep ecrra/xev 
 
 
 2 
 
 e^ere 
 
 edeade 
 
 mre 
 
 e(TTaT€ ea-rare 
 
 
 L 3 
 
 cdecrav 
 
 edcvTO 
 
 idvaap 
 
 cffTacri ea-Taaav 
 
 
 
 
 
 2d Perf. 
 
 r S. 1 
 2 
 
 65} 
 
 6S>fiai 
 
 8va) 
 
 iara) 
 
 6fii 
 
 Sj, 
 
 dvrjs 
 
 ea-T^s 
 
 i 3 
 
 On 
 
 OrJTaL 
 
 8vrj 
 
 i(TTfl 
 
 -S D. 2 
 
 OriTov 
 
 Orja-Bov 
 
 dvrjTOP 
 
 eOTTjTOV 
 
 § 3 
 
 SfJTOV 
 
 Orjadov 
 
 bvrjTOP 
 
 earriTOP 
 
 -f P. 1 
 
 6a)fxev 
 
 BoifxeBa 
 
 dvoifiep 
 
 €(TTci)fl€P 
 
 ^ 2 
 3 
 
 O'rjTe 
 
 BfjaBe 
 
 dvTjre 
 
 earrjTe 
 
 OoJai 
 
 BwvTaL 
 
 bvaxri 
 
 iaruxTL 
 
 r S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 d€tT)V 
 
 BeifiTjv 
 
 
 eoTairjp 
 
 BciTJi 
 
 Belo 
 
 See 738. 
 
 iaraiTjs 
 
 «■ 3 
 
 eeirj 
 
 Bflro 
 
 
 iaraiT) 
 
 .>, D. 2 
 
 Belrov or 6dr)Tov 
 
 BelaBov 
 
 
 iaraiTov or caTairjTov 
 
 J 3 
 
 . 
 
 Behrjv OeirjTrjv 
 
 BeiaBrju 
 
 
 iaraiTrjp eoTairjTrjv 
 
 c^P.l 
 
 del^eif Beii][X€p deifieOa 
 
 
 €(rTal^€P €(TTaLT]fl€P 
 
 
 2 
 
 delre deirjTe 
 
 BelaBe 
 
 
 ea-ToiTe eaTairjTe 
 
 
 3 
 
 BeUv Oeirjaav delvTO 
 
 
 ea-Toiep iaTairjaav 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 ees 
 
 Bov 
 
 dvBi 
 
 fCTTaBl 
 
 i 3 
 
 0eT(o 
 
 BeaBco 
 
 8VT(0 
 
 ia-TaTO) 
 
 1 I>-2 
 
 BeTov 
 
 BeaBov 
 
 BilTOP 
 
 eararop 
 
 1. 3 
 
 0€T(OP 
 
 BiaBwp 
 
 8vT(OP 
 
 iaTarap 
 
 S P. 2 
 
 Oere 
 
 BtaBe 
 
 8vT€ 
 
 ea-Tare 
 
 T 3 
 
 6fVT(OV 
 
 B(aBa>p 
 
 dvPTCOP 
 
 ea-TaPToyp 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Belvai 
 
 BeaBai 
 
 Bvpai 
 
 icrrapai 
 
 Partic. ^et'ff, Biiva, Biv Befiepos, 
 -rj, -OP 
 
 dvs, dvaa, ioTTas. earmaa, earoi 
 8vp 
 
398 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Irregular Verbs in MI. 
 
 856. Second Aoriat Sys- 
 
 
 
 
 tem 
 
 of yiyviJia-Kiii S^J. olBa (IB-), know. 858. ^77/At (^a-), Sfl'y. 
 
 {yv 
 
 W-), ^WOM?. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Active. 
 
 . 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 
 2dPerf. 2d..Pli 
 
 ip. 
 
 Present. Imperf. 
 
 
 ' S. 1 
 
 eyi/cor/ 
 
 oiSa x)^ or 
 
 ^8eiv 
 
 <pT}ixl e(f)rjv 
 
 
 2 
 
 cyi/cos- 
 
 oXffQa ^dr)a6a 
 
 or 
 
 (f)r]S or e(f)r)a6a or 
 
 
 3 
 
 eyv(o 
 
 oiSe fjBeiada 
 
 (pr)s e(pT}s 
 
 > 
 
 
 ^dfi or 
 
 ^deip 
 
 (jiTjai €(f)T} 
 
 g D. 2 
 
 tyvcoTov 
 
 Icrrov fi(TTov 
 
 
 cjiarov ecparov 
 
 1 3 
 
 eyuMTTju 
 
 ICTTOV TjO-TTJV 
 
 
 (jiarov ecfidrTjv 
 
 h- 
 
 ^ P. 1 
 
 €yva)nev 
 
 KTfieu fjaixev 
 
 
 (fyafxev €(f)afiev 
 
 
 2 
 
 typcore 
 
 tore ^(TTe 
 
 
 (pare €(paTe 
 
 
 3 
 
 tyvaxrav 
 
 to-axTi Tjcrav or ^beaav (^dm €(j)aaav 
 
 
 
 2d Perfect. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 \'-l 
 
 yvS) 
 
 eidS) 
 
 
 06) 
 
 yvas 
 
 eidfis 
 
 
 <f)flS 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 yu^ 
 
 d8n 
 
 
 <t>fl 
 
 1 ^^-2 
 
 yucoTov 
 
 fidrjrop 
 
 
 (prJTOV 
 
 • H, 3 
 
 yvtoTov 
 
 elbfJTOv 
 
 
 (PrjTOV 
 
 yvcofiev 
 
 fidmfiev 
 
 
 (^oi^ev 
 
 •^ 3 
 
 yvS)T€ 
 
 eld^T€ 
 
 
 • (p^re 
 
 yvaxTt 
 
 fldwcri 
 
 
 <f)a)ai 
 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 yvoiTju 
 
 dbeirjv 
 
 
 <Pair)v 
 
 
 2 
 
 yvolrjs 
 
 ei8eir)9 
 
 
 (paiTjs 
 
 6 3 
 
 ^ yvoiri 
 
 eldeiij 
 
 
 (jyairj 
 
 S D. 2 
 
 yvoLTOv or yvoirjTov 
 
 ciSftToy 
 
 
 <PaiTov or (f)air)TOV 
 
 t 3 
 
 yvoLTTjv yvoirjTTjv 
 
 elddrrju 
 
 
 (fyaiTijv <f)aiT]Tr]u 
 
 P. 1 
 
 yvolfi€V yvoir]fxev 
 
 elbe^fiev or eldelrjfiev 
 
 (paifiep (f)alr)fiev 
 
 
 2 
 
 y voire yvoiijre 
 
 eidflre fide 
 
 '■qre 
 
 (palre (fiaLijTe 
 
 
 3 
 
 yvoUv yvoirjaav 
 
 elde2ev eibet 
 
 rjaav 
 
 (f)alev cf)air]aap 
 
 f S. 2 
 
 yvw6i 
 
 U6i 
 
 
 <f)adi or <pd0t 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 yvooTco 
 
 'ia-Tco 
 
 
 <j)dTa> 
 
 1 I>- 2 
 
 yvwTov 
 
 'kttov 
 
 
 cpdrov 
 
 1, ^ 
 
 yvcuTtiiV 
 
 iartau 
 
 
 (paTav 
 
 S P. 3 
 
 yva>T€ 
 
 l(TT€. 
 
 
 (f>dTe 
 
 "^ ^ 
 
 yvovTOiv 
 
 Xaroiv 
 
 
 (fidvTOOV 
 
 Infin. 
 
 yvtovat 
 
 elbevaL 
 
 
 <f)dpai 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 yvovs, -ovaa, -6v 
 
 elda>s,, -via. ■ 
 
 OS 
 
 
APPENDIXo 
 
 399 
 
 859. ilfiL (co--), l>e. 
 
 860. ct/xt (t-), (/O. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 • 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 r S. 1 
 2 
 
 tlfii 
 
 rj or ^v 
 
 
 f'aoixai 
 
 €t/Ul 
 
 fja or fjciv 
 
 €? 
 
 rjo-Ba 
 
 
 eacL, earj 
 
 ft 
 
 rjeis jjeKrOa 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 eari 
 
 TJV 
 
 
 carai 
 
 eiat 
 
 »"^ »"" 
 
 *^ D.2 
 
 iaToi 
 
 ' rjOTov or 
 
 ^TOV 
 
 €ar€(r6ou 
 
 Itou 
 
 rJTOU 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 ea-TOV ^(TTTjV 
 
 iJTTlV 
 
 eaeadGV 
 
 Itov 
 
 fJTTjV 
 
 ^ P. 1 
 
 icr^iiv Tjficv 
 
 
 iaofieda 
 
 t/JLeu 
 
 W^v 
 
 2 
 
 L 3 
 
 tare 
 
 rjCTTi 
 
 ?re 
 
 eaeaBe 
 
 ire 
 
 rJT€ 
 
 flat 
 
 ^aau 
 
 
 eaovrai 
 
 XcUTi 
 
 ycrav or fjeaav 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 r S. 1 
 1 2 
 
 
 S> 
 
 
 
 
 ceo 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 ks 
 
 >■ 3 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 c D. 2 
 
 
 ^TOV 
 
 
 
 
 LTjTOV 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 rjTov 
 
 
 
 
 irjTov 
 
 1 ^-1 
 
 
 a)fX€U 
 
 
 
 
 toifiev 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 {re 
 
 
 
 
 1t]T€ 
 
 
 aari 
 
 
 
 
 toxrt 
 
 r S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 (irjv 
 
 
 €(ToiflT)V 
 
 
 loifjLi or loiiju 
 
 
 firjs 
 
 
 fO-QlO 
 
 
 lot. 
 
 i 3 
 
 
 .Ir, 
 
 
 ((TOITO 
 
 
 lOl 
 
 .S D. 2 
 
 flTOV or flTJTOtf 
 
 
 Z(toi<t6ov 
 
 
 loiTOV 
 
 t 3 
 
 flrr^v (IrjTTjv 
 
 
 €(ToiaOijp 
 
 
 loiTrjV 
 
 Q P. 1 
 
 • fljltV CtT)H€l/ 
 
 
 (aoifxcOa 
 
 
 Xotfl€P 
 
 1 ' 
 I 3 
 
 elr. 
 
 (irjTe 
 
 
 eaoi(T0e 
 
 
 7oiTe 
 
 ,Up 
 
 ftrjaav 
 
 
 eaoivTO 
 
 
 lOUV 
 
 r s. 2 
 
 
 ta-Bi 
 
 
 
 
 XOi 
 
 i 3 
 
 
 ((TTO) 
 
 
 
 
 Zro, 
 
 1 D. 2 
 
 
 fCTTOV 
 
 
 
 
 Xtov 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 ta-TOiV 
 
 
 
 
 Itchv 
 
 B p. 2 
 
 
 tare 
 
 
 
 
 \t( 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 (CTTiOV 
 
 
 
 
 loPTap 
 
 iufi.11. 
 
 
 itvat 
 
 
 hA<fB(U 
 
 
 Upm 
 
 Pavtic. 
 
 u>v, ov(ra^ ov 
 
 i<r6fA€vos, -7/, -ov la)v, lovaa, I6v 
 
400 APPENDIX. 
 
 86 1. LTjfiL (c-), send. 
 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Mid. and Pass. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 
 
 Pres. Imperf. 
 
 Pres. Imperf. 
 
 • 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 ■ 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 Irjfxi irjv 
 
 Ufiai Ufirjv 
 
 (^Ka) 
 
 eifiYjP 
 
 
 2 
 
 ir]S lets 
 
 feo-at i'ea-o 
 
 (V<a^) 
 
 elao 
 
 6 
 
 
 3 
 
 ir)(ri ret 
 
 ierai lero 
 
 (^<e) 
 
 tiro 
 
 '■^ 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 [€TOV ieroi* 
 
 feaBov ieadov 
 
 eiTOi' 
 
 fladop 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 Terov ierrjv 
 
 teaOov U(r6r]V 
 
 flTrjv 
 
 eladrjP 
 
 ^ 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 iffiev iffiev 
 
 U}xi6a UfifBa 
 
 €Lfl€V 
 
 elufda 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 iere Tere 
 
 feo-^e leo-^e 
 
 eire 
 
 eto-^e 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 idai ieaav 
 Present. 
 
 UvTai levTO 
 
 Present. 
 
 eiaav 
 
 elpTO 
 
 r 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 i& 
 
 iatfjLai 
 
 <s 
 
 cSuai 
 
 
 2 
 
 ifi^ 
 
 in 
 
 
 S 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 3 
 
 in 
 
 ifjrai 
 
 ? 
 
 ^Tai 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 i^TOV 
 
 irjdOov 
 
 ^TOP 
 
 TjaOop 
 
 s 
 
 
 3 
 
 {rJTOV 
 
 irjcrOov 
 
 ^TOP 
 
 r/adop 
 
 I 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 i&fiev 
 
 iuifxeOa 
 
 mfi€P 
 
 S/xeda 
 
 
 2 
 
 ifJT€ 
 
 ifjaOe 
 
 ^re 
 
 Tjo-Qe 
 
 
 3 
 
 Two-l 
 
 icovTai 
 
 cSo-i 
 
 oivrai 
 
 r 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 Uirjv 
 
 U'lfxrjv 
 
 elrjp 
 
 fl^r)P 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ieirjs 
 
 Ulo 
 
 ftrjs 
 
 Jo 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 3 
 
 teiT] 
 
 WiTO 
 
 €lr)^ 
 
 eiTO 
 
 ^t* 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 UItov, ielrjTov 
 
 ifla-dov 
 
 €IT0P, fllJTOP 
 
 elcrdop 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 Uirrjv, tfirjTTjv 
 
 Wiadrjv 
 
 (Irrjv, eirjTTjp 
 
 fladrjp 
 
 o 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 Wi^eu, ieiTjfifv 
 
 UijjLida 
 
 clfifv, elrjfiep 
 
 elfieda 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 i(lT€, Uirjre 
 
 UlaOe 
 
 fLT€, elrjre 
 
 elaBe 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 3 
 
 icUu, ielrjcrav 
 
 UlVTO 
 
 €L€P eiTjcrap 
 
 flvTO 
 
 r 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 . l€l 
 
 retro 
 
 €S 
 
 o^ 
 
 > 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ura 
 
 Uae<o 
 
 €Ta> 
 
 eaOco 
 
 •43 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 
 Urov 
 
 ieaBov 
 
 erop 
 
 eaBop 
 
 
 3 
 
 Utcov 
 
 UdOoav 
 
 ero)!/ 
 
 eaOcop 
 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 
 fere 
 
 UaOe 
 
 eVe 
 
 ea0€ 
 
 I 
 
 
 3 
 
 tevTcov 
 
 UaOoiU 
 
 €PT<OP 
 
 eaBap 
 
 Infi 
 
 Q. 
 
 
 iivai 
 
 haOai 
 
 eiPUL 
 
 eadai 
 
 Par 
 
 tic. 
 
 
 teii, iflaa, Uv 
 
 iefl€V09, -T], -OP 
 
 eis. eiaa, ev 
 
 efxevoi 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 401 
 
 862. KaO-rj/xaL (J](t-)^ sit down. 863. Kct/xat {kcl-), lie. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 Kadrf^ai 
 
 €<aBr)fir]v or Kadfjfxrjv 
 
 2 
 
 KaOrjaaL 
 
 €Kd6r}(ro 
 
 KaBrjcro 
 
 i 3 
 
 Kd6r}Tai 
 
 eKadrjTo 
 
 KaBfja-TO 
 
 •^ B. 2 
 
 KaOrjadov 
 
 eKadrjaOop 
 
 KiiBrjcrBou 
 
 .2 Q 
 
 KaOrjcrBov 
 
 €Ka0r]<T6r]V 
 
 KaBrjcrBrjv 
 
 .5 P. 1 
 
 KaOrjfieda 
 
 fKadTjfxeOa 
 
 KaBrjfjLfBa 
 
 2 
 I 3 
 
 KaOrjade 
 
 eKadrjcrde 
 
 KaBrjaBe 
 
 KadrjVTat 
 
 eicddrjVTo 
 
 KaBfjVTO 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 r S. 1 
 2 
 
 
 Ka6a>iJ.ai 
 
 
 
 KaBfi 
 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 
 KaOfJTai 
 
 
 1 1^-2 
 
 
 KaOrjoOov 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 KnOrj'jBof 
 
 
 -§ P. 1 
 
 T ^ 
 
 
 KaOoineBa 
 
 
 
 KaBfjaBe 
 
 
 I 3 
 
 
 KaBSivraL 
 
 
 r s. 1 
 
 
 KaBoijxrjV 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 KaBoio 
 
 
 i 3 
 
 
 koBoIto 
 
 
 •5 D. 2 
 
 
 KaBolaBov 
 
 
 t 3 
 
 
 KaBoiaBrjv 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 
 KaBoificBa 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 KaBoiaBc 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 KoBoivTO 
 
 
 r s. 2 
 
 
 KaBrja-o 
 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 
 KaBrjaBoi 
 
 
 •^ D. 2 
 
 
 KaBrjaBov 
 
 
 a 3 
 
 
 KaBrjaBoou 
 
 
 S P. 2 
 
 
 KaBrja-Be 
 
 
 L 3 
 
 
 KaBrjaBav 
 
 
 lufin. 
 
 
 KaBrjaBai 
 
 
 Pai-tic. 
 
 
 KaBrjfxcvos, -r), 
 
 -ov 
 
 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 Keifxai 
 
 €K(lfir}V 
 
 Kclaai 
 
 eKetcro 
 
 Kiirai 
 
 CKeiTO 
 
 KflaBov 
 
 €K€caBov 
 
 KflaBov 
 
 €K€1(tBiJU 
 
 Kfi/xeBa 
 
 eKeijjLeBa 
 
 KciaBf 
 
 cKeiaBe 
 
 KeivTai 
 
 eKCLVTO 
 
 Present. 
 
 Kcafiai 
 
 Kerf 
 
 KerjTai 
 
 KerjaBop 
 
 KerjaBov 
 
 KCCDfxeBa 
 
 KfTjaBe 
 
 K€a>PTai 
 
 K(OLp.r]P 
 
 K€OlO 
 
 KeOLTO 
 
 KeoicrBop 
 KeoiaBrjp 
 KeoififBa 
 Kfoia-Be 
 
 Keiaro 
 
 KeiaBio 
 
 KfivBop 
 
 K€1(tB<OP 
 
 Kc^arBe 
 Kela-Boip 
 
 h(tBc 
 
 Keifiepos, -rj, ov 
 
VOOABULAEIES. 
 
 INDEXES. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 ace. = accnsative. 
 
 act. = active, -ly. 
 
 adj. = adjective, -ly. 
 
 adv. = adverb, adverbial, -ly. 
 
 a., aor. = aGrist, 
 
 apod. = apodosis. 
 
 art. = article. 
 
 attrib. = attributive. 
 
 cf. = confer, compare. 
 
 comm. = commonly. 
 
 comp. = comparative. 
 
 cond. = condition, conditional. 
 
 conj. = conjunction. 
 
 const. = construction. 
 
 contr. = contraction, contracted. 
 
 dat. = dative. 
 
 decl. = declension. 
 
 def. = definite, 
 
 dem., demon. = dcnioustrutive. 
 
 dep, = deponent, 
 
 der, = derivation. 
 
 dir. = direct. 
 
 disc. = discourse. 
 
 Dor. = Doric. 
 
 e. g. = for example. 
 
 end. = enclitic. 
 
 Eng. = English. 
 
 esp. = especially. 
 
 etc. = and so forth, 
 
 ex. = example. 
 
 exc. = exception. 
 
 f., ff. = following. 
 
 fern. = feminine. 
 
 fut. = future. 
 
 gen. = genitive, 
 
 i. e. = that is. 
 
 impers. = impersonal, -ly. 
 
 impf., imperf. = imperfect. 
 
 imv. = imperative. 
 
 indec, indecl. = indeclinable. 
 
 indef. = indefinite. 
 
 ind., indie. = indicative, 
 
 indir. = indirect. 
 
 inf., infin. = infinitive. 
 
 interr. = interrogative, -ly. 
 
 intr., intrans. = intransitive, -ly. 
 
 Lat. = Latin. 
 
 masc, = masculine. 
 
 mid. = middle. 
 
 N, = note. 
 
 neut. = neuter. 
 
 No,, Nos. = Number, Numbers. 
 
 nom, = nominative, 
 
 obj. = object. 
 
 obs. = observation, observations. 
 
 opt. = optative. 
 
 p., pp. = page, pages. 
 
 part. gen. = partitive genitive. 
 
 part , partic. = participle. 
 
 pass. = passive, -ly. 
 
 pf., perf. = perfect. 
 
 pi., plur. = plural. 
 
 plpf., plupf. = pluperfect. 
 
 post-posit. = post-positive. 
 
 pred, = predicate. 
 
 pred. posit. = predicate positioo* 
 
 prep. = preposition. 
 
 pres. = present. 
 
 prin. = principal, principally. 
 
 pron. = pronoun. 
 
 prot. = protasis, 
 
 q. v. = which see. 
 
 R. = root. 
 
 reflex. = reflexive, -ly. 
 
 reg. = regular. 
 
 rel. = relative, -ly. 
 rem. = remark. 
 
 rev. = review. 
 
 %c.— scilicet, understand. 
 
 2, sec. = second. 
 
 sing. = singular, 
 
 subj. = subject. 
 
 subjv. = subjunctive. 
 
 subst. = substantive, -ly, 
 
 sup., super. = superlative. 
 
 suppl. = supplementary. 
 
 syn. = synonyme. 
 
 synt. = syntax. 
 
 tr., trans. = transitive, -ly. 
 
 voc. = vocative. 
 
 vocab. = vocabulary. 
 
 w. = with. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 This vocabulary includes both the words of the special vocabularies, and those 
 which have been used in the exercises and reading lessons. They are here given 
 with their definitions, cross references, and related words, etc., but geaerallj with 
 a fuller treatment. 
 
 The verb stem and class follow immediately the present indicative of all verbs 
 whose formation presents any difficulties, and whenever additional references are 
 introduced, they follow generally a like order of application. This arrangement will 
 not only review the references of the words in the order in which they first appeared, 
 but will furnish the most natural order for consultation. 
 
 Derivations of the more obviously related words are further indicated heie by the 
 dagger pointing up (|) or (f) or in both directions (J) to a simpler source. While 
 in the special vocabularies, the genitive of the O declension, and the gender of nouns 
 coming under the general rules, were mostly omitted, they are here generally 
 indicated in the usual way. 
 
 a- 
 
 Or (du- before a vowel), an insepara- 
 ble particle called alpka pricative, 
 {a) negative, (i) copulative (498, 
 obs.). a-theist. 
 
 *A^poK6p.dS) -a (Dor. gen.), (49, obs. 
 1, 2) ; Abrocomas^ satrap of Phoe- 
 nicia and Syria, and commander 
 under Artaxerxes. 
 
 d7a86s, -17, -6v (com p. 380, 1), good, 
 iioIjIp, brave ; fertile. 
 
 a-yatiai (675, vocab.), -aadfirjv, rjya- 
 adtjv, admire, esteem. 
 
 t d776X\co (ayyeX-, iv.), (596,612, 7); 
 drffikSi (255) ; ^yyeiXa (256); ^y- 
 y€)^Ka, ^yyfXfiai, rjyyeXBrjv, ati- 
 fiounce^ report, carry news (188). 
 
 a^-yeXos, ^v. 6, a messenger (14). 
 angel, e\-angeli»t. 
 
 aSeXc^d? 
 
 dyopo, -ai, t], place of assembly^ 
 market-place^ market ; as a mark 
 of time, dyopa ifKrj6ov<ra, the time 
 oj fall market^ i. e. from nine 
 o'clock till noon. 
 
 Idyopo^u {ayopa^-, iv.), -a<Fa>, fre- 
 quent the market, buy^ purchase. 
 
 f d^ptos, -la, -top, living iu the fields., 
 wild, savage (513). 
 
 *7<*7 "^<«»> ^yayov (533, 1), ^;^a 
 (542,6), rjyfjMU ^x^tjv, lead^ bring ; 
 carry^ march, axiom (513). 
 
 4. d-y«tv, -^for, o, an assembly at the 
 games ; a contest^ games, agony 
 (513). 
 
 dS€X<|>o's, -oO. 6 a brother; voc. 
 ad€\(j)f. Adelphi, Adelphiaii, 
 Phil-adelphia. 
 
dS 
 
 LK€(0 
 
 406 
 
 a/xa 
 
 '|'»8iiKci>, -^aat, rjdiKriaa, etc., to ad 
 unjustly, wrong., injure; pres. 
 may have the sense of the pf. / 
 do wrong y or / have done wrong, 
 am in the wrong. 
 
 a-SiKos, -OP, unjust, wrong (498, 1). 
 
 6Aiy adv., always, from time to time, 
 ever, constantly, ever, aye. 
 
 oETos, -ov, b, an eagky an eagle as a 
 standard. 
 
 *AOf|vai, wif, aX, Athens. 
 
 ^'AOijvatos, -ala, -aiov, Athenian ; 6 
 *A0r]vaios, an Athenian, 
 
 d0poCt« (a^pot§-, iv. (608, 1)), 
 (dOpoost close together), (612, 2), 
 ddpoiao), etc., collect^ assemble, lery 
 forces ; mid. muster, Lat. cogo. 
 
 aOviJLos {dvfios, 673), without 
 heart f dispirit ed^ depressed (498, 
 obs.). 
 
 At-yvvTiost-co, -Lov {Atyxnrros, Egypt), 
 Egyptian. 
 
 Atvioves, -ap, oi, Aenianians, a Thes- 
 salian tribe. 
 
 I aipcrds, -Tj, 6p, ehosen ; oi aipeToi 
 the persons chosen, deputies, dele- 
 gates. 
 
 aipeo (aipe-, i\-, viii.), -rjam, elXov, 
 rfpr)Ka, ^pT]fiai, tipedrfv (698, 1) ; 
 tahe, seize, capture ; mid., choose. 
 di-aeresis, heretic, heresy. 
 
 al(r6dvo(jLat (alrrO-, v.), (632) ; ai- 
 aOiiaopai, ^a66p.T)v, ^aOTjfiai, per- 
 ceive or apprehend by the senses ; 
 learn, see, become aware of; w. 
 gen., hear, hear of. aesthetic. 
 
 aUrxpos, -A, -dp, shameful, base, dis- 
 graceful, infamous; alaxicop, ai- 
 aXt(rTos (379, 3). 
 
 4 al<rxvv» (alfrxvv-, iv.), (598, 1), 
 {al(Txvvrj, shame {io\'^,^)\ -vw6!>(255), 
 ^vx^va (256), ^<Txvv6r)p (605), 
 shame, disgrace, dishonor ; mid. 
 
 as pass, dep., be ashamed at, feel 
 shame before, stand in awe of 
 Synt. 603. 
 
 atT€ci>, aiT^cro), etc., «5^, demand; with 
 two ace. , ask a person for some- 
 thing (269); mid., ask for one's 
 self entreat, beg. Syn. 271. 
 
 alTido|j.ai, -aaofiai, ■^riao'dp.riv, re- 
 proach, blame, accuse. 
 
 dKlvttio]S| -ov, 6, a short sword, dag- 
 ger. (645, No. 11.) 
 
 dKOvo), -(TOfiai, rjKovo-Orjv, ^Kovaa, w. 
 both gen. and ace. hear, hear of, 
 learn ; with gen. alone, hear, obey^ 
 listen to. acoustic, 
 
 dKpo-iroXts, -ea)s, x] {aKpos, TrdXt?, 
 (501,2)); an acropolis, a citadel. 
 acropolis. 
 
 oLKpos, -a, ov, at the end, extreme, 
 outermost, topmost, highest ; to 
 uKpop, summit; Ta aKpa, the heights, 
 etc. In the pred. position, the 
 end of. {^\^^). 
 
 uKcov, aKovaa, okov (eKcav), umcill- 
 
 d\e^(o, mid. dXe^ofxai, rj\e^dp,rjv,ward 
 off, avenge one's self on, requite. 
 
 dXevpa, -a>v, rd {^1^), fine four. 
 
 f dXXd, adversative conj., expressing 
 opposition more strongly than hi, 
 but, otherwise, on the contrary ; yet, 
 hoicever (629). 
 
 "f dXX^Xuv (405), reciprocal pro- 
 noun, of one another, each other. 
 par-allel. 
 
 oXXos, -x), -o(629), indef. pron. other, 
 another ; 6 oXXos or oi aXXot, the 
 restof{\l\). 
 
 \ dXXcos, adv. (470), otherwise, in 
 another way. 
 
 dfia, adv. at o?ice, same time (227), w. 
 dat. at the same time with (225) ; 
 dpa TTJ finfpa, at daybreak ; apa 
 
a/xafa 
 
 407 
 
 a^LO 
 
 LOO) 
 
 Tfj (TTiovarj fjiiepa, at the dawn of 
 
 the following aai/ (()85). 
 a|i-a|a, -?;?, ^ (afia), (il), a wagon 
 
 (513). 
 \ dji-aliTos, 6v passable for wagons ; 
 
 odus dua^LTos, wagon road. 
 djiapTcLvw {afiapT-, v.), (632), dfiap- 
 
 T-qaojiai, fjfiapTou, rip.dpTi]Ka miss, 
 
 fail, or err in conduct. 
 dfjLcivwv, -ov, comp. of ayaBoi (380,1). 
 
 Syii. 3SS. 
 d-jjucXeo) (/ie'Xei), be careless of neglect. 
 d-|iiix°-vos, -oi/, difficult, impossible ; 
 
 odos dfjLrjxavos, a difficult road, 
 
 impracticable (710). 
 dfiircXos, -ov, 17, a vine, grape vine. 
 f d(jL<j>£ (141), primarily signifies on 
 
 botK sides of; w. gen. and dat., 
 
 about, concerning, on account of ; 
 
 mostly w. ace, around, about, near. 
 f dji<j)6T£pos, -a, -ov, both ; pred. posit. 
 f d|i<j>0T€p<«)9€v, adv. on both sides, at 
 
 both efids. 
 d}ji<|>a), gen. and dat. same form in 
 
 all genders, both. both. 
 dv (566) is joined : (a) to all tlie 
 
 secondary tenses of the indie, 
 
 and to the optative, infinitive, or 
 
 participle, to denote that the ac- 
 tion of the verb is dependent on 
 
 some condition (565, 668, 690) ; 
 
 (/>) it is joined to el, if, and to all 
 
 relative and temporal words (692); 
 
 (c) it is used in iterative sentences 
 . (679^. 
 
 av, contr. from iav. 
 dvd, prep., ace up, over, by. on. 
 dva-PaCv«, go up, ascend, mount, 
 
 march inland, up, etc. 
 \ dvd-Pa(ris, -feos, r], the march up, 
 
 i)iland ; ascent {(\T^). anabasis. 
 dv-a^-yeWw, bring back word, report 
 
 (188). 
 
 t dva-yKd^w (dmyKaS-, iv.), {dvayKt], 
 (()12, 3)j ; dvayKd(T(i>, etc., force, 
 compel. 
 
 dvdYKT], -r)s, t] (123), a necessity ; 
 dudyxr) iari, it is necessary (790). 
 
 dv d-yw, lead up or back ; take up. 
 
 dva-iravo), cause to rest ; mid. rest, 
 halt. 
 
 dva-o-Tp6<|>« (659), turn back, face 
 about; pass., rally, be turned back. 
 
 dv€v, prep. w. gen., without. 
 
 dvifjp, dvhpo^, 6 (362), a man, hus- 
 band ; dudpes arparicoTai, felloio- 
 soldiers. Lat. vir. 
 
 dvOpwiros, -ov, 6, r]^a human being, a 
 man. Lat. homo, phii-anthropy. 
 
 dvido), -d(r(ji, rjvtacra, fjviddTjv, grieve, 
 trouble. 
 
 dv-Co-TTUJii (741), make stand up, 
 raise up, rouse ; iutrans. in mid. 
 w. 2 a , pf., and plupf. act, stayid 
 up, rise. 
 
 ttv-o8os, -ov, f} [6b6s~\, way up, march 
 inland.. 
 
 dvrC, prep., w. gen. (141), [^over 
 against'\, instead of, against, an- 
 swer, anti-pathy, anti-dote(188). 
 
 dvTi-irapa<rK6vd|o|xai, to prepare 
 against, or one^s self in turti. 
 
 dvTi-o-Taoriwrris, -ov, 6 (695), an op- 
 ponent, one of the opposite party. 
 
 dvTf ov, -ov, TO, a cave. Lat. antrum. 
 
 dvco, adv. {dva) (463), vp, above; 
 conip. ai/torfpo), sup. ai/ajrdro). 
 
 d|ios, -la, -ov (817), of like weight, 
 worth as much, w. gen. ; worthy, 
 valuable ; ttoXXov a^tos, worthy 
 of much, great value (513). 
 
 I d|i6&), -wo-ft), etc., think or deem 
 worthy of a thing (241) ; w. ace. 
 and inf. ; think worthy to do or be; 
 claim, demand, ash (269). Syn. 
 271. 
 
OLTTayyiWoi 
 
 408 
 
 apirdt, 
 
 CO 
 
 dir-ayyeXXw, brin^ back word, an- 
 nounce from, report (188). 
 
 dir-dY", lead back or away, off, march. 
 
 dir-aiTcot, -jjcra), demand, demand 
 back. 
 
 d-irapd(rK€vos, -ov (63S), unprepared^ 
 
 d-u'ds, anaaa, anav (d + tras), 
 streiigtheued form of ttos (498, 
 obs.^), all, quite all, all together. 
 
 dir-eiiu (ei/xt), (741), go away or 
 back, depart. 
 
 cnr-cXavvo), dislodge, drive away or 
 off, march away, ride or go back. 
 
 dir-epxo(iai, go away, depart from, 
 go over. 
 
 &.'K-4\<ii, hold back, be distant ; mid., 
 abstain or desist from. Synt. 410. 
 
 dirf]\0ov, see dire'pxoixai. 
 
 d-iro, prep. w. geii. oiilj (141), from, 
 away from (123). Lat. ab, apo- 
 logy, apo-stasy, off, of. 
 
 diro-SeiKvvni, point out, show forth, 
 appoint; mid., express one^^ opin- 
 ion, declare. Synt. 268,. 
 
 diro-8C8&)|jii (646), give back, restore, 
 pay ; mid., sell. 
 
 diro-Bv^o-Kci) (659), die, be killed ; 
 used ill Attic as pass, to anoKr^va. 
 See 0v^o-Kw. 
 
 d/iro-Kpivo(xai, anoKpwov\iai (255), 
 reply, answer. Lat. responded. 
 
 diro-KpvirTft) (593), hide from, con- 
 ceal, apocrypha. 
 
 diro-KTcCvw, kill, put to death; for 
 pHss. see diroev^o-Kft). (263), 
 
 diro-Xciiro), leave behind, abandon. 
 
 dir- dXXwjii (741), cnroK e crco o r -ok at, 
 dTroXtoX-^Ka, oTToXcoXa, destroy ut- 
 terly, slay, lose ; with mid., 2 pf., 
 and 2 plupf. act. (as pres.), perish, 
 die. 
 
 'AiriXXctfv, -o)i/os, 6, voe."A7roXXoy, 
 Apollo, god of music and poetry. 
 
 diro-irc'ijnra) (68), send off or away, 
 send home or back ; mid., dismiss., 
 
 diro-irX€« (p. 82^), sail away or home 
 (214). 
 
 -}- d-irope'w, -^o-co, etc., be in tcant, be 
 perplexed, in doubt, without means; 
 be in want 0/(340). 
 
 ■f- d-^opid, -as, f), diff cully. 
 
 d-iropos, -ov Qnopos, passage), im- 
 passable, impracticable, difficult 
 (498, 2). 
 
 diro-o-irdw (27 i), -ffTrao-o), -kfxiraaa, 
 -ianaKa, -eo-naa-nai, draw away 
 or off, separate, withdraw. 
 
 diro-o-Tc'XXft) (650), send aicay, send, 
 despc(tch. apostle. 
 
 diro-Tc'fivM, cut off, intercept. 
 
 airo-^ivyoi, flee back, escape. 
 
 diro-x»P««*> -^o-o), etc., withdraw, 
 retreat. 
 
 'ApaPid, ay, 17, Arabia. 
 
 dp-yvpcos, d-, 'OV, contr. dpyvpovs, 
 etc. (170, 2), of silver. 
 
 dp-yvpiov, -OV, TO, a piece of silver, 
 silver money. 
 
 dp€T^, -^y, fi, fitness., virtue, good con- 
 duct, bravery, valor (764). 
 
 'Apvaios, -ov, 6, Ariaem. 
 
 dpi6|i6s, -ov, 6, number, enumeration. 
 arithmetic (764). 
 
 dpi<rT€p6s, -&, -ov (227), left ; iv 
 dpia-repa (sc. X^*pO> ^^^ ^^^ ^^f^' 
 Lat. sinister. 
 
 *ApurTnriros, -ov, 6, Aristippus. 
 
 dpiCT-Tos, -»;, -ov, ^^,9^, noblest ; sup. 
 of dya^o? (380, 1) ; apiora, adv., 
 «^ ^/^^ best way. Syn. 388. 
 
 'ApKds, -dbos, 6; (7;/. Arcadian. 
 
 dpp.a, -aros, rd (764), « chariot. 
 (•214, No. 7). 
 
 j dp|x-dp.a|a, -■qs.fi, a covered carriage, 
 
 dpirdto) (dpTraS-, iv.), (608, 2), 
 apTrdcro) (200), ^pTracra, ^pnaKO 
 
' ApTa^€p^rj<; 
 
 409 
 
 fiaiva) 
 
 (309, d) ; rjp7ra<TiJ.ai, fjpndadrjv, 
 plunder, seize, carry ojf. harpy. 
 
 ApTa|€'p|Tjs, -ou, Artaxerxes, Artax- 
 erxes II., a brother of Cyrus (432). 
 
 + dpxaios, -a, ov (372), from the 
 beginning, old, ancient ; to dp- 
 Xaiov, formerly, archaic, ar- 
 chives . 
 
 t ^PX^j-^S) hi beginning, government, 
 empire, province, satrapy, 
 
 f dpxiKos, 17, -6v, fit to rule (485, 5). 
 
 «4>X". ^P^^i m^^^i WX«» ^pyM«t. 
 rjpxOr]v, begin, gooern, rule, com- 
 mand, arch-, in compounds 
 (525). 
 
 I apx^Vj oi/roy, 6, leader, ruler, com- 
 maii'ler, chief. Svn. 227. 
 
 t d-cr9£V6'», -j](r(0, to be weak, ill, sick. 
 
 d<r0£Vi}S, e'ff (adeuos, to, strength), 
 iDitliout strength, weak, feeble. 
 
 'Ao-ire'vSios, -ov, b, an Aspendian. 
 
 dxiris, -I'Sos, ff, a shield (227, No. 
 8) ; d(jiv\s fivpia, ten thousand 
 shield, i. e. nhield-bearers (Nos. 
 1,8). 
 
 d-(r(|>aX'^S, -es (o'</)aXXfi)), (388), ^r/?* ; 
 sure, trusty ; certain. 
 
 jf d-(r({>aX.us, adv., firmly, securely, 
 safely ; dcrcfiakea-Tepov, -earara, 
 (404). 
 
 d-Tl{j.a^(i>, (drt/jaS , iv.), (rifiri), dri- 
 fxdarco, rjTlpaa-a, r]Tip.a(rp,(u, to dis- 
 honor (785). 
 
 av, adv., again, back, in turnj more' 
 over. 
 
 ■j- avT60i, adv. in the very place, here, 
 there. 
 
 •j- avTO [laros, -ov (786, vocab.), act- 
 ing of one's own will, self-prompt- 
 ed ; OTTO 70V avTopaTov, of 09ie's 
 07cn accord, automaton. 
 
 avTos, -q, -6, inteus. prou., self Lat. 
 ipse; with the article, the same; iu 
 
 the oblique cases, him, her, it, 
 them (164, 1, 2, 3; 174). auto- 
 gniph, auto-crat. 
 
 .j-avrov, adv. (461), here, there, in 
 the very place, same place, 
 
 avTov, -rfs, contr. from iavTov, rjs. 
 
 d(}>-aipca>, take away, deprive ; mid., 
 rob. 
 
 d-^aWJ9, -«, unseen, out of sight, in- 
 visible. 
 
 d()>-apird^a>, -dtro) or -dxrop^i, steal 
 from, plunder, pillage. 
 
 6i^ir\yx, d(fiT)(ra), d(pfJKa d(f)€lKa, dqbei- 
 fiai, d(p€LdT]v, send away, let go, 
 dismiss, suffer to escape, allow ; 
 npos (j)i\iav d(f)ievat, let depart in 
 peace. 
 
 d:)>-iKveo[iai (638), -i^opat, -Uoprju, 
 -lypai, come to, arrive, return 
 
 dt{}-i'n-ir6V(i), -eua-o), ride back, ride 
 
 away. 
 d4>-i(rTTip.t, separate, remove, to make 
 
 revolt ; intrans. in the pass., 2 a. 
 
 act., pf., plupf., and f. mid., stand, 
 
 withdraio from, revolt, apostate. 
 'Axaios, -ov, 6, an Achaean. 
 ckx^OK-<^t> dyBitropai., fjxSeaOrjv, be 
 
 displeased, troubled, angry at, 
 
 AWE, UGLY. 
 
 dxpi, before a vowel a^pi^, adv , 
 up to, until, w. gen. (412); conj., 
 until ; see 705. 
 
 BaPvXwv, -(Si'o?, 1], Babylon, capital 
 
 of Babylonia. 
 pa(vco Oa-, iv., v.), (631, 3). ^^ao^ai, 
 €^r]V (;731), ^€^n<a, /Se^a/uai. 
 fIBddrjv, go, step, walk, syn. 741 ; 
 ^rja-o), f^rjo-a, cause to go. 
 
I3d\\a) 
 
 410 
 
 yiypofiat 
 
 Lat. venio, come, come, basis 
 
 (6:58). 
 poXXo. (/3aX-, iv.), (596) ; /3nXt5 
 
 (255) ; e/3aXoi/, ^e^XrjKa (005) ; 
 
 ^e^Xrjixai, ejdXrjdrjv, Ik/ViV, hurl, 
 
 throw at, hit ; Uie object tlirown 
 
 (188) is in the dative, sym-bol, 
 
 para-ble. 
 -j- Pap^apiKos, -J7, -di/(214), barbarian. 
 \ PapPapiKws, adv., in a barbarian 
 
 lumjaaye (e. g. Persian). 
 pdpPapos, -01/ (123), barbarian, not 
 
 Greek, foreign ; ^dp^apos, 6, a 
 
 barbarian. 
 f PcuriX€(d, -dy. 17, (5r kingdom, sover- 
 
 eigiity. 
 tPoo-CXeios, -ov (109, 485, 1), be- 
 longing to a king, royal ; to ^aai- 
 
 \eiov or TO. ^aaiKeia, palace ', 
 
 fj jSao-iXeia, t/ie queen. 
 Pao-iXcvs, -etas, 6 (297), a king; with- 
 out the ai-tielo, the king of Persia ; 
 
 nnpa ^aacXel, at court (798, § 27). 
 
 basilisk. 
 \ Pao-iXevo) (493, 4) , -ivcra, be king, 
 
 reign. 
 4 Pa<riXiK<Js, -x], -6v (328, 485, 2), 
 
 royal, of a king, basil, basilica. 
 pcXrtcov, ^eXrlov, comp. of dyaSos, 
 
 better, braver {3S0, 1). Syu. 388. 
 pidSojjiai (jSmS-, iv.), (jSta, /orc^), 
 
 (803), -daop.ai, etc. ; yb;r^, owr- 
 
 power, compel. 
 PtKos, -ou, 6, a large earthen vessel, 
 
 jar. 
 Ptos,-ou, 6, /e/€. QUICK, bio-grapliy. 
 Podo), rnid. -fjaofxai, shout, cry out. 
 BokotCo, -as, f), Boeotia. 
 j BoiwTios, -ou, 6, </ Boeotian. 
 f povXevb) (493, 5), -ev(ra),».etc., <?02^;^- 
 
 sel, advise, plan, plot (34) ; mid. 
 
 deliberate, consider, plan, resolve ; 
 
 ra avTO. ravra /SouXeuo/xeVous, 
 
 plotting these same things (648, 
 
 §7). 
 f PovX'/j, will, plan. 
 PovXojJtai (366), ^ov\r](rop.ai (522, 1), 
 
 willj wish, be willing, prefer, 
 
 choose; syn. 792. Lat. void; 
 
 WILL (551). 
 Povs, /3oos, 6 or ^ (363), an ox 01 
 
 cow ; pi. cattle. Lat. ^05, co«^. 
 
 cow, bu-colic (508, 14). 
 
 r. 
 
 ■ydp, post-posit, cow]., for, because, 
 certainly.' Lat. enim. Kai yap, 
 for indeed, for, and really (Lat. 
 etenim), regularly denotes an ellip- 
 sis, this is or was so, for . . . (372). 
 
 ravXiTqs, -ov, 6, GauUtes. 
 
 ■ye, enclitic and post-posit, intensive 
 particle (628), even, at least, 
 too, indeed, emphasizes preceding 
 word, but often rendered only by 
 emphasis. Lat. quidem. 
 
 •ycCTwv, ovos, 6 or r\ (y^), (227), a 
 neighljor ; as an adj., neighbor- 
 ing, w. gen. or dat. (225). Lat. 
 vlcinus. 
 
 ^e'XcDs, -0)70?, 6, laughter. 
 
 ■yc'vos, -eoy. -ovs, to (yiyvopai), birth, 
 descent, family, race. Ltnt. genus, 
 
 KTX. 
 
 -yf'cjjiJpa, -as, f} (41), a bridge. 
 
 "i^i -^s (contracted from yea), rj 
 (170, 1), earth, land ; koto, y^v, 
 by land. Lat. terra, ge-ology, 
 ge-ometry, ge-ography. 
 
 ]. •yi?|-Xo<j)os, ov, 6 (\6(f)os, crest), a 
 hill. 
 
 'yt'yvop.ai (yei^), (533); yfvi](Top.ai, 
 eyevoprjv, yeyova, yeyevrjpai (433, 
 vocab.), become, be, happen, amount 
 
yiyvo)(TK(i} 
 
 411 
 
 8 
 
 €0i 
 
 tOy accrue, be horn, come. Lat. 
 gigno, kin, kind, king, liydro-gen, 
 genesis. 
 
 ■yi-yvwo-Kw (yi/o , vi), (651, 1), yv(o- 
 aoixai, eyvaof (731, 2), i'yvaxa, 
 eyvcoafiat, eyvaadrjv, know (by ob- 
 servation), understand, recognize^ 
 judge, think. Lat. tiosco, gnostic 
 (660). 
 
 rXovs, -ou, 6, Olus., an officer on the 
 staif of Cyrus. 
 
 •yvovs, 2 aor. partic. of yiyuma-KO). 
 
 •yvufiT), -r)s, ^, opinion, Judgment, plan 
 (660). gnome. 
 
 ■ypd<t>ci>, ypd^a, eypayfra, yeypa(})a, 
 yeypapfiai, eypcKprjv, write, paint, 
 engrave, grave, graphic, photo- 
 graph. 
 
 ■j" -Yvuva^w (yvfivab-, iv), d(ra), etc., 
 exercise, train, gymnastic. 
 
 yujii^s, -riTOi, or "yvjtvfiTTjs, -ov, 6, 
 a light armed sold if r. 
 
 •yvWi, gen. yvvaiKos, t) (363), (71- 
 yvofiai), woman, wife, queen. 
 
 A. 
 
 8ai(ift)v, -ovo%, 6. a divinitij, spirit. 
 
 demon. 
 8aKpva>, -vera), iSaKpixra, dedaKpvfiai, 
 
 irepp. TEAIl. 
 
 Adva, -0)1/, Tti, Dana, a city. 
 
 8airavao>, -770-0), etc. , incur expense ; 
 mid., spend of one's own. 
 
 8dp€iK6s, -ov, 6, a daric (675, No, 
 12) ; a Persian gold coin = 20 
 Attic drachmae, about ^5.50 in 
 American gold. 
 
 Adp€tos, -ov, 6, Darius, king of 
 Persia (432). 
 
 ScurfMSs, -ov, 6, fax, revenue, tribute. 
 
 86, post- posit, coiij., not so adversa- 
 tive as oKkd^ hut, on the other 
 
 hand, still; it often serves to 
 distinguish one thing from an- 
 otlier, then rendered and, further, 
 for ; with correlative p.€v, fiev . . . 
 de, on the one hand . . . on the 
 other, on the contrary, etc. ; Koi 
 . . . 8e, 8e . . . Kai, and also (109). 
 
 8€SoiKa, see 8eC8a>. 
 
 861, , see 86'«, 
 
 86i8« (prcs. is not Attic), Beiaopat, 
 edeiaa, dtdoiKa (586) and 6c8ta 
 (as pres.),y^«r, be fearful (of rea- 
 sonable fear). Syn. 709. 
 
 86£kvvjii (8etK-, v.), (736), Sfi'^cD, 
 eSft^a, dedeixcij dedfiyfiai, c8ci)(6r)v, 
 show, point cut. teach. 
 
 86iv6s, -rj, -01/ (8fi8a)), terrible, fear- 
 ful, wonderful, skilful ; to 8fiv6v, 
 danger, peril. 
 
 SiKa, indeclinable, ten. Lat. decern, 
 TEN, decade. 
 
 Se'vSpov, -ov, TO, a tree. 
 
 86|i6s, -a, -ov, right ; iv he^ia (x^ipt), 
 omthe right hand ; deltas tdoaav, 
 they gave their right (hands) or 
 pledges. Lat. dexter. 
 
 86'o|xai, see %iia. 
 
 f 86'p|jLa, -QTOi. TO (756, vocab.), skin, 
 hide, epi-dermis. 
 
 86'p«, b€pm,Jlay. See 6K-8€'pw. 
 
 86(r)i6s, -ov, 6 (479, 4), a band, chain, 
 strap. 
 
 '86vpo, adv., hither, here. 
 
 86VT6pos, -a, -ov (8uo), second; 5fv- 
 Tcpov, as adv., second time (460). 
 deutero-nomy. 
 
 86'a> (524), Berjcrco, iberjaa, BebeijKa, 
 dederjpai, ederjdrjv, want, need 
 . (340) ; mid. fieo/xat. ask, beg, want 
 hack ; w. gen. ; 8eTrat avrov, he 
 asks him (708, 8); impers. Set, 
 there is need, one ought, must 
 (524) ; TO beov, the needed or 
 
Sv 
 
 412 
 
 8v 
 
 VCTTTOpOS 
 
 proper tJihig (806, vocab.) ; syii. 
 
 784 ; Kox avv vfuv on av derj Tret'cro- 
 
 ftai, and with you I will suffer what- 
 
 eoer may be necessary (708, 3). 
 Sif|, intensive particle, post-posit., 
 
 noiD, already, truly., indeacU surely, 
 
 accordingly. 
 8t)Xos, -17, -ov (73, 8\7), plain, cl^ar 
 
 manifest, evident ; 8^Xds etfii 
 
 4 8n\6w (154, 3), -wo-o), etc. (IGO), 
 show, make clear, declare, 
 
 8id, prep. (141) with gen. between, 
 through, of time, place, means ; w. 
 ace, on account of. dia-meter. 
 
 8ia-Pa(vw, _^o through or over, cross ; 
 AV. ace. 
 
 8ka-pd\\ci>, throw across, comm. slafi- 
 der, .accuse falsely . diabolical. 
 
 8i-d-y(i) (765, vocab.), lead through 
 or across^ continue; of time, spend, 
 lioC' 
 
 8ia-8C8a>)i,i, distribute. 
 
 Sid-Koo-ioi, -ai, -a, two hundred.^ 
 
 8i-ttpTrd5« (188), -apiraxfoi, tear in 
 pieces, lay waste, plunder, carry 
 off as plunder, sack, ravage. 
 
 8ia-a-ird(o, draw apart, scatter, sep- 
 arate. 
 
 Sia-TeXf'ft) (251),-TeXw, finish^ get to, 
 arrioe at, continue doing. 
 
 8ia-Ti0T)}jit, arrange, dispose, manage; 
 ndvTas ovrto biaridels dneTre^rrcTO, 
 so disposing all, he sent (them) 
 back (610, § 5). 
 
 8i8do-Ka) (Max-, vi.), (651, 5), 
 -d^(o, -axa, 8e8tSay/iat, eStSax^'?", 
 tearh, show. Lat. doceo, didac- 
 tic (G59). 
 
 8iS»}ii (So-, vii.), (730. 4) ; edcoKa, 
 dedoxa, dedofxai, edodrjv (641), 
 gii^e, allow, offer, present. Lat. 
 do; dose, anti-dote (647). 
 
 Si-cXavvo), drive or ride through. 
 
 8i-£xa), hold apart, be distant from, 
 separated from. Synt. 410. 
 
 8t-£o-TTj|ti, set apart ; intrans. in the 
 mid., and 2 a., pf., and plupf. act., 
 stand apart, open ranks, 
 
 SCKaios, -aia, -aiov, just, right. 
 
 \ SiKaCws, adv. (459, 2), justly, 
 rightly. 
 
 %iw\, -r)i, T} (46), right, justice ; 
 a penalty, punishment, deserts. 
 theo-dicy, syii-dic. 
 
 8iorxtXioi, -ai, -a, t>co thousand. 
 
 8i(0K0>, -^0), -^a, 6eSt<B;^a, ibia>)(6qv, 
 pursue, chase, hunt. 
 
 4 8ia)|is, -ccos, 7) pursuit. 
 
 8iwpv|. -vxos, T}, trench, canal, ditch. 
 
 8o0f]vai, see 8i8a)|xi. 
 
 8oK£(i> (160, 522), Sd^o), edo^a, dedoy- 
 fxai, ih6x&T)Vy think, suppose ; iulr.,, 
 seem, appear, seem best or good, 
 be voted, ortho-dox, para-dox, 
 dogma. 
 
 AoXoires, -a>v, 01, Dolopians. 
 
 8p6|xos, -ov, 6, running, flight ; bpoixco 
 Oelv, to run hastily, at fall speed, 
 double quick, dromedary. 
 
 8vva|jLai (Sum-, vii), (730, 2), hv- 
 vrjaofxai, deduvrjixai, €8vvi]6t)v, be 
 able, can, have the power, dy- 
 namic. 
 
 4. 8vvanis, -fO)y, 17, ability, power, 
 force, military power ; koto, hvva- 
 ixiv, to the best of one's power. 
 dynamite. 
 
 1 8vvaT6s, -rj, -6v (808, vocab.), 
 possible, practicable, able. 
 
 8vv(i>, .sr^ ; see 8va). 
 
 8uo, bvolv (447), two. Lat. duo, 
 
 TWO. 
 
 8v<r- (498, obs2.), hard, ill. dys- 
 
 pepsia. 
 8v<r-'iropos, -ov (498, 4), hard to pass. 
 
8^ 
 
 V(0 
 
 413 
 
 iKKkr]crid 
 
 8v«, Scffo), edva-a, make e/ifer, put on ; 
 
 mid. and 2 aor. %hvv (738), comra. 
 
 enter ; of the sun, ^«^^r, net. 
 8i&-8£Ka, indeclinable, twelve. 
 Swpov, -ou, TO, « yz/if, present. Doro- 
 
 tiiea (647). 
 
 €w (ei + av\ coutr. ^i/, ai/, if, used 
 w. subj. ; see 677, 692. 
 
 €avTOv, -x]^, -oC, or avrov^i avrrj^i av- 
 Tov, reflex, pron. (403), of him- 
 self herself itself his oicn, her 
 own. 
 
 ^yyvs, adv., near, niyh at hand ; 
 eouip. eyy VT€ pa) or -rfpor, sup. 
 eyyuraro) or eyyvrara. 
 
 kyiviTo, sec •yiYVOfxai. 
 
 e^-KcXcVO-TOS, -OV (803), {k€\(V(o), 
 
 hidden, incited, urged on. 
 
 l-y-KpaT^s, -€s, master of w. gen. 
 
 67« (391), /. Jjat. ^/^o, I, ME. 
 
 eOeXo) or e€'\«, iBeXrjaco (198, 522), 
 rjOeXrja-a, rjOeXrjKa, wish, be willing. 
 Syn. 792. 
 
 €l, conj. if with indie, or opt. (661, 
 663, 668, 681, 690) ; in yidirect 
 questions, ichether (p. 326^) ; el 
 fiTf, ifnotf unless (791, 13). Laf. 
 nisi. 
 
 d yap, if . . .^ that . . . ! would 
 that . . . ! see 669. Lat. utinam. 
 
 €T8ov, see opcuo, see, know. Lat. 
 video, WIT, spher-oid. 
 
 €t0€, inter] . that! would that! 
 see 669. Lat. utinam. 
 
 ctKoo-i, indeclinable, twenty, twenty. 
 
 €l\ov, see alpeo). 
 
 6l|xi (eV-), (288, 859), ^aofxai, he, exist ; 
 w. gen. or dat., belong to, have, pos- 
 sess (1 06, 370, 1 ) ; eoTi, it is possi- 
 ble, one can (104, 3). Lat. sum. 
 
 ctjii (i-), (739, a, b ; 860), go, eome^ 
 proceed. Syn. 741. Lat. r-b, ire. 
 
 €tirov (eV-, fV, viii.), (698, 2), 2 a. i 
 said; the pres. is supplied by 
 </)i7/ii, Xe-yo) (p. 2833), iiie f^t. and 
 pt'. by epco, f'lprjKa, etc. For the 
 use of elivov, (f)r}fii, Xeya, in con- 
 struction of indirect discourse, see 
 769 ff. Lat. voco, word. 
 
 els, prep. w. ace. only (141), into, to, 
 among, against ; up to, for ; to 
 the number of 
 
 els, pia, ev (447), one. Lat. unus. 
 
 6l<r-P(iXXw, throw into, enter, invade 
 (157, 10) ; of rivers, emply. 
 
 jclo-'PoX^, -fjs, T) (160), entrance, 
 pa.s.s\ 
 
 €l<r-€Xavva), ride or march into. 
 
 eUr-€pxo|xai (793, vocab.), go or 
 come in, enter. 
 
 AiTUi, adv. (eV), within ; w. gen., 
 within, inside of (412). 
 
 clra, adv., then, thereupon. 
 
 €£t€, disj. conj. ; el're . . . eire, tire 
 . . .% whether . . . or, either . . . 
 or. 
 
 Ik, before a vowel 4^ (46), w. gen. 
 only (141), /row, out of ; ck tovtov, 
 after this, hereupon. Lat. €.r, e. 
 
 J'Kao-Tos, -r), OV (241), eaeh, eoerjj ; 
 pi., each, several, severally. 
 
 €KaT€pii>-6ev, adv. {iKarepos, each of 
 two), on both sides. 
 
 tKarov, indecl., one hundred. 
 
 lK-PaXX(i», throw outy banish, expel. 
 
 4K-8€pa> (756, vocab,), -depot, -edeipa, 
 ■Bedapfiai, eddpr}v, skin. fay. tear. 
 
 Ik€i, adv., there, in that place. 
 
 €K€ivos, -r], -o, dem. pron. (180), 
 that, he. Lat. Ule ; frequently 
 best rendered he, she, it (188). 
 
 cK-KXtio-id. -a?, ^, an aasemhly, meeting 
 (674). ecclesiastic. 
 
eKKOTTTCO 
 
 414 
 
 i^LKveofiai 
 
 cK-KdiTTw, cu^ out, off, or down. 
 CK-Xetirw (540), leave out, leave, 
 
 abandon, forsake, fail, eclipse. 
 kK-ttiTrTVi, fall out or down; as pass. 
 
 to cK^aXXca, be driven out, be 
 
 banished. 
 Ik-ttX^ttw, -TrXjy^o), e^eVXry^a, 
 
 •^iiikriya, -neTrXrjyfjiai, -eTr^dyrjv, 
 
 strike out of one's senses, confuse, 
 
 alarm, terrify, flag, aj)()-plexy. 
 iK-^tv'^a, flee forth, escape. 
 6K(&v, -ova-a, -6v (265), willing ; in 
 
 pred. willingly (27]). 
 4'XaPov, see Xa|ipdv(o. 
 IXavva)(€Xa-,v.),(6ai, 4), eX«(520//); 
 
 rjkava, eXtjXaKa, e\r)\afiat, rjXd- 
 
 6t]v, drive, ride, sc. dpfxa or Imrov, 
 
 ride, march. Syii. 741. elastic. 
 cXecrOai, see alpew. 
 IX€vO£pid, -as r], freedom, liberty. 
 f 'EXXos, dbos. fj, Greece. 
 "EXXtjv, -rjvos, 6, a Greek. 
 \. 'EXXt]vtK6s, -j^, -6v, Grecian, Greek; 
 
 TO 'YXKriviKov {(TTparevyLo), the 
 
 Greek army. Hellenic. 
 4 'EXX-qviKws, adv., in Greek. 
 f *EXXT]<nrovTiaK6s, -^, -6v, situated 
 
 on the Hellespont. 
 'EXX'^o-'irovTOs, -ov, 6, Hellespont, 
 
 Dardanelles. 
 IXirCs, -ihos, ri (227), hope. 
 i\i.avrov, rjs (403), reflex, pron., of 
 
 myself. 
 IjA-PaCvo) (183, 3), -^■fja-Ofiai, -e^rjv, 
 
 ■^e^TjKa, go into or on board, 
 
 embark. 
 '4p,-P(xXX6) (188), throw in; empty ; 
 ■ inflict ; make an attack, invade. 
 l|jLoO, IfjLot, Ifjie ; see l-yw. 
 In6s, -T], ov (407), wy, mi??e. Lat. 
 
 tneus, MINE, MY. 
 Ift-irCirXfjiii, -nXrjcrco, -eTrXfja-a, -rre- 
 TrXrjKa, flll tip, satisfy. 
 
 k^-':ti'trr<a,fall tipon, occur to. 
 
 €|x-irpo<r96v, adv. w. geu., before^ in 
 front 0/(412). 
 
 €v, prep. (141) w. dat. only (46), in, 
 at, by, 071, among, during ; iv 8(- 
 ^la, on the right ; iv w (;^poi/a)), 
 while. Lat, in. 
 
 cvSov, adv. {iv), within, inside. 
 
 6V€Ka or 4'v£K€v, post-posit, prep , w. 
 5?eu., on account of, for the sake of 
 
 €v0a, didiV. ,whe}'e, there, here,whither; 
 when, then, thereupon. 
 
 j €V0ev, adv., thence, whence; of 
 time, thereupon. 
 
 kvvio., indecl., nine. 
 
 €v-oiKeb>, -jjo-o), live in, inhabit. 
 
 lv-opau>, see in a person or tiling. 
 
 cvravOa, adv. (evda), there, here; 
 then, thereupon, hereupon. 
 
 €v-TeX'^s, -es (709), {jiKos, end), at 
 the end, full, complete. 
 
 €VT€ii0€V, adv. (ev3a), thence, hence, 
 thereupon. 
 
 iv-rvyyjivM, happen upon, fall in 
 icith, meet, flnd. Synt. 147. 
 
 4|. prep. ; see ^k. 
 
 c'l, indecl., six. Lnt. sex, six, hex- 
 agon. 
 
 4|-a'y"y€XX«, bring out word, report. 
 
 c|-aiT€o> (241), ask from, demand ; 
 mid., beg off, intercede, gain a 
 person's release. Syn. 271. 
 
 6^aKi<r-xtXioi, ai, a, six thou- 
 sand. 
 
 €|a-K6orioi, -at, -a, six hundred. 
 
 l|-€Xavva) (95), drive out, expel; intr., 
 ride, march forth or on, proceed. 
 
 ^^%-^9y>PV-^^> [/o or come out, escape. 
 
 €|-€Ta(ris, -fcos, f], a military inspec- 
 tion or review. 
 
 4^-iKVCO(iai (634), -l^oixat, -iKOfirjv, 
 'tyfiai, come forth to, reach, reach 
 the mark, hit ; amount to (803). 
 
ef 
 
 ecoj 
 
 415 
 
 epojjLai 
 
 4'|«, adv. (763), without; w, gen. 
 (412), outside of, without, heyotul. 
 
 €ir-aiV€W (524), -etro), eTr^veaa, eV/y- 
 v€Ka, praise, thank, applaud, com- 
 mend. 
 
 ^ircjy (eVei -f" a*')} 'when, whenever, as 
 soon as. 
 
 kird, coiij. (709), when, after, since. 
 
 eirciS-dv {ineLhr] -\- av), temp, conj., 
 (709), wheii, whenever, as soon as, 
 after that. 
 
 4ir€i-8^ (hry), when, when 7iow, since, 
 now indeed. 
 
 €ir-€ip.i («/At), (741), be upon ; over. 
 
 eir-cifjii (eliM), (741), ^o or come on, 
 advance, attack. 
 
 6ir-€iTa (tTTi -J" €ira), then, thereupon, 
 moreover. 
 
 Iir^v, temp. conj. (709) ; see cirdv. 
 
 Iir£, prep. (141), upon : w. gen , upon, 
 at, near, for ; eir\ tovtov, for this 
 purpose {14:2) ; em TeTrdpoiv, four 
 deep, cf. 774, N. 6 ; w. dat. 7iear, on, 
 eVi OaXaTTT), on the sea; of hostil- 
 ity, against ; of time, in, on, by, 
 or at ; eVt tovt<i^, upon this, there- 
 upon ; in the power of, eVi rw abek- 
 (f)a, in the power of his brother ; 
 w. ace., upon, on, to, towards, 
 against, epi-gram, epi-Iogue. 
 
 f liri-povXevw (149), plan or plot 
 against, design. Synt. 147. 
 
 €Trt-PovXi^, -^s 17, a plot. 
 
 liri-8€CKVv|jLi (741), show, point out, 
 exhibit, make clear; mid., show 
 for one's self show. 
 
 C7ri-0v|i€(0 (Ovfios, soul), (251), -iJtos, 
 to set one's heart upon a thing, 
 desire eagerly, wish. 
 
 Iiti-kCvSvvos, -ov, dangerous, insecure, 
 perilous. 
 
 liri-KpvirTw (638), conceal, hide. 
 
 4m-\€£ir<tf, leave behind^ fail, he left. 
 
 liri-ficXeoixai (/xeAet), -fMeXfja-ofxai, -fit- 
 jjLeXrjfjLai, -efifXrjdrjv, care for, take 
 care of, observe carefully, give at- 
 tention to. 
 
 Im-opKc'o) (opKos), -^a-o), etc. ; swear 
 falsely; mid., perjure one's self; 
 synt. 603. 
 
 iTTi-irovos, -ov (ttoVos, toil), painful, 
 toilsome, laborious. 
 
 cirio-Tafiai (eVttrra-, vii.), ema-Trjao- 
 fxai, TjTTiarT^Orjv (730, 3), under- 
 stand, know,, know how. 
 
 liri-o'ToX'^, -^y, 17, a letter, epistle. 
 
 liriTi^Scios, -a, -6u, suitable, fit ;. 
 neut. pi., provisions. Lat. ido- 
 
 VP.US. 
 
 ^iri-TiOrini, place upon, hifiict, im- 
 pose ; mid., attack, epithet, 
 
 4iri-Tp€'ir«, turn over to, permit, in- 
 trust, commit. 
 
 liri-TVYxdvw, chance upon, fall upon, 
 find, meet with. 
 
 ^iri-(|>a£vo(iai, appear. 
 
 ciri-xwpc'w, -^o-o) (786,vocab.),a<fw<?'«<r<?. 
 
 I'lrojiai, eyjrofxai, tGiv6p.rjv (533) ; fol- 
 low, accompatiy, pursue ; w. dat. 
 
 iirrd, indech, seven. Lat. septem. 
 hepta-gon, seven. 
 
 \. eirra-Kdo-iot, -at, -a, seven hundred. 
 
 'Eirva^a, -i;?, ^, Epyaxa, wife of 
 Syennesis. 
 
 IpYOv, -ov, TO, work, deed, execu- 
 tion, en-ergy, Ge-orgic, Ge-orge, 
 
 WORK. 
 
 €pTi}ios, -»;, -ov or -os, ov (302) ; 
 deserted, uninhabited, without, de- 
 prived of hermit. 
 
 6>(t« (e>'S-, iv.,), (612, 1), -t'o-6), 
 fjpiaa, contend tcith, strive; w. dat. 
 
 €p}iTjv€vs, -ecus', 6, an interpreter. 
 hermeneutic. 
 
 €po|i.ai, (772), fpriaopai, fjpofJLrjv, ask, 
 inquire ; cf. iparaoa (271). 
 
epxoH^ai 
 
 416 
 
 (^do) 
 
 epxoHKU (epx; fXvB-, viii), eXevao- 
 fiai £Xr]Xv6a, rjkdov (698, 3), come^ 
 ijo ; ill Attic prose, t i/xt is used 
 for iXevaofiai (739, b^ Syii. 741. 
 pros-elyte. 
 
 ipuTdo), -^o-o), etc., 2 a. rjpofirju, 
 ask, as/c a question, inquire ; cf. 
 ?/3o/Liat(77'2). 
 
 I<r0ift) (eV^t-, eS-, <^ay-, viii.), edofiai, 
 f(f)ayov, edrjboKa, edr]d€a[jiai, rjde- 
 aBrjv, eat, live on (342). EAT. 
 
 e<rT6, coiij. (705), until. 
 
 ecrxaros, -r\, -ov {i^), furthest ; high- 
 est, lowest^ like Lat. summus, ex- 
 treme, last, worst ; noKiv iaxa- 
 Tt)v, a frontier city. 
 
 Irepos, -a, -ov^ the one or the other 
 of two. Lat. alter ; without arli- 
 cle, another, other. Lat. alius, 
 hetero-dox. 
 
 tr\., adv. (328), yet, as yet, longer, 
 still ; w. a ueg., no longer, at all, 
 never again. 
 
 lroi|ios, -i;, -ov, or os, ov, ready, 
 prepared. 
 
 €v, adv. (470), well, happily; ev 
 jroicti/, do well by (4<68, «). eu- 
 phouy. 
 
 f «& S(U{i«vC|a) {(evhai\Lovih-, iv.),(4l4), 
 -to-©, esteem or <?0i!^y2^ happy ^ con- 
 gratulate. 
 
 ci-8aC(i,ci)v, -o»', -oi/os (8at/iA0)j'), of good 
 fortune, fortunate, happy, prosper- 
 ous ; -ovicrepos, -oveararos. 
 
 f cv-'fjOcio, -as, T], goodness of disposi- 
 tion, simplicity ; \\\ a bad sense, 
 silliness, stunidity, folly. 
 
 ci-'fj8T]$, -€s {r]6o9, character), well 
 disposed, simple-minded ; \n a 
 bad sense, simple, silly, foolish. 
 ethics. 
 
 fiOvs, adv., straightway, at once, im- 
 
 •j- €v-voia, -as, rj (482, 2), good-will, 
 fidelity. 
 
 f €iJ-votK«s, adv. i^^Z), friendly ; fv- 
 voiKws exoiev airrtOf that they might 
 be friendly to him (592, 8). 
 
 6V-V0VS, -ovv (170, 3), well-minded^ 
 well or kindly disposed, attached 
 to one. 
 
 cv-iropos, -ov, easy to pass through. 
 
 evpifTKb) {jivpr, vi.), evpijao), evpov 
 (586), Of rjvpov, evprjKa, evprjfiai, 
 evpfdrjv (651, 2), find, discover, 
 devise, procure. 
 
 €vpos, -€os, -ou?, -TO (jevpvs, broad), 
 (329), breadth, width. 
 
 Ev<{>pdTT]s, -ov, 6, Euphrates. 
 
 €v-(i)VV(iOS, -ov (eu + ovofia)^ (297)» of 
 good omen or name, left ; euphe- 
 mistic for the ill-omeiied word 
 dpicTTcpo^, left, on the left hand ; 
 TO €va>uvpov (/c/pas), the left wing. 
 
 "E<|>eo-os, -ov, fi, Ephe.ms. 
 
 4'<}>-o8os, -ov, rj, way to., approach. 
 
 «X^P°S, -a, -ov, hostile, unfriendly ; 
 comp. 379, 3 ; 6 ixQpos,foe, enemy. 
 Lat. hostis. Syn. 709. 
 
 €X« (or€;(-), e^a» c\x tTxj\<T<ii [holdimf), 
 (O-xov, €(rx^Kci, ea-xrip-ai, €(rxe6r]v 
 (538,4); imp., elxov (649), have, 
 hold; mid. w. geu., cling to; 
 gen. intrans. with adv., 6e ; ^x^iv 
 KokSa, be well (p. 192^). Lat. 
 habeo ; scheme, hectic. 
 
 e'ws, «», if (364), dawn, morning. 
 
 EAST. 
 
 6«s, adv. and conj., as long as, while, 
 until ; see 705. 
 
 ^dtw (342). Ch^oi, live, be alive. Zo- 
 diac, Zod-logy. 
 
i^evyvufJLL 
 
 417 
 
 (9. 
 
 €09 
 
 Setryvvnt (Cvy, v.), (730, 2), C^v^ca, 
 
 yoke ijoln o r ^ *V^^ ; luuUe u/\i^[). 
 YOKE. 
 
 ^Tiv, t«v ; see 5<"«»- 
 
 Zcvs, Aioff, 6, ^«?<!^5 ; voc Zeu. Lat. 
 
 Jupiler, Tues-day. 
 XryriiHf -rja-o) (241), seek, ask for. 
 
 t>yu. 271. 
 
 H. 
 
 rj, conj., or ; rj . . . ^, either . . . or ; 
 TTorepov . . . ry (586), whether . . . 
 or ; interrogative iu indirect or 
 direct questions, whether ; com- 
 parative, than (586). Lat. quam. 
 
 1], adv. (S03), truly ^ verily ; in \\\- 
 terrof^. sentences = Lat. -ne ? 
 what ? pray ? yea. 
 
 B. dat. of OS, often used adv. (so. 
 oSg)), in what way, where ; jj 
 ihvvaro raxt(rTd, as quickly as 
 poHsihle (p. 80.>^). 
 
 ■f i|7€)t(Gv, -ovos, 6 (227), guidej leader 
 (513). 
 
 ij^ycofiai (361), -rjaoixai, etc ; rjyrjixai 
 (366), (/o before, lead ; w. dat., 
 go before; w. gen., lead, com- 
 ma nd ; decide (513). 
 
 ijSc'ws (i^Svs), adv. (459, 4), with 
 pleasure, gladly ; rj8i.ov, ' fjtta-Ta 
 (464, a). 
 
 iqSti, adv., already, now. at once. 
 
 i^So(j,ai, fjaOfjaofjLat, rjaSrjv, be pleased 
 irith, glad. 
 
 |tj5us, -ela, -V (484, 1), sweet, agree- 
 ahle, pleasant (302) ; ijSto)./ (382), 
 fjbia-Tos (379, 1). Lat. sudvis, 
 
 SWEET. 
 
 tfXOov, see cpxopiai. 
 i^'xw (95), inipf. riKov. rj^cd, the pres. 
 indie, is used as p!'., and the impf. 
 
 comm. as plupf., come, have come; 
 
 return, come back. Lat. adsum. 
 ■qXios, d, the sun. peii-helion, helio- 
 trope. 
 TJf&cpa, -as, r] (46), (/<^^ ; c^La rfi rjfiepa, 
 
 at daybreak (224, 7). epli-emer- 
 
 ral. 
 i](i.ETepos, -a, -oj/ (^juieTv), o«/- ; to ^/i«- 
 
 repa, o«/* affairs. 
 TJjjti-, only in composition, ^a^(498, 
 
 obs.8). Lat. semi-, Eng hemi-. 
 ^ i]|Ai-8apciK6v, -ov, TO {ddpeiKos)^ 
 
 half-daric. 
 4 ij|jii-8€Tis, -€s (Sew), wanting half 
 
 half full (498, 6). 
 I ij|u-6Xios, d, -ov (oXos), (810, 
 
 vocab.), whole and a half, half as 
 
 much again. 
 \ ijp,i-TrXc0pov, -ov, TO, half a pleth- 
 
 ron, ffty Greek feet. 
 iqv, = Idv, q. V. 
 ifv, sec cljiC. 
 TJpo'}i.Tiv, see epop.au 
 i]TTaop,ai (756, voca}).), ^TTrjaofiai or 
 
 rjTTrjdfjaofiai, rJTTrjfiai, rjTTrjdrjv, 
 
 used as pass, to vikoco, be inferior, 
 
 be conquered. 
 
 0. 
 
 OotXaTTa, -i;s, r] (46) sea ; Kara 6a- 
 Xarrai*, by sea. 
 
 OappEu, -r](T(ii (806, vocab.), A<? of 
 good courage, be bold. 
 
 eaujio^o) (6avfia8-, iv.), (608, 3) Oav 
 fxaaofMai, iOavfiaaa, reBavfiOKa, 
 edavfxaadrjv, wotider, admire, won- 
 der at, be surprised or astonished 
 (420, 1); 467,11,13. 
 
 Oatf/OKOS, -ov, rj, Thapsacus. 
 
 OeXo), see lOcXw. 
 
 6€o's, -ov, 6, rj (371), god, goddess. 
 a theist, theism, theo-logj. 
 
 27 
 
BerraXLCt 
 
 418 
 
 KoiOrjixai 
 
 0€TTaX£tt -as, ff, Thzssaly. 
 
 ©CTToXos, -ov, 6, a Thesaalian. 
 
 6€a> (^v, ii.)) (529, 4), Oevaoixai, run, 
 
 charge. See Tpex<i>' 
 Oeupeo), -^(7», »/(?«^, observe, review. 
 
 theorem, theory. 
 Otjpcuo (^^pa {6rip), a hunt), (366), -a<7&), 
 
 etc. ; hunt or <?^«a'(? wild beasts, 
 \ Otipevo) (123), -(ixrat, etc., /^«^^, 
 
 I Otiptov, -oi;, TO (123), «>i7c? animal, 
 
 beast. 
 6ir/j(rK(a (^ai^-, vi.), (651, 3), Bavovfiai, 
 
 fOavov, Tf0vr)Ka, die, be slain ; used 
 
 as pass, to aTroKreivat ; pf. has force 
 
 of the pres. (659). 
 ®P9l» OpaKos, 6, a Thracian. 
 OiryctTTip, -T/jos, ^ (362), a daughter. 
 
 DAUGHTER. 
 
 0v)&Ppioy, -ow, TO, Thfmbrium. 
 
 e«pd, -ds, 17 (46), a </oor ; cVi toIs /3a- 
 aiKeas Ovpats, at court ; so ^upat 
 denotes a general's headquarters. 
 Lat. /bm, door. 
 
 0vti>, 6va-a>, ZOvaa, reOvKa, ridvixat, 
 hvOiju, sacrifice, celebrate with 
 sacrifices (259,8) ; mid., to sacri- 
 fice in order to read the future. 
 
 t OwpaxCtw {6a>pciKi8-, iv.), -iaco, arm 
 with the breastplate. 
 
 e»pfi|, -5/C09, 6 (214, No. 6), « hrea&t- 
 plaie. thorax. 
 
 ISctv, I8«v, see opoua. 
 
 tSios, -id, -OP, private, personal ; as 
 
 subst. TO Xbiov ; els to 'idiov, for 
 
 one's private use (804, vocab.). 
 
 idiom, idio-syncrasy. 
 Irijii (€-),( 796), ^o-ci), ^/ca, ei/ca, ct/nm, 
 
 fii^i', *^«^, throw; mid., n«'/^, 
 
 r/jr//v7^ (861). 
 
 f ixavo's, -17, -oi'(123), -dyrepos, -mraTOS, 
 sujjUcient, able, enough, fit {jS'6'd). 
 
 lKV60[jLai (t/c-, v.), t^ofjLcu, come (639). 
 
 *Ikoviov, -ov, to. Iconium. 
 
 iXtj, -);s, ^, a crowd, a band, company, 
 a troop of cavalry (774, vocab.). 
 
 iva, final conj., that, in order that 
 (579). ^ 
 
 -j- lirircvs, -€0)5, 6 (481), horseman; 
 pi. r«<;«/ry (297, No. 9). 
 
 f linriKos, -r], -6u, of a horse or ho7'se- 
 man ; to linrKov, cavalry. 
 
 tinros, -OK, 6, jj, «5 horse, a mare; 
 ano or t'c^' ittttov, o;? horseback 
 (616). hippo-potamus. 
 
 lo-o'-'irXevpos, -01/ (TrXeupa), (501, 3), 
 ^f'^Y/^ «?^«#«/ sides, equilateral. 
 
 *I<r<roC, -wv, ol, Issi, commonly Isms. 
 
 Ko-Tiin,i (ora-, vii), (730, 1), CTrjaa), 
 eaTTjaa, caTTjv, earTrjKa, earafxai, 
 (OTadriv ; f . pf. iaTrj^co, place, 
 station, set, make to stand, make 
 halt (Lat. sisto) ; intrans., iu 2 
 aor., pf., plupf., and fut. pf., act. 
 and mid., except aor. (621), stand, 
 halt, be set or stationed (Lat. sto) ; 
 the pf. and plupf. are used as pres. 
 and impf. (620, obs.). stand, stay. 
 
 f IffXvpos, -4 Of* strong, powerful. 
 
 ^ Icrxvpws, adv., strongly, exceed- 
 ingly, very severely. 
 
 Icrxws, -vos., tj (290), strength, military 
 force. 
 
 i\Qvs, -vos, 6 (297), a fish, ichthyo- 
 
 'Iwvio, -as, T}, Ionia. 
 I'lwviKo's, -r), -6v, Ionian. 
 
 KaOfvSo), lie down, sleep, lie idle. 
 Kcij9-Tjnai (796), sit doicn, be seated^ 
 be encamped (862). 
 
KaOtaTyifJiL 
 
 419 
 
 KdOi 
 
 Ka0-£o-nj|jii (628), sei down, appoint, 
 Ma/ce, arrange ; iutrans. in 2 aor., 
 pf., and plupf., and in all tenses 
 of mid. except aor. (621), take 
 one's place, be placed, set down^ 
 be established. 
 
 Ka£, conj., and (Lat. et^ ; intens. 
 also, too, even (Laf. etiuni) ; Kai d, 
 even if, Kai yap (372), see "ydp ; koI 
 . . . Kai or Te . . . Kai, both . . . and, 
 not only, but also (109). 
 
 KaCti), see Kdw. 
 
 KaKo's, -j), -ov (271), bad, wicked ; 
 base, cowardly ; to kukov, evil, 
 harm ; KaKi(ov, KaKia-ros (o79, 4). 
 
 |KaK«s, adv. (459, 1^, ill, badly; 
 noulv KUKai, to treat ill (468). 
 
 KoXeo), KaXcVo), KaXw (254), e^caXftra, 
 KCKXrjKa (p. 142^), K€K\r}fiai, ckXt]- 
 6r]v, call, summon, name ; Kptjurj f) 
 Midov KaXovfxe'vr], the so-called 
 spring of Midas (774, § 13). haul, 
 PC clesiastic (074). 
 
 KoXo's, -i}, -6v, beautiful (Lat. pulcher); 
 fair, favorable ; honorable, noble ; 
 of sacrifices, anf<pirious, favora- 
 ble ; KaKKioiV, KaXXtoTos (380, 2). 
 HALE, WHOLE, HOLY, calU-grapliy. 
 
 4 KaXws, adv., fairly, well ; KaXcos 
 c;(fti/, to be well (p. 192^) ; Kok- 
 Xlov, /caXXtora (404). 
 
 Kdv = Kai av, iav, and if 
 
 Ka-rrT^Xetov, -ov, to (793, Vocab.), 
 sh/fl. shop, inn. 
 
 Kair-iraSoKid, -ay, f}, Cappadocia. 
 
 Kapo-os. -ov, o, the Carsns. 
 
 Kao-TwXo's, -oC, fj, Castolus ; Kaaro)- 
 Xnv Tvebiov, the plain of Castolus. 
 
 Karol, prep. (141), down; w. gen., 
 down from, down, down upon ; w. 
 ace., down, down along, along, over, 
 throughout ; overagaitist, opposite, 
 against ; according to, by ; KaTo. 
 
 yijv, by land; KUTa tXas, by or 
 
 in companies, cata-strophe. 
 Kara-Paivw (302), go down, descend, 
 
 dismount. 
 KaT-a-yo), lead down or hack, restore. 
 Kara-Svo), malie go down, sink. 
 Kara-Kaivo) (/cay-, iv.), -Kap5>, -eKavov, 
 
 -K€Kova, cut down, kill, slay. 
 Kara-Kaa), burn down or np, destroy. 
 KaTa-Ko'iTTw, cut down or in pieces, 
 
 slay. 
 KaTa-Xa|xpdv(o (251), take, capture, 
 
 seize, preoccupy, overtake, fall 
 
 upon, find, catalepsy. 
 Kara-Xeiira) (786, vocab.), leave^ 
 
 abandon ; pass., be left, aban- 
 doned ; stay or remain behind. 
 KaT-aXXttTT« {SKkos;), (673), -aX- 
 
 Xa^o), -^XXo^a, -jJXXap^a, -^XXay/iat, 
 
 -r)tCkayi]v, change, reconcile (629). 
 Kara-Xvo), unloose, destroy, break 
 
 down; make an end; mid., sc. 
 
 TrdXe/ioi/, make peace ; w. Trpos and 
 
 ace, to terminate the war against, 
 
 to come to an agreement with 
 
 (708, 8) ; sc. Ititzov^, unyoke, 
 
 halt, rest (523, 3). 
 KaTa-vo€« (i/dos), -^(ro), observe well, 
 
 consider. 
 KaTa-ir€(ji'Tra), seyid down. 
 KaTa-ir€Tpdc«), (neTpos, stone), -ene- 
 
 Tpa>dr)v, stone to death, petrel, 
 
 petrify. 
 KaTa-irporTCD, execute, accomplish. 
 KaTa-Ti9ii|j.i (804, vocab.), ^i^^ or lay 
 
 down ; raid., place away, hoard. 
 KaTa-<{>avi^S, -€? (<\)aiva>), (842), 
 
 clearly visible, in plain sight' 
 Kara-^tvyta, fee for refuge, escape. 
 KaT-e'xw, hold down or back, restrain. 
 KaiicTTpov TcSCov, -ov, to, the plain 
 
 of Cayster, Caysterfield. 
 Kdu), Att. for Ka(o> (*cau-, iv.), (609, a); 
 
KeufiaL 
 
 420 
 
 Kvpos 
 
 Kavaco. €Kav(ra, KtKovKa, KiKOVfiai, 
 €KavBr]v (015), bum, kindle, set on 
 fire, caustic. 
 
 Kctfiai (868), imperf. eKe'ifjirju, Kciao- 
 fiai, lie, lie dead ; used as pass, 
 to Tt(9?;fti (796). cemetery. 
 
 KeXaivai, -coj/, at, CeUence. 
 
 KeXevci) (830), -eucrco, e'fceAevtra, xe/ce- 
 AevAca, KeKeXevafxai, (325, mid.), ckc- 
 \eva6r]v (521, 3), command, bid, 
 urge. Lat. iiibeo. 
 
 Kepa^jLov d-yopd -as, x], the market of 
 th:; Ceramians, Cer anion Agora. 
 
 K€pdvvv|xi {K€pa , v.), (774, vocab.), 
 Kfpdaco, CKtpaaa, KeKpofxai, e'fce- 
 pdaOrjv or eKpaOijv, mix, mingle. 
 crasis. 
 
 Kcpas, -aros, -aos, -cos, to (331), a 
 horn, the wing of an army, l^at, 
 cornu, HAKT, rliiuo-ceros. 
 
 K{)pv|, -vKos, 6 (476, 2), a herald 
 (074). 
 
 \. KTjpiirTO) {KrjpvK-, iv.), -^o), eKrjpv^a, 
 etc., be a herald, 'proclaim. 
 
 t KtXiKCd, -a?, ^, Cilicia. 
 
 K£Xt|. Kt'XtKof, ^, 6, a Cilician. 
 
 \ KCXio-o-a, -d? or -lyy, ^, Cilician 
 woman or queeti. 
 
 f Kiv8vv€iJa) (493, 6), -ev(T(o, etc., /5^«9 
 m danger, incur danger, run a, 
 risk. 
 
 kCvSvvos, -ov, 6, danger, risk. 
 
 ElXeavcop, -opo9, 6, Clednor. 
 
 KXcapxos, -ov, 6, Clearchus, a Spar- 
 tan commander ia Cyrus's ser- 
 vice. 
 
 KoXoo-oraC, -oav, at, Colossae. 
 
 KOTTTO) (kott-, I'ii.), (587, 1), cKoyp-a, 
 KcKocfia, KCKoppai, fKOTrrfv, cut, hew, 
 slaughter; of trees, fell (593). 
 CHOP, comma, syn-cope, syn- 
 copate. 
 
 Kparco) {Kparos, strength), -rj(T(o, etc., 
 
 be strong, rule, conquer, become 
 master of, hold (696). demo- 
 crat, etc. 
 
 KpdTwri'os, strongest, best ; sup. of 
 dya66s (380, 1) ; Syn. 388 ; Kpd- 
 Tiara, adv. (464, a), in the Lest 
 manner, most bravely. 
 
 Kpav-yi^, -^s, r], a shout, outcry, clamor. 
 
 Kpc'as, Kptois, TO (329), fieshy meat 
 (342). creo-sote. 
 
 KpttTTCDv, stronger, better ; comp. of 
 dyaOos (380, 1; 388). 
 
 Kp€(idvvu;ii (Kpepa-, v.), (756, vocab.), 
 KpepS) (254), €Kpefxaaa, hang up^ 
 suspend. 
 
 Kp^vT] -rjs, fj, fountaiti, spring. 
 
 Kp'iis, KpT^roy, 6, a Cretan. 
 
 Kptvw Upiv-, iv.), (598), ffpti'co (255) ; 
 eKpLva, K€KpiKa, eKpipai, eKplSrjv 
 (605), distinguish, judge, esti- 
 mate. Lat. cerno, critic. 
 
 JKpio-is, -ecos, 17 (479, 1), decision, 
 trial, crisis, hypo-crite, etc. 
 
 KpvirTO) (Kpv(f)-, iii.), (593), -■v//-©, 
 -yjra, -(fid, -(pOrjv, KeKpvppai, cKpv- 
 (jjrji', hide, conceal. Lat. tcgo, 
 crypt, grot, grotto. 
 
 KToLofjiai, KTrjanpai, €KTr]adpr)v, KeKTrj- 
 pai, €KTr]6r]v, acquire, gain, win ; 
 pf. as present, possess, enjoy ; 
 plpf. as impf. ; fut. pf. as fut. 
 
 KT€£va) {kt^v-, iv.), (597, 1), Kr^voa, 
 (255) €KT€iva, €KTova, kill; rare 
 as simple veil) ; see arroKTcCvw. 
 
 KTfJiJLa, -aTos, ToiKTaopai). (480, obs.), 
 possession ; pL, property (593). 
 
 KvSvos, -ov, 6, Cydnus. 
 
 kvkXos, 'OV, 6, circle, cycle, bi- 
 cycle. 
 
 Kvpos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. Cyrus the 
 Younger, the younger brother of 
 Artaxerxes, whom he attempted 
 to dethrone (432). 
 
Xv( 
 
 KCJAVO) 
 
 421 
 
 M 
 
 aiaz^i 
 
 Spo9 
 
 Kw\^ (123), -i;o-(B, etc., hinder, 
 oppose ; w. geu., hinder one from 
 doing a thing. 
 
 f KWjji-apxTis, -ou, 6 (501, 1), village- 
 chief. 
 
 K(6|ii), -j;p, ^ {Keifiai, lie), a village^ 
 
 ■ Lat. <?m5, « villager; hive, 
 HOME, comic, com-edy. 
 
 I Ka)|i^Tt|s, -ov, 6 (481, obs.), villager. 
 
 A. 
 
 XaPeiv, XajSaJi/, see Xafi^dva. 
 
 Xa-yws, -«», 6 (363), « /^«/r. 
 
 XoBpa (Xai/^ai/o)), adv., secretly ; w. 
 gen. without the knowledge of. 
 
 AaK€8ai|jLovios, -a, -ov, a Lacedae- 
 monian ; w. 6, a subst. 
 
 Xa|ipdv« (Xa^-, v.), (633, 1), \^^o- 
 liai, eXa^ov, eiXijcpa, etXrjUfxai, 
 iXrj(f)dT}v, take (Lat. capib) ; re- 
 ceive (Lat. accipio) ; obtain^ get,* 
 etc. ; overtake, find, seize, cap- 
 ture (52) ; XayL^dv€iv audpas, en- 
 list men. di-lemma. 
 
 XaiJLirpoTTjs. -r]Tos, fj, splendor. 
 
 XavOdvu) {XaO-, v.), (633), Xrjao), 
 eXaOov, XeXrjda, XcXj/cr/xai (Lat. 
 la tea), lie hid, escape the notice of 
 (251), Syiit. 603; mid, forget ; 
 Tpc(p6iJ,€vov iXdvdaveu, was secretly 
 supported (245). lethargy, lethe, 
 lethargic, etc. 
 
 Xe'-yw, Xe'^o), eXe^a, XeXey/xai, eXc- 
 ;(^)7i' (for pf. and 2 a. act. etprjKa 
 and ftTToi^ are used), (698, 2), 
 say, speak, mention ; bid, propose 
 (769, d) ; Xeyerai, it is said, 
 reckoned, considered (725). Syn. 
 772. Lat. died. 
 
 \iyoi, gather ; see a-vX\4y<a. 
 
 Xiiiroi (XtTT-, ii.), (529, 1), eXiirov, 
 XeXoiTra, Xe'Af t/ijuai, iXeicfiOrjv, leave, 
 
 abandon, forsake; pass. ^(9 /<?/)f, 
 i^*-? /(j/lf over, survive. Lat. linqu.b 
 
 (541), LEND. 
 
 t XiOivos, -?;, -01/, of stone. 
 
 Xi0os, -ov, 6, a stone, litho-graph. 
 
 Xd-yos, -ov, 6 (359), « e<?or(/, a?/*- 
 course, speech, argument, logic, 
 dia-logue, bio-logy, eu-logy. 
 
 Xoiirds, -17, -6v (XeiVo)), (359), left, 
 remaining, the rest of ; to Xoittov, 
 for the future, henceforth. 
 
 Xo(t>os, -ov, 6, a ridge, hill. 
 
 f Xoxayo's, -ov, 6(494, 3), a captain, 
 tlie commander of a X6)(o<i (513). 
 
 Xo'xos, -ov, 6 (Xeyo), /6<i^, gather), am- 
 bush, men in ambush, a company 
 composed of about one hundred 
 men. lie, log. 
 
 AvSid, -ds, 17, Lydia. 
 
 AvKttios, -d, -ov, belonging to Mount 
 Lycaeum, Lycaean ; Oveiv ra Av- 
 Kaia, to celebrate the Lycaea with 
 sacrifices (263), a festival cele- 
 brated by the Arcadians in honor 
 
 of Z?!US. 
 
 AvKoovid, -Off, f], Lycaonia. 
 
 AvKios, -ov, 6, Lycins, a Syraciisan. 
 
 Xv^aivo|xai {Xvp,av-, iv.), Xvpavovp.ai, 
 XeXvpa(rp,ai, treat with indignity, 
 outrage, spoil, frustrate, ruin. 
 
 Xwrc'ft), -jjo-o), annoy, grieve, harass. 
 
 Xvw (31). Xvcro), eXvcra, XeXvxa, XcXv- 
 /xai, i\vBr]v, loose, break a treaty 
 or otfM, destroy, break down. Lat . 
 lub, LOSE, LOOSE, ana-lyze (541), 
 (20, 825-831). 
 
 M. 
 
 Ma£av8pos, -ov, 6, Me Maeander, a 
 river separating Lydia from Caria, 
 of windinjc course, meander. 
 
fjLaKpo^ 
 
 422 
 
 MiqStd 
 
 |jLaKpos, -d, -6u, long ; ftaKp&repos, 
 
 HaKpOTUTOS (375, 4). 
 
 |Mi\a, udv. (463), very, nmc/i, ex- 
 ceedingly ; fiaXXov (378, 1), more, 
 rather ; fxaXiaTa, most, especially. 
 
 |jiav6av(i> {fiad-, v.), (633, 3), fiadrjxro- 
 fxai, efxaBov, yif^aOrjKa, learn by 
 inquiry, understand, hear of. 
 mathematics. 
 
 Mapo-vos, -ou, 6 (756, § 8), Marsyas, 
 a Plirygian satyr (52) ; the Mar- 
 syas, a small river of Phrygia, 
 flowing into the Maeander. 
 
 MouTKds, -a, 6, the Mascas. 
 
 V-^\% -V^> V i^TT^ l)j battle, fight. 
 
 Iiiaxofiai (361), fiaxovfiai (520, 
 4, a), fiejJLdxrjfiai, ejxaxfo-dfirjv 
 {'SQG), fight, fight with, give battle, 
 w. dat. (225, a) ; w. Trpds, against; 
 w. otJc, with the aid of. 
 
 ljiiy6X<a9, adv. (459; obs.), greatly. 
 
 Me-yapcvs, -ecot, 6, a Me g aria n. 
 
 I&c'yas, fieydXr}, fxeya (299), great, 
 large; important , potaerful ; fxet^oiv 
 (378, 2); fieyiaros (3S0, 3) ; fitya, 
 fieydXa, often adv. (460), greatly ; 
 TO ixeyia-Tov, chiefiy. Lat. magnus, 
 MUCH, 0-mega (710). 
 
 M€-Ya(t>fpin]s, -ou, 6, Megaphernes. 
 
 |uX€i (792), /lieXj^o-ft, efjiiXrjo-e, fieixe- 
 XrfKe, impers., it is a care, it conr 
 ceryis ; e/Lioi ixikricrtt,, I will see to 
 it (589). 
 
 )t€\\«D (522, 6), yifWr](ru), €fieXXr](ra, 
 intend, be about, or likely to do 
 anything (523, 3). 
 
 |uv, post-posit, adv., indeed, truly ; 
 now, on the one hand, first (728, 
 N. 1) ; yet, however, still, neverthe- 
 less. Used comm. merely to show 
 some relation between its clause or 
 word and another which follows : 
 the latter is generally introduced 
 
 by the correlative 5e, but some- 
 times by aXXd, fievroi, eneiTa 
 (109) ; 6 fxiv ... 6 de, the one 
 . . . the other ; the former . . . the 
 latter (182). 
 
 |ji€VTOi, adv., in truth, really, cer- 
 tainly ; con]., yet, still, however. 
 
 (t€V« (522, 3), nfvS) (255), ffxeiva, 
 p.€fifpr)Ka, remain, wait, tarry, Lat. 
 fnaneo ; await, wait for ; w. ace. 
 Lat. exspecto. 
 
 Me'vuv, -coi/os-, 6, Menon. 
 
 |j,epos, -ovs, TO, a part, share, 
 
 (jLeVos, -T), -ov, middle ; comm., cen- 
 tral, between ; in predicate posi- 
 tion, the middle of (107) ; fiea-ov, 
 with or without to, the centre^ 
 middle, space between ; hia fieaov 
 rovTcav, between these (337, 3). 
 Lat. medius, mid. 
 
 ftecTTos, -T], -6v,full of, w. gen. (340). 
 •n€Td, prep, {among'), (141), w. ^^\\. 
 with, in company with, in com- 
 mand of (J ^Qt, % '20)', w. ace, in 
 quest of, among, after ; next to, 
 next ; fi€Ta Tavra, after this. 
 meta-phor, meth-od. 
 
 IxeTa-irfnirw, send for or after ; 
 comm. in the mid., summons. 
 
 \iixp\-, adv. (428), np to, even to ; w. 
 gen., until, as far as (412) ; conj., 
 until (JOo). Lat. dum, donee, etc. 
 
 [i-f], adv., not ; conj., lest, that not ; 
 ft fXTf, see el ; see 422, 428. Com- 
 pounds of fir} follow the usage of 
 the simple word. 
 
 fjiTj-Sc, adv., conj. (695), and not, 
 nor, but not, not even. 
 
 (ii^SeCs, ixrjdefxia, fxrjbev (fls), (447, b), 
 no one, none, nothing ; ixrjdiv, adv. 
 ace, m no respect, not at all, 
 Lat. nemo, mlllus. 
 
 M-qSCd, -ay, r), Media. 
 
firjK€TL 
 
 423 
 
 oSc 
 
 \Kt\K4Ti (firi+K + eri) , adv., not again, 
 
 no longer. 
 fifiKos, -60S, ro, length, height. 
 fjiT|v, /:i»;i/ds, 6 (220, 227), a month. 
 
 Lat. mensis (508, 9). 
 fi^-iroTC (/xt; + TTore), adv., ^.?w^r. 
 
 Lat. nunqtiant. 
 p,T]T6, «;«(af ;«o^, ^«or; /ujyre . . . /ijjrf, 
 
 neither . . . ^o/" (430, 18). 
 iwirrip, /bi7;rpos, ^ (362), a mother. 
 
 Lat. Wfl/er, MOTHER. 
 
 MCSas, -ov, 6, Midas. 
 MiOpiSdn^s, -ov, 6, Mithriddtes. 
 (iiKpo's, -a. -01/, .s»?tf//, /«7/'/.9 ; neut. 
 
 as adv., fUKpov, narrowly., hardly. 
 f MiXtJo-ios, -a, -oi/, Mileaian. 
 MiX-HTos, -ov, 17, Miletus. 
 p,i<r0o-8o'TT]s, -ov^ 6, paymaster. 
 fti<r0o'5. -01', 6, ;?6'y, wages., reward. 
 4. ixwrOo'ci) (350), -oxrw, etc ; let out 
 
 for hire; mid.,^//-(?; pass, be hired. 
 (Jivd -ay, ^ (170, 1), « »//;?-«, $18. 
 jio'vos, -7;, -ov, /3!/o;?^, o;?/y (227), neut. 
 
 ^ovov, adv., solely, only. 
 (ivpios, -a, -ov, countless ;■ fivpioi, -at, 
 
 -a, /^;« thousand, myriad. 
 Muff-ios, -a, -ov, Mysian. 
 
 f vav-apxos, commander of a fleet, 
 
 admiral.. 
 vavs, i/fobp, x] (363), « 5^/;?. Lat. 
 
 ndnis. nausea, No. 10. 
 \ vavTiKo's, -J7, -6v, naval, nautical, 
 vc'os, -a, -01/, young ; new, fresh ; 
 
 v€a)T€pos, -araTos (376). NEW, 
 
 neo-logy, neo-phyte. 
 f viKcuo (160), -170-0), etc. ; conquer, 
 
 surpass, outdo ; the pres. often has 
 
 the force of the pf., am victorious. 
 
 Lat. vincd. 
 
 v^KT], -ij*, 17, victory. Nicholas. 
 
 vo|JLit<«> (i/o/uiS-, iv), j/o/itw (608, 4, «-) ; 
 evofJiKTa, vfvofiiKa (309, a), vevo- 
 fiia-fiai, €vofiia6riv, hold as a cus- 
 tom, think, consider, believe ; 
 vofii^erai, is customary, is usually 
 recognized (798, § 27). 
 
 vo'p.os, -ov, o, a custom, a law. 
 
 vovs,-oi), 6 (170, 1), mind, attention; 
 iv M» 6;^a), have in mind, intend. 
 L-\t. mens. 
 
 vvv, adv., now, just now. Lat. nunc, 
 xow. 
 
 vv'l VVKTOS: rj (428), night. NIGHT. 
 
 a. 
 
 QcvCds, -ov, 6 (48), Xenias, 
 
 f ^cviKo's, -17, -ov, foreign mercenary ; 
 
 TO ^eviKOv (sc. arpdrevfia), the 
 
 mercenary force (728, N. 7). 
 gcvos, -ov, 6, « stranger, guest, host, a 
 
 mercenary. 
 ^evo({>cov, -wKTOff, 6, Xenophon, an 
 
 Atlieiiian. See 432. 
 g€p|T]s,-ou, 6, Xerxes I. (766, § 9). 
 
 O. 
 
 d, ^, TO (9, 10), Me ; 6 fteV ... 6 Sc, 
 Mis one . . . Ma^ one ; 6 8«, anri 
 he (182) ; for its use before a 
 participle (234, 4 ; 235) ; used 
 with persons or things to mark 
 them as well knoM^n (p. 30^) ; t^ 
 ixdxu, in the well known battle 
 (756, § 9), with a distributive 
 force (p. 3602'-2); Avith numerals 
 to denote an approximation 
 (p. 318«). 
 
 o8£, r\h€, r6h€ (176), //<«>, what fol- 
 lows : Tovde Tov Tpowov, in the fol- 
 lowing manner (180). 
 
686 
 
 OS 
 
 424 
 
 opaco 
 
 dSo's, -oO, ri (61), a toay, road, route ; 
 
 a march, expedition. Lat. via, 
 
 meth-od, ex-odus, peri-od. 
 i'-Oev, rel. adv. (462), whence. 
 ol8a (766), 2 pf. with present force, 
 
 k7iow, understand (by reflection). 
 f otKtt-Se, adv. (462), homeward, to 
 
 one's home. 
 folKEw (493), -wco, inhabit, live, 
 
 dwell, occupy; pass, be inhabited, 
 
 be situated ; peopled, populous. 
 f olK(d, -as, fj, a house, dwelling. 
 •f olKO-8oHi€« (756, § 9), -r}a(o, build. 
 
 hdit. aedijicd. 
 t o1:ko-06v, adv. (462), /rom home. 
 fotKoi, adv. (461), at home. 
 oIkos, -ov, 6, house. Lat. vlcus, Eng. 
 
 -WICK, -wicH, — Ber-wicK, Nor- 
 
 wiCH ; eco-nomy (639). 
 otvos, -ov, 6, wine. Lat. vinum, 
 
 WINE (508, 11). 
 OiOfiai, or ot)xai, olrjaofxai, (ofjBrjv, sup- 
 pose, think, believe. Lat. opmor. 
 olos, ola, olov, rel. pro., of what 
 
 kind, suck as, as; Lat. qudlis ; 
 
 oios T€, able, possible. 
 ^ oloo-'ircp or oloo'-'ircp, -ancp, -ovTrep 
 
 (695). /ws^ as, such as, etc. 
 OKV6CI), -rj(ra>, shrink from, hesitate, 
 
 dread, fear ; oKvdirju av^is to. 
 
 frXola ffji^aiveiv, I should fear to 
 
 embark in the boats. Syu. 709. 
 f oKTa-KoVioi, -at, -a (445), eight 
 
 hundred. 
 6kt», indecl., eight. Lat. octo, eight, 
 
 octa-gon. 
 oXeOpos, ov, 6, destruction, loss. 
 ^Wvfii (o\-, v.), oK5> (254), &\(aa, 
 
 okoikiKa, oXcoXa ; mid., oWvfiai, 
 
 oXoO/xai, coiXofiriv (736, 3) ; act., 
 
 destroy , lose ; m\{\., perish ; 2 pf. 
 -, iiitrans., / am ruined ; in prose 
 
 arr6XKv}ii. 
 
 oXos, -T), -ov (786, vocab.), whole, 
 
 entire, all ; comm. in pred. posit. 
 
 cath-olic. 
 *OXvv9ios, -ov, 6, an Olynthian. 
 f d[jkoi(i)s, adv., in like manner, alike. 
 f duo-Xo-yeo), -rja-o}, a>jxoK6yr)aa, qj/lio- 
 
 \6yr]Ka, agree, confess, acknowl- 
 edge. 
 d|xov, adv. (685), together, at once. 
 \. on«s, yet, still, nevertheless, how- 
 ever. 
 ovojia, -uTos, TO (208), a name. 
 
 Lat. nomen, an-onymous, syn- 
 
 onyme (660). . 
 ovos, ov, 6 or 7, an ass. ass. 
 OTTT), rel. adv. (^04, § 6), where, 
 
 wherever, in what way, how, as. 
 
 Lat. qua. 
 d'in<r0o-<j>vXa|, -aKo^^ 6, rear guard. 
 f dirXtSw (67rXiS-, iv.), (608), (ottXoi/) 
 
 (612, b), co7r\L(ra, coTrXianai, 
 
 oiTrXio-Brjv, arm, equip. 
 f dirXiTTis, ov, 6 (48), a heavy-armed 
 
 foot-soldier, hoplite ; pL, infantry. 
 
 No. 1. 
 oirXov, -ov, TO, implement, arms, 
 
 armor, pan-'oply. 
 diroios, -d, -OV, rel. pron., of what 
 
 sort, kind, or quality. Lat. qudlis. 
 dirdo-os, -r), -ov(p -\- ttoo-os), rel. pron., 
 
 as many as, whatever, as large as ; 
 
 iu indir. questions,^oie much, how 
 
 large or many. Lat. quantus. 
 diroTc (699), lohen, tvhoiever, since 
 
 (709). Lat. cum, quando. 
 oirov, rel. adv. (804, § 6), tvhere, 
 
 loherever. Lat. ubi. 
 6'ir(os (359), adv., how, in ivhat vxiy, 
 
 w. fut. indie. (589) ; conj., that, 
 
 in order that (579). 
 dpd'j) {6pa-, 18; oTT-, viii.), (698, 4), 
 
 oylrofxai, ddov, eoypaKa or copdrM, 
 
 edypdpai, S>ppai, axpOrjv, see, be 
 
opyC^i 
 
 0) 
 
 425 
 
 TTaico 
 
 hold, perceive, observe. Lat video, 
 EYi, optic, aut-opsy, pau-orama. 
 
 opYiJw (opytS-, iv), (241) ; in the 
 Anabasis opyi^ofxaL, -laoiiai or 
 -toC/iat (60S, a), make angry; 
 mid., be angry at, be in a rage. 
 
 opOios, d, -ov, siraight-up, steep. 
 
 opKos. -ov, 6 (328), oath. 
 
 dp|idu (251), -ri<j<ji, etc., put in mo- 
 tion, start, rush ; mid., set forth, 
 start. 
 
 dpjie'ft), 'j](T<i>, be moored, lie at 
 anchor. 
 
 'Opo'vras, dor -ov, 6 (52), Orontas. 
 
 opos, -ovs, TO (342), a mountain. 
 
 OS, i), o (178), which, what ; koi os, 
 and he. 
 
 oo-os, ij, -OP (271), rel. pron. of 
 quantity, so much or many as, as 
 great as ; rel. prou., as many as, 
 as ; how much, hoio great ; after 
 Tias, who, etc. 
 
 oc-ircp, jjiTTcp, oTT€p, the vcry person 
 who or thing which ; who, which. 
 
 00--TIS, rJTis, oTi (437), whoever, who, 
 whichever, whatever ; in indirect 
 questions, who, itihich, what. 
 
 oTttv = ore (iv, whenever. 
 
 oT€, couj., when, since, because. 
 
 6'ti, conj. (388), (orig. neut. of ocrrts), 
 that, because, because that, Lat. 
 quod ; in quoting another's words 
 (708) ; w. a sup. intens. like Lat. 
 r/uam ; on dirapaa-KevoTaTov, as 
 unprepared as pvssible (637, 7)- 
 
 ov, ovK, ov\ (68, 422), neg. adv., 
 marking tlie negation as absolute. 
 Lat. non. 
 
 ov (os), adv., of place, where. 
 
 o^ i-m), pers. pron., dat. of (394). 
 
 ovSa}io€, adv., nowhere. 
 
 ov-Se {ov + ^c), (540), neg. conj., but 
 not, and not, nor as; Rd\.,'notatall. 
 
 ov8-€is, ovdefiia, ovbev (447, &), no 
 one, not any, none, Lat. nullus ; 
 nobody, Lat. nemo; nothing, Lat. 
 nihil; ovdev, adv. acci, 7iot at all 
 (449). 
 
 ovK, adv., not', see ov. 
 
 ovv (241), post-))Osit. couj., therefoi'e, 
 then, accordingly, at any rate, 
 moreover, 
 
 ov-iroT6 {ov -f TTore), (328), adv.f wo/ 
 ever, never. 
 
 0V-T6, neg. conj. (797, § 26), and 
 not, nor; ovre . . . ovre, neither 
 . . . jior. Lat. neque. 
 
 O^TOS, aVTTl, TOVTO (181 tf., 188, 820), 
 deni. pron., this. 
 
 ovTCDs (188), adv. of ovtos, ouro) 
 before a consonant, in this man- 
 ner, thus, .so. 
 
 ovx, not ; see ov. 
 
 d<|>eiXa) {o(f)e\-, iv.), (95), -etXjjo-co, 
 &)<^6tXr;cra, a>(f)eXov, d>(p€iXr]Ka, etc., 
 otve, be indebted, Lat. debed : 
 pass, be due; in wishes, would 
 that (669). 
 
 o<)>€Xos, TO, only in nom. and ace, 
 advantage, use. 
 
 ©xvpo's, -d, ov, rugged, strong, ten- 
 able, fortified by nature. 
 
 n. 
 
 f iraiScvd) (271), -a-a>, bring up a 
 
 child, educate. Lat. institud, 
 
 cyclo-paedia. 
 f iraiSiov, -ov. to, infant, little child. 
 irats, TTaibos (271), 6 or 17, gen. dual 
 
 iraidoiv, gen. pi naidojv, boy, child; 
 
 in Anab. masc. in the sing., boy, 
 
 son. Lat. puer. ped-ngogue. 
 iraCo), TTatcra. (iraiaa TviiraiKa, iirai- 
 
 cr6r]v, strike, smite, icuund, strike 
 
 at. aua-paest. 
 
TTOklV 
 
 426 
 
 iOi 
 
 '7r€LU0) 
 
 irtiXiv, adv., back, back again, Lat. 
 rursus ; of time, once more, Lat. 
 iteimm. pal-aestra, palin-drome. 
 
 itoXtov, -oO, to, lance, javelin, spear. 
 
 irdvni (461), adv., in every way, 
 everywhere, on all sides. 
 
 irapa, prep, (beside), (141); w. gen. 
 from beside, from ; w. dat., by the 
 side of, near, at, on, with ; w. ace, 
 t9 the side of, to, towards, along, 
 beside; against, beyond, contrary 
 to, napa ras (nrovdds, contrary to 
 the treaty (142, 4). paragraph, 
 para-ble. 
 
 irap-aY^eWo) (214), pass an order 
 along; to give the watchword: 
 send orders, command, order, 
 announce. 
 
 irapa-'yi-yvonai, be present, come, 
 arrive. 
 
 irapdSeuros, -ov, 6, a park, para- 
 dise. 
 
 irapa-8i8(<)|j.i f 646), deliver up, give 
 over, surrender. 
 
 irapa-KoXew (3.59), call to one's self 
 summon, exhort, urge on. 
 
 irapa-irX'fjo-ios, -d, -ov (227), near by, 
 nearly like, similar. 
 
 irapao-d-yytis, -ov, 6, a parasang, 
 — 80 stadia, about three and one 
 third miles. 
 
 f irapa-a-Kcva^o) (a-Kevad-, iv.), (615), 
 -da-uii etc., prepare, get ready ; 
 mid., provide, make ready, be 
 ready. 
 
 irapa-o-KcvT], -i)j, ^ (735, § 4), prepa- 
 ration. 
 
 irap-ei|jii (elfxi), be near or present, 
 have come, arrive ; ra irapovra, the 
 present affairs. Lat. adsum. 
 
 irap-€\avv(i>, march or ride by, re- 
 view. 
 
 irap-cpxop.ai, pass by or along, pass. 
 
 vap-4\w, hold near, offer to, fur- j 
 nish, supply, provide, produce, i 
 make; npayfiara napfx^iv, give 
 trouble. 
 
 irdp-oSos, -ov, rj (obos), (86), a way 
 by or past, passage, pass. 
 
 Ilappda-ios, -ov, 6, a Parrhasian. 
 
 IlapvcraTis, -tSos, fj, Pary satis. 
 
 irds, irdo-a, irdv (265), all, the whole, 
 Lat. omnis ; without the article, 
 every, Lat. quisque ; w. the art., 
 generally in predicate position 
 (271) ; in attrib. posit, to denote 
 totality, whole ; Trepi iravro^, of 
 the highest (ulmost) importance. 
 pan-theist, pan-demonium. 
 
 Ilao-CcDV, -covoy, 6, Pasion. 
 
 irdo-xw {iraO-, vi), (651, 4), TreiVo- 
 fxai, enadou, neirovOa, suffer, expe- 
 rience, feel ; ed or KaKcos ndo-xfiv, 
 be well or ill-treated, pass, to tu 
 Troteif (659). Lat. patior, pa- 
 thos, patho-logy. 
 
 irttTTJp, narpos, 6 (362), a father. 
 Lat. pater, father. 
 
 \. irttTpCs, -idoi, f), fatherland, native 
 land. 
 
 iravo) (251), 7rav(ra>, tnavaa, nenavKa, 
 TreTTavfiai, eiravdrju, cause to cease, 
 end, stop ; mid., cease, stop, desist. 
 Lat. pausa, paucus, pause, 
 
 FEW. 
 
 TTcSfov, -OV, TO (jrebov, ground), plain, 
 level, ground. Lat. campus. 
 
 ireto's, -f], -ov (ttovs), (806, vocab.)^ 
 on foot ; of infantry ; jd., foot 
 soldiers, infantry. 
 
 ircCew {ttlO-, ii.), (529, 2), Trft'tro), 
 €7rfi(ra, ireneiKa, nenfia-pai, eVfi- 
 a$qv, win over, persuade ; pass, 
 and raid., be won over, be con- 
 vinced (433, § 3). believe, yield, 
 obey. Lat. pared (594). 
 
Trei/oa 
 
 427 
 
 TT 
 
 Xtjv 
 
 irtlpa, -as, fj (46), trial, proof, ex- 
 perience, em-piric. 
 
 ^.ireipoui) (160), comm, neipaofiai, 
 neipdaofiai, iircipaadfxr^v. neneipd- 
 fiai eneipadrju, attempt, endeavor; 
 make trial of, test, pirate. . 
 
 IIcXoirovvTJo-ios, -a, -ov, Peloponne- 
 sian ; as a subst. a Peloponnesian. 
 
 ILtXrai, -Siv, al, Peltae. 
 
 f ir6\Ta<mfs, -ov, 6 (52, No. 2), one 
 who hears a light shield (neXrr}) , 
 peltast, targeteer. 
 
 J ireXTOo-TiKo's, -f), -6v, belonging to a 
 peltast ; to TreXraorncdy (sc arpd- 
 Tevfxa), the targeteer force. 
 
 ire'Xrn, -r]s, rj, a small, light shield 
 carried by the peltasts, shield, 
 target. No. 2. 
 
 trf\i.iroi, -\j^<o, -^a, nenoficfia, TrtVe/x- 
 /xai, €7refj.(f)6r}v (546, 9), .send, 
 despatch, pomp. 
 
 f ir€VTtt-Kd<rioi, -ai, -a, five hundred. 
 
 ir€'vT€, indecl., five, five, penta- 
 gon. 
 
 I irevTc-Kat-ScKa, \\\^e.Q\., fifteen. 
 
 -irep, iutens. eiiclit. part.,yMS«, very, 
 even. 
 
 TTspC, prep. {\^\), {around, about); w. 
 gen., about, concerning, above, 
 for (Lat. de) ; irtpX irXeicrTov or 
 TTfpl TraiTos TTOielcrdai, to consider 
 of the highest {utmost) importance ; 
 w. dat., around, near ; w. ace, 
 about, all around; in respect to. 
 peri-od, peri-meter. 
 
 •ir€pi-"yC"YVO|iai, be superior, conquer. 
 
 Trepi-t'xw, surround, encompass. 
 
 ir£pi-pLe'va>(772), wait around, remain, 
 wait for ; w. ace. (603). 
 
 ircpi-irXe'oj, sail around (783, 9). 
 See irXew. 
 
 rEcpo-ns, -ov, 6, a Persian. 
 
 t IIcpo-iKo's, -i), -OP, Persian. 
 
 •mTyri, -^s, f], fountain, spring ; pi., 
 
 the sources of rivers. 
 n£"YpTjs, -r)Tos, 6, Pigres. 
 irUlta (nud-, iv.), (709), -faa, enl- 
 
 eaa, iren ieafuu, inUarOriv, press, 
 
 crowd; pass., he hard pressed, 
 
 oppressed. 
 irC|iirXT]p.i (n-Xa-, vii.), TrXj^ato, enXrja-a, 
 
 nenXrjKa, nenXTjapai, iTiXTjaB-qv, fill 
 
 (734); w. acc. and gen.; w. ace. 
 
 of person, fill full, satisfy. Lat. 
 
 impleo, FILL, FULL, plethora. 
 
 trtlTTft) (tTCT-, TTTOr), (533, 5), TretToO- 
 p,aL, eneaov, irenTOixa, fall. Lat. 
 peto, FIND, s_ym-ptom. 
 
 nio-CS-qs, -ov. 6, a Pisidian. 
 
 t •jna-Tivo), -eva-fo (149), ti^ust, believe. 
 
 firuTTis, -eo)s, Tj (479, 3), faith, 
 pledge. 
 
 4 irwrros, -j), -df (594), faithful, 
 trusty ; trustworthy, sure : as 
 subst., pledge ; Trtora hovvai Koi 
 Xa^eiv, give and receive pledges. 
 
 \. ttio-to'ttis, -t]tos, r} (482, '6), fidelity. 
 
 f irXeOpiaios, -d, -ov, of a plethron. 
 
 irXe'Opov, -ov, to (342), a plethron ; 
 one hundred Greek feet, or one 
 hundred and one English feet. 
 
 irXcCwv or irXc'wv, more, larger {^S2), 
 and TrXela-Tos, most ; conip. and 
 sup. of noXvs (380, 4). 
 
 trXe'w {nXv-, ii.), (214), frXevaoinai or 
 TrXevaovfiai, cTrXevtra, nenXevKa, 
 TreirXeva-fiat, sail, take ship. Lat . 
 pluo, FLOW, FLEET. 
 
 vX'i)6os, -eos, TO {Si2), fulness, mul- 
 titude ; length of time (734). ple- 
 thora. 
 
 jirXijOw (734), be or become full. 
 Lat. pleo. 
 
 irki^v, adv. w. gen., except, save; 
 conj., except, but, except that, 
 save that. 
 
TrXyjpr)^ 
 
 428 
 
 TrpaTTco 
 
 irXripris, -es (335), full, full of filed 
 with, complete, hat. plenus (734). 
 
 f ir\Tl<riat(<> (TrXjyo-taS-, iv.), (227), 
 draw near, approach. 
 
 <ir\T|<rios, -d, -ov (227), near, neigh- 
 boring; TrKrfaios, a neighbor; adv., 
 TrXijcriovi near^ hard by, at hand. ' 
 
 irXTiTTa) {n\r)y-, iv.), (657), ttX^^o), 
 eirXtj^a, TreTrXrjya, Tveiikrjyfxai, 
 enXrjyrjv, iu COmp. iiikdyr^v (650, 
 a), strike, smite. apo-plexy. 
 See lK*irXT]TT«. 
 
 irXoiov, -ou, TO (TrXto), .sa^7), (68), a 
 vessel, boat. 
 
 iroico) (154, 2), -j/o-o), elc. (198), 
 make, appoint, do, accomplish, 
 cause; ttoicIv ev or kukcos, treat 
 luell or ill (468, ci) ; for Trept 
 TrXeiVrou, etc., see ircpC. Lat. 
 facio, poet, poem. 
 
 tiroX€(i€« (160), -lyo-co, etc. (198), 
 M;«r, carry on, make, or z^rt^ye trar, 
 fight with; w. dat. or w. Tr/aoy and 
 eVt w. ace, against. 
 
 f iroXcfjiiKos, -^, -6v (485, 4), of war, 
 warlike, skilled in war. polemic 
 
 f iroXe'iiios, -d, -oi; (485, 3), hostile; 
 subst., an enemy in war, ol irokf- 
 nioi, the enemy. Syn. 709. 
 
 iroXcfios, 6, icar, hostility, enmity, 
 vengeance. 
 
 iroXiopK€o> (174), -r)(Ta), etc. (198), 
 hem in a city, besiege. 
 
 iro'Xis, -ews, r) (290), a city, state. 
 policy, police, raetro-polis. 
 
 iroXiTiis, -ov, 6, a citizen, politics. 
 
 t iroXXoKis, adv. (445, d), often, 
 many times; 
 
 iroXtis, ttoWt), ttoKv (299), much, 
 great, large, many (302) ; of 
 space, large, far, wide; Lat. 
 multus ; TTo'X'Kov a^ios, ivorth 
 much; ol TvoWoi, the many,, ma- 
 
 jority ; as adv. in neut. sing, and 
 pi., TToXv, TToXXa. much, many 
 times (460) ; to ttoXv, the greater 
 part ; em noXv, a great distance, 
 or over a great extent ; for Trcpt 
 nXdopos, etc., see ircpt ; w. com]), 
 and sup. intens. iroXv 6aTTov,far, 
 or much quicker (465, 3) ; nXeicov 
 or TrXeo)!', TrXeioros (380, 4). 
 poly- in compounds, — poly-gon, 
 poly-theism ; pleonasm. 
 
 iropcid, -as, rj, journey, march. 
 
 iropcvo) {rropos, passage), (34), -€v<t<o, 
 make go, carry ; comra. pass. dep. 
 nopevofxai, Tropevcrofiai, inopevdijv, 
 be carried, march, go, proceed, 
 advance. Lat. iter facio, fare, 
 FERRY, pore. 
 
 iropr^b) (TTopid-, iv.), TTopio) (608, a), 
 furnish, provide; mid., procure, 
 get. 
 
 iro'ppo), adv., far, far from, farther. 
 
 irorapios, -ov, 6, a river, hippo- 
 potamus. 
 
 iroTc, end. adv. (695), at any time, 
 once, ever. 
 
 iroTcpos, -a, -ov (586), which of the 
 two ? lohelher ; Lat. uter ; norepov 
 . . . rj, whether . . . or. 
 
 TTov, interrog. adv., where ? Lat. ubi. 
 
 irov, end., indef. adv., somewhere, 
 anywhere. 
 
 irovs, TToSdy, o (363), foot. Lat. 
 pes, FOOT, tri-pod. 
 
 firpa^iia, -aros, to (480, 2), a thing 
 done, a deed ; plur. affairs, dif- 
 ficulties, trouble (227)- prag- 
 matic. 
 
 t irpdlts, -eas, tj (479, 2), doing, ac- 
 tion, deed, undertaking, praxis. 
 
 irpaTTft) {irpay-, iv.), (607, 2), Trprz^o), 
 enpa^a, pf. 7re7rpa;^a or Trenpaya. 
 7r€7rpa:yp.ai, iirpcixBrjv, act, do, per- 
 
7rpia^v<; 
 
 429 
 
 7rpo-(l)vXa^ 
 
 form ; accomplish ; ev Trpdrro), 
 fare well, be fortunate, practi- 
 cal, practice. 
 
 irpeVpvs, -eojy, 6 (388), old man ; as 
 adj., old, reverend ; ol npea^eis, 
 elders, ambassadors ; as from an 
 adj. come the degrees of compari- 
 son, comp. irpea^vTepos, sup. npe- 
 a^vTUTos. presbyter, priest. 
 
 irpCoo-Oai,, 2 a. iufin. of coueopai, buy ; 
 2 a. indie, iupiaprjv ; see 846. 
 
 irpCv (705), adv., sooner, before; 
 coiij., before that, sooner than, 
 until. Lat. prius. 
 
 irpo, prep. w. gen. only (14-1), before, 
 in front of (160) ; in preference 
 to, in behalf of, for the sake of 
 (142, 2). pro-phet. 
 
 irpo-ai<r0dvo|j.ai, observe beforehand. 
 
 irpo-PaXXci) (786, vocab.), throw for- 
 ward ; mid. with ra onXa, present 
 as for an attack, problem. 
 
 irpo-8C8(0|j.i (803), give over or up, 
 surrender, desert, abandon, be- 
 tray. 
 
 irpa-cip.i (e?/ii), (741), advance, go 
 forward, come on. 
 
 irpo-€iirov, say beforehand, an- 
 nounce. 
 
 irpo-9vnos, -ov, ready, willing, ea 
 ger. 
 
 ^ irpo-0v|ici)s, adv., willingly, eager- 
 ly ; comp. -orepov, sup. -drara. 
 
 irpo-tiws.i (796), send forth; mid., 
 commit, entrust, surrender. 
 
 irpo-Co-TTiiii (628), place at the head 
 of, place before ; intrans. in mid. 
 with 2 aor., pf., and plnpf., act. 
 stand before, or be, at the head of, 
 command ; w. gen., command. 
 
 irpo-KaTaXajiPavw (63S), seize upon 
 beforehand, preoccupy. 
 
 IIpo'|«vos, -ov, 6, Proxenus. 
 
 irpo-opd'i) (709), see in front, be- 
 fore. 
 
 irpds, prep. (141), (in the presence 
 of), (142, 5); w. gen., in front 
 of before, from, in accordance 
 with ; w. dat,, near, at, in addi- 
 tion; w. ace, towards, to, against, 
 about, in respect to (206) ; Trpos 
 (f)i\iav, in a friendly manner. 
 pros-ody. 
 
 •irpocr-aiT€«, ask in addition. 
 
 irpo(r-8£8a)p,i (647), give in addition, 
 add. 
 
 '7rpo<r-fepxo|iai, advance, come to or 
 on, approach. 
 
 irpocr-cxw (174), hold, apply, direct. 
 
 Trpoo--T{Ka», come to, be related to ; w. 
 dat. 
 
 irpoVOev (Trpd?), (328), adv., before, 
 in front of; formerly, previously^ 
 sooner ; •npotrOcv . . . npiv, before, 
 until (707, a). 
 
 '7rpo<r-'7row'op.ai, assume, pretend ; els 
 8e 8r) (iVe, ivpocnioiovjxevos anev- 
 deiv, but then one of thcKC in par- 
 ticular said, pretending to be in 
 haste (808, § 14). 
 
 irpdo-w, adv., forward, omvard ; 
 levai Tov irpocrco, go forward, fur- 
 ther (804, § 1). 
 
 irpoTcpos, -a, -ov (709), former, 
 sooner ; previous, before ; w. gen., 
 before; Lat. prior ; adv., irpore- 
 pov, before, previously (70?, a). 
 
 irpo-Tlfioiw (359), honor more, above, 
 before ; esteem. 
 
 irpo-()>aCv(i), show forth, show before, 
 declare ; mid., appear before, ap- 
 pear in the distance, appear. 
 
 irpo'-<|>a<ris, -ecos, 17, a pretext (372). 
 prophecy. 
 
 irpo-<t>v\a^, -aKosi 6, out- guard ; pi, 
 picket. 
 
7Tp(Jt)T0<S 
 
 430 
 
 cnrevoa) 
 
 :•§< 
 
 vpwTOS, -rj, -ov (449), Jirat, foremost 
 (804, N. 2) ; 7rpa)Tou, to npwTov, 
 as adv., in the Jirat place, Jirst, 
 at first. 
 
 ni)9a7opds, -ou, 6, Pythagoras. 
 
 IlvXai, -a)!/, at, Pylae. 
 
 irvv6avo(iai (ttv^-, v.), (633, 4), 
 Treixrofjiat, eirvdofirjv, TreTrvcr/Liat, 
 learn hy inquiry^ inquire, ask 
 (638). 
 
 v&, iiidef. end. adv., up to the pres- 
 ent time, yet. 
 
 irws, adv., how ? 
 
 ir«s, indef. end. adv., somehoio, in 
 some way, in any way. 
 
 P. 
 
 (tifn (pv-, ii.), (529, 5), pevo-o/iai, 
 ippvrjKa, eppvijv, flow, run (188). 
 iidUflud, sTiiEAM, rheum, ca- 
 ta-rrh. 
 
 ptirTw (pi(f)-, iii), (587), pt\//Q), 
 eppl^a. eppTcpa, epplfxpai, €ppi<pdr)v, 
 €ppi<j)r]v (593), throw, cast, hurl, 
 cast away or aside. 
 
 'PwfjiTj, -ris, T], Rome. Lat. Roma. 
 
 S. 
 
 o-oXm'vl, -tyyos, 17 (803), a trumpet. 
 <ra\7rr^a> (aaXTrtyy-, iv.), iffaXiny^a, 
 
 sound the trumpet; impcrs. aak- 
 
 TTt'^fi, the trumpet sounds (786, 
 
 vocab.). 
 ZopSeis, ecav, ai, Sardis, capital of 
 
 Lydia. 
 f craTpairevo), -fvo-w, be a satrap; 
 
 rule as a satrap. 
 o-aTpairrjs, -ov, 6 (48), a satrap, a 
 
 Persian viceroy. 
 
 Sarvpos -ov, 6, the satyr Silenus. 
 
 <r€-avTov, -rjs, contr. aauroi), -^y(403), 
 reflex, pron., of yourself. 
 
 (TTjjiatvw (arjfiai^f iv.), (612, 5), 
 <T-qp.ava) (255), ia-qprjva, show by 
 a sign, give signal, signify (615). 
 
 SlXdvds, -ov. 6, Silanus. 
 
 criTos,-ou, 6 (342), co?'n. wheat, food. 
 
 (Titfirab) -Tjaopai, ccrtcoTrr^ora, creaKt)- 
 TrrjKa, be silent; trans, keep si- 
 lence, be silent. 
 
 o-Kc'iTTOfjiai, see c-Koirew. 
 
 o-K€vo-({>opos, ov (cTKevos + ^^p<*>), 
 (494, 4), carrying baggage ; subst. 
 baggage carrier, sutler ; to. (tkcvo- 
 cfiopa, baggage animals. 
 
 •\a-Kr\viia (372), -j^cro), encamp, be 
 encamped. 
 
 o-Kt\vr\, -rji, 7). a tent, shed, scene. 
 
 o-Koirew (593), only used in pres. 
 and impf., the other tenses, o-<e- 
 yj^op-ai, €(TK€*^dp.r}v, €(TK€ppai, aie 
 supplied by aKeirTofim, see, view, 
 look at or observe carefidly, spy 
 out, watch, consider, sceptic. 
 
 SdXoi, -0)1/, oi. Soli, a city of Cilicia. 
 solecism. 
 
 So<j>a(v€Tos, -ov, 6, Sophaenetus. 
 
 f o-o<}>id, -as, T) (482, 1), wisdom., 
 skill; skill in music (756, § 8), 
 sophist. 
 
 cro<[>o's, -r}, -ov, wise, clever, skilful. 
 philo-sophy. 
 
 SirapTTj, -rjs, 17, Sparta. 
 
 crira'u), (tttclctco, eanaa-a, eanaKa^ 
 (CTTracrpai, icnrda-Orjv., draw. 
 SPEED, spasm. See diroo-iraw. 
 
 o-ircvSo) (792), (T7r(i(rco, eaneiaa, 
 eaneiKa, offer a libation, make a 
 drink-offering; mid., make a 
 treaty. 
 
 <nrev8ci), -fuo-o), eaneva-a, urge or 
 press on, hasten, be in haste. 
 
(TTTOV 
 
 Slj 
 
 431 
 
 crvfi-TropevoiJLaL 
 
 o-irovS^, -fjs. rj (cmevdoi), a libation ; 
 pi. anovdai, a treaty or truce. 
 spondee. 
 
 (rrolSkov, ou, to (414), a sfade, a fur- 
 long, nearly 600 Greek feet, or 
 582i English feet. 
 
 (TTaOjjw's, -ov, 6 {lo-TTjiJLi), Stopping 
 place ; a station, day's march. 
 Lat. stahulum. 
 
 cTTcvos, -fj, -6v, narrow. steno- 
 gr;ipliy. 
 
 orT€p€« (414), aT€pr)(T(o, ((TTipriaa, 
 -eaTepTjKa, deprive, rob. 
 
 irroXi], 'fjs, 17 (oTc'AXo), send), robe, 
 garment, stole. 
 
 .(.oTo'Xos, -ov, 6 (477, 4i}, preparation, 
 equipment, military force, expe- 
 dition (372). 
 
 j" OTpdT€V(i,a, -arcs, to (773), «u 
 army, host, division of an army. 
 Syn. 214. 
 
 I oTparcvw (206), -€vaa>, make an 
 expedition, make war, of officers ; 
 raid., serve in the army, make an 
 expedition, take pai-t in an expe- 
 dition, lead an army, march, of 
 officers and soldiers ; ds or iiri 
 TivOf against any one. 
 
 ■j- o-TpaT-iryew, -r](T(o ("263), be a gen- 
 eral, lead; w. gen. command. 
 
 f o-TpaT-Tj-yid, -df, rj (263), general- 
 ship, command. 
 
 f trrpaT-Tj-yos, -ov 6(501, l\ general, 
 commander (513). Syn. 227. 
 stratagem. 
 
 f (TTpaTio, -as, 17 (41), an army, host. 
 Syn. 214. 
 
 f oTpaTiwrqs, -ov, 6, soldier; pi. 
 troops. 
 
 + oTpaTo-ircSevci), -fvo-o), to encamp ; 
 coinm. in the mid. 
 
 ■f oTpaTd-ircSov, to (widov, ground), 
 a camp, an encampment. 
 
 q-Tparo's, -ov, 6 (773), encamped 
 army, aryny, force. Syn. 214. 
 
 o-Tpcirros, -T), -ov, easily bent, twisted ; 
 6 (TTpenTos (174), a twisted collar, 
 necklace. No. 4. 
 
 <rTp€<|>a> (659), o-Tpeyjra), eaTpeyJAa, 
 ((TTpo(f)a, earpapp^i, ((TTpecpOrjv, 
 ((TTpcKpTjv (650, a), turn, twist; 
 intr. and in pass., turn or face 
 about, cata-strophe, apo-stro- 
 phe. 
 
 STujjL<j>tt\ios, -ov, 6, a Stymphalian. 
 
 o-v, <rov (391), thou. Lat. tu, thou. 
 
 o-u-y-'yi'yvojjiai (675, § 9), meet, be 
 with, confer with, become ac- 
 quainted with, be intimate with. 
 
 <ruY-KaXeo> (174), call or summon 
 together, assemble, cotivene. 
 
 Sv€vv€<ris, -toy, 6, Syen7iesis, king of 
 Cilicia. 
 
 (niX-Xa}i.^vci> (109), seize, arrest ^ 
 apprehend, syllable. 
 
 orvX-Xe-yw, gather together, collect; 
 pass., assemble. 
 
 \. otjX-Xo'y'^, -?)y, r), a gathering : a 
 levying of soldiers, levy. 
 
 (rv|x-PaXX(i> (372), bring together; 
 mid., contribute, symbol. 
 
 o-vix-PovXevo) (149), advise, counsel ; 
 mid., consult together, confer with, 
 deliberate, ask advice : w. dat. 
 
 (rv|ji- (taxes, -ov (paxtj), in alliance 
 with ; avppa\os, 6, an ally. 
 
 o-vji-jit'yvvp.i, mingle with, Join. 
 
 orv}i-irds. -Trdo-a, -7rai/'(359), all to- 
 gether, all, entire ; to o~vpnav, 
 altogether, in general. 
 
 orv^.-ire'ii.'n'w (149), send with. 
 
 o-vii-irXcws, -0)1/ (734),/m//, very full, 
 abounding in. 
 
 <rv(i.-'iroX€|x€«(174), 7nake war together 
 ivith, aid in war. 
 
 (rv)i.-irop€vo|j.ai, accompany. 
 
(TVfl-TrpaTTO) 
 
 432 
 
 
 <rv\i.-vpd.Tr<a, do with, help, assist^ 
 co-operate with, aid, w. dat., or 
 w. dat. of person and ace. of 
 thing (648, § 8). 
 
 trvv, prep. w. dat. only (141), with, 
 in company with, with the aid of. 
 Lat. cum. sym-metry. 
 
 trvv-dya, bring together, call to- 
 gether^ Join. 
 
 crvv-aXXaTTft) (oXXay-, iv), -d^co, 
 -TjXka^a, ■r)XXa)(a, -r]Wayyiai, -rjk- 
 \dyr)v, reconcile ; mid. and pass., 
 make terms with, he reconciled. 
 
 orvv-ava-Pa£v«, go up with. 
 
 orvv-tTro|iai, follow with, accompany. 
 
 o"vv-6Tj|ia, -uTos,. TO {TL^Tjfxt), thing 
 agreed upon, signal, watchword, 
 countersign. 
 
 o-vv-oiSa (784), share in knowledge, 
 he conscious. 
 
 <rvv-TaTT<o (695), draw up, marshal ; 
 mid , place one^s self in military 
 order, form a battle line, etc. 
 syntax. (808, 14.) 
 
 0-vv tCOtihi (741), put together ; mid., 
 make an agreement, contract. 
 synthesis 
 
 SwpdKoVios, -ov, 6, a Syracusan. 
 
 -(-5Iypid, -as-, fj, Syria. 
 
 Svpos, -ov, 6, Syrian. 
 
 <rv-o-K€va|o}jiat, -dcro), make prepara- 
 tions, pack up. 
 
 <rv-{rTpaTi«TT]s, -ov, 6(77^), a fellow- 
 soldier. 
 
 a-&lw (o-coS-, iv.), (608, 5), aaxrco, 
 ea-cocra. aeacoKa, crea-cocrfxai or ae- 
 trcofiai, €(rd}6r]v, .<iave, rescue, pre- 
 serve, conduct safely ; mid., save 
 one's self, escape, return safely. 
 soz-odout. 
 
 SwKpoiTTjs, -ovs, 6 (329), Socrates, 
 au Achaean, one of the Greek 
 generals. 
 
 Swcris, -€a>s, 6, Sosis. 
 
 <ra)TT|p, -^pos, 6 (478), savior, de- 
 liverer. 
 
 cra)TT]pid, -as, fj (ctco^q)), means of 
 safety, safety, deliverance. 
 
 ToXavTov, -ov, TO, talent, equal to 
 sixty miuas or about $1080. See 
 |xvd. 
 
 Tap,(6s, -w, o, Tamos. 
 
 rd^is, -fcoy, r) (rarro)), (297), an ar- 
 rangement; esp. of troops, disci- 
 pline, order, rank, line of battle, 
 cohort, company, array {77^, vo- 
 cab.). syn-tax. 
 
 Tapcot, -Qiv, 01, Tarsus, chief city 
 of Cilicia. 
 
 TCiTTO) (ray-, iv.), (607, ]). rd^oi, 
 era^a, reraxa, Terayfiai, irdx^rju, 
 (615) arrange, draw up in mili- 
 tary order, appoint, order; mid. 
 and pass., take oneh post, be sta- 
 tioned ; Teray/xfvoi, drawn up 
 (774:, § 16). tactics. 
 
 TavTT), adv., in this or t?tat way or 
 manner, here. 
 
 Td<|>pos, -ov, T], a ditch, trench. 
 
 fraxews, adv. (4:70), swiftly, quickly, 
 soon. 
 
 ra\vs, eTa, -V (298), swiff, quick ', 
 raxvi adv., swiftly, quickly, soon ; 
 bia Taxe<ov, with speed (.'^02) ; Odr- 
 T<ov and raxtcov, rdxicrros (3/9, 2); 
 o)s rdxia-ra, as quickly as possible ; 
 Tj ibvvaTo rdxKTTa, as quickly as 
 he was able (735, k. 4). Lat. 
 celer. 
 
 ri, post-posit, eucl. couj., and, like 
 Lat. -que ; re . . . /cat, both . . . and 
 (109). 
 
rei^o? 
 
 433 
 
 Tp€7rco 
 
 Tcixos, -eos, -ovs, TO (342), a wall, 
 fortress. DIKE, DIG. 
 
 -j-Tc\€VTd», -fjaco, etc. (reXos), (328), 
 end,Jimsh, end one's life, die. 
 
 ■friKtvrfi, -rjs, r}, end, completion, 
 termination, death. 
 
 -j-TcXew {2^?}), finish, fulfil an obli- 
 gation, jmf/. 
 
 TcXos, -€os, TO, an end, result ; adv. 
 ace, at last, finally, talisman. 
 
 TCfivto (rejLi-, v.), (631, 1), re/i« (255), 
 cTOfiov (650, b) or *T€fiov, TeTfir^Ka, 
 TeTfiTjfJLai, €Tfj.rjdT]v, cut, wound. 
 a-tom, ana tomy. 
 
 •j-TcrapTos, -T). -ov, fourth. 
 
 ■j" TCTpaKwr-xtXioi, -at, -a, four thou- 
 sand. 
 
 -}■ Terpa-KoVioi, -ai -a, four hundred. 
 
 TCTTapes, -o {4:^7), four, tetr-arch, 
 tetra-gon, rouB. 
 
 Ti-ypTjs, -r]T09, 6, the Tigris. 
 
 Ti0T]|xi (^e-, VII.), 6r](TO), edrjKa, TedfiKa, 
 TeBeifiaL, tTedrju (/ 30, 5), put. place, 
 set; inid., put, place (for one's 
 self), (733); for pass, /cctfiai is 
 comni. used ; Ti6eo-6ai to. orrXa lias 
 tliree senses: (') ground arms, 
 OifxevQi to, OTrXa dvenavovTO (732, 
 11. 4); (2) order arms, halt, or 
 s/a^*"/ under arms ready for action 
 (733, 10); (3) generally take up a 
 military position, draw up in order 
 of battle {7'62, 9); eV Td^ei 6ta6at 
 oiika, place one's self in order 
 of battle ; with ayava, appoint, 
 institute (732, 1). deem, do, 
 DOOM, theme. 
 
 •|-TT(jtou«) (154, 1), -^(To), etc., value, 
 honor, esteem. 
 
 Tiji'/j, -^s, fi (41), honor, worth, 
 value (7S5). 
 
 Itthios, -a. -ov, held in honor, val- 
 ued, honored. 
 
 \. Ti(j,-wp€a), -jjo-co (241), avenge, pun- 
 ish : mid., take vengeance on 
 (785). 
 
 tCs, Ti (435), interrog. pron., who? 
 which? what? tl often as cog- 
 nate ace. (261, a). 
 
 tIs, t\ (435), indef. pron. enclit., 
 any one, some one, something, 
 anything ; as adj., any, a, a cer- 
 tain, a kind of. 
 
 Tiorcra<})€'pvTis, -eos, -ovs, 6 (p. 132^), 
 Tissaphernes, satrap of Caria. 
 
 TiTpcoo-KO) (t^o-, vi.), (651) rpaxroj, 
 erpojo-fj, T€rpo)fxai. eTpadrjv, Wound. 
 
 TOio'o-Se, Toiade. Toiovde, dein. pron., 
 such, of such a kind, nature, qual- 
 ity ; somewhat as follows. 
 
 TOiovTos, ToiavTT), ToiovTov, dcni. 
 j)r<)n., such, of such kind, nature, 
 or quality, such as precedes. 
 
 f To§€vp.a, -uTos, TO (480, obs.), an 
 arrow. 
 
 -j-To^evo), -ciKTci) (359), hit with an 
 arrow, shoot with arrows, shoot. 
 in-toxicate. 
 
 To|ov, -ov, TO (52), bojv. 
 
 ^to^o'ttjs, -ov, 6 (481, 2), a bowman. 
 No. 3. 
 
 Too-ovTOS, ToaavTr], ToaovTov, dem. 
 pron., so or thus much (808, § 14), 
 so large, so great, so many, Lat. 
 tantus ; oaa> . . . to(tgvt(o, lit., by 
 how much the sooner . . . by so 
 much the more, i, e. the sooner 
 . . . the more (726, 8). 
 
 to't€, adv., then, at that time. 
 
 Tp€is, rpla (447), thi'ee. Lat. tres, 
 THREE, tri-pod. 
 
 Tp€'ira), Tpeyf/a), iTpc^a, cTpanov 
 (650, b), TeTpo(})a, TCTpafifxai, €Tpd- 
 TTTjv (650, a), eTp€<p6r]v, turn, turn 
 aside or back ; mid., turn, betake 
 one^s self; put to flight, rout; 
 
 28 
 
TfX€(f) 
 
 Q) 
 
 484 
 
 vcTTepeo) 
 
 rpeirdv cts (f>vyr]v, put to JligJit. 
 THREAD, THllOJS'G. 
 
 ro£<|>(i> (Tp€(f>- for 6p€<p-, p- 15 3^), 
 6p(^a>, (dpf\l/a, T€Tpo(f)a, TtBpap,- 
 fiat, €dp6cf)dT]v, eTpd(pT}v (650, a), 
 nourish, rear, support. 
 
 Tp€x« (rpex" for Bpex'-: P- 153^, viii.), 
 (698, 5), Bpafxovpai, (bpap.ov, be- 
 dpafiTjKa, debpaprj/jLai, run, the 
 general word. $ea> denotes liaste 
 and speed, usually of men. Lat. 
 curro. 
 
 Tpidxovra (rpels), indecl., thirty. 
 
 rpid-KOcrioi -at, -a {rpfis -\- tKarov), 
 three hundred. 
 
 Tpi-^pris, -ovs, ^ (821), ndj. triply 
 fitted ; as subst. sc. vavs, a galley 
 with three hanks of oars, galley, 
 trireme, war vessel (784). 
 
 Tpwr-xtXioi, -at, -a, three thousand. 
 
 TpCros, -77, -ov (rpels), (445), third; 
 TO rpirov, adv., the third time. 
 
 TpoTT^, -^y, ^(477,2), a turning, a rout. 
 
 4-Tpo'iros, -ov, 6 (477, 3), one's turn, 
 manner, character (251). trop- 
 ic, trophy, trope. 
 
 rpo^i], -rjs, f] (rpecfja)), nourishment, 
 support, a-trophy, 
 
 Tvyx^vw (ru^-i v.), (()33, 5), Tcv^ofim, 
 iTvxovy T€Tvxr]Ka or T€Tfvxa (251), 
 hit, hit upon, meet with ; gain, 
 obtain; intrans., happen; w. a 
 participle (245), happen, hy 
 chance, Just, now, napcov irvy- 
 Xaff, happened to he present 
 (250, 3). 
 
 Tvpiaiov, -ov, ro, Tyriaeum. 
 
 Y. 
 
 ilSwp, vbaroi, to (763), ux^ter. Lat. 
 
 imduy hydr-ant» water, wet. 
 v|jLeT€pos, -o, -ov (407), your. 
 
 dir-apxos, -ov, 6(540), a suhordinate 
 officer, lieutenant. 
 
 vir-£ipx« (449), begin, he under as 
 a foundation, be, exist ', he devoted 
 to, belong to, favor, support. 
 
 virc'p, prep. (141) w. gen., over, 
 across, beyond ; for, in defence of 
 in behalf of ; w. ace. over, beyond; 
 of number, above, upwards of 
 more than (149). Lat. super, 
 hyper-bole, over. 
 
 vircp-PoX^, -ijs, fj (/SaXXo)), the act of 
 crossing or of passing, passing 
 over ; mountain passage or pass. 
 
 ■\ vir-T]pirio>, -r](T(o, serve as a rower ; 
 serve, aid, supply. 
 
 vir-"»]p6'TT|s, -ov, 6, an under-rower, a 
 sailor, servant, attendant. 
 
 vir-iorxve'ofjiai (634, 2), vno-axwo- 
 jjLai, VTT-eaxoprjv, vn-eax^f^ai- (638), 
 hold one's self under, promise. 
 Synt. 724. 
 
 viro, prep. (141), under (263) ; w. 
 gen., from under; of agency, by, 
 through, from ; w. dat., under, 
 beneath, at the foot of, under the 
 power of; w. ace of motion or 
 extension, under, beneath. 
 
 viro-tv-yiov, -ov, to (188), a beast of 
 burden, a pack-animal. 
 
 vTro-Xa^jipdvcD, receive, take under 
 one's protection, answer. 
 
 viro-XeCiroi, leave behind. 
 
 vir-OTmv<a, -evaco, impf. vTr-aTTTevou, 
 suspect, apprehend. 
 
 viro-xwpt'w, -rjdo), withdraiv, retreat. 
 
 vir-oxj/id, -09, 17 (opdco), suspicion , 
 mistrust. 
 
 •j- v(rT€paios, -d, -ov, following, next ; 
 TTJ voTcpaia (sc ^pepa), on the 
 following day. 
 
 f vo-rcpe'tt (388), -rjato, be later, arrive 
 after, w. gen. 
 
VC7TC/>09 
 
 435 
 
 <^uXaf 
 
 I vc-Tcpos, -a, -01/ (38S), Za«er, behind, 
 
 ' kuer ; w. gen., /a^er than; vare- 
 
 pov, adv. (460), ^afer, afterwards. 
 
 OUT, UTTER. 
 i5\|nf|\ds, ->7, -oV, ^/^/«, ^f^^^^- 
 
 *. 
 
 ^oXvta ((f)av-., iv.), (597), ^a^w €(f)r]va, 
 TTecpayKu or 'n€(f)Tjva, 7T€<pacrfxaL, 
 €(t)dvdr]v, e(fidvr]v, make appear, 
 show, make known ; mid. and 
 pass., appear, seem, he seen ; witli 
 a part., evidently, manifestly 
 (777)- phenomenon. 
 
 <}>a\a"y^, -ayyos, rj (208), a line of 
 battle, a phalanx, phalanx. 
 
 <}>av£pos, -a, -6v ((f)aLvco), (251), in 
 plain sight, visible, manifest, 
 evident ; (pavepos el/xi (777)- 
 
 <|>€pti) (0ep-, ol- iv€K-, viii.), (098, ^)), 
 ot<TQ), fjV€yKa, fvrjvoxa, eurjueypai, 
 r]V€x6iiu, bear, bring, carry (08), 
 Lat./ero/ of wages, ?-fce?"r<?: jjro- 
 duce, yield ; ;^aXf Troas <f)epetv, be 
 troubled (467, II. 13). liEAU, 
 BURDEN, meta-phor. 
 
 <}>£V"y« (4)vy-, ii.), (529, 3), (}>€v^o- 
 fxat or (fiev^ovfj-ai, €(f)vyov, ne- 
 (f)€vya, flee, be an exUe ; ol 
 (fxvyovres, the fugitives, the exiles 
 (241) ; the pres. may have the 
 sense of the pf., I flee, am in ex- 
 ile. Synt. 603. Lat. /w^rio, bow, 
 BAIT, Bux-om. 
 
 <j)T)|j.C (714), (f)r](Ta), €(f)r}(ra. say, 
 affirm, declare, speak ; syn. 
 772. Syut. 769, a; (727). 
 Lat. died. 
 
 (|>Odva> (cfyBa-, v.), (631, 2). -rjo'op.ai 
 or <f>Sd(ra>, €(f)dacra, f(f)dr}v (731, 
 2), co7ne before, arrive before, 
 
 anticipate (251) ; witli a part. 
 
 (245) frequently best translated 
 
 before, quicker, sooner, first 
 
 (248, 9). 
 -f-<|>i\eci>, -lyo-o), etc. (206), love, of 
 
 family and friends (797). Lat. 
 
 dlligo. 
 •f <{>iX£d, -as, rj, friendship, affection ; 
 
 •npos (f)i\iav, in a Jriendly man- 
 ner. 
 f <}>i\ios, -a, -ov (86), friendly, at 
 
 peace, used esp. of countries. 
 ■\ c}>iXo-9t]pos, ov, fond of the chase. 
 -}■ <}>i\o-Ktv8i;vos, -ov,fond of danger ^ 
 
 adventurous. 
 f <|)i\o-p.a0'^S, -69 (335), (p,av6dvai), 
 
 fond of learning or eager to learn. 
 <j>i\os, -jy, -ov (86), dear, friendly, 
 
 kindly disposed, phil-a nth ropy, 
 
 Philip, phil-tre (797). 
 4- <}>iN.os, -ox,, 6 (SO), friend. 
 •f ^o^4<a, -r)(r(o, €cf)6j3r](ra, frighten^ 
 
 terrify, Lat. terreo : conim. pass. 
 
 dep.,fea7', be afraid, dread, Lat. 
 
 timed. Syn. 709. 
 <|>oPos, -ov,^ 6, fear, fright, dread. 
 
 hydro-phobia. 
 ^oiviKt], -qs, f), Phoenicia. 
 I <|>oiviKto-Tif|s, -ov, 6 (786, vocab.), 
 
 ivearer of the purple; courtier. 
 <f)pot)p-apxos, -ov, 6 {cf)povp6s or 
 
 (fypovpd, garrison), (502, 7), 
 
 commander of a garrison or 
 
 fortress. 
 f 4»pvYid, -a?, 17, Phrygia. 
 4>pv|, -vyo?, 6, a Phrygian. 
 f <|)VYas, -dbos, 6 (208), fugitive, 
 
 exile. 
 ^v>{i\, -ris, 17 ((pevyca), fight, rout. 
 ■f^vXaKf], -^s, f] (46), guarding, 
 
 iiyafch, guard ; jarrisou. 
 •|-<j>'u\a|, -aKos, 6 (476, 1), watch- 
 
 man,^uard; pi. body-guard. 
 
^vkOLTTO) 
 
 436 
 
 xjjekiov 
 
 ^vkdma ((j)v\aK-, iv.), (607, 3), -^co, 
 e<f)vXa^a, Trc^uXaxa, etc., guard, 
 watch, defend (123) ; intraus., 
 keep guard (793, § 22) ; mid., be 
 on one^fi guard, guard against, 
 Lat. custodio. 
 
 •\ \oXercaLvui (xaXenav-, iv.), (612, 6), 
 -avo) (255), exoXenrjva, exaXerrdu- 
 Orjv.be severe, be angry ; pass., 
 be offended (149). Synt. 146. 
 
 XoXciro's, -T), -ov, hard to bear, griev- 
 ous, difficult, hard to deal with, 
 Lat. difficilis; of persons, severe, 
 bitter, hostile, dangerous ; oi x^- 
 XeTTOi, dangerous enemies ; coinp. 
 ■doTcpos, sup. -coTaros'. 
 
 \. xaXeirtos, adv. (470), with difficulty, 
 hardly, painfully, severely. 
 
 XaXKovs, -rj, -ovv (174), of bronze, 
 bronze. 
 
 XdXos, -ov, 6, the Chains. 
 
 -j-Xo-pUis -eaaa, -ev {4tS7), graceful, 
 pleasing (824). 
 
 txaptSojiai (x«ptS-' iv.), (608), 
 -lovfiai (608, a), €X('pi'0'dp.T]v, K€xd- 
 pifffiai, favor, please, gratify ; w. 
 dat., or w. dat. and ace, gratfy 
 a person in regard to anytliiug, 
 oblige. 
 
 Xapis, -iTOi, T] (^20), favor, gratitude, 
 thanks. 
 
 \dp, x^i-pos, T) (220), the hand, wrist 
 (821) ; 6ty ;(eipa? i\6eiv rivi, 
 come into the power of any one 
 (726, 7). chiro-grapby. 
 
 XeipC(ro<f>os, -ov, 6, Chirisophus. 
 
 X€ppovT](ros, -ov, r), the Thracian 
 Chersonesus or Chersonjese. 
 
 X'h'v, XV^'^^f Oj ^» goose. Lat. anser, 
 
 GOOSE, GANDER. 
 
 X^Xioi, -at, -a, a thousand. 
 
 Xpaop.ai, xPWop.at (366), ixpr)(rdp.r]v , 
 Kexprjiiai, ixPW^V^i "•'^^j employ ; 
 enjoy, have (804, § 5) ; w. dat. 
 (p. 1458). Lat. utor. 
 
 XpTJ, impers. (123), iufiu. xp^""*; ^^ 
 is necessary, it is needful; w. 
 ace. and inf. one must needs do a 
 thing. Syn. 784. 
 
 XPTl't" ixPV^'^ ^^'h (784), need, lack, 
 wish, desire. Syn. 792. 
 
 XpfJiAtt, -aros, TO (480, 1), thing used; 
 pi., goods, property, money, re- 
 sources (214). 
 
 Xpovos, -ov, o, time ; season, period. 
 Lat. tempus ; chronic, chron- 
 icle. 
 
 f Xpvo'ovs, -rj, -ovv (486, 1), of gold, 
 golden (170, 2; 174). 
 
 f Xpvo-iov, -ov, TO (174), piece of 
 gold, gold, coin, money. 
 
 Xpvo'o's, -ov, 6, gold, gold, chrys- 
 alis. 
 
 4- XP^'^'O'X'^^i'Vos, -ov (501, 3), ivith 
 gold-mounted bridle. 
 
 fx^P^j ■««■) "7 (11 )^ « place, post, 
 position : ds rfjv eavrov x^p<^v, to 
 his own position (732, 9) ; esp. 
 land, country, territory. 
 
 \(apiov, -ov, TO,, a place, position, 
 stronghold ; space. 
 
 X«pis, adv., apart ; \v, (^q\\. (412), 
 without, apart from. 
 
 ^apos, -ov, 6, Psarus, a river of 
 
 Cilicia. 
 i(r€\iov, -ov, TO. a bracelet (174, 
 
 No. 5). 
 
xI)€vStJ<S 
 
 437 
 
 O) 
 
 (f)€ke(o 
 
 f \|/€v5tjs, -€S (484, '6), false, lying. 
 
 >|/€v8(D (366), -^evcroi, e^eva-a, e-^ev- 
 afxai, €\lA€va6T]u, deceive, be false, 
 Ltdt.falld; mid. cheat, lie, deceive. 
 pseudo-uym. 
 
 n. 
 
 w, interj. (52) ; with voc. (56). 
 
 cSSc {odt), (297)} ^^w-5, so, as follows, 
 in the following manner. 
 
 MV60)jiai, rjcrofiai, eMvrjjxai, ecovfjBrjv 
 (649), bill/, purchase ; iirpicnir^v is 
 used as 2 aor. (846) ; for accent, 
 see 851. 
 
 j. wvios, -d, -ov, ybr sale ; ra apia, 
 leaves, goods. 
 
 oipd, -as, f], time, season, proper 
 time. Lat. hora; year, hour, 
 horo-scope. 
 
 «s, lelat. adv. (241), when, as ; 6 8' 
 ebs aTr^X^ei/, &m^ when he departed 
 (640, § 4) ; as coiij., that ; ©y 
 eTTL^ovXevoi, (saying) that he was 
 plotting (433, § 3 ; 812, II., § 3) ; 
 
 before a partic. to express the 
 purpose or pretext of the subject 
 of the leading verb, without imply- 
 ing that it is also ihe idea of the 
 speaker or author (241), as if on 
 the ground that, with the intention 
 of pretending that, etc., a>s els 
 TlKTidas ^ovXaixevos (TTpaTeveadai, 
 pretending that he ivished to lead 
 an army against the Pisidians 
 (710, § 11) ; (OS cfiiXov, as a 
 friend (637, 8); w. sup., Lat. 
 quam, as rdxia-ra, as quickly as 
 possible (637, 7) ; w. numerals, 
 about ; w. infiu., denoting purpose 
 or result, so that, so as; final, Lat. 
 ut, that, in order that ; causal 
 conj., because; temporal, when; 
 as prep. w. accus., used only be- 
 fore names of persons, to (297). 
 
 <do— ircp, rel. adv. (cos), just as ; as, 
 like as, even as ; as if, as it were. 
 
 wo-Tc, conj. w. infin. or indie, so 
 that, so as (719). 
 
 (a^ikda, -r](TQ), etc., assist, aid, ben- 
 eft. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 In this vocabulary no word appears that has not been previously given. The 
 etymology of the words has here been briefly stated; but for a more complete 
 treatment of the forms, and fuller meanings and uses of Greek words, consult the 
 Greek -English Vocabulary and the Greek Index. 
 
 Abandon 
 
 A. 
 
 Ariaeus 
 
 Abandon, XeiVo) (XtTr-), Xei\/^a>; 
 e/c-XetTTO), leave a place ; ano- 
 XeiTTO), Kara-XfiTTO), desert a {)er- 
 soii or cause ; npo diSoofxi (So-, 
 vii.), -Ba)(ra>, etc., betray. 
 
 Able, Uavos, -fj, -6v] be — , iKavos 
 
 About, dfxcjii, TTfpi; be — , jueX- 
 
 Xo). 
 Above, vrrep. 
 
 Abrooomas, 'A^poKopcn, -a. 
 Accompany, enofiat (aeir-), e'^o- 
 
 fxai, €an6jxr)v\ crvfnropevofiai. 
 Accordingly, 817, ovp. 
 Achaean, *Axo.i6s. 
 Acropolis, oKpoTToKis, -ecos^ fj. 
 Admire, davp-d^co (Oavpad-, iv.), 
 
 6avp.d(Topai.) etc. 
 Advance, rropevopau -Kopcvaopai ; 
 
 npo(T-€pxopat, -rjXOov ; e7r-etfii (t-). 
 Advise, crvp-^ovXevco, -cvaoa. 
 Afraid, be — , (f)o^eopai. Syu. 709. 
 After, /Lif ra. 
 After-wards, varepov. 
 Again, TrdXiv. 
 Against, eVi, npos. 
 Aid, ox^eXeci), d)<pe\r}(rQ). 
 All, nas, TTCKTa, ndu. 
 
 Ally, (Tvppaxoi, ov, 6. 
 
 Alone, povos, -rj, -ov. 
 
 Along, or beside, napd. 
 
 Already, ^8rj 
 
 Also, Kai 
 
 And, Kai, 8e. 
 
 Angry, be — , be offended, ;^aXe- 
 
 naivco (;^aXe7rai'-, i\ .), ;^aXe7raj/». 
 Animal, wdd — , Srjpiou. -ov. to. 
 Announce, ayyeXXco (ay-yeX-, iv.), 
 
 dyyeXo), etc. ; dn-ayyeXXa). 
 Another, aXXos, -q, -o; one — , 
 
 aXXi^Xa)!/ ; of two, €T€pos, -a, 
 
 -ov. 
 Answer, dno-Kptvopai (^Kpiv-, iv.), 
 
 dTTO-Kpivovpai. 
 Anxious, be — , be troubled, dvTdo), 
 
 dvlacroi), etc. 
 Any, TLs, t\, gen. nvos ; anybody 
 
 or — one, rh ; anything, t\. 
 Appear, (fialvopai ((f)av-, iv.), <^a- 
 
 vrjaopaL ; em (paivopai. 
 Applaud, CTT-atveo), -r]aa), etc. 
 Appoint, dno-BeiKwpi (8«k-, v.), 
 
 aTTo-bei^ouni, etc. 
 Approach, ec^-oSo?, -ov, fj. 
 Arabia. 'Apn/Sta, as. rj. 
 Ariaeus, 'Aptato?, -ov, 6. 
 
Arise 
 
 439 
 
 Breastplate 
 
 Arise, dv-iaTafiat {(xra-y vii.), dva- 
 
 arfjaofJLai, etc. ; yiyvofxat (yep-), ye- 
 
 PTjaofxai, etc., oi" distui-bauce, feic. 
 Aristippus, ^Apia-rnriros, -ov, 6. 
 Arm, onXi^di {6nXc8-, iv.), ottXiVo), 
 
 etc. ; arms, armor, onXa, rd . 
 Army, arparid, -as, ff ; a-Tpdrevfia, 
 
 -aros, to; arparos, -ov, 6. Syii. 
 
 214. 
 Arrangement, rd^is, -ems, f). 
 Array, to — , TarTti) (ray-, iv.) ; in 
 
 battle — , (rvv-TeTayp,€uos, -rj, -ov. 
 Arrest, arvWapl^dvo) (Xa^-, v.), 
 
 -Xrjyj/'opat. 
 Arrive, d<l>-LKveopai {Ik-, v.), d(f)i^o- 
 
 pai, etc- ; 7rdp-€Lp.i, -fcrofiai. 
 Artaxerxes, ^Apra^ep^rjs, -ou, 6. 
 As, a>s ; — much — , oaos ; — ... 
 
 — possible, oTi or on with the 
 
 superlative; — follows, rdbe ; — 
 
 to, a>(TT€. 
 
 Ashamed, feel — , ai(rxvvopai 
 
 {alaxyv-, iv.), alcrxvvovpaL. 
 Ask, epoardco, epcoTrj(rco, inquire; 
 
 alreu), alTr]cr(o, ask, demand. Syii. 
 
 271. 
 Ass, ovos, -ov, 6. 
 Assembly, iKKkqa-ld, as, fj. 
 At, eVi, Tvpos. 
 Athens, ^Adfjvai, -a>v, ai. 
 Attack, eTrt-Tidepai {Be-, vii.), eni- 
 
 Oqaopai. 
 Attempt, TT€ipdopai, Treipda-ofiai 
 Attention, give or pay — , npotr- 
 
 €X<>> TOP vovP, TTpoare^o), etc. 
 Away from, dno. 
 
 B. 
 
 Babylon, Ba^vKSv, -atpos, fj- 
 Back, TrdXiv. 
 Bad, KaKos, -r), -OP. 
 
 Barbarian, ^dp^apos, -op; ^ap^a- 
 
 piKos, -^, -6u ; ^appiapiKoos. 
 Battle, pdxr], -rjs, fj; in — array, 
 
 avv-T€Tayp€vos, -»/, -ov', give — , 
 
 pd^opai, paxovpai ; Jail into — 
 
 line, avp-rdTTOfxat {ray-, iv.), -rd^o- 
 
 pai. 
 Be, flpi {((T-), ea-opai', — present, 
 
 yiypopai (yep-), yep^aopai, ndp- 
 
 eipi ; — upon, eircipi (eV-) ; being, 
 
 a>p, ovaa, ov, gen. optos. 
 Bear, (pepco, o\(r<o. 
 Beast, Srjpiov, -ov, to ; — o/burden, 
 
 vTTO^vyiov, -ov, TO. 
 Beautiful, kuXos, -t), -op. 
 Because, on, cos, ore. 
 Become, yly vop.aL [yev-), yepfja-o- 
 
 pat, etc. 
 Before, np6, rrpoa-Bep, irpiv. 
 Beg ofif, e^qiTeopai^ -aLTrjaopat,. 
 Begin, ap^opai, dp^opai, — for 
 
 one's self; apxco, dp^<a, etc., take 
 
 the lead. 
 Believe, ^yeopai, fyyijiropat ; vopi((o 
 
 (i/o/itS-, iv.), voptu). 
 Benefit, w^eXeco, dxpeXfjcra), help, 
 
 assist ; ev ttoi/o), noirjaoi, treat 
 
 well. 
 Besiege, noXiopKeo), -rja-o). 
 Bid, KfXevco -evcrco ; Xeyto, Xe^co. 
 Boat, ttXoiop, -ov, to. 
 Boeotia, BotcoTi'd, -as, rj. 
 Both, dp(f)6T€pos, -a, -ov; on — 
 Jlanks, iKUTepcoOev; — ... ami, 
 
 Ka\ . . . Koi, or T€ . . . Kai. 
 Bow, To^op ; use the — , ro^evat. 
 Bowman, to^ottjs, -ov, 6. 
 Boy, nals, Traibos, 6. 
 Brave, dya66s, -rj, -op. 
 Bravely, KaXa>s. 
 Break, Xvco, Xvaa*. 
 Breastplate. 6d>pd^, -kos', arm with 
 
 — , BcopoKi^o) {BiopoKid-, iv.), -laa. 
 
Bridge 
 
 440 
 
 Cowardly 
 
 Bridge, yecfivpa, -as, rj. 
 
 Bring, ayo), a^oa ; — hack icord, 
 
 dn-ayyeWoo (d-yyeX-, iv.), -oyyeXw. 
 Bronze, ;^aX/coi5y, -^, -ovv. 
 Brother, adfX^us-, -ov, 6. 
 Burn, Kcto), Kara Kaon {kuv-, iv.), 
 
 Kavaco. 
 But, eiXXa, fie. 
 Buy, dyopd^oi (dyopab-, iv.), dyo- 
 
 /[>d(ra). 
 By, eVi, vrrd w. gen. of the agent ; 
 
 — fhe side of, napd: — tueans of, 
 
 dno, 8td ; — land and sea, Kara. 
 
 y^p Kol Kara OdXaTrav. 
 
 Call, /caXfcd, KoXoi', — out, ^odco, 
 
 ^orja-ojjLai ] — together, (rvy-Ka- 
 
 Xe'o). 
 Camp, (7T paTOTTfbov, -ov, to. . 
 Cappadocia, KaTrnadoKid, as, fj. 
 Captain. Xo;(dydy, -ov, 6. 
 Capture, \ap^dv(o (\a^-, v.), X7y\//-o- 
 
 fxai ; alpeto, alprjcra), etc 
 Care, take — of, eTn-fxeXeopai, fVt- 
 
 fXf\r}(rofiai ; take — , fxeXei, peX^- 
 
 Carry, «ya>, a^a> ; — aimi/, dpTrd^w 
 (dpTraS-, iv.), dpnacrai ; — o/i 
 t6'«r, TToXffieo), TTo\fprj(r(i>. 
 
 Cast aside, away, piirTOi {pi(ji-, iii), 
 
 Carsus, Kdpo-os, -ou, 6. 
 Castolus, Kao-TcoXdy, -ov, 6. 
 Catch, 6-qpeva), -eucrco ; 'kafx^dvo) 
 
 (Xa/3-, v.), "K^ylAOfiat. 
 Cattle, /Sovs. 3ods, 6, ^. 
 Cavalry, jVTrety, -e'coi', ot ; — man, 
 
 linrevs, -ecos, 6 ; ImriKos, ■ rj, -6v. 
 Cease, iravopat, navcropai. 
 Celaenae, KeXaivai, -av, at. 
 
 Charge, 'lepai (e-) ; — double quick^ 
 8p6p(o Oeoi, {6v-, ii.), Oevaoixai, 
 elc. 
 
 Chariot, dppa, -qtos, to. 
 
 Chase, Sicokco, fiico^o). 
 
 Chersonesus, Xeppourjaos, -ov, rj. 
 
 Child, nais, iraidos, 6, tj ; naidiov, 
 
 -ov, TO. 
 
 Chirisophus, Xeiplaocpos, -ov, 6. 
 Choose, atpeopai, alprjaopai. 
 Cilicia, KikiKid, -as, rj. 
 Cilician, Kt'Xi^, -ikos, 6 ; — queen^ 
 
 KiXicraa, -r)s, r). 
 Citizen, ttoXitj;?, -ov, 6. 
 City, TToXis, -cats, T). 
 Clearchus, KXeap;^os, -ov, 6. 
 Collect, ddpoi^(o (d6poi&; iv.), 
 
 ddpoLcro); avX-Xeyco, -Xe^ca. 
 Colossae, KoXoaaai, -oiv, at. 
 Come, epxopai, rfkOov \ rJKO) ; have 
 
 — , rJKCo; — on, 7rpo(T-epxopat, 
 
 7rp6-€ipi (7-). 
 Command, KeXevo), -fvcroi ; Tdrrco 
 
 (ray-, iv.), rd^o) ; rjye'opai, j]yff 
 
 aopai, order : dpx<^, dp^co, rule. 
 Commander, dpxf^v, -ovros, o ; 
 
 (TTpaTTjyos, -ov, 6. Syn. 227. 
 Company, \6xos, -ov, d ; in — 
 
 trith, rrvv. 
 Conquer, j/t/cdca, VLKrja(o ; KpaTeoo, 
 
 KpaTTja-coy etc. 
 Conscious, be — , o-vv-oiba. 
 Consider, aKoneco ; aKenTopai 
 
 (aK€7r-, iii.), (TKe-^opai ; /SouXfuo- 
 
 fxai, -evaopat. 
 Consult, — with, avp-^ov^evopiai. 
 Continue, Sm-rfXeco; bi-dyto -d^(o. 
 Contribute, avp-^dXkco OaX-, iv.), 
 
 -j3aX&>. 
 Counsel, avp-^ovXevo), -fyerco. 
 Country, x<«pd, -ds, 17 ; into the — ■ 
 
 of, els. 
 Cowardly, kukos, -t), -6v. 
 
Cross 
 
 441 
 
 Error 
 
 Cross, or — over, 8ca-^aiu(o (^a-, 
 
 iv., v.), -^rjo-ofiai. 
 Cut, — to pieces or down, Kara- 
 
 KQTrr<o (kott-, iii.), -/cov/^o) ; — 
 
 down, iK-KOTTTca. 
 Cydnus, Kvdvos, -ov, 6. 
 Cyrus, Kvpos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Damage, do — , KOKai noUo), -^ao). 
 
 Danger, kiv8vvos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Daric, dapeiKos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Darius, Adpelos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Day, ^fiepd, -as, r] ; on the following 
 
 — , TTJ va-T€paia ; dat/''s march, 
 
 (TTadfioi, -ov, 6. 
 Deceive, yj/evdco, yj/evao). 
 Declare, dno-hilKvvfxi {bciK-, v.), 
 
 -b(i^o}iai. 
 Deed, epyov, -ov, to. 
 Defeat, vikcIq), vLKriaco. 
 Deliberate, ^ov'Xevofj.ai, avp-^ov- 
 
 Xfvofxai, ^ovT^evo-ofiat. 
 Demand, alreoi, alTr](T<o ; a^^too), 
 
 d^taxro) ; — hack, dn-aiTed}. Syii. 
 
 271. 
 Deprive, arepeui, -rjo-o). 
 Descend, KaTa-^aivca (^a-, iv., v.), 
 
 -^rjo-opai. 
 Design, eVi-^ovAevo), -€v<t<o. 
 Desire, eTn-dvpia), -t)o-co', edeXco, 
 
 -i}(r(o; xpsC« ixPV^'^ i^:-)- ^yn. 
 
 792. 
 
 Desist, TTavop.ai, Trava-o/iaL. 
 
 Destroy, 'Kvm, Xvaco. 
 
 Die, T6^ (VTUM, -rjao) ; 6vr](TK(o {6av-, 
 
 vi.), QavovpLOi; cLTTo-OvqcyKai. 
 DiiEcult, ^j^aXfTTOff, -17, -ov. 
 Distant, he — , d7r-€;^a), St-c^o). 
 Distribute, Sia-Sifico/ui (80-, vii.), 
 
 -Soxrai. 
 
 Ditch, rdcfipos, -ov, r;. 
 
 Do, TTOtto), 7roirjo-(o', Trpdrro) (jrpdy-, 
 
 iv.), irpa^io; — harm, KaKua 
 
 TTOuco ; — wrong, dStKeoa, -t}0(o ; 
 
 — well hy, fv Tvouat. 
 Door, Bvpd, -as, fj. 
 Double-quick, charge — , 8p6pa 
 
 6e(o, 0€vo-op.ai. 
 DoTvn, Kara. 
 Dra"W, o-7rda>, andcra) ; — up, rdrToa 
 
 (ray-, iv.), rd^co. 
 Dread, o/cveco, -rjaco. Syn. 709. 
 Dress, o-toXtj, -fjs, fj. 
 
 DtVCU, oIk€0)., olKrj(T(0. 
 
 Each, €KaarTos, -rj, -ov. 
 
 Eager, npoOvpos ; he — , em-Ovfiia. 
 
 Eat, €o6iai, edopai. 
 
 Educate, TratSevoj, -fvaco. 
 
 Embark, eu-^aiuo) (^a-, iv., v.), 
 
 -^Tjo-opai. 
 Empty, fV/SaXXo) OaX-, iv.), -^aXw ; 
 
 ela-^dWco. 
 Encamp, arpaToiredevopai. -evao- 
 
 pai ; aKTjVfco, -Tjaco ', be encamped, 
 
 KciOrjyLai. 
 Encampment, orparoTreSoi/, -ov, to. 
 End, navo), iravaa', come to an — , 
 
 Tovofiat. 
 Enemy, noKipios, ov, o ; ex^pos, 
 
 -ov, 6 ; the — , oi TroXepioi. Svn. 
 
 709. 
 Enlist, Xa/x/Sdi/o) (XajS-, v.), 'Krjylro- 
 
 pai. 
 Entire, ottos ', nds, ndaa. ndv. 
 Entrust, Trpo-irjpi (4-), -rja-o). 
 Enumeration, dpi6p6s, -ov, 6. 
 Equipment, o'toKos -ov, 6. 
 Error, commit — ,&fxapTdv(o (dpLopT-, 
 
 v.), dpapTrjaopai.. 
 
Escape 
 
 442 
 
 Gold 
 
 Escape,a7ro 0evya)(^iry-,ii.); — the 
 notice of, XavOdvco {\ad-, \.), Xtjo-m. 
 
 Especially, fiaXia-Ta. 
 
 Euphrates, EvfppctTr/s, -ov, 6. 
 
 Even, Kai; not — , /Li»/6e, ouSe. 
 
 Everything, irdvTa. 
 
 Evident, brfKos, -rj, -ov. 
 
 Except, 7T\r}v. 
 
 Exile, (pvyds, -d8os 6. 
 
 Expedition, oTdXos,-ou, 6; 6869, -ov, 
 
 rj ; make an — , oTpaTevco, -evaai ; 
 
 take part in an — , arpaTevofxai. 
 
 Experience, rrelpa, -as, rj. 
 
 Extent. ttXtjOos, ovs, to. 
 
 Express, dno-bcUvvixi {deiK-, v.), 
 
 Fair, kqXos, -t}, -6u. 
 
 Faithful, TTiaTos, -17, -ov. 
 
 Fall, — on, efi-TriTTTa), -ireaovfiai. 
 
 Fast, Ta)(ea>s- 
 
 Father, Trarrjp, jiarpos, 6. 
 
 Fear, (po^os, -ov, 6 ; (po^eopai -^fj- 
 
 aopai, of sudden fear or terror ; 
 
 Set So), 8e8oLKa, of reasonable fear; 
 
 6ku€(o, -fjao), dread. Syn. 709. 
 Fellow-soldiers, au8pes a-TpaTicb- 
 
 Tai, with or without S). 
 Fidelity, evuota, -as, fj. 
 Fight, pdxT], -?;?, jj; pdxop^i, pa- 
 
 Xovpai, etc. 
 Find, fvpio-KO) (evp-, vi.), evprjo-o). 
 First, Trp5)Tos, -t). -ov; Trpayrov. 
 Fish, IxBvs, -vos, 6. 
 Five, Trevre ', — hundred, nevTOKo- 
 
 (Tioi, -at, -a. 
 Flee, (f)€vy(o ((/)uy-, ii.), (f)€v^opai 
 
 or <f)€v^ovpai. 
 Flesh, Kpeas, Kpe<os, to 
 Flour, ciXfvpa, -av, rd. 
 Flourishing, evdaipav, -ov. 
 
 Flow, p€(»> (pv-, ii.), pevaopai 
 Follo"w , eiropai, icrnopr^v ; as foU 
 
 lows, a)Se, or some case of o8e; 
 
 on the following day, tjj va-rcpala ; 
 
 in the following manner, hde. 
 Food, alTos, -ov, 6. 
 Foot, novs, TTobos, 6. 
 Foot-soldier, Trends, -ov, 6, 
 For, ydp ; nepi, eVi, npds- 
 Force, dvvapis, -€a>s, fj ; laxvs, -vos, 
 
 T) ; o-Tpdrevpa, -aros, to ; the 
 
 Greek — , to 'EXXtjvikov. 
 Formerly, to dpxaiov. 
 Four, TeTTapes. 
 Fourth, Terapros. 
 Freedom, eXcvBepid, -as, 17- 
 Friend, (f)iXos, -ov, 6 ; ^ivos, -ov, 6. 
 Friendly, (jiiXios, -a, -ov ; (f)iXos, 
 
 -rj, -ov. 
 Friendship, cfuXid, -as, rj. 
 From, e^, OTTO, napd. 
 Fugitive, (f)vyds, -ddos, 6 ; cf^evyav, 
 
 -OVTOS, 6. 
 
 Full, pea-Tos, -rj, -ov ; nXrjprjs, -€s. 
 Furnish, nopl^oi (7ropi8-, iv-), tto- 
 piS); Trap-exo), -e'^o). 
 
 Garrison, (f)vXaKr}, -rjs, ff. 
 General, a-rpaTrjyos, -ov, 6. 
 Gift, dcopov, -ov, TO. 
 Give, dldcopi (80-, vii), ficba©; — 
 
 over, 7rapa-8i8oipi. 
 Gladly, fj8eu)s. 
 Go, dpi (t-) ; epxopui, ^X6ov; — 
 
 up, dva^aivco, ^r}(ropai ', — back, 
 
 away, arr-eipi ; — through, dia- 
 
 ^aivco. Syn. 741. 
 God, Beds. 
 Gold, xP^fJ'^ov, -ov, to; of — , xp^' 
 
 aovs, -7, -ovv. 
 
Good 
 
 443 
 
 Inhabitants 
 
 Good, aya^oy, -^, -ov. 
 Good-wiil, evvoia, -as, rj. 
 Gratify, x«P*'C«F«' (X"P*^'' ^^•)' 
 
 ^apiovfxai. 
 Great, ^eyas, fieydXr), fieya, of size ; 
 TToXus, TToXX^, TTokv, of amouiit or 
 number; greater part, to noXv. 
 Greece, 'EXXas, -ados, rj. 
 Greek, "EkKqv, -rjvos, 6 ; 'EXXiyvt- 
 
 Kos, -T], -6v ; in — , 'EWrjvtK^s. 
 Grieve, Xv7rea>, 'KvTrrjaco. 
 Ground, — arms, riBefxai to. oirXa. 
 Guard, (^uXokt;, -fjs, v ; c^vXa^, 
 -aico?, o; — or he on — (^uXarro) 
 (0vXaK-, iv-)i <^vXd^a). 
 Guest, or guest-friend, ^euos, -ov, 6. 
 Guide, i^yefiwi/, -ows, 6. 
 
 Halt, dva-Traioixai, in order to rest ; 
 
 — under arms, OeaOai ra oTrXa ; 
 
 laTTjfMt ((TTa-, vii.), o-r/)o-a>; Kora- 
 
 Xiio), unyoke. 
 Hand, x^'P^ x^^po'^' ^• 
 Happen, rvyx"^'" {t^X'-^ ^0 "^^'^lo" 
 
 /xai ; ylyvofxai, yevfjaofiai ; — 
 
 Mjjon, eV-Tvyx«''<i* 
 Happy, €v8aifM0)v, -ov. 
 Hard, xa^f7i"«^' '^^ '"*'• 
 Harm, do — , KaKas Trou'w, Troirjaoi ; 
 SMjfer — , /cafcojs ttuo-xco (7ra^-, vi.), 
 Treicrofiai. 
 Hasten, o-ttcvSo), -o-Trevo-w ,• op/iaco, 
 
 Have, €X<» (o'fX-)j «!*" *' ^'V^' («0' 
 eao^iaL, with dat. 
 
 He, generally omitted; when em- 
 phatic, oItos, €K€ivos, and o8e ; 
 a„rf_, 6 8e,etc. (182, 393ff); 
 — who, 6 with the part. (234, h). 
 
 Hear, aKovio, aKovaofuu. 
 
 Height, aKpov, -ov, to. 
 
 Her, oblique cases oi avTj]. 
 
 Herald, Krjpv$, -vkos. 6. 
 
 Here, ivraida, avTOv, avTodi, devpo. 
 
 Hill, \6(pos, yrjXoclios, -ov, 6- 
 
 Him, oblique cases of avTos; ov, 
 
 indir. reflex ; see He. 
 Himself, eavTov, reflex. ; avTos, 
 
 iiiteus. 
 Hinder, kcoXvco, kcoXvo-co. 
 Hire, paaQoopat, -wo-o/xai. 
 His, when not emphatic, by the ar- 
 ticle; referring to the subject, by 
 iavTov\ when not referring to 
 the subject, by avTov, Ueivov. 
 Hold, excB (o-fX-)' f'f'^' <^X^o-<"- 
 Home, homeward, oUade. 
 Honor, ti/xtj, -rjs, f) ; Ti/ido), -^o-a>. 
 Hope, eXTTi's, -I'Soy, ^. 
 Hoplite, oTrXtTTjs, -ov, 6. 
 Horse, ittttos, -ov, 6 ; on horseback, 
 
 dno Hmrov or dcj) lir-nov. 
 Horseman, iTnrivs, -eoas. 6. 
 Hostile, TToXefiios, -a, -op ; ex^pos, 
 
 -a, -ov. 
 Hostility, TioXcp-os, -ov, 6. 
 House, oi/ci'd, -as, fj ; oikos, -ov, o. 
 How, TTMf, oTTcos ; — lai-ge, oo-os, 
 
 -■q, -ov ; oTToo-o?, -T], -ov- 
 Hundred, eKaTov. 
 Hunt, 6r)pevco, -cvaco ; ^rjpdco, -aora>. 
 
 I, ey&. 
 
 If, ft, eai', av, rjv. 
 
 Immediately, €v6vs. 
 
 Impassable, anopos, -ov. 
 
 In, eV, €is; — order that, ii/a,. ws, 
 
 OTTO) J. 
 
 Inflict, eni-Tidrj^i (Be-, \'u.), erjaa. 
 Inhabit, oiWo), -rjau; cVot»c€ft>. 
 
Instead 
 
 444 
 
 Marsyas 
 
 Instead, — o/*, avri 
 
 Intend^ jneXXco, fxeWfjaa). 
 
 Into, ds. 
 
 Invade, efi-/3aXX<o (/3aX-, iv.), -^aka>. 
 
 Ionian, 'Icovlkos, -'fj, -6u. 
 
 Issus, 'Icrtroi, -ibv, ol. 
 
 J. 
 
 Jar, ^Kos, -ov, 6. 
 Javelin, TraXrou, -ov, to. 
 Journey, nopeid, as, rj ; 6B6s, -ov,^. 
 Judge, KptvQ) (Kpiv-f iv.), Kpivm. 
 Justice, biKT), -T]s, ^. 
 Justly, diKaiMs. 
 
 Kill, KTeivco (kt€v-, iv.), KT€va> dno- 
 
 KT^lvoi ; be, killed, dTro-durjcTKa), 
 
 -Oavovp-at. 
 King, (Saa-iXevs, -eo)?, 6, 6e — , ^aari- 
 
 Xevo), -fuo-o). 
 Know, ytyvooaKio (yvo-, vi.), yvdii- 
 
 aopai ; ol8a, e'laopai ' ■ — how, 
 
 inidTapaL, iTviurricropxxi. 
 
 Lacedaemonian, haKcbaipovios, -a, 
 
 -ov. 
 Land, yrj. y^s, fj; x^P^i "°^' ^• 
 Large, peyas, of extent ; iroXvs, see 
 
 Great. 
 Last, at — , reXos. 
 Lead ayco a^O) \ f)yiopai, rjyrjcropai, 
 
 — hack, drr-dyco. 
 Leader, rjyepatv, -ovos, 6. 
 Learn, — by inquiry, 7rvv6dvop,ai, 
 
 (nv$', v.), neva-opai. 
 
 Leave, XftVo) (Xitt-, ii.), Xft>/r&); 
 
 eVXeiTro), eVi-Xf tVci) ; — behind, 
 
 Kara-XeiTTO), VTro-XetVa). 
 Left, evoivvpos, -ov; dpiaT€p6s, -a, 
 
 -ov. 
 Lest, p.r]. 
 Let, — loose or — go, d(f)-ir]pi 
 
 (-0- 
 
 Letter, emaToXr], -rjs, f]. 
 
 Lie, Kelpai, Ketaopat, of position ; 
 
 yjrevdoi, yl/eva-co, falsify. 
 Line of battle, rd^is, -ecos, fj, fall 
 
 into battle — , crvv-TaTTopiai. 
 Little, piKpos, -d, -6v. 
 Live, ^d(o, ^r)(ra>. 
 Long, paKpos, of space or time ; 
 
 TToXvs, ttoXXtj, ttoXv, of time ; to- 
 
 aovTos, -rj, -ov, so, so much. 
 Loose, Xvo), Xixrco. 
 Love, (piXeco, ^ikr](T(o. 
 Lydia, Kvbid, -as, r). 
 
 M. 
 
 Maeander, Maiai/Spoy, -ov, 6. 
 
 Make, ttoisco. ttoitjctci) ; — answer, 
 dno-Kpivopai (Kptv, iv.), drro- 
 Kpivoiipai ; — war, noXepea) -tjo-co ; 
 — an expedition, aTparevio ; — 
 known, (rqpaivco (arjpav-, iv.), arj- 
 p,av5> ; — treaty, (nrevdopai. 
 
 Man, avdpcoTTos, -ov, 6. Lat homo; 
 dvr)p, dvdpns, 6. Lat, vir. 
 
 Manifest, (pavepos, -d, -ov. brjXos, 
 -Tj, -ov. 
 
 Many, ttoXXoL See Much. 
 
 March, eXavvco (i}^a-, v.), cXa* ; wo- 
 pfvopai, TTopevaopai; — on, e^e- 
 Xavvo) ' — up, dvalBaivo), -^{]<Topai ; 
 day''s — , o-radfios. -oO, 6. 
 
 Market-place, dyopd, -as, t]- 
 
 Marsyas, Mapavas, -ov, 6. 
 
Mascas 
 
 445 
 
 Our 
 
 Mascas, Matr/cay, -d 6. 
 
 Means, hy — oJ\ cmo. 
 
 Meat, Kptas, Kpeois, to. 
 
 Media, Mj/Si'd, -as, fj. 
 
 Meet, avy^iyvonai, -yevrfo-ofiai ; 
 
 €v-Tvyxavco (rvy-, v.),-r€V^o/iat. 
 Meeting, e<-/cX?^crid, as, tj. 
 Menon, Mevcov, -covos, 6. 
 Mercenary, ^evos, -ov, 6. 
 Messenger, ayyeXos, -ov, 6. 
 Middle, /iccros', -rj, -ov ; fieaou, -ov, 
 
 TO. 
 
 Midst, fxeaov, -ov, to 
 
 Miletus, MiXr]Tos, -ov, f]. 
 
 Mina, fipa, fivds, rj. 
 
 Mind, vovs, vov, 6. 
 
 Miss, dfiapTcivco {ap.apT-, v.), dfiap- 
 
 TTjaofxai. 
 Money, dpyvpiov, -ov, to ; xPW^'''^i 
 
 -aTQiv, TO. ; xpvcriov, -ov, to. 
 Month, fJLTjv, firjuos, 6. 
 More, fiaXXov, rrXeou. 
 Mother, prjTtjp, p.i]Tp6s, f]. 
 Mountain, opos, -ovs, to. 
 Much, TToXvs ; TToXv ; see Great. 
 Multitude, nXijBoSj -ovs, to. 
 Must, Set, xP^f dvdy<r) eort ; the 
 
 verbal in -tcos. 
 Muster, ddpol^ofiai ; see Collect. 
 My, when not emphatic, by the 
 
 article ; efios, generally with the 
 
 article; sometimes fiov, ep-ol eivai', 
 
 of mine, ip.6s or e/xot ; — own, 
 
 (fios, ifiavTov. 
 Myself, ip.avTov, reflex. ; avTos, 
 
 inteus. 
 
 Narrow, (mv6s, 17, -6v. 
 Near, iiapd ; TrXrjaiov, iyyvs. 
 Necessary, it is — , 6ft, xph^ 
 
 Necessity, dvdyKt), -rjs, ^. 
 
 Need, deofxai, 8er)crofiai ; there is 
 
 — , Set. 
 Neglect, dixeXeco, d/xeXiyo-o). 
 Neither, — ... mr, ovt€ . . . 
 
 oijTe ; p.rjT€ . . . firjre. 
 Next, on the — dr///, ttj vvTfpaia. 
 Night, vv^, vvKTos, 17. 
 No, ovdeis, -€v6s', fXTjdeis; — one or 
 
 nobody, ovbels, fXTjdeis. 
 Noble, KaXos, -T], -ov ; dyaBos, -rj, -ov. 
 Noise, Oopv^os, -ov, 6. 
 Not, ov, fi^ ; — even, ovde, /x»;Se ; 
 
 — only . . . but also, koi . . . Kai. 
 Now, vvv, of time; ^drj, already; 
 
 drj, accordingly. 
 
 0,3>. 
 
 Oath, opKos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Obey, TreiBopai (niO-, ii.), Treiaofiai. 
 
 Obtain, Tvy xavoi (tvx-, v.), Tev^op.ai. 
 
 On, eVt, €v ; — account of, 8id, 
 eveKa ; — horseback ; see Horse ; 
 — the one hand ... — the other, 
 fiiv . . . 8e. 
 
 Once ; at — , evdvs. 
 
 One, els, tIs ; — another, dXXrjX<op. 
 
 Opinion, yvatp-rj, -rjs, rj. 
 
 Oppose, KcciXvco, KcoXvaa. 
 
 Or, fj. 
 
 Order, KeXevw, KeXevaat, bid, com- 
 mand ; give the or pass the — 
 along, 7rap-ayyeXX(o (dyytX-, iv.), 
 -ayyeXo) ; military — tu^ls, -eas, 
 rj ; in — that, iva, ios, oirats. 
 
 Orontas, 'Opovras, d or -ov, 6 
 
 Other, aXXos, -r), -o', — wise, aX- 
 Xa>s. 
 
 Our, when not emphafic by the 
 article ; rifihepos, sometimes by 
 f]p.a)v. 
 
Overcome 
 
 446 
 
 Region 
 
 Overcome. Kpareo). Kparr^GO) ; irfpi- 
 
 yiyuofiat, -ysurjcroixaL 
 O^we, /o — , 6^€l\(o (oc^eX-, iv.), 
 
 6(})eiXr]<T(o. 
 
 P. 
 
 Palace, /SacriXfia, -a>i/, rd. 
 
 Parasaiig, Trapacrdyyrjs, -ov, 6. 
 
 Park, Trapdbfiaos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Pary satis, Ilapvo-aTis, -i8os, t}. 
 
 Fasion, Haaicov, -covos 6. 
 
 Pay, fii(r66i, -ov, 6 ; reXeci), reXo) ; 
 
 drro dldoifxi, -daxico. 
 Peltast, 7re\TaaTr)s, -oi>, 6. 
 Perceive, aiaddvofuu {alad-, v.), 
 
 alaBrjaopai. 
 Perish, ayr-oXXu/iai, arr-oXov/xai. 
 Perjure, — one^s self ; em-opKeo), 
 
 ini opKr)(T(ji>. 
 Persian, liepaiKcs -f}, -ov; Ilepar}^, 
 
 -ov, 6. 
 Persuade, neidco (md-, ii.), Trelaco. 
 Phalanx, cpdXay^, -yyos, rj. 
 Phalinus, ^aXlvos, -ov, 6. 
 Phrygia, ^pvyid, as, rj. 
 Pisidians, Iliaidai, -cSv ol 
 Place, ^atplov, -ov, TO ; take one^s 
 
 — , KaO-lo-rafxai, -fiaojxni ; from 
 
 that — , epTeiiOev ; in this — , 
 
 euTovSa. 
 Plain, neSiov, -ov, to ; 8j)Xos", -;;. -ov. 
 Plan. ^ovXr) -rjs, f] ; ^ov'Kevco. /3ou- 
 
 Xevcro), — • against, eni'^ovXeva), 
 
 -fvaco. 
 Pledge, iTi(TTis. -€cos, fj. 
 Plethrum, nXeBpov, -ov, to- 
 Plot, €7rt-/3ovXj7, -r}?, fj ; — against ; 
 
 iiTi /SouXeuo), -XfUfro). 
 Plunder, cnrpd^ui (drrpab; iv.), 
 
 Point, — out, fTTl-dflKUVIJil (^flK-. v.), 
 
 Possible, ^vvaTos, rj, 6v\ it is — , 
 
 eaTi ; as . . . as — , oTi or a>s with 
 
 the superlative. 
 Praise, eir-aivea, eV-aii/ecra). 
 Prefer, alpeofjcai, alpfjaofiai ; /3ou- 
 
 Xo/uat, fiov\rja-op.ai. 
 Present, nap-aiu, -i ixra, -ov ; at 
 
 — , vvV, be — , ndpeiiXL, -eao/xai', 
 
 napa-ylyvofxai, -yevr)o-op.at. 
 Pretext, 7rp6<paais, -eas, 17- 
 Previous, or preciously, npoadev. 
 Proceed, iropevofiat^ Tropivo-ojjLai, 
 
 e^-e\avvo3, -eXa>. 
 Procure, rcopi^u) (nopib-, iv.), Tropiw. 
 Promise, vnia-xveop.ai, axrjo-ofxai. 
 Property, ^pijfjLara, -utohv, tu. 
 Prosperous, evdaificov, -ov. 
 Province, dpx^^-^s, t} 
 Provisions, to, eniTrjbeta, -onv, tu. 
 Proxenus, lipo^evos, ov, 6 
 Punishment, inflict — , Uktiv ini- 
 
 Tidrffii, -BrjiTopLai. 
 Pursue, hia)K(o, diM^a>. 
 Pursuit, go in — , Stw/co), 8i<i)$a>. 
 
 Question, ipcordo), epuiTrjO-co. Svn. 
 
 271. 
 Quickly, Ta)(v, Ta^ecoS' 
 
 Rank, rd^ts, -fcoy, 17. 
 
 Ravage, dt-apird^o) (apTraS-, iv.), 
 
 -apnda-co. 
 Receive, Xa/x/3ai/Q) (Xa/3-, v.), X^>/ro- 
 
 fxai ; be^op-ai, 8e^op.ai. 
 Refuse, ov (})t]hl. 
 Regard, vofii^a (yopib; iv.), vo- 
 
 Region, Toiroi, -ov, 6. 
 
Reign 
 
 447 
 
 Six 
 
 Reign, /SacrtXevo) ^aa-iXfva-o). 
 Remain, fxeuco, fxeva. 
 Remit, dTro-nefiTrco, -Trefx^to. 
 Report, ayycXXo) (a-y-yeX-, iv.), ay- 
 
 •yeX© : dTT-ayyeXXo) ; c^-ayyeXXo) ', 
 
 Xeyo), Xe^co. 
 Rest, ava-iravofiai, -naiKTOfiai ; ^Ae 
 
 — of,6 XoiTTos ; ^^e — , oi aXXot ; 
 
 of the future, to Xoittov. 
 Review, e^eracns^ -ecoy, rj ; Jiold a 
 
 — , (^eraaiu noieofiai, nocrjaoiiai. 
 Revolt, d(f)-icrTanai {ara-, vii.), 
 
 -(TTTjcronai. 
 Ride,eXaui/&)(eXa-,v.), cXeS; — awmj 
 
 an--eXayvo). 
 Right, dUaios, -a, -ov, of actions ; 
 
 df^ios, of direction ; on the — , iv 
 
 de^ia ; give the — hand, df^iUu 
 
 River, ttotoixos, -oi>, 6. 
 
 Road, odos, -ov, rj. 
 
 Rome, 'PafiTj, -tjs, rj. 
 
 Royal, ^aaiXeios, -ov. 
 
 Rule, ("tfJXf^, ap^co ; 7-uler, apx(ov, 
 
 -6vT09, 6. 
 
 Run, in general, Tpe;^a) ; — with 
 haste and speed, usually of men, 
 6ka} {6v-, ii.), 6(v(rofxai. 
 
 Rush, Uiiai (e-), rjaoyiai. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sack, bi-apTid^o) (Ap-nab-, iv.), -ap- 
 
 Trarro). 
 Sacrifice, 6va>, dvaco. 
 Safe, da(PaKr]s, -ey. 
 Safely, dacpaXws- 
 Safety, ocoTrjpid, -d?, fj ; in — , 
 
 afT(/)aXcoy ; in the greatest — , 
 
 drrcpaXecTTaTa. 
 Sail, — away, dnoTrXeo (nXv, ii.), 
 
 -nXeva-ofiai,. 
 
 Same, 6 avros, rj avrr], to avTO- 
 Sardis,* 'Sapdcis, -eoiv, ai. 
 Satrap, crarpdn-q^., ov, 6. 
 Save, crto^o) (cra)8-, iv.), aamm. 
 Say, Xeyco, Xe^oj ; 07^/*/, (j)r](T(o ', 
 
 said, eiTTov. tSyn. 772. 
 Sea, 6d\aTTa, -rji, rj. 
 See, opdo), o'^ofiat ; — to, (TKenTO- 
 
 fxai (cr/cfTT-, iii.), aKeylropai ; he 
 
 seen, (paivopai ((l)av-, iv.), cpavov- 
 
 fiai. 
 Seem, ^aivofiat ((f)ap-, iv.), (j)a- 
 
 vovpat ; — best or good, So/cew, 
 
 Seize, dpird^co (dp-rrab-, iv.), dpird- 
 
 (T&) ; alpeoi, aiprj<Ta>. 
 Self, atroy, -17, d. 
 Send, TTf/iTro). Trepyp^to ', dTronefinco', 
 
 — yf>?', peTa-n€p,Tropai ; — away 
 
 or ^o»?e, drro-TTfp'iro} ; — f/o?/?n, 
 
 KaTa-nepnco ; — ?r?7A, avp-nefino}. 
 Seven, eWa. 
 Severe, ;^aXe7rdf, -77, -o'l/. 
 Shield, diiTTLs, -iSos, t) ; neXTij, 
 
 -rjsr fj. 
 Ship, vav9, i/fo)?, rj. 
 Shoot, To^evco, ro^etVo). 
 Shout, Kpavyr), rjs, rj ; ^od(o, ^ory 
 
 aofiat. 
 Show, 8rj\6a>, dTjXwo-co ; (jioivco 
 
 (cj)av-, iv.), (f)avQ), make appear; 
 
 d€iKPvp,i {8eiK-, v.), dei^o), ini-bfi- 
 
 Kvvpi, point out. 
 Side, by the — of, napd ; on all 
 
 sides, ndvTrj. 
 Sight, in plain — , KaTa(f)air)s, -6 9- 
 Signal, give the — , arjpaivoi {(rrjpav-, 
 
 iv.), arjpavQ). 
 Silanus. SiXdi/o's, -ov, 6. 
 Silver, dpyvpiov, -ov, to. 
 Situated, be — , oi/<€o/zat, oiKjytro- 
 
 pai. 
 Six, e^; — thousand, e^a/cio-xtXtot. 
 
Slaughter 
 
 448 
 
 Thing 
 
 Slaughter, kotttco (kott-, iii.)? 
 
 So, ovTcos, a)Se, of manuer; roaov- 
 
 Tos, — much, of degree ; — that, 
 
 or — as to, &(rT€. 
 Socrates, 2(OKpdTr)s, -ovs, 6. 
 Soldier, o-TpaTicoTTjs, -ov, 6. 
 Some, rty ; some . . . others, ol ficu 
 
 . . . oi 8e', some one or something, 
 
 ri^, t\, TivdS' 
 Soon, Taxi) ; raxecoy. 
 Sort, what — , olos, -a, -ov. 
 Speak, Xeyo), Xe^o). Syii. 772. 
 Speech, Xoyos, -ov, 6. 
 Speed, at full — , dva Kpdros, -ovs, 
 
 TO. 
 
 Stade, arddLov, -ov, to 
 Stage, aTa6p.6s, -ov, 6. 
 Stand, larafxaL (crra-, vii.), (tttjcto- 
 
 fiai, caTTjKa ; — wider arms, 6k- 
 
 (rOai TO. oirka. 
 Station, aTadfios, -ov, 6. 
 Still, cTi. 
 Stone, "kiSos, -ov, 6; /SaXXco (/SaX-, 
 
 iv.), /3aX<w. 
 Stop, Travci). navaoi. 
 Strike, naioi, nala-w. 
 Strong, lax^pos, -a, -ov. 
 Suffer, irdcrxoi (nad-, vi.), neia-opai', 
 
 — harm, KaKa>s ndaxo*- 
 Summit, uKpov, -ov, to- 
 Summon, fieTa-ne fin open, -nkpy^o- 
 
 pai ; KaXeo) (xaXe-), fcaXw, call; 
 
 napa-KoXeco, — to one^s side. 
 Support, Tpo(f)T}, -rjs, rj ; Tpi(pa>, 
 
 6piy\r(ii ; vTr-dpx<^i -dp^u). 
 Surrender, Trapa-didcopi (So-, vii.), 
 
 -ScOfTO). 
 
 Surround, nepi e^a), e^to. 
 Sweet, fj8vs, -fla, -v. 
 Swift, Taxvs, ela, -v. 
 Swiftly, Taxv. Taxeo)S. 
 Syennesis, Ivevvecris, -los, 6. 
 
 T. 
 
 Take, Xap^dvco (Xa/3-, v.), Xq^opai ; 
 alpeco, aipr}<T(o ; — place, yiyuopai 
 (yev-), yeuTjcropai. 
 
 Talent, TdXavTov, -ov, to 
 
 Tarsus, Tapaol, -av. ol. 
 
 Teach, dibdarKO) (StSax-, v.), dt- 
 dd^oi. 
 
 Tell, Xe'yo), Xe^o) ; told, clnov. Svu. 
 772. 
 
 Ten, SeKu ; — thousand, pvpioi, 
 -at, -a- 
 
 Tent, (TK-qvr), ^9, f]. 
 
 Terrify, eK-irXriTTco (nXrjy-, iv.), e|- 
 enXdyrjv. 
 
 Territory, x^pd^ -ds, fj. 
 
 Than, 7. 
 
 That, deni., €Kf7vos, -t], ov, rel., os ; 
 those who, oi with a part; coiij., 
 OTL ', in order — , tva, los, ontos, 
 or by fut. part. ; — not, prj ; so 
 — , cocrre. 
 
 The, 6, fj, TO. 
 
 Their, when not enipliatic, by the 
 article; avrau, eKelvujp; — own, 
 eavrSfV. 
 
 Them, oblique cases of qvtos. -tj, 
 -6 in plur. See 182 : ovtoi, €<el- 
 uoiQSS). 
 
 Themselves, eavT&v, reflex. ; avToi, 
 intens. ; by the middle voice. 
 
 Then, tot^, eir-eLTa; bl], ovv, infer- 
 ential. 
 
 Thence, evrevdev. 
 
 There, ivravda, cKel. 
 
 Therefore, ovi^. 
 
 Thereupon, evravda. 
 
 Thessalian, QeTToXos, -ov, 6. 
 
 They, generally omitted ; when em- 
 phatic, OVTOl, €K€lV0ty o78€, ol Se, 
 
 etc. See 180 ff., 188. 
 Thing, generally omitted ; some- 
 
Think 
 
 449 
 
 Who 
 
 times, Trpayfia, -aros, ro; XPW°-j 
 
 -aros, TO. 
 Think, vofii^co (i/o/xtS-, iv.), vofiiw, 
 
 heliece ; doKeca, do^co, suppose; 
 
 oifuu, generally used pareutheti- 
 
 eally, or in the form of a private 
 
 opinion. 
 Third, rpiro?, -rj, -ov. 
 Thirty, Tpia<ovra. 
 This, OTTOS', avTT], tovto ; oSe, r\be, 
 
 Tode. 
 Thousand, ;(tXioi, -ai, -a; ten — , 
 
 pipioi, -ai, -a. 
 Thracian, Qpa^, QpqKos, 6. 
 Three, rpel?, rpia; — hundred, 
 
 TpidKoaiOL, -ai, -a. 
 Through, 8id. 
 Throw, piTTTO) (pt(f)-, iii), piylra>', 
 
 — at, /3aXXa> (/3aX-, iv.), /SaXw. 
 Thus, ovTo>s, wSe. 
 Thymbrium, Qvp^piov, -ov, to. 
 Tigris, Tiyprjs, -tjtos, 6. 
 Time, ;(poi'oy, -ov, 6, the general 
 
 word ; &pd, -as, fj, proper — or 
 
 season : at that — , totc- 
 Tissaphernes, Tiaaacfiepvrjs, -ovs 6. 
 To, els, em, Trapd, rrpos, as w. ace 
 
 of person -, up — , p-^XP'- 5 ^^S^ ^^ 
 
 the dat. ; sign of the iiifin. ; sign 
 
 of purpose, by fut. part, or by tva, 
 
 OTTCoy, (t)s. 
 Treaty, arirovbal, -S)u, ai. 
 Trench, Tacppos, -ov, rj. 
 Tribute, daapos, -ov, 6. 
 Truce, a-nov8ai, -atv, ai. 
 Truly, bt]. 
 
 Trust, TTio-revo), Trttrrevo-a. 
 Try, TTfipdofiai, Tretpatropat. 
 Twelve, ScoSe/ca. 
 Twenty, eiKoa-i. 
 Two, dva, dvolv] — thousand, 8i<t- 
 
 xtXioi. -ai, -a. 
 Tyriaeum, Tvpia7ov, -ov, to. 
 
 Undertaking, irpa^is, -ecos, rj. 
 
 Unless, ei pfj. 
 
 Until, pexpi, ea-Te, ecoy, npiv. 
 
 Upon, eni. 
 
 Use, make — of, xp^opai, xpwopm. 
 
 Valuable, a^ios, -a, -ov. 
 Vengeance, irokep.os, -ov, 6. 
 Victorious, be — , viKao), vlic^a<a. 
 Victory, vikt], -rjs, rj. 
 Village, Koipr), -rjs, r}. 
 Visible, ^avepos, -a, -ov. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wagon, dpa^a, -rjs, fj. 
 "Wall, rel^oy, -ovs, to. 
 War, TToXepos, -ov, 6 ; carry on, 
 
 make, or wage — , TroXe/ic©, TroXf- 
 
 pr)(T(0. 
 Watchword, a-vvdrjpa, -aTos, to. 
 Way, obos, -ov, fj. 
 Wear, ex^i ^^^ ^'' <J'xh^^' 
 Well, ev ; do — ft//, ev ttouco, noi- 
 
 T](r(o; be — , Ka\a>s ex^et, e^ei. 
 Well disposed, evvovs, evvow. 
 What? Tis, Ti, gen. TtVoy; oa-ris, 
 
 rJTis, oTi; — sort, olos, -a, -op. 
 Whatever, oa-Tis. tJtls, oti. 
 When, enel, eTreibrj- 
 Whenever. onoTe, erreiB^. 
 W^here, evda, ov. 
 Wherever, ottov. 
 Whether, el; — ... or, ndTepov 
 
 .. .1 
 Which, OS, TJ, o. 
 Who, or — ? Tis, OS, fj ; oa-Tcs, IJtis. 
 
 29 
 
Whoever 
 
 450 
 
 Zealous 
 
 Whoever, os, r}', octtis, r\Tis. 
 
 Why, Ti. 
 
 Width, fvpos, -ovs, TO. 
 
 Wife, yvvT), yvvaiKoS; r). 
 
 Wild, aypioi, -a, -ov\ — animal^ 
 
 Orjpiov, ov, TO 
 Willing, be — , e'^eXca, edeXfjo-o). 
 Willingly, cicd)v, -ovaa, -ov. 
 W"ine, oivos, -ov, 6. 
 Wing, K€pas, Kepcos and Keparos, of 
 
 an army ; on the right — , eVt rw 
 
 Wise, (ro(f)6s, -rj, -ov. 
 
 Wish, /SovXoftat, j3ov\{]aop,ai, pre- 
 fer ; edeXco, €6eKr](ja>, he tvilling, 
 he ready. 
 
 With, crvv, jjLerd, napd; ej^coi/; asso- 
 ciated — , fierd ; — the aid of, 
 avv. 
 
 Withdraw, aTro-o-Trao), -airdaa). 
 
 Within, fio-o), of motion; — the 
 night, ttj^ vvktos. 
 
 Woman, yvvrj, ywaiKos, fj. 
 
 Wonder, 6avp.dC<o (davpiad-, iv.), 
 Oavpaaopai. 
 
 Word, Xoyoy, -ov, 6; hring hack — , 
 aTT-ayyeXXo) (dyyeX-, iv.), -ayyeXoi) ; 
 pass the — along, TzapayykKKo). 
 
 Work, epyov, -ov, to. 
 
 Worthy, a^iot, -a, -ov. 
 
 Wound, TiTpayaKco {rpo-, vi), Tpaxro). 
 
 Write, ypdcfxo, ypdylro). 
 
 Wrong, he in the — , ddiKeay, ddiKfjao). 
 
 Xenias, Sfvids, -ov, 6. 
 Xenophon, S€vo(pa>v, -covtos, 6. 
 Xerxes, Sep^rjs, -ov, 6. 
 
 Yet, Irt. 
 
 You, av, aov. 
 
 Your, when not emphatic by the 
 
 article ; tp,€Tcpos ; sometimes by 
 
 vpav. 
 Yourself, (reauroO, aeavT^s ', ovtos 
 
 intens. 
 
 Zealous, npoBvpos, ~ov. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 A declension of nouns, feminine, 41 ; 
 masculine, 48. 
 
 abbreviations, p. 404. 
 
 ability, adjectives expressing, 485. 
 
 absolute, genitive, 239. 
 
 accent, ix. 1, 2, 3, a, b, c\ place of 
 accent, x.-xii. ; recessive, xiii. ; 
 19 ; of nouns, 43, ff. ; of verbs, 19 ; 
 of genitive and dative of oxy tones, 
 43, 2, 3 ; of enclitics, 102, ff. ; of 
 proclitics, 101, 103, 4 ; of monosyl- 
 lables of the consonant declension, 
 209 ; of participles, 230 ; of per- 
 fect middle participle, 323, d\ 
 in -s, 350, obs. ; of monosyllabic 
 participles, 623, b ; of contract 
 nouns of the first and second 
 declensions, 165 f. : of contracted 
 syllables, 153 ; of contract adjec- 
 tives, 168 f. ; of second aorists, 
 531, obs.^; of compound verbs, 
 136; Tiff and t\s, 434. 
 
 accusative, direct object, 38 ; of 
 extent, 93 ; of inner object, 261, 
 a, b\ two accusatives, 268, 269, 
 468 ; specification, 338 ; adverb- 
 ial, 357 ; w. special verbs, 603. 
 
 action, formation of nouns express- 
 ing, 479, ff. 
 
 adjectives, formation, 483, ff. ; attri- 
 butive, 'll ; position, 77, ff. ; agree- 
 ment, 83 ; predicate, 80 ; in -o?, 
 -17 (-a), 'ov, 70, ff., -Off, -01/, 71 ; as a 
 noun, 82; consonant and A de- 
 clensions, 264, f. ; 824 ; consonant 
 declension, 266, 334, f.; 824; 
 
 stems in v, 294, 824; irregular 
 299; contract, 170, 2, 3; 335 
 819; verbals, 373, 782 ; compari 
 son, 374, ff. ; irregular, 380 
 compound, 500. 
 
 adverbs, 459, ff. ; comparison, 464 
 numeral, 445 ; syntax, 466. 
 
 agent, 260 ; formation of nouns ex- 
 pressing agent, 478- 
 
 agreement of verbs, 37, 65 ; of ad- 
 jectives, 83 ; of predicate refer- 
 ring to omitted subject of the 
 infinitive, 780, ff. 
 
 alpha, privative, etc., 498, obs^. 
 
 alphabet, i. 
 
 Anabasis, story of, 432 ; 1. i. 1-3, 
 433; L i. 4-6, 640; I. i. 7-8, 
 ■ 648 ; I. i. 9, 675 ; I. i. 10-11, 
 711; I. ii. 1-2, 728; I. ii. 3-4, 
 735; I. ii. 5-7, 742; I. ii. 8-9, 
 756; I. ii. 10-12, 765; I. ii. 13- 
 16, 774; I. ii. 17-20,786: T. ii. 
 21-24, 793 ; I. ii. 25-27, 798 ; 
 I. iii. 1-6,804; I. iii. 7-12, 806; 
 T. iii. 13-15, 808 ; I. iii. 16-21, 
 810 ; review of, 812. 
 
 antecedent, 186 ; attracted, 439. 
 
 aorist, 202; stem, 197; force of the 
 pluperfect, 433, n. 2; inflection, 
 195, 826, 827, 834; of liquid 
 verbs, 256, ff. ; infinitive, 202, a ; 
 imperative, 415 ; inceptive, 433, 
 N. 3; gnomic, 678 ; iterative, 679 ; 
 second aorist, 203, 530, ff. ; in 
 dependent moods, 567 f. 
 
 apodosis, 661. 
 
452 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 appendix, pp. 365-401. 
 
 apposition, 92. 
 
 article, 9, 10 ; as possessive pro- 
 nouns, 9; w. proper names, p. 
 302. 
 
 aspiration, transferred, p. 153^. 
 
 attributive position, 79 ; participles, 
 234-235. 
 
 augment, 113, 304 ; in compound 
 verbs, 135. 
 
 Belonging to, adjectives expressing, 
 
 485. 
 breathings, ii. ; place of, ii. ix. 2. 
 
 Case, 8 ; endings of consonant de- 
 clension, 223. 
 
 causal clauses, 717. 
 
 circumstantial participle, 236, ff. 
 
 classification of verl)s, 21, 286 ; 
 classes of, 516 : first class, 515, ff. ; 
 second, 527; third, 587; fourtli, 
 595, 607, ff.; fifth, 630, ff., 736 ; 
 sixth, 651; seventh, 730; eighth, 
 698; of mutes, 189, ff. 
 
 cognate mutes, 189, 3 ; words, 504. 
 
 commands and prohibitions, 421, 
 559. 
 
 comparatives Avithout ^, 385. 
 
 comparison, of adjectives, :i74, ff. ; 
 irregular, 380 ; of adverbs, 464. 
 
 compound verbs, 143, 497; of pre- 
 positions followed with their own 
 cases, 144 ; w. dative, 147 ; aug- 
 ment of, 135, 308 ; accent of, 
 136, 289, 324, n. 
 
 conditional sentences, 661 ; particu- 
 lar, 663; contrary to fact, 668; 
 general, 680, 681, ff. ; vivid future, 
 687; less vivid, 690 ; mixed, 804, 
 N. 15 ; conditional relative clauses, 
 699, ff. ; conditional temporal, 
 705, ff. ; substitution of, 715. 
 
 conjugations, 825-863. 
 
 consonants, 189, ff. ; consonant de- 
 clension, 207, 208 ; palatal, 208 ; 
 lingual stems, 218, ft". ; liquid and 
 syncopated stems, 220, 362 ; stems 
 in t, V, €v, 290, 292, ff ; in s, 329 ; 
 digamma nouns, 363 ; rules for 
 gender, 221, 295. 
 
 contract nouns and adjectives, 165, 
 168, 170, 818, ff. ; third decl., see 
 consonants ; contract verbs, 154, 
 429, 676, 843-845; dissyllabic, 
 in €0), p. 82'. 
 
 contraction, 150-152 ; accent of 
 contracted syllables, 153. 
 
 coordinate mutes, 189, 3. 
 
 coronis, 169. 
 
 crasis, 169. 
 
 Dative, indirect object, 66 ; posses- 
 sion, 106 ; with special verbs, 
 146 ; with compound verbs, 147 ; 
 time, 158 ; with adjectives and 
 adverbs, 172, f. ; of advantage, 
 212 ; resemblance, 225 ; cause, 
 manner, means, or instrument, 
 249 ; respect, 339 ; degree of 
 difference, 386 ; of agency, p. 
 130-2, 760; w. verbals, 782. 
 
 declension, 5; A, 41, 4S ; O, 61; 
 814-820 ; consonant, 207, ff , 220, 
 290, 821-823; see consonants; 
 Attic, 363. 
 
 demonstrative pronouns, 179-182. 
 
 denominatives, 473 ; denominative 
 nouns, 481, f. ; adjectives, 485,. 
 ff. ; verbs, 492, ff., 612, ff. 
 
 dependent moods, 552, a; tenses 
 of, 567 f. 
 
 deponent verbs, 360, f. ,. 
 
 digamma nouns of the consonant de- 
 clension, 363 ; p. 145^. 
 
 diphthongs, iv. ; pronunciation of, v. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 453 
 
 division of syllables, vii. ff. 
 
 Doric genitive, p. 25^ ; future, p. 
 
 2142. 
 double consonants, viii. 2, N. 
 double negatives, p. 266^. 
 
 Elision, 99, 134. 
 
 ellipsis, subject, 789, ff. ; verb, 790, 
 
 1,2. 
 enclitics, 102 ; accent, 103, ff., 
 
 104, ff. ; last part of a compound 
 
 word, p. 176^. 
 entreaties and exhortations, 421, 
 
 559. 
 euphony, rules for, 190-194, ff. ; 
 
 215, ff.; w. 378, tf . ; 613, ff. ; 
 
 Kev. 277. 
 extent of time or space, 93. 
 
 Fearing, construction after verbs of, 
 581. 
 
 final clauses, 579. 
 
 fitness, adjectives expressing, 485. 
 
 formation of words, 471, ff- ; primi- 
 tive nouns, 476, ff. ; denominative 
 nouns, 481, ff. ; adjectives, 483, ff.; 
 denominative verbs, 492 ; of the 
 fourth class, 612, ff. ; inseparable 
 prefixes, 498 ; prepositions in 
 composition, 496, f. ; compound 
 words, 494, ff. 
 
 future conditions : vivid, 687 ; less 
 vivid, 690. 
 
 future indicative active and middle, 
 195, 201, 826 ; stem, 196 ; liquid 
 verbs, 255, ff. ; tenses system, 351, 
 2; Attic, 254, 520, a\ Doric, p. 
 2142; flrst passive, 346, 831; 
 second passive, 655, 842 ; future 
 middle for active, p. 214^ ; future 
 indicative in object clauses witli 
 OTTO)?, 589; future in protasis for 
 subjunctive, p. 280^; future in 
 
 relative clauses, 716 ; periphras- 
 tic, 759. 
 future perfect middle and passive 
 stem, 320 ; meaning of, 321. 
 
 Gender, 7, ff . ; of A declension, 40, 
 49, obs. ; declension, 61, a, b ; 
 consonant declension, 221, 295, 
 332, f. 
 
 general suppositions, 680, ff. 
 
 genitive absolute, 239; of agent, 
 260 ; fullness and want, 340 ; 
 attrib., 367, ff.; measure, mate- 
 rial, subjective, objective, posses- 
 sive, partitive, 369, ff. ; predicate, 
 370 ; comparison and implied 
 comparison, 385 ; with verbs, 396- 
 399 ; source, 409 ; separation, 
 410 ; cause, 411 ; price, 424 ; 
 time, 425 ; with adjectives, 426 ; 
 with adverbs, 426, a. 
 
 Grimm's law, 505, ff'. 
 
 Historical present, p. 77-^. 
 
 Imperative, 421 ; tenses, 415 ; per- 
 sonal endings, 417 ; of contract 
 verbs, 429 ; in prohibitions, 559. 
 
 imperfect indicative, 111, 114; stem, 
 112; of contract verbs, 429 ; w. 
 force of plpf. 2571, 793, N. 6. 
 
 indefinite pronoun rls, 435; indef. 
 relative, oorns, 437. 
 
 indirect discourse, 720 ; 723, ff. ; 
 724; w. on and ws, 768, ff. ; 
 model simple sentences, 722, 767, 
 ff. ; complex, 722, ff. ; 723, ff.; 
 
 787 ff. ; participial, 776 ; implied, 
 
 788 ; review, 800. 
 indirect questions, 768, 2. 
 infinitive, 117 ; endings, 115 ; ns 
 
 subject, 118, 721, 1 ; as object, 
 119, 731, 2 ; with adjectives, 120 ; 
 
454 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 subject of, 121; tenses, 202, a-, 
 accent of in -at and -vai and per- 
 fect middle, 323, d\ w. the 
 article, 117, 721, 3 ; in indirect 
 discourse, 723, 1, 2, 3, 724. 
 
 inseparable prefixes, 474, 498. 
 
 instrumental dative, 249. 
 
 intensive pronoun, 162, 164, ff. ; 820. 
 
 interrogative rt?, 434, 1 ; 441, ff. 
 
 iota subscript, iv. 
 
 irregular adjectives, 380 ; nouns, 363; 
 MI verbs, 712; «>', 713, 859; 
 in\xi, 794, 861; olha, 766, 857; 
 ef/it, 739, 860; </)»7/x/, 714, 858. 
 
 Labials, 189, 1. 
 
 lingual stems, 208, 220. 
 
 liquids, 189, 2 ; liquid stems of the 
 
 consonant declension, 220. 
 liquid verbs, 252, 257, 832, 833; 
 
 fourtli class, 596. 
 
 Manner, means, etc., 249. 
 
 metathesis, p. 215^. 
 
 measure and material, 369, 4, 5. 
 
 middle voice, 31. 
 
 mood, 16, a\ sign subj., 553, obs*; 
 opt., 554, a, 574 ; finite and de- 
 pendent, 552, a\ sequence of, 
 581, 578, 691. 
 
 mutes, 189, if. 
 
 Negatives, 422 ; w. imv., 421 ; w. 
 the infin., p. 170^; in exhorta- 
 tions, 557 ; in final clauses, 579 ; 
 in object clauses, 581 ; in condi- 
 tions, 664 ; in indirect discourse, 
 768, 3; double negatives, p. 228^ 
 2661. 
 
 neuter plural subject, 65. 
 
 nominative case, syntax of, 36, 84. 
 
 nouns, 5 ; A declension feminine, 
 41, masculine, 4S i declension. 
 
 61 ; consonant declension, see 
 consonants; contract, 165, 170; 
 irregular, 363 ; primitives, 476, 
 IF. ; denominatives, 481, f. ; nom- 
 inative subject, 36 ; pronouns, 
 390, ff. 
 
 number : nouns, 6 ; verbs, 18. 
 
 numerals, table of, 445 ; declension, 
 446, ff. 
 
 declension of nouns, 61, 816. 
 
 object clauses, 581, 589. 
 
 objective genitive, 369, 3. 
 
 optative, active, 554 ; middle and 
 passive, 576 ; wish, 563 ; po- 
 tential, 565 ; final clauses, 579 ; 
 verbs of fearing, 581 ; w. verbs of 
 striving, 589 ; in less vivid future 
 conditions, 690. 
 
 orders of mutes, 189, 3. 
 
 oxytones, ix. 3, a ) xiv. 
 
 Palatals, 189 ; palatal stems, 208. 
 
 participles, 228 ; declension : Q verbs, 
 229, 822; contract, 242; MI 
 verbs, 619,,$^; 623,823; accent, 
 230 ; tense, 23/ ; attributive, 235 ; 
 circumstantial, 239 ; supplemen- 
 tary, 243, ff. ; Rev. 281 ; condi- 
 tional, 715 ; indirect discourse, 
 776, ff. 
 
 particular suppositions, 663. 
 
 passive voice, 32, 343 ; aorist pas- 
 sive, 344 ; aorist participle, 350 ; 
 second passive system, 345, 652, 
 653, ff. 
 
 perfect, 311 ; stem, 309 ; pluperfect, 
 314; stem, 315 ; enlarged, 521 ; 
 second perfect and pluperfect, 
 310, 542, ff., of XeiVoj, 835 ; mid- 
 die and passive, 317: ofXvw, 829; 
 mute themes, 325, 757, 837, ff. 
 
 person, 17. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 455 
 
 person concerued, nouns expressing, 
 481. 
 
 personal endings, 24, ff. ; primary, 
 28 ; secondary, 116 ; infinitive, 
 115 ; imperative, 417 ; subjunc- 
 tive, 553, obs.^; optative, 554, a. 
 
 personal pronouns, 390, ff. ; posi- 
 tion, 369, 6, obs. ; review, 454. 
 
 potential indicative, 666. 
 
 potential optative, 565. 
 
 predicate position, 81 ; noun, 84. 
 
 prefiKes, 474, inseparable, 498. 
 
 prepositions in composition, 136, 
 143 ; uses of, 137, ff. ; with ob- 
 lique cases, 139-142. 
 
 present indicative, 20 ; present stem, 
 23 ; present tense, 29 ; present 
 system, 351, 1 ; historical, p. 77'^- 
 
 primitives, 473 ; nouns, 476, ff. ; 
 adjectives, 483, f. 
 
 principal parts of a sentence, 55 ; 
 of verbs, 353, a ; 534 ; of depo- 
 nents, 361. 
 
 privative a, 498, obs.^ 
 
 proclitics, 101. 
 
 pronouns, personal, 390, ff. ; inten- 
 sive, 164, ff. ; reflexive, 402, ff. ; 
 reciprocal, 405, f. ; possessive, 
 407 ; position of possessive and 
 reflexive, 79; demonstrative, 175, 
 177, 179 ff. ; interrogative and 
 indefinite, 434, ff., 441, ff. ; rela- 
 tive, 178, 184, 439, ff. ; indefinite 
 relative, 436, f. 
 
 pronunciation of vowels, iii. ; con- 
 sonants, vi. 
 
 protasis, 661. 
 
 punctuation, xv. 
 
 Quality, nouns expressing, 482. 
 quantity of syllables, viii., 1, 2: 
 questions, 443 ; deliberative, 561 ; 
 indirect, 768, 2. 
 
 Reading, the art of, 96, ff. ; direc- 
 tions for, 97, ff. ; exercises for 
 sight translation, 132, i. ii., 284, 
 ii. iii., 457, i. ii., 491, 502, 503, 
 514, 755, 802, 812; selections: 
 The palaces of Cyrus and Arta- 
 xerxes, 107 ; The march of Cyrus 
 through Lycaouia, 285 ; The arri- 
 val of Cyrus's fleet, 389 ; A halt 
 and numbering at Celaenae, 450 ; 
 Greek for retroversion, 458, 
 606. 
 
 recessive accent, xiii. 
 
 reduplication, 303 ff. ; Attic, 545 ; 
 of themes, 618 ; in «', 697- 
 
 reflexive pronouns, 402, ff. 
 
 relative pronouns, 178, 184; assimi- 
 lation, 439. 
 
 relative and temporal clauses, 699, 
 ff. ; rel. clauses expressing pur- 
 pose, 716. 
 
 resemblance, union, and approach, 
 225. 
 
 result, formation of nouns of, 480 ; 
 clauses of, 719. 
 
 review of nouns, vowel declension, 
 126, ff. ; consonant declension, 
 280; pronouns, 276, 454; con- 
 traction, 275 ; the active verb, 
 129, 279, 452 ; middle and pas- 
 sive, 452 ; contract nouns and 
 adjectives, 275, 451 ; tenses of 
 completed action, the passive 
 voice, 452 ; comparison of adjec- 
 tives, 453 ; pronouns, 454 ; nu- 
 merals, 455 ; syntax. 456 ; elfxi, 
 451, 713; 8ida>fxi, laTrjfxi, and 
 TiBrffii, 751 ; formation of words, 
 743, ff. ; second tense system, 
 749 ; conditions, 750. 
 
 rough breathing, ii. ; mutes, 189, 
 1. 
 
 roots, 471. 
 
456 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Second aorist, 203 ; second aorist 
 stem, 581 ; of the MI form in Q 
 verbs, 731 ; second perfect and 
 pluperfect, 310, 542, ff . ; second 
 passive system, 345, 652, ff. 
 
 sentence arrangement, 55. 
 
 semivowels, 189, 2. 
 
 separation, 410. 
 
 sequence of moods, 578, 579, a; 
 691. 
 
 sibilant, 189, 2. 
 
 specification, 338. 
 
 stem, verb, 22 ; noun, 40. 
 
 subject, 36 ; of infinitive, 121. 
 
 subjective genitive, 369, 2. 
 
 subjunctive, Q verbs, 552, ff. ; mid- 
 dle and passive, 575 ; exhortations, 
 557; prohibitions, 559; interrog- 
 ative, 561 ; final clauses, 579 ; 
 used vividly for optative, 579, a -, 
 w. verbs of fearing, 581 ; object 
 clauses with oTrcof, 589 ; present 
 general suppositions, 680, ff. ; in 
 vivid future conditions, 687. 
 
 subscript iota, iv. 
 
 substitution of conditions, 715. 
 
 sufax, 474. 
 
 syllabic augment, 113. 
 
 syllables, vii. 1, 2, 3, 4. 
 
 syncope, p. 142^; syncopated nouns, 
 362. 
 
 synopsis, MI verbs, 846. 
 
 systems, 351, ff. ; second aorist, 530, 
 ff. ; second perfect, 543, ff. ; 2d 
 passive, 652, ff. 
 
 Table of numerals, 445 ; of personal 
 endings, 28, 116, 417. 
 
 temporal augment, 113. j 
 
 temporal clauses, 704, ff. J 
 
 tense, 16, 6 ; primary and secondary, | 
 110 ; stem, 23 ; tense systems, 
 351, ff. ; of dependent moods, 
 567, f. 
 thematic vowel, 25. 
 theme, 22 ; in e, 253 ; 522. 
 transliteration, 87, ff. 
 
 Variable vowel, 25, 553, obsH; 
 554, a. 
 
 verbs, G, 21, 252 ; compound, 143; 
 contract, 154; liquid, 252, 257; 
 classes of verbs, 515, ff . ; active 
 verb, 825-828; middle and pas- 
 sive, 825-831; MI verbs, 619, 
 712, 729, 737, ff., 794 : see the 
 Greek index forthe different verbs; 
 classes of, 730 ; p. 304^ ; 617, ff. ; 
 conjugation, 846-863; formation, 
 denominatives, 492, f., 612. 
 
 vocative, A declension, feminine 
 nouns, 41 d; A declension mas- 
 culine nouns, 49, obs. 1, 2, 3 ; 
 lingual stems, 208, 219 ; syntax 
 of, 56. 
 
 voice, 1 6 ; active, 30 ; middle, 31 ; 
 passive, 32. 
 
 vowel gradation, 507. 
 
 vowels, iii. ; stem, lengthened, 198, 
 520. 
 
 Wishes, 563 ; unattained, 669, ff. 
 
 words : simple and compound, 133, 
 472, 494, ff, 499, ff. ; grouping, 
 510, ff. ; formation, 471, ff. ; bor- 
 rowed and cognate, 504. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 This Index is intended to serve merely as a supplement to the English Index. 
 For most of the Greek words references can be found in the preceding Greek- 
 English vocabulary. 
 
 a, privative, 498, obs\ 
 
 &y-, 513. 
 
 dyaGo's, comparison, 380, 1. 
 
 ayyeXXw, 257, 832, 833 ; pert", mid. 
 system, 840. 
 
 aUrxpos, comparison, 379, 3. 
 
 al(rxvv», 598, 1 ; synt., 603: 
 
 dK-, 616. 
 
 dKlvoucT|s, No. 11, 645. 
 
 oAXTiXcov, 405. 
 
 dXXos, 163 ; group, 629. 
 
 ap,a, group, 685. 
 
 d}jL€Cv(i>v, 380, 1; synonymes, 388. 
 
 av, gen. uses, 566, 677; w. opt., 565 ; 
 w. indie, 666 ; with temporal 
 pai-ticles, 692 ; in conditions, 668, 
 681, 687, 690 ; for emphasis, 804, 
 N. 16 ; dropped when subjv. be- 
 comes opt , 787, 2, a. 
 
 dvTJp, 362. 
 
 dp-, 764. 
 
 'dp\i.a, 214, No. 7- 
 
 dpTrdt«,^200; perfect passive, 325. 
 
 ap\-f 526. 
 
 dnrCs, 227, No. 8. 
 
 airds, 820; 11868,164, 3, 2, 3. 
 
 aXPt, 705. 
 
 Paivci), 631, 3; synonyme, 741. 
 
 Poo-iXevs, 290 ; without article, 297. 
 poX-, 551. 
 Povs, 363. 
 
 7 nasal, vi., 189, 2. 
 
 •y, dropped before -yy-, p. 320^. 
 
 •yi-yvwo-KCi) ; 2d aor. tyvwv, 731, 2 ; 
 
 856. 
 •yvft)-, 660. 
 yvvi\, 363. 
 
 8ttp€iKds, 675, vocab.. No. 12. 
 
 -Be, local ending, enclitic, 462. 
 
 861, synonyme, 784. 
 
 86CKvi5p.i, 737 ; synopsis, 846 ; inflec- 
 tion, 850. 
 
 8etKvi)s, declension, 823. 
 
 Sr\\6s cljjii, construction, 247, 777' 
 
 hr\K6(a, 154, 3; imperative, 429; 
 conjugation, 845. 
 
 8180VS, declension, 643, 823. 
 
 8t8«jti, 641 ; synopsis, 846; conju 
 gation, 848. 
 
 80-, 647. 
 
 8oKecD, 253, 522; construction, 725. 
 
 8vva|iai, 625 ; accent of subjv. and 
 opt., p. 250'^. 
 
 8v«, 2d aor. ^8tjv, 738 ; synopsis, 
 846; conjugation, 854. 
 
458 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 c as augment or reduplication, before 
 
 a vowel, 649 ; e changed lo a in 
 
 liquid themes, etc., 650. 
 c clianged to a in mute themes, 650, 
 
 a, b; in 2 aor. pass, stem, 654, a. 
 eavToO, 403. 
 IPt,v, (). 2521 ; 731, 1. 
 4'"yva)v, 651, 731, 2; conjugation, 
 
 856. 
 I7C&, 390, ff. 
 
 €l as augment or reduplication, 697- 
 €t0€, in wishes, 669. 
 cIhiC, 287, ff. ; 300, 324; subj. and 
 
 opt., 573, 859. 
 ctfii, 739, a ; 860 ; present with 
 
 force of the future, 739, b. 
 etirov, construction, 769, ff. ; syno- 
 
 nyme, 772. 
 cIs, declension, 447* 
 Ik, kl 46. 
 4k€ivos, 177, 180. 
 6K«v, 265, 824. 
 4|jLavrov, 403. 
 i-TTi, 4<t»', 194, a. 
 
 lirio-TajjLai, 625 ; construction, 778, a. 
 lirpiafjiTjv, 846, 851. 
 eo-Ti, omitted, 790. 
 eo-Ti, 104, 3. 
 €v8a(|x«v, 266, 824. 
 evvoia, 42, b \ 160. 
 €vpos, 329. 
 
 €x», with an adv., p. 192^ 
 6«s, while, until, 705. 
 c«s, morning, 364. 
 
 t«i»j contraction, 342. 
 
 il8€'a>s, 459, 4. 
 
 liSvs, comparison, 379, 1. 
 
 liflJiai, 794. 
 
 -0€v, -81, 462. 
 ©»poi 214, No. 6. 
 
 -iTj, mood suffix, 574. 
 iilHLi, 794, 861. 
 Ik-, 639. 
 tva, 579. 
 
 liriretis, 296*, No. 9. 
 to-Tos, declension, 623, 823. 
 to-TTjui, 618 ; synopsis, 846 ; conju- 
 gation, 619, ff.; 847, 851, 855. 
 lX0vs, 290. 
 
 K, etc., dropped before 0, 309, a. 
 
 Ka0Tijiai, 794, 862. 
 
 Kal . . . KttC, iutens., 109, p. 86i. 
 
 Kttl -yap, 372. 
 
 KaK6s, comparison, 379, 4 > kukms, 
 
 459, 1. 
 KoX-, 674. 
 
 KttXos, comparison, 380, 2. 
 Kcijiai, 794, 863. 
 kcXcvo), perfect middle, 325, 836. 
 Kc'pas, 331. 
 Kpa-, 696. 
 Kpe'as, 329. 
 
 \a71is, 363, 364. 
 
 Xav0dv«, construction, 603. 
 
 \6Ya>, construction, 725, 769, c. 
 
 Xefirw, class, 527, ff. ; 2d aor. and 
 2d perf. and pluperf. act., 531, 
 547, 553, 554 ; perf. mid. system, 
 837; cognate words of, 541. 
 
 Xv», present ind., 20 ; conjugation, 
 825-831 ; Xtiwv, XiJo-ds, 229, ff. ; 
 Xv0€(s, 350 ; XcXvKtis, 326, 822 ; 
 cognate words of, 541. 
 
 -J1-, dropped before -y.^-, p. 219^; 
 
 p. 3201. 
 jiaK-, 710. 
 fie^as, 299 ; comparison, 380, 3; 
 
 fie-yo, ixe^dXa, 460. 
 Htcf^wv, dec!., 824. 
 H6V . . . 86', 109. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 459 
 
 fUxP^i 705. 
 
 ,1^; p. 1702; 422,428. 
 
 )X^TT)p, 362. 
 
 Ml verbs, 286 ; Xtm\)ii., 618 ; 8C8w|Jii, 
 641 ; T10T1HI, 729 ; review of lo-rqjii, 
 8(8(i>)ii, and riQi][it., 751, fF. ; 8€i- 
 Kvv|ii and 68vv, 737, 738 ; second 
 aorists of the Mi form in 12 verbs, 
 731, If. ; for irregular Mi verbs, 
 see English Index. 
 
 -V-, dropped in the perfect and first 
 passive sj^stems, p. 241^. 
 
 -V, movable, 100 ; dropped before op, 
 216 ; -vTtti, -vTo, 325. 
 
 vaCs, 363, No 10. 
 
 vo|iit«, 608, 4 ; construction, 723. 
 
 vovs, 170, 1. 
 
 -VT, -v8, -v0, dropped before <r, 
 215. 
 
 6'8€, 176, 181, 820. 
 
 ot8a, 766, 857 ; construction, 
 
 778, a. 
 otonoi, construction, 723. 
 d jjL€v ... d 86, 182. 
 dirXiTTis, 48, No. 1. 
 oirws, 579 ; oirws \i.i\y 589. 
 6's, 178, 184,820. 
 oo-Tis, 437. 
 
 OV, OVK, O^, 68. 
 
 oiJ, 390, ff. 
 
 ou8€is, 447, 6. 
 
 oiJtos, 175, 179, 180, 181, 820. 
 
 irats, 271. 
 
 irds, 265, 824. 
 
 TraT-^p, 362. 
 
 ir«(0«, ire'ireiKa, 309, a; perf. mid. 
 
 system, 839. 
 ireXTacnis, 52, No. 2. 
 me-, 594. 
 irCirrw, cognate words of, 541. 
 
 irXa-, 734. 
 
 irXeCwv, 380, 4 ; declension, 382. 
 
 ttXtjptjs, 335. 
 
 iToicw, 154, 2 ; 242 ; imperative, 
 
 429 ; conjugation, 844. 
 iroiwv, declension, 242, 2. 
 iroXt'iiios, ] 09 ; synonymes, 709. 
 TToXis, 290. 
 
 iroXiTTjs, voc. 49, obs^. 
 iroXv, iroXXd, 460. 
 iroXvs, 299 ; comparison, 380, 4 
 irovs, 363. 
 irpiv, 707. 
 
 peo), 527, 528. 
 
 -0-- dropped, 27, 111, b. 
 
 -<ra = -to, p. S9\ 2001. 
 
 <raarrov, 403. 
 
 o-Tpa-, 773. 
 
 o-TpaTid, 41 ; synonymes, 214. 
 
 o-Tpcirrds, 174, No. 4. 
 
 o-v, 390, ff. 
 
 SwKpdTTis, 329. 
 
 TciTTw, 616 ; perf. mid. system, 838. 
 
 Tttxvs, 298 ; comparison, 379, 2. 
 
 TCTTapcs, declension, 447. 
 
 TI-, 785. 
 
 t(6t)p,i, 729 ; synopsis, 846 ; inflec- 
 tion, 849, 853. 
 
 Tip.do), 154, 1 ; imperative, 429 ; con- 
 jugation, 843. 
 
 n\i(av, declension, 242. 
 
 tCs, tIs, 435, 441, ff. 
 
 TORTUS, 52, No. 3. 
 
 Tp€is, declension, 447. 
 
 «j>a-, 727. 
 
 <j>aivw, 2 aor. pass., 652. 
 (|>av€pds cl|j.i, construction, 247, 777. 
 <|>Tiji£, 714, 858 ; construction, 723 ; 
 w. oi, p. 306^ ; synonyme, 772. 
 
460 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 <|>0<S.va>, construction, 245. ^cXiov, 174, No. 5. 
 <i)CXo«, group, 797. 
 
 ft verbs, 21, 286. 
 
 X€Cp, 227, 821. JJv, declension, 232, 823. 
 
 Xpaonai, contraction, 366. «s ; w. participle, 241, 802, n. 4; adv. 
 XpTJ; w. the infinitive, 721; syn- and prep., 297 ; result, p. 320^. 
 
 oujme, 784. «erT€, in result clauses, 71&. 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 15 
 
 ■"FEBTTeS -11 AM 
 
 T r» 91 A-60m-4,'64 
 ^eI555910)476B 
 
 funeral Library . 
 
7J0V- <^^^' 
 
 VB 00113 
 
 3^0X01^ -Tf/"' 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY